| 30.4.2004 | EN | Official Journal of the European Communities | L 152/1 | Pomembno pravno obvestilo |
| COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 2004/73/EC | |
| of 29 April 2004 | |
| adapting to technical progress for the twenty-ninth time Council Directive 67/548/EEC on the approximation of the laws, regulations and administrative provisions relating to the classification, packaging and labelling of dangerous substances | |
| (Text with EEA relevance) | |
| THE COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES, | |
| Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, | |
| Having regard to Council Directive 67/548/EEC of 27 June 1967 on the approximation of the laws, regulations and administrative provisions relating to the classification, packaging and labelling of dangerous substances (1), and in particular Article 28 thereof, | |
| Whereas: | |
| (1) | Annex I to Directive 67/548/EEC contains a list of dangerous substances, together with particulars of the classification and labelling of each substance. That list needs to be updated to include further notified new substances and further existing substances as well adapting the existing entries to technical progress such as setting environmental concentration limits for certain substances. Accordingly it is also necessary to delete entries for certain substances and to split some entries because the classification no longer applies to all the substances under those entries. The labelling of substances containing 1,3-butadiene should be changed in order to reflect that that substance will be classified as a mutagen by the present Directive. | |
| (2) | Annex V to Directive 67/548/EEC lays down the methods for the determination of the physicochemical properties, toxicity and ecotoxicity of substances and preparations. It is appropriate to amend that Annex in order to obtain a reduction to a minimum of the number of animals used for experimental purposes, in accordance with Council Directive 86/609/EEC of 24 November 1986 on the approximation of laws, regulations and administrative provisions of the Member States regarding the protection of animals used for experimental and other scientific purposes (2). The methods for sub-chronic oral toxicity in Chapters B.1, B.4, B.5, B.31 and B.35 should be revised accordingly. Furthermore, Chapter B.42 should be added to Annex V in order to make available a refined method on sub-chronic oral toxicity. Finally, Chapter A.21 on physico-chemical properties, Chapter B.43 on sub-chronic oral toxicity and Chapters C.21 to C.24 on environmental toxicity should be added in order to allow for the determination of properties which are not yet sufficiently covered by the methods in Annex V. | |
| (3) | The measures provided for in this Directive are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee on the Adaptation to Technical Progress of the Directives for the Elimination of Technical Barriers to Trade with Dangerous Substances and Preparations, | |
| HAS ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE: | |
| Article 1 | |
| Directive 67/548/EEC is amended as follows: | |
| (1) | Annex I is amended as follows: | (a) | note K in the foreword is replaced by the text set out in Annex 1 A; | (b) | the entries corresponding to the entries set out in Annex 1B to this Directive are replaced by the text set out in that Annex; | (c) | the entries set out in Annex 1C to this Directive are inserted in accordance with the order of the entries set out in Annex I to Directive 67/548/EEC; | (d) | the entries with index numbers 604-050-00-X, 607-050-00-8, 607-171-00-6 and 613-130-00-3 are deleted; | (e) | the entry with index number 048-002-00-0 is replaced by the entries with index numbers 048-002-00-0 and 048-011-00-X set out in Annex 1D to this Directive; | (f) | the entry with index number 609-006-00-3 is replaced by the entries with index numbers 609-006-00-3 and 609-065-00-5 set out in Annex 1D to this Directive; | (g) | the entry with index number 612-039-00-6 is replaced by the entries with index numbers 612-039-00-6 and 612-207-00-9 as set out in Annex 1D. | |
| (2) | Annex V is amended as follows: | (a) | the text set out in Annex 2A to this Directive is added as Chapter A.21; | (b) | chapter B.1bis is replaced by the text set out in Annex 2B to this Directive; | (c) | chapter B.1tris is replaced by the the text set out in Annex 2C to this Directive; | (d) | chapter B.4 is replaced by the text set out in Annex 2D to this Directive; | (e) | chapter B.5 is replaced by the text set out in Annex 2E to this Directive; | (f) | chapter B.31 is replaced by the text set out in Annex 2F to this Directive; | (g) | chapter B.35 is replaced by the text set out in Annex 2G to this Directive; | (h) | the text set out in Annex 2H to this Directive is added as Chapter B.42 and B.43; | (i) | the text set out in Annex 2I to this Directive is added as Chapter C.21 to C.24. | |
| Article 2 | |
| 1. Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive by 31 October 2005 at the latest. They shall forthwith communicate to the Commission the text of those provisions and a correlation table between those provisions and this Directive. When Member States adopt those provisions, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or be accompanied by such a reference on the occasion of their official publication. Member States shall determine how such reference is to be made. | |
| 2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive. | |
| Article 3 | |
| This Directive shall enter into force on the twentieth day following its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union. | |
| Article 4 | |
| This Directive is addressed to the Member States. | |
| Done at Brussels, 29 April 2004. | |
| For the Commission | |
| Margot WALLSTRÖM | |
| Member of the Commission | |
| (1) OJ 196,16.8.1967, p. 1. Directive as last amended by Commission Directive 2001/59/EC (OJ L 225, 6.8.2001, p. 1) | |
| (2) OJ L 358, 18.12.1986, p. 1. Directive as last amended by Directive 2003/65/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 230,16.9.2003, p. 32). | |
| ANNEX 1A | |
| Note K: | |
| The classification as a carcinogen or mutagen need not apply if it can be shown that the substance contains less than 0.1 % w/w 1,3-butadiene (Einecs No 203-450-8). If the substance is not classified as a carcinogen or mutagen, at least the S-phrases (2-)9-16 should apply. This note applies to certain complex oil-derived substances in Annex I. | |
| Index No | chemical name | Notes related to substances | EC No | CAS No | Classification | Labelling | Concentration Limits | Notes related to preparations | |
| 006-005-00-4 | thiram | tetramethylthiuram disulphide | | 205-286-2 | 137-26-8 | Xn; R20/22-48/22 | Xi; R36/38 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/22-36/38-43-48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/22-36/38-43-48/22-50/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R36/38-43-48/22-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xn, N; R43-48/22-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi, N; R43-50/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi, N; R43-51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: N; R51/53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52/53 | | |
| 006-006-01-7 | hydrogen cyanide...% | hydrocyanic acid...% | B | 200-821-6 | 74-90-8 | T+; R26/27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)7/9-16-36/37-38-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-51-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R23/24/25-51-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T, N; R23/24/25-52-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/21/22-52-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C< 0,25 %:Xn; R20/21/22 | | |
| 006-012-00-2 | ziram (ISO) | zinc bis dimethyldithiocarbamate | | 205-288-3 | 137-30-4 | T+; R26 | Xn; R22-48/22 | Xi; R37-41 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 22-26-37-41-43-48/22-50/53 | S: (1/2-)22-26-28-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R22-26-37-41-43-48/22-50-53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R26-37-41-43-48/22-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: T+, N; R26-41-43-48/22-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R26-36-43-50-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R23-36-43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: T, N; R23-43-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R20-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn, N; R20-51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 006-021-00-1 | linuron (ISO) | 3-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1-methoxy-1-methylurea | E | 206-356-5 | 330-55-2 | Repr. Cat. 2; R61 | Repr. Cat. 3; | R62 Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Xn; R22-48/22 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 61-22-40-48/22-62-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 006-044-00-7 | isoproturon | 3-(4-isopropylphenyl)-1,1-dimethylurea | | 251-835-4 | 34123-59-6 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 40-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-60-61 | C ≥ 2,5 %: Xn, N; R40-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn, N; R40-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: N; R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 006-072-00-X | S-benzyl N,N-dipropylthiocarbamate | prosulfocarb | | 401-730-6 | 52888-80-9 | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 006-089-00-2 | chlorine dioxide | | 233-162-8 | 10049-04-4 | O; R8 | R6 | T+; R26 | C; R34 | N; R50 | O; T+; N | R: 6-8-26-34-50 | S: (1/2-)23-26-28-36/37/39-38-45-61 | C ≥ 5 %: T+; N; R26-34-50 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: T+; N; R26-36/37/38-50 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; N; R23-36/37/38-50 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; N; R23-50 | 0,02 % ≤ C < 0,2 %: Xn; N; R20-50 | | |
| 006-089-01-X | chlorine dioxide ... % | B | 233-162-8 | 10049-04-4 | T; R25 | C; R34 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 25-34-50 | S: (1/2-)23-26-28-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T; N; R25-34-50 | 10 % ≤ C <25 %: C, N; R22-34-50 | 3 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn; N; R22-36/37/38-50 | 0,3 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xi; R36 | | |
| 007-001-00-5 | ammonia, anhydrous | | 231-635-3 | 7664-41-7 | R10 | T; R23 | C; R34 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 10-23-34-50 | S: (1/2-)9-16-26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23-34-50 | 5% ≤ C < 25%:T;R23-34 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn; R20-36/37/38 | | |
| 007-008-00-3 | hydrazine | E | 206-114-9 | 302-01-2 | R10 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T; R23/24/25 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-10-23/24/25-34-43-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R45-23/24/25-34-43-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R45-20/21/22-34-43-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 10 %: T, N; R45-20/21/22-36/38-43-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R45-43-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45 | | |
| 007-010-00-4 | sodium nitrite | | 231-832-4 | 7758-09-0 | O; R8 | T; R25 | N; R50 | O; T; N | R: 8-25-50 | S: (1/2-)45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R25-50 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R25 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn; R22 | | |
| 007-011-00-X | potassium nitrite | | 231-832-4 | 7758-09-0 | O; R8 | T; R25 | N; R50 | O; T; N | R: 8-25-50 | S: (1/2-)45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R25-50 | 5% ≤ C< 25 %:T; R25 | 1 % ≤ C< 5 %:Xn; R22 | | |
| 007-013-00-0 | 1,2-dimethylhydrazine | E | - | 540-73-8 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T; R23/24/25 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R45-23/24/25-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R45-20/21/22-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T; R45-52/53 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45 | | |
| 007-017-00-2 | isobutyl nitrite | E | 208-819-7 | 542-56-3 | F; R11 | Xn; R20/22 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | F; T | R: 11-20/22-45-68 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 007-027-00-7 | 1,6-bis(3,3-bis((1-methylpentylidenimino)propyl)ureido)hexane | | 420-190-2 | - | Xn; R21/22-48/21 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 21/22-34-43-48/21-50/53 | S: (1/2-)7-26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 008-003-00-9 | hydrogen peroxide solution ... % | B | 231-765-0 | 7722-84-1 | R5 | O; R8 | C; R35 | Xn; R20/22 | O; C | R: 5-8-20/22-35 | S: (1/2-)17-26-28-36/37/39-45 | C ≥ 70 %: C; R20/22-35 | 50 % ≤ C < 70 %: C; R20/22-34 | 35 % ≤ C < 50 %: Xn; R22-37/38-41 | 8 % ≤ C < 35 %: Xn; R22-41 | 5 % ≤ C< 8 %: Xi; R36 | Footnote: | C ≥ 70 %: R5, O; R8 | 50 % ≤ C < 70 %: O; R8 | | |
| 009-015-00-7 | sulphuryl difluoride | | 220-281-5 | 2699-79-8 | T; R23 | Xn; R48/20 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 23-48/20-50 | S: (1/2-)45-63-60-61 | | | |
| 015-002-00-7 | red phosphorus | | 231-768-7 | 7723-14-0 | F; R11 | R16 | R52-53 | F | R: 11-16-52/53 | S: (2-)7-43-61 | | | |
| 015-014-00-2 | tributyl phosphate | | 204-800-2 | 126-73-8 | Carc. Cat.3; R40 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R38 | Xn | R: 22-38-40 | S: (2-)36/37-46 | | | |
| 015-015-00-8 | tricresyl phosphate | tritolyl phosphate | o-o-o, o-o-m, o-o-p, o-m-m, o-m-p, o-p-p | C | 201-103-5 | 78-30-8 | T; R39/23/24/25 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 39/23/24/25-51/53 | S: (1/2-)20/21-28-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R39/23/24/25-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R39/23/24/25-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R39/23/24/25 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R68/20/21/22 | | |
| 015-016-00-3 | tricresyl phosphate | tritolyl phosphate | m-m-m, m-m-p, m-p-p, p-p-p | C | 201-105-6 | 78-32-0 | Xn; R21/22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-51/53 | S: (2-)28-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R21/22-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R21/22-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 015-020-00-5 | mevinphos (ISO) | 2-methoxycarbonyl-1-methylvinyl dimethyl phosphate | | 232-095-1 | 7786-34-7 | T+; R27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)23-28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 7 %: T+, N; R27/28-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R24/25-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C<1 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,000025 % ≤ C < 0,00025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-021-00-0 | trichlorfon (ISO) | dimethyl 2,2,2-trichloro-1-hydroxyethylphosphonate | | 200-149-3 | 52-68-6 | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi, N; R43-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-027-00-3 | sulfotep (ISO) | O,O,O,O-tetraethyl | dithiopyrophosphate | | 222-995-2 | 3689-24-5 | T+; R27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)23-28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 7 %: T+, N; R27/28-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R24/25-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-032-00-0 | prothoate (ISO) | O,O-diethyl | isopropylcarbamoylmethyl | phosphorodithioate | | 218-893-2 | 2275-18-5 | T+: R27/28 | R52-53 | T+ | R: 27/28-52/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-61 | | | |
| 015-033-00-6 | phorate (ISO) | O,O-diethyl ethylthiomethyl | phosphorodithioate | | 206-052-2 | 298-02-2 | T+; R27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 7 %: T+, N; R27/28-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R24/25-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-034-00-1 | parathion (ISO) | O,O-diethyl O-4-nitrophenyl | phosphorothioate | | 200-271-7 | 56-38-2 | T+;R26/28 | T; 24-48/25 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 24-26/28-48/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R24-26/28-48/25-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R21-26/28-48/25-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10%: T+, N; R21-26/28-48/22-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C< 7 %:T, N; R21-23/25-48/22-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R23/25-48/22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R20/22-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn, N; R20/22-51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-035-00-7 | parathion - methyl (ISO) | O,O-dimethyl O-4-nitrophenyl | phosphorothioate | | 206-050-1 | 298-00-0 | R5 | R10 | T+; R26/28 | T; R24 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 5-10-24-26/28-48/22-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R24-26/28-48/22-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R21-26/28-48/22-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R21-26/28-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 7 %:T, N; R21-23/25-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R23/25-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R20/22-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn, N; R20/22-51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-041-00-X | malathion (ISO) | 1,2-bis (ethoxycarbonyl) ethyl | O,O-dimethyl phosphorodithioate | | 204-497-7 | 121-75-5 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)24-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-042-00-5 | chlorthion (common name not adopted by ISO) | O-(3-chloro-4-nitrophenyl) O,O-dimethyl phosphorothioate | | 207-902-5 | 500-28-7 | Xn; R20/21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/21/22-50/53 | S:(2-)13-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-047-00-2 | ethion (ISO) | O,O,O',O'-tetraethyl S,S'-methylenedi (phosphorodithioate) diethion | | 209-242-3 | 563-12-2 | T; R25 | Xn; R21 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 21-25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)25-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R21-25-50-53 | 3 % ≤C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,000025 % ≤ C < 0,00025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-052-00-X | fenchlorphos (ISO) | O,O-dimethyl O-2,4,5-trichlorophenyl phosphorothioate | | 206-082-6 | 299-84-3 | Xn; R21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-50/53 | S: (2-)25-36/37-60-61 | | | |
| 015-055-00-6 | naled (ISO) | 1,2-dibromo-2,2-dichloroethyl dimethyl phosphate | | 206-098-3 | 300-76-5 | Xn; R21/22 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R50 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-36/38-50 | S: (2-)36/37-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R21/22-36/38-50 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi, N; R36/38-50 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 20 %: N; R50 | | |
| 015-063-00-X | dioxathion (ISO) | 1,4-dioxan-2,3-diyl-O,O,O',O'-tetraethyl di(phosphorodithioate) | | 201-107-7 | 78-34-2 | T+; R26/28 | T; R24 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 24-26/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R24-26/28-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 25 %:T+,N; R21-26/28-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 7 %:T, N; R21-23/25-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R23/25-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R20/22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-065-00-0 | S-[2-(ethylsulphinyl)ethyl] O,O-dimethyl phosphorodithioate | | - | 2703-37-9 | T+; R26/27/28 | N; R51-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-51/53 | S: (1/2-)13-28-45-61 | | | |
| 015-076-00-0 | potasan | O,O-diethyl O-(4-methylcoumarin-7-yl) phosphorothioate | | - | 299-45-6 | T+; R26/27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)13-28-45-60-61 | C ≥ 7 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R23/24/25-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-078-00-1 | demeton-S-methylsulphon | S-2-ethylsulphonylethyl dimethyl phosphorothioate | | 241-109-5 | 17040-19-6 | T; R25 | Xn; R21 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 21-25-51/53 | S: (1/2-)22-28-36/37-45-61 | | | |
| 015-083-00-9 | bensulide (ISO) | O,O-diisopropyl 2-phenylsulphonylaminoethyl phosphorodithioate | | 212-010-4 | 741-58-2 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)24-36-60-61 | | | |
| 015-084-00-4 | chlorpyrifos (ISO) | O,O-diethyl O-3,5,6-trichloro-2-pyridyl phosphorothioate | | 220-864-4 | 2921-88-2 | T; R25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R25-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,000025 % ≤ C < 0,00025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-095-00-4 | methamidophos (ISO) | O,S-dimethyl phosphoramidothioate | | 233-606-0 | 10265-92-6 | T+; R26/28 | T; R24 | N; R50 | T+; N | R: 24-26/28-50 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-61 | | | |
| 015-096-00-X | oxydisulfoton; O O-diethyl S-[2-(ethylsulphinyl)ethyl] | phosphorodithioate | | 219-679-1 | 2497-07-6 | T+; R28 | T; R24 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 24-28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R24-28-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 25 %:T+, N; R21-28-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 7 %:T, N; R21-25-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R25-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %:Xn, N; R22-51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-097-00-5 | phenthoate (ISO) | ethyl 2-(dimethoxyphosphinothioylthio)-2-phenylacetate | | 219-997-0 | 2597-03-7 | Xn; R21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-36/37-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-100-00-X | phoxim (ISO) | α-(diethoxyphosphinothioylimino) | phenylacetonitrile | | 238-887-3 | 14816-18-3 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)36-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-101-00-5 | phosmet (ISO) | O,O-dimethyl phthalimidomethyl S-phosphorodithioate | | 211-987-4 | 732-11-6 | Xn; R21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-36/37-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-105-00-7 | triphenyl phosphite | | 202-908-4 | 101-02-0 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/38-50/53 | S: (2-)28-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R36/38-50/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi, N; R36/38-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5%:N; R51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 015-107-00-8 | ethoprophos (ISO) | ethyl-S,S-dipropyl | phosphorodithioate | | 236-152-1 | 13194-48-4 | T+; R26/27 | T; R25 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 25-26/27-43-50/53 | S:(1/2-)27/28-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 015-108-00-3 | bromophos (ISO) | O-4-bromo-2,5-dichlorophenyl | O,O-dimethyl phosphorothioate | | 218-277-3 | 2104-96-3 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)36-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-109-00-9 | crotoxyphos (ISO) | 1-phenylethyl 3-(dimethoxyphosphinyloxy) isocrotonate | | 231-720-5 | 7700-17-6 | T; R24/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 24/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R24/25-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-110-00-4 | cyanofenphos (ISO) | O-4-cyanophenyl O-ethyl phenylphosphonothioate | | - | 13067-93-1 | T; R25-39/25 | Xn; R21 | Xi; R36 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 21-25-36-39/25-51/53 | S: (1/2-)36/37-45-61 | | | |
| 015-114-00-6 | chlormephos (ISO) | S-chloromethyl O,O-diethyl phosphorodithioate | | 246-538-1 | 24934-91-6 | T+; R27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | | | |
| 015-115-00-1 | chlorthiophos (ISO) | | 244-663-6 | 21923-23-9 | T+; R28 | T; R24 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 24-28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | | | |
| 015-122-00-X | O-6-ethoxy-2-ethylpyrimidin-4-yl | O,O-dimethylphosphorothioate | etrimfos | | 253-855-9 | 38260-54-7 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-123-00-5 | fenamiphos (ISO) | ethyl-4-methylthio-m-tolyl | isopropyl phosphoramidate | | 244-848-1 | 22224-92-6 | T+; R28 | T; R24 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 24-28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)23-28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R24-28-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R21-28-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R21-25-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R25-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn, N; R22-51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-126-00-1 | heptenophos (ISO) | 7-chlorobicyclo(3.2.0)hepta-2,6-dien-6-yl dimethyl phosphate | | 245-737-0 | 23560-59-0 | T; R25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)23-28-37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R25-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-127-00-7 | iprobenfos | S-benzyl diisopropyl | phosphorothioate | | 247-449-0 | 26087-47-8 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-51/53 | S: (2-)61 | | | |
| 015-128-00-2 | IPSP | S-ethylsulphinylmethyl O,O-diisopropylphosphorodithioate | | - | 5827-05-4 | T+; R27 | T; R25 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 25-27-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R25-27-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R22-27-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R22-24-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R24-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R21-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn, N; R21-51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-129-00-8 | isofenphos (ISO) | O-ethyl O-2-isopropoxycarbonylphenyl-isopropylphosphoramidothioate | | 246-814-1 | 25311-71-1 | T; R24/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 24/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R24/25-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-131-00-9 | isoxathion (ISO) | O,O-diethyl O-5-phenylisoxazol-3-ylphosphorothioate | | 242-624-8 | 18854-01-8 | T; R24/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 24/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | | | |
| 015-132-00-4 | S-(chlorophenylthiomethyl) O,O-dimethylphosphorodithioate | methylcarbophenothione | | - | 953-17-3 | T; R24/25 | N; R50-53 | T;N | R: 24/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R24/25-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 6,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-133-00-X | piperophos (ISO) | S-2-methylpiperidinocarbonylmethyl-O,O-dipropyl phosphorodithioate | | - | 24151-93-7 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-134-00-5 | pirimiphos-methyl (ISO) | O-(2-diethylamino-6-methylpyrimidin-4-yl) O,O-dimethyl phosphorothioate | | 249-528-5 | 29232-93-7 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)60-61 | | | |
| 015-135-00-0 | O-(4-bromo-2-chlorophenyl) O-ethylS-propyl phosphorothioate | profenofos (ISO) | | 255-255-2 | 41198-08-7 | Xn; R20/21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/21/22-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-136-00-6 | trans-isopropyl-3-[[(ethylamino)methoxyfosfinothioyl]oxy]crotonate; isopropyl 3-[[(ethylamino)methoxyphosphinothioyl]oxy]isocrotonate | propetamphos (ISO) | | 250-517-2 | 31218-83-4 | T; R25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R25-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-138-00-7 | quinalphos (ISO) | O,O-diethyl-O-quinoxalin-2-yl | phosphorothioate | | 237-031-6 | 13593-03-8 | T; R25 | Xn; R21 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 21-25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)22-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R21-25-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-139-00-2 | S-tert-butylthiomethyl O,O-diethylphosphorodithioate | terbufos (ISO) | | 235-963-8 | 13071-79-9 | T+; R27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 7 %: T+, N; R27/28-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R24/25-50-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R21/22-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-154-00-4 | 2-chloroethylphosphonic acid ethephon | | 240-718-3 | 16672-87-0 | Xn; R20/21 | C; R34 | R52-53 | C | R: 20/21-34-52/53 | S: (1/2-)26-28-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C; R20/21-34-52/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 015-179-00-0 | UVCB condensation product of: | tetrakishydroxymethylphosphonium chloride, urea and distilled hydrogenated C16-18 tallow alkylamine | | 422-720-8 | 166242-53-1 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Xn; R22-48/22 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 22-34-40-43-48/22-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 016-001-00-4 | hydrogen sulphide | | 231-977-3 | 7783-06-4 | F+; R12 | T+; R26 | N; R50 | F+; T+; N | R: 12-26-50 | S: (1/2-)9-16-36-38- 45-61 | | | |
| 016-008-00-2 | ammonium polysulphides | | 232-989-1 | 9080-17-5 | R31 | C; R34 | N; R50 | C; N | R: 31-34-50 | S: (1/2-)26-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R31-34-50 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R31-34 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi; R31-36/38 | | |
| 016-012-00-4 | disulphur dichloride | sulfur monochloride | | 233-036-2 | 10025-67-9 | R14 | T; R25 | Xn; R20 | R29 | C; R35 | N; R50 | T; C; N | R: 14-20-25-29-35-50 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, C, N; R20-25-35-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R22-35 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: C; R22-34 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn; R22-36/37/38 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 016-013-00-X | sulphur dichloride | | 234-129-0 | 10545-99-0 | R14 | C; R34 | Xi; R37 | N; R50 | C; N | R: 14-34-37-50 | S: (1/2-)26-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R34-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 016-014-00-5 | sulphur tetrachloride | | - | 13451-08-6 | R14 | C; R34 | N; R50 | C; N | R: 14-34-50 | S: (1/2-)26-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R34-50 | 10 ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34 | 5 ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 016-021-00-3 | methanethiol | methyl mercaptan | | 200-822-1 | 74-93-1 | F+; R12 | T; R23 | N; R50-53 | F+; T; N | R: 12-23-50/53 | S: (2-)16-25-60-61 | | | |
| 016-023-00-4 | dimethyl sulphate | E | 201-058-1 | 77-78-1 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | T+; R26 | T; R25 | C; R34 | R43 | T+ | R: 45-25-26-34-43-68 | S: 53-45 | C ≥ 25 %: T+; R45-R25-R26-R34-R43-R68 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+; R45-R22-R26-R34-R43-R68 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+; R45-R22-R26-R36/37/38-R43-R68 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T; R45-R22-R23-R36/37/38-R43-R68 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T; R45-R22-R23-R43-R68 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: T; R45-R23-R43-R68 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-R20-R68 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: T; R45-R68 | | |
| 016-059-00-0 | N,N,N',N'-tetramethyldithiobis(ethylene)dia mine dihydrochloride | | 405-300-9 | 17339-60-5 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R36 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-36-43-50/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37-60-61 | | | |
| 017-003-00-8 | barium chlorate | | 236-760-7 | 13477-00-4 | O; R9 | Xn; R20/22 | N; R51-53 | O; Xn; N | R: 9-20/22-51/53 | S: (2-) 13-27-61 | | | |
| 017-004-00-3 | potassium chlorate | | 223-289-7 | 3811-04-9 | O; R9 | Xn; R20/22 | N; R51-53 | O; Xn; N | R: 9-20/22-51/53 | S: (2-)13-16-27-61 | | | |
| 017-005-00-9 | sodium chlorate | | 231-887-4 | 7775-09-9 | O; R9 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | O; Xn; N | R: 9-22-51/53 | S: (2-) 13-17-46-61 | | | |
| 017-011-00-1 | sodium hypochlorite, solution ... % Cl active | B | 231-668-3 | 7681-52-9 | C; R34 | R31 | N; R50 | C; N | R: 31-34-50 | S: (1/2-)28-45-50-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R31-34-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R31-34 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R31-36/38 | | |
| 017-012-00-7 | calcium hypochlorite | | 231-908-7 | 7778-54-3 | O; R8 | Xn; R22 | R31 | C; R34 | N; R50 | O; C; N | R: 8-22-31-34-50 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R22-34-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34 | 3 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R37/38-41 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xi; R36 | | |
| 024-001-00-0 | chromium (VI) trioxide | E | 215-607-8 | 1333-82-0 | O; R9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T+; R26 | T; R24/25-48/23 | C; R35 | R42/43 | N; R50-53 | O; T+; N | R: 45-46-9-24/25-26-35-42/43-48/23-62-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R24/25-26-35-42/43-45-46-48/23-50/53-62 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R21/22-26-35-42/43-45-46-48/23-51/53-62 | 7 % ≤ C< 10 %: T+, N; R21/22-26-34-42/43-45-46-48/20-51/53-62 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R21/22-23-34-42/43-45-46-48/20-51/53-62 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T,N; R21/22-23-36/37/38-42/43-45-46-48/20-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R23-36/37/38-42/43-45-46-48/20-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R23-36/37/38-42/43-45-46-48/20-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R20-45-46-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R20-45-46 | | |
| 024-002-00-6 | potassium dichromate | E | 231-906-6 | 7778-50-9 | O; R8 | Carc. Cat. 2: R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | T+; R26 | T; R25-48/23 | Xn; R21 | C; R34 R42/43 | N; 50-53 | T+; N; O | R: 45-46-60-61-8-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-34-42/43-48/23-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46- 60-61-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,2 %: T; R45-46-20 | 3 | |
| 024-003-00-1 | ammonium dichromate | E | 232-143-1 | 7789-09-5 | E; R2 | O; R8 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | T+; R26 | T; R25-48/23 | Xn; R21 | C; R34 R42/43 | N; R50-53 | E; T+; N | R: 45-46-60-61-2-8-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-50/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46-60-61-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,2 %: T; R45-46-20 | 3 | |
| 024-004-00-7 | sodium dichromate anhydrate | E | 234-190-3 | 10588-01-9 | O; R8 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | T+; R26 | T; R25-48/23 | Xn; R21 | C; R34 | R42/43 | N; 50-53 | T+; N; O | R: 45-46-60-61-8-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-34-42/43-48/23-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46-60-61-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,2 %: T; R45-46-20 | 3 | |
| 024-004-01-4 | sodium dichromate, dihydrate | E | 234-190-3 | 7789-12-0 | O; R8 | Carc. Cat.2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | T+; R26 | T; R25-48/23 | Xn; R21 | C; R34 | R42/43 | N; R50-53 | T+; N; O | R: 45-46-60-61-8-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-34-42/43-48/23-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46-60-61-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,2 %: T; R45-46-20 | 3 | |
| 024-011-00-5 | ammonium bis(1-(3,5-dinitro-2-oxidophenylazo)-3-(N-phenylcarbamoyl)-2-naphtholato)chromate(1-) | | 400-110-2 | - | F; R11 | N; R50-53 | F; N | R: 11-50/53 | S: (2-)33-60-61 | | | |
| 024-018-00-3 | sodium chromate | E | 231-889-5 | 7775-11-3 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat.2; R60-61 | T+; R26 | T; R25-48/23 | Xn; R21 C; R34 | R42/43 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 45-46-60-61-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-21-25-26-34-42/43-48/23-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-34-42/43-48/23-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-36/37/38-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-46-60-61-23-42/43-48/20-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46-60-61-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43-52/53 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46-20-42/43 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,2 %: T; R45-46-20 | 3 | |
| 027-004-00-5 | cobalt dichloride | E | 231-589-4 | 7646-79-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R49 | Xn; R22 | R42/43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 49-22-42/43-50/53 | S: (2-)22-53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R49-22-42/43-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R49-22-42/43-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R49-42/43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R49-52/53 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R49 | 1 | |
| 027-005-00-0 | cobalt sulphate | E | 233-334-2 | 10124-43-3 | Carc. Cat. 2; R49 | Xn; R22 | R42/43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 49-22-42/43-50/53 | S: (2-)22-53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R49-22-42/43-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R49-42/43-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R49-42/43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R49-52/53 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R49 | 1 | |
| 029-002-00-X | dicopper oxide | copper (I) oxide | | 215-270-7 | 1317-39-1 | Xn; R22 | N; 50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-60-61 | | | |
| 030-001-00-1 | zinc powder - zinc dust (pyrophoric) | | 231-175-3 | 7440-66-6 | F; R15-17 | N; R50-53 | F; N | R: 15-17-50/53 | S: (2-)43-46-60-61 | | | |
| 030-002-00-7 | zinc powder - zinc dust (stabilized) | | 231-175-3 | 7440-66-6 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 030-003-00-2 | zinc chloride | | 231-592-0 | 7646-85-7 | Xn; R22 | C; R34 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 22-34-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R22-34-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R34-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn, N; R36/37/38-51/53 | 2.5 % ≤ C < 5 %: N; R51/53 | 0.25 % ≤ C < 2.5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 030-006-00-9 | zinc sulphate (hydrous) (mono-, hexa- and hepta hydrate) | [1] | zinc sulphate (anhydrous) | [2] | | 231-793-3 | [1] | 231-793-3 | [2] | 7446-19-7 [1] | 7733-02-0 [2] | Xn; R22 | R41 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-50/53 | S: (2-)22-26-39-46-60-61 | | | |
| 033-001-00-X | arsenic | | 231-148-6 | 7440-38-2 | T; R23/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)20/21-28-45-60-61 | | | |
| 033-002-00-5 | arsenic compounds, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | T; R23/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)20/21-28-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/25-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R23/25-51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R23/25-52/53 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R23/25 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,2 %: Xn; R20/22 | 1 | |
| 042-002-00-4 | tetrakis(dimethylditetradecylamm onium) hexa-µ-oxotetra-µ3-oxodi-µ5-oxotetradecaoxooctamolybdate(4-) | | 404-760-8 | 117342-25-3 | T; R23 | Xi; R41 | R53 | T | R: 23-41-53 | S: (1/2-)26-37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 048-001-00-5 | cadmium compounds, with the exception of cadmium sulphoselenide (xCdS.yCdSe), mixture of cadmium sulphide with zinc sulphide (xCdS.yZnS), mixture of cadmium sulphide with mercury sulphide (xCdS.yHgS), and those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | Xn; R20/21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/21/22-50/53 | S: (2-)60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R20/21/22 | 1 | |
| 048-003-00-6 | cadmium diformate | cadmiumformate | | 224-729-0 | 4464-23-7 | T; R23/25 | R33 | Xn; R68 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/25-33-68-50/53 | S: (1/2-)22-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/25-33-50/53-68 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R23/25-33-51/53-68 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn, N; R20/22-33-51/53-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/22-33-52/53-68 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/22-33-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: Xn; R20/22-33-52/53 | | |
| 048-004-00-1 | cadmium cyanide | | 208-829-1 | 542-83-6 | T+; R26/27/28 | R32 | R33 | Xn; R68 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-32-33-68-50/53 | S: (1/2-)7-28-29-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-32-33-50/53-68 | 7 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-32-33-51/53-68 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R23/24/25-32-33-51/53-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R23/24/25-32-33-52/53-68 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33 | | |
| 048-005-00-7 | cadmiumhexafluorosilicate(2-) | cadmium fluorosilica | | 241-084-0 | 17010-21-8 | T; R23/25 | R33 | Xn; R68 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/25-33-68-50/53 | S: (1/2-)22-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/25-33-50/53-68 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R23/25-33-51/53-68 | 2,5 % ≤ C< 10 %: Xn, N; R20/22-33-51/53-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/22-33-52/53-68 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/22-33-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R20/22-33 | | |
| 048-006-00-2 | cadmium fluoride | E | 232-222-0 | 7790-79-6 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | T+; R26 | T; R25-48/23/25 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %:: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-48/23/25-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-48/20/22-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-46-60-61-22-23-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46-60-61-20/22-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-20/22-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46-20/22-48/20/22 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: T; R45 | | |
| 048-007-00-8 | cadmium iodide | | 232-223-6 | 7790-80-9 | T; R23/25 | R33 | Xn; R68 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/25-33-68-50/53 | S: (1/2-)22-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/25-33-50/53-68 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %:T, N; R23/25-33-51/53-68 | 2,5 % ≤ C< 10 %: Xn, N; R20/22-33-51/53-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/22-33-52/53-68 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/22-33-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R20/22-33 | | |
| 048-008-00-3 | cadmium chloride | E | 233-296-7 | 10108-64-2 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | T+; R26 | T; R25-48/23/25 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+,N; R45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+,N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-48/23/25-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-48/20/22-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-46-60-61-22-23-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46-60-61-20/22-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-20/22-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46-20/22-48/20/22 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: T; R45 | | |
| 048-009-00-9 | cadmium sulphate | E | 233-331-6 | 10124-36-4 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | T; R48/23/25 | T+; R26 | T; R25 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R45-46-60-61-25-26-48/23/25-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C< 10%:T+,N; R45-46-60-61-22-26-48/23/25-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R45-46-60-61-22-23-48/20/22-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-46-60-61-22-23-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46-60-61-20/22-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-20/22-48/20/22-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46-20/22-48/20/22 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: T; R45 | | |
| 048-010-00-4 | cadmium sulphide | E | 215-147-8 | 1306-23-6 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repp. Cat. 3; R62-63 | T; R48/23/25 | Xn; R22 | R53 | T; N | R: 45-22-48/23/25-62-63-68-53 | S: 53-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T; R45-22-48/23/25-62-63-68-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R45-22-48/23/25-62-63-68 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: T; R45-48/20/22-62-63-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: T; R45-48/20/22-68 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-48/20/22 | 1 | |
| 050-001-00-5 | tin tetrachloride | stannic chloride | | 231-588-9 | 7646-78-8 | C; R34 | R52-53 | C | R: 34-52/53 | S: (1/2-)7/8-26-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C; R34-52/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 050-005-00-7 | trimethyltin compounds, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | T+; R26/27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-27-28-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-51/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T+; R26/27/28-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R23/24/25-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R23/24/25 | 0,05 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: Xn; R20/21/22 | 1 | |
| 050-006-00-2 | triethyltin compounds, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | T+; R26/27/28 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-27-28-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-51/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T+; R26/27/28-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R23/24/25-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R23/24/25 | 0,05 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: Xn; R20/21/22 | 1 | |
| 050-007-00-8 | tripropyltin compounds, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | T; R23/24/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-27-28-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-51/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R23/24/25-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤C < 0,25 %: Xn; R20/21/22 | 1 | |
| 050-008-00-3 | tributyltin compounds, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | T; R25-48/23/25 | Xn; R21 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 21-25-36/38-48/23/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)35-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R21-25-36/38-48/23/25-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R21-25-36/38-48/23/25-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R21-25-36/38-48/23/25-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R22-48/20/22-52/53 | 1 | |
| 050-009-00-9 | fluorotripentylstannane | [1] | hexapentyldistannoxane | [2] | | 243-546-7 | [1] | 247-143-7 | [2] | 20153-49-5 | [1] | 25637-27-8 | [2] | Xn; R20/21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/21/22-50/53 | S: (2-)26-28-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-52/53 | 0,25 %≤ C < 1 %: R52/53 | 1 | |
| 050-010-00-4 | fluorotrihexylstannane | | 243-547-2 | 20153-50-8 | Xn; R20/21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/21/22-50/53 | S: (2-)26-28-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: R52/53 | 1 | |
| 050-011-00-X | triphenyltin compounds, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | T; R23/24/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-27-28-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %:T; R23/24/25-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/21/22-52/53 | 1 | |
| 050-012-00-5 | tetracyclohexylstannane | [1] | chlorotricyclohexylstannane | [2] | butyltricyclohexylstannane | [3] | A | 215-910-5 | [1] | 221-437-5 | [2] | 230-358-5 | [3] | 1449-55-4 [1] | 3091-32-5 [2] | 7067-44-9 [3] | Xn; R20/21/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/21/22-50/53 | S: (2-)26-28-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: R52/53 | 1 | |
| 050-013-00-0 | trioctyltin compounds, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | Xi; R36/37/38 | R53 | Xi | R: 36/37/38-53 | S: (2-)61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi; R36/37/38-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | 1 | |
| 051-002-00-3 | antimony pentachloride | | 231-601-8 | 7647-18-9 | C; R34 | N; R51-53 | C; N | R: 34-51/53 | S: (1/2-)26-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R34-51/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34-52/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/37/38-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 051-003-00-9 | antimony compounds, with the exception of the tetroxide (Sb2O4), pentoxide (Sb2O5), trisulphide (Sb2S3), pentasulphide (Sb2S5) and those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | Xn; R20/22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/22-51/53 | S: (2-)61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/22-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R20/22-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/22 | 1 | |
| 080-002-00-6 | inorganic compounds of mercury with the exception of mercuric sulphide and those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | T+; R26/27/28 | R33 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-33-50/53 | S: (1/2-)13-28-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-33-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-33-51/53 | 2 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T+; R26/27/28-33-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 2 %: T; R23/24/25-33-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33-52/53 | 0,1 %≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33 | 1 | |
| 080-004-00-7 | organic compounds of mercury with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | T+; R26/27/28 | R33 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-33-50/53 | S: (1/2-)13-28-36-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-33-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-33-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T+; R26/27/28-33-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R23/24/25-33-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33-52/53 | 0,05 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn;: R20/21/22-33 | 1 | |
| 080-007-00-3 | dimethylmercury | [1] | diethylmercury | [2] | | 209-805-3 | [1] | 211-000-7 | [2] | 593-74-8 [1] | 627-44-1 [2] | T+; R26/27/28 | R33 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27/28-33-50/53 | S: (1/2-)13-28-36-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-33-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R26/27/28-33-51/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T+; R26/27/28-33-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R23/24/25-33-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R23/24/25-33 | 0,05 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33 | 1 | |
| 082-001-00-6 | lead compounds with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | AE | - | - | Repr. Cat. 1; R61 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | Xn; R20/22 | R33 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 61-20/22-33-62-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R61-20/22-33-62-50/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %:T, N; R61-20/22-33-62-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %:T, N; R61-20/22-33-62-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %:T; R61-20/22-33-52/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %:T; R61-33-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: R52/53 | 1 | |
| 082-002-00-1 | lead alkyls | AE | - | - | Repr. Cat. 1; R61 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T+; R26/27/28 | R33 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 61-26/27/28-33-62-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+,N; R61-26/27/28-33-62-50/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %:T+, N; R61-26/27/28-33-62-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: T+, N; R61-26/27/28-33-51/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T+; R61-26/27/28-33-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R61-26/27/28-33-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R61-23/24/25-33 | 0,05 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33 | 1 | |
| 601-010-00-3 | ethylene | | 200-815-3 | 74-85-1 | F+; R12 | R67 | F+ | R: 12-67 | S: (2-)9-16-33-46 | | | |
| 601-014-00-5 | isoprene (stabilized) | 2-methyl-1,3 -butadiene | D | 201-143-3 | 78-79-5 | F+; R12 | Car. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | R52-53 | F+; T | R: 45-12-68-52/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 601-017-00-1 | cyclohexane | | 203-806-2 | 110-82-7 | F; R11 | Xn; R65 | Xi; R38 | R67 | N; R50-53 | F; Xn; N | R: 11-38-65-67-50/53 | S: (2-)9-16-25-33-60-61-62 | | 4 6 | |
| 601-020-00-8 | benzene | E | 200-753-7 | 71-43-2 | F; R11 | Carc Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T; R48/23/24/25 | Xn; R65 | Xi; R36/38 | F; T | R: 45-46-11-36/38-48/23/24/25-65 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 601-021-00-3 | toluene | | 203-625-9 | 108-88-3 | F; R11 | Repr. Cat.3; R63 | Xn; R48/20-65 | Xi; R38 | R67 | F; Xn | R: 11-38-48/20-63-65-67 | S: (2-)36/37-62-46 | | 4,6 | |
| 601-025-00-5 | mesitylene | 1,3,5-trimethylbenzene | | 203-604-4 | 108-67-8 | R 10 | Xi; R37 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 10-37-51/53 | S: (2-)61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R37-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: R52/53 | | |
| 601-027-00-6 | 2-phenylpropene | α-methylstryene | | 202-705-0 | 98-83-9 | R10 | Xi; R36/37 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 10-36/37-51/53 | S: (2-)61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R36/37-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: R52/53 | | |
| 601-028-00-1 | 2-methylstyrene | 2-vinyltoluene | | 210-256-7 | 611-15-4 | Xn; R20 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 20-51/53 | S: (2-)24-61 | C ≥ 25%:Xn, N; R20-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: R52/53 | | |
| 601-032-00-3 | benzo[a]pyrene | benzo[def ]chrysene | | 200-028-5 | 50-32-8 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-46-60-61-43-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R43-45-46-50-53-60-61 | 2,5 % ≤ C ≤ 25 %: T, N; R43-45-46-51-53-60-61 | 1 % ≤ C ≤ 2,5 %: T; R43-45-46-52-53-60-61 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-46-52-53-60-61 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T; R45-46-52-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-46 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: T; R45 | | |
| 601-037-00-0 | n-hexane | | 203-777-6 | 110-54-3 | F; R11 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | Xn; R65-48/20 | Xi; R38 | R67 | N; R51-53 | F; Xn; N | R: 11-38-48/20-62-65-67-51/53 | S: (2-)9-16-29-33-36/37-61-62 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R38-48/20-62-51/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R38-48/20-62-52/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xn; R48/20-62-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: R52/53 | 4 6 | |
| 601-041-00-2 | dibenz[a,h]anthracene | | 200-181-8 | 53-70-3 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R45-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %; T, N; R45-51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-52/53 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45 | | |
| 601-048-00-0 | chrysene | | 205-923-4 | 218-01-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-68-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 601-052-00-2 | naphthalene | | 202-049-5 | 91-20-3 | Carc. Cat.3; R40 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-40-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-60-61 | | | |
| 601-053-00-8 | nonylphenol | [1] | 4-nonylphenol, branched | [2] | | 246-672-0 | [1] | 284-325-5 | [2] | 25154-52-3 | [1] | 84852-15-3 | [2] | Repr. Cat.3; R62 | Repr. Cat.3; R63 | Xn; R22 | C; R34 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 22-34-62-63-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-46-60-61 | | | |
| 602-003-00-8 | dibromomethane | | 200-824-2 | 74-95-3 | Xn; R20 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 20-52/53 | S: (2-)24-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn; R20-52/53 | 12,5 % ≤C < 25 %: Xn; R20 | | |
| 602-008-00-5 | carbon tetrachloride | tetrachloromethane | | 200-262-8 | 56-23-5 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | T; R23/24/25-48/23 | R52-53 | N; R59 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-40-48/23-59-52/53 | S: (1/2-)23-36/37-45-59-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-40-48/23-52/53-59 | 1 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-40-48/23-59 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R20/21/22-48/20-59 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,2 %: N; R59 | | |
| 602-010-00-6 | 1,2-dibromoethane | E | 203-444-5 | 106-93-4 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T; R23/24/25 | Xi; R36/37/38 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-36/37/38-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R45-23/24/25-36/37/38-51/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R45-23/24/25-36/37/38-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 20 %: T, N; R45-23/24/25-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-23/24/25 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-20/21/22 | | |
| 602-011-00-1 | 1,1-dichloroethane | | 200-863-5 | 75-34-3 | F; R11 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R36/37 | R52-53 | F; Xn | R: 11-22-36/37-52/53 | S: (2-)16-23-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn; R22-36/37-52/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R22-36/37 | 12,5 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xn; R22 | | |
| 602-014-00-8 | 1,1,2-trichloroethane | | 201-166-9 | 79-00-5 | Carc. Cat.3; R40 | Xn; R20/21/22 | R66 | Xn | R: 20/21/22-40-66 | S: (2-)9-36/37-46 | C ≥ 5 %: Xn; R20/21/22 | | |
| 602-015-00-3 | 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane | | 201-197-8 | 79-34-5 | T+; R26/27 | N; R51-53 | T+; N | R: 26/27-51/53 | S: (1/2-)38-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R26/27-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+; R26/27-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T; R23/24-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R23/24 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/21 | | |
| 602-016-00-9 | 1,1,2,2-tetrabromoethane | | 201-191-5 | 79-27-6 | T+; R26 | Xi; R36 | R52-53 | T+ | R: 26-36-52/53 | S: (1/2-)24-27-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+; R26-36-52/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+; R26-36 | 7 % ≤ C < 20 %: T+; R26 | 1 % ≤ C < < 7 %: T; R23 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20 | | |
| 602-017-00-4 | pentachloroethane | | 200-925-1 | 76-01-7 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | T; R48/23 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 40-48/23-51/53 | S: (1/2-)23-36/37-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R40-48/23-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R40-48/23-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R40-48/23 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R48/20 | | |
| 602-019-00-5 | 1-bromopropane | n-propyl bromide | | 203-445-0 | 106-94-5 | F; R11 | Rep. Cat. 2; R60 | Rep. Cat. 3; R63 | Xn; R48/20 | Xi; R36/37/38 | R67 | T; F | R: 60-11-36/37/3 8-48/20-63-67 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 602-025-00-8 | 1,1 -dichloroethylene | vinylidene chloride | D | 200-864-0 | 75-35-4 | F; R12 | Carc. Cat.3; R40 | Xn; R20 | F+; Xn | R: 12-20-40 | S: (2-)7-16-29-36/37-46 | C ≥ 12,5%: Xn; R20-40 | 1 % ≤ C < 12,5%: Xn; R40 | | |
| 602-026-00-3 | 1,2-dichloroethylene | [1] | cis-dichloroethylene | [2] | trans-dichloroethylene | [3] | C | 208-750-2 | [1] | 205-859-7 | [2] | 205-860-2 | [3] | 540-59-0 [1] | 156-59-2 [2] | 156-60-5 [3] | F; R11 | Xn; R20 | R52-53 | F; Xn | R: 11-20-52/53 | S: (2-)7-16-29-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn; R20-52/53 | 12,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R20 | | |
| 602-029-00-X | 3-chloropropene | allyl chloride | D | 203-457-6 | 107-05-1 | F; R11 | Carc. Cat.3; R40 | Muta. Cat.3; R68 | Xn; R20/21/2248/20 | Xi; R36/37/38 | N; R50 | F; Xn; N | R: 11-20/21/22-36/37/38-40-48/20-68-50 | S: (2-)16-25-26-36/37-46-61 | | | |
| 602-033-00-1 | chlorobenzene | | 203-628-5 | 108-90-7 | R10 | Xn; R20 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 10-20-51/53 | S: (2-)24/25-61 | C ≥ 25%:Xn,N;R20-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R20-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 602-034-00-7 | 1,2-dichlorobenzene | o-dichlorobenzene | | 202-425-9 | 95-50-1 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R36/37/38 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-36/37/38-50/53 | S: (2-)23-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-36/37/38-50/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-36/37/38-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xn, N; R22-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %:N; R51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 602-035-00-2 | 1,4-dichlorobenzene | p-dichlorobenzene | | 203-400-5 | 106-46-7 | Xi; R36 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 36-40-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-60-61 | | | |
| 602-036-00-8 | chloroprene (stabilized) | 2-chlorobuta-1,3-diene | D E | 204-818-0 | 126-99-8 | F; R11 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Xn; R20/22-48/20 | Xi; R36/37/38 | F; T | R: 45-11-20/22-36/37/38-48/20 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 602-039-00-4 | polychlorobiphenyls | PCB | C | 215-648-1 | 1336-36-3 | R33 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 33-50/53 | S: (2-)35-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R33-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R33-51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn, N; R33-52/53 | 0,005 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R33 | | |
| 602-043-00-6 | γ-HCH or γ-BHC | γ-1,2,3,4,5,6-hexachlorocyclohexane | lindane | | 200-401-2 | 58-89-9 | T; R25 | Xn; R20/21-48/22 | R64 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 20/21-25-48/22-64-50/53 | S: (1/2-)36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T,N;R20/21-25-48/22-64-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-48/22-64-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn, N; R22-64-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R64-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R64-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %:N;R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 602-062-00-X | 1,2,3-trichloropropane | D | 202-486-1 | 96-18-4 | Carc. Cat, 2; R45 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60 | Xn; R20/21/22 | T | R: 45-60-20/21/22 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 602-073-00-X | 1,4-dichlorobut-2-ene | E | 212-121-8 | 764-41-0 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T+; R26 | T; R24/25 | C; R34 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 45-24/25-26-34-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-24/25-26-34-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R45-21/22-26-34-51/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R45-21/22-26-36/37/38-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %:T, N; R45-21/22-23-36/37/38-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %:T, N; R45-21/22-23-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R45-23-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-23-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-20-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R45-20 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: T; R45 | | |
| 603-006-00-7 | pentanol isomers, with the exception fo those specified elsewhere in this Annex | C | 250-378-8 | 30899-19-5 | R10 | Xn; R20 | Xi; R37 | R66 | Xn | R: 10-20-37-66 | S: (2-)46 | | | |
| 603-007-00-2 | 2-methylbutan-2-ol tert-pentanol | | 200-908-9 | 75-85-4 | F; R11 | Xn; R20 | Xi; R37/38 | F; Xn | R: 11-20-37/38 | S: (2-)46 | | | |
| 603-029-00-2 | bis(2-chloroethyl) ether | | 203-870-1 | 111-44-4 | R10 | Carc. Cat.3; R40 | T+; R26/27/28 | T+ | R: 10-26/27/28-40 | S: (1/2-)7/9-27-28-36/37-45 | C ≥ 7 %: T+; R26/27/28-40 | 1 % ≤ C < 7 %: T; R23/24/25-40 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/21/22 | | |
| 603-030-00-8 | 2-aminoethanol | ethanolamine | | 205-483-3 | 141-43-5 | Xn; R20/21/22 | C; R34 | C | R: 20/21/22-34 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45 | C ≥ 25 %: C; R20/21/22-34 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 603-031-00-3 | 1,2-dimethoxyethane | ethylene glycol dimethyl ether | EGDME | | 203-794-9 | 110-71-4 | Repr. Cat.2; R60 | Repr. Cat.2; R61 | F; R11 | R19 | Xn; R20 | F; T | R: 60-61-11-19-20 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 603-054-00-9 | di-n-butyl ether | dibutyl ether | | 205-575-3 | 142-96-1 | R10 | Xi; R36/37/38 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 10-36/37/38-52/53 | S: (2-)61 | C ≥ 10 %:Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 603-063-00-8 | 2,3-epoxypropan-1-ol | glycidol | oxiranemethanol | E | 209-128-3 | 556-52-5 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60 | T; R23 | Xn; R21/22 | Xi; R36/37/38 | T | R: 45-60-21/22-23-36/37/38-68 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 603-066-00-4 | 1,2-epoxy-4-epoxyethylcyclohexane | vinylcyclohexane diepoxide | | 203-437-7 | 106-87-6 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R68 | T | R: 23/24/25-68 | S: (1/2-)23-24-45 | C ≥ 1 %: T; R23/24/25-68 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/21/22 | | |
| 603-067-00-X | phenyl glycidyl ether | 2,3-epoxypropyl phenyl ether | 1,2-epoxy-3-phenoxypropane | E | 204-557-2 | 122-60-1 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Xn; R20 | Xi; R37/38 | R43 | R52-53 | T | R: 45-20-37/38-43-68-52/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 603-070-00-6 | 2-amino-2-methylpropanol | | 204-709-8 | 124-68-5 | Xi; R36/38 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 36/38-52/53 | S: (2-)61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi; R36/38-52/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R36/38 | | |
| 603-074-00-8 | reaction product: bisphenol-A-(epichlorhydrin) | epoxy resin (number average molecular weight ≤ 700) | | 500-033-5 | 25068-38-6 | Xi; R36/38 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/38-43-51/53 | S: (2-)28-37/39-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R36/38-43-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R36/38-43-52/53 | 2,5%≤C < 5%:Xi;R43-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 603-076-00-9 | but-2-yne-1,4-diol | 2-butyne-1,4-diol | D | 203-788-6 | 110-65-6 | C; R34 | T; R23/25 | Xn; R21-48/22 | R43 | C; T | R: 21-23/25-34-43-48/22 | S: (1/2-)25-26-36/37/39-45-46 | C ≥ 50 %: T, C; R21-23/25-34-48/22-43 | 25%≤C < 50%:T;R21-23/25-36/38-48/22-43 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R20/22-48/22-43 | 3 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn; R20/22-43 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 603-095-00-2 | 2-(propyloxy)ethanol | EGPE | | 220-548-6 | 2807-30-9 | Xn; R21 | Xi; R36 | Xn | R: 21-36 | S: (2-)26-36/37-46 | | | |
| 603-105-00-5 | furan | E | 203-727-3 | 110-00-9 | F+; R12 | R19 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Xn; R20/22-48/22 | Xi; R38 | R52-53 | F+; T | R: 45-12-19-20/22-38-48/22-68-52/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 604-001-00-2 | phenol | carbolic acid | monohydroxybenzene | phenylalcohol | | 203-632-7 | 108-95-2 | Muta. Cat.3; R68 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R48/20/21/22 | C; R34 | T; C | R: 23/24/25-34-48/20/21/22-68 | S: (1/2-)24/25-26-28-36/37/39-45 | C ≥ 10 %: T; R23/24/25-48/20/21/22-34-68 | 3 % ≤ C < 10 %: C; Xn; R20/21/22-34-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xn; R36/38-68 | | |
| 604-009-00-6 | pyrogallol | 1,2,3-trihydroxybenzene | | 201-762-9 | 87-66-1 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Xn; R20/21/22 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 20/21/22-68-52/53 | S: (2-)36/37-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn; R20/21/22-68-52/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R20/21/22-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn; R68 | | |
| 604-010-00-1 | resorcinol | 1,3-benzenediol | | 203-585-2 | 108-46-3 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R50 | Xn; N | R: 22-36/38-50 | S: (2-)26-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-36/38-50 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R22-36/38 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xn; R22 | | |
| 604-012-00-2 | 4-chloro-o-cresol | 4-chloro-2-methyl phenol | | 216-381-3 | 1570-64-5 | T; R23 | C; R35 | N; R50 | T; C; N | R: 23-35-50 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, C, N; R23-35-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R20-35 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: C; R20-34 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn; R20-36/37/38 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 604-013-00-8 | 2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol | | 200-402-8 | 58-90-2 | T; R25 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 25-36/38-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-28-37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R25-36/38-50/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R25-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 20 %: T, N; R25-36/38-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn, N; R22-51/53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R22-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 604-014-00-3 | chlorocresol | 4-chloro-m-cresol | 4-chloro-3-methylphenol | | 200-431-6 | 59-50-7 | Xn; R21/22 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R50 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-41-43-50 | S: (2-)26-36/37/39-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R21/22-41-43-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn; R21/22-41-43 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn; R21/22-36-43 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi;R43 | | |
| 604-015-00-9 | 2,2'-methylenebis-(3,4,6-trichlorophenol) | hexachlorophene | | 200-733-8 | 70-30-4 | T; R24/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 24/25-50/53 | S:(1/2-)20-37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R24/25-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R24/25-51/53 | 2 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R24/25-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2 %: Xn; R21/22-52/53 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R21/22 | | |
| 604-017-00-X | 2,4,5-trichlorophenol | | 202-467-8 | 95-95-4 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-36/38-50/53 | S: (2-)26-28-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-36/38-50/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-36/38-51/53 | 5% ≤ C < 20 %: Xn, N; R36/38-51/53 | 2,5% ≤ C < 5 %: N;R51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: R52/53 | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 604-030-00-0 | bisphenol A | 4,4'-isopropylidenediphenol | | 201-245-8 | 80-05-7 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | Xi; R37-41 | R43 | Xn | R: 37-41-43-62 | S: (2-)26-36/37-39-46 | | | |
| 605-002-00-0 | 1,3,5-trioxan | trioxymethylene | | 203-812-5 | 110-88-3 | F;R11 | Repr.Cat.3; R63 | Xi; R37 | F; Xn | R: 11-37-63 | S: (2-)36/37-46 | | | |
| 605-016-00-7 | glyoxal...% | ethandial...% | B | 203-474-9 | 107-22-2 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Xn; R20 | Xi; R36/38 | R43 | Xn | R: 20-36/38-43-68 | S: (2-)36/37 | C ≥ 10 %: Xn; R20-36/38-43-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn; R43-68 | | |
| 605-020-00-9 | safrole | 5-allyl-1,3-benzodioxole | E | 202-345-4 | 94-59-7 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Xn; R22 | T | R: 45-22-68 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 605-022-00-X | glutaral | glutaraldehyde | 1,5-pentanedial | | 203-856-5 | 111-30-8 | T; R23/25 | C; R34 | R42/43 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 23/25-34-42/43-50 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 50 %: T, N; R23/25-34-42/43-50 | 25 % ≤ C < 50 %: T; R22-23-34-42/43 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R20/22-34-42/43 | 2 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn; R20/22-37/38-41-42/43 | 1 % ≤ C < 2 %: Xn; R36/37/38-42/43 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xi; R36/37/38-43 | | |
| 605-025-00-6 | chloroacetaldehyde | | 203-472-8 | 107-20-0 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | T+; R26 | T; R24/25 | C; R34 | N; R50 | T+; N | R: 24/25-26-34-40-50 | S: (1/2-)26-28-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R24/25-26-34-40-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+; R21/22-26-34-40 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+; R21/22-26-36/37/38-40 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T; R21/22-23-36/37/38-40 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T; R21/22-23-40 | 1 % ≤ C < 3 %: T; R23-40 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20 | | |
| 606-037-00-4 | triadimefon (ISO) | 1-(4-chlorophenoxy)-3,3-dimethyl-1 -(1,2,4-triazol-1-yl)butanone | | 256-103-8 | 43121-43-3 | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 606-048-00-4 | 2'-anilino-3'-methyl-6'-dipentylaminospiro(isobenzofuran-1(1H),9'-xanthen)-3-one | | 406-480-1 | - | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-004-00-7 | trichloroacetic acid | | 200-927-2 | 76-03-9 | C; R35 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 35-50/53 | S:(1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R35-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R35-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: C, N; R34-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R36/37/3 8-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: R52/53 | | |
| 607-019-00-9 | methyl chloroformate | | 201-187-3 | 79-22-1 | F; R11 | T+; R26 | Xn; R21/22 | C; R34 | F; T+ | R: 11-21/22-26-34 | S: (1/2-)26-14-28-36/37-39-36/37/39-45-46-63 | | | |
| 607-049-00-2 | mecoprop (ISO) [1] and its salts 2-(4-chloro-o-tolyloxy) propionic acid | (RS)-2-(4-chloro-o-tolyloxy) propionic acid | [1] | 2-(4-chloro-2-methylphenoxy)propionic acid | [2] | | 230-386-8 | [1] | 202-264-4 | [2] | 7085-19-0 [1] | 93-65-2 [2] | Xn; R22 | Xi; R38-41 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-38-41-50/53 | S: (2-) 13-26-37/39-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-38-41-50-53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi, N; R38-41-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xi, N; R41-50-53 | 5% ≤ C < 10 %: Xi,N;R36-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 5 %: N; R5O-53 | 0,025 %. ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 607-053-00-4 | MCPB (ISO) | 4-(4-chloro-o-tolyloxy) butyric acid | | 202-365-3 | 94-81-5 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 607-061-00-8 | acrylic acid | prop-2-enoic acid | D | 201-177-9 | 79-10-7 | R10 | Xn; R20/21/22 | C; R35 | N; R50 | C; N | R: 10-20/21/22-35-50 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R20/21/22-35-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R35 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: C; R34 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi; R36/37/38 | | |
| 607-064-00-4 | benzyl chloroformate | | 207-925-0 | 501-53-1 | C; R34 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 34-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R34-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R34-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-51/53 | 2,5% ≤ C < 5 %: N; R51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 607-072-00-8 | 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate | D | 212-454-9 | 818-61-1 | T; R24 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 24-34-43-50 | S: (1/2-)26-36/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T; R24-34-43-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R24-34-43 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: T; R24-36/38-43 | 2 % ≤ C < 5 %: T; R24-43 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 2 %: Xn; R21-43 | | |
| 607-086-00-4 | diallyl phthalate | | 205-016-3 | 131-17-9 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)24/25-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R 51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 607-091-00-1 | trifluoroacetic acid ... % | B | 200-929-3 | 76-05-1 | Xn; R20 | C; R35 | R52-53 | C | R: 20-35-52/53 | S: (1/2-)9-26-27-28-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C; R20-35-52/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R20-35 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: C; R34 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi; R36/38 | | |
| 607-094-00-8 | peracetic acid ... % | | 201-186-8 | 79-21-0 | R10 | O; R7 | Xn; R20/21/22 | C; R35 | N; R50 | O; C; N | R: 7-10-20/21/22-35-50 | S: (1/2-)3/7-14-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R20/21/22-35-50 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R20/21/22-35 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: C; R34 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi, R36/37/38 | | |
| 607-107-00-7 | 2-ethylhexyl acrylate | D | 203-080-7 | 103-11-7 | Xi; R37/38 | R43 | Xi | R: 37/38-43 | S: (2-)36/37-46 | | | |
| 607-113-00-X | isobutyl methacrylate | D | 202-613-0 | 97-86-9 | R10 | Xi; R36/37/38 | R43 | N; R50 | Xi; N | R: 10-36/37/38-43-50 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-43-50 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R36/37/38-43 | 1 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 607-116-00-6 | cyclohexyl acrylate | D | 221-319-3 | 3066-71-5 | Xi; R37/38 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R:37/38-51/53 | S: (2-)61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R37/38-51/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R37/38-52/53 | 2,5 % ≥ C < 10 %: R52/53 | | |
| 607-133-00-9 | monoalkyl or monoaryl or monoalkylaryl esters of acrylic acid with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | Xi; R36/37/38 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/37/38-51/53 | S: (2-)26-28-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-51/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R36/37/38-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 10 %: R52/53 | | |
| 607-151-00-7 | propargite (ISO) | 2-(4-tert-butylphenoxy) cyclohexyl prop-2-ynyl sulphite | | 219-006-1 | 2312-35-8 | Carc.Cat.3; R40 | T; R23 | Xi; R38-41 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23-38-40-41-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23-38-40-41-50-53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R20-38-40-41-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xn, N; R20-40-41-50-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn, N; R20-40-36-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn, N; R20-40-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xn, N; R40-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn, N; R40-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: N;R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 607-189-00-4 | trimethylenediaminetetraacetic acid | | 400-400-9 | 1939-36-2 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-50/53 | S: (2-)22-26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-244-00-2 | isooctyl acrylate | | 249-707-8 | 29590-42-9 | Xi; R36/37/38 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/37/38-50/53 | S: (2-)26-28-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi, N; R36/37/3 8-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 10 %: N; R51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 607-245-00-8 | tert-butyl acrylate | D | 216-768-7 | 1663-39-4 | F; R11 | Xn; R20/21/22 | Xi; R37/38 | R43 | N; R52-53 | F; Xn | R: 11-20/21/22-37/38-43-52/53 | S: (2-)16-25-37-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn; R20/21/22-37/38-43-52-53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R37/38-43 | 1 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 607-247-00-9 | dodecyl methacrylate | | 205-570-6 | 142-90-5 | Xi; 36/37/38 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/37/38-50/53 | S: (2-)26-28-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 10 %: N;R51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,50 %: R52/53 | | |
| 607-249-00-X | (1-methyl-1,2-ethanediyl)bis[oxy(methyl-2,1-ethanediyl)] diacrylate | | 256-032-2 | 42978-66-5 | Xi; R36/37/38 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/37/38-43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-43-51/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R36/37/38-43-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 10 %:Xi; R43-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 608-003-00-4 | acrylonitrile | D E | 203-466-5 | 107-13-1 | F; R11 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T; R23/24/25 | Xi; R37/38-41 | R43 | N; R51-53 | F; T; N | R: 45-11-23/24/25-37/38-41-43-51/53 | S: 9-16-53-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R45-23/24/25-37/38-41-43-51/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R45-23/24/25-37/38-41-43-52/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: T; R45-23/24/25-41-43-52/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %:T; R45-23/24/25-36-43-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: T; R45-23/24/25-43-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-23/24/25-43 | 0,2 % < C < 1 %: T; R45-20/21/22 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,2%: T; R45 | | |
| 608-006-00-0 | bromoxynil (ISO) and its salts | 3,5-dibromo-4-hydroxybenzonitrile bromoxynil phenol | | 216-882-7 | 1689-84-5 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | T+; R26 | T; R25 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 25-26-43-63-50/53 | S: (1/2-)27/28-36/37-45-63-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R25-26-43-63-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+, N; R22-26-43-63-50-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R22-23-43-63-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: T, N; R22-23-43-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T, N; R23-43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T, N; R23-43-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn, N; R20-51-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R20-52-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: R52-53 | | |
| 608-007-00-6 | ioxynil (ISO) and its salts | 4-hydroxy-3,5-diiodobenzonitrile | | 216-881-1 | 1689-83-4 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | T; R23/25 | Xn; R21-48/22 | Xi; R36 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 21-23/25-36-48/22-63-50/53 | S: (1/2-)36/37-45-60-61-63 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R21-23/25-36-48/22-63-50-53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R20/22-36-48/22-63-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xn, N; R20/22-48/22-63-50-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn, N; R20/22-63-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn, N; R20/22-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 608-010-00-2 | methacrylonitrile | 2-methyl-2-propene nitrile | D | 204-817-5 | 126-98-7 | F; R11 | T; R23/24/25 | R43 | F; T | R: 11-23/24/25-43 | S: (1/2-)9-16-18-29-45 | C ≥ 1 %: T; R23/24/25-43 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20/21/22-43 | | |
| 608-014-00-4 | chlorothalonil (ISO) | tetrachloroisophthalonitrile | | 217-588-1 | 1897-45-6 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | T+; R26 | Xi; R41 | Xi; R37 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 26-37-40-41-43-50/53 | S: (2-)28-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 20 %: T+, N; R26-37-40-41-43-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: T+, N; R26-40-41-43-50-53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+, N; R26-40-36-43-50-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T, N; R23-40-36-43-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: T, N; R23-40-43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T, N; R23-40-43-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1: Xn, N; R20-51-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xn; R20-52-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: R52-53 | | |
| 608-017-00-0 | bromoxynil octanoate (ISO) | 2,6-dibromo-4-cyanophenyl octanoate | | 216-885-3 | 1689-99-2 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | T; R23 | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 22-23-43-63-50/53 | S: (1/2-)36/37-45-63-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R 22-23-43-63-50-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R20-43-63-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn, N; R20-43-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xi, N; R43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi, N; R43-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C< 1 %: N; R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 608-018-00-6 | ioxynil octanoate (ISO) | 4-cyano-2,6-diiodophenyl | octanoate | | 223-375-4 | 3861-47-0 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | T; R25 | Xi; R36 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 25-36-43-63-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R25-36-43-63-50-53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R22-36-43-63-50-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xn, N; R22-43-63-50-53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn, N; R22-43-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: N; R43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R43-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: N; R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 608-021-00-2 | 3-(2-(diaminomethyleneamino)thiazol-4-ylmethylthio)propionitrile | | 403-710-2 | 76823-93-3 | Xn; R22 | R43 | Xn | R: 22-43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 609-007-00-9 | 2,4-dinitrotoluene | dinitrotoluene, technical grade | [1] | dinitrotoluene | [2] | E | 204-450-0 | [1] | 246-836-1 | [2] | 121-14-2 [1] | 25321-14-6 | [2] | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-48/22-62-68-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 609-023-00-6 | dinocap (ISO) | E | 254-408-0 | 39300-45-3 | Repr. Cat. 2; R61 | Xn; R20-48/22 | Xi; R38 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 61-20-22-38-43-48/22-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 609-043-00-5 | quintozene (ISO) | pentachloronitrobenzene | | 201-435-0 | 82-68-8 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)13-24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 609-049-00-8 | 2,6-dinitrotoluene | E | 210-106-0 | 606-20-2 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3;R68 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R48/22 | R52-53 | T | R: 45-23/24/25-48/22-62-68-52/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 609-050-00-3 | 2,3-dinitrotoluene | E | 210-013-5 | 602-01-7 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-48/22-62-68-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 609-051-00-9 | 3,4-dinitrotoluene | E | 210-222-1 | 610-39-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-48/22-62-68-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 609-052-00-4 | 3,5-dinitrotoluene | E | 210-566-2 | 618-85-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R48/22 | R52-53 | T | R: 45-23/24/25-48/22-62-68-52/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 609-055-00-0 | 2,5-dinitrotoluene | E | 210-581-4 | 619-15-8 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-48/22-62-68-51/53 | S:53-45-61 | | | |
| 609-056-00-6 | 2,2-dibromo-2-nitroethanol | | 412-380-9 | 69094-18-4 | E; R2 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Xn; R22-48/22 | C; R35 | R43 | N; R50-53 | E; C; N | R: 2-22-35-40-43-48/22-50/53 | S: (1/2-)23-26-35-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R22-35-40-43-48/22-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R22-35-40-43-48/22-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: C, N; R34-40-43-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn, N; R36/37/3 8-40-43-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R36/37/3 8-40-43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: R52/53 | | |
| 610-005-00-5 | 1-chloro-4-nitrobenzene | | 202-809-6 | 100-00-5 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Mut. Cat. 3; R68 | T; R23/24/25 | Xn; R48/20/21/22 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-40-48/20/21/22-68-51/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-61 | | | |
| 611-001-00-6 | azobenzene | E | 203-102-5 | 103-33-3 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Xn; R20/22-48/22 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-20/22-48/22-68-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 611-060-00-8 | A mixture of: sodium 5-[8-[4-[4-[4-[7-(3,5-dicarboxylatophenylazo)-8-hydroxy-3,6-disulfonatonaphthalen-1-ylamino]-6-hydroxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl]-2,5-dimethylpiperazin-1-yl]-6-hydroxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-1-hydroxy-3,6-disulfonatonaphthalen-2-ylazo]-isophthalate; ammonium 5-[8-[4-[4-[4-[7-(3,5-dicarboxylatophenylazo)-8-hydroxy-3,6-disulfonatonaphthalen-1 -ylamino]-6-hydroxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yll-2,5-dimethylpiperazin-1-yll-6-hydroxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino] -1 -hydroxy- 3,6-disulfonatonaphthalen-2-ylazo] -isophthalate; 5-[8-[4-[4-[4-[7-(3,5-dicarboxylatophenylazo)-8-hydroxy-3,6-disulfonatonaphthalen-1-ylamino]-6-hydroxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl]-2,5-dimethylpiperazin-1-yll-6-hydroxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-1 -hydroxy-3,6-disulfonaphthalen-2-ylazo] -isophthalic acid | | 413-180-4 | - | Xi; R41 | Xi | R:41 | S: (2-)22-26-39 | | | |
| 611-063-00-4 | trisodium [4'-(8-acetylamino-3,6-disulfonato-2-naphthylazo)-4'-(6-benzoylamino-3-sulfonato-2-naphthylazo)-biphenyl-1,3',3',1'''-tetraolato-O,O',O'',O''']copper(II) | | 413-590-3 | 164058-22-4 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 612-008-00-7 | aniline | | 200-539-3 | 62-53-3 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | T; R23/24/25-48/23/24/25 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-40-41-43-48/23/24/25-68-50 | S: (1/2-)26-27-36/37/39-45-46-61-63 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-40-41-43-48/23/24/25-50-68 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R20/21/22-40-41-43-48/23/24/25-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 10 %: T; R20/21/22-40-43-48/23/24/25-68 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R48/20/21/22 | | |
| 612-009-00-2 | salts of aniline | A | - | - | Carc. Cat. 3;R40 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | T; R23/24/25 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-40-41-43-48/23/24/25-68-50 | S: (1/2-)26-27-36/37/39-45-61-63 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-40-41-43-48/23/24/25-50-68 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R20/21/22-40-41-43-48/23/24/25-68 | 1 % ≤ C < 10 %: T; R20/21/22-40-43-48/23/24/25-68 | 0,2 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R48/20/21/22 | | |
| 612-010-00-8 | chloroanilines (with exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex) | C | - | - | T; R23/24/25 | R33 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-33-50/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-60-61 | | | |
| 612-022-00-3 | 2-naphthylamine | E | 202-080-4 | 91-59-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-22-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R45-22-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R45-52/53 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45 | | |
| 612-023-00-9 | phenylhydrazine | [1] | phenylhydrazinium chloride | [2] | phenylhydrazine hydrochloride | [3] | phenylhydrazinium sulphate (2:1) | [4] | E | 202-873-5 | [1] | 200-444-7 | [2] | 248-259-0 | [3] | 257-622-2 | [4] | 100-63-0 [1] | 59-88-1 [2] | 27140-08-5 [3] | 52033-74-6 [4] | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | T; R23/24/25-48/23/24/25 | Xi; R36/3 | R438 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-36/38-43-48/23/24/25-68-50 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 612-025-00-X | nitrotoluidines, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | C | - | - | T; R23/24/25 | R33 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-33-51/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-61 | | | |
| 612-035-00-4 | 2-methoxyaniline | o-anisidine | E | 201-963-1 | 90-04-0 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta Cat. 3; R68 | T; R23/24/25 | T | R: 45-23/24/25-68 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 612-042-00-2 | benzidine | 1,1'-biphenyl-4,4'-diamine | 4,4'-diaminobiphenyl | biphenyl-4,4'-ylenediamine | E | 202-199-1 | 92-87-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-22-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R45-22-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T, N; R45-51/53 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45 | | |
| 612-051-00-1 | 4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane | 4,4'-methylenedianiline | E | 202-974-4 | 101-77-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | T; R39/23/24/25 | Xn; R48/20/21/22 | R43 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-39/23/24/25-43-48/20/21/22-68-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 612-054-00-8 | N,N-diethylaniline | | 202-088-8 | 91-66-7 | T; R23/24/25 | R33 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-33-51/53 | S: (1/2-)28-37-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-33-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R23/24/25-33-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33 | | |
| 612-056-00-9 | N,N-dimethyl-p-toluidine | [1] | N,N-dimethyl-m-toluidine | [2] | N,N-dimethyl-o-toluidine | [3] | C | 202-805-4 | [1] | 204-495-6 | [2] | 210-199-8 | [3] | 99-97-8 [1] | 121-72-2 [2] | 609-72-3 [3] | T; R23/24/25 | R33 | R52-53 | T | R: 23/24/25-33-52/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T; R23/24/25-33-52-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R23/24/25-33 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn; R20/21/22-33 | | |
| 612-059-00-5 | 3,6-diazaoctanethylenediamin | triethylenetetramine | | 203-950-6 | 112-24-3 | Xn; R21 | C; R34 | R43 | R52-53 | C | R: 21-34-43-52/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C; R21-34-43-52/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34-43 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/38-43 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 612-060-00-0 | 3,6,9-triazaundecamethylenediamine | tetraethylenepentamine | | 203-986-2 | 112-57-2 | Xn; R21/22 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R51-53 | C; N | R: 21/22-34-43-51/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R21/22-34-43-51/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34-43-52/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/38-43-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi; R43-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 612-064-00-2 | 3,6,9,12-tetra-azatetradecamethylenediamine | pentacthylenehexamine | | 223-775-9 | 4067-16-7 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 34-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R34-43-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R34-43-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi,N; R36/38-43-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi, N; R43-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: R52/53 | | |
| 612-065-00-8 | polyethlyenepolyamines with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | | - | - | Xn; R21/22 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 21/22-34-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R21/22-34-43-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R34-43-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi,N; R36/38-43-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: R52/53 | | |
| 612-066-00-3 | dicyclohexylamine | | 202-980-7 | 101-83-7 | Xn; R22 | C; R34 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 22-34-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R22-34-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R34-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi, N; R36/38-51/53 | 2 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R36/38-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2 %: R52/53 | | |
| 612-067-00-9 | 3-aminomethyl-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexylamine | | 220-666-8 | 2855-13-2 | Xn; R21/22 | C; R34 | R43 | R52-53 | C | R: 21/22-34-43-52/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C;R21/22-34-43-52/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R34-43 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36/38-43 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 612-077-00-3 | dimethylnitrosoamine | N-nitrosodimethylamine | E | 200-549-8 | 62-75-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T+; R26 | T; R25-48/25 | N; R51-53 | T+; N | R: 45-25-26-48/25-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-25-26-48/25-51/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+; R45-22-26-48/25-52/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+; R45-22-26-48/22-52/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 7 %: T; R45-22-23-48/22-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: T; R45-23-48/22-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-23-48/22 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-20 | 0,001 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: T; R45 | | |
| 612-086-00-2 | amitraz (ISO) | N,N-bis(2,4-xylyliminomethyl) | methylamine | | 251-375-4 | 33089-61-1 | Xn; R22-48/22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-60-24-61-36/37 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-43-48/22-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R43-48/22-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 10 %:N; R43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R43-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: N; R51-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52-53 | | |
| 612-087-00-8 | guazatine | | 236-855-3 | 13516-27-3 | T+; R26 | Xn; R21/22 | Xi; R37/38-41 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 21/22-26-37/38-41-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-28-36/37/39-38-45-46-60-61-63 | | | |
| 612-094-00-6 | 4-(2-chloro-4-trifluoromethyl)phenoxy-2-fluoroaniline hydrochloride | | 402-190-4 | - | T; R48/25 | Xn; R22-48/20 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 22-41-43-48/20-48/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 612-121-00-1 | amines, polyethylenepoly-HEPA | | 268-626-9 | 68131-73-7 | Xn; R21/22 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 21/22-34-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R21/22-34-43-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R34-43-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi, N; R36/38-43-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi, N; R43-51/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: R52/53 | | |
| 612-136-00-3 | N-isopropyl-N'-phenyl-p-phenylenediamine | | 202-969-7 | 101-72-4 | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-43-50/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi, N; R43-51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43-52/53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 612-151-00-5 | diaminotoluene, technical product - mixture of [2] and [3] | methyl-phenylenediamine | [1] | 4-methyl-m-phenylene diamine | [2] | 2-methyl-m-phenylene diamine | [3] | E | 246-910-3 | [1] | 202-453-1 | [2] | 212-513-9 | [3] | 25376-45-8 [1] | 95-80-7 [2] | 823-40-5 [3] | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T; R25 | Xn; R20/21 | Xi; R36 | R43 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-20/21-25-36-43-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 613-009-00-5 | 2,4,6-trichloro-1,3,5-triazine | cyanuric chloride | | 203-614-9 | 108-77-0 | T+; R26 | Xn; R22 | C; R34 | R43 | R14 | T+; C | R: 14-22-26-34-43 | S:(1/2-)26-28-36/37/39-45-46-63 | C ≥ 25 %: T+; R22-26-34-43 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+; R26-34-43 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %:T+;R26-36/37/38-43 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T; R23-36/37/38-43 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: T; R23-43 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: Xn; R20 | | |
| 613-011-00-6 | amitrole (ISO) | 1,2,4-triazol-3-ylamine | | 200-521-5 | 61-82-5 | Repr.Cat.3; R63 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 48/22-63-51/53 | S: (2-)13-36/37-61 | | | |
| 613-033-00-6 | 2-methylaziridine | propyleneimine | E | 200-878-7 | 75-55-8 | F; R11 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T+; R26/27/28 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | F; T+; N | R: 45-11-26/27/28-41-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+, N; R45-26/27/28-41-51/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+; R45-26/27/28-41-52/53 | 7 % ≤ C < 10 %: T+; R45-26/27/28-36-52/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 7 %: T; R45-23/24/25-36-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: T; R45-23/24/25-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R45-23/24/25 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 1 %: T; R45-20/21/22 | 0,01 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: T; R45 | | |
| 613-040-00-4 | azaconazole (ISO) | 1-([2-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,3-dioxolan-2-yl]methyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazole | | 262-102-3 | 60207-31-0 | Xn; R22 | Xn | R: 22 | S: (2-)46 | | | |
| 613-043-00-0 | imazalil sulphate (ISO) powder | 1-[2-(allyloxy)ethyl-2-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)]-1H-imidazolium hydrogen sulphate | [1] | (±)-1-[2-(allyloxy)ethyl-2-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)]-1H-imidazolium hydrogen sulphate | [2] | | 261-351-5 | [1] | 281-291-3 | [2] | 58594-72-2 | [1] | 83918-57-4 | [2] | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24/25-37-46-60-61 | | | |
| 613-048-00-8 | carbendazim (ISO) | methyl benzimidazol-2-ylcarbamate | | 234-232-0 | 10605-21-7 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 2; R60-61 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 46-60-61-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 613-049-00-3 | benomyl (ISO) | methyl 1-(butylcarbamoyl)benzimidazol-2-ylcarbamate | | 241-775-7 | 17804-35-2 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr.Cat.2; R60-61 | Xi; R37/38 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 46-60-61-37/38-43-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 20 %: T, N; R46-60-61-37/38-43-50-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 20 %: T, N; R46-60-61-43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T, N; R46-60-61-43-51-53 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 1 %: T, N; R46-60-61-51-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,5 %: T, N; R46-51-53 | 0,1 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: T; R46-52-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,1 %: R52-53 | | |
| 613-051-00-4 | molinate (ISO) | S-ethyl 1-perhydroazepinecarbothioate | S-ethyl perhydroazepine-1-carbothioate | | 218-661-0 | 2212-67-1 | Carc. Cat 3; R40 | Repr. Cat 3; R62 | Xn; R20/22 | Xn; R48/22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 20/22-40-43-48/22-63-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/22-40-43-48/22-62-50-53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R40-43-48/22-62-50-53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn, N; R40-43-62-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn, N; R40-43-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-51 | | |
| 613-058-00-2 | permethrin (ISO) | m-phenoxybenzyl 3-(2,2-dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclopropanecarboxylate | | 258-067-9 | 52645-53-1 | Xn; R20/22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/22-43-50/53 | S: (2-) 13-24-36/37/39-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R20/22-43-50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 25 %: N; R43-50-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 1 %: N; R50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,00025 % ≤ C < 0,0025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 613-075-00-5 | 1,3-dichloro-5-ethyl-5-methylimidazolidine-2,4-dione | | 401-570-7 | 89415-87-2 | O; R8 | T; R23 | C; R34 | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R50 | O; T; N | R: 8-22-23-34-43-50 | S: (1/2-)8-26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 613-088-00-6 | 1,2-benzisothiazol-3(2H)-one | 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one | | 220-120-9 | 2634-33-5 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R38-41 | R43 | N; R50 | Xn; N | R: 22-38-41-43-50 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-38-41-43 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xi; R38-41-43 | 10 % ≤ C < 20 %: Xi; R41-43 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi; R36-43 | 0,05 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 613-112-00-5 | 2-octyl-2H-isothiazol-3-one | | 247-761-7 | 26530-20-1 | T; R23/24 | Xn; R22 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 22-23/24-34-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R22-23/24-34-43-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R20/21-34-43-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %:Xn, N; R20/21-36/38-43-51/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xn, N; R20/21-43-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xi, N; R43-51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43-52/53 | 0,05 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 613-124-00-0 | fenpropimorph | cis-4-[3-(p-tert-butylphenyl)-2-methylpropyl]-2,6-dimethylmorpholine | | 266-719-9 | 67564-91-4 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R38 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-38-63-51/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-61 | | | |
| 613-129-00-8 | metamitron | 4-amino-3-methyl-6-phenyl-1,2,4-triazin-5-one | | 255-349-3 | 41394-05-2 | Xn; R22 | N; R50 | Xn; N | R: 22-50 | S: (2-)61 | | | |
| 613-167-00-5 | mixture of: 5-chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one [EC no. 247-500-7] | and 2-methyl-2H isothiazol-3-one [EC no. 220-239-6] (3:1) mixture of: 5-chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one [EC no. 247-500-7] | and 2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one [EC no. 220-239-6] (3:1) | | - | 55965-84-9 | T; R23/24/25 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-34-43-50/53 | S: (2-)26-28-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23/24/25-34-43-50/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R20/21/22-34-43-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: C, N; R34-43-51/53 | 0,6 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R34-43-52/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 0,6 %: Xi; R33/38-43-52/53 | 0,06 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: Xi; R36/38-43 | 0,0015 % ≤ C < 0,06 %: Xi; R43 | | |
| 613-175-00-9 | Epoxiconazole | (2RS,3SR)-3-(2-chlorophenyl)-2-(4-fluorophenyl)- [(1H- 1,2,4-triazol-1 -yl)methyl] oxirane | | 406-850-2 | 133855-98-8 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 40-62-63-51/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-61 | | | |
| 615-001-00-7 | methyl isocyanate | | 210-866-3 | 624-83-9 | F+; R12 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | T+; R26 | T; R24/25 | R42/43 | Xi; R37/38-41 | F+; T+ | R: 12-24/25-26-37/38-41-42/43-63 | S: (1/2-)26-27/28-36/37/39-45-63 | | | |
| 615-004-00-3 | salts of thiocyanic acid | A | - | - | Xn; R20/21/22 | R32 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 20/21/22-32-52/53 | S: (2-)13-61 | | | |
| 615-006-00-4 | 2-methyl-m-phenylene diisocyanate | toluene-2,4-di-isocyanate | [1] | 4-methyl-m-phenylene diisocyanate | toluene-2,6-di-isocyanate | [2] | m-tolylidene diisocyanate | toluene-diisocyanate | [3] | | 202-039-0 | [1] | 209-544-5 | [2] | 247-722-4 | [3] | 91-08-7 [1] | 584-84-9 [2] | 26471-62-5 [3] | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | T+; R26 | Xi; R36/37/38 | R42/43 | R52-53 | T+ | R: 26-36/37/38-40-42/43-52/53 | S: (1/2-)23-36/37-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T+; R26-36/37/38-40-42/43-52/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: T+; R26-36/37/38-40-42/43 | 7 % ≤ C < 20 %: T+; R26-40-42/43 | 1 % ≤ C < 7 %: T; R23-40-42/43 | 0,1% ≤ C < 1 %:Xn;R20-42 | | |
| 615-008-00-5 | 3-isocyanatomethyl-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexyl isocyanate isophorone di-isocyanate | | 223-861-6 | 4098-71-9 | T; R23 | Xi; R36/37/38 | R42/43 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 23-36/37/38-42/43-51/53 | S: (1/2-)26-28-38-45-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R23-36/37/38-42/43-51/53 | 20 % ≤ C < 25 %: T; R23-36/37/38-42/43-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 20 %: T; R23-42/43-52/53 | 2 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: T; R23-42/43 | 0,5 % ≤ C < 2 %: Xn; R20-42/43 | 2 | |
| 615-015-00-3 | 1,7,7-trimethylbicyclo(2,2,1)hept-2-yl thiocyanatoacetate | isobornyl thiocyanoacetate | | 204-081-5 | 115-31-1 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)24/25-60-61 | | | |
| 616-015-00-6 | alachlor (ISO) | 2-chloro-2',6'-diethyl-N-(methoxymethyl)acetanilide | | 240-110-8 | 15972-60-8 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-40-43-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: Xn, N; R22-40-43- 50-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 25 %: Xn, N; R40-43-50-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: N; R5O-53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: N; R51-53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 616-024-00-5 | 2-(4,4-dimethyl-2,5-dioxooxazolidin-1 -yl)-2-chloro-5-(2-(2,4-di-tert-pentylphenoxy)butyramido)-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxovaleranilide | | 402-260-4 | - | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 617-002-00-8 | α,α-dimethylbenzyl | hydroperoxide | cumene hydroperoxide | | 201-254-7 | 80-15-9 | O; R7 | T; R23 | Xn; R21/22-48/20/22 | C; R34 | N; R51-53 | O; T; N | R: 7-21/22-23-34-48/20/22-51/53 | S: (1/2-)3/7-14-36/37/39-45-50-61 | C ≥ 25 %: T, N; R21/22-23-34-48/20/22-51/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C; R20-34-48/20/22-52/53 | 3 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xn; R20-37/38-41-52/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 3 %: Xi; R36/37-52/53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R36/37 | | |
| 617-004-00-9 | 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1-naphthyl hydroperoxide | | 212-230-0 | 771-29-9 | O; R7 | Xn; R22 | C; R34 | N; R50-53 | O; C; N | R: 7-22-34-50/53 | S: (1/2-)3/7-14-26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C ≥ 25 %: C, N; R22-34-50/53 | 10 % ≤ C < 25 %: C, N; R34-51/53 | 5 % ≤ C < 10 %: Xi, N; R36/37/38-51/53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: N;R51/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: R52/53 | | |
| 648-043-00-X | Creosote oil, acenaphthene fraction, acenaphthene-free | Wash Oil Redistillate | [The oil remaining after removal by a crystallization process of acenaphthene from acenaphthene oil from coal tar. Composed primarily of naphthalene and alkylnaphthalenes.] | H | 292-606-9 | 90640-85-0 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 648-080-00-1 | Residues (coal tar), creosote oil distn. | Wash Oil Redistillate | [The residue from the fractional distillation of wash oil boiling in the approximate range of 270oC to 330oC (518oF to 626oF). It consists predominantly of dinuclear aromatic and heterocyclic hydrocarbons.] | H | 295-506-3 | 92061-93-3 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 648-098-00-X | Creosote oil, acenaphthene fraction | Wash Oil | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of coal tar and boiling in the range of approximately 240oC to 280oC (464oF to 536oF). Composed primarily of acenaphthene, naphthalene and alkyl naphthalene.] | H | 292-605-3 | 90640-84-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 648-099-00-5 | Creosote oil | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the distillation of coal tar. It consists primarily of aromatic hydrocarbons and may contain appreciable quantities of tar acids and tar bases. It distills at the approximate range of 200oC to 325oC (392oF to 617oF).J | H | 263-047-8 | 61789-28-4 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 648-100-00-9 | Creosote oil, high-boiling distillate | Wash Oil | [The high-boiling distillation fraction obtained from the high temperature carbonization of bituminous coal which is further refined to remove excess crystalline salts. It consists primarily of creosote oil with some of the normal polynuclear aromatic salts, which are components of coal tar distillates, removed. It is crystal free at approximately 5oC (41oF).] | H | 274-565-9 | 70321-79-8 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R:45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 648-101-00-4 | Creosote | [The distillate of coal tar produced by the high temperature carbonization of bituminous coal. It consists primarily of aromatic hydrocarbons, tar acids and tar bases.] | H | 232-287-5 | 8001-58-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R:45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 648-102-00-X | Extract residues (coal), creosote oil acid | Wash Oil Extract Residue | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons from the base-freed fraction from the distillation of coal tar, boiling in the range of approximately 250oC to 280oC (482oF to 536oF). It consists predominantly of biphenyl and isomeric diphenylnaphthalenes.] | H | 310-189-4 | 122384-77-4 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R:45 | S:53-45 | | | |
| 648-138-00-6 | Creosote oil, low-boiling distillate | Wash Oil | [The low-boiling distillation fraction obtained from the high temperature carbonization of bituminous coal, which is further refined to remove excess crystalline salts. It consists primarily of creosote oil with some of the normal polynuclear aromatic salts, which are components of coal tar distillate, removed. It is crystal free at approximately 38oC (100oF).] | H | 274-566-4 | 70321-80-1 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-001-00-3 | Extracts (petroleum), light naphthenic distillate solvent | H | 265-102-1 | 64742-03-6 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R:45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-002-00-9 | Extracts (petroleum) heavy paraffinic distillate solvent | H | 265-103-7 | 64742-04-7 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-003-00-4 | Extracts (petroleum), light paraffinic distillate solvent | H | 265-104-2 | 64742-05-8 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R:45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-004-00-X | Extracts (petroleum), heavy naphthenic distillate solvent | H | 265-111-0 | 64742-11-6 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-005-00-5 | Extracts (petroleum), light vacuum gas oil solvent | H | 295-341-7 | 91995-78-7 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-006-00-0 | hydrocarbons C26-55, arom-rich | H | 307-753-7 | 97722-04-8 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-062-00-6 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic cracked naphtha depropanizer overhead, C3-rich acid-free | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from fractionation of catalytic cracked hydrocarbons and treated to remove acidic impurities. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C2 through C4, predominantly C3.] | H K | 270-755-0 | 68477-73-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-063-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic cracker | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of the products from a catalytic cracking process. It consists predominantly of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-756-6 | 68477-74-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-064-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic cracker, C1-5-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of products from a catalytic cracking rocess. It consists of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C6, predominantly C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-757-1 | 68477-75-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-065-00-2 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic polymd. naphtha stabilizer overhead, C2-4-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the fractionation stabilization of catalytic polymerized naphtha. It consists of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C2 through C6, predominantly C2 through C4.] | H K | 270-758-7 | 68477-76-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-066-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic reformer, C1-4-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by distillation of products from a catalytic reforming process. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C6, predominantly C1 through C4.] | H K | 270-760-8 | 68477-79-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-067-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), C3-5 olefinic-paraffinic alkylation feed | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of olefinic and paraffinic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C3 through C5 which are used as alkylation feed. Ambient temperatures normally exceed the critical temperature of these combinations.] | H K | 270-765-5 | 68477-83-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-068-00-9 | Gases (petroleum), C4-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by distillation of products from a catalytic fractionation process. It consists of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C3 through C5, predominantly C4.] | H K | 270-767-6 | 68477-85-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-069-00-4 | Gases (petroleum), deethanizer overheads | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced from distillation of the gas and gasoline fractions from the catalytic cracking process. It contains predominantly ethane and ethylene.] | H K | 270-768-1 | 68477-86-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-070-00-X | Gases (petroleum), deisobutanizer tower overheads | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the atmospheric distillation of a butane-butylene stream. It consists of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 through C4.] | H K | 270-769-7 | 68477-87-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-071-00-5 | Gases (petroleum), depropanizer dry, propene-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of products from the gas and gasoline fractions of a catalytic cracking process. It consists predominantly of propylene with some ethane and propane.] | H K | 270-772-3 | 68477-90-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-072-00-0 | Gases (petroleum), depropanizer overheads | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by distillation of products from the gas and gasoline fractions of a catalytic cracking process. It consists of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C4.] | H K | 270-773-9 | 68477-91-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-073-00-6 | Gases (petroleum), gas recovery plant depropanizer overheads | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by fractionation of miscellaneous hydrocarbon streams. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C4, predominantly propane.] | H K | 270-777-0 | 68477-94-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-074-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), Girbatol unit feed | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons that is used as the feed into the Girbatol unit to remove hydrogen sulfide. It consists of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C4.] | H K | 270-778-6 | 68477-95-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-075-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), isomerized naphtha fractionator, C4-rich, hydrogen sulfide-free | Petroleum gas | H K | 270-782-8 | 68477-99-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-076-00-2 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic cracked clarified oil and thermal cracked vacuum residue fractionation reflux drum | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from fractionation of catalytic cracked clarified oil and thermal cracked vacuum residue. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-802-5 | 68478-21-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-077-00-8 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic cracked naphtha stabilization absorber | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the stabilization of catalytic cracked naphtha. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-803-0 | 68478-22-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-078-00-3 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic cracker, catalytic reformer and hydrodesulfurizer combined fractionater | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the fractionation of products from catalytic cracking, catalytic reforming and hydrodesulfurizing processes treated to remove acidic impurities. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having cabon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-804-6 | 68478-24-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-079-00-9 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic reformed naphtha fractionation stabilizer | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the fractionation stabilization of catalytic reformed naphtha. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 270-806-7 | 68478-26-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-080-00-4 | Tail gas (petroleum), saturate gas plant mixed stream, C4-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the fractionation stabilization of straight-run naphtha, distillation tail gas and catalytic reformed naphtha stabilizer tail gas. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C3 through C6, predominantly butane and isobutane.] | H K | 270-813-5 | 68478-32-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-081-00-X | Tail gas (petroleum), saturate gas recovery plant, C1-2-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from fractionation of distillate tail gas, straight-run naphtha, catalytic reformed naphtha stabilizer tail gas. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C5, predominantly methane and ethane.] | H K | 270-814-0 | 68478-33-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-082-00-5 | Tail gas (petroleum), vacuum residues thermal cracker | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the thermal cracking of vacuum residues. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-815-6 | 68478-34-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-083-00-0 | Hydrocarbons, C3-4-rich, | petroleum distillate | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by distillation and condensation of crude oil. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C3 through C5, predominantly C3 through C4.] | H K | 270-990-9 | 68512-91-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-084-00-6 | Gases (petroleum), full-range straight-run naphtha dehexanizer off | petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the fractionation of the full-range straight-run naphtha. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C6.] | H K | 271-000-8 | 68513-15-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-085-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), hydrocracking depropanizer off, hydrocarbon-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbon produced by the distillation of products from a hydrocracking process. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4. It may also contain small amounts of hydrogen and hydrogen sulfide.] | H K | 271-001-3 | 68513-16-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-086-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), light straight-run naphtha stabilizer off | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the stabilization of light straight-run naphtha. It consists of saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C6.] | H K | 271-002-9 | 68513-17-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-087-00-2 | Residues (petroleum), alkylation splitter, C4-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex residuum from the distillation of streams various refinery operations. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C4 through C5, predominantly butane and boiling in the range of approximately -11.7oC to 27.8oC (11oF to 82oF).] | H K | 271-010-2 | 68513-66-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-088-00-8 | Hydrocarbons, C1-4 | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons provided by thermal cracking and absorber operations and by distillation of crude oil. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4 and boiling in the range of approximately minus 164oC to minus 0.5oC (-263oF to 31oF).] | H K | 271-032-2 | 68514-31-8 | Carc. Cat 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-089-00-3 | Hydrocarbons, C1-4, sweetened | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by subjecting hydrocarbon gases to a sweetening process to convert mercaptans or to remove acidic impurities. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4 and boiling in the range of approximately -164oC to -0.5oC (-263oF to 31oF).] | H K | 271-038-5 | 68514-36-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-090-00-9 | Hydrocarbons, C1-3 | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C3 and boiling in the range of approximately minus 164oC to minus 42oC (-263oF to -44oF).] | H K | 271-259-7 | 68527-16-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-091-00-4 | Hydrocarbons, C1-4 debutanizer fraction | Petroleum gas | H K | 271-261-8 | 68527-19-5 | Carc. Cat. 1: R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-092-00-X | Gases (petroleum), C1-5, wet | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of crude oil and/or the cracking of tower gas oil. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 271-624-0 | 68602-83-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-093-00-5 | Hydrocarbons, C2-4 | Petroleum gas | H K | 271-734-9 | 68606-25-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-094-00-0 | Hydrocarbons, C3 | Petroleum gas | H K | 271-735-4 | 68606-26-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-095-00-6 | Gases (petroleum), alkylation feed | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the catalytic cracking of gas oil. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 through C4.] | H K | 271-737-5 | 68606-27-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-096-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), depropanizer bottoms fractionation off | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the fractionation of depropanizer bottoms. It consists predominantly of butane, isobutane and butadiene.] | H K | 271-742-2 | 68606-34-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-097-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), refinery blend | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination obtained from various processes. It consists of hydrogen, hydrogen sulfide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 272-183-7 | 68783-07-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-098-00-2 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic cracking | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of the products from a catalytic cracking process. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 through C5.] | H K | 272-203-4 | 68783-64-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-099-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), C2-4, sweetened | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by subjecting a petroleum distillate to a sweetening process to convert mercaptans or to remove acidic impurities. It consists predominantly of saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C4 and boiling in the range of approximately -51oC to -34oC (-60oF to -30oF).] | H K | 272-205-5 | 68783-65-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-100-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), crude oil fractionation off | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the fractionation of crude oil. It consists of saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 272-871-7 | 68918-99-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-101-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), dehexanizer off | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the fractionation of combined naphtha streams. It consists of saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 272-872-2 | 68919-00-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 649-102-00-2 | Gases (petroleum), light straight run gasoline fractionation stabilizer off | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the fractionation of light straight-run gasoline. It consists of saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 272-878-5 | 68919-05-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-103-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), naphtha unifiner desulfurization stripper off | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by a naphtha unifiner desulfurization process and stripped from the naphtha product. It consists of saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 272-879-0 | 68919-06-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-104-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), straight-run naphtha catalytic reforming off | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the catalytic reforming of straight-run naphtha and fractionation of the total effluent. It consists of methane, ethane, and propane.] | H K | 272-882-7 | 68919-09-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-105-00-9 | Gases (petroleum), fluidized catalytic cracker splitter overheads | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the fractionation of the charge to the C3 -C4 splitter. It consists predominantly of C3 hydrocarbons.] | H K | 272-893-7 | 68919-20-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-106-00-4 | Gases (petroleum), straight-run stabilizer off | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the fractionation of the liquid from the first tower used in the distillation of crude oil. It consists of saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 272-883-2 | 68919-10-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-107-00-X | Gases (petroleum), catalytic cracked naphtha debutanizer | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from fractionation of catalytic cracked naphtha. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 273-169-3 | 68952-76-1 | Carc. Cat. 1;R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-108-00-5 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic cracked distillate and naphtha stabilizer | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the fractionation of catalytic cracked naphtha and distillate. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 273-170-9 | 68952-77-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-109-00-0 | Tail gas (petroleum), thermal-cracked distillate, gas oil and naphtha absorber | petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the separation of thermal-cracked distillates, naphtha and gas oil. It consists pedrominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 273-175-6 | 68952-81-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-110-00-6 | Tail gas (petroleum) thermal cracked hydrocarbon fractionation stabilizer, petroleum coking | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the fractionation stabilization of thermal cracked hydrocarbons from petroleum coking process. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 273-176-1 | 68952-82-9 | Carc. Cat. 1: R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-111-00-1 | Gases (petroleum, light steam-cracked, butadiene conc. | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of products from a thermal cracking process, It consists of hydrocarbons having a. carbon number predominantly of C4] | H K | 273-265-5 | 68955-28-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-112-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), straight-run naphtha catalytic reformer stabilizer overhead | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the catalytic reforming of straight-run naphtha and the fractionation of the total effluent. It consists of saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C4.] | H K | 273-270-2 | 68955-34-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-113-00-2 | Hydrocarbons, C4 | Petroleum gas | H K | 289-339-5 | 87741-01-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-114-00-8 | Alkanes, C1-4, C3-rich | Petroleum gas | H K | 292-456-4 | 90622-55-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-115-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), steam-cracker C3-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of products from a steam cracking process. It consists predominantly of propylene with some propane and boils in the range of approximately -70oC to 0oC (-94oF to 32oF).] | H K | 295-404-9 | 92045-22-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-116-00-9 | Hydrocarbons, C4, steam-cracker distillate | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of the products of a steam cracking process. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having a carbon number of C4, predominantly 1-butene and 2-butene, containing also butane and isobutene and boiling in the range of approximately minus 12oC to 5oC (10.4oF to 41 oF).] | H K | 295-405-4 | 92045-23-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-117-00-4 | Petroleum gases, liquefied, sweetened, C4 fraction | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by subjecting a liquified petroleum gas mix to a sweetening process to oxidize mercaptans or to remove acidic impurities. It consists predominantly of C4 saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons.] | HKS | 295-463-0 | 92045-80-2 | F+; R12 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | F+; T | R: 12-45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-119-00-5 | Raffinates (petroleum), steam-cracked C4 fraction cuprous ammonium acetate extn., C3-5 and C3-5 unsatd., butadiene-free | Petroleum gas | H K | 307-769-4 | 97722-19-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-120-00-0 | Gases (petroleum), amine system feed | Refinery gas | [The feed gas to the amine system for removal of hydrogen sulfide. It consists of hydrogen. Carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, hydrogen sulfide and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5 may also be present.] | H K | 270-746-1 | 68477-65-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-121-00-6 | Gases (petroleum), benzene unit hydrodesulfurizer off | Refinery gas | [Off gases produced by the benzene unit. It consists primarily of hydrogen. Carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6, including benzene, may also be present.] | H K | 270-747-7 | 68477-66-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-122-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), benzene unit recycle, hydrogen-rich | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by recycling the gases of the benzene unit. It consists primarily of hydrogen with various small amounts of carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-748-2 | 68477-67-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-123-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), blend oil, hydrogen-nitrogen-rich | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by distillation of a blend oil. It consists primarily of hydrogen and nitrogen with various small amounts of carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-749-8 | 68477-68-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-124-00-2 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic reformed naphtha stripper overheads | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from stabilization of catalytic reformed naphtha. Its consists of hydrogen and saturated hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 270-759-2 | 68477-77-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-125-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), C6-8 catalytic reformer recycle | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by distillation of products from catalytic reforming of C6-C8 feed and recycled to conserve hydrogen. It consists primarily of hydrogen. It may also contain various small amounts of carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-761-3 | 68477-80-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-126-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), C6-8 catalytic reformer | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by distillation of products from catalytic reforming of C6-C8 feed. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C5 and hydrogen.] | H K | 270-762-9 | 68477-81-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-127-00-9 | Gases (petroleum), C6-8 catalytic reformer recycle, hydrogen-rich | Refinery gas | H K | 270-763-4 | 68477-82-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-128-00-4 | Gases (petroleum), C2-return stream | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by the extraction of hydrogen from a gas stream which consists primarily of hydrogen with small amounts of nitrogen, carbon monoxide, methane, ethane, and ethylene. It contains predominantly hydrocarbons such as methane, ethane, and ethylene with small amounts of hydrogen, nitrogen and carbon monoxide.] | H K | 270-766-0 | 68477-84-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-129-00-X | Gases (petroleum), dry sour, gas-concn.-unit-off | Refinery gas | [The complex combination of dry gases from a gas concentration unit. It consists of hydrogen, hydrogen sulfide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C3.] | H K | 270-774-4 | 68477-92-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-130-00-5 | Gases (petroleum), gas concn. reabsorber distn. | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by distillation of products from combined gas streams in a gas concentration reabsorber. It consists predominantly of hydrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, hydrogen sulfide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C3.] | H K | 270-776-5 | 68477-93-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-131-00-0 | Gases (petroleum), hydrogen absorber off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained - by absorbing hydrogen from a hydrogen rich stream. It consists of hydrogen, carbon monoxide, nitrogen, and methane with small amounts of C2 hydrocarbons.] | H K | 270-779-1 | 68477-96-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-132-00-6 | Gases (petroleum), hydrogen-rich | Refinery gas | [A complex combination separated as a gas from hydrocarbon gases by chilling. It consists primarily of hydrogen with various small amounts of carbon monoxide, nitrogen, methane, and C2 hydrocarbons.] | H K | 270-780-7 | 68477-97-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-133-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), hydrotreater blend oil recycle, hydrogen-nitrogen-rich | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from recycled hydrotreated blend oil. It consists primarily of hydrogen and nitrogen with various small amounts of carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-781-2 | 68477-98-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-134-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), recycle, hydrogen-rich | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from recycled reactor gases. It consists primarily of hydrogen with various small amounts of carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, hydrogen sulfide, and saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-783-3 | 68478-00-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-135-00-2 | Gases (petroleum), reformer make-up, hydrogen-rich | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from the reformers. It consists primarily of hydrogen with various small amounts of carbon monoxide and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-784-9 | 68478-01-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-136-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), reforming hydrotreater | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from the reforming hydrotreating process. It consists primarily of hydrogen, methane, and ethane hydrogen sulfide and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 thorugh C5.] | H K | 270-785-4 | 68478-02-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-137-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), reforming hydrotreater, hydrogen-methane-rich | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from the reforming hydrotreating process. It consists primarily of hydrogen and methane with various small amounts of carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, nitrogen and saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C5.] | H K | 270-787-5 | 68478-03-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-138-00-9 | Gases (petroleum), reforming hydrotreater make-up, hydrogen-rich | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from the reforming hydrotreating process. It consists primarily of hydrogen with various small amounts of carbon monoxide and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-788-0 | 68478-04-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-139-00-4 | Gases (petroleum), thermal cracking distn. | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by distillation of products from a thermal cracking process. It consists of hydrogen, hydrogen sulfide, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-789-6 | 68478-05-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-140-00-X | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic cracker refractionation absorber | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from refractionation of products from a catalytic cracking process. It consists of hydrogen and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C3.] | H K | 270-805-1 | 68478-25-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-141-00-5 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic reformed naphtha separator | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the catalytic reforming of straight run naphtha. It consists of hydrogen and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-807-2 | 68478-27-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-142-00-0 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic reformed naphtha stabilizer | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the stabilization of catalytic reformed naphtha. It consists of hydrogen and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-808-8 | 68478-28-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-143-00-6 | Tail gas (petroleum), cracked distillate hydrotreater separator | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by treating cracked distillates with hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst. It consists of hydrogen and saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 270-809-3 | 68478-29-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-144-00-1 | Tail gas (petroleum), hydrodesulfurized straight-run naphtha separator | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from hydrodesulfurization of straight-run naphtha. It consists of hydrogen and saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 270-810-9 | 68478-30-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-145-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic reformed straight-run naphtha stabilizer overheads | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the catalytic reforming of straight-run naphtha followed by fractionation of the total effluent. It consists of hydrogen, methane, ethane and propane.] | H K | 270-999-8 | 68513-14-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-146-00-2 | Gases (petroleum), reformer effluent high-pressure flash drum off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by the high-pressure flashing of the effluent from the reforming reactor. It consists primarily of hydrogen with various small amounts of methane, ethane, and propane.] | H K | 271-003-4 | 68513-18-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-147-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), reformer effluent low-pressure flash drum off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by low-pressure flashing of the effluent from the reforming reactor. It consists primarily of hydrogen with various small amounts of methane, ethane, and propane.] | H K | 271-005-5 | 68513-19-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-148-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), oil refinery gas distn. off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination separated by distillation of a gas stream containing hydrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C6 or obtained by cracking ethane and propane. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C2, hydrogen, nitrogen, and carbon monoxide.] | H K | 271-258-1 | 68527-15-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-149-00-9 | Gases (petroleum), benzene unit hydrotreater depentanizer overheads | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by treating the feed from the benzene unit with hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst followed by depentanizing. It consists primarily of hydrogen, ethane and propane with various small amounts of nitrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6. It may contain trace amounts of benzene.] | H K | 271-623-5 | 68602-82-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-150-00-4 | Gases (petroleum), secondary absorber off, fluidized catalytic cracker overheads fractionator | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by the fractionation of the overhead products from the catalytic cracking process in the fluidized catalytic cracker. It consists of hydrogen, nitrogen, and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C3.] | H K | 271-625-6 | 68602-84-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-151-00-X | Petroleum products, refinery gases | Refinery gas | [A complex combination which consists primarily of hydrogen with various small amounts of methane, ethane, and propane.] | H K | 271-750-6 | 68607-11-4 | Car. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 649-152-00-5 | Gases (petroleum), hydrocracking low-pressure separator | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained by the liquid-vapor separation of the hydrocracking process reactor effluent. It consists predominantly of hydrogen and saturated hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C3.] | H K | 272-182-1 | 68783-06-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-153-00-0 | Gases (petroleum), refinery | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from various petroleum refining operations. It consists of hydrogen and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C3.] | H K | 272-338-9 | 68814-67-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-154-00-6 | Gases (petroleum), platformer products separator off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from the chemical reforming of naphthenes to aromatics. It consists of hydrogen and saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C4.] | H K | 272-343-6 | 68814-90-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-155-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), hydrotreated sour kerosine depentanizer stabilizer off | Refinery gas | [The complex combination obtained from the depentanizer stabilization of hydrotreated kerosine. It consists primarily of hydrogen, methane, ethane, and propane with various small amounts of nitrogen, hydrogen sulfide, carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C4 through C5.] | H K | 272-775-5 | 68911-58-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 649-156-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), hydrotreated sour kerosine flash drum | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from the flash drum of the unit treating sour kerosine with hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst. It consists primarily of hydrogen and methane with various small amounts of nitrogen, carbon monoxide, and hydro-carbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C2 through C5.] | H K | 272-776-0 | 68911-59-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-157-00-2 | Gases (petroleum), distillate unifiner desulfurization stripper off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination stripped from the liquid product of the unifiner desulfurization process. It consists of hydrogen sulfide, methane, ethane, and propane.] | H K | 272-873-8 | 68919-01-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-158-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), fluidized catalytic cracker fractionation off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by the fractionation of the overhead product of the fluidized catalytic cracking process. It consists of hydrogen, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen, and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 272-874-3 | 68919-02-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-159-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), fluidized catalytic cracker scrubbing secondary absorber off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by scrubbing the overhead gas from the fluidized catalytic cracker. It consists of hydrogen, nitrogen, methane, ethane and propane.] | H K | 272-875-9 | 68919-03-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-160-00-9 | Gases (petroleum), heavy distillate hydrotreater desulfurization stripper off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination stripped from the liquid product of the heavy distillate hydrotreater desulfurization process. It consists of hydrogen, hydrogen sulfide, and saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 272-876-4 | 68919-04-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-161-00-4 | Gases (petroleum), platformer stabilizer off, light ends fractionation | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained by the fractionation of the light ends of the platinum reactors of the plattformer unit. It consists of hydrogen, methane, ethane and propane.] | H K | 272-880-6 | 68919-07-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-162-00-X | Gases (petroleum), preflash tower off, crude distn. | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced from the first tower used in the distillation of crude oil. It consists of nitrogen and saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 272-881-1 | 68919-08-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-163-00-5 | Gases (petroleum), tar stripper off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained by the fractionation of reduced crude oil. It consists of hydrogen and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 272-884-8 | 68919-11-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-164-00-0 | Gases (petroleum), unifiner stripper off | Refinery gas | [A combination of hydrogen and methane obtained by fractionation of the products from the unifiner unit.] | H K | 272-885-3 | 68919-12-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-165-00-6 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic hydrodesulfurized naphtha separator | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the hydrodesulfurization of naphtha. It consists of hydrogen, methane, ethane, and propane.] | H K | 273-173-5 | 68952-79-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-166-00-1 | Tail gas (petroleum), straight-run naphtha hydrodesulfurizer | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from the hydrodesulfurization of straight-run naphtha: It consists of hydrogen and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 273-174-0 | 68952-80-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-167-00-7 | Gases (petroleum), sponge absorber off, fluidized catalytic cracker and gas oil desulfurizer overhead fractionation | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained by the fractionation of products from the fluidized catalytic cracker and gas oil desulfurizer. It consists of hydrogen and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 273-269-7 | 68955-33-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-168-00-2 | Gases (petroleum), crude distn. and catalytic cracking | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by crude distillation and catalytic cracking processes. It consists of hydrogen, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen, carbon monoxide and paraffinic and olefinic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 273-563-5 | 68989-88-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-169-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), gas oil diethanolamine scrubber off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination produced by desulfurization of gas oils with diethanolamine. It consists predominantly of hydrogen sulfide, hydrogen and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 295-397-2 | 92045-15-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-170-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), gas oil hydrodesulfurization effluent | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained by separation of the liquid phase from the effluent from the hydrogenation reaction. It consists predominantly of hydrogen, hydrogen sulfide and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C3.] | H K | 295-398-8 | 92045-16-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-171-00-9 | Gases (petroleum), gas oil hydrodesulfurization purge | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of gases obtained from the reformer and from the purges from the hydrogenation reactor. It consists predominantly of hydrogen and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 295-399-3 | 92045-17-5 | Carc.Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-172-00-4 | Gases (petroleum), hydrogenator effluent flash drum off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination of gases obtained from flash of the effluents after the hydrogenation reaction. It consists predominantly of hydrogen and aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 295400-7 | 92045-18-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 649-173-00-X | Gases (petroleum), naphtha steam cracking high-pressure residual | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained as a mixture of the non-condensable portions from the product of a naphtha steam cracking process as well as residual gases obtained during the preparation of subsequent products. It consists predominantly of hydrogen and paraffinic and olefinic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5 with which natural gas may also be mixed.] | H K | 295-401-2 | 92045-19-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-174-00-5 | Gases (petroleum), residue visbaking off | Refinery gas | [A complex combination obtained from viscosity reduction of residues in a furnace. It consists predominantly of hydrogen sulfide and paraffinic and olefinic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 295-402-8 | 92045-20-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-177-00-1 | Gases (petroleum), C3-4 | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by distillation of products from the cracking of crude oil. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C3 through C4, predominantly of propane and propylene, and boiling in the range of approximately -51oC to -1oC (-60 oF to 30 oF.)] | H K | 268-629-5 | 68131-75-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-178-00-7 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic cracked distillate and catalytic cracked naphtha fractionation absorber | Petroleum gas | [The complex combination of hydrocarbons from the distillation of the products from catalytic cracked distillates and catalytic cracked naphtha. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 269-617-2 | 68307-98-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-179-00-2 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic polymn. naphtha fractionation stabilizer | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons from the fractionation stabilization products from polymerization of naphtha. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 269-618-8 | 68307-99-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-180-00-8 | Tail gas (petroleum), catalytic reformed naphtha fractionation stabilizer, hydrogen sulfide-free | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from fractionation stabilization of catalytic reformed naphtha and from which hydrogen sulfide has been removed by amine treatment. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 269-619-3 | 68308-00-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-181-00-3 | Tail gas (petroleum), cracked distillate hydrotreater stripper | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by treating thermal cracked distillates with hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst. It consists predominantly of saturated hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 269-620-9 | 68308-01-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 649-182-00-9 | Tail gas (petroleum), straight-run distillate hydrodesulfurizer, hydrogen sulfide-free | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from catalytic hydrodesulfurization of straight run distillates and from which hydrogen sulfide has been removed by amine treatment. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 269-630-3 | 68308-10-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-183-00-4 | Tail gas (petroleum), gas oil catalytic cracking absorber | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the distillation of products from the catalytic cracking of gas oil. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 269-623-5 | 68308-03-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-184-00-X | Tail gas (petroleum), gas recovery plant | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons from the distillation of products from miscellaneous hydrocarbon streams. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 269-624-0 | 68308-04-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-185-00-5 | Tail gas (petroleum), gas recovery plant deethanizer | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons from the distillation of products from miscellaneous hydrocarbon streams. It consists of hydrocarbon having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 269-625-6 | 68308-05-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 649-186-00-0 | Tail gas (petroleum), hydrodesulfurized distillate and hydrodesulfurized naphtha fractionator, acid-free | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from fractionation of hydrodesulfurized naphtha and distillate hydrocarbon streams and treated to remove acidic impurities. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 269-626-1 | 68308-06-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-187-00-6 | Tail gas (petroleum), hydrodesulfurized vacuum gas oil stripper, hydrogen sulfide-free | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from stripping stabilization of catalytic hydrodesulfurized vacuum gas oil and from which hydrogen sulfide has been removed by amine treatment. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 269-627-7 | 68308-07-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-188-00-1 | Tail gas (petroleum), light straight-run naphtha stabilizer, hydrogen sulfide-free | petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from fractionation stabilization of light straight run naphtha and from which hydrogen sulfide has been removed by amine treatment. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C5.] | H K | 269-629-8 | 68308-09-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-189-00-7 | Tail gas (petroleum), propane-propylene alkylation feed prep deethanizer | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the distillation of the reaction products of propane with propylene. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.) | H K | 269-631-9 | 68308-11-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-190-00-2 | Tail gas (petroleum), vacuum gas oil hydrodesulfurizer, hydrogen sulfide-free | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from catalytic hydrodesulfurization of vacuum gas oil and from which hydrogen sulfide has been removed by amine treatment. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C6.] | H K | 269-632-4 | 68308-12-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-191-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic cracked overheads | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of products from the catalytic cracking process. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 through C5 and boiling in the range of approximately -48oC to 32oC (-54oF to 90oF).] | H K | 270-071-2 | 68409-99-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-193-00-9 | Alkanes, C1-2 | Petroleum gas | H K | 270-651-5 | 68475-57-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-194-00-4 | Alkanes, C2-3 | Petroleum gas | H K | 270-652-0 | 68475-58-1 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-195-00-X | Alkanes, C3-4 | petroleum gas | H K | 270-653-6 | 68475-59-2 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-196-00-5 | Alkanes, C4-5 | Petroleum gas | H K | 270-654-1 | 68475-60-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-197-00-0 | Fuel gases | Petroleum gas | [A combination of light gases. It consists predominantly of hydrogen and/or low molecular weight hydrocarbons.] | H K | 270-667-2 | 68476-26-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-198-00-6 | Fuel gases, crude oil of distillates | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of light gases produced by distillation of crude oil and by catalytic reforming of naphtha. It consists of hydrogen and hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4 and boiling in the range of approximately -217oC to -12 oC(-423 oF to 10 oF).] | H K | 270-670-9 | 68476-29-9 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-199-00-1 | Hydrocarbons, C3-4 | Petroleum gas | H K | 270-681-9 | 68476-40-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-200-00-5 | Hydrocarbons, C4-5 | Petroleum gas | H K | 270-682-4 | 68476-42-6 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-201-00-0 | Hydrocarbons, C2-4, C3-rich | Petroleum gas | H K | 270-689-2 | 68476-49-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-202-00-6 | Petroleum gases, liquefied | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of crude oil. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 through C7 and boiling in the range of approximately -40 oC to 80 oC (-40 oF to 176 oF).] | HKS | 270-704-2 | 68476-85-7 | F+; R12 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | F+; T | R: 12-45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-203-00-1 | Petroleum gases, liquefied, sweetened | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained by subjecting liquefied petroleum gas mix to a sweetening process to convert mercaptans or to remove acidic impurities. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 through C7 and boiling in the range of approximately -40 oC to 80 oC (-40oFtol76oF).] | HKS | 270-705-8 | 68476-86-8 | F+; R12 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | F+; T | R: 12-45-46 | S: 45-53 | | | |
| 649-204-00-7 | gases (petroleum), C3-4, isobutane-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons from the distillation of saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons usually ranging in carbon numbers from C3 through C6, predominantly butane and isobutane. It consists of saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C3 through C4, predominantly isobutane.] | H K | 270-724-1 | 68477-33-8 | Carc. Cat.. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-205-00-2 | Distillates (petroleum), C3-6, piperylene-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons from the distillation of saturated and unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbons usually ranging in the carbon numbers C3 through C6. It consists of saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C3 through C6, predominantly piperylenes.] | H K | 270-726-2 | 68477-35-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-206-00-8 | Gases (petroleum), butane splitter overheads | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the distillation of the butane stream. It consists of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 through C4.] | H K | 270-750-3 | 68477-69-0 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-207-00-3 | Gases (petroleum), C2. | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of products from a catalytic fractionation process. It contains predominantly ethane, ethylene, propane, and propylene.] | H K | 270-751-9 | 68477-70-3 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-208-00-9 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic-cracked gas oil depropanizer bottoms, C4-rich acid-free | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from fractionation of catalytic cracked gas oil hydrocarbon stream and treated to remove hydrogen sulfide and other acidic components. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers in the range of C3 through C5, predominantly C4.] | H K | 270-752-4 | 68477-71-4 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-209-00-4 | Gases (petroleum), catalytic-cracked naphtha debutanizer bottoms, C3-5-rich | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the stabilization of catalytic cracked naphtha. It consists of aliphatic hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C3 through C5.] | H K | 270-754-5 | 68477-72-5 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-210-00-X | Tail gas (petroleum), isomerized naphtha fractionation stabilizer | Petroleum gas | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons obtained from the fractionation stabilization products from isomerized naphtha. It consists predominantly of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C1 through C4.] | H K | 269-628-2 | 68308-08-7 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | T | R: 45-46 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 649-224-00-6 | Fuels, diesel | Gasoil - unspecified | [A complex combination of hydrocarbons produced by the distillation of crude oil. It consists of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers predominantly in the range of C9 through C20 and boiling in the range of approximately 163oC to 357oC (325 oF to 675 oF).] | H N | 269-822-7 | 68334-30-5 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Xn | R: 40 | S: (2-)36/37 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 005-009-00-3 | tetrabutylammonium | butyltriphenylborate | | 418-080-4 | 120307-06-4 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-56-61 | | | |
| 005-010-00-9 | N,N-dimethylanilinium | tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate | | 422-050-6 | 118612-00-3 | Carc.Cat.3; R40 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R38-41 | Xn | R: 22-38-40-41 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39 | | | |
| 005-012-00-X | diethyl{4-[1,5,5-tris(4-diethylaminophenyl)penta-2,4-dienylidene]cyclohexa-2,5-dienylidene} ammonium butyltriphenylborate | | 418-070-1 | 141714-54-7 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 011-007-00-3 | propoxycarbazone-sodium | | - | - | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | C ≥ 2,5 %: N; R50/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R51/53 | 0,025 ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52/53 | | |
| 013-009-00-X | sodium((n-butyl)x(ethyl)y-1,5-dihydro)aluminate) x = 0.5 y = 1.5 | | 418-720-2 | - | F; R11 | R14/15 | R 17 | Xn; R20 | C; R35 | F; C | R: 11-14/15-17-20-35 | S: (1/2-)6-16-26-30-36/37/39-43-45 | | | |
| 014-026-00-5 | dichloro-(3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)propyl)methylsilane | | 407-180-3 | - | C; R35 | C | R:35 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45 | | | |
| 014-027-00-0 | chloro(3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)propyl)dimethylsilane | | 410-270-5 | - | C; R35 | C | R:35 | S: (1/2-)8-26-28-36/37/39-45 | | | |
| 014-028-00-6 | α-[3-(1-oxoprop-2-eny)l-1-oxypropyl]dimethoxysilyloxy-ω-[3(1-oxoprop-2-enyl)-1-oxypropyl]dimethoxysilyl poly(dimetliylsiloxane) | | 415-290-8 | - | R 43 | Xi | R:43 | S: (2-)24-37 | | | |
| 014-029-00-1 | O,O'-(ethenylmethylsilylene)di[(4-methylpentan-2-one)oxime] | | 421-870-1 | - | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | Xn; R22-48/22 | Xn | R: 22-48/22-62 | S: (2-)36/37 | | | |
| 014-030-00-7 | [(dimethylsilylene)bis((1,2,3,3a,7a-η)-1H-inden-1-ylidene)dimethyl]hafnium | | 422-060-0 | 137390-08-0 | T+; R28 | T+ | R: 28 | S: (1/2-)6-22-28-36/37-45 | | | |
| 014-031-00-2 | bis(1-methylethyl)-dimethoxysilane | | 421-540-7 | 18230-61-0 | R10 | Xi; R38 | R43 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 10-38-43-52/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 014-032-00-8 | dicyclopentyldimethoxysilane | | 404-370-8 | 126990-35-0 | Xi; R38-41 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-37/3,9-60-61 | | | |
| 015-180-00-6 | [R-(R*,S*)]-[[2-methyl-1-(1-oxopropoxy)propoxyl-(4-phenylbutyl)phosphinyll acetic acid, (-)-cinchonidine (1:1) salt | | 415-820-8 | 137590-32-0 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 41-43-52/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 015-181-00-1 | phosphine | | 232-260-8 | 7803-51-2 | F+; R12 | R17 | T+; R26 | C; R34 | N; R50 | F+; T+; N | R: 12-17-26-34-50 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-61-63 | | | |
| 015-184-00-8 | Salts of glyphosate, with the exception of those specified elsewhere in this Annex | | - | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 015-186-00-9 | chlorpyrifos-methyl | | 227-011-5 | 5598-13-0 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-60-61 | C ≥ 1 %: N; R43-50-53 | 0,0025 % ≤C < 1 %: N; R5O-53 | 0,00025 % ≤C < 0,0025 %: N; R51-53 | 0,000025 % ≤C < 0,00025 %: R52-53 | | |
| 015-187-00-4 | A mixture of: tetrasodium(((2-hydroxyethyl)i mino)bis(methylen e))bisphosphonate, N-oxide; trisodium ((tetrahydro-2-hydroxy-4H-1,4,2-oxazaphosphorin-4-yl)-methyl)phosphonate, N-oxide, P-oxide | | 417-540-1 | - | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-51/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 015-189-00-5 | phenyl bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)-phosphine oxide | | 423-340-5 | 162881-26-7 | R43 | R53 | Xi | R: 43-53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 016-086-00-8 | tetrasodium 10-amino-6,13-dichloro-3-(3-(4-(2,5-disulfonatoanilino)-6-fluoro-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)prop-3-ylamino)-5,12-dioxa-7,14-diazapentacene-4,11-disulfonate | | 402-590-9 | 109125-56-6 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R:41 | S: (2-)22-26-39 | | | |
| 016-087-00-3 | A mixture of: thiobis(4,1-phenylene)-S,S,S',S'-tetraphenyldisulfonium | bishexafluorophosphate diphenyl(4-phenylthiophenyl)sulfonium | hexafluorophosphate | propylene carbonate | | 403-490-8 | 74227-35-3 | Xi; R36 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 36-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37-60-61 | | | |
| 016-088-00-9 | 4-(bis(4-(diethylamino)phenyl)methyl)benzene-1,2-dimethanesulfonic acid | | 407-280-7 | 71297-11-5 | R 52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 016-089-00-4 | A mixture of esters of 5,5',6,6',7,7'-hexahydroxy-3,3,3',3'-tetramethyl-1,1'-spirobiindan and 2-diazo-1,2-dihydro-1-oxo-5-sulfonaphthalene | | 413-840-1 | - | E; R2 | F; R11 | R 53 | E | R: 2-11-53 | S: (2-)33-35-40-61 | | | |
| 016-090-00-X | 4-methyl-N-(methylsulfonyl)benzenesulfonamide | | 415-040-8 | 14653-91-9 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R37-41 | Xn | R: 22-37-41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 016-091-00-5 | C12-14-tert-alkyl ammonium 1-amino-9,10-dihydro-9,10-dioxo-4-(2,4,6-trimethylanilino)-anthracen-2-sulfonate | | 414-110-5 | - | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 016-093-00-6 | A 2:1 mixture of: 4-(7-hydroxy-2,4,4-trimethyl-2-chromanyl)resorcinol-4-yl-tris(6-diazo-5,6-dihydro-5-oxonaphthalen-1-sulfonate) 4-(7-hydroxy-2,4,4-trimethyl-2-chromanyl)resorcinolbis(6-diazo-5,6-dihydro- 5-oxonaphthalen-1-sulfonate) | | 414-770-4 | 140698-96-0 | F; R11 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | F; Xn | R: 11-40 | S: (2-)7-36/37 | | | |
| 016-095-00-7 | A mixture of: reaction product of 4,4'-methylenebis[2-(4-hydroxybenzyl)-3,6-dimethylphenol] and 6-diazo-5,6-dihydro-5-oxo-naphthalenesulfonate (1:2) Reaction product of 4,4'-methylenebis [2-(4-hydroxybenzyl)-3,6-dimethylphenol] and 6-diazo-5,6-dihydro-5-oxo-naphthalenesulfonate (1:3) | | 417-980-4 | - | F; R11 | Carc.Cat.3; R40 | F; Xn | R: 11-40 | S: (2-)7-36/37 | | | |
| 016-096-00-2 | thifensulfuron-methyl | | - | 79277-27-3 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 017-015-00-3 | (2-(aminomethyl)phenyl)acetylchloride hydrochloride | | 417-410-4 | 61807-67-8 | Xn; R22 | C; R35 | R43 | C | R: 22-35-43 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45 | | | |
| 017-016-00-9 | methyltriphenylphosphonium | chloride | | 418-400-2 | 1031-15-8 | Xn; R21/22 | Xi; R38-41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-38-41-51/53 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 017-017-00-4 | (Z)-13-docosenyl-N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)-N-methyl-ammonium-chloride | | 426-210-6 | 120086-58-0 | C; R34 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 34-50/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 017-018-00-X | N,N,N-trimethyl-2,3-bis(stearoyloxy)propylammonium chloride | | 405-660-7 | - | N;R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 017-019-00-5 | (R)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-6,7-dimethoxy-1-veratrylisoquinoline hydrochloride | | 415-110-8 | 54417-53-7 | Xn; R22 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 22-52/53 | S: (2-)22-61 | | | |
| 017-020-00-0 | ethyl propoxy aluminium chloride | | 421-790-7 | - | C; R35 | F; R14/15 | C; F | R: 14/15-35 | S: (1/2-)16-23-26-30-36/37/39-43-45 | | | |
| 017-021-00-6 | behenamidopropyl-dimethyl-(dihydroxypropyl) ammonium chloride | | 423-420-1 | 136920-10-0 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-43-50/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 020-003-00-0 | A mixture of: dicalcium (bis(2-hydroxy-5-tetra-propenylphenylmethyl) methylami ne)dihydroxide | tri-calcium (tris(2-hydroxy-5-tetra-propenylphenylmethyl)methylami ne)tri-hydroxide | poly[calcium ((2-hydroxy-5-tetra-propenyl-phenylmethyl)methylamine)hydr oxide] | | 420-470-4 | - | Xi; R36/38 | R43 | Xi | R: 36/38-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37 | | | |
| 024-019-00-9 | Main component: acetoacetic acid anilide/3-amino-1-hydroxybenzene (ATAN-MAP): trisodium {6-[(2 or 3 or 4)-amino-(4 or 5 or 6)-hydroxyphenylazo]-5'-(phenylsulfamoyl)-3-sulfonatonaphthalene-2-azobenzene-1,2'-diolato}-{6"-[1-(phenylcarbamoyl)ethylazo]-5"'-(phenylsulfamoyl)-3"-sulfonatonaphthalene-2"-azobenzene-1",2"'-diolato ] chromate (III) | by-product 1: acetoacetic acid anilide /acetoacetic acid anilide (ATAN-ATAN): trisodium bis {6-[1-(phenylcarbamoyl)ethylazo]-5'-(phenylsulfonyl)-3 -sulfonatonaphthalene-2-azobenzene-1,2'-diolatojchromate (III) | by-product 2: 3-amino-1-hydroxybenzene /3-amino-1-hydroxybenzene (MAP-MAP): trisodium bis {6-[(2 or 3 or 4)-amino-(4 or 5 or 6)-hydroxyphenylazo]-5'-(phenylsulfamoyl)-3-sulfonatonaphthalene-2-azobenzene-1,2'-diolato} chromate (III) | | 419-230-1 | - | R 43 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 43-52/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 024-020-00-4 | trisodium bis[(3'-nitro-5'-sulfonato(6-amino-2-[4-(2-hydroxy-1-naphtylazo)phenylsulfonylamino] pyrimidin-5-azo)benzene-2',4-diolato)]chromate(III) | | 418-220-4 | - | R43 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 43-52/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 025-005-00-5 | A mixture of: tri-sodium [29H,31H-phthalocyanine-C,C,C-trisulfonato (6-)-N29,N30,N31,N32] manganate (3-) | tetrasodium [29H,31H-phthalocyanine-C,C,C,C-tetrasulfonato (6-)-N29,N30,N31,N32], manganate (3-) | pentasodium [29H,31H-phthalocyanine-C,C,C,C,C-pentasulfonato (6-)-N29,N30,N31,N32] manganate (3-) | | 417-660-4 | - | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 029-012-00-4 | sodium ((N-(3-trimethylammoniopropyl)sulfamoyl)methylsulfonatophthalocyaninato)copper(II) | | 407-340-2 | 124719-24-0 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 029-013-00-X | trisodium(2-(α-(3-(4-chloro-6-(2-(2-(vinylsulfonyl)ethoxy)ethylamino )-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)-2-oxido-5-sulfonatophenylazo)benzylidenehydrazino)-4-sulfonatobenzoato)copper(Il) | | 407-580-8 | 130201-51-3 | Xi; R41 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 030-011-00-6 | trizinc bis(orthophosphate) | | 231-944-3 | 7779-90-0 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 030-013-00-7 | zinc oxide | | 215-222-5 | 1314-13-2 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 034-003-00-3 | sodium selenite | | 233-267-9 | 10102-18-8 | T+; R28 | T; R23 | R31 | R43 | N; R51-53 | T+; N | R: 23-28-31-43-51/53 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45-61 | | | |
| 053-005-00-5 | (4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)-(4-methylphenyl)iodonium | tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate (1-) | | 422-960-3 | 178233-72-2 | Xn; R21/22-48/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-36/37-60-61 | | | |
| 601-056-00-4 | A mixture of isomers of: | methyldiphenylmethane | dimethyldiphenylmethane | | 405-470-4 | - | Xi; R38 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-50/53 | S: (2-)37-60-61 | | | |
| 601-057-00-X | N-dodecyl-[3-(4-dimethylamino)benzamido)-propyl]dimethylammonium tosylate | | 421-130-8 | 156679-41-3 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 601-058-00-5 | di-L-para-menthene | | 417-870-6 | - | Xi; R38 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-43-50/53 | S: (2-)23-24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 601-059-00-0 | methyl 2-benzylidene-3-oxobutyrate | | 420-940-9 | 15768-07-7 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/38-51/53 | S: (2-)26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 601-060-00-6 | 1,2-bis[4-fluoro-6-{4-sulfo-5-(2-(4-sulfonaphtalene-3-ylazo)-1-hydroxy-3,6-disulfo-8-aminonaphthalene-7-ylazo)phenylamino}-1,3,5-triazin-2ylaminolethane;x-sodium, y-potassium salts x = 7,755 y = 0,245 | | 417-610-1 | 155522-09-1 | R 43 | Xi | R:43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 601-061-00-1 | (ethyl-1,2-ethanediyl)[-2-[[[(2-hydroxyethyl)methylamino]acetyl]-propyl]ω-(nonylphenoxy)poly]oxy-(methyl-1,2-ethanediyl) | | 418-960-8 | - | C; R34 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | C; N | R: 34-43-51/53 | S: (1/2-)26-28-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 601-062-00-7 | A mixture of: branched triacontane | branched dotriacontane | branched tetratriacontane | branched hexatriacontane | | 417-030-9 | 151006-59-6 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 601-063-00-2 | A mixture of isomers of branched tetracosane | | 417-060-2 | 151006-61-0 | Xn; R20 | R53 | Xn | R: 20-53 | S: (2-)61 | | | |
| 601-064-00-8 | branched hexatriacontane | | 417-070-7 | 151006-62-1 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 601-065-00-3 | A mixture of: (1'-α,3',6'-α-2,2,3',7',7'-pentamethylspiro(1,3-dioxane-5,2'-norcarane) (1'α,3'β,6'α)-2,2,3',7',7'-pentamethylspiro( 1,3-dioxane-5,2'-norcarane) | | 416-930-9 | - | Xn; R48/22 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 41-48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)22-26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 601-066-00-9 | 1-(4-(trans-4-heptylcyclohexyl)phenyl)ethane | | 426-820-2 | 78531-60-9 | R43 | R53 | Xi | R: 43-53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 601-067-00-4 | triethyl arsenate | | 427-700-2 | 15606-95-8 | Carc. Cat. 1; R45 | T; R23/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/25-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 601-068-00-X | 1,2-diacetoxybut-3-ene | | 421-720-5 | 18085-02-4 | Xn; R22 | Xn | R: 22 | S: (2-) | | | |
| 601-069-00-5 | 2-ethyl-1-(2-(1,3-dioxanyl)ethyl)-pyridinium bromide | | 422-680-1 | - | R52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 601-071-00-6 | 1-dimethoxymethyl-2-nitrobenzene | | 423-830-9 | 20627-73-0 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 601-073-00-7 | 1-bromo-3,5-difluorobenzene | | 416-710-2 | 461-96-1 | R10 | Xn; R22-48/22 | Xi; R38 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 10-22-38-43-48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)24-36/37-60-61 | | | |
| 601-074-00-2 | A mixture of: 4-(2,2,3-trimethylcyclopent-3-en-1-yl)-1-methyl-2-oxabicyclo[2.2.2]octane 1-(2,2,3-trimethylcyclopent-3-en-1-yl)-5-methyl-6-oxabicyclo[3.2.1]octane spiro[cyclohex-3-en-1-yl-[(4,5,6,6a-tetrahydro-3,6',6',6'a-tetramethyl)-1,3'(3'aH)-[2H]cyclopenta[b]furan] spiro[cyclohex-3-en-1-yl-[4,5,6,6a-tetrahydro-4,6',6',6'a-tetramethyl)-1,3'(3'aH)-[2H]cyclopenta[b]]furan] | | 422-040-1 | - | Xi; R36/38 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/38-51/53 | S: (2-)26-37-61 | | | |
| 602-093-00-9 | α,α,α4-tetrachlorotoluene | p-chlorobenzotrichloride | E | 226-009-1 | 5216-25-1 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T; R48/23 | Xn; R21/22 | Xi; R37/38 | T | R: 45-21/22-37/38-48/23-62 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 602-094-00-4 | diphenylether; octabromo derivate | | 251-087-9 | 32536-52-0 | Repr. Cat. 2; R61 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T | R: 61-62 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 602-096-00-5 | malachite green hydrochloride | [1] | malachite green oxalate | [2] | | 209-322-8 | [1] | 219-441-7 | [2] | 569-64-2 [1] | 18015-76-4 [2] | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-63-50/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37-39-46-60-61 | | | |
| 602-097-00-0 | 1-bromo-9-(4,4,5,5,5-pentafluoropentylthio)nonane | | 422-850-5 | 148757-89-5 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 603-167-00-3 | 3,3',5,5'-tetra-tert-butylbiphenyl-2,2'-diol | | 407-920-5 | 6390-69-8 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 603-168-00-9 | 3-(2-ethylhexyloxy)propane-1,2-diol | | 408-080-2 | 70445-33-9 | Xi; R41 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 603-169-00-4 | (+/-)-trans-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methylpiperidine | | 415-550-0 | 109887-53-8 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-51/53 | S: (2-)22-26-39-61 | | | |
| 603-170-00-X | A mixture of: 2-methyl-1-(6-methylbicyclo[2.2.1] hept-5-en-2-yl)pent-1-en-3-ol | 2-methyl-1-(1-methylbicycloL2.2.1]hept-5-en-2-yl)-pent-1-en-3-ol | 2-methyl-1-(5-methylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-5-en-2-yl)pent-1-en-3-ol | | 415-990-3 | 67739-11-1 | Xi; R36 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36-51/53 | S: (2-)26-61 | | | |
| 603-171-00-5 | 5-thiazolylmethanol | | 414-780-9 | 38585-74-9 | Xi; R41 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 603-172-00-0 | mono-2-[2-(4-dibenzo[b,f][1,4]thiazepin-11-yl)piperazinium-1-yl]ethoxy)ethanol trans-butenedioate | | 415-180-1 | - | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-51/53 | S: (2-)22-26-39-61 | | | |
| 603-173-00-6 | 4,4-dimethyl-3,5,8-trioxabicyclo[5.1.0] octane | | 421-750-9 | 57280-22-5 | Xi; R36 | R 43 | Xi | R: 36-43 | S: (2-)26-36/37 | | | |
| 603-174-00-1 | 4-cyclohexyl-2-methyl-2-butanol | | 420-630-3 | 83926-73-2 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-51/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 603-175-00-7 | 2-(2-hexyloxyethoxy)ethanol | DEGHE | diethylene glycol monohexyl | ether | 3,6-dioxa-1-dodecanol hexyl carbitol | 3,6-dioxadodecan-1-ol | | 203-988-3 | 112-59-4 | Xn; R21 | Xi; R41 | Xn | R: 21-41 | S: (2-)26-36/37-46 | | | |
| 603-176-00-2 | 1,2-bis(2-methoxyethoxy)ethane | TEGDME | triethylene glycol dimethyl ether triglyme | | 203-977-3 | 112-49-2 | R19 | Repr. Cat.2; R61 | Repr. Cat.3; R62 | T | R: 61-19-62 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 603-177-00-8 | 1-ethoxypropan-2-ol | 2PG1EE | 1-ethoxy-2-propanol | propylene glycol monoethyl ether | [1] | 2-ethoxy-1-methylethyl acetate | 2PG1EEA | [2] | | 216-374-5 | [1] | 259-370-9 | [2] | 1569-02-4 [1] | 54839-24-6 [2] | R10 | R67 | R: 10-67 | S: (2-)24 | | | |
| 603-178-00-3 | 2-hexyloxyethanol ethylene glycol monohexyl ether n-hexylglycol | | 203-951-1 | 112-25-4 | Xn | R21/22 | C; R34 | C | R: 21/22-34 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45 | | | |
| 603-179-00-9 | ergocalciferol | Vitamin D2 | 200-014-9 | 50-14-6 | T+; R26 | T; R24/25-48/25 | T+ | R: 24/25-26-48/25 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45 | | | |
| 603-180-00-4 | colecalciferol | Vitamin D3 | | 200-673-2 | 67-97-0 | T+; R26 | T; R24/25-48/25 | T+ | R: 24/25-26-48/25 | S: (1/2-)28-36/37-45 | | | |
| 603-181-00-X | tert- butyl methyl ether | MTBE | 2-methoxy-2-methylpropane | | 216-653-1 | 1634-04-4 | F; R11 | Xi; R38 | F; Xi | R: 11-38 | S: (2-)9-16-24 | | | |
| 603-183-00-0 | 2-[2-(2-butoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethanol | TEGBE | triethylene glycol monobutyl ether | butoxytriethylene glycol | | 205-592-6 | 143-22-6 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39-46 | C ≥ 30 %:Xi; R41 | 20 % ≤ C < 30 %: Xi; R36 | | |
| 603-184-00-6 | 2-(hydroxymethyl)-2-[[2-hydroxy-3-(isooctadecyloxy)propoxy]methyl ]-1,3-propanediol | | 416-380-1 | 146925-83-9 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 603-185-00-1 | 2,4-dichloro-3-ethyl-6-nitrophenol | | 420-740-1 | 99817-36-4 | T; R25 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 25-41-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 603-186-00-7 | trans-(5RS,6SR)-6-amino-2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxepan-5-ol | | 419-050-3 | 79944-37-9 | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24/25-26-37 | | | |
| 603-187-00-2 | 2-((4,6-bis(4-(2-(1-methylpyridinium-4-yl)vinyl)phenylamino)-1,3j5-triazin-2-yl)(2-hydroxyethyl)amino)ethanol dichloride | | 419-360-9 | 163661-77-6 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 603-189-00-3 | A mixture of complexes of: | titanium, 2,2'-oxydiethanol, ammonium lactate, nitrilotris(2-propanol) and ethylene glycol | | 405-250-8 | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 603-191-00-4 | 2-(4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-5-(3-((2-ethylhexyl)oxy)-2-hydroxypropoxy)phenol | | 419-740-4 | 137658-79-8 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 603-195-00-6 | 2-[4-(4-methoxyphenyl)-6-phenyl-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl]-phenol | | 430-810-3 | 154825-62-4 | R52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 603-196-00-1 | 2-(7-ethyl-1H-indol-3-yl)ethanol | | 431-020-1 | 41340-36-7 | Xn; 22-48/22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 603-197-00-7 | 1-(4-chlorophenyl)-4,4-dimethyl-3-(1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl)pentan-3-ol | | 403-640-2 | 107534-96-3 | Repr.Cat.3; R63 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-51/53-63 | S: (2-)22-36/37-61 | | | |
| 603-199-00-8 | etoxazol | | - | 153233-91-1 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | C ≥ 0.25 %: N; R50/53 | 0.025 % ≤ C < 0.25 %:N; R51/53 | 0.0025 % ≤ C < 0.025 %: R52/53 | | |
| 604-065-00-1 | 4,4',4"-(1-methylpropan-1-yl-3-ylidene)tris(2-cyclohexyl-5-methylphenol) | | 407-460-5 | 111850-25-0 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 604-066-00-7 | A mixture of: phenol, 6-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-4-tetrapropyl-2-[(2-hydroxy-5-tetra-propylphenyl)methyl (C41-compound) and methane, 2,2'-bis[6-(1,1-dimethyl-ethyl)-1-hydroxy-4-tetrapropyl-phenyl)]-(C45-compound) | 2,6-bis(1,1-dimethylethyl)-4-tetra-propyl-phenol and 2-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-4-tetrapropyl-phenol | 2,6-bis[(6-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-1-hydroxy-4-tetrapropylphenyl)methyl]-4-(tetrapropyl)phenol and 2-[(6-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-1-hydroxy-4-tetrapropylphenylmethyl]-6-[1-hydroxy-4-tetrapropylphenyl)methyl]-4-(tetrapropyl)phenol | | 414-550-8 | - | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 604-067-00-2 | A mixture of: 2,2'-[[-(2-hydroxyethyl)imino]bis(methylene)bis[4-dodecylphenol] | formaldehyde, oligomer with 4-dodecyl phenol and 2-aminoethanol(n = 2) | formaldehyde, oligomer with 4-dodecyl phenol and 2-aminoethanol(n = 3, 4 and higher) | | 414-520-4 | - | Xi; R38-41 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 604-068-00-8 | (+/-)-4-[2-[[3-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-1-methylpropy 1]amino]-1-hydroxyethyl]phenol hydrochloride | | 415-170-5 | 99095-19-9 | Xn; R20/22 | R 43 | Xn | R: 20/22-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37 | | | |
| 604-069-00-3 | 2-(1-methylpropyl)-4-tert-butylphenol | | 421-740-4 | 51390-14-8 | C; R34 | N; R51-53 | C; N | R: 34-51/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 604-070-00-9 | triclosan | 2,4,4'-trichloro-2'-hydroxy-diphenyl-ether | 5-chloro-2-(2,4-dichlorophenoxy)phenol | | 222-182-2 | 3380-34-5 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 36/38-50/53 | S: 26-39-46-60-61 | C ≥ 20%: Xi, N; R36/38-50/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 20 %: N; R50/53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %:N; R51/53 | 0,0025 % ≤ C < 0,025 %: R52/53 | | |
| 605-031-00-9 | A mixture of: 2,2-dimethoxyethanal (this component is considered to be anhydrous in terms of identity, structure and composition. | However, 2,2-dimethoxyethanal will exist in a hydrated form. 60% anhydrous is equivalent to 70.4% hydrate) water(Including free water and water in hydrated 2,2-dimethoxyethanal) | | 421-890-0 | - | R43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)24-37 | | | |
| 606-062-00-0 | tetrahydrothiopyran-3-carboxaldehyde | | 407-330-8 | 61571-06-0 | Repr.Cat.2; R61 | Xi; R41 | R 52-53 | T | R: 61-41-52/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 606-063-00-6 | (E)-3-(2-chlorophenyl)-2-(4-fluorophenyl)propenal | | 410-980-5 | 112704-51-5 | Xi; R36 | R 43 | Xi | R: 36-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37 | | | |
| 606-064-00-1 | pregn-5-ene-3,20-dione bis(ethylene ketal) | | 407-450-0 | 7093-55-2 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 606-065-00-7 | 1-(4-morpholinophenyl)butan-1-one | | 413-790-0 | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 606-066-00-2 | (E)-5[(4-chlorophenyl)methylene]-2,2-dimethylcyclopentanone | | 410-440-9 | 131984-21-9 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S:61 | | | |
| 606-067-00-8 | A mixture of: 1-(2,3,6,7,8,9-hexahydro-1,1-dimethyl-1H-benz(g)inden-4-yl)ethanone | 1-(2,3,5,6,7,8-hexahydro-1,1-dimethyl-1H-benz(f)inden-4-yl)ethanone | 1-(2,3,6,7,8,9-hexahydro-1,1-dimethyl-1H-benz(g)inden-5-yl)ethanone | 1-(2,3,6,7,8,9-hexahydro-3,3-dimethyl-1H-benz(g)inden-5-yl)ethanone | | 414-870-8 | 96792-67-5 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 606-068-00-3 | 2,7,11-trimethyl-13-(2,6,6-trimethylcyclohex-1-en-1-yl)tridecahexaen-2,4,6,8,10,12-al | | 415-770-7 | 1638-05-7 | Xn; R48/22 | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 43-48/22-52/53 | S: (2-)22-36/37-61 | | | |
| 606-069-00-9 | spiro[1,3-dioxolane-2,5'-(4',4',8',8'-tetramethyl-hexahydro-3',9'-methanonaphthalene)] | | 415-460-1 | 154171-77-4 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 24-61 | | | |
| 606-070-00-4 | 5-(3-butyryl-2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)-2-[1-(ethoxyimino)propyl]-3-hydroxycyclohex-2-en-1-one | | 414-790-3 | 138164-12-2 | Repr.Cat.3; R62-63 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R38 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-38-62-63-50/53 | S: (2-)22-36/37-60-61 | | | |
| 606-071-00-X | 17-spiro(5,5-dimethyl-1,3-dioxan-2-yl)androsta-1,4-diene-3-one | | 421-050-3 | 13258-43-0 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 22-60-61 | | | |
| 606-072-00-5 | 3-acetyl-1-phenyl-pyrrolidine-2,4-dione | | 421-600-2 | 719-86-8 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)22-36/37-61 | | | |
| 606-073-00-0 | 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)benzophenone Michler's ketone | | 202-027-5 | 90-94-8 | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Muta.Cat.3; R68 | Xi; R41 | T | R: 45-41-68 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 606-075-00-1 | 1-benzyl-5-ethoxyimidazolidine-2,4-dione | | 417-340-4 | 65855-02-9 | Xn; R22 | Xn | R: 22 | S: (2-)22 | | | |
| 606-076-00-7 | 1-((2-quinolinyl-carbonyl)oxy)-2,5-pyrrolidinedione | | 418-630-3 | 136465-99-1 | Xi; R41 | R43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 606-077-00-2 | (3S,4S)-3-hexyl-4-[(R)-2-hydroxytridecyl]-2-oxetanone | | 418-650-2 | 104872-06-2 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 606-078-00-8 | 1-octylazepin-2-one | | 420-040-6 | 59227-88-2 | C; R34 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | C; N | R: 34-43-51/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 606-079-00-3 | 2-n-butyl-benzo[d]isothiazol-3-one | | 420-590-7 | - | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 34-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 606-080-00-9 | Reaction product of: 3-hydroxy-5,7-di-tert-butylbenzofuran-2-one with o-xylene | | 417-100-9 | - | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 606-081-00-4 | (3β, 5α, 6β)-3-(acetyloxy)-5-bromo-6-hydroxy-androstan-17-one | | 419-790-7 | 4229-69-0 | R43 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 43-52/53 | S: (2-)22-36/37-61 | | | |
| 606-082-00-X- | A mixture of: butan-2-one oxime syn-O,O'-di(butan-2-one oxime)diethoxysilane | | 406-930-7 | 96-29-7 | T; R48/22 | R43 | R52-53 | T | R: 43-48/25-52/53 | S: (1/2-)25-36/37-45- 61 | | | |
| 606-083-00-5 | 2-chloro-5-sec-hexadecylhydroquinone | | 407-750-1 | - | Xi; R36/38 | R43 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 36/38-43-52/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37-61 | | | |
| 606-084-00-0 | 1-(4-methoxy-5-benzofuranyl)-3-phenyl-1,3-propanedione | | 414-540-3 | 484-33-3 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 606-085-00-6 | (1R,4S)-2-azabicyclo[2.2.1 ] hept-5-en-3-one | | 418-530-1 | 79200-56-9 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | R43 | Xn | R: 22-41-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 606-086-00-1 | 1-(3,3-dimethylcyclohexyl)pent-4-en-1-one | | 422-330-8 | 56973-87-6 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 606-087-00-7 | 6-ethyl-5-fluoro-4(3H)-pyrimidone | | 422-460-5 | 137234-87-8 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)60-61 | | | |
| 606-088-00-2 | 2,4,4,7-tetramethyl-6-octen-3-one | | 422-520-0 | 74338-72-0 | Xi; R38 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-51/53 | S: (2-)37-61 | | | |
| 606-089-00-8 | A mixture of: 1,4-diamino-2-chloro-3-phenoxyanthraquinone 1,4-diamino-2,3-bis-phenoxyanthraquinone | | 423-220-2 | 12223-77-7 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 606-091-00-9 | 6-chloro-5-(2-chloroethyl)-1,3-dihydroindol-2-one | | 421-320-0 | 118289-55-7 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 606-092-00-4 | A mixture of: (E)-oxacyclohexadec-12-en-2-one | (E)-oxacyclohexadec-13-en-2-one | a) (Z)-oxacyclohexadec-(12)-en-2-one and b) (Z)-oxacyclohexadec-(13)-en-2-one | | 422-320-3 | 111879-80-2 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 607-379-00-7 | A mixture of: 2-[N-(2-hydroxyethyl)stearamido]ethyl stearate | sodium [bis(2-(stearoyloxy)ethyl]amino] methylsulfonate | sodium [bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]methylsulfonate | N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)stearamide | | 401-230-8 | 55349-70-7 | R52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-380-00-2 | A mixture of: ammonium-1,2-bis(hexyloxycarbonyl)ethanesulfonate | ammonium-1-hexyloxycarbonyl-2-octyloxycarbonylethanesirlfonate | ammonium-2-hexyloxycarbonyl-1-octyloxycarbonylethanesulfonate | | 407-320-3 | - | Xi; R38-41 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 38-41-52/53 | S: (2-)26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 607-381-00-8 | mixed triesters of 2,2-bis(hydroxymethyl)butanol with C7-alkanoic acids and 2-ethylhexanoic acid | | 413-710-4 | - | R 53 | R:53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-382-00-3 | 2-((4-amino-2-nitrophenyl)amino)benzoic acid | | 411-260-3 | 117907-43-4 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 41-43-52/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 607-383-00-9 | A mixture of: 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl-hexadecanoate | 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl-octadecanoate | | 415-430-8 | 86403-32-9 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-384-00-4 | A mixture of: esters of C14-C15 branched alcohols with 3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl propionic acid | C15 branched and linear alkyl 3,5-bis( 1,1-dimethylethyl)-4-hydroxybenzenepropanoate | C13 branched and linear alkyl 3,5-bis(1,1-dimethylethyl)-4-hydroxybenzenepropanoatem | | 413-750-2 | 171090-93-0 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-385-00-X | Copolymer of vinyl-alcohol and vinyl acetate partially acetilized with 4-(2-(4-formylphenyl)ethenyl)-1-methylpyridinium methylsulfate | | 414-590-6 | 125229-74-5 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-386-00-5 | A mixture of: tetradecanoic acid (42.5-47.5%) | poly(1-7)lactate esters of tetradecanoic acid (52.5-57.5%) | | 412-580-6 | 174591-51-6 | Xi; R38-41 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-41-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-387-00-0 | A mixture of: dodecanoic acid (35-40%) | poly(1-7)lactate esters of dodecanoic acid (60-65%) | | 412-590-0 | 58856-63-6 | Xi; R38-41 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-41-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-388-00-6 | 4-ethylamino-3-nitrobenzoic acid | | 412-090-2 | 2788-74-1 | Xn; R22 | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 22-43-52/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 607-389-00-1 | trisodium N,N-bis(carboxymethyl)-3-amino-2-hydroxypropionate | | 414-130-4 | 119710-96-2 | Xn; R22 | Xn | R: 22 | S: (2-)22 | | | |
| 607-390-00-7 | 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-6-nitro-quinoxaline | | 414-270-6 | 41959-35-7 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-51/53 | S: (2-)22-61 | | | |
| 607-391-00-2 | dimethylcyclopropane-1,1-dicarboxylate | | 414-240-2 | 6914-71-2 | R 52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-392-00-8 | 2-phenoxyethyl 4-((5-cyano-1,6-dihydro-2-hydroxy-1,4-dimethyl-6-oxo-3-pyridinyl)azo)benzoate | | 414-260-1 | 88938-37-8 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-393-00-3 | 3-(cis-1-propenyl)-7-amino-8-oxo-5-thia-1-azabicyclo[4.2.0]oct-2-ene-2-carboxylic acid | | 415-750-8 | 106447-44-3 | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 607-394-00-9 | 5-methylpyrazine-2-carboxylic acid | | 413-260-9 | 5521-55-1 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 607-395-00-4 | A mixture of: sodium 1-tridecyl-4-allyl-(2 or 3)-sulfobutanedioate | sodium 1-dodecyl-4allyl-(2 or 3)-sulfobutanedioate | | 410-230-7 | - | C; R34 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | C; N | R: 34-43-51/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 607-396-00-X | bis( 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidinyl) 2-(4-methoxybenzylidene)malonate | | 414-840-4 | 147783-69-5 | N; R50-53 | N | R:50/53 | S: 22-60-61 | | | |
| 607-397-00-5 | A mixture of: Ca salicylates (branched C 10-14 and C18-30 alkylated) | Ca phenates (branched C10-14 and C18-30 alkylated) | Ca sulfurized phenates (branched C10-14 and C18-30 alkylated) | | 415-930-6 | - | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)36/37 | | | |
| 607-398-00-0 | ethyl N-(5-chloro-3-(4-(diethylamino)-2-methylphenylimino)-4-methyl-6-oxo-1,4-cyclohexadienyl)carbamate | | 414-820-5 | 125630-94-6 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 607-399-00-6 | 2,2-dimethyl 3-methyl-3-butenyl propanoate | | 415-610-6 | 104468-21-5 | Xi; R38 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 38-52/53 | S: (2-)37-61 | | | |
| 607-400-00-X | methyl 3-[[(dibutylamino)thioxomethyl]thio]propanoate | | 414-400-1 | 32750-89-3 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 607-401-00-5 | ethyl 3-hydroxy-5-oxo-3-cyclohexene-1-carboxylate | | 414-450-4 | 88805-65-6 | Xi; R38-41 | R 43 | Xi | R: 38-41-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 607-402-00-0 | methyl N-(phenoxycarbonyl)-L-valinate | | 414-500-5 | 153441-77-1 | R 52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-403-00-6 | A mixture of: bis(1S,2S,4S)-(1-benzyl-4-tert-butoxycarboxamido-2-hydroxy-5-phenyl)pentylammonuium succinate isopropyl alcohol | | 414-810-0 | - | Xn; R48/22 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 41-48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-26-36/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-404-00-1 | A mixture of: ((Z)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl)oxycarbonylpropanoic acid | di-((E)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl) butandioate | di-((Z)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl) butandioate | (Z)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl butandioate | ((E)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl)oxycarbonylpropanoic acid | | 415-190-4 | - | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)24-37 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 607-405-00-7 | 2-hexyldecyl p-hydroxybenzoate | | 415-380-7 | 148348-12-3 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-406-00-2 | potassium 2,5-dichlorobenzoate | | 415-700-5 | - | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | Xn | R: 22-41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 607-407-00-8 | ethyl 2-carboxy-3-(2-thienyl)propionate | | 415-680-8 | 143468-96-6 | Xi; R38-41 | R 43 | Xi | R: 38-41-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 607-408-00-3 | potassium N-(4-fluorophenyl)glycinate | | 415-710-1 | - | Xn; R48/22 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 41-43-48/22-52/53 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 607-409-00-9 | A mixture of: (3R)-[1S-(1α,2α,6β-((2S)-2-methyl-1-oxo-butoxy)-8a.gamma.)hexahydro-2,6-dimethyl-1-naphthalene]-3,5-dihydroxyheptanoic acid inert biomass from Aspergillus terreus | | 415-840-7 | - | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 43-52/53 | S: (2-)36/37-61 | | | |
| 607-410-00-4 | mono[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]monohydrogen-2-(hexadec-2-enyl)butanedioate and/or mono[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]monohydrogen-3-(hexadec-2-enyl)butanedioate | | 415-880-5 | - | Xi; R38-41 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-41-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-411-00-X | oxiranemethanol, 4-methylbenzene-sulfonate, (S) | | 417-210-7 | 70987-78-9 | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Muta.Cat.3; R68 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-41-43-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 607-412-00-5 | ethyl 2-(1-cyanocyclohexyl)acetate | | 415-970-4 | 133481-10-4 | Xn; R22-48/22 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 22-48/22-52/53 | S: (2-)36/37-61 | | | |
| 607-413-00-0 | trans-4-phenyl-L-proline | | 416-020-1 | 96314-26-0 | Repr.Cat.3; R62 | R 43 | Xn | R: 43-62 | S: (2-)22-36/37 | | | |
| 607-414-00-6 | tris(2-ethylhexyl)-4,4',4"-(1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6-triyltriimino)tribenzoate | | 402-070-1 | 88122-99-0 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-415-00-1 | poly-(methyl methacrylate)-co-(butylmethacrylate)-co-(4-acryloxybutyl-isopropenyl-.alpha.,.alpha.-dimethylbenzyl carbamate)-co-(maleicanhydride) | | 419-590-1 | - | F; R11 | R 43 | F; Xi | R: 11-43 | S: (2-)24-37-43 | | | |
| 607-416-00-7 | 4-(2-carboxymethylthio)ethoxy-1-hydroxy-5-isobutyloxycarbonylamino-N-(3-dodecyloxypropyl)-2-naphthamide | | 420-730-7 | - | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 607-418-00-8 | 2-ethylhexyl 4-aminobenzoate | | 420-170-3 | 26218-04-2 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 607-419-00-3 | (3'-carboxymethyl-5-(2-(3-ethyl-3H-benzothiazol-2-ylidene)-1-methyl-ethylidene)-4,4'-dioxo-2'-thioxo-(2,5')bithiazolidinyliden-3-yl)-acetic acid | | 422-240-9 | 166596-68-5 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)26-36/37/39 | | | |
| 607-420-00-9 | 2,2-bis(hydroxymethyll)butanoic acid | | 424-090-1 | 10097-02-6 | Xi; R41 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 607-421-00-4 | cypermethrin cis/trans +/- 40/60 (RS)-α-cyano-3-phenoxybenzyl (1RS,3RS;1RS,3SR)-3-(2,2- dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclopropanecarboxylate | | 257-842-9 | 52315-07-8 | Xn; R20/22 | Xi; R37 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/22-37-50/53 | S: (2-)24-36/37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-422-00-X | α-cypermethrin | | 257-842-9 | 67375-30-8 | T; R25 | Xn; R48/22 | Xi; R37 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 25-37-48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 607-423-00-5 | esters of mecoprop and of mecoprop-P | | - | - | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-50/53 | S: (2-)13-36/37-60-61 | | | |
| 607-424-00-0 | trifloxystrobin (ISO) | (E,E)-α-methoxyimino-{2-[[[[l-[3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]ethyliden e]amino]oxy] methyl]benzeneacetic acid methyl ester | | - | 141517-21-7 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-46-60-61 | | | |
| 607-425-00-6 | metalaxyl (ISO) | methyl-N-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-N-(methoxyacetyl)-DL-alaninate | | 260-979-7 | 57837-19-1 | Xn; R22 | R43 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 22-43-52/53 | S: (2-)13-24-37-46-61 | | | |
| 607-426-00-1 | 1,2-benzenedicarboxylic acid, | dipentylester, branched and linear | [1] | n-pentyl-isopentylphthalate | [2] | di-n-pentyl phthalate | [3] | diisopentylphthalate | [4] | | 284-032-2 | [1] | -[2] | 205-017-9 | [3] | 210-088-4 | [4] | 84777-06-0 | [1] | -[2] | 131-18-0 [3] | 605-50-5 [4] | Repr.Cat.2; R60-61 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 60-61-50 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 607-427-00-7 | bromoxynil heptanoate (ISO) | 2,6-dibromo-4-cyanophenyl heptanoate | | 260-300-4 | 56634-95-8 | Repr.Cat3; R63 | Xn; R20/22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/22-43-63-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-60-61 | | | |
| 607-430-00-3 | BBP | benzyl butyl phtalate | | 201-622-7 | 85-68-7 | Repr.Cat.2; R61 | Repr.Cat.3; R62 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 61-62-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 607-431-00-9 | prallethrin | ETOC | 2-methyl-4-oxo-3-(prop-2-ynyl)cyclopent-2-en-1-y1 2,2-dimethyl-3-(2-methylprop-1-enyl)cyclopropanecarboxylate | | 245-387-9 | 23031-36-9 | T; R23 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 22-23-50/53 | S: (1/2-)45-60-61 | | | |
| 607-432-00-4 | S-metolachlor | mixture of (S)-2-chloro-N-2-ethyl-6-methyl-phenyl)-N-(2-methoxy-1-methyl-ethyl)-acetamide (80-100%) | [1] | S-metolachlor | (R)-2-chloro-N-(2-ethyl-6-methyl-phenyl)-N-(2-methoxy-1-methyl-ethyl)-acetamide (0-20%) | [2] | | -[1] | -[2] | 87392-12-9 [1] | 178961-20-1 [2] | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 607-433-00-X | cypermethrin cis/trans +/- 80/20 (RS)-α-cyano-3-phenoxybenzyl ( 1RS; 3RS; 1RS, 3SR)-3-(2,2- dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclopropanecarboxylate | | 257-842-9 | 52315-07-8 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R37/38 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-37/38-43-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-434-00-5 | mecoprop-P [1] and its salts (R)-2-(4-chloro-2-methylphenoxy)propionic acid | | 240-539-0 | 16484-77-8 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-51/53 | S: (2-)13-26-37/39-46-61 | | | |
| 607-435-00-0 | 2S-isopropyl-5R- methyl-1R-cyclohexyl 2,2-dihydroxyacetate | | 416-810-6 | 111969-64-3 | Xn; R48/22 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 41-48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)22-26-36/39-61 | | | |
| 607-436-00-6 | 2-hydroxy-3-(2-ethyl-4-methylimidazoyl)propyl neodecanoate | | 417-350-9 | - | Xi; R38-41 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-28-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-437-00-1 | 3-(4-aminophenyl)-2-cyano-2-propenoic acid | | 417-480-6 | - | R43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 607-438-00-7 | methyl-2-[(aminosulfonyl)methyl]benzoate | | 419-010-5 | - | Xn; R22 | Xi; R36 | Xn | R: 22-36 | S: (2-)22-26 | | | |
| 607-439-00-2 | methyl tetrahydro-2-furancarboxylate | | 420-670-1 | 37443-42-8 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 607-440-00-8 | methyl 2-aminosulfonyl-6-(trifluoromethyl)pyridine-3-carboxylate | | 421-220-7 | 144740-59-0 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 607-441-00-3 | 3-[3-(2-dodecyloxy-5-methylphenylcarbamoyl)-4-hydroxy-1-naphthylthiojpropionic acid | | 421-490-6 | 167684-63-1 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 57-61 | | | |
| 607-442-00-9 | benzyl [hydroxy-(4-phenylbutyl)phosphinyl] acetate | | 416-050-5 | 87460-09-1 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-36/39 | | | |
| 607-443-00-4 | bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl)ethyl phosphate | | 416-140-4 | 145650-60-8 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-444-00-X | A mixture of: cis-1,4-dimethylcyclohexyl dibenzoate | trans-1,4-dimethylcyclohexyl dibenzoate | | 416-230-3 | 35541-81-2 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-445-00-5 | Iron (III) tris(4-methylbenzenesulfonate) | | 420-960-8 | 77214-82-5 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)24-26-39 | | | |
| 607-446-00-0 | methyl 2-[4-(2-chloro-4-nitrophenylazo)-3-(1-oxopropyl)amino]phenylaminopropionate | | 416-240-8 | 155522-12-6 | R 43 | R 53 | Xi | R: 43-53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 607-447-00-6 | sodium 4-[4-(4-hydroxyphenylazo)phenylamino]-3-nitrobenzenesulfonate | | 416-370-5 | 156738-27-1 | R 43 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 43-52/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 607-448-00-1 | 2,3,5,6-tetrafluorobenzoic acid | | 416-800-1 | 652-18-6 | Xi; R38-41 | Xi | R: 38-41 | S: (2-)22-26-37/39 | | | |
| 607-449-00-7 | A mixture of: 4,4',4"-[(2,4,6-trioxo-1,3,5(2H,4H,6H)-triazine-1,3,5-triyl)tris[methylene(3,5,5-trimethyl-3,1-cyclohexanediyl)iminocarbonyloxy-2,1-ethanediyl(ethyl)amino]]trisbenzenediazoniumtri[bis(2-methylpropyl)naphthalenesulfonate] 4,4',4",4'"-[[5,5'-[carbonylbis[imino(1,5,5-trimethyl-3,1-cyclohexanediyl)methylene]]-2,4,6-trioxo-1,3,5(2H,4H,6H)-triazine-1,1',3,3'-tetray1]tetrakis[methylene(3,5,5-trimethyl-3,1-cyclohexanediyl)iminocarbonyloxy-2,1-ethanediyl(ethyl)amino]]tetrakisbenzenediazoniumtetra[bis(2-methylpropyl)naphthalenesulfonate] | | 417-080-1 | - | E; R2 | R43 | N; R50-53 | E; Xi; N | R: 2-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-35-37-60-61 | | | |
| 607-450-00-2 | 2-mercaptobenzothiazolyl-(Z)-(2-aminothiazol-4-yl)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonyl) isopropoxyiminoacetate | | 419-040-9 | 89604-92-2 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-451-00-8 | 4-[4-amino-5-hydroxy-3-(4-(2-sulfoxyethylsulfonyl)phenylazo)-2,7-disulfonapht-6-ylazo]-6-[3-(4-amino-5-hydroxy-3-(4-(2-sulfoxyethylsulfonyl)phenylazo)-2,7-disulfonapht-6-ylazojphenylcarbonylaminojbenz enesulfonic acid, sodium salt | | 417-640-5 | 161935-19-9 | Xi; R41 | R43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)22-24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 607-453-00-9 | 4-benzyl-2,6-dihydroxy-4-aza-heptylene bis(2,2-dimethyloctanoate) | | 418-100-1 | 172964-15-7 | R 43 | R 53 | Xi | R: 43-53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 607-454-00-4 | A mixture of: trans-2-(1-methylethyl)-1,3-dioxane-5-carboxylic acid; | cis-2-(1-methylethyl)-1,3-dioxane-5-carboxylic acid | | 418-170-3 | - | Xi; R41 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)25-26-39-61 | | | |
| 607-455-00-X | 1-amino-4-(3-[4-chloro-6-(2,5-disulfophenylamino)-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-2,2-dimethyl-propylamino)-anthraquinone-2-sulfonic acid, na/li salt | | 419-520-8 | 172890-93-6 | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 607-456-00-5 | 3-amino-4-chlorobenzoic acid, hexadecyl ester | | 419-700-6 | 143269-74-3 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-457-00-0 | tetrasodium dihydrogen 1,1"-dihydroxy-8,8"-[p-phenylbis(imino-{6-[4-(2-aminoethyl)piperazin-1-yl]}-1,3,5-triazine-4,2-diyl-imino)]bis(2,2'-azonaphthalene-1',3,6-trisulfonate) | | 420-350-1 | 172277-97-3 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-51/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 607-458-00-6 | A mixture of: 2-ethyl-[2,6-dibromo-4-[1-[3,5-dibromo-4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)phenyl]-1-methylethyl]phenoxy]propenoate | 2,2'-diethyl-[4,4'-bis(2,6-dibromophenoxy)-1-methylethylidene] dipropenoate | 2,2'-[(1-methylethylidene)bis[[2,6-dibromo-4,1-phenylene)oxy]ethanol]] | | 420-850-1 | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-459-00-1 | isopentyl 4-{2-[5-cyano-1,2,3,6-tetrahydro-1-(2-isopropoxyethoxy-carbonylmethyl)-4-methyl-2,6-dioxo-3-pyridylidene]hydrazino}benzoate | | 418-930-4 | - | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-460-00-7 | 3-tridecyloxy-propyl-ammonium | 9-octadecenoate | | 418-990-1 | - | Xn; R48/22 | Xi; R36/38 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 36/38-48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)23-26-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 607-461-00-2 | A mixture of: pentasodium 2-{4-{3-methyl-4-[6-sulfonato-4-(2-sulfonato-phenylazo)-naphthalen-1-ylazo]-phenylamino}-6-[3-(2-sulfato-ethanesulfonyl)-phenylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino}-benzene-1,4-disulfonate | pentasodium 2-{4-{3-methyl-4-[7-sulfonato-4-(2-sulfonato-phenylazo)-naphthalen-1-ylazo]-phenylamino}-6-[3-(2-sulfato-ethanesulfonyl)-phenylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-benzene-1,4-disulfonate | | 421-160-1 | - | R 52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-462-00-8 | A mixture of: 1-hexyl acetate | 2-methyl-1-pentyl acetate | 3-methyl-1-pentyl acetate; | 4-methyl-1-pentyl acetate | other mixed linear and branched C6-alkyl acetates | | 421-230-1 | 88230-35-7 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-463-00-3 | 3-(phenothiazin-10-yl)propionic acid | | 421-260-5 | 362-03-8 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 24/25-61 | | | |
| 607-464-00-9 | A mixture of: 7-chloro-1-ethyl-6-fluoro-1,4-dihydro-4-oxo-quinoline-3-carboxylic acid | 5-chloro-1-ethyl-6-fluoro-1,4-dihydro-4-oxo-quinoline-3-carboxylic acid | | 421-280-4 | 68077-26-9 | R 52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-465-00-4 | tris(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium 7-{4-[4-(2-cyanoamino-4-hydroxy-6-oxidopyrimidin-5-ylazo)benzamido]-2-ethoxy-phenylazo}naphthalene-1,3-disulfonate | | 421-440-3 | - | R 52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-466-00-X | A mixture of: phenyl 1-(1-[2-chloro-5-(hexadecyloxycarbonyl)phenylcaramoyl]-3,3-dimethyl-2-oxobutyl)-1H-2,3,3a,7a-tetrahydrobenzotriazole-5-carboxylate | phenyl 2-(1-(2-chloro-5-(hexadecyloxycarbonyl)phenylcarbamoyl)-3,3-dimethyl-2-oxobutyl)-1H-2,3,3a,7a-tetrahydrobenzotriazole-5-carboxylate | phenyl 3-(1-(2-chloro-5-(hexadecyloxycarbonyl)phenylcarbamoyl)-3,3 -dimethyl-2-oxobutyl)-1H-2,3,3a,7a-tetrahydrobenzotriazole-5-carboxylate | | 421-480-1 | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 37/39-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 607-467-00-5 | 1,1,3,3-tetrabutyl-1,3-ditinoxydicaprylate | | 419-430-9 | 56533-00-7 | Xn; R21/22-48/22 | C; R34 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 21/22-34-48/22-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 607-468-00-0 | A mixture of: monosodium 4-((4-(5-sulfonato-2-methoxyphenylamino)-6-chloro-1,3,5-triazine-2-yl)amino)-2-((1,4-dimethyl-6-oxido-2-oxo-5-sulfonatomethyl-1,2-dihydropyridine-3-yl)azo)benzenesulfonate | disodium 4-((4-(5-sulfonato-2-methoxyphenylamino)-6-chloro-1,3,5-triazine-2-yl)amino)-2-((1,4-dimethyl-6-oxido-2-oxo-5-sulfonatomethyl-1,2-dihydropyridine-3-yl)azo)benzenesulfonate | trisodium 4-((4-(5-sulfonato-2-methoxyphenylamino)-6-chloro-1,3,5-triazine-2-yl)amino)-2-((1,4-dimethyl-6-oxido-2-oxo-5-sulfonatomethyl-1,2-dihydropyridine-3-yl)azo)benzenesulfonate | tetrasodium 4-((4-(5-sulfonato-2-methoxyphenylamino)-6-chloro-1,3,5-triazine-2-yl)amino)-2-((1,4-dimethyl-6-oxido-2-oxo-5-sulfonatomethyl-1,2-dihydropyridine-3-yl)azo)benzenesulfonate | | 419-450-8 | - | R43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 607-469-00-6 | disodium 7-((4,6-bis(3-diethylaminopropylamino)-1,3,5-triazine-2-yl)amino)-4-hydroxy-3-(4-(4-sulfonatophenylazo)phenylazo)-2-naphthalene sulfonate | | 419-460-2 | 120029-06-3 | R52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-470-00-1 | potassium sodium 6,13-dichloro-3,10-bis{2-[4-[3-(2-hydroxysulphonyloxyethanesulfonyl)phenylamino]-6-(2,5-disulfonatophenylamino)-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]ethylamino}benzo[5,6][1,4]oxazino[2,3-b]phenoxazine-4,11-disulfonate | | 414-100-0 | - | Xi; R41 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)39-22-26-61 | | | |
| 607-472-00-2 | ammonium iron(III) | trimethylenediaminetetraacetate hemihydrate | | 400-660-3 | 111687-36-6 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-474-00-3 | (4-(4-(4-dimethylaminobenzyliden-1-yl)-3-methyl-5-oxo-2-pyrazolin-1-yl)benzoic acid | | 410-430-4 | 117573-89-4 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-475-00-9 | A mixture (50/50) of: tetrasodium 7-(4-[4-chloro-6-[methyl-(3-sulfonatophenyl)amino] -1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-2-ureidophenylazo)naphthalene-1,3,6-trisulfonate | tetrasodium 7-(4-[4-chloro-6-[methyl-(4-sulfonatophenyl)amino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-2-ureidophenylazo)naphthalene-1,3,6-trisulfonate | | 412-940-2 | 148878-18-6 | R43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 607-476-00-4 | trisodium N,N-bis(carboxymethyl)-β-alanine | | 414-070-9 | 129050-62-0 | C; R34 | R52-53 | C | R: 34-52/53 | S:(1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 607-478-00-5 | tetramethylammonium hydrogen phthalate | | 416-900-5 | 79723-02-7 | T; R25 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R50 | T; N | R: 25-48/22-50 | S: (1/2-)25-36-45-61 | | | |
| 607-479-00-0 | hexadecyl 4-chloro-3-[2-(5,5-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,3-oxazolidin-3-yl)-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxopentamido]benzoate | | 418-550-9 | 168689-49-4 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-480-00-6 | 1,2-benzenedicarboxylic acid di-C7-11-branched and linear alkylesters | | 271-084-6 | 68515-42-4 | Repr. Cat. 2; R61 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | T | R: 61-62 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 607-487-00-4 | A mixture of: disodium 4-(3-ethoxycarbonyl-4-(5-(3-ethoxycarbonyl-5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulfonatophenyl)pyrazol-4-yl)penta-2,4-dienylidene)-4,5-dihydro-5-oxopyrazol-1-yl)benzenesulfonate | trisodium 4-(3-ethoxycarbonyl-4-(5-(3-ethoxycarbonyl-5-oxido-1-(4-sulfonatophenyl)pyrazol-4-yl)penta-2,4-dienylidene)-4,5-dihydro-5-oxopyrazo1-1-yl)benzenesulfonate | | 402-660-9 | - | Repr.Cat.2; R61 | R52-53 | T | R: 61-52/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 607-488-00-X | ethyl (2-acetylamino-5-fluoro-4-isothiocyanatophenoxy)acetate | | 414-210-9 | 147379-38-2 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 607-489-00-5 | A mixture of: 2-ethylhexyl linolenate, linoleate and oleate | 2-ethylhexyl epoxyoleate | 2-ethylhexyl diepoxylinoleate | 2-ethylhexyl triepoxylinolenate | | 414-890-7 | 71302-79-9 | R43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)24-37 | | | |
| 607-490-00-0 | N-[2-hydroxy-3-(C 12-16-alkyloxy)propyl]-N-methyl glycinate | | 415-060-7 | - | Xi; R41 | R43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 607-492-00-1 | 2-(1-(3',3'-dimethyl-1'-cyclohexyl)ethoxy)-2-methyl propyl propanoate | | 415-490-5 | 141773-73-1 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-493-00-7 | methyl (3aR,4R,7aR)-2-methyl-4-(1S,2R,3-triacetoxypropyl)-3a,7a-dihydro-4H-pyrano[3,4-d]oxazole-6-carboxylate | | 415-670-3 | 78850-37-0 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 607-494-00-2 | bis(2-ethylhexyl)octylphosphonate | | 417-170-0 | 52894-02-7 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 607-495-00-8 | sodium 4-sulfophenyl-6-((1-oxononyl)amino)hexanoate | | 417-550-6 | 168151-92-6 | R43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)24-37 | | | |
| 607-496-00-3 | 2,2'-methylenebis(4,6-di-tert-butyl-phenyl)-2-ethylhexyl phosphite | | 418-310-3 | 126050-54-2 | R53 | R:53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-497-00-9 | cerium oxide isostearate | | 419-760-3 | - | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-498-00-4 | (E)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienylhexadecanoate | | 421-370-3 | 3681-73-0 | Xi; R38 | R53 | Xi | R: 38-53 | S: (2-)37-61 | | | |
| 607-499-00-X | bis(dimethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium) 1,2-ethanediyl-bis(2-hexadecenylsuccinate) | | 421-660-1 | - | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 607-500-00-3 | calcium 2,2,bis[(5-tetrapropylene-2-hydroxy)phenyl]ethanoate | | 421-670-4 | - | Xi; R38 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-50/53 | S: (2-)37-60-61 | | | |
| 607-501-00-9 | A mixture of: | triphenylthiophosphate and tertiary butylated phenyl derivatives | | 421-820-9 | - | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 607-502-00-4 | (N-benzyl-N,N,N-tributyl)ammonium 4-dodecylbenzenesulfonate | | 422-200-0 | - | C; R34 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | C; N | R: 22-34-51/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 607-503-00-X | 2,4,6-tri-n-propyl-2,4,6-trioxo-1,3,5,2,4,6-trioxatriphosphorinane | | 422-210-5 | 68957-94-8 | C; R34 | C | R: 34 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45 | | | |
| 607-505-00-0 | pentasodium 7-(4-(4-(5-amino-4-sulfonato-2-(4-((2-(sulfonato-ethoxy)sulfonyl)phenylazo)phenylamino)-6-chloro-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)amino-2-ureidophenylazo)naphtalene-1,3,6-trisulfonate | | 422-930-1 | 171599-84-1 | R52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 22-61 | | | |
| 607-506-00-6 | A mixture of: strontium (4-chloro-2-((4,5-dihydro-3-methyl-5-oxo-1-(3-sulfonatophenyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)azo)-5-methyl)benzenesulfonate disodium (4-chloro-2-((4,5-dihydro-3-methyl-5-oxo-1-(3-sulfonatophenyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)azo)-5-methyl)benzenesulfonate | | 422-970-8 | 136248-04-9 | N; R51-53 | N | R:51/53 | S: 22-61 | | | |
| 607-507-00-1 | potassium,sodium 2,4-diamino-3-[4-(2-sulfonatoethoxysulfonyl)phenylazo]-5-[4-(2-sulfonatoethoxysulfonyl)-2-sulfonatophenylazo]-benzenesulfonate | | 422-980-2 | 187026-95-5 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)22-26-39 | | | |
| 607-508-00-7 | disodium 3,3'-[iminobistsulfonyl-4,1-phenylene-(5-hydroxy-3-methylpyrazole-1,4-diyl)azo-4,1-phenylenesulfonylimino-(4-amino-6-hydroxypyrimidine-2,5-diyl)azo-4,1-phenylenesulfonylimino(4-amino-6-hydroxypyrimidine-2,5-diyl)azo]bis(benzenesulfonate)] | | 423-110-4 | - | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)22-26-39 | | | |
| 607-512-00-9 | trisodium 2,4-diamino-3,5-bis-[4-(2-sulfonatoethoxy)sulfonyl)phenylazo]benzenesulfonate | | 423-970-0 | 182926-43-8 | R52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 22-61 | | | |
| 607-513-00-4 | A mixture of: Trisodium 4-benzoylamino-6-(6-ethenesulfonyl-1 -sulfato-naphthalen-2-ylazo)-5-hydroxynaphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | 5-(benzoylamino)-4-hydroxy-3-((1-sulfo-6-((2-(sulfooxy)ethyl)sulfonyl)-2-naphtyl)azo)naphthalene-2,7-disulfonic acid sodium salt | 5-(benzoylamino)-4-hydroxy-3-((1-sulfo-6-((2-(sulfooxy)ethyl)sulfonyl)-2-naphtyl)azo)naphthalene-2,7-disulfonic acid | | 423-200-3 | - | Xi; R41 | R43 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 41-43-52/53 | S: 22-26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 607-515-00-5 | A mixture of: disodium hexyldiphenyl ether disulphonate disodium dihexyldiphenyl ether disulphonate | | 429-650-7 | 147732-60-3 | Xi; R36 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36-51/53 | S: (2-)26-61 | | | |
| 607-516-00-0 | N,N'-bis(trifluoroacetyl)-S,S'-bis-L-homocysteine | | 429-670-6 | 105996-54-1 | Xi; R41 | R43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 607-517-00-6 | (S)-α-(acetylthio)benzenepropanoic acid | | 430-300-0 | 76932-17-7 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | R43 | Xn | R: 22-41-43 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39 | | | |
| 607-526-00-5 | cartap | 1,3-bis(carbamoylthio)-2-(dimethylamino)propane | | - | 15263-53-3 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 607-527-00-0 | A mixture of: 1-(1'H,1'H,2'H,2'H-tridecafluorooctyl)-12-(1"H,1"H,2"H,2"H-tridecafluorooctyl)dodecanedioate | 1-(1'H.1'H.2'H.2'H-tridecafluorooctyl)-12-(1"H,1"H,2"H,2"H-heptdecafluorodecyl)dodecanedioate | 1-(1'H,1'H,2'H,2'H-tridecafluorooctyl)-12-(1"H,1"H,2"H,2"H-heneicosafluorododecyl)dodecanedioate | 1-(1'H,1H,2'H,2'H-tridecafluorooctyl)-12-(1"H,1"H,2"H,2"H-pentacosafluorotetradecyl)dodecanedioate | 1-(1'H,1'H,2'H,2'H-heptadecafluorodecyl)-12-(1"H,1'H,2"H,2"H-heptadecafluorodecyl)dodecanedioate | 1-(1'H,1H,2'H,2'H-heptadecafluorodecyl)-12-(1"H,1"H,2"H,2"H-heneicosafluorododecyl)dodecanedioate | | 423-180-6 | - | Xn; R48/22 | Xn | R: 48/22 | S: (2-)36 | | | |
| 608-031-00-7 | 2-benzyl-2-methyl-3-butenitrile | | 407-870-4 | 97384-48-0 | Xn; R22 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 22-52/53 | S: (2-)61 | | | |
| 608-033-00-8 | N-butyl-3-(2-chloro-4-nitrophenylhydrazono)-1-cyano-2-methylprop-1-ene-1,3-dicarboximide | | 407-970-8 | 75511-91-0 | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 43-52/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 608-034-00-3 | chlorfenapyr | 4-bromo-2-(4-chlorophenyl)-1-ethoxymethyl-5-trifluoromethylpyrrole-3-carbonitrile | | - | 122453-73-0 | T; R23 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 22-23-50/53 | S: (1/2-)13-36/37-45-60-61 | | | |
| 608-035-00-9 | (+/-)-α-[(2-acetyl-5-methylphenyl)-amino]-2,6-dichlorobenzene-aceto-nitrile | | 419-290-9 | - | R43 | R53 | Xi | R: 43-53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 608-036-00-4 | 3-(2-{4-[2-(4-cyanophenyl)vinyl]phenyl}vinyl)benzonitrile | | 419-060-8 | 79026-02-1 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 608-037-00-X | A mixture of: (E)-2,12-tridecadiennitrile | (E)-3,12-tridecadiennitrile | (Z)-3,12-tridecadiennitrile | | 422-190-8 | 124071-40-5 | N; R50-53 | N | R:50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 608-038-00-5 | 2,2,4-trimethyl-4-phenyl-butane-nitrile | | 422-580-8 | 75490-39-0 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-51/53 | S: (2-)61 | | | |
| 608-039-00-0 | 2-phenylhexanenitrile | | 423-460-8 | 3508-98-3 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)23-60-61 | | | |
| 608-040-00-6 | 4,4'-dithiobis(5-amino-1-(2,6-dichloro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-1H-pyrazole-3-carbonitrile) | | 423-490-1 | 130755-46-3 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 608-041-00-1 | 4'-((2-butyl-4-oxo-1,3-diazaspiro[4,4]non-1-ene-3-y 1)methyl)(1,1'-biphenyl)-2-carbonitrile | | 423-500-4 | 138401-24-8 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 608-043-00-2 | 3-(cis-3-hexenyloxy)propanenitril | | 415-220-6 | 142653-61-0 | T; R23 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 22-23-50/53 | S: (1/2-)13-36/37-45-60-61 | | | |
| 609-064-00-X | mesotrione | 2-[4-(methylsulfonyl)-2-nitrobenzoyl]-1,3-cyclohexanedione | | - | 104206-82-8 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 609-066-00-0 | lithium sodium 3-amino-10-[4-(10-amino-6,13-dichloro-4,11-disulfonatobenzo[5,6][1,4]oxazino[2,3-b]phenoxazine-3-ylamino)-6-[methyl(2-sulfonato-ethyl)amino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-6,13-dichlorobenzo[5,6][1,4]oxazino[2,3-b]phenoxazine-4,11-disulfonate | | 418-870-9 | 154212-58-5 | Xn; R20/21/22-68/20/21/22 | Xn | R: 20/21/22-68/20/21/22 | S: (2-)36/37 | | | |
| 609-067-00-6 | sodium and potassium 4-(3-aminopropylamino)-2,6-bis[3-(4-methoxy-2-sulfophenylazo)-4-hydroxy-2-sulfo-7-naphthylamino]-1,3,5-triazine | | 416-280-6 | 156769-97-0 | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 609-068-00-1 | musk xylene | 5-tert-butyl-2,4,6-trinitro-m-xylene | | 201-329-4 | 81-15-2 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | E; R2 | N; R50-53 | E; Xn; N | R: 2-40-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-60-61 | | | |
| 609-070-00-2 | 1,4-dichloro-2-(1,1,2,3,3,3-hexafluoropropoxy)-5-nitrobenzene | | 415-580-4 | 130841-23-5 | Xn; R22 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 609-071-00-8 | A mixture of: 2-methylsulfanyl-4,6-bis-(2-hydroxy-4-methoxy-phenyl)-1,3,5-triazine 2-(4,6-bis-methylsulfanyl-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-5-methoxy-phenol | | 423-520-3 | 156137-33-6 | R43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 611-099-00-0 | (methylenebis(4,1-phenylenazo(1-(3-(dimethylamino)propyl)-1,2-dihydro-6-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-oxopyridine-5,3-diyl)))-1,1'-dipyridinium dichloride dihydrochloride | | 401-500-5 | - | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 611-100-00-4 | potassium sodium 3,3'-(3(or4)-methyl-1,2-phenylenebis(imino(6-chloro)-1,3,5-triazirie-4,2-diylimino(2-acetamido-5-methoxy)-4,1-phenylenazo)dinaphthalene-1,5-disulfonate | | 403-810-6 | 140876-13-7 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 611-101-00-X | 2'-(4-chloro-3-cyano-5-formyl-2-thienyl)azo-5'-diethylaminoacetanilide | | 405-200-5 | 104366-25-8 | R43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 611-103-00-0 | trisodium (1-(3-carboxylato-2-oxido-5-sulfonatophenylazo)-5-hydroxy-7-sulfonatonaphthalen-2-amido)nickel(II) | | 407-110-1 | - | Xi; R41 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 611-104-00-6 | A mixture of: trisodium (2,4(or 2,6 or 4,6)-bis(3,5-dinitro-2-oxidophenylazo)-5-hydroxyphenolato)(2(or 4or 6)-(3,5-dinitro-2-oxidophenylazo)-5-hydroxy-4(or 2or 6)-(4-(4-nitro-2-sulfonatoanilino)phenylazo)phenolato)ferrate(1-) | trisodium bis(2,4(or 2,6 or 4,6)-bis(3,5-dinitro-2-oxidophenylazo)-5-hydroxyphenolato)ferrate(1-) | trisodium (2,4(or 2,6 or 4,6)-bis(3,5-dinitro-2-oxidophenylazo)-5-hydroxyphenolato)(2(or 4 or 6)-(3,5-dinitro-2-oxidophenylazo)-5-hydroxy-4(or 2 or 6)-(4-nitro-2-sulfonatophenylazo)phenolato)ferrate(1-) | trisodium (2,4(or 2,6 or 4,6)-bis(3,5-dinitro-2-oxidophenylazo)-5-hydroxyphenolato)(2(or 4 or 6)-(3,5-dinitro-2-oxidophenylazo)-5-hydroxy-4(or 2 or 6)-(3-sulfonatophenylazo)phenolato)ferrate(1-) | disodium 3,3'-(2,4-dihydroxy-1,3(or 1,5 or 3,5)-phenylenediazo)dibenzenesulfonate | | 406-870-1 | - | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 611-105-00-1 | sodium 4-(4-chloro-6-(N-ethylanilino)-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)-2-(1-(2-chlorophenyl)-5-hydroxy-3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-ylazo)benzenesulfonate | | 407-800-2 | 136213-75-7 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 611-106-00-7 | hexasodium 4,4'-dihydroxy-3,3'-bis[2-sulfonato-4-(4-sulfonatophenylazo)phenylazo]-7,7'tp-phenylenebis[imino(6-chloro-1,3,5-triazine-4,2-diyl)imino]]dinaphthalene-2-sulfonate | | 410-180-6 | - | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 611-107-00-2 | potassium sodium 4-(4-chloro-6-(3,6-disulfonato-7-(5,8-disulfonato-naphthalen-2-ylazo)-8-hydroxy-naphthalen-1-ylamino)-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)-5-hydroxy-6-(4-(2-sulfatoethanesulfonyl)-phenylazo)-naphthalene-1,7-disulfonate | | 412-490-7 | - | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 611-108-00-8 | disodium 5-((4-((4-chloro-3-sulfonatophenyl)azo)-1-naphthyl)azo)-8-(phenylamino)-1-naphthalenesulfonate | | 413-600-6 | 6527-62-4 | R 52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 611-109-00-3 | Reaction products of: copper(II) sulfate and tetrasodium 2,4-bis[6-(2-methoxy-5-sulfonatophenylazo)-5-hydroxy-7-sulfonato-2-naphthylaminol-6-(2-hydroxyethylamino)-1,3,5-triazine(2:1) | | 407-710-3 | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 611-110-00-9 | tetra-sodium/lithium 4,4'-bis-(8-amino-3,6-disulfonato-1-naphthol-2-ylazo)-3-methylazobenzene | | 408-210-8 | 124605-82-9 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-28-37-61 | | | |
| 611-111-00-4 | disodium 2-[[4-(2-chloroethylsulfonyl)phenyl]-[(2-hydrox y-5-sulfo-3-[3-[2-(2-(sulfooxy)ethylsulfonyl)ethylazo]-4-sulfobenzoato(3-)cuprate(1-) | | 414-230-8 | - | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 611-112-00-X | tetrasodium 4-hydroxy-5-[4-[3-(2-sulfatoethanesulfonyl)phenylamino]-6-morpholin-4-yl-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-3-(1-sulfonatonaphthalen-2-ylazo)naphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | | 413-070-6 | - | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 611-113-00-5 | lithium sodium (2-(((5-((2,5-dichlorophenyl)azo)-2-hydroxyphenyl)methylene)amino)benzoato(2-))(2-((4,5-dihydro-3-methyl-5-oxo-1-phenyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)azo)-5-sulfobenzoato(3-)) chromate(2-) | | 414-28,0-0 | 149626-00-6 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 24/25-61 | | | |
| 611-114-00-0 | lithium sodium (4-((5-chloro-2-hydroxyphenyl)azo)-2,4-dihydro-5-methyl-3H-pyrazol-3-onato(2-))(3-((4,5-dihydro-3-methyl-1-(4-methylphenyl)-5-oxo-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)azo)-4-hydroxy-5-nitrobenzenesulfonato(3 -)) chromate(2-) | | 414-250-7 | 149564-66-9 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 22-41-52/53 | S: (2-)22-26-39-61 | | | |
| 611-115-00-6 | trilithium bis(4-((4-(diethylamino)-2-hydroxyphenyl)azo)-3-hydroxy-1-naphthalenesulfonato(3-))chromate(3-) | | 414-290-5 | 149564-65-8 | Xn; R22 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 22-52/53 | S: (2-)22-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 611-116-00-1 | A mixture of: trisodium 5-(4-chloro-6-[2-(2,6-dichloro-5-cyanopyrimidin-4-ylamino)-propylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)-4-hydroxy-3-(1-sulfonatpnaphthalene-2-ylazo)-naphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | trisodium 5-{4-chloro-6-L2-(2,6-dichloro-5-cyanopyrimidin-4-ylamino)-1-methyl-ethylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-4-hydroxy-3-(1-sulfonatonaphthalene-2-ylazo)-naphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | trisodium 5-{4-chloro-6-[2-(4,6-dichloro-5-cyanopyrimidin-2-ylamino)-propylaminoj-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino}-4-hydroxy-3-(1-sulfonatonaphthalen-2-ylazo)-naphthalene 2,7-disulfonate | trisodium 5-{4-chloro-6-[2-(4,6-dichloro-5-cyanopyrimidin-2-ylamino)-1-methyl-ethylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)-4-hydroxy-3-(1-sulfonatonaphthalen-2-ylazo)-naphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | | 414-620-8 | - | Xi; R41 | R 43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)22-24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 611-117-00-7 | 1,3-bis {6-fluoro-4-[ 1,5-disulfo-4-(3-aminocarbonyl-1-ethyl-6-hydroxy-4-methyl-pyrid-2-on-5-ylazo)-phenyl-2-ylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino) propane lithium-, sodium salt | | 415-100-3 | 149850-29-3 | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 611-118-00-2 | sodium 1,2-bis[4-[4-(4-(4-sulfophenylazo)-2-sulfophenylazo}-2-ureido-phenyl-amino]-6-fluoro-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-propane, sodium salt | | 413-990-8 | 149850-31-7 | R 43 | Xi | R: 43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 611-119-00-8 | tetrasodium 4-[4-chloro-6-(4-methyl-2-sulfophenylamino)-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-6-(4,5-dimethyl-2-sulfophenylazo)-5-hydroxynaphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | | 415-400-4 | 148878-22-2 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)22-24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 611-120-00-3 | 5-{4-[5-amino-2-[4-(2-sulfoxyethylsulfonyOphenylazo]-4-sulfo-phenylamino]-6-chloro-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino}-4-hydroxy-3-(1-sulfonaphthalen-2-ylazo)-naphthalene-2,7-disulfonicacid sodium salt | | 418-340-7 | 157707-94-3 | Xi; R41 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)22-26-39-61 | | | |
| 611-121-00-9 | Main component 6 (isomer): asym. 1:2 Cr(III)-complex of: A: 3-hydroxy-4-(2-hydroxy-naphthalene-1-ylazo)naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid, Na-salt and B: 1-[2-hydroxy-5 -(4- methoxy-phenylazo)phenylazo] naphthalene-2-ol | Main component 8 (isomer): asym. 1:2 Cr-complex of: A: 3-hydrox y-4-(2-hydroxy-naphthalene-1-ylazo)-naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid, Na-salt and B: 1-[2-hydroxy-5-(4-methoxy-phenylazo)-phenylazo]-naphthalene-2-ol | | 417-280-9 | 30785-74-1 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 611-122-00-4 | hexasodium (di[N-(3-(4-[5-(5-amino-3-methyl-1 -phenylpyrazol-4-yl-azo)-2,4-disulfo-anilino]-6-chloro-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)phenyl)-sulfamoyl](di-sulfo)-phthalocyaninato)nickel | | 417-250-5 | 151436-99-6 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)22-24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 611-123-00-X | 3-(2,4-bis(4-((5-(4,6-bis(2-aminopropylamino)-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)-4-hydroxy-2,7-disulfonaphthalen-3-yl)azo)phenylamino)-1,34-triazin-6-ylamino)propyldiethylammonium lactate | | 424-310-4 | 178452-66-9 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 611-124-00-5 | A mixture of: pentasodium 5-amino-3-(5- (4-chloro-6- [4-(2-sulfoxyethoxysulfonato)phenylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino) -2-sulfonatophenylazo)-6-[5-(2,3-dibromopropionylamino)-2-sulfonatophenylazo]-4-hydrox ynaphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | pentasodium 5-amino-6-[5-(2-bromoacryloylamino)-2-sulfonatophenylazo]-3-(5-{4-chloro-6-[4-(2-sulfoxyethoxysulfonato)phenylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino}-2-sulfonatophenylazo)-4-hydroxynaphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | tetrasodium 5-amino-3-[5-{4-chloro-6-[4-(vinylsulfonyl)phenylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino}-2-sulfonatophenylazo]-6-[5-(2,3-dibromopropionylamino)-2-sulfonatophenylazo]-4-hydroxynaphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | | 424-320-9 | 180778-23-8 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-51/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 611-125-00-0 | A mixture of: Disodium 6-[3-carboxy-4,5-dihydro-5-oxo-4-sulfonatophenyl)pyrazolin-4-yl-azo]-3-[2-oxido-4-(ethensulfonyl)-5-methoxyphenylazo]-4-oxidonaphthalene-2-sulfonate copper (II) complex | Disodium 6-[3-carboxy-4,5-dihydro-5-oxo-4-sulfonatophenyl)pyrazolin-4-yl-azo]-3-[2-oxido-4-(2-hydroxyethylsulfonyl)-5-methoxyphenylazo]-4-oxidonaphthalene-2-sulfonate copper (II) complex; | | 423-940-7 | - | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-51/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 611-126-00-6 | 2,6-bis-(2-(4-(4-amino-phenylamino)-phenylazo)-1,3-dimethyl-3H-imidazolium)-4-dimethylamino-1,3,5-triazine, dichloride | | 424-120-1 | 174514-06-8 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 611-127-00-1 | pentasodium 4-amino-6-(5-(4-(2-ethyl-phenylamino)-6-(2-sulfatoethanesulfonyl)-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino)-2-sulfonatophenylazo)-5-hydroxy-3-(4-(2-sulfatoethanesulfonyl)phenylazo) naphthalene-2,7-disulfonate | | 423-790-2 | - | R5 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 5-41-43-52/53 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39-41-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 611-128-00-7 | N,N'-bis{6-chloro-4-{6-(4-vinylsulfonylphenylazo)-2,7-disulfonicacid-5-hydroxynapht-4-ylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)ethane-1,2-diamine, sodium salt | | 419-500-9 | 171599-85-2 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | Xi | R: 41-43 | S: (2-)22-24-26-37/39 | | | |
| 611-129-00-2 | A mixture of: 5-[(4-[(7-amino-1-hydroxy-3-sulfo-2-naphthyl)azo]-2,5-diethoxyphenyl)azo]-2-[(3-phosphonophenyl)azo]benzoic acid | 5-[(4-[(7-amino-1-hydroxy-3-sulfo-2-naphthyl)azo]-2,5-diethoxyphenyl)azo]-3-[(3-phosphonophenyl)azo]benzoic acid | | 418-230-9 | 163879-69-4 | E; R2 | Repr.Cat.3; R62 | Xn; R48/22 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | E; Xn; N | R: 2-43-48/22-62-51/53 | S: (2-)26-35-36/37-61 | | | |
| 611-130-00-8 | tetra-ammonium 2-[6-[7-(2-carboxylato-phenylazo)-8-hydroxy-3,6-disulfonato-1-naphthylamino]-4-hydroxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]benzoate | | 418-520-5 | 183130-96-3 | Xi; R36 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 36-50/53 | S: (2-)26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 611-131-00-3 | 2-[2-hydroxy-3-(2-chlorophenyl)carbamoyl-1-naphthylazo]-7-[2-hydroxy-3-(3-methylphenyl)carbamoyl-1-naphthylazo]fluoren-9-one | | 420-580-2 | - | Repr.Cat.2; R61 | R 53 | T | R: 61-53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 611-132-00-9 | pentasodium bis{7-[4-(1-butyl-5-cyano-1,2-dihydro-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-6-oxo-3-pyridylazo)phenylsulfonylamino]-5'-nitro-3,3'-disulfonatonaphthalene-2-azobenzene-1,2'-diolato] chromate (III) | | 419-210-2 | - | Xi; R41 | R 52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 611-133-00-4 | Product by process iron complex of azo dyestuffs obtained by coupling a mixture of diazotized 2-amino-1 -hydroxybenzene-4-sulfanilide and 2-amino-1-hydroxybenzene-4-sulfonamide with resorcin, the obtained mixture being subsequently submitted to a second coupling reaction with a mixture of diazotized 3-aminobenzene-1-sulfonic acid (metanilic acid) and 4'-amino-4-nitro-1,1'-diphenylamine-2-sulfonic acid and metallization with ferric chloride, sodium salt | | 419-260-5 | - | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-51/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 611-134-00-X | trisodium 2-{α[2-hydroxy-3-[4-chloro-6-[4-(2,3-dibromopropionylamino)-2-sulfonatophenylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino]-5-sulfonatophenylazo]-benzylidenehydrazino)-4-sulfonatobenzoate, copper complex | | 423-770-3 | - | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-51/53 | S: (2-)22-26-39-61 | | | |
| 611-135-00-5 | Reaction product of: 2-[[4-amino-2-ureidophenylazol-5-[(2-(sulfooxy)ethyl)sulfonyl]]benzenesulfonic acid with 2,4,6-trifluoropyrimidine and partial hydrolysis to the corresponding vinylsulfonyl derivative,mixed potassium/sodium salt | | 424-250-9 | - | Xi; R41 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 41-52/53 | S: (2-)26-39-61 | | | |
| 611-136-00-0 | 2-{4-(2-ammoniopropylamino)-6-[4-hydroxy-3-(5-methyl-2-methoxy-4-sulfamoylphenylazo)-2-sulfonatonaphth-7-ylamino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino}-2-aminopropyl formate | | 424-260-3 | - | Repr.Cat.3; R62 | Xi; R41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 41-62-51/53 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 611-137-00-6 | 6-tert-butyl-7-chloro-3-tridecyl-7,7a-dihydro-1H-pyrazolo[5,1-c]-1,2,4-triazole | | 419-870-1 | 159038-16-1 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 611-138-00-1 | 2-(4-aminophenyl)-6-tert-butyl-1H-pyrazolo[1,5-b][1,2,4]triazole | | 415-910-7 | 152828-25-6 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 611-140-00-2 | azafenidin | | - | 68049-83-2 | T; R48/22 | Repr. Cat. 2; R61 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 61-48/22-62-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | C ≥ 0.025 %: N; R50/53 | 0.0025 % ≤ C < 0.025 %: N; R51/53 | 0.00025 % ≤ C < 0.0025 %: R52/53 | | |
| 612-184-00-5 | 6'-(dibutylamino)-3'-methyl-2'-(phenylamino)spiro[isobenzofura n-1 (3H),9-(9H)-xanthenl-3-one | | 403-830-5 | 89331-94-2 | R 52-53 | R:52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 612-185-00-0 | 1-3-[4-((heptadecafluorononyl)oxy)-benzamido]propyl]-N,N,N-trimethylammonium iodide | | 407-400-8 | 59493-72-0 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 612-186-00-6 | bis(N-(7-hydroxy-8- methyl-5-phenylphenazin-3-ylidene)dimethylammonium) sulfate | | 406-770-8 | 149057-64-7 | Xn; R48/22 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 41-43-48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 612-187-00-1 | 2,3,4-trifluoroaniline | | 407-170-9 | 3862-73-5 | Xn; R21/22-48/22 | Xi; R38-41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-38-41-48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)23-26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 612-188-00-7 | 4,4'-(9H-fluoren-9-ylidene)bis(2-chloroaniline) | | 407-560-9 | 107934-68-9 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 612-189-00-2 | 4-amino-2-(aminomethyl)phenol dihydrochloride | | 412-510-4 | 135043-64-0 | Xn; R22 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-50/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 612-190-00-8 | 4,4'-methylenebis(2-isopropyl-6-methylaniline) | | 415-150-6 | 16298-38-7 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)36-61 | | | |
| 612-191-00-3 | Polymer of allylamine hydrochloride | | 415-050-2 | 71550-12-4 | Xn; R22 | R 43 | Xn | R: 22-43 | S: (2-)36/37 | | | |
| 612-192-00-9 | 2-isopropyl-4-(N-methyl)aminomethylthiazole | | 414-800-6 | 154212-60-9 | Xn; R21/22 | Xi; R38-41 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-38-41-51/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 612-193-00-4 | 3-methylaminomethylphenylamine | | 414-570-7 | 18759-96-1 | Xn; R21/22 | C; R34 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 21/22-34-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 612-194-00-X | 2-hydroxy-3-[(2-hydroxyethyl)-[2-(1-oxotetradecyl)amino]ethyl]amino ]-N,N,N-trimethyl-1-propanammonium chloride | | 414-670-0 | 141890-30-4 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 612-195-00-5 | bis[tributyl 4-(methylbenzyl)ammonium] 1,5-naphthalenedisulfonate | | 415-210-1 | - | Xn; R20/22 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/22-41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-36/39-60-61 | | | |
| 612-196-00-0 | 4-chloro-o-toluidine | [1] | 4-chloro-o-toluidine | hydrochloride | [2] | E | 202-441-6 | [1] | 221-627-8 | [2| | 95-69-2 [1] | 3165-93-3 [2] | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Muta.Cat.3; R68 | T; R23/24/25 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-68-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 612-197-00-6 | 2,4,5-trimethylaniline | [1] | 2,4,5-trimethylaniline hydrochloride | [2] | E | 205-282-0 | [1] | -[2] | 137-17-7 [1] | 21436-97-5 [2] | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | T; R23/24/25 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-23/24/25-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 612-198-00-1 | 4,4'-thiodianiline and its salts | E | 205-370-9 | 139-65-1 | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-22-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 612-199-00-7 | 4,4'-oxydianiline and its salts | p-aminophenyl ether | E | 202-977-0 | 101-80-4 | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Muta.Cat.2; R46 | Repr.Cat.3; R62 | T; R23/24/25 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-46-23/24/25-62-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 612-200-00-0 | 2,4-diaminoanisole | 4-methoxy-m-phenylenediamine | [1] | 2,4-diaminoanisole sulphate | [2] | | 210-406-1 | [1] | 254-323-9 | [2] | 615-05-4 [1] | 39156-41-7 [2] | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Muta.Cat.3; R68 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-22-68-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 612-201-00-6 | N,N,N',N'-tetramethyl-4,4'-methylendianiline | | 202-959-2 | 101-61-1 | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 612-202-00-1 | 3,4-dichloroaniline | | 202-448-4 | 95-76-1 | T; R23/24/25 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-41-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 612-204-00-2 | C.I. Basic Violet 3 | 4-[4,4'-bis(dimethylamino) benzhydrylidene]cyclohexa-2,5-dien-1-ylidenejdimethylammonium chloride | | 208-953-6 | 548-62-9 | Carc.Cat.3; R40 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-40-41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37/39-46-60-61 | | | |
| 612-205-00-8 | C.I. Basic Violet 3 with ≥ 0.1% of Michler's ketone (EC no. 202-027-5) | E | 208-953-6 | 548-62-9 | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 45-22-41-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 612-206-00-3 | famoxadone | 3-anilino-5-methyl-5-(4-phenoxyphenyl)-1,3-oxazolidine-2,4-dione | | - | 131807-57-3 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)46-60-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 612-209-00-X | 6-methoxy-m-toluidine p-cresidine | E | 204-419-1 | 120-71-8 | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Xn; R22 | T | R: 45-22 | S: 53-45 | | | |
| 612-210-00-5 | 5-nitro-o-toluidine | [1] | 5-nitro-o-toluidine hydrochloride | [2] | | 202-765-8 | [1] | 256-960-8 | [2] | 99-55-8 [1] | 51085-52-0 [2] | Carc.Cat.3; R40 | T; R23/24/25 | R52-53 | T | R: 23/24/25-40-52/53 | S: (1/2-)36/3 7-45-61 | | | |
| 612-211-00-0 | N-[(benzotriazole-1-yl)methyl)]-4-carboxybenzenesulfonamide | | 416-470-9 | - | Xi; R36 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36-51/53, | S: (2-)26-61 | | | |
| 612-212-00-6 | 2,6-dichloro-4-trifluoromethylaniline | | 416-430-0 | 24279-39-8 | Xn; R20/22 | Xi; R38 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/22-38-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 612-213-00-1 | isobutylidene-(2-(2-isopropyl-4,4-dimethyloxazolidine-3-yl)-1,1-dimethylethyl)amine | | 419-850-2 | 148348-13-4 | C; R34 | R52-53 | C | R: 34-52/53 | S: (1/2-)23-26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 612-214-00-7 | 4-(2,2-diphenylethenyl)-N,N-di-phenylbenzenamine | | 421-390-2 | 89114-90-9 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 612-215-00-2 | 3-chloro-2-(isopropylthio)aniline | | 421-700-6 | 179104-32-6 | Xi; R38 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-51/53 | S: (2-)37-61 | | | |
| 612-217-00-3 | 1-methoxy-2-propylamine | | 422-550-4 | 37143-54-7 | F; R11 | C; R34 | Xn; R22 | R52-53 | F; C | R: 11-22-34-52/53 | S: (1/2-)9-26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 613-181-00-1 | 5,5-dimethyl-perhydro-pyrimidin-2-one a-(4-trifluoromethylstyryl)-α-(4-trifluoromethyl)cinnamylidenehydrazone | | 405-090-9 | 67485-29-4 | T; R48/25 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R36 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 22-36-48/25-50/53 | S: (1/2-)22-26-36/37-45-60-61 | | | |
| 613-182-00-7 | 1-(1-naphthylmethyl)quinolinium chloride | | 406-220-7 | 65322-65-8 | Carc.Cat.3; R40 | Muta.Cat.3; R68 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R38-41 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 22-38-40-41-52/53-68 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 613-183-00-2 | A mixture of: 5-(N-methylperfluorooctylsulfonamido)methyl-3-octadecyl-1,3-oxazolidin-2-one | 5-(N-methylperfluoroheptylsulfonamido)methyl-3-octadecyl-1,3-oxazolidin-2-one | | 413-640-4 | - | Xn; R48/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)36-60-61 | | | |
| 613-184-00-8 | nitrilotriethyleneammoniopropane-2-ol 2-ethylhexanoate | | 413-670-8 | - | Xi; R36 | R 43 | Xi | R: 36-43 | S: (2-)24-26-37 | | | |
| 613-185-00-3 | 2,3,5,6-tetrahydro-2-methyl-2H-cyclopenta[d]-1,2-thiazol-3-one | | 407-630-9 | 82633-79-2 | T; R25 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 25-41-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)22-26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 613-186-00-9 | (2R,3R)-3-((R)-1-(tert-butyldimethylsiloxy)ethyl)-4-oxoazetidin-2-yl acetate | | 408-050-9 | 76855-69-1 | Xi; R36 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 36-43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37-61 | | | |
| 613-188-00-X | 1-(3-(4-fluorophetioxy)propyl)-3-methoxy-4-piperidinone | | 411-500-7 | 116256-11-2 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-43-51/53 | S: (2-)22-24-26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 613-189-00-5 | 1,4,7,10-tetrakis(p-toluensulfonyl)-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane | | 414-030-0 | 52667-88-6 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 613-190-00-0 | disodium 1-amino-4-(2-(5-chloro-6-fluoro-pyrimidin-4-ylamino-methyl)-4-methyl-6-sulfo phenylamino)-9,10-dioxo-9,10-dihydro-anthracene-2-sulfonate | | 414-040-5 | 149530-93-8 | Xn; R22 | R 43 | Xn | R: 22-43 | S: (2-)22-24-37 | | | |
| 613-191-00-6 | 3-ethyl-2-methyl-2-(3-methylbutyl)-1,3-oxazolidine | | 421-150-7 | 143860-04-2 | Repr.Cat.2; R60 | C: R34 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 60-34-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 613-193-00-7 | pentakis[3-(dimethylammonio)propylsulfamoyl]-[(6-hydroxy-4,4,8,8-tetramethyl-4,8-diazoniaiindecane-1,11-diyldisulfamoyl)di[phthalocyaninecopper(II)]] heptalactate | | 414-930-3 | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 613-194-00-2 | 6,13-dichloro-3,10-bis{2-[4-fluoro-6-(2-sulfophenylamino)-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylaminojpropylamino}benzo[5,6][1,4]oxazino[2,3-b.]phenoxazine-4,11-disulphonic acid, lithium-, sodium salt. | | 418-000-8 | 163062-28-0 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)22-26-39 | | | |
| 613-195-00-8 | 2,2-(1,4-phenylene)bis((4H-3,1-benzoxazine-4-one) | | 418-280-1 | 18600-59-4 | R 43 | R 53 | Xi | R: 43-53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 613-196-00-3 | 5-[[4-chloro-6-[[2-[[4-fluoro-6-[[5-hydroxy-6-[(4-methoxy-2-sulfophenyl)azo]-7-sulfo-2-naphthalenyl]amino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl]amino]-1-methylethyl]amino]-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl]amino]-3-[[4-(ethenylsulfonyl)phenyl]azo]-4-hydroxy-naphtalene-2,7-disulfonic acid, sodium salt | | 418-380-5 | 168113-78-8 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 613-197-00-9 | A mixture of: 2,4,6-tri(butylcarbamoyl)-1,3,5-triazine | 2,4,6-tri(methylcarbamoyl)-1,3,5-triazine | [(2-butyl-4,6-dimethyl)tricarbamoyl]-1,3,5-triazine | [(2,4-dibutyl-6-methyl)tricarbamoyl]-1,3,5-triazine | | 420-390-1 | 187547-46-2 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 613-199-00-X | A mixture of: 1,3,5-tris(3-aminomethylphenyl)-1,3,5-(1H,3H,5H)-triazine-2,4,6-trione a mixture of oligomers of 3,5-bis(3-aminomethylphenyl)-1-poly[3,5-bis(3-aminomethylphenyl)-2,4,6-trioxo-1,3,5-(1H,3H,5H)-triazin-1-yl]-1,3,5-(1H,3H,5H)-triazine-2,4,6-trione | | 421-550-1 | - | Carc.Cat.2; R45 | Repr.Cat.2; R61 | R 43 | R 52-53 | T | R: 45-61-43-52/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 613-200-00-3 | Reaction product of: copper, (29H,31H-phthalocyaninato(2-)-N29,N30,N31,N32)-, chlorosulfuric acid and 3-(2-sulfooxyethylsulfony 1)aniline, sodium salts | | 420-980-7 | - | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)22-26-39 | | | |
| 613-201-00-9 | (R)-5-bromo-3-(1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinyl methyl)-1H-indole | | 422-390-5 | 143322-57-0 | Repr.Cat.3; R62 | T; R39-48/25 | Xn; R20/22 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | N; R50-53 | T; N | R: 20/22-39-41-43-48/25-62-50/53 | S: (1/2-)53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 613-202-00-4 | pymetrozine (ISO) | (E)-4,5-dihydro-6-methyl-4-(3-pyridylmethyleneamino)-1,2,4-triazin-3(2H)-one | | - | 123312-89-0 | Carc.Cat3; R40 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 40-52/53 | S: (2-)36/37-61 | | | |
| 613-203-00-X | pyraflufen-ethyl | [1] | pyraflufen | [2] | | -[1] | -[2] | 129630-19-9 | [1] | 129630-17-7 | [2] | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 613-204-00-5 | oxadiargyl (ISO) | 3-[2,4-dichloro-5-(2-propynyloxy)phenyl]-5-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2(3H)-one | 5-tert-butyl-3-[2,4-dichloro-5-(prop-2-ynyloxy)phenyl]-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2(3H)-one | | 254-637-6 | 39807-15-3 | Repr.Cat 3; R63 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 48/22-63-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-60-61 | | | |
| 613-205-00-0 | propiconazole | (+)-1-[2-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)-4-propyl-1,3-dioxolan-2-ylmethyl]-1H-1,2,4-triazole | | 262-104-4 | 60207-90-1 | Xn; R22 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-43-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-46-60-61 | | | |
| 613-206-00-6 | fenamidone (ISO) | (S)-5-methyl-2-methylthio-5-phenyl-3-phenylamino-3,5-dihydroimidazol-4-one | | - | 161326-34-7 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 613-207-00-1 | imazalil sulphate, aqueous solution | 1-[2-(allyloxy)ethyl-2-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)]-1H-imidazolium hydrogen sulphate | (±)-1- [2-(allyloxy)ethyl-2-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)]-1H-imidazolium hydrogen sulphate | | 261-351-5 | 281-291-3 | 58594-72-2 | 83918-57-4 | Xn; R22 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 22-34-43-50/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | C > 50 %: C, Xn, N; R22-34-43-50-53 | 30 % < C ≤ 50 %: Xn, N; R22-38-41-43-50-53 | 25 % ≤ C ≤ 30 %: Xn, N; R22-41-43-50-53 | 15 % < C < 25 %: Xi, N; R41-43-51-53 | 5 % ≤ C ≤ 15 %: Xi, N; R36-43-51-53 | 2,5 % ≤ C < 5 %: Xi, N; R43-51-53 | 1 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: Xi; R43-52-53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 1 %: R52-53 | | |
| 613-208-00-7 | imazamox | | - | 114311-32-9 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 613-209-00-2 | cis-1-(3-chloropropyl)-2,6-dimethyl-piperidin hydrochloride | | 417-430-3 | 63645-17-0 | T; R25 | Xn; R48/22 | R43 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 25-43-48/22-51/53 | S: (1/2-)22-36/37-45-61 | | | |
| 613-210-00-8 | 2-(3-chloropropyl)-2,5,5-trimethyl-1,3-dioxane | | 417-650-1 | 88128-57-8 | Xn; R48/22 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 48/22-52/53 | S: (2-)23-25-36-61 | | | |
| 613-211-00-3 | N-methyl-4-(p-formylstyryl)pyridinium methylsulfate | | 418-240-3 | 74401-04-0 | R43 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 43-52/53 | S: (2-)22-24-37-61 | | | |
| 613-212-00-9 | 4-[4-(2-ethylhexyloxy)phenyl] (1,4-thiazinane-1,1-dioxide) | | 418-320-8 | 133467-41-1 | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-60-61 | | | |
| 613-213-00-4 | cis-1-benzoyl-4-[(4-methylsulfonyl)oxy]-L-proline | | 416-040-0 | 120807-02-5 | R 52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 613-214-00-X | N,N-di-n-butyl-2-(1,2-dihydro-3-hydroxy-6-isopropyl-2-quinolylidene)-1,3-dioxoindan-5-carboxamide | | 416-260-7 | 147613-95-4 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 613-215-00-5 | 2-chloromethyl-3,4-dimethoxypyridinium chloride | | 416-440-5 | 72830-09-2 | Xn; R21/22-48/22 | Xi; R38-41 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 21/22-38-41-43-48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 613-216-00-0 | 6-tert-butyl-7-(6-diethylamino-2-methyl-3-pyridylimino)-3-(3-methylphenyl)pyrazolo[3,2-c][1,2,4]triazole | | 416-490-8 | - | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 613-217-00-6 | 4-[3-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionyloxy]-1-[2-[3-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydrophenyl)propionyloxy]ethyl] -2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine | | 416-770-1 | 73754-27-5 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 613-218-00-1 | 6-hydroxyindole | | 417-020-4 | 2380-86-1 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 613-219-00-7 | 7a-ethyl-3,5-bis(1-methylethyl)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydrooxazolo[3,4-c]-2,3,4,5-tetrahydrooxazole | | 417-140-7 | 79185-77-6 | Xi; R38 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-51/53 | S: (2-)37-61 | | | |
| 613-220-00-2 | trans-(4S,6S)-5,6-dihydro-6-methyl-4H-thieno[2,3-b]thiopyran-4-ol, 7,7-dioxide | | 417-290-3 | 147086-81-5 | Xn; R22 | Xn | R: 22 | S: (2-)36 | | | |
| 613-221-00-8 | 2-chloro-5-methyl-pyridine | | 418-050-0 | 18368-64-4 | Xn; R21/22 | Xi; R38 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 21/22-38-52/53 | S: (2-)23-25-36/37-61 | | | |
| 613-222-00-3 | 4-(1-oxo-2-propenyl)-morpholine | | 418-140-1 | 5117-12-4 | Xn; R22-48/22 | Xi; R41 | R43 | Xn | R: 22-41-43-48/22 | S: (2-)23-26-36/37/39 | | | |
| 613-223-00-9 | N-isopropyl-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-1H-indole | | 418-790-4 | 93957-49-4 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 613-224-00-4 | 2,5-dimercaptomethyl-1,4-dithiane | | 419-770-8 | 136122-15-1 | Xn; R22 | C; R34 | R43 | N; R50-53 | C; N | R: 22-34-43-50/53 | S: (1/2-)26-36/37/39-45-60-61 | | | |
| 613-225-00-X | A mixture of:[2-(anthraquinon-1-ylamino)-6-[(5-benzoylamino)-anthraquinone-1-ylamino]-4-phenyl]-1,3,5-triazine 2,6-bis-[(5-benzoylamino)-anthraquinon-1-ylamino]-4-phenyl-1,3,5-triazine. | | 421-290-9 | - | Xn; R48/22 | R53 | Xn | R: 48/22-53 | S: (2-)22-36-61 | | | |
| 613-226-00-5 | 1-(2-(ethyl(4-(4-(4-(4-(ethyl(2-pyridinoethyl)amino)-2-methylphenylazo)benzoylamino)-phenylazo)-3-methylphenyl)amino)ethyl-pyridinium dichloride | | 420-950-3 | 163831-67-2 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 41-50/53 | S: (2-)26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 613-227-00-0 | (+/-)-[(R*,R*)and(R*,S*)]-6-fluoro-3,4-dihydro-2-oxiranyl-2H-1-benzopyran | | 419-600-2 | - | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-28-36/37-61 | | | |
| 613-228-00-6 | (+/-)-(R*,S*)-6-fluoro-3,4-dihydro-2-oxiranyl-2H-1-benzopyran | | 419-630-6 | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 24-61 | | | |
| 613-230-00-7 | florasulam (ISO) | 2',6',8-trifluoro-5-methoxy-5-triazolo[1,5-c] | pyrimidine-2-sulfonanilide | | - | 145701-23-1 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 613-233-00-3 | 4,4'-(oxy-(bismethylene))-bis-1,3-dioxolane | | 423-230-7 | 56552-15-9 | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 614-028-00-1 | A mixture of: 2-ethylhexyl mono-D-glucopyranoside | 2-ethylhexyl di-D-glucopyranoside | | 414-420-0 | - | Xi; R41 | Xi | R: 41 | S: (2-)26-39 | | | |
| 614-029-00-7 | Constitutional isomers of penta-O-allyl-β-D-fructofuranosyl-α-D-glucopyranoside | Constitutional isomers of hexa-O-allyl-β-D-fructofuranosyl-α-D-glucopyranoside | Constitutional isomers of hepta-O-allyl-β-D-fructofuransoyl-α-D-glucopyranoside | | 419-640-0 | 68784-14-5 | Xn; R22 | Xn | R: 22 | S: (2-) | | | |
| 615-030-00-5 | alkali salts, alkali earth salts and other salts of thiocyanic acid not mentioned elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | Xn; R20/21/22 | R32 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 20/21/22-32-52/53 | S: (2-)13-61 | | | |
| 615-031-00-0 | thallium salt of thiocyanic acid | A | 222-571-7 | 3535-84-0 | Xn; R20/21/22 | R32 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/21/22-32-51/53 | S: (2-)13-61 | | | |
| 615-032-00-6 | metal salts of thiocyanic acid not mentioned elsewhere in this Annex | A | - | - | Xn; R20/21/22 | R32 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 20/21/22-32-50/53 | S: (2-)13-60-61 | | | |
| 616-092-00-6 | Polymeric reaction product of bicyclo[2.2.1]hepta-2,5-diene, ethene, 1,4-hexadiene, 1-propene with N,N-di-2-propenylformamide | | 404-035-6 | - | R 43 | R 53 | Xi | R: 43-53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 616-093-00-1 | Reaction products of: aniline-terephthalaldehyde-o-toluidine condensate with maleic anhydride | | 406-620-1 | 129217-90-9 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 616-094-00-7 | 3,3'-dicyclohexyl-1,1'-methylenebis(4,1-phenylene)diurea | | 406-370-3 | 58890-25-8 | R 43 | R 53 | Xi | R: 43-53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 616-095-00-2 | 3,3'-dioctadecyl-1,1'-methylenebis(4,1-phenylene)diurea | | 406-690-3 | 43136-14-7 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 616-096-00-8 | N-(3-hexadecyloxy-2-hydroxyprop-1-yl)-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)palmitamide | | 408-110-4 | 110483-07-3 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-097-00-3 | N,N'-1,4-phenylenebis(2-((2-methoxy-4-nitrophenyl)azo)-3-oxobutanamide | | 411-840-6 | 83372-55-8 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-098-00-9 | 1-[4-chloro-3-((2,2,3,3,3-pentafluoropropoxy)methyl)phenyl]-5-phenyl-1H-1,2,4-triazole-3-carboxamide | | 411-750-7 | 119126-15-7 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-099-00-4 | 2-[4-[(4-hydroxyphenyl)sulfonyl]phenoxy]-4,4-dimethyl-N-[5-[(methylsulfonyl)amino]-2-[4-(1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)phenoxy]phenyl ]-3-oxopentanamide | | 414-170-2 | 135937-20-1 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-100-00-8 | 1,3-dimethyl-1,3-bis(trimethylsilyl)urea | | 414-180-7 | 10218-17-4 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R38 | Xn | R: 22-38 | S: (2-)36/37 | | | |
| 616-101-00-3 | (S)-N-tert-butyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-3-isoquinolinecarboxamide | | 414-600-9 | 149182-72-9 | Xn; R22 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 22-52/53 | S:(2-)61 | | | |
| 616-102-00-9 | A mixture of: α-[3-(3-mercaptopropanoxycarbonylamino)methylphenylaminocarbonyl]-ω-[3-(3-mercaptopropanoxycarbonylamino)methylphenylaminocarbonyloxy]-poly-(oxyethylene-co-oxypropylene) | 1,2-(or 1,3-)bis[α-(3-mercaptopropanoxycarbonylamino)methylphenylaminocarbonyl)-ω-oxy-poly(oxyethylene-co-oxypropylene)]-3-(or 2-)propanol | 1,2,3-tris[α-(3-mercaptopropanoxycarbonyl-amino)methylphenylaminocarbonyl)-ω-oxy-poly-(oxyethylene-co-oxypropylene)]propane] | | 415-870-0 | - | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)36/37-61 | | | |
| 616-103-00-4 | (S,S)-trans-4-(acetylamino)-5,6-dihydro-6-methyl-7,7-dioxo-4H-thieno[2,3-b]thiopyran-2-sulfonamide | | 415-030-3 | 120298-38-6 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 616-104-00-X | benalaxyl | methyl N-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-N-(phenylacetyl)-DL-alaninate | | 275-728-7 | 71626-11-4 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 616-105-00-5 | chlorotoluron | 3-(3-chloro-p-tolyl)-1,1-dimethylurea | | 239-592-2 | 15545-48-9 | Carc. Cat. 3; R40 | Repr. Cat. 3; R63 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 40-63-50/53 | S: (2-)36/37-26-46-60-61 | | | |
| 616-106-00-0 | phenmedipham | methyl 3-(3-methylcarbaniloyloxy)carbanilate | (ISO) | | 237-199-0 | 13684-63-4 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 616-108-00-1 | iodosulfuron-methyl-sodium | | - | 144550-36-7 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 616-109-00-7 | sulfosulfuron | 1-(4,6-dimethoxypyrimidin-2-yl)-3-(2-ethylsulfonylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridin-3-yl)sulfonylurea | | - | 141776-32-1 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 616-110-00-2 | cyclanilide | 1-(2,4-dichloroanilinocarbonyl)cyclopropanecarboxylic acid | | 419-150-7 | 113136-77-9 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-51/53 | S: (2-)61 | | | |
| 616-111-00-8 | fenhexamid | N-(2,3-dichlor-4-hydroxyphenyl)-1-methylcyclohexancarboxamid | | 422-530-5 | 126833-17-8 | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-112-00-3 | oxasulfuron | oxetan-3-yl 2-[(4,6-dimethylpyrimidin-2-yl)-carbamoylsulfamoyl]benzoate | | - | 144651-06-9 | Xn; R48/22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 48/22-50/53 | S: (2-)46-60-61 | | | |
| 616-113-00-9 | desmedipham | ethyl 3-phenylcarbamoyloxyphenylcarba mate | | 237-198-5 | 13684-56-5 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | C ≥ 2,5 < %: N; R50/53 | 0,25 % ≤ C < 2,5 %: N; R51/53 | 0,025 % ≤ C < 0,25 %: R52/53 | | |
| 616-114-00-4 | dodecanamide, N,N'-(9,9', 10,10'-tetrahydro-9,9',10,10'-tetraoxo(1,1'-bianthracene)-4,4'-diyl)bis- | | 418-010-2 | 136897-58-0 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 22-61 | | | |
| 616-115-00-X | N-(3-acetyl-2-hydroxyphenyl)-4-(4-phenylbutoxy)benzamide | | 416-150-9 | 136450-06-1 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-116-00-5 | N-(4-dimethylaminopyridinium)-3-methoxy-4-(1-methyl-5-nitroindol-3-ylmethyl)-N-(o-tolylsulfonyl)benzamidate | | 416-790-9 | - | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-117-00-0 | N-[2-(3-acetyl-5-nitrothiophen-2-ylazo)-5-diethylaminophenyl]acetamide | | 416-860-9 | - | Repr.Cat.3; R62 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 43-62-50/53 | S: (2-)22-36/37-60-61 | | | |
| 616-118-00-6 | N-(2',6'-dimethylphenyl)-2-piperidinecarboxamide hydrochloride | | 417-950-0 | 65797-42-4 | Xn; R22 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 22-52/53 | S: (2-)22-61 | | | |
| 616-119-00-1 | 2-(1-butyl-3,5-dioxo-2-phenyl-(1,2,4)-triazolidin-4-yl)-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-N-(2-methoxy-5-(2-(dodecyl-1-sulfonyl))propionylamino)-phenyl)-pentanamide | | 418-060-5 | 118020-93-2 | R 53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-120-00-7 | A mixture of: N-(3-dimethylamino-4-methyl-phenyl)-benzamide | N-(3-dimethylamino-2-methyl-phenyl)-benzamide | N-(3-dimethylamino-3-methyl-phenyl)-benzamide | | 420-600-1 | - | Xn; R48/22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)36/37-61 | | | |
| 616-121-00-2 | 2,4-dihydroxy-N-(2-methoxyphenyl)benzamide | | 419-090-1 | 129205-19-2 | R 43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 616-123-00-3 | N-[3-[[4-(diethylamino)-2-methylphenyl]imino]-6-oxo-1,4-cyclohexadienyljacetamide | | 414-740-0 | 96141-86-5 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 616-124-00-9 | lithium | bis(trifluoromethylsulfonyl)imide | | 415-300-0 | 90076-65-6 | T; R24/25 | C; R34 | R 52-53 | T | R: 24/25-34-52/53 | S: (1/2-)22-26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 616-125-00-4 | 3-cyano-N-(1,1-dimethylethyl)androsta-3,5-diene-17-β-carboxamide | | 415-730-9 | 151338-11-3 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 616-127-00-5 | A mixture of: N,N'-Ethane-1,2-diylbis(decanamide) | 12-Hydroxy-N-[2-[1-oxydecyl)amino]ethyl]octadecanamide | N,N'-Ethane-1,2-diylbis(12-hydroxyoctadecanamide) | | 430-050-2 | - | R43 | N; R51-53 | Xi; N | R: 43-51/53 | S: (2-)24-37-61 | | | |
| 616-128-00-0 | N-(2-(1-allyl-4,5-dicyanoimidazol-2-ylazo)-5-(dipropylamino)phenyl)-acetamide | | 417-530-7 | 123590-00-1 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-129-00-6 | N,N'-bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl)isophthalamide | | 419-710-0 | 42774-15-2 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R36 | Xn | R: 22-36 | S: (2-)22-25-26 | | | |
| 616-130-00-1 | N-(3-(2-(4,4-dimethyl-2,5-dioxo-imidazolin-1-yl)-4,4-dimethyl-3-oxo-pentanoylamino)-4-methoxy-phenyl)-octadecanamide | | 421-780-2 | 150919-56-5 | R53 | R: 53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-132-00-2 | N-[4-(4-cyano-2-furfurylidene-2,5-dihydro-5-oxo-3-furyl)phenyl]butane-1-sulfonamide | | 423-250-6 | 130016-98-7 | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| 616-133-00-8 | N-cyclohexyl-S,S-dioxobenzo[b]tiophene-2-carboxamide | | 423-990-1 | 149118-66-1 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-41-50/53 | S: (2-)22-26-39-60-61 | | | |
| 616-134-00-3 | 3,3'-bis(dioctyloxyphosphinothioylthio)-N,N'-oxybis(methylene)dipropionamide | | 401-820-5 | - | R52-53 | R: 52/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 616-135-00-9 | (3S,4aS,8aS)-2-[(2R,3S)-3-amino-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyl]-N-tert-butyldecahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxamide | | 430-230-0 | 136522-17-3 | Xn; R22 | R52-53 | Xn | R: 22-52/53 | S:(2-)22-61 | | | |
| 616-142-00-7 | 1,3-Bis(vinylsulfonylacetamido)propane | | 428-350-3 | 93629-90-4 | Muta.Cat.3; R68 | Xi; R41 | R 43 | R 52-53 | Xn | R: 41-43-68-52/53 | S: (2-)22-26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 616-143-00-2 | N,N'-dihexadecyl-N,N'-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)propanediamide | | 422-560-9 | 149591-38-8 | Xn; Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | Xi; R36 | R53 | Xn | R: 62-36-53 | S: (2-)26-36/37-61 | | | |
| 617-018-00-5 | A mixture of: 1-methyl-1-(3-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)ethyl-1-methyl-1-phenylethylperoxide, 63% by weight | 1-methyl-1-(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)ethyl-1-methyl-1-phenylethylperoxide, 31 % by weight | | 410-840-3 | 71566-50-2 | O; R7 | N; R51-53 | O; N | R: 7-51/53 | S: (2-)3/7-14-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 617-019-00-0 | 6-(phthalimido)peroxyhexanoic acid | | 410-850-8 | 128275-31-0 | O; R7 | Xi; R41 | N; R50 | O; Xi; N | R: 7-41-50 | S: (2-)3/7-14-26-36/37/39-61 | | | |
| 617-020-00-6 | 1,3-di(prop-2,2-diyl)benzene bis(neodecanoylperoxide) | | 420-060-5 | 117663-11-3 | R10 | O; R7 | N; R51-53 | O; N | R: 7-10-51/53 | S: (2-)7-14-36/37/39-47-61 | | | |
| 650-042-00-4 | Reaction product of: | polyethylene-polyamine-(C 16-C18)-alkylamides with monothio-(C2)-alkyl phosphonates | | 417-450-2 | - | Xi; R36/38 | R43 | R52-53 | Xi | R: 36/38-43-52/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37-61 | | | |
| 650-043-00-X | Reaction product of: 3,5-bis-tert-butylsalicylicacid and aluminiumsulfate | | 420-310-3 | - | Xn; R22 | N; R50-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-50/53 | S: (2-)22-56-60-61 | | | |
| 650-044-00-5 | mixed linear and branched C14-15 alcohols ethoxylated, reaction product with epichlorohydrin | | 420-480-9 | 158570-99-1 | Xi; R38 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-37-60-61 | | | |
| 650-045-00-0 | Reaction product of: 1,2,3-propanetricarboxylic acid, 2-hydroxy, diethyl ester, 1-propanol and zirconium tetra-n-propanolate | | 417-110-3 | - | F; R11 | Xi; R38-41 | N; R51-53 | F; Xi; N | R: 11-38-41-51/53 | S: (2-)9-16-26-37/39-61 | | | |
| 650-046-00-6 | di(tetramethylammonium)(29H,31H-phthalocyanin-N29,N30,N31,N32)disulfonamide disulfonate, cuprate(2-)complex, derivates | | 416-180-2 | - | Xn; R22-48/22 | N; R51-53 | Xn; N | R: 22-48/22-51/53 | S: (2-)22-36-61 | | | |
| 650-047-00-1 | dibenzylphenylsulfonium hexafluoroantimonate | | 417-760-8 | 134164-24-2 | T; R48/25 | Xn; R22 | Xi; R41 | R43 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 22-41-43-48/25-51/53 | S:(1/2-)22-26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 650-048-00-7 | Reaction product of: borax, hydrogen peroxide, acetic acid anhydride and acetic acid | | 420-070-1 | - | O; R7 | Xn; R20/21/22 | C; R35 | N; R50 | O; C; N | R: 7-20/21/22-35-50 | S: (1/2-)3/7-14-26-36/37/39-45-61 | | | |
| 650-049-00-2 | 2-alkoyloxyethyl hydrogen maleate, where alkoyl represents (by weight) 70 to 85% unsaturated octadecoyl, 0.5 to 10% saturated octadecoyl, and 2 to 18% saturated hexadecoyl | | 417-960-5 | - | Xi; R38-41 | R43 | N; R50-53 | Xi; N | R: 38-41-43-50/53 | S: (2-)24-26-37/39-60-61 | | | |
| 650-050-00-8 | A mixture of: 1-methyl-3-hydroxypropyl 3,5-[1,1-dimethylethyl]-4-hydroxydihydro-cinnamate and/or 3-hydroxybutyl3,5-[1,1-dimethylethyl]-4-hydroxydihydrocinnamate 1,3-butanediol bis[3-(3'-(1,1-dimethylethyl)4'-hydroxy-phenyl)propionate] isomers 1,3-butanediol bis[3(3',5'-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-4'-hydroxyphenyl)propionate] isomers | | 423-600-8 | - | N; R51-53 | N | R: 51/53 | S: 61 | | | |
| 650-055-00-5 | silver sodium zirconium hydrogenphosphate | | 422-570-3 | - | N; R50-53 | N | R: 50/53 | S: 60-61 | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
| 048-002-00-0 | cadmium (non-pyrophoric) | [1] | cadmium oxide (non-pyrophoric) | [2] | E | 231-152-8 | [1] | 215-146-2 | [2] | 7440-43-9 [1] | 1306-19-0 [2] | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62-63 | T; R48/23/25 | T+; R26 | N; R50-53 | T+; N | R: 45-26-48/23/25-62-63-68-50/53 | S: 53-45-60-61 | | | |
| 048-011-00-X | cadmium (pyrophoric) | E | 231-152-8 | 7440-43-9 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62-63 | T; R48/23/25 | T+; R26 | F; R17 | N; R50-53 | F; T+; N | R: 45-17-26-48/23/25-62-63-68-50/53 | S: 53-45-7/8-43-60-61 | | | |
| 609-006-00-3 | 4-nitrotoluene | C | 202-808-0 | 99-99-0 | T; R23/24/25 | R33 | N; R51/53 | T; N | R: 23/24/25-33-51/53 | S: (1/2-)28-37-45-61 | | | |
| 609-065-00-5 | 2-nitrotoluene | E | 201-853-3 | 88-72-2 | Carc. Cat. 2; R45 | Muta. Cat. 2; R46 | Repr. Cat. 3; R62 | Xn; R22 | N; R51-53 | T; N | R: 45-46-22-62-51/53 | S: 53-45-61 | | | |
| 612-039-00-6 | 2-ethoxyaniline | o-phenetidine | C | 202-356-4 | 94-70-2 | T; R23/24/25 | R33 | T | R: 23/24/25-33 | S:(1/2-)28-36/37-45 | | | |
| 612-207-00-9 | 4-ethoxyaniline | p-phenetidine | | 205-855-5 | 156-43-4 | Muta. Cat. 3; R68 | Xn; R20/21/22 | Xi; R36 | R43 | Xn | R: 20/21/22-36-43-68 | S: (2-)36/37-46 | | | |
| ANNEX2A | |
| A.21. OXIDIZING PROPERTIES (LIQUIDS) | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| This test method is designed to measure the potential for a liquid substance to increase the burning rate or burning intensity of a combustible substance, or to form a mixture with a combustible substance which spontaneously ignites, when the two are thoroughly mixed. It is based on the UN test for oxidizing liquids (1) and is equivalent to it. However, as this method A.21 is primarily designed to satisfy the requirements of Dir 67/548, comparison with only one reference substance is required. Testing and comparison to additional reference substances may be necessary when the results of the test are expected to be used for other purposes. (1) | |
| This test need not be performed when examination of the structural formula establishes beyond reasonable doubt that the substance is incapable of reacting exothermically with a combustible material. | |
| It is useful to have preliminary information on any potential explosive properties of the substance before performing this test. | |
| This test is not applicable to solids, gases, explosive or highly flammable substances, or organic peroxides. | |
| This test may not need be performed when results for the test substance in the UN test for oxidizing liquids (1) are already available. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS AND UNITS | |
| Mean pressure rise time is the mean of the measured times for a mixture under test to produce a pressure rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa above atmospheric. | |
| 1.3 REFERENCE SUBSTANCE | |
| 65% (w/w) aqueous nitric acid (analytical grade) is required as a reference substance. (2) | |
| Optionally, if the experimenter foresees that the results of this test may eventually be used for other purposes, testing of additional reference substances may also be appropriate. (3) | |
| 1.4 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| The liquid to be tested is mixed in a 1 to 1 ratio, by mass, with fibrous cellulose and introduced into a pressure vessel. If during mixing or filling spontaneous ignition occurs, no further testing is necessary. | |
| If spontaneous ignition does not occur the full test is carried out. The mixture is heated in a pressure vessel and the mean time taken for the pressure to rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa above atmospheric is determined. This is compared with the mean pressure rise time for the 1:1 mixture of the reference substance(s) and cellulose. | |
| 1.5 QUALITY CRITERIA | |
| In a series of five trials on a single substance no results should differ by more than 30 % from the arithmetic mean. Results that differ by more than 30 % from the mean should be discarded, the mixing and filling procedure improved and the testing repeated, | |
| 1.6 DESCRIPTION OF THE METHOD | |
| 1.6.1 Preparation | |
| 1.6.1.1 | Combustible substance | Dried, fibrous cellulose with a fibre length between 50 and 250 µm and a mean diameter of 25 µm, (4) is used as the combustible material. It is dried to constant weight in a layer not more than 25 mm thick at 105 oC for 4 hours and kept in a desiccator, with desiccant, until cool and required for use. The water content of the dried cellulose should be less than 0.5% by dry mass (5). If necessary, the drying time should be prolonged to achieve this. (6) The same batch of cellulose is to be used throughout the test. | |
| 1.6.1.2 | Apparatus | 1.6.1.2.1 | Pressure vessel | A pressure vessel is required. The vessel consists of a cylindrical steel pressure vessel 89 mm in length and 60 mm in external diameter (see figure 1). Two flats are machined on opposite sides (reducing the cross-section of the vessel to 50 mm) to facilitate holding whilst fitting up the firing plug and vent plug. The vessel, which has a bore of 20 mm diameter is internally rebated at either end to a depth of 19 mm and threaded to accept 1" British Standard Pipe (BSP) or metric equivalent. A pressure take-off, in the form of a side arm, is screwed into the curved face of the pressure vessel 35 mm from one end and at 90o to the machined flats. The socket for this is bored to a depth of 12 mm and threaded to accept the 1/2" BSP (or metric equivalent) thread on the end of the side-arm. If necessary, an inert seal is fitted to ensure a gas-tight seal. The side-arm extends 55 mm beyond the pressure vessel body and has a bore of 6 mm. The end of the side-arm is rebated and threaded to accept a diaphragm type pressure transducer. Any pressure-measuring device may be used provided that it is not affected by the hot gases or the decomposition products and is capable of responding to rates of pressure rise of 690-2070 kPa in not more than 5 ms. | The end of the pressure vessel farthest from the side-arm is closed with a firing plug which is fitted with two electrodes, one insulated from, and the other earthed to, the plug body. The other end of the pressure vessel is closed by a bursting disk (bursting pressure approximately 2200 kPa) held in place with a retaining plug which has a 20 mm bore. If necessary, an inert seal is used with the firing plug to ensure a gas-tight fit. A support stand (figure 2) holds the assembly in the correct attitude during use. This usually comprises a mild steel base plate measuring 235 mm x 184 mm x 6 mm and a 185 mm length of square hollow section (S.H.S.) 70 mm x 70 mm x 4 mm. | A section is cut from each of two opposite sides at one end of the length of S.H.S. so that a structure having two flat sided legs surmounted by 86 mm length of intact box section results. The ends of these flat sides are cut to an angle of 60o to the horizontal and welded to the base plate. A slot measuring 22 mm wide x 46 mm deep is machined in one side of the upper end of the base section such that when the pressure vessel assembly is lowered, firing plug end first, into the box section support, the side-arm is accommodated in the slot. A piece of steel 30 mm wide and 6 mm thick is welded to the lower internal face of the box section to act as a spacer. Two 7 mm thumb screws, tapped into the opposite face, serve to hold the pressure vessel firmly in place. Two 12 mm wide strips of 6 mm thick steel, welded to the side pieces abutting the base of the box section, support the pressure vessel from beneath. | 1.6.1.2.2 | Ignition System | The ignition system consists of a 25 cm long Ni/Cr wire with a diameter 0.6 mm and a resistance of 3.85 ohm/m. The wire is wound, using a 5 mm diameter rod, in the shape of a coil and is attached to the firing plug electrodes. The coil should have one of the configurations shown in figure 3. The distance between the bottom of the vessel and the underside of the ignition coil should be 20 mm. If the electrodes are not adjustable, the ends of the ignition wire between the coil and the bottom of the vessel should be insulated by a ceramic sheath. The wire is heated by a constant current power supply able to deliver at least 10 A. | |
| 1.6.2 Performance of the test (7) | |
| The apparatus, assembled complete with pressure transducer and heating system but without the bursting disk in position, is supported firing plug end down. 2.5 g of the liquid to be tested is mixed with 2.5 g of dried cellulose in a glass beaker using a glass stirring rod (8). For safety, the mixing should be performed with a safety shield between the operator and mixture. If the mixture ignites during mixing or filling, no further testing is necessary. The mixture is added, in small portions with tapping, to the pressure vessel making sure that the mixture is packe4 around the ignition coil and is in good contact with it. It is important that the coil is not distorted during the packing process as this may lead to erroneous results (9). The bursting disk is placed in position and the retaining plug is screwed in tightly. The charged vessel is transferred to the firing support stand, bursting disk uppermost, which should be located in a suitable, armoured fume cupboard or firing cell. The power supply is connected to the external terminals of the firing plug and 10 A applied. The time between the start of mixing and switching on the power should not exceed 10 minutes. | |
| The signal produced by the pressure transducer is recorded on a suitable system which allows both evaluation and the generation of a permanent record of the time pressure profile obtained (e.g. a transient recorder coupled to a chart recorder). The mixture is heated until the bursting disk ruptures or until at least 60 s have elapsed. If the bursting disk does not rupture, the mixture should be allowed to cool before carefully dismantling the apparatus, taking precautions to allow for any pressurization which may occur. Five trials are performed with the test substance and the reference substance(s). The time taken for the pressure to rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa above atmospheric is noted. The mean pressure rise time is calculated. | |
| In some cases, substances may generate a pressure rise (too high or too low), caused by chemical reactions not characterizing the oxidizing properties of the substance. In these cases, it may be necessary to repeat the test with an inert substance, e.g. diatomite (kieselguhr), in place of the cellulose in order to clarify the nature of the reaction. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| Pressure rise times for both the test substance and the reference substance(s). Pressure rise times for the tests with an inert substance, if performed. | |
| 2.1 TREATMENT OF RESULTS | |
| The mean pressure rise times for both the test substance and the reference substances(s) are calculated. | |
| The mean pressure rise time for the tests with an inert substance (if performed) is calculated. | |
| Some examples of results are shown in Table 1 | |
| Table 1 | |
| Examples of results (13) | |
| Substance (12) | Mean pressure rise time for a 1:1 mixture with celulose (ms) | |
| Ammonium dichromate, saturated aqueous solution | 20800 | |
| Calcium nitrate, saturated aqueous solution | 6700 | |
| Ferric nitrate, saturated aqueous solution | 4133 | |
| Lithium perchlorate, saturated aqueous solution | 1686 | |
| Magnesium perchlorate, saturated aqueous solution | 777 | |
| Nickel nitrate, saturated aqueous solution | 6250 | |
| Nitric acid, 65 % | 4767 (10) | |
| Perchloric acid, 50 % | 121 (10) | |
| Perchloric acid, 55 % | 59 | |
| Potassium nitrate, 30 % aqueous solution | 26690 | |
| Silver nitrate, saturated aqueous solution | - (11) | |
| Sodium chlorate, 40 % aqueous solution | 2555 (10) | |
| Sodium nitrate, 45 % aqueous solution | 4133 | |
| Inert Substance | | |
| Water:cellulose | - (11) | |
| 3 REPORT | |
| 3.1 TEST REPORT | |
| The test report should include the following information: | |
| — | the identity, composition, purity, etc of the substance tested; | |
| — | the concentration of the test substance; | |
| — | the drying procedure of the cellulose used | |
| — | the water content of the cellulose used | |
| — | the results of the measurements; | |
| — | the results from tests with an inert substance, if any; | |
| — | the calculated mean pressure rise times; | |
| — | any deviations from this method and the reasons for them; | |
| — | all additional information or remarks relevant to the interpretation of the results; | |
| 3.2 INTERPRETATION OF THE RESULTS (14) | |
| The test results are assessed on the basis of: | |
| a) | whether the mixture of test substance and cellulose spontaneously ignites; and | |
| b) | the comparison of the mean time taken for the pressure to rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa with that of the reference substance(s). | |
| A liquid substance is to be considered as an oxidizer when: | |
| a) | a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of the substance and cellulose spontaneously ignites; or | |
| b) | a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of the substance and cellulose exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 65% (w/w) aqueous nitric acid and cellulose. | |
| In order to avoid a false positive result, if necessary, the results obtained when testing the substance with an inert material should also be considered when interpreting the results. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria. 3rd revised edition. UN Publication No: ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev. 3, 1999, page 342. Test 0.2: Test for oxidizing liquids. | |
| Figure 1 | |
| Figure 2 | |
| Support stand | |
| Figure 3 | |
| Ignition System | |
| (1) As, for example, in the framework of UN transport regulations. | |
| (2) The acid should be titrated before testing to confirm its concentration. | |
| (3) E.g.: 50% (w/w) perchloric acid and 40% (w/w) sodium chlorate are used in reference 1. | |
| (4) e.g. Whatman Column Chromatographic Cellulose Powder CF 11, catalogue no 4021 050 | |
| (5) Confirmed by (e.g.) Karl-Fisher titration | |
| (6) Alternatively, this water content can also be achieved by (e.g.) heating at 105 oC under vacuum for 24 h | |
| (7) Mixtures of oxidizers with cellulose must be treated as potentially explosive and handled with due care | |
| (8) In practice this can be achieved by preparing a 1:1 mixture of the liquid to be tested and cellulose in a greater amount than needed for the trial and transferring 5 ± 0.1 g to the pressure vessel. The mixture is to be freshly prepared for each trial. | |
| (9) In particular, contact between the adjacent turns of the coil must be avoided. | |
| (10) Mean value from interlaboratory comparative trials | |
| (11) Maximum pressure of 2070 kPa not reached | |
| (12) Saturated solutions should be prepared at 20 oC | |
| (13) See reference (1) for classification under the UN transport scheme, | |
| (14) See reference 1 for interpretation of the results under the UN transport regulations using several reference substances. | |
| ANNEX 2B | |
| B.1 bis. ACUTE ORAL TOXICITY - FIXED DOSE PROCEDURE | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This test method is equivalent to OECD TG 420 (2001) | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| Traditional methods for assessing acute toxicity use death of animals as an endpoint. In 1984, a new approach to acute toxicity testing was suggested by the British Toxicology Society based on the administration at a series of fixed dose levels (1). The approach avoided using death of animals as an endpoint, and relied instead on the observation of clear signs of toxicity at one of a series of fixed dose levels. Following UK (2) and international (3) in vivo validation studies the procedure was adopted as a testing method in 1992. Subsequently, the statistical properties of the Fixed Dose Procedure have been evaluated using mathematical models in a series of studies (4)(5)(6). Together, the in vivo and modelling studies have demonstrated that the procedure is reproducible, uses fewer animals and causes less suffering than the traditional methods and is able to rank substances in a similar manner to the other acute toxicity testing methods. | |
| Guidance on the selection of the most appropriate test method for a given purpose can be found in the Guidance Document on Acute Oral Toxicity Testing (7). This Guidance Document also contains additional information on the conduct and interpretation of Testing Method B.1 bis. | |
| It is a principle of the method that in the main study only moderately toxic doses are used, and that administration of doses that are expected to be lethal should be avoided. Also, doses that are known to cause marked pain and distress, due to corrosive or severely irritant actions, need not be administered. Moribund animals, or animals obviously in pain or showing signs of severe and enduring distress shall be humanely killed, and are considered in the interpretation of the test results in the same way as animals that died on test. Criteria for making the decision to kill moribund or severely suffering animals, and guidance on the recognition of predictable or impending death, are the subject of a separate Guidance Document (8). | |
| The method provides information on the hazardous properties and allows the substance to be ranked and classified according to the Globally Harmonised System (GHS) for the classification of chemicals which cause acute toxicity (9). | |
| The testing laboratory should consider all available information on the test substance prior to conducting the study. Such information will include the identity and chemical structure of the substance; its physico-chemical properties; the results of any other in vitro or in vivo toxicity tests on the substance; toxicological data on structurally related substances; and the anticipated use(s) of the substance. This information is necessary to satisfy all concerned that the test is relevant for the protection of human health, and will help in the selection of an appropriate starting dose. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Acute oral toxicity: refers to those adverse effects occurring following oral administration of a single dose of a substance or multiple doses given within 24 hours. | |
| Delayed death: means that an animal does not die or appear moribund within 48 hours but dies later during the 14-day observation period. | |
| Dose: is the amount of test substance administered. Dose is expressed as weight of test substance per unit weight of test animal (e.g. mg/kg). | |
| Evident toxicity: is a general term describing clear signs of toxicity following the administration of test substance (see (3) for examples) such that at the next highest fixed dose either severe pain and enduring signs of severe distress, moribund status (criteria are presented in the Humane Endpoints Guidance Document (8)), or probable mortality in most animals can be expected. | |
| GHS: Globally Harmonised Classification System for Chemical Substances and Mixtures. A joint activity of OECD (human health and the environment), UN Committee of Experts on Transport of Dangerous Goods (physical-chemical properties) and ILO (hazard communication) and co-ordinated by the Interorganisation Programme for the Sound Management of Chemicals (IOMC). | |
| Impending death: when moribund state or death is expected prior to the next planned time of observation. Signs indicative of this state in rodents could include convulsions, lateral position, recumbence, and tremor. (See the Humane Endpoint Guidance Document (8) for more details). | |
| LD50 (median lethal dose): is a statistically derived single dose of a substance that can be expected to cause death in 50 per cent of animals when administered by the oral route. The LD50 value is expressed in terms of weight of test substance per unit weight of test animal (mg/kg). | |
| Limit dose: refers to a dose at an upper limitation on testing (2000 or 5000 mg/kg). | |
| Moribund status: being in a state of dying or inability to survive, even if treated. (See the Humane Endpoint Guidance Document (8) for more details). | |
| Predictable death: presence of clinical signs indicative of death at a known time in the future before the planned end of the experiment, for example: inability to reach water or food. (See the Humane Endpoint Guidance Document (8) for more details). | |
| 1.3 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| Groups of animals of a single sex are dosed in a stepwise procedure using the fixed doses of 5, 50, 300 and 2000 mg/kg (exceptionally an additional fixed dose of 5000 mg/kg may be considered, see section 1.6.2). The initial dose level is selected on the basis of a sighting study as the dose expected to produce some signs of toxicity without causing severe toxic effects or mortality. Clinical signs and conditions associated with pain, suffering, and impending death, are described in detail in a separate OECD Guidance Document (8). Further groups of animals may be dosed at higher or lower fixed doses, depending on the presence or absence of signs of toxicity or mortality. This procedure continues until the dose causing evident toxicity or no more than one death is identified, or when no effects are seen at the highest dose or when deaths occur at the lowest dose. | |
| 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.4.1 Selection of animal species | |
| The preferred rodent species is the rat, although other rodent species may be used. Normally females are used (7). This is because literature surveys of conventional LD50 tests show that usually there is little difference in sensitivity between the sexes, but in those cases where differences are observed, females are generally slightly more sensitive (10). However, if knowledge of the toxicological or toxicokinetic properties of structurally related chemicals indicates that males are likely to be more sensitive then this sex should be used. When the test is conducted in males, adequate justification should be provided. | |
| Healthy young adult animals of commonly used laboratory strains should be employed. Females should be nulliparous and non-pregnant. Each animal, at the commencement of its dosing, should be between 8 and 12 weeks old and its weight should fall in an interval within ± 20% of the mean weight of any previously dosed animals. | |
| 1.4.2 Housing and feeding conditions | |
| The temperature of the experimental animal room should be 22oC (± 3oC). Although the relative humidity should be at least 30% and preferably not exceed 70% other than during room cleaning the aim should be 50-60%. Lighting should be artificial, the sequence being 12 hours light, 12 hours dark. For feeding, conventional laboratory diets may be used with an unlimited supply of drinking water. Animals may be group-caged by dose, but the number of animals per cage must not interfere with clear observations of each animal. | |
| 1.4.3 Preparation of animals | |
| The animals are randomly selected, marked to permit individual identification, and kept in their cages for at least 5 days prior to the start of dosing to allow for acclimatisation to the laboratory conditions. | |
| 1.4.4 Preparation of doses | |
| In general test substances should be administered in a constant volume over the range of doses to be tested by varying the concentration of the dosing preparation. Where a liquid end product or mixture is to be tested however, the use of the undiluted test substance, i.e. at a constant concentration, may be more relevant to the subsequent risk assessment of that substance, and is a requirement of some regulatory authorities. In either case, the maximum dose volume for administration must not be exceeded. The maximum volume of liquid that can be administered at one time depends on the size of the test animal. In rodents, the volume should not normally exceed 1ml/100g of body weight: however in the case of aqueous solutions 2 ml/100g body weight can be considered. With respect to the formulation of the dosing preparation, the use of an aqueous solution/suspension/emulsion is recommended wherever possible, followed in order of preference by a solution/suspension/emulsion in oil (e.g. com oil) and then possibly solution in other vehicles. For vehicles other than water the toxicological characteristics of the vehicle should be known. Doses must be prepared shortly prior to administration unless the stability of the preparation over the period during which it will be used is known and shown to be acceptable. | |
| 1.5 PROCEDURE | |
| 1.5.1 Administration of doses | |
| The test substance is administered in a single dose by gavage using a stomach tube or a suitable intubation canula. In the unusual circumstance that a single dose is not possible, the dose may be given in smaller fractions over a period not exceeding 24 hours. | |
| Animals should be fasted prior to dosing (e.g. with the rat, food but not water should be withheld over-night; with the mouse, food but not water should be withheld for 3-4 hours). Following the period of fasting, the animals should be weighed and the test substance administered. After the substance has been administered, food may be withheld for a further 3-4 hours in rats or 1-2 hours in mice. Where a dose is administered in fractions over a period of time, it may be necessary to provide the animals with food and water depending on the length of the period. | |
| 1.5.2 Sighting study | |
| The purpose of the sighting study is to allow selection of the appropriate starting dose for the main study. The test substance is administered to single animals in a sequential manner following the flow charts in Annex 1. The sighting study is completed when a decision on the starting dose for the main study can be made (or if a death is seen at the lowest fixed dose). | |
| The starting dose for the sighting study is selected from the fixed dose levels of 5, 50, 300 and 2000 mg/kg as a dose expected to produce evident toxicity based, when possible, on evidence from in vivo and in vitro data from the same chemical and from structurally related chemicals. In the absence of such information, the starting dose will be 300 mg/kg. | |
| A period of at least 24 hours will be allowed between the dosing of each animal. All animals should be observed for at least 14 days. | |
| Exceptionally, and only when justified by specific regulatory needs, the use of an additional upper fixed dose level of 5000 mg/kg may be considered (see Annex 3). For reasons of animal welfare concern, testing of animals in GHS Category 5 ranges (2000-5000 mg/kg is discouraged and should only be considered when there is a strong likelihood that the results of such a test have a direct relevance for protecting human or animal health or the environment. | |
| In cases where an animal tested at the lowest fixed dose level (5mg/kg) in the sighting study dies, the normal procedure is to terminate the study and assign the substance to GHS Category 1 (as shown in Annex 1). However, if further confirmation of the classification is required, an optional supplementary procedure may be conducted, as follows. A second animal is dosed at 5mg/kg. If this second animal dies, then GHS Category 1 will be confirmed and the study will be immediately terminated. If the second animal survives, then a maximum of three additional animals will be dosed at 5mg/kg. Because there will be a high risk of mortality, these animals should be dosed in a sequential manner to protect animal welfare. The time interval between dosing each animal should be sufficient to establish that the previous animal is likely to survive. If a second death occurs, the dosing sequence will be immediately terminated and no further animals will be dosed. Because the occurrence of a second death (irrespective of the number of animals tested at the time of termination) falls into outcome A (2 or more deaths), the classification rule of Annex 2 at the 5mg/kg fixed dose is followed (Category 1 if there are 2 or more deaths or Category 2 if there is no more than 1 death). In addition, Annex 4 gives guidance on the classification in the EU system until the new GHS is implemented. | |
| 1.5.3 Main study | |
| 1.5.3.1 | Numbers of animals and dose levels | The action to be taken following testing at the starting dose level is indicated by the flow charts in Annex 2. One of three actions will be required; either stop testing and assign the appropriate hazard classification class, test at a higher fixed dose or test at a lower fixed dose. However, to protect animals, a dose level that caused death in the sighting study will not be revisited in the main study (see Annex 2). Experience has shown that the most likely outcome at the starting dose level will be that the substance can be classified and no further testing will be necessary. | A total of five animals of one sex will normally be used for each dose level investigated. The five animals will be made up of one animal from the sighting study dosed at the selected dose level together with an additional four animals (except, unusually, if a dose level used on the main study was not included in the sighting study). | The time interval between dosing at each level is determined by the onset, duration, and severity of toxic signs. Treatment of animals at the next dose should be delayed until one is confident of survival of the previously dosed animals. A period of 3 or 4 days between dosing at each dose level is recommended, if needed, to allow for the observation of delayed toxicity. The time interval may be adjusted as appropriate, e.g., in case of inconclusive response. | When the use of an upper fixed dose of 5000 mg/kg is considered, the procedure outlined in Annex 3 should be followed (see also section 1.6.2). | |
| 1.5.3.2 | Limit test | The limit test is primarily used in situations where the experimenter has information indicating that the test material is likely to be nontoxic, i.e., having toxicity only above regulatory limit doses. Information about the toxicity of the test material can be gained from knowledge about similar tested compounds or similar tested mixtures or products, taking into consideration the identity and percentage of components known to be of toxicological significance. In those situations where there is little or no information about its toxicity, or in which the test material is expected to be toxic, the main test should be performed. | Using the normal procedure, a sighting study starting dose of 2000 mg/kg (or exceptionally 5000 mg/kg) followed by dosing of a further four animals at this level serves as a limit test for this guideline. | |
| 1.6 OBSERVATIONS | |
| Animals are observed individually after dosing at least once during the first 30 minutes, periodically during the first 24 hours, with special attention given during the first 4 hours, and daily thereafter, for a total of 14 days, except where they need to be removed from the study and humanely killed for animal welfare reasons or are found dead. However, the duration of observation should not be fixed rigidly. It should be determined by the toxic reactions, time of onset and length of recovery period, and may thus be extended when considered necessary. The times at which signs of toxicity appear and disappear are important, especially if there is a tendency for toxic signs to be delayed (11). All observations are systematically recorded, with individual records being maintained for each animal. | |
| Additional observations will be necessary if the animals continue to display signs of toxicity. Observations should include changes in skin and fur, eyes and mucous membranes, and also respiratory, circulatory, autonomic and central nervous systems, and somatomotor activity and behaviour pattern. Attention should be directed to observations of tremors, convulsions, salivation, diarrhoea, lethargy, sleep and coma. The principles and criteria summarised in the Humane Endpoints Guidance Document should be taken into consideration (8). Animals found in a moribund condition and animals showing severe pain or enduring signs of severe distress should be humanely killed. When animals are killed for humane reasons or found dead, the time of death should be recorded as precisely as possible. | |
| 1.6.1 Body weight | |
| Individual weights of animals should be determined shortly before the test substance is administered and at least weekly thereafter. Weight changes should be calculated and recorded. At the end of the test surviving animals are weighed and then humanely killed. | |
| 1.6.2 Pathology | |
| All test animals (including those that die during the test or are removed from the study for animal welfare reasons) should be subjected to gross necropsy. All gross pathological changes should be recorded for each animal. Microscopic examination of organs showing evidence of gross pathology in animals surviving 24 or more hours after the initial dosing may also be considered because it may yield useful information. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| Individual animal data should be provided. Additionally, all data should be summarised in tabular form, showing for each test group the number of animals used, the number of animals displaying signs of toxicity, the number of animals found dead during the test or killed for humane reasons, time of death of individual animals, a description and the time course of toxic effects and reversibility, and necropsy findings. | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| 3.1 Test report | |
| The test report must include the following information, as appropriate: | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | physical nature, purity, and, where relevant, physico-chemical properties (including isomerisation); | |
| — | identification data, including CAS number. | |
| Vehicle (if appropriate): | |
| — | justification for choice of vehicle, if other than water. | |
| Test animals: | |
| — | species/strain used; | |
| — | microbiological status of the animals, when known; | |
| — | number, age and sex of animals (including, where appropriate, a rationale for use of males instead of females); | |
| — | source, housing conditions, diet etc.; | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | details of test substance formulation, including details of the physical form of the material administered; | |
| — | details of the administration of the test substance including dosing volumes and time of dosing; | |
| — | details of food and water quality (including diet type/source, water source); | |
| — | the rationale for the selection of the starting dose. | |
| Results: | |
| — | tabulation of response data and dose level for each animal (i.e. animals showing signs of toxicity including mortality, nature, severity and duration of effects); | |
| — | tabulation of body weight and body weight changes; | |
| — | individual weights of animals at the day of dosing, in weekly intervals thereafter, and at time of death or sacrifice; | |
| — | date and time of death if prior to scheduled sacrifice. | |
| — | time course of onset of signs of toxicity and whether these were reversible for each animal; | |
| — | necropsy findings and histopathological findings for each animal; if available. | |
| Discussion and interpretation of results. | |
| Conclusions. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | British Toxicology Society Working Party on Toxicity (1984). Special report: a new approach to the classification of substances and preparations on the basis of their acute toxicity. Human Toxicol., 3, 85-92. | |
| (2) | Van den Heuvel, M.J., Dayan, A.D. and Shillaker, R.O. (1987). Evaluation of the BTS approach to the testing of substances and preparations for their acute toxicity. Human Toxicol., 6, 279-291. | |
| (3) | Van den Heuvel, M.J., Clark, D.G., Fielder, R.J., Koundakjian, P.P., Oliver, G.J.A., Pelling, D., Tomlinson, N.J. and Walker, A.P. (1990). The international validation of a fixed-dose procedure as an alternative to the classical LD50 test. Fd. Chem. Toxicol. 28, 469-482. | |
| (4) | Whitehead, A. and Curnow, R.N. (1992). Statistical evaluation of the fixed-dose procedure. Fd. Chem. Toxicol., 30, 313-324. | |
| (5) | Stallard, N. and Whitehead, A. (1995). Reducing numbers in the fixed-dose procedure. Human Exptl. Toxicol. 14, 315-323. Human Exptl. Toxicol. | |
| (6) | Stallard, N., Whitehead, A. and Ridgeway, P. (2002). Statistical evaluation of the revised fixed dose procedure.-Hum. Exp. Toxicol., 21, 183-196. | |
| (7) | OECD (2001). Guidance Document on Acute Oral Toxicity Testing. Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assessment N. 24. Paris | |
| (8) | OECD (2000). Guidance Document on the Recognition, Assessment and Use of Clinical Signs as Humane Endpoints for Experimental Animals Used in Safety Evaluation. Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assesment N. 19. | |
| (9) | OECD (1998). Harmonised Integrated Hazard Classification for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals in November 1998, Part 2, p. 11 [http://webnet1.oecd.org/oecd/pages/home/displaygeneral/0,3380,EN-documents-521-14-no-24-no-0,FF.html]. | |
| (10) | Lipnick, R.L., Cotruvo, J.A., Hill, R.N., Bruce, R.D., Stitzel, K.A., Walker, A.P., Chu, I., Goddard, M., Segal, L., Springer, J.A. and Myers, R.C. (1995). Comparison of the Up-and-Down, Conventional LD50, and Fixed-Dose Acute Toxicity Procedures. Fd. Chem. Toxicol. 33, 223-231. | |
| (11) | Chan P.K and A.W. Hayes (1994) Chapter 16 Acute Toxicity and Eye Irritation. In: Principles and Methods of Toxicology. 3 rd Edition. A.W. Hayes, Editor. Raven Press, Ltd. New York, USA. | |
| ANNEX 1: FLOW CHART FOR THE SIGHTING STUDY | |
| ANNEX 1: FLOW CHART FOR THE SIGHTING STUDY | |
| ANNEX 2: FLOW CHART FOR THE MAIN STUDY | |
| ANNEX 2: FLOW CHART FOR THE MAIN STUDY | |
| ANNEX 3 | |
| CRITERIA FOR CLASSIFICATION OF TEST SUBSTANCES WITH EXPECTED LD50 VALUES EXCEEDING 2000 MG/KG WITHOUT THE NEED FOR TESTING. | |
| Criteria for hazard Category 5 are intended to enable the identification of test substances which are of relatively low acute toxicity hazard but which, under certain circumstances may present a danger to vulnerable populations. These substances are anticipated to have an oral or dermal LD50 in the range of 2000-5000 mg/kg or equivalent doses for other routes. Test substances could be classified in the hazard category defined by: 2000mg/kg <LD50 < 5000mg/kg (Category 5 in the GHS) in the following cases: | |
| a) | if directed to this category by any of the testing schemes of Annex 2, based on mortality incidences | |
| b) | if reliable evidence is already available that indicates the LD50 to be in the range of Category 5 values; or other animal studies or toxic effects in humans indicate a concern for human health of an acute nature. | |
| c) | through extrapolation, estimation or measurement of data if assignment to a more hazardous class is not warranted, and | — | reliable information is available indicating significant toxic effects in humans, or | — | any mortality is observed when tested up to Category 4 values by the oral route, or | — | where expert judgement confirms significant clinical signs of toxicity, when tested up to Category 4 values, except for diarrhoea, piloerection or an ungroomed appearance, or | — | where expert judgement confirms reliable information indicating the potential for significant acute effects from the other animal studies. | |
| TESTING AT DOSES ABOVE 2000 MG/KG | |
| Exceptionally, and only when justified by specific regulatory needs, the use of an additional upper fixed dose level of 5000 mg/kg may be considered. Recognising the need to protect animal welfare, testing at 5000 mg/kg is discouraged and should only be considered when there is a strong likelihood that the results of such a test would have a direct relevance for protecting animal or human health (9). | |
| Sighting Study | |
| The decision rules governing the sequential procedure presented in Annex 1 are extended to include a 5000 mg/kg dose level. Thus, when a sighting study starting dose of 5000 mg/kg is used outcome A (death) will require a second animal to be tested at 2000 mg/kg; outcomes B and C (evident toxicity or no toxicity) will allow the selection of 5000 mg/kg as the main study starting dose. Similarly, if a starting dose other than 5000 mg/kg is used then testing will progress to 5000 mg/kg in the event of outcomes B or C at 2000 mg/kg; a subsequent 5000 mg/kg outcome A will dictate a main study starting dose of 2000 mg/kg and outcomes B and C will dictate a main study starting dose of 5000 mg/kg. | |
| Main Study | |
| The decision rules governing the sequential procedure presented in Annex 2 are extended to include a 5000 mg/kg dose level. Thus, when a main study starting dose of 5000 mg/kg is used, outcome A (≥2 deaths) will require the testing of a second group at 2000 mg/kg; outcome B (evident toxicity and/or ≤1 death) or C (no toxicity) will result in the substance being unclassified according to GHS. Similarly, if a starting dose other than 5000 mg/kg is used then testing will progress to 5000 mg/kg in the event of outcome C at 2000 mg/kg; a subsequent 5000 mg/kg outcome A will result in the substance being assigned to GHS Category 5 and outcomes B or C will lead to the substance being unclassified. | |
| ANNEX 4: | |
| TEST METHOD B.1 bis - Guidance on classification according to the EU scheme to cover the transition period until full implementation of the Globally Harmonised Classification System (GHS) (taken from reference (8)) | |
| ANNEX 4: | |
| TEST METHOD B. 1 bis - Guidance on classification according to the EU scheme to cover the transition period until full implementation of the Globally Harmonised Classification System (GHS) (taken from reference (8)) | |
| ANNEX2C | |
| B.1 tris. ACUTE ORAL TOXICITY - ACUTE TOXIC CLASS METHOD | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This test method is equivalent to OECD TG 423 (2001) | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| The acute toxic class method (1) set out in this test is a stepwise procedure with the use of 3 animals of a single sex per step. Depending on the mortality and/or the moribund status of the animals, on average 2-4 steps may be necessary to allow judgement on the acute toxicity of the test substance. This procedure is reproducible, uses very few animals and is able to rank substances in a similar manner to the other acute toxicity testing methods. The acute toxic class method is based on biometric evaluations (2)(3)(4)(5) with fixed doses, adequately separated to enable a substance to be ranked for classification purposes and hazard assessment. The method as adopted in 1996 was extensively validated in vivo against LD50 data obtained from the literature, both nationally (6) and internationally (7). | |
| Guidance on the selection of the most appropriate test method for a given purpose can be found in the Guidance Document on Acute Oral Toxicity Testing (8). This Guidance Document also contains additional information on the conduct and interpretation of testing method B.1tris. | |
| Test substances, at doses that are known to cause marked pain and distress due to corrosive or severely irritant actions, need not be administered. Moribund animals, or animals obviously in pain or showing signs of severe and enduring distress shall be humanely killed, and are considered in the interpretation of the test results in the same way as animals that died on test. Criteria for making the decision to kill moribund or severely suffering animals, and guidance on the recognition of predictable or impending death, are the subject of a separate Guidance Document (9). | |
| The method uses pre-defined doses and the results allow a substance to be ranked and classified according to the Globally Harmonised System for the classification of chemicals which cause acute toxicity (10). | |
| In principle, the method is not intended to allow the calculation of a precise LD50, but does allow for the determination of defined exposure ranges where lethality is expected since death of a proportion of the animals is still the major endpoint of this test. The method allows for the determination of an LD50 value only when at least two doses result in mortality higher than 0% and lower than 100%. The use of a selection of pre-defined doses, regardless of test substance, with classification explicitly tied to number of animals observed in different states improves the opportunity for laboratory to laboratory reporting consistency and repeatability. | |
| The testing laboratory should consider all available information on the test substance prior to conducting the study. Such information will include the identity and chemical structure of the substance; its physico-chemical properties; the result of any other in vivo or in vitro toxicity tests on the substance; toxicological data on the structurally related substances; and the anticipated use(s) of the substance. This information is necessary to satisfy all concerned that the test is relevant for the protection of human health and will help in the selection of the most appropriate starting dose. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Acute oral toxicity: refers to those adverse effects occurring following oral administration of a single dose of a substance or multiple doses given within 24 hours. | |
| Delayed death: means that an animal does not die or appear moribund within 48 hours but dies later during the 14-day observation period. | |
| Dose: is the amount of test substance administered. Dose is expressed as weight of test substance per unit weight of test animal (e.g. mg/kg). | |
| GHS: Globally Harmonised Classification System for Chemical Substances and Mixtures. A joint activity of OECD (human health and the environment), UN Committee of Experts on Transport of Dangerous Goods (physical-chemical properties) and ILO (hazard communication) and co-ordinated by the Interorganisation Programme for the Sound Management of Chemicals (IOMC). | |
| Impending death: when moribund state or death is expected prior to the next planned time of observation. Signs indicative of this state in rodents could include convulsions, lateral position, recumbence, and tremor (See the Humane Endpoint Guidance Document (9) for more details). | |
| LD50 (median lethal oral dose): is a statistically derived single dose of a substance that can be expected to cause death in 50 per cent of animals when administered by the oral route. The LD50 value is expressed in terms of weight of test substance per unit weight of test animal (mg/kg). | |
| Limit dose: refers to a dose at an upper limitation on testing (2000 or 5000 mg/kg). | |
| Moribund status: being in a state of dying or inability to survive, even if treated (See the Humane Endpoint Guidance Document (9) for more details). | |
| Predictable death: presence of clinical signs indicative of death at a known time in the future before the planned end of the experiment; for example: inability to reach water or food. (See the Humane Endpoint Guidance Document (9) for more details). | |
| 1.3 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST | |
| It is the principle of the test that, based on a stepwise procedure with the use of a minimum number of animals per step, sufficient information is obtained on the acute toxicity of the test substance to enable its classification. The substance is administered orally to a group of experimental animals at one of the defined doses. The substance is tested using a stepwise procedure, each step using three animals of a single sex (normally females). Absence or presence of compound-related mortality of the animals dosed at one step will determine the next step, i.e.; | |
| — | no further testing is needed, | |
| — | dosing of three additional animals, with the same dose | |
| — | dosing of three additional animals at the next higher or the next lower dose level. | |
| Details of the test procedure are described in Annex 1. The method will enable a judgement with respect to classifying the test substance to one of a series of toxicity classes defined by fixed LD50 cut-off values. | |
| 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE METHOD | |
| 1.4.1 Selection of animal species | |
| The preferred rodent species is the rat, although other rodent species may be used. Normally females are used (9). This is because literature surveys of conventional LD50 tests show that, although there is little difference in sensitivity between the sexes, in those cases where differences are observed females are generally slightly more - sensitive (11). However if knowledge of the toxicological or toxicokinetic properties of structurally related chemicals indicates that males are likely to be more sensitive, then this sex should be used. When the test is conducted in males adequate justification should be provided. | |
| Healthy young adult animals of commonly used laboratory strains should be employed. Females should be nulliparous and non-pregnant. Each animal, at the commencement of its dosing, should be between 8 and 12 weeks old and its weight should fall in an interval within ± 20% of the mean weight of any previously dosed animals. | |
| 1.4.2 Housing and feeding conditions | |
| The temperature in the experimental animal room should be 22 o (± 3 o C). Although the relative humidity should be at least 30% and preferably not exceed 70% other than during room cleaning the aim should be 50-60%. Lighting should be artificial, the sequence being 12 hours light, 12 hours dark. For feeding, conventional laboratory diets may be used with an unlimited supply of drinking water. Animals may be group-caged by dose, but the number of animals per cage must not interfere with clear observations of each animal. | |
| 1.4.3 Preparation of animals | |
| The animals are randomly selected, marked to permit individual identification, and kept in their cages for at least 5 days prior to dosing to allow for acclimatisation to the laboratory conditions. | |
| 1.4.4 Preparation of doses | |
| In general test substances should be administered in a constant volume over the range of doses to be tested by varying the concentration of the dosing preparation. Where a liquid end product or mixture is to be tested however, the use of the undiluted test substance, i.e. at a constant concentration, may be more relevant to the subsequent risk assessment of that substance, and is a requirement of some regulatory authorities. In either case, the maximum dose volume for administration must not be exceeded. The maximum volume of liquid that can be administered at one time depends on the size of the test animal. In rodents, the volume should not normally exceed 1ml/100g of body weight: however in the case of aqueous solutions 2 ml/100g body weight can be considered. With respect to the. formulation of the dosing preparation, the use of an aqueous solution/suspension/emulsion is recommended wherever possible, followed in order of preference by a solution/suspension/emulsion in oil (e.g. corn oil) and then possibly solution in other vehicles. For vehicles other than water the toxicological characteristics of the vehicle should be known. Doses must be prepared shortly prior to administration unless the stability of the preparation over the period during which it will be used is known and shown to be acceptable. | |
| 1.5 PROCEDURE | |
| 1.5.1 Administration of doses | |
| The test substance is administered in a single dose by gavage using a stomach tube or a suitable intubation canula. In the unusual circumstance that a single dose is not possible, the dose may be given in smaller fractions over a period not exceeding 24 hours. | |
| Animals should be fasted prior to dosing (e.g. with the rat, food but not water should be withheld over-night, with the mouse, food but not water should be withheld for 3-4 hours). Following the period of fasting, the animals should be weighed and the test substance administered. After the substance has been administered, food may be withheld for a further 3-4 hours in rats or 1-2 hours in mice. Where a dose is administered in fractions over a period it may be necessary to provide the animals with food and water depending on the length of the period. | |
| 1.5.2 Number of animals and dose levels | |
| Three animals are used for each step. The dose level to be used as the starting dose is selected from one of four fixed levels, 5, 50, 300 and 2000 mg/kg body weight. The starting dose level should be that which is most likely to produce mortality in some of the dosed animals. The flow charts of Annex 1 describe the procedure that should be followed for each of the starting doses. In addition, Annex 4 gives guidance on the classification in the EU system until the new GHS is implemented. | |
| When available information suggests that mortality is unlikely at the highest starting dose level (2000 mg/kg body weight), then a limit test should be conducted. When there is no information on a substance to be tested, for animal welfare reasons it is recommended to use the starting dose of 300 mg/kg body weight. | |
| The time interval between treatment groups is determined by the onset, duration, and severity of toxic signs. Treatment of animals at the next dose, should be delayed until one is confident of survival of the previously dosed animals. | |
| Exceptionally, and only when justified by specific regulatory needs, the use of additional upper dose level of 5000 mg/kg body weight may be considered (see Annex 2). For reasons of animal welfare concern, testing of animals in GHS Category 5 ranges (2000-5000 mg/kg) is discouraged and should only be considered when there is a strong likelihood that the results of such a test would have a direct relevance for protecting human or animal health or the environment. | |
| 1.5.3 Limit test | |
| The limit test is primarily used in situations where the experimenter has information indicating that the test material is likely to be nontoxic, i.e., having toxicity only above regulatory limit doses. Information about the toxicity of the test material can be gained from knowledge about similar tested compounds or similar tested mixtures or products, taking into consideration the identity and percentage of components known to be of toxicological significance. In those situations where there is little or no information about its toxicity, or in which the test material is expected to be toxic, the main test should be performed. | |
| A limit test at one dose level of 2000 mg/kg body weight may be carried out with six animals (three animals per step). Exceptionally a limit test at one dose level of 5000 mg/kg may be carried out with three animals (see Annex 2). If test substance-related mortality is produced, further testing at the next lower level may need to be carried out. | |
| 1.6 OBSERVATIONS | |
| Animals are observed individually after dosing at least once during the first 30 minutes, periodically during the first 24 hours, with special attention given during the first 4 hours, and daily thereafter, for a total of 14 days, except where they need to be removed from the study and humanely killed for animal welfare reasons or are found dead. However, the duration of observation should not be fixed rigidly. It should be determined by the toxic reactions, time of onset and length of recovery period, and may thus be extended when considered necessary. The times at which signs of toxicity appear and disappear are important, especially if there is a tendency for toxic signs to be delayed (12). All observations are systematically recorded with individual records being maintained for each animal. | |
| Additional observations will be necessary if the animals continue to display signs of toxicity. Observations should include changes in skin and fur, eyes and mucous membranes, and also respiratory, circulatory, autonomic and central nervous systems, and somatomotor activity and behaviour pattern. Attention should be directed to observations of tremors, convulsions, salivation, diarrhoea, lethargy, sleep and coma. The principles and criteria summarised in the Humane Endpoints Guidance Document (9) should be taken into consideration. Animals found in a moribund condition and animals showing severe pain or enduring signs of severe distress should be humanely killed. When animals are killed for humane reasons or found dead, the time of death should be recorded as precisely as possible. | |
| 1.6.1 Body weight | |
| Individual weights of animals should be determined shortly before the test substance is administered, and at least weekly thereafter. Weight changes should be calculated and recorded. At the end of the test surviving animals are weighed and humanely killed. | |
| 1.6.2 Pathology | |
| All test animals (including those that die during the test or are removed from the study for animal welfare reasons) should be subjected to gross necropsy. All gross pathological changes should be recorded for each animal. Microscopic examination of organs showing evidence of gross pathology in animals surviving 24 or more hours may also be considered because it may yield useful information. | |
| 2. DATA | |
| Individual animal data should be provided. Additionally, all data should be summarised in tabular form, showing for each test group the number of animals used, the number of animals displaying signs of toxicity, the number of animals found dead during the test or killed for humane reasons, time of death of individual animals, a description and the time course of toxic effects and reversibility, and necropsy findings. | |
| 3. REPORTING | |
| 3.1 Test report | |
| The test report must include the following information, as appropriate: | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | physical nature, purity, and, where relevant, physico-chemical properties (including isomerisation); | |
| — | identification data, including CAS number. | |
| Vehicle (if appropriate): | |
| — | justification for choice of vehicle, if other than water. | |
| Test animals: | |
| — | species/strain used; | |
| — | microbiological status of the animals, when known; | |
| — | number, age, and sex of animals (including, where appropriate, a rationale for the use of males instead of females); | |
| — | source, housing conditions, diet etc.; | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | details of test substance formulation including details of the physical form of the material administered; | |
| — | details of the administration of the test substance including dosing volumes and time of dosing; | |
| — | details of food and water quality (including diet type/source, water source); | |
| — | the rationale for the selection of the starting dose. | |
| Results: | |
| — | tabulation of response data and dose level for each animal (i.e. animals showing signs of toxicity including mortality; nature, severity, and duration of effects); | |
| — | tabulation of body weight and body weight changes; | individual weights of animals at the day of dosing, in weekly intervals thereafter, and at the time of death or sacrifice | |
| — | date and time of death if prior to scheduled sacrifice | |
| — | time course of onset of signs of toxicity, and whether these were reversible for each animal; | |
| — | necropsy findings and histopathological findings for each animal, if available. | |
| Discussion and interpretation of results. | |
| Conclusions. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | Roll R., Höfer-Bosse Th. And Kayser D. (1986). New Perspectives in Acute Toxicity Testing of Chemicals. Toxicol. Lett., Suppl. 31, 86 | |
| (2) | Roll R., Riebschläger M., Mischke U. and Kayser D. (1989). Neue Wege zur Bestimmung der akuten Toxizität von Chemikalien. Bundesgesundheitsblatt 32, 336-341. | |
| (3) | Diener W., Sichha L., Mischke U., Kayser D. and Schlede E. (1994). The Biometric Evaluation of the Acute-Toxic-Class Method (Oral). Arch. Toxicol. 68, 559-610 | |
| (4) | Diener W., Mischke U., Kayser D. and Schlede E. (1995). The Biometric Evaluation of the OECD Modified Version of the Acute-Toxic-Class Method (Oral). Arch. Toxicol. 69, 729-734. | |
| (5) | Diener W., and Schlede E. (1999) Acute Toxicity Class Methods: Alterations to LD/LC50 Tests. ALTEX 16, 129-134 | |
| (6) | Schlede E., Mischke U., Roll R. and Kayser D. (1992). A National Validation Study of the Acute-Toxic- Class Method - An Alternative to the LD50 Test. Arch. Toxicol. 66, 455-470. | |
| (7) | Schlede E., Mischke U., Diener W. and Kayser D. (1994). The International Validation Study of the Acute-Toxic-Class Method (Oral). Arch. Toxicol. 69, 659-670. | |
| (8) | OECD (2001) Guidance Document on Acute Oral Toxicity Testing. Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assessment N. 24. Paris. | |
| (9) | OECD (2000) Guidance Document on the Recognition, Assessment and Use of Clinical Signs as Humane Endpoints for Experimental Animals Used in Safety Evaluation. Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assessment N 19. | |
| (10) | OECD (1998) Harmonized Integrated Hazard Classification System For Human Health And Environmental Effects Of Chemical Substances as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals in November 1998, Part 2, p. 11 [http://webnetl.oecd.org/oecd/pages/home/displaygeneral/0,3380,EN-documents-521-14-no-24-no-0,FF.html]. | |
| (11) | Lipnick R L, Cotruvo., J A, Hill R N, Bruce R D, Stitzel K A, Walker A P, Chu I; Goddard M, Segal L, Springer J A and Myers R C (1995) Comparison of the Up-and Down, Conventional LD50, and Fixed Dose Acute Toxicity Procedures. Fd. Chem. Toxicol 33, 223-231. | |
| (12) | Chan P.K. and A.W. Hayes. (1994 ). Chap. 16. Acute Toxicity and Eye Irritancy. Principles and Methods of Toxicology. Third Edition. A.W. Hayes, Editor. Raven Press, Ltd., New York, USA. | |
| ANNEX 1 | |
| PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED FOR EACH OF THE STARTING DOSES | |
| GENERAL REMARKS | |
| For each starting dose, the respective testing schemes as included in this Annex outline the procedure to be followed. | |
| — | Annex 1 a: Starting dose is 5 mg/kg bw | |
| — | Annex 1 b: Starting dose is 50 mg/kg bw | |
| — | Annex 1 c: Starting dose is: 300 mg/kg bw | |
| — | Annex 1 d: Starting dose is: 2000 mg/kg bw | |
| Depending on the number of humanely killed or dead animals, the test procedure follows the indicated arrows. | |
| ANNEX 1 A | |
| TEST PROCEDURE WITH A STARTING DOSE OF 5 MG/KG BODY WEIGHT | |
| ANNEX 1 B | |
| TEST PROCEDURE WITH A STARTING DOSE OF 50 MG/KG BODY WEIGHT | |
| ANNEX 1 C | |
| TEST PROCEDURE WITH A STARTING DOSE OF 300 MG/KG BODY WEIGHT | |
| ANNEX 1 D | |
| TEST PROCEDURE WITH A STARTING DOSE OF 2000 MG/KG BODY WEIGHT | |
| ANNEX 2 | |
| CRITERIA FOR CLASSIFICATION OF TEST SUBSTANCES WITH EXPECTED LD50 VALUES EXCEEDING 2000 MG/KG WITHOUT THE NEED FOR TESTING | |
| Criteria for hazard Category 5 are intended to enable the identification of test substances which are of relatively low acute toxicity hazard but which, under certain circumstances may present a danger to vulnerable populations. These substances are anticipated to have an oral or dermal LD50 in the range of 2000-5000 mg/kg or equivalent doses for other routes. The test substance should be classified in the hazard category defined by: 2000mg/kg < LD50 < 5000mg/kg (Category 5 in the GHS) in the following cases: | |
| a) | If directed to this category by any of the testing schemes of Annex 1a-1d, based on mortality incidences; | |
| b) | if reliable evidence is already available that indicates the LD50 to be in the range of Category 5 values; or other animal studies or toxic effects in humans indicate a concern for human health of an acute nature. | |
| c) | through extrapolation, estimation or measurement of data if assignment to a more hazardous class is not warranted, and | — | reliable information is available indicating significant toxic effects in humans, or | — | any mortality is observed when tested up to Category 4 values by the oral route, or | — | where expert judgement confirms significant clinical signs of toxicity, when tested up to Category 4 values, except for diarrhoea, piloerection or an ungroomed appearance, or | — | where expert judgement confirms reliable information indicating the potential for significant acute effects from the other animal studies. | |
| TESTING AT DOSES ABOVE 2000 MG/KG | |
| Recognising the need to protect animal welfare, testing of animals in Category 5 (5000 mg/kg) ranges is discouraged and should only be considered when there is a strong likelihood that results of such a test have a direct relevance for protecting human or animal health (10). No further testing should be conducted at higher dose levels. | |
| When testing is required a dose of 5000mg/kg, only one step (i.e. three animals) is required. If the first animal dosed dies, then dosing proceeds at 2000mg/kg in accordance with the flow charts in Annex 1. If the first animal survives, two further animals are dosed. If only one of the three animals dies, the LD50 value is expected to exceed 5000mg/kg. If both animals die, then dosing proceeds at 2000mg/kg. | |
| ANNEX 3 | |
| TEST METHOD B.1 this: Guidance on classification according to EU scheme to cover the transition period until full implementation of the Globally Harmonised Classification System (GHS) (taken from reference (8)) | |
| ANNEX 3 (CONTINUED 1) | |
| TEST METHOD B.1 tris: Guidance on classification according to EU scheme to cover the transition period until full implementation of the Globally Harmonised Classification System (GHS) (taken from reference (8)) | |
| ANNEX 3 (CONTINUED 2) | |
| TEST METHOD B.1 tris: Guidance on classification according to EU scheme to cover the transition period until full implementation of the Globally Harmonised Classification System (GHS) (taken from reference (8)) | |
| ANNEX 3 (CONTINUED 3) | |
| TEST METHOD B.1 tris: Guidance on classififcation according to EU scheme to cover the transition period until full implementation of the Globally Harmonised Classification System (GHS) (taken from reference (8)) | |
| ANNEX2D | |
| B. 4. ACUTE TOXICITY: DERMAL IRRITATION/CORROSION | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This method is equivalent to the OECD TG 404 (2002). | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| In the preparation of this updated method special attention was given to possible improvements in relation to animal welfare concerns and to the evaluation of all existing information on the test substance in order to avoid unnecessary testing in laboratory animals. This method includes the recommendation that prior to undertaking the described in vivo test for corrosion/irritation of the substance, a weight-of-the-evidence analysis be performed on the existing relevant data. Where insufficient data are available, they can be developed through application of sequential testing (1). The testing strategy includes the performance of validated and accepted in vitro tests and is provided as an Annex to this method. In addition, where appropriate, the successive, instead of simultaneous, application of the three test patches to the animal in the initial in vivo test is recommended. | |
| In the interest of both sound science and animal welfare, in vivo testing should not be undertaken until all available data relevant to the potential dermal corrosivity/irritation of the substance have been evaluated in a weight-of-the-evidence analysis. Such data will include evidence from existing studies in humans and/or laboratory animals, evidence of corrosivity/irritation of one or more structurally related substances or mixtures of such substances, data demonstrating strong acidity or alkalinity of the substance (2)(3), and results from validated and accepted in vitro or ex vivo tests (4)(5)(5a). This analysis should decrease the need for in vivo testing for dermal corrosivity/irritation of substances for which sufficient evidence already exists from other studies as to those two endpoints. | |
| A preferred sequential testing strategy, which includes the performance of validated and accepted in vitro or ex vivo tests for corrosion/irritation, is included as an Annex to this Method. The strategy was developed at, and unanimously recommended by the participants of, an OECD workshop (6), and has been adopted as the recommended testing strategy in the Globally Harmonised System for the Classification of Chemical Substances (GHS) (7). It is recommended that this testing strategy be followed prior to undertaking in vivo testing. For new substances it is the recommended stepwise testing approach for developing scientifically sound data on the corrosivity/irritation of the substance. For existing substances with insufficient data on dermal corrosion/irritation, the strategy should be used to fill missing data gaps. The use of a different testing strategy or procedure, or a decision not to use a stepwise testing approach, should be justified. | |
| If a determination of corrosivity or irritation cannot be made using a weight-of-the-evidence analysis, consistent with the sequential testing strategy, an in vivo test should be considered (see Annex). | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Dermal irritation: is the production of reversible damage of the skin following the application of a test substance for up to 4 hours. | |
| Dermal corrosion: is the production of irreversible damage of the skin; namely, visible necrosis through the epidermis and into the dermis, following the application of a test substance for up to four hours. Corrosive reactions are typified by ulcers, bleeding, bloody scabs, and, by the end of observation at 14 days, by discoloration due to blanching of the skin, complete areas of alopecia, and scars. Histopathology should be considered to evaluate questionable lesions. | |
| 1.3 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| The substance to be tested is applied in a single dose to the skin of an experimental animal; untreated skin areas of the test animal serve as the control. The degree of irritation/corrosion is read and scored at specified intervals and is further described in order to provide a complete evaluation of the effects. The duration of the study should be sufficient to evaluate the reversibility or irreversibility of the effects observed. | |
| Animals showing continuing signs of severe distress and/or pain at any stage of the test should be humanely killed, and the substance assessed accordingly. Criteria for making the decision to humanely kill moribund and severely suffering animals can be found in reference (8). | |
| 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.4.1 Preparation for the in vivo test | |
| 1.4.1.1 | Selection of animal species | The albino rabbit is the preferable laboratory animal, and healthy young adult rabbits are used. A rationale for using other species should be provided. | |
| 1.4.1.2 | Preparation of the animals | Approximately 24 hours before the test, fur should be removed by closely clipping the dorsal area of the trunk of the animals. Care should be taken to avoid abrading the skin, and only animals with healthy, intact skin should be used. | Some strains of rabbit have dense patches of hair that are more prominent at certain times of the year. Such areas of dense hair growth should not be used as test sites. | |
| 1.4.1.3 | Housing and feeding conditions | Animals should be individually housed. The temperature of the experimental animal room should be 20oC (± 3oC) for rabbits. Although the relative humidity should be at least 30% and preferably not exceed 70%, other than during room cleaning, the aim should be 50-60%. Lighting should be artificial, the sequence being 12 hours light, 12 hours dark. For feeding, conventional laboratory diets may be used with an unrestricted supply of drinking water. | |
| 1.4.2 Test procedure | |
| 1.4.2.1 | Application of the test substance | The test substance should be applied to a small area (approximately 6 cm2) of skin and covered with a gauze patch, which is held in place with non-irritating tape. In cases in which direct application is not possible (e.g., liquids or some pastes), the test substance should first be applied to the gauze patch, which is then applied to the skin. The patch should be loosely held in contact with the skin by means of a suitable semi-occlusive dressing for the duration of the exposure period. If the test substance is applied to the patch, it should be attached to the skin in such a manner that there is good contact and uniform distribution of the substance on the skin. Access by the animal to the patch and ingestion or inhalation of the test substance should be prevented. | Liquid test substances are generally used undiluted. When testing solids (which may be pulverised, if considered necessary), the test substance should be moistened with the smallest amount of water (or, where necessary, of another suitable vehicle) sufficient to ensure good skin contact. When vehicles other than water are used, the potential influence of the vehicle on irritation of the skin by the test substance should be minimal, if any. | At the end of the exposure period, which is normally 4 hours, residual test substance should be removed, where practicable, using water or an appropriate solvent without altering the existing response or the integrity of the epidermis. | |
| 1.4.2.2 | Dose level | A dose of 0.5 ml. of liquid or 0.5 g of solid or paste is applied to the test site. | |
| 1.4.2.3 | Initial test (In vivo dermal irritation/corrosion test using one animal) | It is strongly recommended that the in vivo test be performed initially using one animal, especially when the substance is suspected to have corrosion potential. This is in accordance with the sequential testing strategy (see Annex 1). | When a substance has been judged to be corrosive on the basis of a weight-of-the-evidence analysis, no further animal testing is needed. For most substances suspected of being corrosive, further in vivo testing is normally not necessary. However, in those cases where additional data are felt warranted because of insufficient evidence, limited animal testing may be carried out using the following approach: Up to three tests patches are applied sequentially to the animal. The first patch is removed after three minutes. If no serious skin reaction is observed, a second patch is applied and removed after one hour. If the observations at this stage indicate that exposure can humanely be allowed to extend to four hours, a third patch is applied and removed after four hours, and the response is graded. | If a corrosive effect is observed after any of the three sequential exposures, the test is immediately terminated. If a corrosive effect is not observed after the last patch is removed, the animal is observed for 14 days, unless corrosion develops at an earlier time point. | In those cases in which the test substance is not expected to produce corrosion but may be irritating, a single patch should be applied to one animal for four hours. | |
| 1.4.2.4 | Confirmatory test (In vivo dermal irritation test with additional animals) | If a corrosive effect is not observed in the initial test, the irritant or negative response should be confirmed using up to two additional animals, each with one patch, for an exposure period of four hours. If an irritant effect is observed in the initial test, the confirmatory test may be conducted in a sequential manner, or by exposing two additional animals simultaneously. In the exceptional case, in which the initial test is not conducted, two or three animals may be treated with a single patch, which is removed after four hours. When two animals are used, if both exhibit the same response, no further testing is needed. Otherwise, the third animal is also tested. Equivocal responses may need to be evaluated using additional animals. | |
| 1.4.2.5 | Observation period | The duration of the observation period should be sufficient to evaluate fully the reversibility of the effects observed. However, the experiment should be terminated at any time that the animal shows continuing signs of severe pain or distress. To determine the reversibility of effects, the animals should be observed up to 14 days after removal of the patches. If reversibility is seen before 14 days, the experiment should be terminated at that time. | |
| 1.4.2.6 | Clinical observations and grading of skin reactions | All animals should be examined for signs of erythema and oedema, and the responses scored at 60 minutes, and then at 24, 48 and 72 hours after patch removal. For the initial test in one animal, the test site is also examined immediately after the patch has been removed. Dermal reactions are graded and recorded according to the grades in the Table below. If there is damage to skin which cannot be identified as irritation or corrosion at 72 hours, observations may be needed until day 14 to determine the reversibility of the effects. In addition to the observation of irritation, all local toxic effects, such as defatting of the skin, and any systemic adverse effects (e.g., effects on clinical signs of toxicity and body weight), should be fully described and recorded. Histopathological examination should be considered to clarify equivocal responses. | The grading of skin responses is necessarily subjective. To promote harmonisation in grading of skin response and to assist testing laboratories and those involved in making and interpreting the observations, the personnel performing the observations need to be adequately trained in the scoring system used (see Table below). An illustrated guide for grading skin irritation and other lesions could be helpful (9). | |
| 2. DATA | |
| 2.1 PRESENTATION OF RESULTS | |
| Study results should be summarised in tabular form in the final test report and should cover all items listed in section 3.1. | |
| 2.2 EVALUATION OF RESULTS | |
| The dermal irritation scores should be evaluated in conjunction with the nature and severity of lesions, and their reversibility or lack of reversibility. The individual scores do not represent an absolute standard for the irritant properties of a material, as other effects of the test material are also evaluated. Instead, individual scores should be viewed as reference values, which need to be evaluated in combination with all other observations from the study. | |
| Reversibility of dermal lesions should be considered in evaluating irritant responses. When responses such as alopecia (limited area), hyperkeratosis, hyperplasia and scaling, persist to the end of the 14-day observation period, the test substance should be considered an irritant. | |
| 3. REPORTING | |
| 3.1 TEST REPORT | |
| The test report must include the following information: | |
| Rationale for in vivo testing: weight-of-evidence analysis of pre-existing test data, including results from sequential testing strategy: | |
| — | description of relevant data available from prior testing; | |
| — | data derived at each stage of testing strategy; | |
| — | description of in vitro tests performed, including details of procedures, results obtained with test/reference substances; | |
| — | weight-of-the-evidence analysis for performing in vivo study. | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | identification data (e.g., CAS number; source; purity; known impurities; lot number); | |
| — | physical nature and physicochemical properties (e.g. pH, volatility, solubility, stability); | |
| — | if mixture, composition and relative percentages of components. | |
| Vehicle: | |
| — | identification, concentration (where appropriate), volume used; | |
| — | justification for choice of vehicle. | |
| Test animals: | |
| — | species/strain used, rationale for using animals other than albino rabbit; | |
| — | number of animals of each sex; | |
| — | individual animal weights at start and conclusion of test; | |
| — | age at start of study; | |
| — | source of animals, housing conditions, diet, etc. | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | technique of patch site preparation; | |
| — | details of patch materials used and patching technique; | |
| — | details of test substance preparation, application, and removal. | |
| Results: | |
| — | tabulation of irritation/corrosion response scores for each animal at all time points measured; | |
| — | descriptions of all lesions observed; | |
| — | narrative description of nature and degree of irritation or corrosion observed, and any histopathological findings; | |
| — | description of other adverse local (e.g., defatting of skin) and systemic effects in addition to dermal irritation or corrosion. | |
| Discussion of results | |
| 4. REFERENCES | |
| (1) | Barratt, M.D., Castell, J.V., Chamberlain, M., Combes, R.D., Dearden, J.C., Fentem, J.H., Gerner, L, Giuliani, A., Gray, T.J.B., Livingston, D.J., Provan, W.M., Rutten, F.A.J.J.L., Verhaar, H.J.M., Zbinden, P. (1995) The Integrated Use of Alternative Approaches for Predicting Toxic Hazard. ECVAM Workshop Report 8. ATLA 23, 410 - 429. | |
| (2) | Young, J.R., How, M.J., Walker, A.P., Worth W.M.H. (1988) Classification as Corrosive or Irritant to Skin of Preparations Containing Acidic or Alkaline Substance Without Testing on Animals. Toxicol. In Vitro, 2, 19 - 26. | |
| (3) | Worth, A.P., Fentem, J.H., Balls, M., Botham, P.A., Curren, R.D., Earl, L.K., Esdaile, D.J., Liebsch, M. (1998) Evaluation of the proposed OECD Testing Strategy for skin corrosion. ATLA 26, 709-720. | |
| (4) | ECETOC (1990) Monograph No. 15, "Skin Irritation", European Chemical Industry, Ecology and Toxicology Centre, Brussels. | |
| (5) | Fentem, J.H., Archer, G.E.B., Balls, M., Botham, P.A., Curren, R.D., Earl, L.K., Edsail, D.J., Holzhutter, H.G. and Liebsch, M. (1998) The ECVAM international validation study on in vitro tests for skin corrosivity. 2. Results and evaluation by the Management Team. Toxicology in Vitro 12, pp.483 - 524. | |
| (5a) | Testing Method B.40 Skin Corrosion. | |
| (6) | OECD (1996) OECD Test Guidelines Programme: Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Harmonization of Validation and Acceptance Criteria for Alternative Toxicological Test Methods. Held in Solna, Sweden, 22 - 24 January 1996 (http://www.oecdl.org/ehs/test/background.htm). | |
| (7) | OECD (1998) Harmonized Integrated Hazard Classification System for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances, as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals, November 1998 (http://www.oecdl.org/ehs/Class/HCL6.htm). | |
| (8) | OECD (2000). Guidance Document on the Recognition, Assessment and Use of Clinical Signs as Humane Endpoints for Experimental Animals Used in Safety Evaluation. OECD Environmental Health and Safety Publications. Series on Testing and Assessment No. 19 (http://www.oecdl.org/ehs/test/monos.htm). | |
| (9) | EPA (1990). Atlas of Dermal Lesions, (20T-2004). United States Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances, Washington, DC, August 1990. | [Available from OECD Secretariat upon request]. | |
| TABLE I:GRADING OF SKIN REACTIONS | |
| ANNEX | |
| A Sequential Testing Strategy for Dermal Irritation and Corrosion | |
| GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS | |
| In the interest of sound science and animal welfare, it is important to avoid the unnecessary use of animals and to minimise any testing that is likely to produce severe responses in animals. All information on a substance relevant to its potential skin corrosivity/irritancy should be evaluated prior to considering in vivo testing. Sufficient evidence may already exist to classify a test substance as to its dermal corrosion or irritation potential without the need to conduct testing in laboratory animals. Therefore, utilising a weight-of-the-evidence analysis and a sequential testing strategy, will minimise the need for in vivo testing, especially if the substance is likely to produce severe reactions. | |
| It is recommended that a weight-of-the-evidence analysis be used to evaluate existing information regarding the skin irritation and corrosion of substances to determine whether additional studies, other than in vivo dermal studies, should be performed to help characterise such potential. Where further studies are needed, it is recommended that the sequential testing strategy be utilised to develop the relevant experimental data. For substances which have no testing history, the sequential testing strategy should be utilised to develop the data set needed to evaluate its dermal corrosion/irritation potential. The testing strategy described in this Annex was developed at an OECD workshop (1) and was later affirmed and expanded in the Harmonised Integrated Hazard Classification System for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances, as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals, in November 1998 (2). | |
| Although this sequential testing strategy is not an integral part of testing method B.4, it expresses the recommended approach for the determination of skin irritation/corrosion characteristics. This approach represents both best practice and an ethical benchmark for in vivo testing for skin irritation/corrosion. The testing method provides guidance for the conduct of the in vivo test and summarises the factors that should be addressed before initiating such a test. The strategy provides an approach for the evaluation of existing data on the skin irritation/corrosion properties of test substances and a tiered approach for the generation of relevant data on substances for which additional studies are needed, or for which no studies have been performed. It also recommends the performance of validated and accepted in vitro or ex vivo tests for skin corrosion/irritation under specific circumstances. | |
| DESCRIPTION OF THE EVALUATION AND TESTING STRATEGY | |
| Prior to undertaking tests as part of the sequential testing strategy (Figure), all available information should be evaluated to determine the need for in vivo skin testing. Although significant information might be gained from the evaluation of single parameters (e.g., extreme pH), the totality of existing information should be considered. All relevant data on the effects of the substance in question, or its analogues, should be evaluated in making a weight-of-the-evidence decision, and a rationale for the decision should be presented. Primary emphasis should be placed upon existing human and animal data on the substance, followed by the outcome of in vitro or ex vivo testing. In vivo studies of corrosive substances should be avoided whenever possible. The factors considered in the testing strategy include: | |
| Evaluation of existing human and animal data (Step 1). Existing human data, e.g. clinical or occupational studies and case reports, and/or animal test data, e.g. from single or repeated dermal exposure toxicity studies, should be considered first, because they provide information directly related to effects on the skin. Substances with known irritancy or corrosivity, and those with clear evidence of non-corrosivity or non-irritancy, need not be tested in in vivo studies. | |
| Analysis of structure activity relationships (SAR) (Step 2). The results of testing of structurally related substances should be considered, if available. When sufficient human and/or animal data are available on structurally related substances or mixtures of such substances to indicate their skin corrosion/irritancy potential, it can be presumed that the test substance being evaluated will produce the same responses. In those cases, the test substance may not need to be tested. Negative data from studies of structurally related substances or mixtures of such substances do not constitute sufficient evidence of non-corrosivity/non-irritancy of a substance under the sequential testing strategy. Validated and accepted SAR approaches should be used to identify both dermal corrosion and irritation potential. | |
| Physicochemical properties and chemical reactivity (Step 3). Substances exhibiting pH extremes such as ≤2.0 and ≥11.5 may have strong local effects. If extreme pH is the basis for identifying a substance as corrosive to skin, then its acid/alkali reserve (or buffering capacity) may also be taken into consideration (3)(4). If the buffering capacity suggests that a substance may not be corrosive to the skin, then further testing should be undertaken to confirm this, preferably by the use of a validated and accepted in vitro or ex vivo test (see steps 5 and 6). | |
| Dermal toxicity (Step 4). If a chemical has proven to be very toxic by the dermal route, an in vivo dermal irritation/corrosion study may not be practicable because the amount of test substance normally applied could exceed the very toxic dose and, consequently result in the death or severe suffering of the animals. In addition, when dermal toxicity studies utilising albino rabbits have already been performed up to the limit dose level of 2000 mg/kg body weight or higher, and no dermal irritation or corrosion has been seen, additional testing for skin irritation/corrosion may not be needed. A number of considerations should be borne in mind when evaluating acute dermal toxicity in previously performed studies. For example, reported information on dermal lesions may be incomplete. Testing and observations may have been made on a species other than the rabbit, and species may differ widely in sensitivity of their responses. Also the form of test substance applied to animals may not have been suitable for assessment of skin irritation/corrosion (e.g., dilution of substances for testing dermal toxicity (5). However, in those cases in which well-designed and conducted dermal toxicity studies have been performed in rabbits, negative findings may be considered sufficient evidence that the substance is not corrosive or irritating. | |
| Results from in vitro or ex vivo tests (Steps 5 and 6). Substances that have demonstrated corrosive or severe irritant properties in a validated and accepted in vitro or ex vivo test (6)(7) designed for the assessment of these specific effects, need not be tested in animals. It can be presumed that such substances will produce similar severe effects in vivo. | |
| In vivo test in rabbits (Steps 7 and 8). Should a weight-of the-evidence decision be made to conduct in vivo testing, it should begin with an initial test using one animal. If the results of this test indicate the substance to be corrosive to the skin, further testing should not be performed. If a corrosive effect is not observed in the initial test, the irritant or negative response should be confirmed using up to two additional animals for an exposure period of four hours. If an irritant effect is observed in the initial test, the confirmatory test may be conducted in a sequential manner, or by exposing the two additional animals simultaneously. | |
| REFERENCES | |
| (1) | OECD (1996). Test Guidelines Programme: Final Report on the OECD Workshop on Harmonization of Validation and Acceptance Criteria for Alternative Toxicological Test Methods. Held on Solna, Sweden, 22 - 24 January 1996 (http://wwwl.oecd.org/ehs/test/background.htm). | |
| (2) | OECD (1998). Harmonized Integrated Hazard Classification System for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances, as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals, November 1998 (http://wwwl.oecd.org/ehs/Class/HCL6.htm). | |
| (3) | Worth, A.P., Fentem J.H., Balls M., Botham P.A., Curren R.D., Earl L.K., Esdaile D.J., Liebsch M. (1998). An Evaluation of the Proposed OECD Testing Strategy for Skin Corrosion. ATLA 26, 709-720. | |
| (4) | Young, J.R., How, M.J., Walker, A.P., Worth, W.M.H. (1988). Classification as Corrosive or Irritant to Skin of Preparations Containing Acidic or Alkaline Substances, Without Testing on Animals. Toxic In Vitro, 2 (1) pp 19-26. | |
| (5) | Patil, S.M., Patrick, E., Maibach, H.I. (1996) Animal, Human, and In Vitro Test Methods for Predicting Skin Irritation, in: Francis N. Marzulli and Howard I. Maibach (editors): Dermatotoxicology. Fifth Edition ISBN 1-56032-356-6, Chapter 31, 411-436. | |
| (6) | Testing Method B.40. | |
| (7) | Fentem, J.H., Archer, G.E.B., Balls, M., Botham, P.A., Curren, R.D., Earl, L.K., Esdaile, D.J., Holzhutter, H.G. and Liebsch, M. (1998) The ECVAM international validation study on in vitro tests for skin corrosivity. 2. Results and evaluation by the Management Team. Toxicology in Vitro 12, pp.483 - 524. | |
| FIGURE | |
| TESTING AND EVALUATION STRATEGY FOR DERMAL IRRITATION /CORROSION | |
| ANNEX 2E | |
| B. 5. ACUTE TOXICITY: EYE IRRITATION/CORROSION | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This method is equivalent to the OECD TG 405 (2002) | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| In the preparation of this updated method special attention was given to possible improvements through the evaluation of all existing information on the test substance in order to avoid unnecessary testing in laboratory animals and thereby address animal welfare concerns. This method includes the recommendation that prior to undertaking the described in vivo test for acute eye irritation/corrosion, a weight-of-the-evidence analysis be performed (1) on the existing relevant data. Where insufficient data are available, it is recommended that they be developed through application of sequential testing (2)(3). The testing strategy includes the performance of validated and accepted in vitro tests and is provided as an Annex to the testing method. In addition, the use of an in vivo dermal irritation/corrosion test to predict eye corrosion prior to consideration of an in vivo eye test is recommended. | |
| In the interest of both sound science and animal welfare, in vivo testing should not be considered until all available data relevant to the potential eye corrosivity/irritation of the substance has been evaluated in a weight-of-the-evidence analysis. Such data will include evidence from existing studies in humans and/or laboratory animals, evidence of corrosivity/irritation of one or more structurally related substances or mixtures of such substances, data demonstrating high acidity or alkalinity of the substance (4)(5), and results from validated and accepted in vitro or ex vivo tests for skin corrosion and irritation (6)(6a). The studies may have been conducted prior to, or as a result of, a weight-of-the-evidence analysis. | |
| For certain substances, such an analysis may indicate the need for in vivo studies of the ocular corrosion/irritation potential of the substance. In all such cases, before considering the use of the in vivo eye test, preferably a study of the in vivo dermal effects of the substance should be conducted first and evaluated in accordance with testing method B.4 (7). The application of a weight-of-the-evidence analysis and the sequential testing strategy should decrease the need for in vivo testing for eye corrosivity/irritation of substances for which sufficient evidence already exists from other studies. If a determination of eye corrosion or irritation potential cannot be made using the sequential testing strategy, even after the performance of an in vivo study of dermal corrosion and irritation, an in vivo eye corrosion/irritation test may be performed. | |
| A preferred sequential testing strategy, which includes the performance of validated in vitro or ex vivo tests for corrosion/irritation, is included in the Annex to this testing method. The strategy was developed at, and unanimously recommended by the participants of, an OECD workshop (8), and has been adopted as the recommended testing strategy in the Globally Harmonised System for the Classification of Chemical Substances (GHS) (9). It is recommended that this testing strategy be followed prior to undertaking in vivo testing. For new substances it is the recommended stepwise testing approach for developing scientifically sound data on the corrosivity/irritation of the substance. For existing substances with insufficient data on skin and eye corrosion/irritation, the strategy should be used to fill missing data gaps. The use of a different testing strategy or procedure, or the decision not to use a stepwise testing approach, should be justified. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Eye irritation: is the production of changes in the eye following the application of a test substance to the anterior surface of the eye, which are fully reversible within 21 days of application. | |
| Eye corrosion: is the production of tissue damage in the eye, or serious physical decay of vision, following application of a test substance to the anterior surface of the eye, which is not fully reversible within 21 days of application | |
| 1.3 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| The substance to be tested is applied in a single dose to one of the eyes of the experimental animal; the untreated eye serves as the control. The degree of eye irritation/corrosion is evaluated by scoring lesions of conjunctiva, cornea, and iris, at specific intervals. Other effects in the eye and adverse systemic effects are also described to provide a complete evaluation of the effects. The duration of the study should be sufficient to evaluate the reversibility or irreversibility of the effects. | |
| Animals showing continuing signs of severe distress and/or pain at any stage of the test should be humanely killed, and the substance assessed accordingly. Criteria for making the decision to humanely kill moribund and severely suffering animals can be found in reference (10). | |
| 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.4.1 Preparation for the in vivo test | |
| 1.4.1.1 | Selection of species | The albino rabbit is the preferable laboratory animal, and healthy young adult animals are used. A rationale for using other strains or species should be provided. | |
| 1.4.1.2 | Preparation of animals | Both eyes of each experimental animal provisionally selected for testing should be examined within 24 hours before testing starts. Animals showing eye irritation, ocular defects, or pre-existing corneal injury should not be used. | |
| 1.4.1.3 | Housing and feeding conditions | Animals should be individually housed. The temperature of the experimental animal room should be 20oC (± 3oC) for rabbits. Although the relative humidity should be at least 30% and preferably not exceed 70%, other than during room cleaning, the aim should be 50-60%. Lighting should be artificial, the sequence being 12 hours light, 12 hours dark. For feeding, conventional laboratory diets may be used with an unrestricted supply of drinking water. | |
| 1.4.2 Test procedure | |
| 1.4.2.1 | Application of the test substance | The test substance should be placed in the conjunctival sac of one eye of each animal after gently pulling the lower lid away from the eyeball. The lids are then gently held together for about one second in order to prevent loss of the material. The other eye, which remains untreated, serves as a control. | |
| 1.4.2.2 | Irrigation | The eyes of the test animals should not be washed for at least 24 hours following instillation of the test substance, except for solids (see section 1.4.2.3.2), and in case of immediate corrosive or irritating effects. At 24 hours a washout may be used if considered appropriate. | Use of a satellite group of animals to investigate the influence of washing is not recommended unless it is scientifically justified. If a satellite group is needed, two rabbits should be used. Conditions of washing should be carefully documented, e.g., time of washing; composition and temperature of wash solution; duration, volume, and velocity of application. | |
| 1.4.2.3 | Dose level | 1.4.2.3.1 | Testing of liquids | For testing liquids, a dose of 0.1 ml is used. Pump sprays should not be used for instilling the substance directly into the eye. The liquid spray should be expelled and collected in a container prior to instilling 0.1 ml into the eye. | 1.4.2.3.2 | Testing of solids | When testing solids, pastes, and particulate substances, the amount used should have a volume of 0.1 ml or a weight of not more than 100 mg. The test material should be ground to a fine dust. The volume of solid material should be measured after gently compacting it, e.g., by tapping the measuring container. If the solid test substance has not been removed from the eye of the test animal by physiological mechanisms at the first observation time point of 1 hour after treatment, the eye may be rinsed with saline or distilled water. | 1.4.2.3.3 | Testing of aerosols | It is recommended that all pump sprays and aerosols be collected prior to instillation into the eye. The one exception is for substances in pressurised aerosol containers, which cannot be collected due to vaporisation. In such cases, the eye should be held open, and the test substance administered to the eye in a simple burst of about one second, from a distance of 10 cm directly in front of the eye. This distance may vary depending on the pressure of the spray and its contents. Care should be taken not to damage the eye from the pressure of the spray. In appropriate cases, there may be a need to evaluate the potential for “mechanical” damage to the eye from the force of the spray. | An estimate of the dose from an aerosol can be made by simulating the test as follows: the substance is sprayed on to weighing paper through an opening the size of a rabbit eye placed directly before the paper. The weight increase of the paper is used to approximate the amount sprayed into the eye. For volatile substances, the dose may be estimated by weighing a receiving container before and after removal of the test material. | |
| 1.4.2.4 | Initial test (In vivo eye irritation/corrosion test using one animal) | As articulated in the sequential testing strategy (see Annex 1), it is strongly recommended that the in vivo test be performed initially using one animal. | If the results of this test indicate the substance to be corrosive or a severe irritant to the eye using the procedure described, further testing for ocular irritancy should not be performed. | |
| 1.4.2.5 | Local anaesthetics | Local anaesthetics may be used on a case-by-case basis. If the weight-of-the-evidence analysis indicates that the substance has the potential to cause pain, or initial testing shows that a painful reaction will occur, a local anaesthetic may be used prior to instillation of the test substance. The type, concentration, and dose of the local anaesthetic should be carefully selected to ensure that differences in reaction to the test substance will not result from its use. The control eye should be similarly anaesthetised. | |
| 1.4.2.6 | Confirmatory test (In vivo eye irritation test with additional animals) | If a corrosive effect is not observed in the initial test, the irritant or negative response should be confirmed using up to two additional animals. If a severe irritant effect is observed in the initial test indicating a possible strong (irreversible) effect in the confirmatory testing, it is recommended that the confirmatory test be conducted in a sequential manner in one animal at a time, rather than exposing the two additional animals simultaneously. If the second animal reveals corrosive or severe irritant effects, the test is not continued. Additional animals may be needed to confirm weak or moderate irritant responses. | |
| 1.4.2.7 | Observation period | The duration of the observation period should be sufficient to evaluate fully the magnitude and reversibility of the effects observed. However, the experiment should be terminated at any time that the animal shows continuing signs of severe pain or distress (9). To determine reversibility of effects, the animals should be observed normally for 21 days post administration of the test substance. If reversibility is seen before 21 days, the experiment should be terminated at that time. | 1.4.2.7.1 | Clinical observations and grading of eye reactions | The eyes should be examined at 1, 24, 48, and 72 hours after test substance application. Animals should be kept on test no longer than necessary once definitive information has been obtained. Animals showing continuing severe pain or distress should be humanely killed without delay, and the substance assessed accordingly. Animals with the following eye lesions post-instillation should be humanely killed: corneal perforation or significant corneal ulceration including staphyloma; blood in the anterior chamber of the eye; grade 4 corneal opacity which persists for 48 hours; absence of a light reflex (iridial response grade 2) which persists for 72 hours; ulceration of the conjunctival membrane; necrosis of the conjuctivae or nictitating membrane; or sloughing. This is because such lesions generally are not reversible | Animals that do not develop ocular lesions may be terminated not earlier than 3 days post instillation. Animals with mild to moderate lesions should be observed until the lesions clear, or for 21 days, at which time the study is terminated. Observations should be performed at 7, 14, and 21 days in order to determine the status of the lesions, and their reversibility or irreversibility. | The grades of ocular reaction (conjunctivae, cornea and iris) should be recorded at each examination (Table I). Any other lesions in the eye (e.g. pannus, staining) or adverse systemic effects should also be reported. | Examination of reactions can be facilitated by use of a binocular loupe, hand slit-lamp, biomicroscope, or other suitable device. After recording the observations at 24 hours, the eyes may be further examined with the aid of fluorescein. | The grading of ocular responses is necessarily subjective. To promote harmonisation of grading of ocular response and to assist testing laboratories and those involved in making and interpreting the observations, the personnel performing the observations need to be adequately trained in the scoring system used. | |
| 2. DATA | |
| 2.2 EVALUATION OF RESULTS | |
| The ocular irritation scores should be evaluated in conjunction with the nature and severity of lesions, and their reversibility or lack of reversibility. The individual scores do not represent an absolute standard for the irritant properties of a material, as other effects of the test material are also evaluated. Instead, individual scores should be viewed as reference values and are only meaningful when supported by a full description and evaluation of all observations. | |
| 3. REPORTING | |
| 3.1 TEST REPORT | |
| The test report must include the following information: | |
| Rationale for in vivo testing: weight-of-the-evidence analysis of pre-existing test data, including results from sequential testing strategy | |
| — | description of relevant data available from prior testing; | |
| — | data derived in each step of testing strategy; | |
| — | description of in vitro tests performed, including details of procedures, results obtained with test/reference substances; | |
| — | description of in vivo dermal irritation/corrosion study performed, including results obtained; | |
| — | weight-of-the-evidence analysis for performing in vivo study | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | identification data (e.g., CAS number, source, purity, known impurities, lot number); | |
| — | physical nature and physicochemical properties (e.g. pH, volatility, solubility, stability, reactivity with water); | |
| — | in case of a mixture, composition and relative percentages of components; | |
| — | if local anaesthetic is used, identification, purity, type, dose, and potential interaction with test substance. | |
| Vehicle: | |
| — | identification, concentration (where appropriate), volume used; | |
| — | justification for choice of vehicle. | |
| Test animals: | |
| — | species/strain used, rationale for using animals other than albino rabbit; | |
| — | age of each animal at start of study; | |
| — | number of animals of each sex in test and control groups (if required); | |
| — | individual animal weights at start and conclusion of test; | |
| — | source, housing conditions, diet, etc. | |
| Results: | |
| — | description of method used to score irritation at each observation time (e.g., hand slitlamp, biomicroscope, fluorescein); | |
| — | tabulation of irritant/corrosive response data for each animal at each observation time up to removal of each animal from the test; | |
| — | narrative description of the degree and nature of irritation or corrosion observed; | |
| — | description of any other lesions observed in the eye (e.g., vascularization, pannus formation, adhesions, staining); | |
| — | description of non-ocular local and systemic adverse effects, and histopathological findings, if any. | |
| Discussion of results. | |
| 3.2 INTERPRETATION OF THE RESULTS | |
| Extrapolation of the results of eye irritation studies in laboratory animals to humans is valid only to a limited degree. In many cases the albino rabbit is more sensitive than humans to ocular irritants or corrosives. | |
| Care should be taken in the interpretation of data to exclude irritation resulting from secondary infection. | |
| 4. REFERENCES | |
| (1) | Barratt, M.D., Castell, J.V., Chamberlain, M., Combes, R.D., Dearden, J.C., Fentem, J.H., Gerner, I., Giuliani, A., Gray, T.J.B., Livingston, D.J., Provan, W.M., Rutten, F.A.J.J.L., Verhaar, H.J.M., Zbinden, P. (1995) The Integrated Use of Alternative Approaches for Predicting Toxic Hazard. ECVAM Workshop Report 8. ATLA 23, 410 - 429. | |
| (2) | de Silva, O., Cottin, M., Dami, N., Roguet, R., Catroux, P., Toufic, A., Sicard, C., Dossou, K.G., Gerner, I., Schlede, E., Spielmann, H., Gupta, K.C., Hill, R.N. (1997) Evaluation of Eye Irritation Potential: Statistical Analysis and Tier Testing Strategies. Food Chem. Toxicol 35, 159 -164. | |
| (3) | Worth A.P. and Fentem J.H. (1999) A general approach for evaluating stepwise testing strategies ATLA 27, 161-177 | |
| (4) | Young, J.R., How, M.J., Walker, A.P., Worth W.M.H. (1988) Classification as Corrosive or Irritant to Skin of Preparations Containing Acidic or Alkaline Substance Without Testing on Animals. Toxicol. In Vitro, 2, 19 - 26. | |
| (5) | Neun, D.J. (1993) Effects of Alkalinity on the Eye Irritation Potential of Solutions Prepared at a Single pH. J. Toxicol. Cut. Ocular Toxicol. 12, 227-231. | |
| (6) | Fentem, J.H., Archer, G.E.B., Balls, M., Botham, P.A., Curren, R.D., Earl, L.K., Edsaile, D.J., Holzhutter, H.G. and Liebsch, M. (1998) The ECVAM international validation study on in vitro tests for skin corrosivity. 2. Results and evaluation by the Management Team. Toxicology in Vitro 12, pp.483-524. | |
| (6a) | Testing Method B.40 Skin Corrosion. | |
| (7) | Testing method B.4. Acute toxicity: dermal irritation/corrosion. | |
| (8) | OECD (1996) OECD Test Guidelines Programme: Final Report of the OECD. Workshop on Harmonization of Validation and Acceptance Criteria for Alternative Toxicological Test Methods. Held in Solna, Sweden, 22 - 24 January 1996 (http://www.oecd.org/ehsAest/background.htm). | |
| (9) | OECD (1998) Harmonized Integrated Hazard Classification System for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances, as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals, November 1998 (http://www.oecd.org/ehs/Class/HCL6.htm). | |
| (10) | OECD (2000) Guidance Document on the Recognition, Assessment and Use of Clinical Signs as Humane Endpoints for Experimental Animals Used in Safety Evaluation. OECD Environmental Health and Safety Publications. Series on Testing and Assessment No. 19 (http://www.oecd.org/ehs/test/monos. htm). | |
| TABLE I: GRADING OF OCULAR LESIONS | |
| ANNEX | |
| A Sequential Testing Strategy for Eye Irritation and Corrosion | |
| GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS | |
| In the interests of sound science and animal welfare, it is important to avoid the unnecessary use of animals, and to minimise testing that is likely to produce severe responses in animals. All information on a substance relevant to its potential ocular irritation/corrosivity should be evaluated prior to considering in vivo testing. Sufficient evidence may already exist to classify a test substance as to its eye irritation or corrosion potential without the need to conduct testing in laboratory animals. Therefore, utilizing a weight-of-the-evidence analysis and sequential testing strategy will minimise the need for in vivo testing, especially if the substance is likely to produce severe reactions. | |
| It is recommended that a weight-of-the-evidence analysis be used to evaluate existing information pertaining to eye irritation and corrosion of substances and to determine whether additional studies, other than in vivo eye studies, should be performed to help characterise such potential. Where further studies are needed, it is recommended that the sequential testing strategy be utilised to develop the relevant experimental data. For substances which have no testing history, the sequential testing strategy should be utilised to develop the data needed to evaluate its eye corrosion/irritation. The testing strategy described in this Annex was developed at an OECD workshop (1). It was subsequently affirmed and expanded in the Harmonised Integrated Hazard Classification System for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances, as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals, in November 1998 (2). | |
| Although this testing strategy is not an integrated part of testing method B.5, it expresses the recommended approach for the determination of eye irritation/corrosion properties. This approach represents both best practice and an ethical benchmark for in vivo testing for eye irritation/corrosion. The Testing method provides guidance for the conduct of the in vivo test and summarises the factors that should be addressed before considering such a test. The sequential testing strategy provides a weight-of-the-evidence approach for the evaluation of existing data on the eye irritation/corrosion properties of substances and a tiered approach for the generation of relevant data on substances for which additional studies are needed or for which no studies have been performed. The strategy includes the performance first of validated and accepted in vitro or ex vivo tests and then of testing method B.4 skin irritation/corrosion studies under specific circumstances (3)(4). | |
| DESCRIPTION OF THE STEPWISE TESTING STRATEGY | |
| Prior to undertaking tests as part of the sequential testing strategy (Figure), all available information should be evaluated to determine the need for in vivo eye testing. Although significant information might be gained from the evaluation of single parameters (e.g., extreme pH), the totality of existing information should be assessed. All relevant data on the effects of the substance in question, and its structural analogues, should be evaluated in making a weight-of-the-evidence decision, and a rationale for the decision should be presented. Primary emphasis should be placed upon existing human and animal data on the substance, followed by the outcome of in vitro or ex vivo testing. In vivo studies of corrosive substances should be avoided whenever possible. The factors considered in the testing strategy include: | |
| Evaluation of existing human and animal data (Step 1). Existing human data, e.g. clinical and occupational studies, and case reports, and/or animal test data from ocular studies should be considered first, because they provide information directly related to effects on the eyes. Thereafter, available data from human and/or animal studies investigating dermal corrosion/irritation should be evaluated. Substances with known corrosivity or severe irritancy to the eye should not be instilled into the eyes of animals, nor should substances showing corrosive or irritant effects to the skin; such substances should be considered to be corrosive and/or irritating to the eyes as well. Substances with sufficient evidence of non-corrosivity and non-irritancy from previously performed ocular studies should also not be tested in in vivo eye studies. | |
| Analysis of structure activity relationships (SAR) (Step 2). The results of testing of structurally related chemicals should be considered, if available. When sufficient human and/or animal data are available on structurally related substances or mixtures of such substances to indicate their eye corrrosion/irritancy potential, it can be presumed that the test substance will produce the same responses. In those cases, the substance may not need to be tested. Negative data from studies of structurally related substances or mixtures of such substances do not constitute sufficient evidence of non-corrosivity/non-irritancy of a substance under the sequential testing strategy. Validated and accepted SAR approaches should be used to identify the corrosion and irritation potential for both dermal and ocular effects. | |
| Physicochemical properties and chemical reactivity (Step 3). Substances exhibiting pH extremes such as ≤2.0 or ≥11.5 may have strong local effects. If extreme pH is the basis for identifying a substance as corrosive or irritant to the eye, then its acid/alkaline reserve (buffering capacity) may also be taken into consideration (5)(6). If the buffering capacity suggests that a substance may not be corrosive to the eye, then further testing should be undertaken to confirm this, preferably by the use of a validated and accepted in vitro or ex vivo test (see section step 5 and 6). | |
| Consideration of other existing information (Step 4). All available information on systemic toxicity via the dermal route should be evaluated at this stage. The acute dermal toxicity of the test substance should also be considered. If the test substance has been shown to be very toxic by the dermal route, it may not need to be tested in the eye. Although there is not necessarily a relationship between acute dermal toxicity and eye irritation/corrosion, it can be assumed that if an agent is very toxic via the dermal route, it will also exhibit high toxicity when instilled into the eye. Such data may also be considered between Steps 2 and 3. | |
| Results from in vitro or ex vivo tests (Steps 5 and 6). Substances that have demonstrated corrosive or severe irritant properties in an in vitro or ex vivo test (7)(8) that has been validated and accepted for the assessment specifically of eye or skin corrosivity/irritation, need not be tested in animals. It can be presumed that such substances will produce similar severe effects in vivo. If validated and accepted in vitro/ex vivo tests are not available, one should bypass Steps 5 and 6 and proceed directly to Step 7. | |
| Assessment of in vivo dermal irritancy or corrosivity of the substance (Step 7). When insufficient evidence exists with which to perform a conclusive weight-of-the-evidence analysis of the potential eye irritation/corrosivity of a substance based upon data from the studies listed above, the in vivo skin irritation/corrosion potential should be evaluated first, using testing method B.4 (4) and its accompanying Annex (9). If the substance is shown to produce corrosion or severe skin irritation, it should be considered to be a corrosive eye irritant unless other information supports an alternative conclusion. Thus, an in vivo eye test would not need to be performed. If the substance is not corrosive or severely irritating to the skin, an in vivo eye test should be performed. | |
| In vivo test in rabbits (Steps 8 and 9): In vivo ocular testing should begin with an initial test using one animal. If the results of this test indicate the substance to be a severe irritant or corrosive to the eyes, further testing should not be performed. If that test does not reveal any corrosive or severe irritant effects, a confirmatory test is conducted with two additional animals. | |
| REFERENCES | |
| (1) | OECD (1996) OECD Test Guidelines Programme: Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Harmonization of Validation and Acceptance Criteria for Alternative Toxicological Test Methods. Held in Solna, Sweden, 22 - 24 January 1996 (http://www.oecd.org/ehs/test/background.htm). | |
| (2) | OECD (1998) Harmonized Integrated Hazard Classification System for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances, as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals, November 1998 (http://www.oecd.org/ehs/Class/HCL6.htm). | |
| (3) | Worth, A.P. and Fentem J.H. (1999). A General Approach for Evaluating Stepwise Testing Strategies. ATLA 27, 161-177. | |
| (4) | Testing method B.4. Acute Toxicity: dermal irritation/corrosion. | |
| (5) | Young, J.R., How, M.J., Walker, A.P., Worth W.M.H. (1988) Classification as Corrosive or Irritant to Skin of Preparations Containing Acidic or Alkaline Substance Without Testing on Animals. Toxicol. In Vitro, 2, 19 - 26. | |
| (6) | Neun, D.J. (1993) Effects of Alkalinity on the Eye Irritation Potential of Solutions Prepared at a Single pH. J. Toxicol. Cut. Ocular Toxicol. 12, 227 - 231. | |
| (7) | Fentem, J.H., Archer, G.E.B., Balls, M., Botham, P.A., Curren, R.D., Earl, L.K., Edsail, D.J., Holzhutter, H.G. and Liebsch, M. (1998) The ECVAM international validation study on in vitro tests for skin corrosivity. 2. Results and evaluation by the Management Team. Toxicology in Vitro 12, pp.483 - 524. | |
| (8) | Testing Method B.40 Skin Corrosion. | |
| (9) | Annex to Testing method B.4: A Sequential Testing Strategy for Skin Irritation and Corrosion. | |
| FIGURE | |
| TESTING AND EVALUATION STRATEGY FOR EYE IRRITATION/CORROSION | |
| ANNEX2F | |
| B.31. PRENATAL DEVELOPMENTAL TOXICITY STUDY | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This method is a replicate of OECD TG 414 (2001). | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| This method for developmental toxicity testing is designed to provide general information concerning the effects of prenatal exposure on the pregnant test animal and on the developing organism in utero; this may include assessment of maternal effects as well as death, structural abnormalities, or altered growth in the foetus. Functional deficits, although an important part of development, are not an integral part of this test method. They may be tested for in a separate study or as an adjunct to this study using the test method for developmental neurotoxicity. For information on testing for functional deficiencies and other postnatal effects the Test Method for the two-generation reproductive toxicity study and the developmental neurotoxicity study should be consulted as appropriate. | |
| This test method may require specific adaptation in individual cases on the basis of specific knowledge on e.g. physicochemical or toxicological properties of the test substance. Such adaptation is acceptable, when convincing scientific evidence suggests that the adaptation will lead to a more informative test. In such a case, this scientific evidence should be carefully documented in the study report. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Developmental toxicology: the study of adverse effects on the developing organism that may result from exposure prior to conception, during prenatal development, or postnatally to the time of sexual maturation. The major manifestations of developmental toxicity include 1) death of the organism, 2) structural abnormality, 3) altered growth, and 4) functional deficiency. Developmental toxicology was formerly often referred to as teratology. | |
| Adverse effect: any treatment-related alteration from baseline that diminishes an organism's ability to survive, reproduce or adapt to the environment. Concerning developmental toxicology, taken in its widest sense it includes any effect which interferes with normal development of the conceptus, both before and after birth. | |
| Altered growth: an alteration in offspring organ or body weight or size. | |
| Alterations (anomalies): structural alterations in development that include both malformations and variations (28). | |
| Malformation/Major Abnormality: Structural change considered detrimental to the animal (may also be lethal) and is usually rare. | |
| Variation/Minor Abnormality: Structural change considered to have little or no detrimental effect on the animal; may be transient and may occur relatively frequently in the control population. | |
| Conceptus: the sum of derivatives of a fertilised ovum at any stage of development from fertilisation until birth including the extra-embryonic membranes as well as the embryo or foetus. | |
| Implantation (nidation): attachment of the blastocyst to the epithelial lining of the uterus, including its penetration through the uterine epithelium, and its embedding in the endometrium. | |
| Embryo: the early or developing stage of any organism, especially the developing product of fertilisation of an egg after the long axis appears and until all major structures are present. | |
| Embryotoxicity: detrimental to the normal structure, development, growth, and/or viability of an embryo. | |
| Foetus: the unborn offspring in the post-embryonic period. | |
| Foetotoxicity: detrimental to the normal structure, development, growth, and/or viability of a foetus. | |
| Abortion: the premature expulsion from the uterus of the products of conception: of the embryo or of a nonviable foetus. | |
| Resorption: a conceptus which, having implanted in the uterus, subsequently died and is being, or has been resorbed. | |
| Early resorption: evidence of implantation without recognisable embryo/foetus | |
| Late resorption: dead embryo or foetus with external degenerative changes | |
| NOAEL: abbreviation for no-observed-adverse-effect level and is the highest dose or exposure level where no adverse treatment-related findings are observed. | |
| 1.3 REFERENCE SUBSTANCE | |
| None. | |
| 1.4 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| Normally, the test substance is administered to pregnant animals at least from implantation to one day prior to the day of scheduled kill, which should be as close as possible to the normal day of delivery without risking loss of data resulting from early delivery. The test method is not intended to examine solely the period of organogenesis, (e.g. days 5-15 in the rodent, and days 6-18 in the rabbit) but also effects from preimplantation, when appropriate, through the entire period of gestation to the day before caesarean section. Shortly before caesarean section, the females are killed, the uterine contents are examined, and the foetuses are evaluated for externally visible anomalies and for soft tissue and skeletal changes. | |
| 1.5 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.5.1 Selection of animal species | |
| It is recommended that testing be performed in the most relevant species, and that laboratory species and strains which are commonly used in prenatal developmental toxicity testing be employed. The preferred rodent species is the rat and the preferred non-rodent species is the rabbit. Justification should be provided if another species is used. | |
| 1.5.2 Housing and feeding conditions | |
| The temperature in the experimental animal room should be 22 oC (± 3o) for rodents and 18 o C (± 3o) for rabbits. Although the relative humidity should be at least 30 % and preferably not exceed 70 % other than during room cleaning, the aim should be 50-60 %. Lighting should be artificial, the sequence being 12 hours light, 12 hours dark. For feeding, conventional laboratory diets may be used with an unlimited supply of drinking water. Mating procedures should be carried out in cages suitable for the purpose. While individual housing of mated animals is preferred, group housing in small numbers is also acceptable. | |
| 1.5.3 Preparation of the animals | |
| Healthy animals, which have been acclimated to laboratory conditions for at least 5 days and have not been subjected to previous experimental procedures, should be used. The test animals should be characterised as to species, strain, source, sex, weight and/or age. The animals of all test groups should, as nearly as practicable, be of uniform weight and age. Young adult nulliparous female animals should be used at each dose level. The females should be mated with males of the same species and strain, and the mating of siblings should be avoided. For rodents day 0 of gestation is the day on which a vaginal plug and/or sperm are observed; for rabbits day 0 is usually the day of coitus or of artificial insemination, if this technique is used. Mated females should be assigned in an unbiased manner to the control and treatment groups. Cages should be arranged in such a way that possible effects due to cage placement are minimised. Each animal should be assigned a unique identification number. Mated females should be assigned in an unbiased manner to the control and treatment groups, and if the females are mated in batches, the animals in each batch should be evenly distributed across the groups. Similarly, females inseminated by the same male should be evenly distributed across the groups. | |
| 1.6 PROCEDURE | |
| 1.6.1 Number and sex of animals | |
| Each test and control group should contain a sufficient number of females to result in approximately 20 female animals with implantation sites at necropsy. Groups with fewer than 16 animals with implantation sites may be inappropriate. Maternal mortality does not necessarily invalidate the study providing it does not exceed approximately 10 %. | |
| 1.6.2 Preparation of doses | |
| If a vehicle or other additive is used to facilitate dosing, consideration should be given to the following characteristics: effects on the absorption, distribution, metabolism, and retention or excretion of the test substance; effects on the chemical properties of the test substance which may alter its toxic characteristics; and effects on the food or water consumption or the nutritional status of the animals. The vehicle should neither be developmentally toxic nor have effects on reproduction. | |
| 1.6.3 Dosage | |
| Normally, the test substance should be administered daily from implantation (e.g., day 5 post mating) to the day prior to scheduled caesarean section. If preliminary studies, when available, do not indicate a high potential for preimplantation loss, treatment may be extended to include the entire period of gestation, from mating to the day prior to scheduled kill. It is well known that inappropriate handling or stress during pregnancy can result in prenatal loss. To guard against prenatal loss from factors which are not treatment-related, unnecessary handling of pregnant animals as well as stress from outside factors such as noise should be avoided. | |
| At least three dose levels and a concurrent control should be used. Healthy animals should be assigned in an unbiased manner to the control and treatment groups. The dose levels should be spaced to produce a gradation of toxic effects. Unless limited by the physical/chemical nature or biological properties of the test substance, the highest dose should be chosen with the aim to induce some developmental and/or maternal toxicity (clinical signs or a decrease in body weight) but not death or severe suffering. At least one intermediate dose level should produce minimal observable toxic effects. The lowest dose level should not produce any evidence of either maternal or developmental toxicity. A descending sequence of dose levels should be selected with a view to demonstrating any dosage-related response and no-observed-adverse-effect level (NOAEL). Two- to fourfold intervals are frequently optimal for setting the descending dose levels, and the addition of a fourth test group is often preferable to using very large intervals (e.g. more than a factor of 10) between dosages. Although establishment of a maternal NOAEL is the goal, studies which do not establish such a level may also be acceptable (1). | |
| Dose levels should be selected taking into account any existing toxicity data as well as additional information on metabolism and toxicokinetics of the test substance or related materials. This information will also assist in demonstrating the adequacy of the dosing regimen. | |
| A concurrent control group should be used. This group should be a sham-treated control group or a vehicle-control group if a vehicle is used in administering the test substance. All groups should be administered the same volume of either test substance or vehicle. Animals in the control group(s) should be handled in an identical manner to test group animals. Vehicle control groups should receive the vehicle in the highest amount used (as in the lowest treatment group). | |
| 1.6.4 Limit test | |
| If a test at one dose level of at least 1000 mg/kg body weight/day by oral administration, using the procedures described for this study, produces no observable toxicity in either pregnant animals or their progeny and if an effect would not be expected based upon existing data (e.g., from structurally and/or metabolically related compounds), then a full study using three dose levels may not be considered necessary. Expected human exposure may indicate the need for a higher oral dose level to be used in the limit test. For other types of administration, such as inhalation or dermal application, the physico-chemical properties of the test substance often may indicate and limit the maximum attainable level of exposure (for example, dermal application should not cause severe local toxicity). | |
| 1.6.5 Administration of doses | |
| The test substance or vehicle is usually administered orally by intubation. If another route of administration is used, the tester should provide justification and reasoning for its selection, and appropriate modifications may be necessary (2)(3)(4). The test substance should be administered at approximately the same time each day. | |
| The dose to individual animals should normally be based on the most recent individual body weight determination. However, caution should be exercised when adjusting the dose during the last trimester of pregnancy. Existing data should be used for dose selection to prevent excess maternal toxicity. However, if excess toxicity is noted in the treated dams, those animals should be humanely killed. If several pregnant animals show signs of excess toxicity, consideration should be given to terminating that dose group. When the substance is administered by gavage, this should preferably be given as a single dose to the animals using a stomach tube or a suitable intubation canula. The maximum volume of liquid that can be administered at one time depends on the size of the test animal. The volume should not exceed 1 ml/100 g body weight, except in the case of aqueous solutions where 2 ml/100 g body weight may be used. When corn oil is used as a vehicle, the volume should not exceed 0.4 ml/100 g body weight. Variability in test volume should be minimised by adjusting the concentrations to ensure a constant volume across all dose levels. | |
| 1.6.6 Observations of the dams | |
| Clinical observations should be made and recorded at least once a day, preferably at the same time(s) each day taking into consideration the peak period of anticipated effects after dosing. The condition of the animals should be recorded including mortality, moribundity, pertinent behavioural changes, and all signs of overt toxicity. | |
| 1.6.7 Body weight and food consumption | |
| Animals should be weighed on day 0 of gestation or no later than day 3 of gestation if time-mated animals are supplied by an outside breeder, on the first day of dosing, at least every 3 days during the dosing period and on the day of scheduled kill. | |
| Food consumption should be recorded at three-day intervals and should coincide with days of body weight determination. | |
| 1.6.8 Post-mortem examination | |
| Females should be killed one day prior to the expected day of delivery. Females showing signs of abortion or premature delivery prior to scheduled kill should be killed and subjected to a thorough macroscopic examination. | |
| At the time of termination or death during the study, the dam should be examined macroscopically for any structural abnormalities or pathological changes. Evaluation of the dams during caesarean section and subsequent foetal analyses should be conducted preferably without knowledge of treatment group in order to minimise bias. | |
| 1.6.9 Examination of uterine contents | |
| Immediately after termination or as soon as possible after death, the uteri should be removed and the pregnancy status of the animals ascertained. Uteri that appear non gravid should be further examined (e.g. by ammonium sulphide staining for rodents and Salewski staining or a suitable alternative method for rabbits) to confirm the non-pregnant status (5). | |
| Gravid uteri including the cervix should be weighed. Gravid uterine weights should not be obtained from animals found dead during the study. | |
| The number of corpora lutea should be determined for pregnant animals. | |
| The uterine contents should be examined for numbers of embryonic or foetal deaths and viable foetuses. The degree of resorption should be described in order to estimate the relative time of death of the conceptus (see section 1.2). | |
| 1.6.10 Examination of foetuses | |
| The sex and body weight of each foetus should be determined. | |
| Each foetus should be examined for external alterations (6). | |
| Foetuses should be examined for skeletal and soft tissue alterations (e.g. variations and malformations or anomalies) (7)(8)(9)(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)(15)(16)(17)(18)(19)(20)(21)(22)(23)(24). Categorisation of foetal alterations is preferable but not required. When categorisation is done, the criteria for defining each category should be clearly stated. Particular attention should be paid to the reproductive tract which should be examined for signs of altered development. | |
| For rodents, approximately one-half of each litter should be prepared and examined for skeletal alterations. The remainder should be prepared and examined for soft tissue alterations, using accepted or appropriate serial sectioning methods or careful gross dissection techniques. | |
| For non-rodents, e.g. rabbits, all foetuses should be examined for both soft tissue and skeletal alterations. The bodies of these foetuses are evaluated by careful dissection for soft tissue alterations, which may include procedures to further evaluate internal cardiac structure (25). The heads of one-half of the foetuses examined in this manner should be removed and processed for evaluation of soft tissue alterations (including eyes, brain, nasal passages and tongue), using standard serial sectioning methods (26) or an equally sensitive method. The bodies of these foetuses and the remaining intact foetuses should be processed and examined for skeletal alterations, utilising the same methods as described for rodents. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| 2.1 TREATMENT OF RESULTS | |
| Data shall be reported individually for the dams as well as for their offspring and summarised in tabular form, showing for each test group and each generation the number of animals at the start of the test, the number of animals found dead during the test or killed for humane reasons, the time of any death or humane kill, the number of pregnant females, the number of animals showing signs of toxicity, a description of the signs of toxicity observed, including time of onset, duration, and severity of any toxic effects, the types of embryo/foetal observations, and all relevant litter data. | |
| Numerical results should be evaluated by an appropriate statistical method using the litter as the unit for data analysis. A generally accepted statistical method should be used; the statistical methods should be selected as part of the design of the study and should be justified. Data from animals that do not survive to the scheduled kill should also be reported. These data may be included in group means where relevant. Relevance of the data obtained from such animals, and therefore inclusion or exclusion from any group mean(s), should be justified and judged on an individual basis. | |
| 2.2 EVALUATION OF RESULTS | |
| The findings of the Prenatal Developmental Toxicity Study should be evaluated in terms of the observed effects. The evaluation will include the following information: | |
| — | maternal and embryo/foetal test results, including the evaluation of the relationship, or lack thereof, between the exposure of the animals to the test substance and the incidence and severity of all findings; | |
| — | criteria used for categorising foetal external, soft tissue, and skeletal alterations if categorisation has been done; | |
| — | when appropriate, historical control data to enhance interpretation of study results; | |
| — | the numbers used in calculating all percentages or indices; | |
| — | adequate statistical analysis of the study findings, when appropriate, which should include sufficient information on the method of analysis, so that an independent reviewer/statistician can re-evaluate and reconstruct the analysis; | |
| In any study which demonstrates the absence of any toxic effects, further investigations to establish absorption and bioavailability of the test substance should be considered. | |
| 2.3 INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS | |
| A prenatal developmental toxicity study will provide information on the effects of repeated exposure to a substance during pregnancy on the dams and on the intrauterine development of their progeny. The results of the study should be interpreted in conjunction with the findings from subchronic, reproduction, toxicokinetic and other studies. Since emphasis is placed on both general toxicity in terms of maternal toxicity and on developmental toxicity endpoints, the results of the study will allow to a certain extent for the discrimination between developmental effects occurring in the absence of general toxicity and those which are only induced at levels that are also toxic to the maternal animal (27). | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| TEST REPORT | |
| The test report must include the following specific information: | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | physical nature and, where relevant, physiochemical properties; | |
| — | identification including CAS number if known/established; | |
| — | purity. | |
| Vehicle (if appropriate): | |
| — | justification for choice of vehicle, if other than water. | |
| Test animals: | |
| — | species and strain used; | |
| — | number and age of animals; | |
| — | source, housing conditions, diet, etc.; | |
| — | individual weights of animals at the start of the test. | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | rationale for dose level selection; | |
| — | details of test substance formulation/diet preparation, achieved concentration, stability and homogeneity of the preparation; | |
| — | details of the administration of the test substance; | |
| — | conversion from diet/drinking water test substance concentration (ppm) to the actual dose (mg/kg body weight/day), if applicable; | |
| — | environmental conditions; | |
| — | details of food and water quality. | |
| Results: | |
| Maternal toxic response data by dose, including but not limited to: | |
| — | the number of animals at the start of the test, the number of animals surviving, the number pregnant, and the number aborting, number of animals delivering early; | |
| — | day of death during the study or whether animals survived to termination; | |
| — | data from animals that do not survive to the scheduled kill should be reported but not included in the inter-group statistical comparisons; | |
| — | day of observation of each abnormal clinical sign and its subsequent course; | |
| — | body weight, body weight change and gravid uterine weight, including, optionally, body weight change corrected for gravid uterine weight; | |
| — | food consumption and, if measured, water consumption; | |
| — | necropsy findings, including uterine weight; | |
| — | NOAEL values for maternal and developmental effects should be reported. | |
| Developmental endpoints by dose for litters with implants, including: | |
| — | number of corpora lutea; | |
| — | number of implantations, number and percent of live and dead foetuses and resorptions; | |
| — | number and percent of pre- and post-implantation losses. | |
| Developmental endpoints by dose for litters with live foetuses, including: | |
| — | number and percent of live offspring; | |
| — | sex ratio; | |
| — | foetal body weight, preferably by sex and with sexes combined; | |
| — | external, soft tissue, and skeletal malformations and other relevant alterations; | |
| — | criteria for categorisation if appropriate; | |
| — | total number and percent of foetuses and litters with any external, soft tissue, or skeletal alteration, as well as the types and incidences of individual anomalies and other relevant alterations. | |
| Discussion of results. | |
| Conclusions. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | Kavlock R.J. et al. (1996) A Simulation Study of the Influence of Study Design on the Estimation of Benchmark Doses for Developmental Toxicity. Risk Analysis 16; 399-410. | |
| (2) | Kimmel, C.A. and Francis, E.Z. (1990) Proceedings of the Workshop on the Acceptability and Interpretation of Dermal Developmental Toxicity Studies. Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 14; 386-398. | |
| (3) | Wong, B.A., et al. (1997) Developing Specialized Inhalation Exposure Systems to Address Toxicological Problems. CIIT Activities 17; 1-8. | |
| (4) | US Environmental Protection Agency (1985) Subpart E-Specific Organ/Tissue Toxicity, 40 CFR 798.4350: Inhalation Developmental Toxicity Study. | |
| (5) | Salewski, E. (1964) Faerbermethode zum Makroskopischen Nachweis von Implantations Stellen am Uterusder Ratte. Naunyn-Schmeidebergs Archiv fur Pharmakologie und Experimented Pathologie 247:367. | |
| (6) | Edwards, J.A. (1968) The external Development of the Rabbit and Rat. Embryo. In Advances in Teratology. D.H.M. Woolam (ed.) Vol. 3. Academic Press, NY. | |
| (7) | Inouye, M. (1976) Differential Staining of Cartilage and Bone in Fetal Mouse Skeleton by Alcian Blue and Alizarin Red S. Congenital Anomalies 16; 171-173. | |
| (8) | Igarashi, E. et al. (1992) Frequency Of Spontaneous Axial Skeletal Variations Detected by the Double Staining Techniquefor Ossified and Cartilaginous Skeleton in Rat Foetuses. Congenital Anomalies 32;:381-391. | |
| (9) | Kimmel, C.A. et al. (1993) Skeletal Development Following Heat Exposure in the Rat. Teratology 47:229-242. | |
| (10) | Marr, M.C. et al. (1988) Comparison of Single and Double Staining for Evaluation of Skeletal Development: The Effects of Ethylene Glycol (EG) in CD Rats. Teratology 37; 476. | |
| (11) | Barrow, M.V. and Taylor, W.J. (1969) A Rapid Method for Detecting Malformations in Rat Foetuses. Journal of Morphology 127:291-306. | |
| (12) | Fritz, H. (1974) Prenatal Ossification in Rabbits ss Indicative of Foetal Maturity. Teratology 11; 313-320. | |
| (13) | Gibson, J.P. et al. (1966) Use of the Rabbit in Teratogenicity Studies. Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology 9;:398-408. | |
| (14) | Kimmel, C.A. and Wilson, J.G. (1973) Skeletal Deviation in Rats: Malformations or Variations? Teratology 8; 309-316. | |
| (15) | Marr, M.C. et al. (1992) Developmental Stages of the CD (Sprague-Dawley) Rat Skeleton after Maternal Exposure to Ethylene Glycol. Teratology 46; 169-181. | |
| (16) | Monie, I.W. et al. (1965) Dissection Procedures for Rat Foetuses Permitting Alizarin Red Staining of Skeleton and Histological Study of Viscera. Supplement to Teratology Workshop Manual, pp. 163-173. | |
| (17) | Spark, C. and Dawson, A.B. (1928) The Order and Time of appearance of Centers of Ossification in the Fore and Hind Limbs of the Albino Rat, with Special Reference to the Possible Influence of the Sex Factor. American Journal of Anatomy 41; 411-445. | |
| (18) | Staples, R.E. and Schnell, V.L. (1964) Refinements in Rapid Clearing Technique in the KOH-Alizarin Red S Method for Fetal Bone. Stain Technology 39; 61-63. | |
| (19) | Strong, R.M. (1928) The Order Time and Rate of Ossification of the Albino Rat (Mus Norvegicus Albinus) Skeleton. American Journal of Anatomy 36; 313-355. | |
| (20) | Stuckhardt, J.L. and Poppe, S.M. (1984) Fresh Visceral Examination of Rat and Rabbit Foetuses Used in Teratogenicity Testing. Teratogenesis, Carcinogenesis, and Mutagenesis 4; 181-188. | |
| (21) | Walker, D.G. and Wirtschafter, Z.T. (1957) The Genesis of the Rat Skeleton. Thomas, Springfield, IL. | |
| (22) | Wilson, J.G. (1965) Embryological Considerations in Teratology. In Teratology: Principles and Techniques, Wilson J.G. and Warkany J. (eds). University of Chicago, Chicago, IL, pp 251-277. | |
| (23) | Wilson, J.G. and Fraser, F.C. (eds). (1977) Handbook of Teratology, Vol. 4. Plenum, NY. | |
| (24) | Varnagy, L. (1980) Use of Recent Fetal Bone Staining Techniques in the Evaluation of Pesticide Teratogenicity. Acta Vet. Acad. Sci: Hung. 28; 233-239. | |
| (25) | Staples, R.E. (1974) Detection of visceral Alterations in Mammalian Foetuses. Teratology 9; 37-38. | |
| (26) | Van Julsingha, E.B. and C.G. Bennett (1977) A Dissecting Procedure for the Detection of Anomalies in the Rabbit Foetal Head. In: Methods in Prenatal Toxicology Neubert, D., Merker, H.J. and Kwasigroch, T.E. (eds.). University of Chicago, Chicago, IL, pp. 126-144. | |
| (27) | US Environmental Protection Agency (1991) Guidelines for Developmental Toxicity Risk Assessment. Federal Register 56; 63798-63826. | |
| (28) | Wise, D.L. et al. (1997) Terminology of Developmental Abnormalities in Common Laboratory Mammals (Version 1) Teratology 55; 249-292. | |
| ANNEX2G | |
| B.35. TWO-GENERATION REPRODUCTION TOXICITY STUDY | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This method is a replicate of the OECD TG 416 (2001). | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| This method for two-generation reproduction testing is designed to provide general information concerning the effects of a test substance on the integrity and performance of the male and female reproductive systems, including gonadal function, the oestrus cycle, mating behaviour, conception, gestation, parturition, lactation, and weaning, and the growth and development of the offspring. The study may also provide information about the effects of the test substance on neonatal morbidity, mortality, and preliminary data on prenatal and postnatal developmental toxicity and serve as a guide for subsequent tests. In addition to studying growth and development of the F1 generation, this test method is also intended to assess the integrity and performance of the male and female reproductive systems as well as growth and development of the F2 generation. For further information on developmental toxicity and functional deficiencies, either additional study segments can be incorporated into this protocol, consulting the methods for developmental toxicity and/or developmental neurotoxicity as appropriate, or these endpoints could be studied in separate studies, using the appropriate test methods. | |
| 1.2 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| The test substance is administered in graduated doses to several groups of males and females. Males of the P generation should be dosed during growth and for at least one complete spermatogenetic cycle (approximately 56 days in the mouse and 70 days in the rat) in order to elicit any adverse effects on spermatogenesis. Effects on sperm are determined by a number of sperm parameters (e.g., sperm morphology and motility) and in tissue preparation and detailed histopathology. If data on spermatogenesis are available from a previous repeated dose study of sufficient duration, e.g. a 90-day study, males of the P generation need not be included in the evaluation. It is recommended, however, that samples or digital recordings of sperm of the P generation are saved, to enable later evaluation. Females of the P generation should be dosed during growth and for several complete oestrus cycles in order to detect any adverse effects on oestrus cycle normality by the test substance. The test substance is administered to parental (P) animals during their mating, during the resulting pregnancies, and through the weaning of their F1 offspring. At weaning the administration of the substance is continued to F1 offspring during their growth into adulthood, mating and production of an F2 generation, until the F2 generation is weaned. | |
| Clinical observations and pathological examinations are performed on all animals for signs of toxicity with special emphasis on effects on the integrity and performance of the male and female reproductive systems and on the growth and development of the offspring. | |
| 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.3.1 Selection of animal species | |
| The rat is the preferred species for testing. If other species are used, justification should be given and appropriate modifications will be necessary. Strains with low fecundity or well-known high incidence of developmental defects should not be used. At the commencement of the study, the weight variation of animals used should be minimal and not exceed 20 % of the mean weight of each sex. | |
| 1.3.2 Housing and feeding conditions | |
| The temperature in the experimental animal room should be 22 oC (± 3o). Although the relative humidity should be at least 30 % and preferably not exceed 70 % other than during room cleaning, the aim should be 50-60 %. Lighting should be artificial, the sequence being 12 hours light, 12 hours dark. For feeding, conventional laboratory diets may be used with an unlimited supply of drinking water. The choice of diet may be influenced by the need to ensure a suitable admixture of a test substance when administered by this method. | |
| Animals may be housed individually or be caged in small groups of the same sex. Mating procedures should be carried out in cages suitable for the purpose. After evidence of copulation, mated females shall be single-caged in delivery or maternity cages. Mated rats may also be kept in small groups and separated one or two days prior to parturition. Mated animals shall be provided with appropriate and defined nesting materials when parturition is near. | |
| 1.3.3 Preparation of animals | |
| Healthy young animals, which have been acclimated to laboratory conditions for at least 5 days and have not been subjected to previous experimental procedures, should be used. The test animals should be characterised as to species, strain, source, sex, weight and/or age. Any sibling relationships among the animals should be known so that mating of siblings is avoided. The animals should be randomly assigned to the control and treated groups (stratification by body weight is recommended). Cages should be arranged in such a way that possible effects due to cage placement are minimised. Each animal should be assigned a unique identification number. For the P generation, this should be done before dosing starts. For the F1 generation, this should be done at weaning for animals selected for mating. Records indicating the litter of origin should be maintained for all selected F1 animals. In addition, individual identification of pups as soon after birth as possible is recommended when individual weighing of pups or any functional tests are considered. | |
| Parental (P) animals shall be about 5 to 9 weeks old at the start of dosing. The animals of all test groups shall, as nearly as practicable, be of uniform weight and age. | |
| 1.4 PROCEDURE | |
| 1.4.1 Number and sex of animals | |
| Each test and control group should contain a sufficient number of animals to yield preferably not less than 20 pregnant females at or near parturition. For substances that cause undesirable treatment related effects (e.g. sterility, excessive toxicity at the high dose), this may not be possible. The objective is to produce enough pregnancies to assure a meaningful evaluation of the potential of the substance to affect fertility, pregnancy and maternal behaviour and suckling, growth and development of the F1 offspring from conception to maturity, and the development of their offspring (F2) to weaning. Therefore, failure to achieve the desired number of pregnant animals (i.e. 20) does not necessarily invalidate the study and should be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. | |
| 1.4.2 Preparation of Doses | |
| It is recommended that the test substance be administered orally (by diet, drinking water or gavage) unless another route of administration (e.g. dermal or inhalation) is considered more appropriate. | |
| Where necessary, the test substance is dissolved or suspended in a suitable vehicle. It is recommended that, wherever possible, the use of an aqueous solution/suspension be considered first, followed by consideration of a solution/emulsion in oil (e.g. corn oil) and then by possible solution in other vehicles. For vehicles other than water, the toxic characteristics of the vehicle must be known. The stability of the test substance in the vehicle should be determined. | |
| 1.4.3 Dosage | |
| At least three dose levels and a concurrent control shall be used. Unless limited by the physical-chemical nature or biological effects of the test substance, the highest dose level should be chosen with the aim to induce toxicity but not death or severe suffering. In case of unexpected mortality, studies with a mortality rate of less than approximately 10 percent in the parental (P) animals would normally still be acceptable. A descending sequence of dose levels should be selected with a view to demonstrating any dosage related effect and no-observed-adverse-effects levels (NOAEL). Two to four fold intervals are frequently optimal for setting the descending dose levels and addition of a fourth test group is often preferable to using very large intervals (e.g. more than a factor of 10) between dosages. For the dietary studies the dose interval should be not more than 3 fold. Dose levels should be selected taking into account any existing toxicity data, especially results from repeated dose studies. Any available information on metabolism and kinetics of the test compound or related materials should also be considered. In addition, this information will also assist in demonstrating the adequacy of the dosing regimen. | |
| The control group shall be an untreated group or a vehicle-control group if a vehicle is used in administering the test substance. Except for treatment with the test substance, animals in the control group should be handled in an identical manner to the test group subjects. If a vehicle is used, the control group shall receive the vehicle in the highest volume used. If a test substance is administered in the diet, and causes reduced dietary intake or utilisation, then the use of a pair-fed control group may be considered necessary. Alternatively data from controlled studies designed to evaluate the effects of decreased food consumption on reproductive parameters may be used in lieu of a concurrent pair-fed control group. | |
| Consideration should be given to the. following characteristics of vehicle and other additives: effects on the absorption, distribution, metabolism, or retention of the test substance; effects on the chemical properties of the test substance which may alter its toxic characteristics; and effects on the food or water consumption or the nutritional status of the animals. | |
| 1.4.4 Limit test | |
| If an oral study at one dose level of at least 1000 mg/kg body weight/day or, for dietary or drinking water administration, an equivalent percentage in the diet or drinking water using the procedures described for this study, produces no observable toxic effects in either parental animals or their offspring and if toxicity would not be expected based upon data from structurally and /or metabolically related compounds, then a full study using several dose levels may not be considered necessary. The limit test applies except when human exposure indicates the need for a higher oral dose level to be used. For other types of administration, such as inhalation or dermal application, the physical-chemical properties of the test substance, such as solubility, often may indicate and limit the maximum attainable level of exposure. | |
| 1.4.5 Administration of doses | |
| The animals should be dosed with the test substance on a 7-days-a-week basis. The oral route of administration (diet, drinking water, or gavage) is preferred. If another route of administration is used, justification shall be provided, and appropriate modifications may be necessary. All animals shall be dosed by the same method during the appropriate experimental period. When the test substance is administered by gavage, this should be done using a stomach tube. The volume of liquid administered at one time should not exceed 1 ml/100 g body weight (0.4 ml/100 g body weight is the maximum for corn oil), except in the case of aqueous solutions where 2 ml/100 g body weight may be used. Except for irritant or corrosive substances, which will normally reveal exacerbated effects with higher concentrations, variability in test volume should be minimised by adjusting the concentration to ensure a constant volume at all dose levels. In gavage studies, the pups will normally only receive test substance indirectly through the milk, until direct dosing commences for them at weaning. In diet or drinking water studies, the pups will additionally receive test substance directly when they commence eating for themselves during the last week of the lactation period. | |
| For substances administered via the diet or drinking water, it is important to ensure that the quantities of the test substance involved do not interfere with normal nutrition or water balance. When the test substance is administered in the diet either a constant dietary concentration (ppm) or a constant dose level in terms of the body weight of the animal may be used; the alternative used must be specified. For a substance administered by gavage, the dose should be given at similar times each day, and adjusted at least weekly to maintain a constant dose level in terms of animal body weight. Information regarding placental distribution should be considered when adjusting the gavage dose based on weight. | |
| 1.4.6 Experimental schedules | |
| Daily dosing of the parental (P) males and females shall begin when they are 5 to 9 weeks old. Daily dosing of the F1 males and females shall begin at weaning; it should be kept in mind that in cases of test substance administration via diet or drinking water, direct exposure of the F1 pups to the test substance may already occur during the lactation period. For both sexes (P and F1), dosing shall be continued for at least 10 weeks before the mating period. Dosing is continued in both sexes during the 2 week mating period. Males should be humanely killed and examined when they are no longer needed for assessment of reproductive effects. For parental (P) females, dosing should continue throughout pregnancy and up to the weaning of the F1 offspring. Consideration should be given to modifications in the dosing schedule based on available information on the test substance, including existing toxicity data, induction of metabolism or bioaccumulation. The dose to each animal should normally be based on the most recent individual body weight determination. However, caution should be exercised when adjusting the dose during the last trimester of pregnancy. | |
| Treatment of the P and F1 males and females shall continue until termination. All P and F1 adult males and females should be humanely killed when they are no longer needed for assessment of reproductive effects. F1 offspring not selected for mating and all F2 offspring should be humanely killed after weaning. | |
| 1.4.7 Mating procedure | |
| 1.4.7.1 | Parental (P) mating | For each mating, each female shall be placed with a single male from the same dose level (1:1 mating) until copulation occurs or 2 weeks have elapsed. Each day, the females shall be examined for presence of sperm or vaginal plugs. Day 0 of pregnancy is defined as the day a vaginal plug or sperm are found. In case pairing is unsuccessful, re-mating of females with proven males of the same group could be considered. Mating pairs should be clearly identified in the data. Mating of siblings should be avoided. | |
| 1.4.7.2 | F1 mating | For mating the F1 offspring, at least one male and one female should be selected at weaning from each litter for mating with other pups of the same dose level but different litter, to produce the F2 generation. Selection of pups from each litter should be random when no significant differences are observed in body weight or appearance between the litter mates. In case these differences are observed, the best representatives of each litter should be selected. Pragmatically, this is best done on a body weight basis but it may be more appropriate on the basis of appearance. The F1 offspring should not be mated until they have attained full sexual maturity. | Pairs without progeny should be evaluated to determine the apparent cause of the infertility. This may involve such procedures as additional opportunities to mate with other proven sires or dams, microscopic examination of the reproductive organs, and examination of the oestrous cycles or spermatogenesis. | |
| 1.4.7.3 | Second mating | In certain instances, such as treatment-related alterations in litter size or the observation of an equivocal effect in the first mating, it is recommended that the P or F1 adults be remated to produce a second litter. It is recommended to remate females or males, which have not produced a litter with proven breeders of the opposite sex. If production of a second litter is deemed necessary in either generation, animals should be remated approximately one week after weaning of the last litter. | |
| 1.4.7.4 | Litter size | Animals shall be allowed to litter normally and rear their offspring to weaning. Standardisation of litter sizes is optional. When standardisation is done, the method used should be described in detail. | |
| 1.5 OBSERVATIONS | |
| 1.5.1 Clinical observations | |
| A general clinical observation should be made each day and, and in the case of gavage dosing its timing should take into account the anticipated peak period of effects after dosing. Behavioural changes, signs of difficult or prolonged parturition and all signs of toxicity should be recorded. An additional, more detailed examination of each animal should be conducted on at least a weekly basis and could conveniently be performed on an occasion when the animal is weighed. Twice daily, during the weekend once daily when appropriate, all animals should be observed for morbidity and mortality. | |
| 1.5.2 Body weight and food/water consumption of parent animals | |
| Parental animals (P and F1) shall be weighed on the first day of dosing and at least weekly thereafter. Parental females (P and F1) shall be weighed at a minimum on gestation days 0, 7, 14, and 20 or 21, and during lactation on the same days as the weighing of litters and on the day the animals are killed. These observations should be reported individually for each adult animal. During the premating and gestation periods food consumption shall be measured weekly at a minimum. Water consumption shall be measured weekly at a minimum if the test substance is administered in the water. | |
| 1.5.3 Oestrus cycle | |
| Estrous cycle length and normality are evaluated in P and F1 females by vaginal smears prior to mating, and optionally during mating, until evidence of mating is found. When obtaining vaginal/cervical cells, care should be taken to avoid disturbance of mucosa and subsequently, the induction of pseudopregnancy (1). | |
| 1.5.4 Sperm parameters | |
| For all P and F1 males at termination, testis and epididymis weight shall be recorded and one of each organ reserved for histopathological examination (see section 1.5.7, 1.5.8.1). Of a subset of at least ten males of each group of P and F1 males, the remaining testes and epididymides should be used for enumeration of homogenisation-resistant spermatids and cauda epididymal sperm reserves, respectively. For this same subset of males, sperm from the cauda epididymides or vas deferens should be collected for evaluation of sperm motility and sperm morphology. If treatment-related effects are observed or when there is evidence from other studies of possible effects on spermatogenesis, sperm evaluation should be conducted in all males in each dose group; otherwise enumeration may be restricted to control and high-dose P and F1 males. | |
| The total number of homogenisation-resistant testicular spermatids and cauda epididymal sperm should be enumerated (2)(3). Cauda sperm reserves can be derived from the concentration and volume of sperm in the suspension used to complete the qualitative evaluations, and the number of sperm recovered by subsequent mincing and/or homogenising of the remaining cauda tissue. Enumeration should be performed on the selected subset of males of all dose groups immediately after killing the animals unless video or digital recordings are made, or unless the specimens are freezed and analysed later. In these instances, the controls and high dose group may be analysed first. If no treatment-related effects (e.g., effects on sperm count, motility, or morphology) are seen the other dose groups need not be analysed. When treatment-related effects are noted in the high-dose group, then the lower dose groups should also be evaluated. | |
| Epididymal (or ductus deferens) sperm motility should be evaluated or video taped immediately after sacrifice. Sperm should be recovered while minimising damage, and diluted for motility analysis using acceptable methods (4). The percentage of progressively motile sperm should be determined either subjectively of objectively. When computer-assisted motion analysis is performed (5)(6)(7)(8)(9)(10) the derivation of progressive motility relies on user-defined thresholds for average path velocity and straightness or linear index. If samples are videotaped (11) or the images are otherwise recorded at the time of necropsy, subsequent analysis of only control and high-dose P and F1 males may be performed unless treatment-related effects are observed; in that case, the lower dose groups should also be evaluated. In the absence of a video or digital image, all samples in all treatment groups should be analysed at necropsy. | |
| A morphological evaluation of an epididymal (or vas deferens) sperm sample should be performed. Sperm (at least 200 per sample) should be examined as fixed, wet preparations (12) and classified as either normal or abnormal. Examples of morphologic sperm abnormalities would include fusion, isolated heads, and misshapen heads and/or tails. Evaluation should be performed on the selected subset of males of all dose groups either immediately after killing the animals, or, based on the video or digital recordings, at a later time. Smears, once fixed, can also be read at a later time. In these instances, the controls and high dose group may be analysed first. If no treatment-related effects (e.g., effects on sperm morphology) are seen the other dose groups need not be analysed. When treatment-related effects are noted in the high-dose group, then the lower dose groups should also be evaluated. | |
| If any of the above sperm evaluation parameters have already been examined as part of a systemic toxicity study of at least 90 days, they need not necessarily be repeated in the two-generation study. It is recommended, however, that samples or digital recordings of sperm of the P generation are saved, to enable later evaluation, if necessary. | |
| 1.5.5 Offspring | |
| Each litter should be examined as soon as possible after delivery (lactation day 0) to establish the number and sex of pups, stillbirths, live births, and the presence of gross anomalies. Pups found dead on day 0, if not macerated, should preferably be examined for possible defects and cause of death and preserved. Live pups should be counted and weighed individually at birth (lactation day 0) or on day 1, and on regular weigh days thereafter, e.g., on days 4, 7, 14, and 21 of lactation. Physical or behavioural abnormalities observed in the dams or offspring should be recorded. | |
| Physical development of the offspring should be recorded mainly by body weight gain. Other physical parameters (e.g. ear and eye opening, tooth eruption, hair growth) may give supplementary information, but these data should preferably be evaluated in the context of data on sexual maturation (e.g. age and body weight at vaginal opening or balano-preputial separation) (13). Functional investigations (e.g. motor activity, sensory function, reflex ontogeny) of the F1 offspring before and/or after weaning, particularly those related to sexual maturation, are recommended if such investigations are not included in separate studies. The age of vaginal opening and preputial separation should be determined for F1 weanlings selected for mating. Anogenital distance should be measured at postnatal day 0 in F2 pups if triggered by alterations in F1 sex ratio or timing of sexual maturation. | |
| Functional observations may be omitted in groups that otherwise reveal clear signs of adverse effects (e.g., significant decrease in weight gain, etc.). If functional investigations are made, they should not be done on pups selected for mating. | |
| 1.5.6 Gross necropsy | |
| At the time of termination or death during the study, all parental animals (P and F1), all pups with external abnormalities or clinical signs, as well as one randomly selected pup/sex/litter from both the F1 and F2 generation, shall be examined macroscopically for any structural abnormalities or pathological changes. Special attention should be paid to the organs of the reproductive system. Pups that are humanely killed in a moribund condition and dead pups, when not macerated, should be examined for possible defects and/or cause of death and preserved. | |
| The uteri of all primiparous females should be examined, in a manner which does not compromise histopathological evaluation, for the presence and number of implantation sites. | |
| 1.5.7 Organ weights | |
| At the time of termination, body weight and the weight of the following organs of all P and F1 parental animals shall be determined (paired organs should be weighed individually): | |
| — | Uterus, ovaries; | |
| — | Testes, epididymides (total and cauda); | |
| — | Prostate; | |
| — | Seminal vesicles with coagulating glands and their fluids and prostate (as one unit); | |
| — | Brain, liver, kidneys, spleen, pituitary, thyroid and adrenal glands and known target organs. | |
| Terminal body weights should be determined for F1 and F2 pups that are selected for necropsy. The following organs from the one randomly selected pup/sex/litter (see section 1.5.6) shall be weighed: Brain, spleen and thymus. | |
| Gross necropsy and organ weight results should be assessed in context with observations made in other repeated dose studies, when feasible. | |
| 1.5.8 Histopathology | |
| 1.5.8.1 | Parental Animals | The following organs and tissues of parental (P and F1) animals, or representative samples thereof, shall be fixed and stored in a suitable medium for histopathological examination. | — | Vagina, uterus with cervix, and ovaries (preserved in appropriate fixative); | — | One testis (preserved in Bouin's or comparable fixative), one epididymis, seminal vesicles, prostate, and coagulating gland; | — | Previously identified target organ(s) from all P and F1 animals selected for mating. | Full histopathology of the preserved organs and tissues listed above should be performed for all high dose and control P and F1 animals selected for mating. Examination of the ovaries of the P animals is optional. Organs demonstrating treatment-related changes should also be examined in the low- and mid-dose groups to aid in the elucidation of the NOAEL. Additionally, reproductive organs of the low-and mid-dose animals suspected of reduced fertility, e.g., those that failed to mate, conceive, sire, or deliver healthy offspring, or for which oestrus cyclicity or sperm number, motility, or morphology were affected, should be subjected to histopathological evaluation. All gross lesions such as atrophy or tumours shall be examined. | Detailed testicular histopathological examination (e.g. using Bouin's fixative, paraffin embedding and transverse sections of 4-5 µm thickness) should be conducted in order to identify treatment-related effects such as retained spermatids, missing germ cell layers or types, multinucleated giant cells or sloughing of spermatogenic cells into the lumen (14). Examination of the intact epididymis should include the caput, corpus, and cauda, which can be accomplished by evaluation of a longitudinal section. The epididymis should be evaluated for leukocyte infiltration, change in prevalence of cell types, aberrant cell types, and phagocytosis of sperm. PAS and haematoxylin staining may be used for examination of the male reproductive organs. | The postlactational ovary should contain primordial and growing follicles as well as the large corpora lutea of lactation. Histopathological examination should detect qualitative depletion of the primordial follicle population. A quantitative evaluation of primordial follicles should be conducted for F1 females; the number of animals, ovarian section selection, and section sample size should be statistically appropriate for the evaluation procedure used. Examination should include enumeration of the number of primordial follicles, which can be combined with small growing follicles, for comparison of treated and control ovaries (15)(16)(17)(18)(19). | |
| 1.5.8.2 | Weanlings | Grossly abnormal tissue and target organs from all pups with external abnormalities or clinical signs, as well as from the one randomly selected pup/sex/litter from both the F1 and F2 generation which have not been selected for mating, shall be fixed and stored in a. suitable medium for histopathological examination. Full histopathological characterisation of preserved tissue should be performed with special emphasis on the organs of the reproductive system. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| 2.1 TREATMENT OF RESULTS | |
| Data shall be reported individually and summarised in tabular form, showing for each test group and each generation the number of animals at the start of the test, the number of animals found dead during the test or killed for humane reasons, the time of any death or humane kill, the number of fertile animals, the number of pregnant females, the number of animals showing signs of toxicity, a description of the signs of toxicity observed, including time of onset, duration, and severity of any toxic effects, the types of parental and offspring observations, the types of histopathological changes, and all relevant litter data. | |
| Numerical results should be evaluated by an appropriate, generally accepted statistical method; the. statistical methods should be selected as part of the design of the study and should be justified. Dose-response statistical models may be useful for analysing data. The report should include sufficient information on the method of analysis and the computer program employed, so that an independent reviewer/statistician can re-evaluate and reconstruct the analysis. | |
| 2.2 EVALUATION OF RESULTS | |
| The findings of this two-generation reproduction toxicity study should be evaluated in terms of the observed effects including necropsy and microscopic findings. The evaluation will include the relationship, or lack thereof, between the dose of the test substance and the presence or absence, incidence and severity of abnormalities, including gross lesions, identified target organs, affected fertility, clinical abnormalities, affected reproductive and litter performance, body weight changes, effects on mortality and any other toxic effects. The physico-chemical properties of the test substance, and when available, toxicokinetics data should be taken into consideration when evaluating test results. | |
| A properly conducted reproduction toxicity test should provide a satisfactory estimation of a no-effect level and an understanding of adverse effects on reproduction, parturition, lactation, postnatal development including growth and sexual development. | |
| 2.3 INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS | |
| A two-generation reproduction toxicity study will provide information on the effects of repeated exposure to a substance during all phases of the reproductive cycle. In particular, the study provides information on the reproductive parameters, and on development, growth, maturation and survival of offspring. The results of the study should be interpreted in conjunction with the findings from subchronic, prenatal developmental and toxicokinetic and other available studies. The results of this study can be used in assessing the need for further testing of a chemical. Extrapolation of the results of the study to man is valid to a limited degree. They are best used to provide information on no-effect-levels and permissible human exposure (20)(21)(22)(23). | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| TEST REPORT | |
| The test report must include the following information: | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | physical nature and, where relevant, physicochemical properties; | |
| — | identification data; | |
| — | purity. | |
| Vehicle (if appropriate): | |
| — | justification for choice of vehicle if other than water. | |
| Test animals: | |
| — | species/strain used; | |
| — | number, age and sex of animals; | |
| — | source, housing conditions, diet, nesting materials, etc.; | |
| — | individual weights of animals at the start of the test. | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | rationale for dose level selection; | |
| — | details of test substance formulation/diet preparation, achieved concentrations; | |
| — | stability and homogeneity of the preparation; | |
| — | details of the administration of the test substance; | |
| — | conversion from diet/drinking water test substance concentration (ppm) to the achieved dose (mg/kg body weight/day), if applicable; | |
| — | details of food and water quality. | |
| Results: | |
| — | food consumption, and water consumption if available, food efficiency (body weight gain per gram of food consumed), and test material consumption for P and F1 animals, except for the period of cohabitation and for at least the last third of lactation; | |
| — | absorption data (if available); | |
| — | body weight data for P and F1 animals selected for mating; | |
| — | litter and pup weight data; | |
| — | body weight at sacrifice and absolute and relative organ weight data for the parental animals; | |
| — | nature, severity and duration of clinical observations (whether reversible or not); | |
| — | time of death during the study or whether animals survived to termination; | |
| — | toxic response data by sex and dose, including indices of mating, fertility, gestation, birth, viability, and lactation; the report should indicate the numbers used in calculating these indices; | |
| — | toxic or other effects on reproduction, offspring, post-natal growth, etc.; | |
| — | necropsy findings; | |
| — | detailed description of all histopathological findings; | |
| — | number of P and F1 females cycling normally and cycle length; | |
| — | total cauda epididymal sperm number, percent progressively motile sperm, percent morphologically normal sperm, and percent of sperm with each identified abnormality; | |
| — | time-to-mating, including the number of days until mating; | |
| — | gestation length; | |
| — | number of implantations, corpora lutea, litter size; | |
| — | number of live births and post-implantation loss; | |
| — | number of pups with grossly visible abnormalities, if determined the number of runts should be reported; | |
| — | data on physical landmarks in pups and other post natal developmental data; physical landmarks evaluated should be justified; | |
| — | data on functional observations in pups and adults, as applicable; | |
| — | tatistical treatment of results, where appropriate. | |
| Discussion of results. | |
| Conclusions, including NOAEL values for maternal and offspring effects. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | Sadleir, R.M.F.S. (1979). Cycles and Seasons, In: Reproduction in Mammals: I. Germ Cells and Fertilization, C.R. Auston and R.V. Short (eds.), Cambridge, New York. | |
| (2) | Gray, L.E. et al., (1989). A Dose-Response Analysis of Methoxychlor-Induced Alterations of Reproductive Development and Function in the Rat. Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 12:92-108. | |
| (3) | Robb, G.W. et al., (1978). Daily Sperm Production and Epididymal Sperm Reserves of Pubertal and Adult Rats. Journal of Reproduction and Fertility 54:103-107. | |
| (4) | Klinefelter, G.R. et al., (1991). The Method of Sperm Collection Significantly Influences Sperm Motion Parameters Following Ethane Dimethanesulfonate Administration in the Rat. Reproductive Toxicology 5:39 44 | |
| (5) | Seed, J. et al. (1996). Methods for Assessing Sperm Motility, Morphology, and Counts in the Rat, Rabbit, and Dog: a Consensus Report. Reproductive Toxicology 10(3):237- 244. | |
| (6) | Chapin, R.E. et al., (1992).Methods for Assessing Rat Sperm Motility. Reproductive Toxicology 6:267-273 | |
| (7) | Klinefelter, G.R. et al., (1992). Direct Effects of Ethane Dimethanesulphonate on Epididymal Function in Adult Rats: an In Vitro Demonstration. Journal of Andrology 13:409-421. | |
| (8) | Slott, V.L. et al., (1991). Rat Sperm Motility Analysis: Methodologic Considerations. Reproductive Toxicology 5:449-458. | |
| (9) | Slott, V.L. and Perreault, S.D., (1993). Computer-Assisted Sperm Analysis of Rodent Epididymal Sperm Motility Using the Hamilton-Thorn Motility Analyzer. In: Methods in Toxicology, Part A., Academic, Orlando, Florida, pp. 319-333. | |
| (10) | Toth, G.P. et al. (1989). The Automated Analysis of Rat Sperm Motility Following Subchronic Epichlorhydrin Administration: Methodologic and Statistical Considerations. Journal of Andrology 10: 401-415. | |
| (11) | Working, P.K. and M. Hurtt, (1987). Computerized Videomicrographic Analysis of Rat Sperm Motility. Journal of Andrology 8:330-337. | |
| (12) | Linder, R.E. et al., (1992). Endpoints of Spermatoxicity in the Rat After Short Duration Exposures to Fourteen Reproductive Toxicants. Reproductive Toxicology 6:491 -505. | |
| (13) | Korenbrot, C.C. et al., (1977). Preputial Separation as an External Sign of Pubertal Development in the Male Rat. Biological Reproduction 17:298303. | |
| (14) | Russell, L.D. et al., (1990). Histological and Histopathological Evaluation of the Testis, Cache River Press, Clearwater, Florida. | |
| (15) | Heindel, J.J. and R.E. Chapin, (eds.) (1993). Part B. Female Reproductive Systems, Methods in Toxicology, Academic, Orlando, Florida. | |
| (16) | Heindel, J.J. et al., (1989) Histological Assessment of Ovarian Follicle Number in Mice As a Screen of Ovarian Toxicity. In: Growth Factors and the Ovary, A.N. Hirshfield (ed.), Plenum, New York, pp. 421-426. | |
| (17) | Manson, J.M. and Y.J. Kang, (1989). Test Methods for Assessing Female Reproductive and Developmental Toxicology. In: Principles and Methods of Toxicology, A.W. Hayes (ed.), Raven, New York. | |
| (18) | Smith, B.J. et al,. (1991). Comparison of Random and Serial Sections in Assessment of Ovarian Toxicity. Reproductive Toxicology 5:379-383. | |
| (19) | Heindel, J.J. (1999). Oocyte Quantitation and Ovarian Histology. In: An Evaluation and Interpretation of Reproductive Endpoints for Human Health Risk Assessment, G. Daston,. and C.A. Kimmel, (eds.), ILSI Press, Washington, DC. | |
| (20) | Thomas, J. A. (1991). Toxic Responses of the Reproductive System. In: Casarett and Doull's Toxicology, M.O. Amdur, J. Doull, and C.D. Klaassen (eds.), Pergamon, New York. | |
| (21) | Zenick, H. and E.D. Clegg, (1989). Assessment of Male Reproductive Toxicity: A Risk Assessment Approach. In: Principles and Methods of Toxicology, A.W. Hayes (ed.), Raven Press, New York. | |
| (22) | Palmer, A.K. (1981). In: Developmental Toxicology, Kimmel, C.A. and J. Buelke-Sam (eds.), Raven Press, New York. | |
| (23) | Palmer, A.K. (1978). In Handbook of Teratology, Vol. 4, J.G. Wilson and F.C. Fraser (eds.), Plenum Press, New York. | |
| ANNEX 2H | |
| B.42. SKIN SENSITISATION: LOCAL LYMPH NODE ASSAY | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This test method is equivalent to the OECD TG 429 (2002) | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| The Local Lymph Node Assay (LLNA) has been sufficiently validated and accepted to justify its adoption as a new Method (1)(2)(3). This is the second method for assessing skin sensitisation potential of chemicals in animals. The other method (B.6) utilises guinea pig tests, notably the guinea pig maximisation test and the Buehler test (4). | |
| The LLNA provides an alternative method for identifying skin sensitising chemicals and for confirming that chemicals lack a significant potential to cause skin sensitisation. This does not necessarily imply that in all instances the LLNA should be used in place of guinea pig test, but rather that the assay is of equal merit and may be employed as an alternative in which positive and negative results generally no longer require further confirmation. | |
| The LLNA provides certain advantages with regard to both scientific progress and animal welfare. It studies the induction phase of skin sensitisation and provides quantitative data suitable for dose response assessment. The details of the validation of the LLNA and a review of the associated work have been published (5)(6)(7)(8). In addition, it should be noted that the mild/moderate sensitisers, which are recommended as suitable positive control substances for guinea pig test methods, are also appropriate for use with the LLNA (6)(8)(9). | |
| The LLNA is an in vivo method and, as a consequence, will not eliminate the use of animals in the assessment of contact sensitising activity. It has, however, the potential to reduce the number of animals required for this purpose. Moreover, the LLNA offers a substantial refinement of the way in which animals are used for contact sensitisation testing. The LLNA is based upon consideration of immunological events stimulated by chemicals during the induction phase of sensitisation. Unlike guinea pig tests the LLNA does not require that challenged-induced dermal hypersensitivity reactions be elicited. Furthermore, the LLNA does not require the use of an adjuvant, as is the case for the guinea pig maximisation test. Thus, the LLNA reduces animal distress. Despite the advantages of the LLNA over traditional guinea pig tests, it should be recognised that there are certain limitations that may necessitate the use of traditional guinea pigs tests (e.g., false negative findings in the LLNA with certain metals, false positive findings with certain skin irritants)(10). | |
| See also Introduction part B. | |
| 1.2 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| The basic principle underlying the LLNA is that sensitisers induce a primary proliferation of lymphocytes in the lymph node draining the site of chemical application. This proliferation is proportional to the dose applied (and to the potency of the allergen) and provides a simple means of obtaining an objective, quantitative measurement of sensitisation. The LLNA assesses this proliferation as a dose-response relationship in which the proliferation in test groups is compared to that in vehicle treated controls. The ratio of the proliferation in treated groups to that in vehicular controls, termed the Stimulation Index, is determined, and must be at least three before a test substance can be further evaluated as a potential skin sensitiser. The methods described here are based on the use of radioactive labelling to measure cell proliferation. However, other endpoints for assessment of proliferation may be employed provided there is justification and appropriate scientific support, including full citations and description of the methodology. | |
| 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.3.1 Preparations | |
| 1.3.1.1 | Housing and feeding conditions | Animals should be individually housed. The temperature of the experimental animals room should be 22 o C (±3 o C). Although the relative humidity should be at least 30% and preferably not exceed 70% other than during room cleaning, the aim should be 50-60%. Lighting should be artificial, the sequence being 12 hours light, 12 hours dark. For feeding, conventional laboratory diets may be used with an unlimited supply of drinking water. | |
| 1.3.1.2 | Preparation of animals | The animals are randomly selected, marked to permit individual identification (but not by any form of ear marking), and kept in their cages for at least 5 days prior to the start of dosing to allow for acclimatisation to the laboratory conditions. Prior to the start of treatment all animals are examined to ensure that they have no observable skin lesions. | |
| 1.3.2 Test Conditions | |
| 1.3.2.1 | Experimental animals | The mouse is the species of choice for this test. Young adult female mice of CBA/Ca or CBA/J strain, which are nulliparous and non-pregnant are used. At the start of the study, animals should be between 8-12 weeks old, and the weight variation of the animals should be minimal and not exceed 20% of the mean weight. Other strains and males may be used when sufficient data are generated to demonstrate that significant strain and/or gender-specific differences in the LLNA response do not exist. | |
| 1.3.2.2 | Reliability check | Positive controls are used to demonstrate appropriate performance of the assay and competency of the laboratory to successfully conduct the assay. The positive control should produce a positive LLNA response at an exposure level expected to give an increase in the stimulation index (SI) >3 over the negative control group. The positive control dose should be chosen such that the induction is clear but not excessive. Preferred substances are hexyl cinnamic aldehyde (CAS No 101-86-0, EINECS No 202-983-3) and mercaptobenzothiazole (CAS No 149-30-4, EINECS No 205-736-8). There may be circumstances in which, given adequate justification, other control substances, meeting the above criteria, may be used. While ordinarily a positive control group may be required in each assay, there may be situations in which test laboratories will have available historic positive control data to show consistency of a satisfactory response over a six-month or more extended period. In those situations, less frequent testing with positive controls may be appropriate at intervals no greater than 6 months. Although the positive control substance should be tested in the vehicle that is known to elicit a consistent response (e.g., acetone: olive oil), there may be certain regulatory situations in which testing in non-standard vehicle (clinically/chemically relevant formulation) will also be necessary. In such situation the possible interaction of a positive control with this unconventional vehicle should be tested. | |
| 1.3.2.3 | Number of animals, dose levels and vehicle selection. | A minimum of four animals is used per dose group, with a minimum of three concentrations of the test substance, plus a negative control group treated only with the vehicle for the test substance, and, as appropriate, a positive control. In those cases in which individual animal data are to be collected, a minimum of five animals per dose group are used. Except for absence of treatment with the test substance, animals in the control groups should be handled and treated in a manner identical to that of animals in the treatment groups. | Dose and vehicle selection should be based on the recommendations given in reference (1). Doses are selected from the concentration series 100%, 50%, 25%, 10%, 5%, 2.5%, 1%, 0.5% etc. Existing acute toxicity and dermal irritation data should be considered, where available, in selecting the three consecutive concentrations so that the highest concentration maximises exposure whilst avoiding systemic toxicity and excessive local skin irritation (2)(11). | The vehicle should be selected on the basis of maximising the test concentrations and solubility whilst producing a solution/suspension suitable for application of the test substance. In order of preference, recommended vehicles are acetone/olive oil (4:1 v/v), dimethylformamide, methyl ethyl ketone, propylene glycol and dimethyl sulphoxide (2)(10), but others may be used if sufficient scientific rationale is provided. In certain situations it may be necessary to use a clinically relevant solvent or the commercial formulation in which the test substance is marketed as an additional control. Particular care should be taken to ensure that hydrophilic materials are incorporated into a vehicle system, which wets the skin and does not immediately run off. Thus, wholly aqueous vehicles are to be avoided. | |
| 1.3.3 Test procedure | |
| 1.3.3.1 | Experimental schedule | The experimental schedule of the assay is as follows: | • | Day 1: | • | Individually identify and record the weight of each animal. Open application of 25µl of the appropriate dilution of the test substance, the vehicle alone, or the positive control (as appropriate), to the dorsum of each ear. | • | Days 2 and 3: | • | Repeat the application procedure carried out on day 1. | • | Days 4 and 5: | • | No treatment. | • | Day 6: | • | Record the weight of each animal. Inject 250µl of phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) containing 20 µCi (7.4e + 8 Bq) of 3H-methyl thymidine into all test and control mice via the tail vein. Alternatively inject 250 µL PBS containing 2 µCi (7.4e + 7 Bq) of 125I-iododeoxyuridine and 10-5 M fluorodeoxyuridine into all mice via the tail vein. | • | Five hours later, the animals are killed. The draining auricular lymph nodes from each ear are excised and pooled in PBS for each experimental group (pooled treatment group approach); alternatively pairs of lymph nodes from individual animals may be excised and pooled in PBS for each animal (individual animal approach). Details and diagrams of the node identification and dissection can be found in Annex I of reference 10. | |
| 1.3.3.2 | Preparation of cell suspensions | A single cell suspension of lymph node cells (LNC) either from pooled treatment groups or bilaterally from individual animals is prepared by gentle mechanical disaggregation through 200 µm-mesh stainless steel gauze. Lymph node cells are washed twice with an excess of PBS and precipitated with 5% trichloroacetic acid (TCA) at 4 oC for 18h (2). Pellets are either re-suspended in 1 ml TCA and transferred to scintillation vials containing 10 ml of scintillation fluid for 3H-counting, or transferred directly to gamma counting tubes for 125I-counting. | |
| 1.3.3.3 | Determination of cell proliferation (incorporated radioactivity) | Incorporation of 3H-methyl thymidine is measured by ß-scintillation counting as disintegrations per minute (DPM). Incorporation of 125I-iododeoxyuridine is measured by 125I-counting and also is expressed as DPM. Depending on the approach used, the incorporation will be expressed as DPM/treatment group (pooled approach) or the DPM/animal (individual approach). | |
| 1.3.3.4 | Observations | 1.3.3.4.1 | Clinical observations | Animals should be carefully observed once daily for any clinical signs, either of local irritation at the application site or of systemic toxicity. All observations are systematically recorded with individual records being maintained for each animal. | 1.3.3.4.2 | Body Weights | As stated in section 1.3.3.1, individual animal body weights should be measured at the start of the test and at the scheduled kill of the animals. | |
| 1.3.4 Calculation of results | |
| Results are expressed as the Stimulation Index (SI). When using the pooled approach, the SI is obtained by dividing the pooled radioactive incorporation for each treatment group by the incorporation of the pooled vehicle control group; this yields a mean SI. When using the individual approach, the SI is derived by dividing the mean DPM/animal within each test substance group and the positive control group by the mean DPM/animal for the solvent/vehicle control group. The average SI for vehicle treated controls is then 1. | |
| Use of the individual approach to calculate the SI will enable the performance of a statistical analysis of the data. In choosing an appropriate method of statistical analysis the investigator should maintain an awareness of possible inequalities of variances and other related problems that may necessitate a data transformation or a non-parametric statistical analysis. An adequate approach for interpreting the data is to evaluate all individual data of treated and vehicle controls, and derive from these the best fitting dose response curve, taking confidence limits into account (8)(12)(13). However, the investigator should be alert to possible “outlier” responses for individual animals within a group that may necessitate the use of an alternative measure of response (e.g., median rather than mean) or elimination of the outlier. | |
| The decision process with regard to a positive response includes a stimulation index ≥ 3 together with consideration of dose-response and, where appropriate, statistical significance (3)(6)(8)(12)(14). | |
| If it is necessary to clarify the results obtained, consideration should be given to various properties of the test substance, including whether it has a structural relationship to known skin sensitisers, whether it causes excessive skin irritation and the nature of the dose response seen. These and other considerations are discussed in detail elsewhere (7). | |
| 2 DATA | |
| Data should be summarised in tabular form showing the mean and individual DPM values and stimulation indexes for each dose (including vehicle control) group. | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| TEST REPORT | |
| The test report should contain the following information: | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | identification data (e.g., CAS number, if available; source; purity; known impurities; lotnumber); | |
| — | physical nature and physicochemical properties (e.g., volatility, stability, solubility); | |
| — | if mixture, composition and relative percentages of components. | |
| Vehicle: | |
| — | identification data [purity; concentration (where appropriate); volume used] | |
| — | justification for choice of vehicle. | |
| Test animals: | |
| — | strain of mice used; | |
| — | microbiological status of the animals, when known; | |
| — | number, age and sex of animals; | |
| — | source of animals, housing conditions, diet, etc. | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | details of test substance preparation and application; | |
| — | justification for dose selection, including results from range finding study, if conducted; vehicle and test substance concentrations used and the total amount of substance applied | |
| — | details of food and water quality (including diet type/source, water source). | |
| Reliability check: | |
| — | a summary of the results of the latest reliability check including information on substance, concentration and vehicle used. | |
| — | concurrent and/or historical positive and negative control data for testing laboratory | |
| Results: | |
| — | individual weights of animals at the start of dosing and at scheduled kill. | |
| — | a table of mean (pooled approach) and individual (individual approach) DPM values as well as the range of values for both approaches and the stimulation indices for each dose (including vehicle control) group. | |
| — | statistical analysis where appropriate | |
| — | time course of onset and signs of toxicity, including dermal irritation at site of administration, if any, for each animal. | |
| Discussion of results: | |
| — | A brief commentary on the results, the dose-response analysis, and statistical analyses, where appropriate, with a conclusion as to whether the test substance should be considered a skin sensitiser. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| 1 | Kimber, I. and Basketter, D.A. (1992). The murine local lymph node assay; collaborative studies and new directions: A commentary. Food and Chemical Toxicology 30, 165-169. | |
| 2 | Kimber, I, Derman, R.J., Scholes E.W, and Basketter, D.A. (1994). The local lymph node assay: developments and applications. Toxicology, 93, 13-31. | |
| 3 | Kimber, I., Hilton, J., Dearman, R.J., Gerberick, G.F., Ryan, C.A., Basketter, D.A., Lea, L., House, R.V., Ladies, G.S., Loveless, S.E., Hastings, K.L. (1998). Assessment of the skin sensitisation potential of topical medicaments using the local lymph node assay: An interlaboratory exercise. Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, 53, 563-79. | |
| 4 | Testing Method B.6. | |
| 5 | Chamberlain, M. and Basketter, D.A. (1996). The local lymph node assay: status of validation. Food and Chemical Toxicology, 34, 999-1002. | |
| 6 | Basketter, D.A., Gerberick, G.F., Kimber, I. and Loveless, S.E (1996). The local lymph node assay- A viable alternative to currently accepted skin sensitisation tests. Food and Chemical Toxicology, 34, 985-997. | |
| 7. | Basketter, D.A., Gerberick, G.F. and Kimber, I. (1998). Strategies for identifying false positive responses in predictive sensitisation tests. Food and Chemical Toxicology. 36, 327-33. | |
| 8 | Van Och, F.M.M, Slob, W., De Jong, W.H., Vandebriel, R.J., Van Loveren, H. (2000). A quantitative method for assessing the sensitising potency of low molecular weight chemicals using a local lymph node assay: employement of a regression method that includes determination of uncertainty margins. Toxicology, 146, 49-59. | |
| 9 | Dearman, R.J., Hilton, J., Evans, P., Harvey, P., Basketter, D.A. and Kimber, I. (1998). Temporal stability of local lymph node assay responses to hexyl cinnamic aldehyde. Journal of Applied Toxicology, 18, 281-4. | |
| 10 | National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences (1999). The Murine Local Lymph Node Assay: A Test Method for Assessing the Allergic Contact Dermatitis Potential of Chemicals/Compounds: The Results of an Independent Peer Review Evaluation Coordinated by the Interagency Coordinating Committee on the Validation of Alternative Methods (ICCVAM) and the National Toxicology Program Center for the Evaluation of Alternative Toxicological Methods (NICETAM). NIH Publication No: 99-4494, Research Triangle Park, N.C. (http://iccvam.niehs.nih.gov). | |
| 11 | Testing method B.4. | |
| 12 | Basketter, D.A., Selbie, E., Scholes, E.W. Lees, D. Kimber, I. and Botham, P.A. (1993) Results with OECD recommended positive control sensitisers in the maximisation, Buehler and local lymph node assays. Food and Chemical Toxicology, 31, 63-67. | |
| 13 | Basketter D.A., Lea L.J., Dickens A., Briggs D., Pate I., Dearman R.J., Kimber I. (1999). A comparison of statistical approaches to the derivation of EC3 values from local lymph node assay dose responses. J. Appl. Toxicology, 19, 261-266. | |
| 14 | Basketter DA, Blaikie L, Derman RJ, Kimber I, Ryan CA, Gerberick GF, Harvey P, Evans P, White IR and Rycroft RTG (2000). Use of local lymph node assay for the estimation of relative contact allergenic potency. Contact Dermatitis 42 ,344-48. | |
| B.43. NEUROTOXICITY STUDY IN RODENTS | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This method is equivalent of OECD TG 424 (1997). | |
| This Test Method has been designed to obtain the information necessary to confirm or to further characterise the potential neurotoxicity of chemicals in adult animals. It can either be combined with existing Test Methods for repeated dose toxicity studies or to be carried out as a separate study. It is recommended that the OECD Guidance Document on Neurotoxicity Testing Strategies and Methods (1) be consulted to assist in the design of studies based on this Test Method. This is particularly important when modifications of the observations and test procedures as recommended for routine use of this Method are considered. The Guidance Document has been prepared to facilitate the selection of other test procedures for use in specific circumstances. The assessment of developmental neurotoxicity is not the subject of this Method. | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| In the assessment and evaluation of the toxic characteristics of chemicals, it is important to consider the potential for neurotoxic effects. Already the Test Method for repeated dose systemic toxicity includes observations that screen for potential neurotoxicity. This Test Method can be used to design a study to obtain further information on, or to confirm, the neurotoxic effects observed in the repeated dose systemic toxicity studies. However, consideration of the potential neurotoxicity of certain classes of chemicals may suggest that they may be more appropriately evaluated using this Method without prior indications of the potential neurotoxicity from repeated dose systemic toxicity studies. Such considerations include, for example: | |
| • | observation of neurological signs or neuropathological lesions in toxicity studies other than repeated dose systemic toxicity studies, or | |
| • | structural relationship or other information linking them to known neurotoxicants. | |
| In addition there may be other instances when use of this Test Method is appropriate; for further details see (1). | |
| This Method has been developed so that it can be tailored to meet particular needs to confirm the specific histopathological and behavioural neurotoxicity of a chemical as well as provide a characterization and quantification of the neurotoxic responses. | |
| In the past, neurotoxicity was equated with neuropathy involving neuropathological lesions or neurological dysfunctions, such as seizure, paralysis or tremor. Although neuropathy is an important manifestation of neurotoxicity, it is now clear that there are many other signs of nervous system toxicity (e.g. loss of motor coordination, sensory deficits, learning and memory dysfunctions) that may not be reflected in neuropathy or other types of studies. | |
| This neurotoxicity Test Method is designed to detect major neurobehavioural and neuropathological effects in adult rodents. While behavioural effects, even in the absence of morphological changes, can reflect an adverse impact on the organism, not all behavioural changes are specific to the nervous system. Therefore, any changes observed should be evaluated in conjunction with correlative histopathological, haematological or biochemical data as well as data on other types of systemic toxicity. The testing called for in this Method to provide a characterization and quantification of the neurotoxic responses includes specific histopathological and behavioural procedures that may be further supported by electrophysiological and/or biochemical investigations (1)(2)(3)(4). | |
| Neurotoxicants may act on a number of targets within the nervous system and by a variety of mechanisms. Since no single array of tests is capable of thoroughly assessing the neurotoxic potential of all substances, it may be necessary to utilize other in vivo or in vitro tests specific to the type of neurotoxicity observed or anticipated. | |
| This Test Method can also be used, in conjunction with the guidance set out in the OECD Guidance Document on Neurotoxicity Testing Strategies and Methods (1) to design studies intended to further characterize or increase the sensitivity of the dose-response quantification in order or better estimate a no-observed-adverse effect level or to substantiate known or suspected hazards of the chemical. For example, studies may be designed to identify and evaluate the neurotoxic mechanism(s) or supplement the data already available from the use of basic neurobehavioural and neuropathological observation procedures. Such studies need not replicate data that would be generated from the use of the standard procedures recommended in this Method, if such data are already available and are not considered necessary for the interpretation of the results of the study. | |
| This neurotoxicity study, when used alone or in combination, provides information that can: | |
| • | identify whether the nervous system is permanently or reversibly affected by the chemical tested; | |
| • | contribute to the characterization of the nervous system alterations associated with exposure to the chemical, and to understanding the underlying mechanism. | |
| • | determine dose-and time-response relationships in order to estimate a no-observed-adverse-effect level (which can be used to establish safety criteria for the chemical). | |
| This Test Method uses oral administration of the test substance. Other routes of administration (e.g. dermal or inhalation) may be more appropriate, and may require modification of the procedures recommended. Considerations of the choice of the route of administration depend on the human exposure profile and available toxicological or kinetic information. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Adverse effect: is any treatment-related alteration from baseline that diminishes an organism's ability to survive, reproduce or adapt to the environment. | |
| Dose: is the amount of test substance administered. Dose is expressed as weight (g, mg) or as weight of test substance per unit weight of the test animal (e.g. mg/Kg), or as constant dietary concentrations (ppm). | |
| Dosage: is a general term comprising of dose, its frequency and the duration of dosing. | |
| Neurotoxicity: is an adverse change in the structure or function of the nervous system that results from exposure to a chemical, biological or physical agent. | |
| Neurotoxicant: is any chemical, biological or physical agent having the potential to cause neurotoxicity. | |
| NOAEL: is the abbreviation for no-observed-adverse effect level and is the highest dose level where no adverse treatment-related findings are observed. | |
| 1.3 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| The test chemical is administered by the oral route across a range of doses to several groups of laboratory rodents. Repeated doses are normally required, and the dosing regimen may be 28 days, subchronic (90 days) or chronic (1 year or longer). The procedures set out in this Test Method may also be used for an acute neurotoxicity study. The animals are tested to allow the detection or the characterization of behavioural and/or neurological abnormalities. A range of behaviours that could be affected by neurotoxicants is assessed during each observation period. At the end of the test, a subset of animals of each sex from each group are perfused in situ and sections of the brain, spinal cord, and peripheral nerves are prepared and examined. | |
| When the study is conducted as a stand-alone study to screen for neurotoxicity or to characterize neurotoxic effects, the animals in each group not used for perfusion and subsequent histopathology (see Table 1) can be used for specific neurobehavioural, neuropathological, neurochemical or electrophysiological procedures that may supplement the data obtained from the standard examinations required by this Method (1). These supplemental procedures can be particularly useful when empirical observations or anticipated effects indicate a specific type or target of a chemical's neurotoxicity. Alternatively, the remaining animals can be used for evaluations such as those called for in Test Methods for repeated dose toxicity studies in rodents. | |
| When the procedures of this Test Method are combined with those of other Test Methods, a sufficient number of animals is needed to satisfy the requirements for the observations of both studies. | |
| 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.4.1 Selection of animal species | |
| The preferred rodent species is the rat, although other rodent species, with justification, may be used. Commonly used laboratory strains of young adult healthy animals should be employed. The females should be nulliparous and non-pregnant. Dosing should normally begin as soon as possible after weaning, preferably not later than when animals are six weeks, and, in any case, before the animals are nine weeks age. However, when this study is combined with other studies this age requirement may need adjustment. At the commencement of the study the weight variation of animals used should not exceed ± 20 % of the mean weight of each sex. Where a repeated dose study of short duration is conducted as a preliminary to a long term study, animals from the same strain and source should be used in both studies. | |
| 1.4.2 Housing and feeding conditions | |
| The temperature in the experimental animal room should be 22 oC (± 3 oC). Although the relative humidity should be at least 30 % and preferably not exceed 70 % other than during room cleaning, the aim should be 50-60 %. Lighting should be artificial, the sequence being 12 hours light, 12 hours dark. Loud intermittent noise should be kept to a minimum. For feeding, conventional laboratory diets may be used with an unlimited supply of drinking water. The choice of diet may be influenced by the need to ensure a suitable admixture of a test substance when administered by this method. Animals may be housed individually, or be caged in small groups of the same sex. | |
| 1.4.3 Preparation of animals | |
| Healthy young animals are randomly assigned to the treatment and control groups. Cages should be arranged in such a way that possible effects due to cage placement are minimized. The animals are identified uniquely and kept in their cages for at least (5) five days prior the start of the study to allow for acclimatization to the laboratory conditions. | |
| 1.4.4 Route of administration and preparation of doses | |
| This Test Method specifically addresses the oral administration of the test substance. Oral administration may be by gavage, in the diet, in drinking water or by capsules. Other routes of administration (e.g. dermal or inhalation) can be used but may require modification of the procedures recommended. Considerations of the choice of the route of administration depend on the human exposure profile and available toxicological or kinetic information. The rationale for choosing the route of administration as well as resulting modifications to the procedures of this Test Method should be indicated. | |
| Where necessary, the test substance may be dissolved or suspended in a suitable vehicle. It is recommended that the use of an aqueous solution/suspension be considered first, followed by consideration of a solution/suspension in oil (e.g., corn oil) and then by possible solution/suspension in other vehicle. The toxic characteristics of the vehicle must be known. In addition, consideration should be given to the following characteristics of the vehicle: effects of the vehicle on absorption, distribution, metabolism, or retention of the test substance which may alter its toxic characteristics; and effects on the food or water consumption or the nutritional status of the animals. | |
| 1.5 PROCEDURES | |
| 1.5.1 Number and sex animals | |
| When the study is conducted as a separate study, at least 20 animals (10 females and 10 males) should be used in each dose and control group for the evaluation of detailed clinical and functional observations. At least five males and five females, selected from these 10 males and 10 females, should be perfused in situ and used for detailed neurohistopathology at the end of the study. In cases where only a limited number of animals in a given dose group are observed for signs of neurotoxic effects, consideration should be given to the inclusion of these animals in those selected for perfusion. When the study is conducted in combination with a repeated dose toxicity study, adequate numbers of animals should be used to meet the objectives of both studies. The minimum numbers of animals per group for various combinations of studies are given in Table 1. If interim kills or recovery groups for observation of reversibility, persistence or delayed occurrence of toxic effects post treatment are planned or when supplemental observations are considered, then the number of animals should be increased to ensure that the number of animals required for observation and histopathology are available. | |
| 1.5.2 Treatment and control group | |
| At least three dose groups and a control group should generally be used, but if from the assessment of other data, no effects would be expected at a repeated dose of 1000 mg/kg body weight/day, a limit test may be performed. If there are no suitable data available, a range finding study may be performed to aid in the determination of the doses to be used. Except for treatment with the test substance, animals in the control group should be handled in an identical manner to the test group subjects. If a vehicle is used in administering the test substance, the control group should receive the vehicle at the highest volume used. | |
| 1.5.3 Reliability check | |
| The laboratory performing the study should present data demonstrating its capability to carry out the study and the sensitivity of the procedures used. Such data should provide evidence of the ability to detect and quantify, as appropriate, changes in the different end points recommended for observation, such as autonomic signs, sensory reactivity, limb grip strength and motor activity. Information on chemicals that cause different types of neurotoxic responses and could be used as positive control substances can be found in references 2 to 9. Historical data may be used if the essential aspects of the experimental procedures remain the same. Periodic updating of historical data is recommended. New data that demonstrate the continuing sensitivity of the procedures should be developed when some essential element of the conduct of the test or procedures has been changed by the performing laboratory. | |
| 1.5.4 Dose selection | |
| Dose levels should be selected by taking into account any previously observed toxicity and kinetic data available for the test compound or related materials. The highest dose level should be chosen with the aim of inducing neurotoxic effects or clear systemic toxic effects. Thereafter, a descending sequence of dose levels should be selected with a view to demonstrating any dose-related response and no-observed-adverse effect (NOAEL) at the lowest dose level. In principle, dose levels should be set so that primary toxic effects on the nervous system can be distinguished from effects related to systemic toxicity. Two to three intervals are frequently optimum and addition of a fourth test group is often preferable to using very large intervals (e.g., more than a factor of 10) between dosages. Where there is a reasonable estimation of human exposure this should also be taken into account. | |
| 1.5.5 Limit test | |
| If a study at one dose level of at least 1000 mg/kg body weight/day, using the procedures described, produces no observable neurotoxic effects and if toxicity would not be expected based upon data from structurally related compounds, then a full study using three dose levels may not be considered necessary. Expected human exposure may indicate the need for a higher oral dose level to be used in the limit test. For other types of administration, such as inhalation or dermal application, the physical chemical properties of the test substance often may dictate the maximum attainable level of exposure. For the conduct of an oral acute study, the dose for a limit test should be at least 2000 mg/kg. | |
| 1.5.6 Administration of doses | |
| The animals are dosed with the test substance daily, seven days each week, for a period at least 28 days; use of a five-day dosing regime or a shorter exposure period needs to be justified. When the test substance is administered by gavage, this should be done in a single dose using a stomach tube or a suitable intubation cannula. The maximum volume of a liquid that can be administered at one time depends on the size of the test animals. The volume should not exceed 1 ml/100 g body weight. However in the case of aqueous solutions, the use of up to 2 ml/100 g body weight can be considered. Except for irritating or corrosive substances, which will normally reveal exacerbated effects with higher concentrations, variability in test volume should be minimized by adjusting the concentration to ensure a constant volume at all dose levels. | |
| For substances administered via the diet or drinking water, it is important to ensure that the quantities of the test substance involved do not interfere with normal nutrition or water balance. When the test substance is administered in the diet either a constant dietary concentration (ppm) or a constant dose level in terms of the animals' body weight may be used; the alternative used must be specified. For a substance administered by gavage, the dose should be given at similar times each day, and adjusted as necessary to maintain a constant dose level in terms of animal body weight. Where a repeat dose study is used as a preliminary to a long term study, a similar diet should be used in both studies. For acute studies, if a single dose is not possible, the dose may be given in smaller fractions over a period not exceeding 24 hours. | |
| 1.6 OBSERVATION | |
| 1.6.1 Frequency of observations and tests | |
| In repeated dose studies, the observation period should cover the dosage period. In acute studies, 14-day post-treatment period should be observed. For animals in satellite groups which are kept without exposure during a post-treatment period, observations should cover this period as well. | |
| Observations should be made with sufficient frequency to maximize the probability of detection of any behavioural and/or neurological abnormalities. Observations should be made preferably at the same times each day with consideration given to the peak period of anticipated effects after dosing. The frequency of clinical observations and functional tests is summarized in Table 2. If kinetic or other data generated from previous studies indicates the need to use different time points for observations, tests or post-observation periods, an alternative schedule should be adopted in order to achieve maximum information. The rationale for changes to the schedule should be provided. | |
| 1.6.1.1 | Observations of general health condition and mortality/morbidity | All animals should be carefully observed at least once daily with respect to their health condition as well as at least twice daily for morbidity and mortality. | |
| 1.6.1.2 | Detailed clinical observations | Detailed clinical observations should be made on all animals selected for this purpose (see Table 1) once before the first exposure (to allow for within-subject comparisons) and at different intervals thereafter, dependant on the duration of the study (see Table 2). Detailed clinical observations on satellite recovery groups should be made at the end of the recovery period. Detailed clinical observations should be made outside the home cage in a standard arena. They should be carefully recorded using scoring systems that include criteria or scoring scales for each measurement in the observations. The criteria or scales used should be explicitly defined by the testing laboratory. Effort should be made to ensure that variations in the test conditions are minimal (not systematically related to treatment) and that observations are conducted by trained observers unaware of the actual treatment. | it is recommended that the observations be carried out in a structured fashion in which well-defined criteria (including the definition of the normal "range") are systematically applied to each animal at each observation time. The "normal range" should be adequately documented. All observed signs should be recorded. Whenever feasible, the magnitude of the observed signs should also be recorded. Clinical observations should include, but not be limited to, changes in skin, fur, eyes, mucous membranes, occurrence of secretions and excretions and autonomic activity (e.g., lacrimation, piloerection, pupil size, unusual respiratory pattern and/or mouth breathing, any unusual signs of urination or defecation, and discoloured urine). | Any unusual responses with respect to body position, activity level (e.g., decreased or increased exploration of the standard arena) and co-ordination of movement should also be noted. Changes in gait (e.g., waddling, ataxia), posture (e.g., hunched-back) and reactivity to handling, placing or other environmental stimuli, as well as the presence of clonic or tonic movements, convulsions or tremors, stereotypes (e.g., excessive grooming, unusual head movements, repetitive circling) or bizarre behaviour (e.g., biting or excessive licking, self mutilation, walking backwards, vocalization) or aggression should be recorded. | |
| 1.6.1.3 | Functional tests | Similar to the detailed clinical observations, functional tests should also be conducted once prior to exposure and frequently thereafter in all animals selected for this purpose (see Table 1). The frequency of functional testing is also dependent on the study duration (see Table 2). In addition to the observation periods as set out in Table 2, functional observations on satellite recovery groups should also be made as close as possible to the terminal kill. Functional tests should include sensory reactivity to stimuli of different modalities [e.g., auditory, visual and proprioceptive stimuli (5)(6)(7)], assessment of limb grip strength (8) and assessment of motor activity (9). Motor activity should be measured with an automated device capable of detecting both decreases and increases in activity. If another defined system is used it should be quantitative and its sensitivity and reliability should be demonstrated. Each device should be tested to ensure reliability across time and consistency between devices. Further details of the procedures that can be followed are given in the respective references. If there are no data (e.g. structure-activity, epidemiological data, other toxicology studies) to indicate the potential neurotoxic effects, the inclusion of more specialized tests of sensory and motor function or learning and memory to examine these possible effects in greater details should be considered. More information on more specialized tests and their use is provided in (1). | Exceptionally, animals that reveal signs of toxicity to an extent that would significantly interfere with the functional test may be omitted from that test. Justification for the elimination of animals from a functional test should be provided. | |
| 1.6.2 Body weight and food/water consumption | |
| For studies up to 90 days duration, all animals should be weighed at least once a week and measurements should be made of food consumption (water consumption, when the test substance is administered by that medium) at least weekly. For long term studies, all animals should be weighed at least once at week for the first 13 weeks and at least once every 4 weeks thereafter. Measurements should be made of food consumption (water consumption, when the test substance is administered by that medium) at least weekly for the first 13 weeks and then at approximately three-month intervals unless the health status or body weight changes dictate otherwise. | |
| 1.6.3 Ophthalmology | |
| For studies longer than 28 days duration, ophthalmologic examination, using an ophthalmoscope or an equivalent suitable instrument, should be made prior to the administration of the test substance and at the termination of the study, preferably on all animals, but at least on animals in the high dose and control groups. If changes in the eyes are detected or, if clinical signs indicate the need, all animals should be examined. For long term studies, an ophthalmologic examination should also be carried out at 13 weeks. Ophthalmologic examinations need not to be conducted if this data is already available from others studies of similar duration and at similar dose levels. | |
| 1.6.4 Haematology and clinical biochemistry | |
| When the neurotoxicity study is carried out in combination with a repeated dose systemic toxicity study, haematological examinations and clinical biochemistry determinations should be carried out as set out in the respective Method of the systemic toxicity study. Collection of samples should be carried out in such a way that any potential effects on neurobehaviour are minimized. | |
| 1.6.5 Histopathology | |
| The neuropathological examination should be designed to complement and extend the observations made during the in vivo phase of the study. Tissues from at least 5 animals/sex/group (see Table 1 and next paragraph) should be fixed in situ, using generally recognized perfusion and fixation techniques (see reference 3, chapter 5 and reference 4, chapter 50). Any observable gross changes should be recorded. When the study is conducted as a stand-alone study screen for neurotoxicity or to characterize neurotoxic effects, the remainder of the animals may be used either for specific neurobehavioural (10)(11), neuropathological (10)(11)(12)(13), neurochemical (10)(11)(14)(15) or electrophysiological (10)(11)(16)(17) procedures that may supplement the procedures and examinations described here, or to increase the number of subjects examined for histophatology. These supplementary procedures are of particular use when empirical observations or anticipated effects indicate a specific type or target of neurotoxicity (2)(3). Alternatively, the remainder of the animals can also be used for routine pathological evaluations as described in Method for repeated dose studies. | |
| A general staining procedure, such as haematoxylin and eosin (H&E), should be performed on all tissue specimens embedded in paraffin and microscopic examination should be carried out. If signs of peripheral neuropathy are observed or suspected, plastic-embedded samples of peripheral nerve tissue should be examined. Clinical signs may also suggest additional sites for examination or the use of special staining procedures. Guidance on additional sites to be examined can be found in (3)(4). Appropriate special stains to demonstrate specific types of pathological change may also be helpful (18). | |
| Representative sections of the central and peripheral nervous system should be examined histologically (see reference 3, chapter 5 and reference 4, chapter 50). The areas examined should normally include: the forebrain, the centre of the cerebrum, including a section through the hippocampus, the midbrain, the cerebellum, the pons, the medulla oblongata, the eye with optic nerve and retina, the spinal cord at the cervical and lumbar swellings, the dorsal root ganglia, the dorsal and ventral root fibres, the proximal sciatic nerve, the proximal tibial nerve (at the knee) and the tibial nerve calf muscle branches. The spinal cord and peripheral nerve sections should include both cross or transverse and longitudinal sections. Attention should be given to the vasculature of the nervous system. A sample of skeletal muscle, particularly calf muscle, should also be examined. Special attention should be paid to sites with cellular and fibre structure and pattern in the CNS and PNS known to be particularly affected by neurotoxicants. | |
| Guidance on neurophatological alterations that typically result from toxicant exposure can be found in the references (3)(4). A stepwise examination of tissue samples is recommended in which sections from the high dose group are first compared with those of the control group. If no neurophatological alterations are observed in the samples from these groups, subsequent analysis is not required. If neuropathological alterations are observed in the high dose group, sample from each of the potentially affected tissues from the intermediate and low dose groups should then be coded and examined sequentially. | |
| If any evidence of neuropathological alterations is found in the qualitative examination, then a second examination should be performed on all regions of the nervous system showing these alterations. Sections from all dose groups from each of the potentially affected regions should be coded and examined at random without knowledge of the code. The frequency and severity of each lesion should be recorded. After all regions from all dose groups have been rated, the code can be broken and statistical analysis performed to evaluate dose-response relationships. Examples of different degrees of severity of each lesion should be described. | |
| The neuropathological findings should be evaluated in the context of behavioural observations and measurements, as well as other data from preceding and. concurrent systemic toxicity studies of the test substance. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| 2.1 TREATMENT OF RESULTS | |
| Individual data should be provided. Additionally, all data should be summarized in tabular form showing for each test or control group the number of animals at the start of the test, the number of animals found dead during the test or killed for humane reasons and the time of any death or humane kill, the number showing signs of toxicity, a description of the signs of toxicity observed, including time of onset, duration, type and severity of any toxic effects, the number of animals showing lesions, including the type and severity of the lesion(s). | |
| 2.2 EVALUATION AND INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS | |
| The findings of the study should be evaluated in terms of the incidence, severity and correlation of neurobehavioural and neuropathological effects (neurochemical or electrophysiological effects as well if supplementary examinations are included) and any other adverse effects observed. When possible, numerical results should be evaluated by an appropriate and generally acceptable statistical method. The statistical methods should be selected during the design of the study. | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| TEST REPORT | |
| The test report must include the following information: | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | physical nature (including isomerism, purity and physicochemical properties); | |
| — | identification data. | |
| Vehicle (if appropriate): | |
| — | justification for choice of vehicle. | |
| Test animals: | |
| — | species/strain used; | |
| — | number, age and sex of animals; | |
| — | source, housing conditions, acclimatization, diet, etc; | |
| — | individual weights of animals at the start of the test. | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | details of test substance formulation/diet preparation, achieved concentration, stability and homogeneity of the preparation: | |
| — | specification of the doses administered, including details of the vehicle, volume and physical form of the material administered; | |
| — | details of the administration of the test substance; | |
| — | rationale for dose levels selected; | |
| — | rationale for the route and duration of the exposure; | |
| — | conversion from diet/drinking water test substance concentration (ppm) to the actual dose (mg/kg body weight/day), if applicable; | |
| — | details of the food and water quality. | |
| Observation and Test Procedures: | |
| — | details of the assignment of animals in each group to the perfusion subgroups; | |
| — | details of scoring systems, including criteria and scoring scales for each measurement in the detailed clinical observations; | |
| — | details on the functional tests for sensory reactivity to stimuli of different modalities (e.g., auditory, visual and proprioceptive); for assessment of limb grip strength; for motor activity assessment (including | |
| — | details of automated devices for detecting activity); and other procedures used; | |
| — | details of ophthalmologic examinations and, if appropriate, haematological examinations and clinical biochemistry tests with relevant base-line values; | |
| — | details for specific neurobehavioural, neuropathological, neurochemical or electrophysiological procedures. | |
| Results: | |
| — | body weight/body weight changes including body weight at kill; | |
| — | food consumption and water consumption, as appropriate; | |
| — | toxic response data by sex and dose level, including signs of toxicity or mortality; | |
| — | nature, severity and duration (time of onset and subsequent course) of the detailed clinical observations (whether reversible or not); | |
| — | a detailed description of all functional test results; | |
| — | necropsy findings; | |
| — | a detailed description of all neurobehavioural, neuropathological, and neurochemical or electrophysiological findings, if available; | |
| — | absorption and metabolism data, if available; | |
| — | statistical treatment of results, where appropriate. | |
| Discussion of results; | |
| — | dose response information; | |
| — | relationship of any other toxic effects to a conclusion about the neurotoxic potential of the test chemical; | |
| — | no-observed-adverse effect level. | |
| Conclusions: | |
| — | a specific statement of the overall neurotoxicity of the test chemical is encouraged. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| 1. | OECD Giudance Document on Neurotoxicity Testing Strategies and Test Methods. OECD, Paris, In Preparation. | |
| 2. | Test Guideline for a Developmental Neurotoxicity Study, OECD Guidelines for the Testing of Chemicals. In preparation. | |
| 3. | World Health Organization (WHO) (1986). Environmental Health Criteria document 60: Principles and Methods for the Assessment of Neurotoxicity associated with Exposure to Chemicals. | |
| 4. | Spencer, P.S. and Schaumburg, H.H. (1980). Experimental and Clinical Neurotoxicology. Eds. Spencer, P.S. and Schaumburg, H.H. eds. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore/London. | |
| 5. | Tupper, D.E. and Wallace, R.B. (1980). Utility of the Neurological Examination in Rats. Acta Neurobiol. Exp., 40, 999-1003. | |
| 6. | Gad, S.C. (1982). A Neuromuscular Screen for Use in Industrial Toxicology. J. Toxicol. Environ. Health, 9, 691-704. | |
| 7. | Moser, V.C., McDaniel, K.M. and Phillips, P.M. (1991). Rat Strain and Stock Comparisons Using a Functional Observational Battery: Baseline Values and Effects of amitraz. Toxic. Appl. Pharmacol., 108, 267-283. | |
| 8. | Meyer, O.A., Tilson, H.A., Byrd, W.C. and Riley, M.T. (1979). A Method for the Routine Assessment of Fore- and Hind- limb Grip Strength of Rats and Mice. Neurobehav. Toxicol., 1, 233-236. | |
| 9. | Crofton, K.M., Haward, J.L., Moser, V.C., Gill, M.W., Reirer, L.W., Tilson, H.A. and MacPhail, R.C. (1991) Interlaboratory Comparison of Motor Activity Experiments: Implication for Neurotoxicological Assessments. Neurotoxicol. Teratol., 13, 599-609. | |
| 10. | Tilson, H.A., and Mitchell, C.L. eds. (1992). Neurotoxicology Target Organ Toxicology Series. Raven Press, New York. | |
| 11. | Chang, L.W., ed. (1995). Principles of Neurotoxicology. Marcel Dekker, New York. | |
| 12. | Broxup, B. (1991). Neuopathology as a screen for Neurotoxicity Assessment. J. Amer. Coll. Toxicol., 10, 689-695. | |
| 13. | Moser, V.C., Anthony, D.C., Sette, W.F. and MacPhail, R.C. (1992). Comparison of Subchronic Neurotoxicity of 2-Hydroxyethyl Acrylate and Acrylamide in Rats. Fund. Appl.Toxicol, 18, 343-352. | |
| 14. | O'Callaghan, J.P. (1988). Neurotypic and Gliotypic Proteins as Biochemical Markers of Neurotoxicity Eurotoxicol. Teratol., 10, 445-452. | |
| 15. | O'Callaghan J.P. and Miller, D.B. (1988). Acute Exposure of the Neonatal Rat to Triethyltin Results in Persistent Changes in Neurotypic and Gliotypic Proteins. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 244, 368-378. | |
| 16. | Fox. D.A., Lowndes, H.E. and Birkamper, G.G. (1982). Electrophysiological Techniques in Neurotoxicology. In: Nervous System Toxicology. Mitchell, C.L. ed. Raven Press, New York, pp 299-335. | |
| 17. | Johnson, B.L. (1980). Electrophysiological Methods in neurotoxicity Testing. In: Experimental and Clinical Neurotoxicology. Spencer, P.S. and Schaumburg, H.H. eds., Williams and Wilkins Co.,. Baltimore/London, pp. 726-742. | |
| 18. | Bancroft, J.D. and Steven A. (1990). Theory and Pratice of Histological Techniques. Chapter 17, Neuropathological Techniques. Lowe, James and Cox, Gordon eds. Churchill Livingstone. | |
| Table 1: | |
| Minimum numbers of animals needed per group when the neurotoxicity study is conducted separately or in combination whit studies | |
| | NEUROTOXICITY STUDY CONDUCTED AS: | |
| Separate study | Combined study with the 28-day study | Combined study with the 90-day study | Combined study with the chronic toxicity study | |
| Total number of animals per group | 10males and 10 females | 10males and 10 females | 15males and 15 females | 25males and 25 females | |
| Number of animals selected for functional testing including detailed clinical observations | 10males and 10 females | 10males and 10 females | 10males and 10 females | 10males and 10 females | |
| Number of animals selected per perfusion in situ and neurohistopathology | 5males and 5 females | 5males and 5 females | 5males and 5 females | 5males and 5 females | |
| Number of animals selected for repeated dose/subchronic/chronic toxicity observations, haematology, clinical biochemistry, histopathology, etc. as indicate in the respective Guidelines | | 5males and 5 females | 10males (1) and 10 females (1) | 20males (1)and 20 females (1) | |
| Supplemental observations, as appropriate | 5males and 5 females | | | | |
| Table 2: | |
| Frequency of clinical observation and functional tests | |
| Type of observations | Study duration | |
| Acute | 28-day | 90-day | Chronic | |
| In all animals | General health condition | daily | daily | daily | daily | |
| Mortality/morbidity | Twice daily | Twice daily | Twice daily | Twice daily | |
| In animals selected for functional observations | Detailed clinical observations | — | prior to first exposure | — | within 8 hours of dosing at estimate time of peak effect | — | at day 7 and 14 after dosing | — | prior to first exposure | — | once weekly thereafter | — | prior to first exposure | — | once during the first or second week of exposure | — | monthly thereafter | — | prior to first exposure | — | once at the end of the first month of exposure | — | every three months thereafter | |
| Functional tests | — | prior to first exposure | — | within 8 hours of dosing at estimate time of peak effect | — | at day 7 and 14 after dosing | — | prior to first exposure | — | during the fourth week of treatment as close as possible to the end of the exposure period | — | prior to first exposure | — | once during the first or second week of exposure | — | monthly thereafter | — | prior to first exposure | — | once at the end of the first month of exposure | — | every three months thereafter | |
| (1) Includes five animals selected for functional testing and detailed clinical observations as part of the neurotoxicity study | |
| ANNEX 2I | |
| C.21. SOIL MICROORGANISMS: NITROGEN TRANSFORMATION TEST | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This test method is a replicate of OECD TG 216 (2000). | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| This Testing method describes a laboratory method designed to investigate the long-term effects of chemicals, after a single exposure, on nitrogen transformation activity of soil microorganisms. The test is principally based on the recommendations of the European and Mediterranean Plant Protection Organization (1). However, other guideline, including those of the German Biologische Bundesanstalt (2), the US Environmental Protection Agency (3) SET AC (4) and the International Organization for Standardization (5), were also taken into account. An OECD Workshop on soil/sediment Selection held at Belgirate, Italy, in 1995 (6) agreed on the number and type of soils for use in this test. Recommendations for collection, handling and storage of soil sample are based on an ISO Guidance Document (7) and recommendations from the Belgirate Workshop. In the assessment and evaluation of toxic characteristics of test substances, determination of effects on soil microbial activity may be required, e.g. when data on the potential side effects of crop protection products on soil microflora are required or when exposure of soil microorganisms to chemicals other than crop protection products is expected. The nitrogen transformation test is carried out to determine the effects of such chemicals on soil microflora. If agrochemicals (e.g. crop protection products, fertilisers, forestry chemicals) are tested, both nitrogen transformation and carbon transformation tests are conducted. If non agrochemicals are tested, the nitrogen transformation test is sufficient. However, if EC50 values of the nitrogen transformation test for such chemicals fall within the range found for commercially available nitrification inhibitors (e.g. nitrapyrin), a carbon transformation test can be conducted to gain further information. | |
| Soils consist of living and non-living components which exist in complex and heterogeneous mixtures. Microorganisms play an important role in break-down and transformation of organic matter in fertile soils with many species contributing to different aspects of soil fertility. Any long-term interference with these biochemical processes could potentially interfere with nutrient cycling and this could alter soil fertility. Transformation of carbon and nitrogen occurs in all fertile soils. Although the microbial communities responsible for these processes differ from soil to soil, the pathways of transformation are essentially the same. | |
| This Testing method described is designed to detect long-term adverse effects of a substance on the process of nitrogen transformation in aerobic surface soils. The test method also allows estimation of the effects of substances on carbon transformation by the soil microflora. Nitrate formation takes place subsequent to the degradation of carbon-nitrogen bonds. Therefore, if equal rates of nitrate production are found in treated and control soils, it is highly probable that the major carbon degradation pathways are intact and functional. The substrate chosen for the test (powdered lucerne meal) has a favourable carbon to nitrogen ratio (usually between 12/1 and 16/1). Because of this, carbon starvation is reduced during the test and if microbial communities are damaged by a chemical, they might recover within 100 days. | |
| The tests from which this Testing Method was developed were primarily designed for substances for which the amount reaching the soil can be anticipated. This is the case, for example, for crop protection products for which the application rate in the field is known. For agrochemicals, testing of two doses relevant to the anticipated or predicted application rate is sufficient. Agrochemicals can be tested as active ingredients (a.i.) or as formulated products. However, the test is not limited to agrochemicals. By changing both the amounts of test substance applied to the soil, and the way in which the data are evaluated, the test can also be used for chemicals for which the amount expected to reach the soil is not known. Thus, with chemicals other than agrochemicals, the effects of a series of concentrations on nitrogen transformation are determined. The data from these tests are used to prepare a dose-response curve and calculate ECx values, where x is defined % effect. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Nitrogen transformation: is the ultimate degradation by microorganisms of nitrogen-containing organic matter, via the process of ammonification and nitrification, to the respective inorganic end-product nitrate. | |
| ECx (Effective Concentration): is the concentration of the test substance in soil that results in a x percent inhibition of nitrogen transformation to nitrate. | |
| EC50 (Median Effective Concentration): is the concentration of the test substance in soil that results in a 50 percent (50%) inhibition of nitrogen transformation to nitrate. | |
| 1.3 REFERENCE SUBSTANCES | |
| None. | |
| 1.4 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| Sieved soil is amended with powdered plant meal and either treated with the test substance or left untreated (control). If agrochemicals are tested, a minimum of two test concentrations are recommended and these should be chosen in relation to the highest concentration anticipated in the field. After 0, 7, 14 days and 28 days of incubation, samples of treated and control soils are extracted with an appropriate solvent, and the quantities of nitrate in the extracts are determined. The rate of nitrate formation in treated samples is compared with the rate in the controls, and the percent deviation of the treated from the control is calculated. All tests run for at least 28 days. If, on the 28th day, differences between treated and untreated soils are equal to or greater than 25%, measurements are continued to a maximum of 100 days. If non agrochemicals are tested, a series of concentrations of the test substance are added to samples of the soil, and the quantities of nitrate formed in treated and control samples are measured after 28 days of incubation. Results from tests with multiple concentrations are analysed using a regression model, and the ECX values are calculated (i.e. EC50, EC25 and/or EC10). See definitions. | |
| 1.5 VALIDITY OF THE TEST | |
| Evaluations of test results with agrochemicals are based on relatively small differences (i.e. average value ±25%) between nitrate concentrations in control and treated soil samples, so large variations in the controls can lead to false results. Therefore, the variation between replicate control samples should be less than ±15%. | |
| 1.6 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.6.1 Apparatus | |
| Test containers made of chemically inert material are used. They should be of a suitable capacity in compliance with the procedure used for incubation of soils, i.e. incubation in bulk or as a series of individual soil samples (see section 1.7.1.2). Care should be taken both to minimise water loss and to allow gas exchange during the test (e.g. the test containers may be covered with perforated polyethylene foil). When volatile substances are tested, sealable and gas-tight containers should be used. These should be of a size such that approximately one quarter of their volume is filled with the soil sample. | |
| Standard laboratory equipment including the following is used: | |
| — | agitation device: mechanical shaker or equivalent equipment; | |
| — | centrifuge (3000 g) or filtration device (using nitrate-free filter paper); | |
| — | instrument of adequate sensitivity and reproducibility for nitrate analysis. | |
| 1.6.2 Selection and number of soils | |
| One single soil is used. The recommended soil characteristics are as follows: | |
| — | sand content: not less than 50% and not greater than 75%; | |
| — | pH: 5.5 -7.5; | |
| — | organic carbon content: 0.5 - 1.5%; | |
| — | the microbial biomass should be measured (8)(9) and its carbon content should be at least 1 % of the total soil organic carbon. | |
| In most cases, a soil with these characteristics represents a worst case situation, since adsorption of the test chemical is minimum and its availability to the microflora is maximum. Consequently, tests with other soils are generally unnecessary. However, in certain circumstances, e.g. where the anticipated major use of the test substance is in particular soils such as acidic forest soils, or for electrostatically charged chemicals, it may be necessary to use an additional soil. | |
| 1.6.3 Collection and storage of soil samples | |
| 1.6.3.1 | Collection | Detailed information on the history of the field site from where the test soil is collected should be available. Details include exact location, vegetation cover, dates of treatments with crop protection products, treatments with organic and inorganic fertilisers, additions of biological materials or accidental contaminations. The site chosen for soil collection should be one which allows long-term use. Permanent pastures, fields with annual cereal crops (except maize) or densely sown green manures are suitable. The selected sampling site should not have been treated with crop protection products for a minimum of one year before sampling. Also, no organic fertiliser should have been applied for at least six months. The use of mineral fertiliser is only acceptable when in accordance with the requirements of the crop and soil samples should not be taken until at least three months after fertiliser application. The use of soil treated with fertilisers with known biocidal effects (e.g. calcium cyanamide) should be avoided. | Sampling should be avoided during or immediately following long periods (greater than 30 days) of drought or water logging. For ploughed soils, samples should be taken from a depth of 0 down to 20 cm. For grassland (pasture) or other soils where ploughing does not occur over longer periods (at least one growing season), the maximum depth of sampling may be slightly more than 20 cm (e.g. to 25 cm). | Soil samples should be transported using containers and under temperature conditions which guarantee that the initial soil properties are not significantly altered. | |
| 1.6.3.2 | Storage | The use of soils freshly collected from the field is preferred. If storage in the laboratory cannot be avoided, soils may be stored in the dark at 4±2oC for a maximum of three months. During the storage of soils, aerobic conditions must be ensured. If soils are collected from areas where they are frozen for at least three months per year, storage for six months at minus 18oC to minus 22oC can be considered. The microbial biomass of stored soils is measured prior to each experiment and the carbon in the biomass should be at least 1 % of the total soil organic carbon content (see section 1.6.2). | |
| 1.6.4 Handling and preparation of soil for the test | |
| 1.6.4.1 | Pre-incubation | If the soil was stored (see section 1.6.3.2), pre-incubation is recommended for a period between 2 and 28 days. The temperature and moisture content of the soil during pre-incubation should be similar to that used in the test (see sections 1.6.4.2 and 1.7.1.3). | |
| 1.6.4.2 | Physical-chemical characteristics | The soil is manually cleared of large objects (e.g. stones, parts of plants, etc.) and then moist sieved without excess drying to a particle size less than or equal to 2 mm. The moisture content of the soil sample should be adjusted with distilled or deionised water to a value between 40% and 60% of the maximum water holding capacity. | |
| 1.6.4.3 | Amendment with organic substrate | The soil should be amended with a suitable organic substrate, e.g. powdered lucerne-grass-green meal (main component: Medicago sativa) with a C/N ratio between 12/1 and 16/1. The recommended lucerne-soil ratio is 5 g of lucerne per kilogram of soil (dry weight). | |
| 1.6.5 Preparation of the test substance for the application to soil | |
| The test substance is normally applied using a carrier. The carrier can be water (for water soluble substances) or an inert solid such as fine quartz sand (particle size: 0.1 -0.5mm). Liquid carriers other than water (e.g. organic solvents such as acetone, chloroform) should be avoided since they can damage the microflora. If sand is used as a carrier, it can be coated with the test substance dissolved or suspended in an appropriate solvent. In such cases, the solvent should be removed by evaporation before mixing with the soil. For an optimum distribution of the test substance in soil, a ratio of 10 g of sand per kilogram of soil (dry weight) is recommended. Control samples are treated with an equivalent amount of water and/or quartz sand only. | |
| When testing volatile chemicals, losses during treatment should be avoided as far as possible and an attempt should be made to ensure homogeneous distribution in the soil (e.g. the test substance should be injected into the soil at several places). | |
| 1.6.6 Test concentrations | |
| If agrochemicals are tested, at least two concentrations should be used. The lower concentration should reflect at least the maximum amount expected to reach the soil under practical conditions whereas the higher concentration should be a multiple of the lower concentration. The concentrations of test substance added to soil are calculated assuming uniform incorporation to a depth of 5 cm and a soil bulk density of 1.5. For agrochemicals that are applied directly to soil, or for chemicals for which the quantity reaching the soil can be predicted, the test concentrations recommended are the maximum Predicted Environmental Concentration (PEC) and five times that concentration. Substances that are expected to be applied to soils several times in one season should be tested at concentrations derived from multiplying the PEC by the maximum anticipated number of applications. The upper concentration tested, however, should not exceed ten times the maximum single application rate. If non-agrochemicals are tested, a geometric series of at least five concentrations is used. The concentrations tested should cover the range needed to determine the ECx values. | |
| 1.7 PERFORMANCE OF THE TEST | |
| 1.7.1 Conditions of exposure | |
| 1.7.1.1 | Treatment and control | If agrochemicals are tested, the soil is divided into three portions of equal weight. Two portions are mixed with the carrier containing the product, and the other is mixed with the carrier without the product (control). A minimum of three replicates for both treated and untreated soils is recommended. If non-agrochemicals are tested, the soil is divided into six portions of equal weight. Five of the samples are mixed with the carrier containing the test substance, and the sixth sample is mixed with the carrier without the chemical. Three replicates for both treatments and control are recommended. Care should be taken to ensure homogeneous distribution of the test substance in the treated soil samples. During mixing, compacting or balling of the soil should be avoided. | |
| 1.7.1.2 | Incubation of soil samples | Incubation of soil samples can be performed in two ways: as bulk samples of each treated and untreated soil or as a series of individual and equally sized subsamples of each treated and untreated soil. However, when volatile substances are tested, the test should only be performed with a series of individual subsamples. When soils are incubated in bulk, large quantities of each treated and untreated soils are prepared and subsamples to be analysed are taken as needed during the test. The amount initially prepared for each treatment and control depends on the size of the subsamples, the number of replicates used for analysis and the anticipated maximum number of sampling times. Soils incubated in bulk should be thoroughly mixed before subsampling. When soils are incubated as a series of individual soil samples, each treated and untreated bulk soil is divided into the required number of subsamples, and these are utilised as needed. In the experiments where more than two sampling times can be anticipated, enough subsamples should be prepared to account for all replicates and all sampling times. At least three replicate samples of the test soil should be incubated under aerobic conditions (see section 1.7.1.1). During all tests, appropriate containers with sufficient headspace should be used to avoid development of anaerobic conditions. When volatile substances are tested, the test should only be performed with a series of individual subsamples. | |
| 1.7.1.3 | Test conditions and duration | The test is carried out in the dark at room temperature of 20±2oC. The moisture content of soil samples should be maintained during the test between 40% and 60% of the maximum water holding capacity of the soil (see section 1.6.4.2) with a range of ±5%. Distilled, deionized water can be added as needed. | The minimum duration of tests is 28 days. If agrochemicals are tested, the rates of nitrate formation in treated and control samples are compared. If these differ by more than 25% on day 28, the test is continued until a difference equal to or less than 25% is obtained, or for a maximum of 100 days, whichever is shorter. For non-agrochemicals, the test is terminated after 28 days. On day 28, the quantities of nitrate in treated and control soil samples are determined and the ECx values are calculated. | |
| 1.7.2 Sampling and analysis of soils | |
| 1.7.2.1 | Soil sampling schedule | If agrochemicals are tested, soil samples are analysed for nitrate on days 0, 7, 14 and 28. If a prolonged test is required, further measurements should be made at 14 days intervals after day 28. | If non-agrochemicals are tested, at least five test concentrations are used and soil samples are analysed for nitrate at the beginning (day 0) and at the end of the exposure period (28 days). An intermediate measurement, e.g. at day 7, may be added if deemed necessary. The data obtained on day 28 are used to determine ECx value for the chemical. If desired, data from day 0 control samples can be used to report the initial quantity of nitrate in the soil. | |
| 1.7.2.2 | Analysis of soil samples | The amount of nitrate formed in each treated and control replicate is determined at each sampling time. Nitrate is extracted from soil by shaking samples with a suitable extraction solvent, e.g. a 0.1 M potassium chloride solution. A ratio of 5 ml of KC1 solution per gram dry weight equivalent of soil is recommended. To optimise extraction, containers holding soil and extraction solution should not be more than half full. The mixtures are shaken at 150 rpm for 60 minutes. The mixtures are cenrrifuged or filtered and the liquid phases are analysed for nitrate. Particle-free liquid extracts can be stored prior to analysis at minus 20±5 oC for up to six months. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| 2.1 TREATMENT OF RESULTS | |
| If tests are conducted with agrochemicals, the quantity of nitrate formed in each replicate soil sample should be recorded, and the mean values of all replicates should be provided in tabular form. Nitrogen transformation rates should be evaluated by appropriate and generally acceptable statistical methods (e.g. F-test, 5% significance level). The quantities of nitrate formed are expressed in mg nitrate/kg dry weight soil/day. The nitrate formation rate in each treatment is compared with that in the control, and the percent deviation from the control is calculated. | |
| If tests are conducted with non-agrochemicals, the quantity of nitrate formed in each replicate is determined, and a dose-response curve is prepared for estimation of the ECx values. The quantities of nitrate (i.e. mg nitrate/kg dry weight soil) found in the treated samples after 28 days are compared to that found in the control. From these data, the % inhibition values for each test concentration are calculated. These percentages are plotted against concentration, and statistical procedures are then used to calculate the ECx values. Confidence limits (p = 0.95) for the calculated ECx are also determined using standard procedures (10)(l 1)(12). | |
| Test substances that contain high quantities of nitrogen may contribute to the quantities of nitrate formed during the test. If these substances are tested at a high concentration (e.g. chemicals which are expected to be used in repeated applications) appropriate controls must be included in the test (i.e. soil plus test substance but without plant meal). Data from these controls must be accounted for in the ECx calculations. | |
| 2.2 INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS | |
| When results from tests with agrochemicals are evaluated, and the difference in the rates of nitrate formation between the lower treatment (i.e. the maximum predicted concentration) and control is equal to or less than 25% at any sampling time after day 28, the product can be evaluated as having no long-term influence on nitrogen transformation in soils. When results from tests with chemicals other than agrochemicals are evaluated, the EC50, EC25 and/or EC10 values are used. | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| The test report must include the following information: | |
| Complete identification of the soil used including: | |
| — | geographical reference of the site (latitude, longitude); | |
| — | information on the history of the site (i.e. vegetation cover, treatments with crop protection products, treatments with fertilisers, accidental contamination, etc.); | |
| — | use pattern (e.g. agricultural soil, forest, etc.); | |
| — | depth of sampling (cm); | |
| — | sand/silt/clay content (% dry weight); | |
| — | pH (in water); | |
| — | organic carbon content (% dry weight); | |
| — | nitrogen content (% dry weight); | |
| — | initial nitrate concentration (mg nitrate/kg dry weight); | |
| — | cation exchange capacity (mmol/kg); | |
| — | micfobial biomass in terms of percentage of the total organic carbon; | |
| — | reference of the methods used for the determination of each parameter; | |
| — | all information relating to the collection and storage of soil samples; | |
| — | details of pre-incubation of soil if any. | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | physical nature and, where relevant, physical-chemical properties; | |
| — | chemical identification data, where relevant, including structural formula, purity (i.e. for crop protection products the percentage of active ingredient), nitrogen content. | |
| Substrate: | |
| — | source of substrate; | |
| — | composition (i.e. lucerne meal, lucerne-grass-green meal); | |
| — | carbon, nitrogen content (% dry weight); | |
| — | sieve size (mm). | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | details of the amendment of soil with organic substrate; | |
| — | number of concentrations of test chemical used and, where appropriate, justification of the selected concentrations; | |
| — | details of the application of test substance to soil; | |
| — | incubation temperature; | |
| — | soil moisture content at the beginning and during the test; | |
| — | method of soil incubation used (i.e. as bulk or as a series of individual subsamples); | |
| — | number of replicates; | |
| — | sampling times; | |
| — | method used for extraction of nitrate from soil; | |
| Results: | |
| — | analytical procedure and equipment used to analyse nitrate; | |
| — | tabulated data including individual and mean values for nitrate measurements; | |
| — | variation between the replicates in treated and control samples; | |
| — | explanations of corrections made in the calculations, if relevant; | |
| — | the percent variation in nitrate formation rates at each sampling time or, if appropriate, the EC50 value with 95 per cent confidence limit, other ECx (i.e. EC25 or EC10) with confidence intervals, and a graph of the dose-response curve; | |
| — | statistical treatment of results; | |
| — | all information and observations helpful for the interpretation of the results. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | EPPO (1994). Decision-Making Scheme for the Environmental Risk Assessment of Plant Protection Chemicals. Chapter 7: Soil Microflora. EPPO Bulletin 24: 1-16, 1994. | |
| (2) | BBA (1990). Effects on the Activity of the Soil Microflora. BBA Guidelines for the Official Testing of Plant Protection Products, VI, 1-1 (2nd eds., 1990). | |
| (3) | EPA (1987). Soil Microbial Community Toxicity Test. EPA 40 CFR Part 797.3700. Toxic Substances Control Act Test Guidelines; Proposed rule. September 28, 1987. | |
| (4) | SETAC-Europe (1995). Procedures for assessing the environmental fate and ecotoxicity of pesticides, Ed. M.R. Lynch, Pub. SETAC-Europe, Brussels. | |
| (5) | ISO/DIS 14238 (1995). Soil Quality - Determination of Nitrogen Mineralisation and Nitrification in Soils and the Influence of Chemicals on these Processes. Technical Committee ISO/TC 190/SC 4: Soil Quality -Biological Methods. | |
| (6) | OECD (1995). Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Selection of Soils/Sediments, Belgirate, Italy, 18-20 January 1995. | |
| (7) | ISO 10381-6 (1993). Soil quality - Sampling. Guidance on the collection, handling and storage of soil for the assessment of aerobic microbial processes in the laboratory. | |
| (8) | ISO 14240-1 (1997). Soil quality - Determination of soil microbial biomass - Part 1: Substrate-induced respiration method. | |
| (9) | ISO 14240-2 (1997). Soil quality - Determination of soil microbial biomass - Part 2: Fumigation-extraction method. | |
| (10) | Litchfield, J.T. and Wilcoxon F. (1949). A simplified method of evaluating dose-effect experiments. Jour. Pharmacol, and Exper. Ther., 96, 99-113. | |
| (11) | Finney, D.J. (1971). Probit Analysis. 3rd ed., Cambridge, London and New-York. | |
| (12) | Finney, D.J. (1978). Statistical Methods in biological Assay. Griffin, Weycombe, UK. | |
| C.22. SOIL MICROORGANISMS: CARBON TRANSFORMATION TEST | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This method is a replicate of OECD TG 217 (2000). | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| This Testing method describes a laboratory method designed to investigate long term potential effects of a single exposure of crop protection products and possibly other chemicals on carbon transformation activity of soil microorganisms. The test is principally based on the recommendations of the European and Mediterranean Plant Protection Organization (1). However, other guideline, including those of the German Biologische Bundesanstalt (2), the US Environmental Protection Agency (3) and SET AC (4), were also taken into account. An OECD Workshop on Soil/Sediment Selection held at Belgirate, Italy, in 1995 (5) agreed on the number and type of soils for use in this test. Recommendations for collection, handling and storage of soil sample are based on an ISO Guidance Document (6) and recommendations from the Belgirate Workshop. | |
| In the assessment and evaluation of toxic characteristics of test substances, determination of effects on soil microbial activity may be required, e.g. when data on the potential side effects of crop protection products on soil microflora are required or when exposure of soil microorganisms to chemicals other than crop protection products is expected. The carbon transformation test is carried out to determine the effects of such chemicals on soil microflora. If agrochemicals (e.g. crop protection products, fertilisers, forestry chemicals) are tested, both carbon transformation and nitrogen transformation tests are conducted. If non-agrochemicals are tested, the nitrogen transformation test is sufficient. However, if EC50 values of the nitrogen transformation test for such chemicals fall within the range found for commercially available nitrification inhibitors (e.g. nitrapyrin), a carbon transformation test can be conducted to gain further information. | |
| Soils consist of living and non-living components which exist in complex and heterogeneous mixtures. Microorganisms play an important role in breakdown and transformation of organic matter in fertile soils with many species contributing to different aspects of soil fertility. Any long-term interference with these biochemical processes could potentially interfere with nutrient cycling and this could alter the soil fertility. Transformation of carbon and nitrogen occurs in all fertile soils. Although the microbial communities responsible for these processes differ from soil to soil, the pathways of transformation are essentially the same. | |
| This Testing Method is designed to detect long-term adverse effects of a substance on the process of carbon transformation in aerobic surface soils. The test is sensitive to changes in size and activity of microbial communities responsible for carbon transformation since it subjects these communities to both chemical stress and carbon starvation. A sandy soil low in organic matter is used. This soil is treated with the test substance and incubated under conditions that allow rapid microbial metabolism. Under these conditions, sources of readily available carbon in the soil are rapidly depleted. This causes carbon starvation which both kills microbial cells and induces dormancy and/or sporulation. If the test runs for more than 28 days, the sum of these reactions can be measured in (untreated soil) controls as a progressive loss of metabolically active microbial biomass (7). If the biomass in carbon-stressed soil, under the conditions of the test, is affected by the presence of a chemical, it may not return to the same level as the control. Hence, disturbances caused by the test substance at any time during the test will often last until the end of the test. | |
| The tests from which this Testing Method was developed were primarily designed for substances for which the amount reaching the soil can be anticipated. This is the case, for example, for crop protection products for which the application rate in the field is known. For agrochemicals, testing of two doses relevant to the anticipated or predicted application rate is sufficient. Agrochemicals can be tested as active ingredients (a.i.) or as formulated products. However, the test is not limited to chemicals with predictable environmental concentrations. By changing both the amounts of test substance applied to the soil, and the way in which the data are evaluated, the test can also be used for chemicals for which the amount expected to reach the soil is not known. Thus, with non-agrochemicals, the effects of a series of concentrations on carbon transformation are determined. The data from these tests are used to prepare a dose-response curve and calculate ECx values, where x is defined % effect. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Carbon transformation: is the degradation by microorganisms of organic matter to form inorganic end-product carbon dioxide. | |
| ECx (Effective Concentration): is the concentration of the test substance in soil that results in a x percent inhibition of carbon transformation in carbon dioxide. | |
| EC50 (Median Effective Concentration): is the concentration of test substance in soil that results in a 50 per cent inhibition of carbon transformation in carbon dioxide. | |
| 1.3 REFERENCE SUBSTANCES | |
| None. | |
| 1.4 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| Sieved soil is either treated with the test substance or left untreated (control). If agrochemicals are tested, a minimum of two test concentrations are recommended and these should be chosen in relation to the highest concentration anticipated in the field. After 0, 7, 14 and 28 days incubation, samples of treated and control soils are mixed with glucose, and glucose-induced respiration rates are measured for 12 consecutive hours. Respiration rates are expressed as carbon dioxide released (mg carbon dioxide/kg dry soil/h) or oxygen consumed (mg oxygen/kg soil/h). The mean respiration rate in the treated soil samples is compared with that in control and the percent deviation of the treated from the control is calculated. All tests run for at least 28 days. If, on the 28th day, differences between treated and untreated soils are equal to or greater than 25% measurements are continued in 14 day intervals for a maximum of 100 days. If chemicals other than agrochemicals are tested, a series of concentrations of the test substance are added to samples of the soil, and glucose induced respiration rates (i.e. the mean of the quantities of carbon dioxide formed or oxygen consumed) are measured after 28 days. Results from tests with a series of concentrations are analysed using a regression model, and the ECx values are calculated (i.e. EC50, EC25 and/or EC10). See definitions. | |
| 1.5 VALIDITY OF THE TEST | |
| Evaluations of test results with agrochemicals are based on relatively small differences (i.e. average value ±25%) between the carbon dioxide released or the oxygen consumed in (or by) control and treated soil samples, so large variations in the controls can lead to false results. Therefore, the variation between replicate control samples should be less than ±15%. | |
| 1.6 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.6.1 Apparatus | |
| Test containers made of chemically inert material are used. They should be of a suitable capacity in compliance with the procedure used for incubation of soils, i.e. incubation in bulk or as a series of individual soil samples (see section 1.7.1.2). Care should be taken both to minimise water loss and to allow gas exchange during the test (e.g. the test containers may be covered with perforated polyethylene foil). When volatile substances are tested, sealable and gas-tight containers should be used. These should be of a size such that approximately one quarter of their volume is filled with the soil sample. | |
| For determination of glucose-induced respiration, incubation systems and instruments for measurement of carbon dioxide production or oxygen consumption are required. Examples of such systems and instruments are found in the literature (8) (9) (10) (11). | |
| 1.6.2 Selection and number of soils | |
| One single soil is used. The recommended soil characteristics are as follows: | |
| — | sand content: not less than 50% and not greater than 75%; | |
| — | pH: 5.5 - 7.5; | |
| — | organic carbon content: 0.5 -1.5%; | |
| — | the microbial biomass should be measured (12)(13) and its carbon content should be at least 1% of the total soil organic carbon. | |
| In most cases, a soil with these characteristics represents a worst case situation, since adsorption of the test chemical is minimised and its availability to the microflora is maximum. Consequently, tests with other soils are generally unnecessary. However, in certain circumstances, e.g. where the anticipated major use of the test substance is in particular soils such as acidic forest soils, or for electrostatically charged chemicals, it may be necessary to substitute an additional soil. | |
| 1.6.3 Collection and storage of soil samples | |
| 1.6.3.1 | Collection | Detailed information on the history of the field site from where the test soil is collected should be available. Details include exact location, vegetation cover, dates of treatments with crop protection products, treatments with organic and inorganic fertilisers, additions of biological materials or accidental contaminations. The site chosen for soil collection should be one which allows long-term use. Permanent pastures, fields with annual cereal crops (except maize) or densely sown green manures are suitable. The selected sampling site should not have been treated with crop protection products for a minimum of one year before sampling. Also, no organic fertiliser should have been applied for at least six months. The use of mineral fertiliser is only acceptable when in accordance with the requirements of the crop and soil samples should not be taken until at least three months after fertiliser application. The use of soil treated with fertilisers with known biocidal effects (e.g. calcium cyanamide) should be avoided. | Sampling should be avoided during or immediately following long periods (greater than 30 days) of drought or water logging. For ploughed soils, samples should be taken from a depth of 0 down to 20 cm. For grassland (pasture) or other soils where ploughing does not occur over longer periods (at least one growing season), the maximum depth of sampling may be slightly more than 20 cm (e.g. to 25 cm). Soil samples should be transported using containers and under temperature conditions which guarantee that the initial soil properties are not significantly altered. | |
| 1.6.3.2 | Storage | The use of soils freshly collected from the field is preferred. If storage in the laboratory cannot be avoided, soils may be stored in the dark at 4 ± 2 oC for a maximum of three months. During the storage of soils, aerobic conditions must be ensured. If soils are collected from areas where they are frozen for at least three months per year, storage for six months at minus 18 oC can be considered. The microbial biomass of stored soils is measured prior to each experiment and the carbon in the biomass should be at least 1 % of the total soil organic carbon content (see section 1.6.2). | |
| 1.6.4 Handling and preparation of soil for the test | |
| 1.6.4.1 | Pre-incubation | If the soil was stored (see sections 1.6.4.2 and 1.7.1.3), pre-incubation is recommended for a period between 2 and 28 days. The temperature and moisture content of the soil during pre-incubation should be similar to that used in the test (see sections 1.6.4.2 and 1.7.1.3). | |
| 1.6.4.2 | Physical-chemical characteristics | The soil is manually cleared of large objects (e.g. stones, parts of plants, etc.) and then moist sieved without excess drying to a particle size less than or equal to 2 mm. The moisture content of the soil sample should be adjusted with distilled or deionised water to a value between 40% and 60% of the maximum water holding capacity. | |
| 1.6.5 Preparation of the test substance for the application to soil | |
| The test substance is normally applied using a carrier. The carrier can be water (for water soluble substances) or an inert solid such as fine quartz sand (particle size: 0.1-0.5 mm). Liquid carriers other than water (e.g. organic solvents such as acetone, chloroform) should be avoided since they can damage the microflora. If sand is used as a carrier, it can be coated with the test substance dissolved or suspended in an appropriate solvent. In such cases, the solvent should be removed by evaporation before mixing with the soil. For an optimum distribution of the test substance in soil, a ratio of 10 g of sand per kilogram of soil (dry weight) is recommended. Control samples are treated with the equivalent amount of water and/or quartz sand only. | |
| When testing volatile chemicals, losses during treatment should be avoided and an attempt should be made to ensure homogeneous distribution in the soil (e.g. the test substance should be injected into the soil at several places). | |
| 1.6.6 Test concentrations | |
| If crop protection products or other chemicals with predictable environmental concentrations are tested, at least two concentrations should be used. The lower concentration should reflect at least the maximum amount expected to reach the soil under practical conditions whereas the higher concentration should be a multiple of the lower concentration. The concentrations of test substance added to soil are calculated assuming uniform incorporation to a depth of 5 cm and a soil bulk density of 1.5. For agrochemicals that are applied directly to soil, or for chemicals for which the quantity reaching the soil can be predicted, the test concentrations recommended are the Predictable Environmental Concentration (PEC) and five times that concentration. Substances that are expected to be applied to soils several times in one season should be tested at concentrations derived from multiplying the PEC by the maximum anticipated number of applications. The upper concentration tested, however, should not exceed ten times the maximum single application rate. | |
| If non-agrochemicals are tested, a geometric series of at least five concentrations is used. The concentrations tested should cover the range needed to determine the ECx values. | |
| 1.7 PERFORMANCE OF THE TEST | |
| 1.7.1 Conditions of exposure | |
| 1.7.1.1 | Treatment and control | If agrochemicals are tested, the soil is divided into three portions of equal weight. Two portions are mixed with the carrier containing the product, and the other is mixed with the carrier without the product (control). A minimum of three replicates for both treated and untreated soils is recommended. If non-agrochemicals are tested, the soil is divided into six portions of equal weight. Five of the samples are mixed with the carrier containing the test substance, and the sixth sample is mixed with the carrier without the chemical. Three replicates for both treatments and control are recommended. Care should be taken to ensure homogeneous distribution of the test substance in the treated soil samples. During mixing, compacting or balling of the soil should be avoided. | |
| 1.7.1.2 | Incubation of soil samples | Incubation of soil samples can be performed in two ways: as bulk samples of each treated and untreated soil or as a series of individual and equally sized subsamples of each treated and untreated soil. However, when volatile substances are tested, the test should only be performed with a series of individual subsamples. When soils are incubated in bulk, large quantities of each treated and untreated soils are prepared and subsamples to be analysed are taken as needed during the test. The amount initially prepared for each treatment and control depends on the size of the subsamples, the number of replicates used for analysis and the anticipated maximum number of sampling times. Soils incubated in bulk should be thoroughly mixed before subsampling. When soils are incubated as a series of individual soil samples, each treated and untreated bulk soil is divided into the required number of subsamples, and these are utilised as needed. In the experiments where more than two sampling times can be anticipated, enough subsamples should be prepared to account for all replicates and all sampling times. At least three replicate samples of the test soil should be incubated under aerobic conditions (see section 1.7.1.1). During all tests, appropriate containers with sufficient headspace should be used to avoid development of anaerobic conditions. When volatile substances are tested, the test should only be performed with a series of individual subsamples. | |
| 1.7.1.3 | Test conditions and duration | The test is carried out in the dark at room temperature of 20±2oC. The moisture content of soil samples should be maintained during the test between 40% and 60% of the maximum water holding capacity of the soil (see section 1.6.4.2) with a range of ±5%. Distilled, deionised water can be added as needed. | The minimum duration of tests is 28 days. If agrochemicals are tested, the quantities of carbon dioxide released or oxygen consumed in treated and control samples are compared. If these differ by more than 25% on day 28, the test is continued until a difference equal to or less than 25% is obtained, or for a maximum of 100 days, whichever is shorter. If non-agrochemicals are tested, the test is terminated after 28 days. On day 28, the quantities of carbon dioxide released or oxygen consumed in treated and control soil samples are determined and the ECx values are calculated. | |
| 1.7.2 Sampling and analysis of soils | |
| 1.7.2.1 | Soil sampling schedule | If agrochemicals are tested, soil samples are analysed for glucose-induced respiration rates on days 0, 7, 14 and 28. If a prolonged test is required, further measurements should be made at 14 days intervals after day 28. | If non-agrochemicals are tested, at least five test concentrations are used and soil samples are analysed for glucose-induced respiration at the beginning (day 0) and at the end of the exposure period (28 days). An intermediate measurement, e.g. at day 7, may be added if deemed necessary. The data obtained on day 28 are used to determine ECx value for the chemical. If desired, data from day 0 control samples can be used to estimate the initial quantities of metabolically active microbial biomass in the soil (12). | |
| 1.7.2.2 | Measurement of glucose-induced respiration rates | The glucose-induced respiration rate in each treated and control replicate is determined at each sampling time. The soil samples are mixed with a sufficient amount of glucose to elicit an immediate maximum respiratory response. The amount of glucose needed to elicit a maximum respiratory response from a given soil can be determined in a preliminary test using a series of concentrations of glucose (14). However, for sandy soils with 0.5-1.5% organic carbon, 2000 mg to 4000 mg glucose per kg dry weight soil is usually sufficient. The glucose can be ground to a powder with clean quartz sand (10 g sand/kg dry weight soil) and homogeneously mixed with the soil. | The glucose amended soil samples are incubated in a suitable apparatus for measurement of respiration rates either continuously, every hour, or every two hours (see section 1.6.1) at 20 ± 2 oC. The carbon dioxide released or the oxygen consumed is measured for 12 consecutive hours and measurements should start as soon as possible, i.e. within 1 to 2 hours after glucose supplement. The total quantities of carbon dioxide released or oxygen consumed during the 12 hours are measured and mean respiration rates are determined. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| 2.1 TREATMENT OF RESULTS | |
| If agrochemicals are tested, the carbon dioxide released from, or oxygen consumed by each replicate soil sample should be recorded, and the mean values of all replicates should be provided in tabular form. Results should be evaluated by appropriate and generally acceptable statistical methods (e.g. F-test, 5% significance level). Glucose-induced respiration rates are expressed in mg carbon dioxide/kg dry weight soil/h or mg oxygen/dry weight soil/h. The mean carbon dioxide formation rate or mean oxygen consumption rate in each treatment is compared with that in control, and the percent deviation from the control is calculated. | |
| If tests are conducted with non-agrochemicals, the quantities of carbon dioxide released or oxygen consumed by each replicate is determined, and a dose-response curve is prepared for estimation of the ECx values. The glucose-induced respiration rates (i.e. mg carbon dioxide/kg dry weight soil/h or mg oxygen/dry weight soil/h) found in the treated samples after 28 days are compared to that found in control. From these data, the % inhibition values for each test concentration are calculated. These percentages are plotted against concentration, and statistical procedures are used to calculate the ECx values. Confidence limits (p = 0.95) for the calculated ECx are also determined using standard procedures (15)(16)(17). | |
| 2.2 INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS | |
| When results from tests with agrochemicals are evaluated, and the difference in respiration rates between the lower treatment (i.e. the maximum predicted concentration) and control is equal to or less than 25% at any sampling time after day 28, the product can be evaluated as having no long-term influence on carbon transformation in soils. When results from tests with chemicals other than agrochemicals are evaluated, the EC50, EC25 and/or EC10 values are used. | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| TEST REPORT | |
| The test report must include the following information: | |
| Complete identification of the soil used including: | |
| — | geographical reference of the site (latitude, longitude); | |
| — | information on the history of the site (i.e. vegetation cover, treatments with crop protection products, treatments with fertilisers, accidental contamination, etc.) | |
| — | use pattern (e.g. agricultural soil, forest, etc.); | |
| — | depth of sampling (cm); | |
| — | sand/silt/clay content (% dry weight); | |
| — | pH (in water); | |
| — | organic carbon content (% dry weight); | |
| — | nitrogen content (% dry weight); | |
| — | cation exchange capacity (mmol/kg); | |
| — | initial microbial biomass in terms of percentage of the total organic carbon; | |
| — | reference of the methods used for the determination of each parameter; | |
| — | all information relating to the collection and storage of soil samples; | |
| — | details of pre-incubation of soil if any. | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | physical nature and, where relevant, physical-chemical properties; | |
| — | chemical identification data, where relevant, including structural formula, purity (i.e. for crop protection products the percentage of active ingredient), nitrogen content. | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | details of the amendment of soil with organic substrate; | |
| — | number of concentrations of test chemical used and, where appropriate, justification of the selected concentrations; | |
| — | details of the application of test substance to soil; | |
| — | incubation temperature; | |
| — | soil moisture content at the beginning and during the test; | |
| — | method of soil incubation used (i.e. as bulk or as a series of individual subsamples); | |
| — | number of replicates; | |
| — | sampling times. | |
| Results: | |
| — | method and equipment used for measurement of respiration rates; | |
| — | tabulated data including individual and mean values for quantities of carbon dioxide or oxygen; | |
| — | variation between the replicates in treated and control samples; | |
| — | explanations of corrections made in the calculations, if relevant; | |
| — | the percent variation of glucose-induced respiration rates at each sampling time or, if appropriate, the EC50 with 95 per cent confidence limit, other ECx (i.e. EC25 or EC10) with confidence intervals, and a graph of the dose-response curve; | |
| — | statistical treatment of results, where appropriate; | |
| — | all information and observations helpful for the interpretation of the results. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | EPPO (1994). Decision-Making Scheme for the Environmental Risk Assessment of Plant Protection Chemicals. Chapter 7: Soil Microflora. EPPO Bulletin 24: 1-16, 1994. | |
| (2) | BBA (1990). Effects on the Activity of the Soil Microflora. BBA Guidelines for the Official Testing of Plant Protection Products, VI, 1-1 (2nd eds:, 1990). | |
| (3) | EPA (1987). Soil Microbial Community Toxicity Test. EPA 40 CFR Part 797.3700. Toxic Substances Control Act Test Guidelines; Proposed rule. September 28, 1987. | |
| (4) | SETAC-Europe (1995). Procedures for assessing the environmental fate and ecotoxicity of pesticides, Ed. M.R. Lynch, Pub. SETAC-Europe, Brussels. | |
| (5) | OECD (1995). Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Selection of Soils/Sediments, Belgirate, Italy, 18-20 January 1995. | |
| (6) | ISO 10381-6 (1993). Soil quality - Sampling. Guidance on the collection, handling and storage of soil for the assessment of aerobic microbial processes in the laboratory. | |
| (7) | Anderson, J.P.E. (1987). Handling and Storage of Soils for Pesticide Experiments, in "Pesticide Effects on Soil Microflora”. Eds. L. Somerville and M.P. Greaves, Chap. 3: 45-60. | |
| (8) | Anderson, J.P.E. (1982). Soil Respiration, in "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 2: Chemical and Microbiological Properties". Agronomy Monograph No 9. Eds. A.L. Page, R.H. Miller and D.R. Keeney. 41:831-871. | |
| (9) | ISO 11266-1. (1993). Soil Quality - Guidance on Laboratory Tests for Biodegradation in Soil: Part 1. Aerobic Conditions. | |
| (10) | ISO 14239 (1997E). Soil Quality - Laboratory incubation systems for measuring the mineralization of organic chemicals in soil under aerobic conditions. | |
| (11) | Heinemeye,r O., Insam, H., Kaiser, E.A, and Walenzik, G. (1989). Soil microbial biomass and respiration measurements; an automated technique based on infrared gas analyses. Plant and Soil, 116: 77-81. | |
| (12) | ISO 14240-1 (1997). Soil quality - Determination of soil microbial biomass - Part 1: Substrate-induced respiration method. | |
| (13) | ISO 14240-2 (1997). Soil quality - Determination of soil microbial biomass - Part 2: Fumigation-extraction method. | |
| (14) | Malkomes, H.-P. (1986). Einfluß von Glukosemenge auf die Reaktion der Kurzzeit-Atmung im Boden Gegenüber Pflanzenschutzmitteln, Dargestellt am Beispiel eines Herbizide. (Influence of the Amount of Glucose Added to the Soil on the Effect of Pesticides in Short-Term Respiration, using a Herbicide as an Example). Nachrichtenbl. Deut. Pflanzenschutzd., Braunschweig, 38: 113-120. | |
| (15) | Litchfield, J.T. and Wilcoxon, F. (1949). A simplified method of evaluating dose-effect experiments. Jour. Pharmacol, and Exper. Ther., 96, 99-113. | |
| (16) | Finney, D.J. (1971). Probit Analysis. 3rd ed., Cambridge, London and New-York. | |
| (17) | Finney D.J. (1978). Statistical Methods in biological Assay. Griffin, Weycombe, UK. | |
| C.23. AEROBIC AND ANAEROBIC TRANSFORMATION IN SOIL | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This Test Method is a replicate of the OECD TG 307 (2002) | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| This Test Method is based on existing guidelines (1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)(9). The method described in this Test Method is designed for evaluating aerobic and anaerobic transformation of chemicals in soil. The experiments are performed to determine (i) the rate of transformation of the test substance, and (ii) the nature and rates of formation and decline of transformation products to which plants and soil organisms may be exposed. Such studies are required for chemicals which are directly applied to soil or which are likely to reach the soil environment. The results of such laboratory studies can also be used to develop sampling and analysis protocols for related field studies. | |
| Aerobic and anaerobic studies with one soil type are generally sufficient for the evaluation of transformation pathways (8)(10)(l1). Rates of transformation should be determined in at least three additional soils (8)(10). | |
| An OECD Workshop on soil and sediment selection, held at Belgirate, Italy in 1995 (10) agreed, in particular, on the number and types of soils for use in this test. The types of soils tested should be representative of the environmental conditions where use or release will occur. For example, chemicals that may be released in subtropical to tropical climates should be tested with Ferrasols or Nitosols (FAO system). The Workshop also made recommendations relating to collection, handling and storage of soil samples, based on the ISO Guidance (15). The use of paddy (rice) soils is also considered in this method. | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Test substance: any substance, whether the parent compound or relevant transformation products. | |
| Transformation products: all substances resulting from biotic or abiotic transformation reactions of the test substance including CO2 and products that are in bound residues. | |
| Bound residues:”Bound residues” represent compounds in soil, plant or animal, which persist in the matrix in the form of the parent substance or its metabolite(s)/transformation products after extraction. The extraction method must not substantially change the compounds themselves or the structure of the matrix. The nature of the bond can be clarified in part by matrix-altering extraction methods and sophisticated analytical techniques. To date, for example, covalent ionic and sorptive bonds, as well as entrapments, have been identified in this way. In general, the formation of bound residues reduces the bioaccessibility and the bioavailability significantly (12) [modified from IUPAC 1984 (13)]. | |
| Aerobic transformation: reactions occurring in the presence of molecular oxygen (14). | |
| Anaerobic transformation: reactions occurring under exclusion of molecular oxygen (14). | |
| Soil: is a mixture of mineral and organic chemical constituents, the latter containing compounds of high carbon and nitrogen content and of high molecular weights, animated by small (mostly micro-) organisms. Soil may be handled in two states: | |
| (a) | undisturbed, as it has developed with time, in characteristic layers of a variety of soil types; | |
| (b) | disturbed, as it is usually found in arable fields or as occurs when samples are taken by digging and used in this test method (14). | |
| Mineralisation: is the complete degradation of an organic compound to CO2 and H2O under aerobic conditions, and CH4, CO2 and H2O under anaerobic conditions. In the context of this test method, when 14C-labelled compound is used, mineralisation means extensive degradation during which a labelled carbon atom is oxidised with release of the appropriate amount of 14CO2 (14). | |
| Half-life: t0.5, is the time taken for 50% transformation of a test substance when the transformation can be described by first-order kinetics; it is independent of the concentration. | |
| DT50 (Disappearance Time 50): is the time within which the concentration of the test substance is reduced by 50%; it is different from the half-life to.5 when transformation does not follow first order kinetics. | |
| DT75 (Disappearance Time 75): is the time within which the concentration of the test substance is reduced by 75%. | |
| DT90 (Disappearance Time 90): is the time within which the concentration of the test substance is reduced by 90%. | |
| 1.3 REFERENCE SUBSTANCES | |
| Reference substances should be used for the characterisation and/or identification of transformation products by spectroscopic and chromatographic methods. | |
| 1.4 APPLICABILITY OF THE TEST | |
| The method is applicable to all chemical substances (non-labelled or radiolabelled) for which an analytical method with sufficient accuracy and sensitivity is available. It is applicable to slightly volatile, non-volatile, water-soluble or water-insoluble compounds. The test should not be applied to chemicals which are highly volatile from soil (e.g. fumigants, organic solvents) and thus cannot be kept in soil under the experimental conditions of this test. | |
| 1.5 INFORMATION ON THE TEST SUBSTANCE | |
| Non-labelled or labelled test substance can be used to measure the rate of transformation. Labelled material is required for studying the pathway of transformation and for establishing a mass balance. 14C-labelling is recommended but the use of other isotopes, such as 13C, 15N, 3H, 32P, may also be useful. As far as possible, the label should be positioned in the most stable part(s) of the molecule (1). The purity of the test substance should be at least 95 %. | |
| Before carrying out a test on aerobic and anaerobic transformation in soil, the following information on the test substance should be available: | |
| (a) | solubility in water (Method A.6) | |
| (b) | solubility in organic solvents; | |
| (c) | vapour pressure (Method A.4) and Henry's law constant; | |
| (d) | n-octanol/water partition coefficient (Method A.8); | |
| (e) | chemical stability in dark (hydrolysis) (Method C.7); | |
| (f) | pKa if a molecule is liable to protonation or deprotonation [OECD Guideline 112 ] (16). | |
| Other useful information may include data on toxicity of the test substance to soil micro-organisms [Testing Methods C.21 and C.22] (16). | |
| Analytical methods (including extraction and clean-up methods) for quantification and identification of the test substance and its transformation products should be available. | |
| 1.6 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| Soil samples are treated with the test substance and incubated in the dark in biometer-type flasks or in flow-through systems under controlled laboratory conditions (at constant temperature and soil moisture). After appropriate time intervals, soil samples are extracted and analysed for the parent substance and for transformation products. Volatile products are also collected for analysis using appropriate absorption devices. Using 14C-labelled material, the various mineralisation rates of the test substance can be measured by trapping evolved 14CO2 and a mass balance, including the formation of soil bound residues, can be esstablished. | |
| 1.7 QUALITY CRITERIA | |
| 1.7.1 Recovery | |
| Extraction and analysis of, at least, duplicate soil samples immediately after the addition of the test substance gives a first indication of the repeatability of the analytical method and of the uniformity of the application procedure for the test substance. Recoveries for later stages of the experiments are given by the respective mass balances. Recoveries should range from 90% to 110% for labelled chemicals (8) and from 70% to 110% for non-labelled chemicals (3). | |
| 1.7.2 Repeatability and sensitivity of analytical method | |
| Repeatability of the analytical method (excluding the initial extraction efficiency) to quantify test substance and transformation products can be checked by duplicate analysis of the same extract of the soil, incubated long enough for formation of transformation products. | |
| The limit of detection (LOD) of the analytical method for the test substance and for the transformation products should be at least 0.01 mg-kg-1 soil (as test substance) or 1% of applied dose whichever is lower. The limit of quantification (LOQ) should also be specified. | |
| 1.7.3 Accuracy of transformation data | |
| Regression analysis of the concentrations of the test substance as a function of time gives the appropriate information on the reliability of the transformation curve and allows the calculation of the confidence limits for half-lives (in the case of pseudo first order kinetics) or DT50 values and, if appropriate, DT75 and DT90 values. | |
| 1.8 DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| 1.8.1 Equipment and chemical reagents | |
| Incubation systems consist of static closed systems or suitable flow-through systems (7)(17). Examples of suitable flow-through soil incubation apparatus and biometer-type flask are shown in Figures 1 and 2, respectively. Both types of incubation systems have advantages and limitations (7)(17). | |
| Standard laboratory equipment is required and especially the following: | |
| — | Analytical instruments such as GLC, HPLC, TLC-equipment, including the appropriate detection systems for analysing radiolabelled or non-labelled substances or inverse isotopes dilution method; | |
| — | Instruments for identification purposes (e.g. MS, GC-MS, HPLC-MS, NMR, etc.); | |
| — | Liquid scintillation counter; | |
| — | Oxidiser for combustion of radioactive material; | |
| — | Centrifuge; | |
| — | Extraction apparatus (for example, centrifuge tubes for cold extraction and Soxhlet apparatus for continuous extraction under reflux); | |
| — | Instrumentation for concentrating solutions and extracts (e.g. rotating evaporator); | |
| — | Water bath; | |
| — | Mechanical mixing device (e.g. kneading machine, rotating mixer). | |
| Chemical reagents used include, for example: | |
| — | NaOH, analytical grade, 2 mol dm--3, or other appropriate base (e.g. KOH, ethanolamine); | |
| — | H2SO4, analytical grade, 0.05 mol dm--3; | |
| — | Ethylene glycol, analytical grade; | |
| — | Solid absorption materials such as soda lime and polyurethane plugs; | |
| — | Organic solvents, analytical grade, such as acetone, methanol, etc.; | |
| — | Scintillation liquid. | |
| 1.8.2 Test substance application | |
| For addition to and distribution in soil, the test substance can be dissolved in water (deionised or distilled) or, when necessary, in minimum amounts of acetone or other organic solvents (6) in which the test substance is sufficiently soluble and stable. However, the amount of solvent selected should not have a significant influence on soil microbial activity (see sections 1.5 and 1.9.2-1.9.3 The use of solvents which inhibit microbial activity, such as chloroform, dichloromethane and other halogenated solvents, should be avoided. | |
| The test substance can also be added as a solid, e.g. mixed in quartz sand (6) or in a small sub-sample of the test soil which has been air-dried and sterilised. If the test substance is added using a solvent the solvent should be allowed to evaporate before the spiked sub-sample is added to the original non-sterile soil sample. | |
| For general chemicals, whose major route of entry into soil is through sewage sludge/farming application, the test substance should be first added to sludge which is then introduced into the soil sample (see sections 1.9.2 and 1.9.3) | |
| The use of formulated products is not routinely recommended. However, e.g. for poorly soluble test substances, the use of formulated material may be an appropriate alternative. | |
| 1.8.3 Soils | |
| 1.8.3.1 | Soil selection | To determine the transformation pathway, a representative soil can be used; a sandy loam or silty loam or loam or loamy sand [according to FAO and USDA classification (18)] with a pH of 5.5-8.0, an organic carbon content of 0.5-2.5% and a microbial biomass of at least 1% of total organic carbon is recommended (10). | For transformation rate studies at least three additional soils should be used representing a range of relevant soils. The soils should vary in their organic carbon content, pH, clay content and microbial biomass (10). | All soils should be characterised, at least, for texture (% sand, % silt, % clay) [according to FAO and USDA classification (18)], pH, cation exchange capacity, organic carbon, bulk density, water retention characteristic (2) and microbial biomass (for aerobic studies only). Additional information on soil properties may be useful in interpreting the results. For determination of the soil characteristics the methods recommended in references (19)(20)(21)(22)(23) can be used. Microbial biomass should be determined by using the substrate-induced respiration (SIR) method (25)(26) or alternative methods (20). | |
| 1.8.3.2 | Collection, handling, and storage of soils | Detailed information on the history of the field site from where the test soil is collected should be available. Details include exact location, vegetation cover, treatments with chemicals, treatments with organic and inorganic fertilisers, additions of biological materials or other contamination. If soils have been treated with the test substance or its structural analogues within the previous four years, these should not be used for transformation studies (10)(15). | The soil should be freshly collected from the field (from the A horizon or top 20 cm layer) with a soil water content which facilitates sieving. For soils other than those from paddy fields, sampling should be avoided during or immediately following long periods (> 30 days) of drought, freezing or flooding (14). Samples should be transported in a manner which minimises changes in soil water content and should be kept in the dark with free access of air, as much as possible. A loosely-tied polyethylene bag is generally adequate for this purpose. | The soil should be processed as soon as possible after sampling. Vegetation, larger soil fauna and stones should be removed prior to passing the soil through a 2 mm sieve which removes small stones, fauna and plant debris. Extensive drying and crushing of the soil before sieving should be avoided (15). | When sampling in the field is difficult in winter (soil frozen or covered by layers of snow), it may be taken from a batch of soil stored in the greenhouse under plant cover (e.g. grass or grass-clover mixtures). Studies with soils freshly collected from the field are strongly preferred, but if the collected and processed soil has to be stored prior to the start of the study storage conditions must be adequate and for a limited time only (4 ± 2oC for a maximum of three months) to maintain microbial activity (3). Detailed instructions on collection, handling and storage of soils to be used for biotransformation experiments can be found in (8)(10)(15)(26)(27). | Before the processed soil is used for this test, it should be pre-incubated to allow germination and removal of seeds, and to re-establish equilibrium of microbial metabolism following the change from sampling or storage conditions to incubation conditions. A pre-incubation period between 2 and 28 days approximating the temperature and moisture conditions of the actual test is generally adequate (15). Storage and pre-incubation time together should not exceed three months. | |
| 1.9 PERFORMANCE OF THE TEST | |
| 1.9.1 Test conditions | |
| 1.9.1.1 | Test temperature | During the whole test period, the soils should be incubated in the dark at a constant temperature representative of the climatic conditions where use or release will occur. A temperature of 20 ± 2 oC is recommended for all test substances which may reach the soil in temperate climates. The temperature should be monitored. | For chemicals applied or released in colder climates (e.g. in northern countries, during autumn/winter periods), additional soil samples should be incubated but at a lower temperature (e.g. 10 ± 2 oC). | |
| 1.9.1.2 | Moisture content | For transformation tests under aerobic conditions, the soil moisture content (4) should be adjusted to and maintained at a pF between 2.0 and 2.5 (3). The soil moisture content is expressed as mass of water per mass of dry soil and should be regularly controlled (e.g. in 2 week intervals) by weighing of the incubation flasks and water losses compensated by adding water (preferably sterile-filtered tap water). Care should be given to prevent or minimise losses of test substance and/or transformation products by volatilisation and/or photodegradation (if any) during moisture addition. | For transformation tests under anaerobic and paddy conditions, the soil is water-saturated by flooding. | |
| 1.9.1.3 | Aerobic incubation conditions | In the flow-through systems, aerobic conditions will be maintained by intermittent flushing or by continuously ventilating with humidified air. In the biometer flasks, exchange of air is maintained by diffusion. | |
| 1.9.1.4 | Sterile aerobic conditions | To obtain information on the relevance of abiotic transformation of a test substance, soil samples may be sterilised (for sterilisation methods see references 16 and 29), treated with sterile test substance (e.g. addition of solution through a sterile filter) and aerated with humidified sterile air as described in section 1.9.1.3. For paddy soils, soil and water should be sterilised and the incubation should be carried out as described in section 1.9.1.6. | |
| 1.9.1.5 | Anaerobic incubation conditions | To establish and maintain anaerobic conditions, the soil treated with the test substance and incubated under aerobic conditions for 30 days or one half-life or DT50 (whichever is shorter) is then water-logged (1-3 cm water layer) and the incubation system flushed with an inert gas (e.g. nitrogen or argon) (5). The test system must allow for measurements such as pH, oxygen concentration and redox potential and include trapping devices for volatile products. The biometer-type system must be closed to avoid entrance of air by diffusion. | |
| 1.9.1.6 | Paddy incubation conditions | To study transformation in paddy rice soils, the soil is flooded with a water layer of about 1-5 cm and the test substance applied to the water phase (9). A soil depth of at least 5 cm is recommended. The system is ventilated with air as under aerobic conditions. pH, oxygen concentration and redox potential of the aqueous layer should be monitored and reported. A pre-incubation period of at least two weeks is necessary before commencing transformation studies (see section 1.8.3.2). | |
| 1.9.1.7 | Test duration | The rate and pathway studies should normally not exceed 120 days (6) (3)(6)(8), because thereafter a decrease of the soil microbial activity with time would be expected in an artificial laboratory system isolated from natural replenishment. Where necessary to characterise the decline of the test substance and the formation and decline of major transformation products, studies can be continued for longer periods (e.g. 6 or 12 months) (8). Longer incubation periods should be justified in the test report and accompanied by biomass measurements during and at the end of these periods. | |
| 1.9.2 Performance of the test | |
| About 50 to 200 g of soil (dry weight basis) are placed into each incubation flask (see Figures 1 and 2 in Annex 3) and the soil treated with the test substance by one of the methods described in section 1.8.2. When organic solvents are used for the application of the test substance, they should be removed from soil by evaporation. Then the soil is thoroughly mixed with a spatula and/or by shaking of the flask. If the study is conducted under paddy field conditions, soil and water should be thoroughly mixed after application of the test substance. Small aliquots (e.g. 1 g) of the treated soils should be analysed for the test substance to check for uniform distribution. For alternative method, see below. | |
| The treatment rate should correspond to the highest application rate of a crop protection product recommended in the use instructions and uniform incorporation to an appropriate depth in the field (e.g. top 10 cm layer (7) of soil). For example, for chemicals foliarly or soil applied without incorporation, the appropriate depth for computing how much chemical should be added to each flask is 2.5 cm. For soil incorporated chemicals, the appropriate depth is the incorporation depth specified in the use instructions. For general chemicals, the application rate should be estimated based on the most relevant route of entry; for example, when the major route of entry in soil is through sewage sludge, the chemical should be dosed into the sludge at a concentration that reflects the expected sludge concentration and the amount of sludge added to the soil should reflect normal sludge loading to agricultural soils. If this concentration is not high enough to identify major transformation products, incubation of separate soil samples containing higher rates may be helpful, but excessive rates influencing soil microbial functions should be avoided (see sections 1.5 and 1.8.2). | |
| Alternatively, a larger batch (i.e. 1 to 2 kg) of soil can be treated with the test substance, carefully mixed in an appropriate mixing machine and then transferred in small portions of 50 to 200 g into the incubation flasks (for example with the use of sample splitters). Small aliquots (e.g. 1 g) of the treated soil batch should be analysed for the test substance to check for uniform distribution. Such a procedure is preferred since it allows for more uniform distribution of the test substance into the soil. | |
| Also untreated soil samples are incubated under the same conditions (aerobic) as the samples treated with the test substance. These samples are used for biomass measurements during and at the end of the studies. | |
| When the test substance is applied to the soil dissolved in organic solvent(s), soil samples treated with the same amount of solvent(s) are incubated under the same conditions (aerobic) as the samples treated with the test substance. These samples are used for biomass measurements initially, during and at the end of the studies to check for effects of the solvent(s) on microbial biomass. | |
| The flasks containing the treated soil are either attached to the flow-through system described in Figure 1 or closed with the absorption column shown in Figure 2 (see Annex 3). | |
| 1.9.3 Sampling and measurement | |
| Duplicate incubation flasks are removed at appropriate time intervals and the soil samples extracted with appropriate solvents of different polarity and analysed for the test substance and/or transformation products. A well-designed study includes sufficient flasks so that two flasks are sacrificed at each sampling event. Also, absorption solutions or solid absorption materials are removed at various time intervals (7-day intervals during the first month and after one month in 17 -day intervals) during and at the end of incubation of each soil sample and analysed for volatile products. Besides a soil sample taken directly after application (0-day sample) at least 5 additional sampling points should be included. Time intervals should be chosen in such a way that pattern of decline of the test substance and patterns of formation and decline of transformation products can be established (e.g. 0,1, 3,7 days; 2, 3 weeks; 1, 2, 3 months, etc.). | |
| When using 14C-labelled test substance, non-extractable radioactivity will be quantified by combustion and a mass balance will be calculated for each sampling interval. | |
| In the case of anaerobic and paddy incubation, the soil and water phases are analysed together for test substance and transformation products or separated by filtration or centrifugation before extraction and analysis. | |
| 1.9.4 Optional tests | |
| Aerobic, non-sterile studies at additional temperatures and soil moistures may be useful for the estimation of the influence of temperature and soil moisture on the rates of transformation of a test substance and/or its transformation products in soil. | |
| A further characterisation of non-extractable radioactivity can be attempted using, for example, supercritical fluid extraction. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| 2.1 TREATMENT OF RESULTS | |
| The amounts of test substance, transformation products, volatile substances (in % only), and non-extractable should be given as % of applied initial concentration and, where appropriate, as mgkg-1 soil (based on soil dry weight) for each sampling interval. A mass balance should be given in percentage of the applied initial concentration for each sampling interval. A graphical presentation of the test substance concentrations against time will allow an estimation of its transformation half-life or DT50. Major transformation products should be identified and their concentrations should also be plotted against time to show their rates of formation and decline. A major transformation product is any product representing ≥ 10% of applied dose at any time during the study. | |
| The volatile products trapped give some indication of the volatility potential of a test substance and its transformation products from soil. | |
| More accurate determinations of half-lives or DT50 values and, if appropriate, DT75 and DT90 values should be obtained by applying appropriate kinetic model calculations. The half-life and DT50 values should be reported together with the description of the model used, the order of kinetics and the determination coefficient (r2). First order kinetics is favoured unless r2 < 0.7. If appropriate, the calculations should also be applied to the major transformation products. Examples of appropriate models are described in references 31 to 35. | |
| In the case of rate studies carried out at various temperatures, the transformation rates should be described as a function of temperature within the experimental temperature range using the Arrhenius relationship of the form: | |
| k = A·e-B/T or | |
| , | |
| where ln A and B are regression constants from the intercept and slope, respectively, of a best fit line generated from linearly regressing ln k against 1/T, k is the rate constant at temperature T and T is the temperature in Kelvin. Care should be given to the limited temperature range in which the Arrehenius relationship will be valid in case transformation is governed by microbial action. | |
| 2.2 EVALUATION AND INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS | |
| Although the studies are carried out in an artificial laboratory system, the results will allow estimation of the rate of transformation of the test substance and also of rate of formation and decline of transformation products under field conditions (36)(37). | |
| A study of the transformation pathway of a test substance provides information on the way in which the applied substance is structurally changed in the soil by chemical and microbial reactions. | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| TEST REPORT | |
| The test report must include: | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | common name, chemical name, CAS number, structural formula (indicating position of label(s) when radiolabelled material is used) and relevant physical-chemical properties (see section 1.5); | |
| — | purity (impurities) of test substance; | |
| — | radiochemical purity of labelled chemical and specific activity (where appropriate); | |
| Reference substances: | |
| — | chemical name and structure of reference substances used for the characterisation and/or identification of transformation product; | |
| Test soils: | |
| — | details of collection site; | |
| — | date and procedure of soil sampling; | |
| — | properties of soils, such as pH, organic carbon content, texture (% sand, % silt, % clay), cation exchange capacity, bulk density, water retention characteristic, and microbial biomass; | |
| — | length of soil storage and storage conditions (if stored); | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | dates of the performance of the studies; | |
| — | amount of test substance applied; | |
| — | solvents used and method of application for the test substance; | |
| — | weight of soil treated initially and sampled at each interval for analysis; | |
| — | description of the incubation system used; | |
| — | air flow rates (for flow-through systems only); | |
| — | temperature of experimental set-up; | |
| — | soil moisture content during incubation; | |
| — | microbial biomass initially, during and at the end of the aerobic studies; | |
| — | pH, oxygen concentration and redox potential initially, during and at the end of the anaerobic and paddy studies; | |
| — | method(s) of extraction; | |
| — | methods for quantification and identification of the test substance and major transformation products in soil and absorption materials; | |
| — | number of replicates and number of controls. | |
| Results: | |
| — | result of microbial activity determination; | |
| — | repeatability and sensitivity of the analytical methods used; | |
| — | rates of recovery (% values for a valid study are given in section 1.7.1); | |
| — | tables of results expressed as % of applied initial dose and, where appropriate, as mgkg-1 soil (on a dry weight basis); | |
| — | mass balance during and at the end of the studies; | |
| — | characterisation of non-extractable (bound) radioactivity or residues in soil; | |
| — | quantification of released CO2 and other volatile compounds; | |
| — | plots of soil concentrations versus time for the test substance and, where appropriate, for major transformation products; | |
| — | half-life or DT50, DT75 and DT90 for the test substance and, where appropriate, for major transformation products including confidence limits; | |
| — | estimation of abiotic degradation rate under sterile conditions; | |
| — | an assessment of transformation kinetics for the test substance and, where appropriate, for major transformation products; | |
| — | proposed pathways of transformation, where appropriate; | |
| — | discussion and interpretation of results; | |
| — | raw data (i.e. sample chromatograms, sample calculations of transformation rates and means used to identify transformation products). | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | US- Environmental Protection Agency (1982). Pesticide Assessment Guidelines, Subdivision N. Chemistry: Environmental Fate. | |
| (2) | Agriculture Canada (1987). Environmental Chemistry and Fate. Guidelines for registration of pesticides in Canada. | |
| (3) | European Union (EU) (1995). Commission Directive 95/36/EC of 14 July 1995 amending Council Directive 91/414/EEC concerning the placing of plant protection products on the market. Annex II, Part A and Annex III, Part A: Fate and Behaviour in the Environment. | |
| (4) | Dutch Commission for Registration of Pesticides (1995). Application for registration of a pesticide. Section G: Behaviour of the product and its metabolites in soil, water and air. | |
| (5) | BBA (1986). Richtlinie fur die amtliche Prüfung von Pflanzenschutzmitteln, Teil IV, 4-1. Verbleib von Pflanzenschutzmitteln im Boden - Abbau, Umwandlung und Metabolismus. | |
| (6) | ISO/DIS 11266-1 (1994). Soil Quality -Guidance on laboratory tests for biodegradation of organic chemicals in soil - Part 1: Aerobic conditions. | |
| (7) | ISO 14239 (1997). Soil Quality - Laboratory incubation systems for measuring the mineralization of organic chemicals in soil under aerobic conditions. | |
| (8) | SETAC (1995). Procedures for Assessing the Environmental Fate and Ecotoxicity of Pesticides. Mark R. Lynch, Ed. | |
| (9) | MAFF - Japan 2000 - Draft Guidelines for transformation studies of pesticides in soil - Aerobic metabolism study in soil under paddy field conditions (flooded). | |
| (10) | OECD (1995). Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Selection of Soils/Sediments. Belgirate, Italy, 18-20 January 1995. | |
| (11) | Guth, J.A. (1980). The study of transformations. In Interactions between Herbicides and the Soil (RJ. Hance, Ed.), Academic Press, 123-157. | |
| (12) | DFG: Pesticide Bound Residues in Soil. Wiley - VCH (1998). | |
| (13) | T.R. Roberts: Non-extractable pesticide residue in soils and plants. Pure Appl. Chem. 56, 945-956 (IUPAC 1984) | |
| (14) | OECD Test Guideline 304 A: Inherent Biodegradability in Soil (adopted 12 May 1981) | |
| (15) | ISO 10381-6 (1993). Soil Quality - Sampling - Part 6: Guidance on the collection, handling and storage of soil for the assessment of aerobic microbial processes in the laboratory. | |
| (16) | Annex V to Dir. 67/548/EEC | |
| (17) | Guth, J.A. (1981). Experimental approaches to studying the fate of pesticides in soil. In Progress in Pesticide Biochemistry. D.H. Hutson, T.R. Roberts, Eds. J. Wiley & Sons. Vol 1, 85-114. | |
| (18) | Soil Texture Classification (US and FAO systems): Weed Science, 33, Suppl. 1 (1985) and Soil Sci. Soc. Amer. Proc. 26:305 (1962). | |
| (19) | Methods of Soil Analysis (1986). Part 1, Physical and Mineralogical Methods. A. Klute, Ed.) Agronomy Series No 9, 2nd Edition. | |
| (20) | Methods of Soil Analysis (1982). Part 2, Chemical and Microbiological Properties. A.L. Page, R.H. Miller and D.R. Kelney, Eds. Agronomy Series No 9, 2nd Edition. | |
| (21) | ISO Standard Compendium Environment (1994). Soil Quality - General aspects; chemical and physical methods of analysis; biological methods of analysis. First Edition. | |
| (22) | Mückenhausen, E. (1975). Die Bodenkunde und ihre geologischen, geomorphologischen, mineralogischen und petrologischen Grundlagen, DLG-Verlag, Frankfurt, Main. | |
| (23) | Scheffer, F., Schachtschabel, P. (1975). Lehrbuch der Bodenkunde. F. Enke Verlag, Stuttgart. | |
| (24) | Anderson, J.P.E., Domsch, K.H. (1978) A physiological method for the quantitative measurement of microbial biomass in soils. Soil Biol. Biochem. 10, 215-221. | |
| (25) | ISO 14240-1 and 2 (1997). Soil Quality - Determination of soil microbial biomass - Part 1: Substrate-induced respiration method. Part 2: fumigation-extraction method. | |
| (26) | Anderson, J.P.E. (1987). Handling and storage of soils for pesticide experiments. In Pesticide Effects on Soil Microflora. L. Somerville, M.P. Greaves, Eds. Taylor & Francis, 45-60. | |
| (27) | Kato, Yasuhiro. (1998). Mechanism of pesticide transformation in the environment: Aerobic and bio-transformation of pesticides in aqueous environment. Proceedings of the 16th Symposium on Environmental Science of Pesticide, 105-120. | |
| (28) | Keuken O., Anderson J.P.E. (1996). Influence of storage on biochemical processes in soil. In Pesticides, Soil Microbiology and Soil Quality, 59-63 (SETAC-Europe). | |
| (29) | Stenberg B., Johansson M., Pell M., Sjödahl-Svensson K., Stenström J., Torstensson L. (1996). Effect of freeze and cold storage of soil on microbial activities and biomass. In Pesticides, Soil Microbiology and Soil Quality, 68-69 (SETAC-Europe). | |
| (30) | Gennari, M., Negre, M., Ambrosoli, R. (1987). Effects of ethylene oxide on soil microbial content and some chemical characteristics. Plant and Soil 102, 197-200. | |
| (31) | Anderson, J.P.E. (1975). Einfluss von Temperatur und Feuchte auf Verdampfung, Abbau und Festlegung von Diallat im Boden. Z. PflRrankh Pflschutz, Sonderheft VII, 141-146. | |
| (32) | Hamaker, J.W. (1976). The application of mathematical modelling to the soil persistence and accumulation of pesticides. Proc. BCPC Symposium: Persistence of Insecticides and Herbicides, 181-199. | |
| (33) | Goring, C.A.I., Laskowski, D.A., Hamaker, J.W., Meikle, R.W. (1975). Principles of pesticide degradation in soil. In ”Environmental Dynamics of Pesticides”. R. Haque and V.H. Freed, Eds., 135-172. | |
| (34) | Timme, G., Frehse, H., Laska, V. (1986). Statistical interpretation and graphic representation of the degradational behaviour of pesticide residues. II. Pflanzenschutz - Nachrichten Bayer 39, 188-204. | |
| (35) | Timme, G., Frehse, H. (1980). Statistical interpretation and graphic representation of the degradational behaviour of pesticide residues. I. Pflanzenschutz - Nachrichten Bayer 33, 47-60. | |
| (36) | Gustafson D.I., Holden L.R. (1990). Non-linear pesticide dissipation in soil; a new model based on spatial variability. Environm. Sci. Technol. 24, 1032-1041. | |
| (37) | Hurle K., Walker A. (1980). Persistence and its prediction. In Interactions between Herbicides and the Soil (R.J. Hance, Ed.), Academic Press, 83-122. | |
| ANNEX 1 | |
| WATER TENSION, FIELD CAPACITY (FC) AND WATER HOLDING CAPACITY (WHC)(1) | |
| Height of Water Column [cm] | pF (8) | bar (9) | Remarks | |
| 107 | 7 | 104 | Dry Soil | |
| 1.6 · 104 | 4.2 | 16 | Wilting point | |
| 104 | 4 | 10 | | |
| 103 | 3 | 1 | | |
| 6 · 102 | 2.8 | 0.6 | | |
| 3.3 · 102 | 2.5 | 0.33 (10) | | |
| 102 | 2 | 0.1 | Range of Field capacity (11) | WHC (approximation) | Water saturated soil | |
| 60 | 1.8 | 0.06 | |
| 33 | 1.5 | 0.033 | |
| 10 | 1 | 0.01 | |
| 1 | 0 | 0.001 | |
| Water tension is measured in cm water column or in bar. Due to the large range of suction tension it is expressed simply as pF value which is equivalent to the logarithm of cm water column. | |
| Field capacity is defined as the amount of water which can be stored against gravity by a natural soil 2 days after a longer raining period or after sufficient irrigation. It is determined in undisturbed soil in situ in the field. The measurement is thus not applicable to disturbed laboratory soil samples. FC values determined in disturbed soils may show great systematic variances. | |
| Water holding capacity (WHC) is determined in the laboratory with undisturbed and disturbed soil by saturating a soil column with water by capillary transport. It is particularly useful for disturbed soils and can be up to 30 % greater than field capacity (1). It is also experimentally easier to determine than reliable FC-values. | |
| (1) | Mückenhausen, E. (1975). Die Bodenkunde und ihre geologischen, geomorphologischen, mineralogischen und petrologischen Grundlagen. DLG-Verlag, Frankfurt, Main. | |
| ANNEX 2 | |
| SOIL MOISTURE CONTENTS (g water per 100 g dry soil) OF VARIOUS SOIL TYPES FROM VARIOUS COUNTRIES | |
| Soil Moisture Content at | |
| Soil Type | Country | |
| | | WHC (12) | pF = 1.8 | pF = 2.5 | |
| Sand | Germany | 28.7 | 8.8 | 3.9 | |
| Loamy sand | Germany | 50.4 | 17.9 | 12.1 | |
| Loamy sand | Switzerland | 44.0 | 35.3 | 9.2 | |
| Silt loam | Switzerland | 72.8 | 56.6 | 28.4 | |
| Clay loam | Brazil | 69.7 | 38.4 | 27.3 | |
| Clay loam | Japan | 74.4 | 57.8 | 31.4 | |
| Sandy loam | Japan | 82.4 | 59.2 | 36.0 | |
| Silt loam | USA | 47.2 | 33.2 | 18.8 | |
| Sandy loam | USA | 40.4 | 25.2 | 13.3 | |
| ANNEX 3 | |
| Figure 1 | |
| Example of a flow-through apparatus to study transformation of chemicals in soil (1)(2) | |
| Figure 2 | |
| Example of a biometer-type flask for studying the transformation of chemicals in soil (3) | |
| (1) | Guth, J.A. (1980). The study of transformations. In Interactions between Herbicides and the Soil (R.J. Hance, Ed.), Academic Press, 123-157. | |
| (2) | Guth, J.A. (1981). Experimental approaches to studying the fate of pesticides in soil. In Progress in Pesticide Biochemistry. D.H. Hutson, T.R. Roberts, Eds. J. Wiley & Sons. Vol 1, 85-114. | |
| (3) | Anderson, J.P.E. (1975). Einfluss von Temperatur und Feuchte auf Verdampfung, Abbau und Festlegung von Diallat im Boden. Z. PflKrankh Pflschutz, Sonderheft VII, 141-146. | |
| C.24. AEROBIC AND ANAEROBIC TRANSFORMATION IN AQUATIC SEDIMENT SYSTEMS | |
| 1. METHOD | |
| This test method is a replicate of the OECD TG 308 (2002). | |
| 1.1 INTRODUCTION | |
| Chemicals can enter shallow or deep surface waters by such routes as direct application, spray drift, run-off, drainage, waste disposal, industrial, domestic or agricultural effluent and atmospheric deposition. This Testing Method describes a laboratory method to assess aerobic and anaerobic transformation of organic chemicals in aquatic sediment systems. It is based on existing Guidelines (1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6). An OECD Workshop on Soil/Sediment Selection, held in Belgirate, Italy in 1995 (7) agreed, in particular, on the number and type of sediments for use in this test. It also made recommendations relating to collection, handling and storage of sediment samples, based on the ISO Guidance (8). Such studies are required for chemicals which are directly applied to water or which are likely to reach the aqueous environment by the routes described above. | |
| The conditions in natural aquatic sediment systems are often aerobic in the upper water phase. The surface layer of sediment can be either aerobic or anaerobic, whereas the deeper sediment is usually anaerobic. To encompass all of these possibilities both aerobic and anaerobic tests are described in this document. The aerobic test simulates an aerobic water column over an aerobic sediment layer that is underlain with an anaerobic gradient. The anaerobic test simulates a completely anaerobic water-sediment system. If circumstances indicate that it is necessary to deviate significantly from these recommendations, for example by using intact sediment cores or sediments that may have been exposed to the test substance, other methods are available for this purpose (9). | |
| 1.2 DEFINITIONS | |
| Standard International (SI) units should be used in any case. | |
| Test substance: any substance, whether the parent or relevant transformation products. | |
| Transformation products: all substances resulting from biotic and abiotic transformation reactions of the test substance including CO2 and bound residues. | |
| Bound residues:”Bound residues” represent compounds in soil, plant or animal that persist in the matrix in the form of the parent substance or its metabolite(s) after extractions. The extraction method must not substantially change the compounds themselves or the structure of the matrix. The nature of the bond can be clarified in part by matrix-altering extraction methods and sophisticated analytical techniques. To date, for example, covalent ionic and sorptive bonds, as well as entrapments, have been identified in this way. In general, the formation of bound residues reduces the bioaccessibility and the bioavailability significantly (10) [modified from IUPAC 1984(11)]. | |
| Aerobic transformation: (oxidising): reactions occurring in the presence of molecular oxygen (12). | |
| Anaerobic transformation: (reducing): reactions occurring under exclusion of molecular oxygen (12). | |
| Natural waters: are surface waters obtained from ponds, rivers, streams, etc. | |
| Sediment: is a mixture of mineral and organic chemical constituents, the latter containing compounds of high carbon and nitrogen content and of high molecular masses. It is deposited by natural water and forms an interface with that water. | |
| Mineralisation: is the complete degradation of an organic compound to CO2, H2O under aerobic conditions, and CH4, CO2 and H2O under anaerobic conditions. In the context of this test method, when radiolabelled compound is used, mineralisation means extensive degradation of a molecule during which a labelled carbon atom is oxidised or reduced quantitatively with release of the appropriate amount of 14CO2 or 14CH4, respectively. | |
| Half-life, t0.5, is the time taken for 50% transformation of a test substance when the transformation can be described by first-order kinetics; it is independent of the initial concentration. | |
| DT50 (Disappearance Time 50): is the time within which the initial concentration of the test substance is reduced by 50%. | |
| DT75 (Disappearance Time 75): is the time within which the initial concentration of the test substance is reduced by 75%. | |
| DT90 (Disappearance Time 90): is the time within which the initial concentration of the test substance is reduced by 90%. | |
| 1.3 REFERENCE SUBSTANCES | |
| Reference substances should be used for the identification and quantification of transformation products by spectroscopic and chromatographic methods. | |
| 1.4 INFORMATION ON THE TEST SUBSTANCE | |
| Non-labelled or isotope-labelled test substance can be used to measure the rate of transformation although labelled material is preferred. Labelled material is required for studying the pathway of transformation and for establishing a mass balance. 14C-labelling is recommended, but the use of other isotopes, such as 13C, 15N, 3H, 32P, may also be useful. As far as possible, the label should be positioned in the most stable part(s) of the molecule (13). The chemical and/or radiochemical purity of the test substance should be at least 95 %. | |
| Before carrying out a test, the following information about the test substance should be available: | |
| (a) | solubility in water (Method A.6); | |
| (b) | solubility in organic solvents; | |
| (c) | vapour pressure (Method A.4) and Henry's Law constant; | |
| (d) | n-octanol/water partition coefficient (Method A.8); | |
| (e) | adsorption coefficient (Kd, Kf or Koc, where appropriate) (Method C.18); | |
| (f) | hydrolysis (Method C.7); | |
| (g) | dissociation constant (pKa) [OECD Guideline 112] (13); | |
| (h) | chemical structure of the test substance and position of the isotope-label(s), if applicable. | |
| Note: The temperature at which these measurements were made should be reported. | |
| Other useful information may include data on toxicity of the test substance to microorganisms, data on ready and/or inherent biodegradability, and data on aerobic and anaerobic transformation in soil. | |
| Analytical methods (including extraction and clean-up methods) for identification and quantification of the test substance and its transformation products in water and in sediment should be available (see section 1.7.2). | |
| 1.5 PRINCIPLE OF THE TEST METHOD | |
| The method described in this test employs an aerobic and an anaerobic aquatic sediment (see Annex 1} system which allows: | |
| (i) | the measurement of the transformation rate of the test substance in a water-sediment system, | |
| (ii) | the measurement of the transformation rate of the test substance in the sediment, | |
| (iii) | the measurement of the mineralisation rate of the test substance and /or its transformation products (when 14C-labelled test substance is used), | |
| (iv) | the identification and quantification of transformation products in water and sediment phases including mass balance (when labelled test substance is used), | |
| (v) | the measurement of the distribution of the test substance and its transformation products between the two phases during a period of incubation in the dark (to avoid, for example, algal blooms) at constant temperature. Half-lives, DT50, DT75 and DT90 values are determined where the data warrant, but should not be extrapolated far past the experimental period (see section 1.2). | |
| At least two sediments and their associated waters are required for both the aerobic and the anaerobic studies respectively (7). However, there may be cases where more than two aquatic sediments should be used, for example, for a chemical that may be present in freshwater and/or marine environments. | |
| 1.6 APPLICABILITY OF THE TEST | |
| The method is generally applicable to chemical substances (unlabelled or labelled) for which an analytical method with sufficient accuracy and sensitivity is available. It is applicable to slightly volatile, non-volatile, water-soluble or poorly water-soluble compounds. The test should not be applied to chemicals which are highly volatile from water (e.g. fumigants, organic solvents) and thus cannot be kept in water and/or sediment under the experimental conditions of this test. | |
| The method has been applied so far to study the transformation of chemicals in fresh waters and sediments, but in principle can also be applied to estuarine/marine systems. It is not suitable to simulate conditions in flowing water (e.g. rivers) or the open sea. | |
| 1.7 QUALITY CRITERIA | |
| 1.7.1 Recovery | |
| Extraction and analysis of, at least, duplicate water and sediment samples immediately after the addition of the test substance gives a first indication of the repeatability of the analytical method and of the uniformity of the application procedure for the test substance. Recoveries for later stages of the experiments are given by the respective mass balances (when labelled material is used). Recoveries should range from 90% to 110% for labelled chemicals (6) and from 70% to 110% for non-labelled chemicals. | |
| 1.7.2 Repeatability and sensitivity of analytical method | |
| Repeatability of the analytical method (excluding the initial extraction efficiency) to quantify test substance and transformation products can be checked by duplicate analysis of the same extract of the water or the sediment samples which were incubated sufficiently long enough for formation of transformation products. | |
| The limit of detection (LOD) of the analytical method for the test substance and for the transformation products should be at least 0.01 mgkg-1 in water or sediment (as test substance) or 1% of the initial amount applied to a test system whichever is lower. The limit of quantification (LOQ) should also be specified. | |
| 1.7.3 Accuracy of transformation data | |
| Regression analysis of the concentrations of the test substance as a function of time gives the appropriate information on the accuracy of the transformation curve and allows the calculation of the confidence limits for half-lives (if pseudo first-order kinetics apply) or DT50 values and, if appropriate, DT75 and DT90 values. | |
| 1.8 DESCRIPTION OF THE METHOD | |
| 1.8.1 Test system and apparatus | |
| The study should be performed in glass containers (e.g. bottles, centrifuge tubes), unless preliminary information (such as n-octanol-water partition coefficient, sorption data, etc.) indicates that the test substance may adhere to glass, in which case an alternative material (such as Teflon) may have to be considered. Where the test substance is known to adhere to glass, it may be possible to alleviate this problem using one or more of the following methods: | |
| — | determine the mass of test substance and transformation products sorbed to glass; | |
| — | ensure a solvent wash of all glassware at the end of the test; | |
| — | use of formulated products (see also section 1.9.2); | |
| — | use an increased amount of co-solvent for addition of test substance to the system; if a co-solvent is used it should be a co-solvent that does not solvolyse the test substance. | |
| Examples of typical test apparatus, i.e. gas flow-through and biometer-type systems, are shown in Annexes 2 and 3, respectively (14). Other useful incubation systems are described in reference 15. The design of the experimental apparatus should permit the exchange of air or nitrogen and the trapping of volatile products. The dimensions of the apparatus must be such that the requirements of the test are complied with (see section 1.9.1). Ventilation may be provided by either gentle bubbling or by passing air or nitrogen over the water surface. In the latter case gentle stirring of the water from above may be advisable for better distribution of the oxygen or nitrogen in the water. CO2-free air should not be used as this can result in increases in the pH of the water. In either case, disturbance of the sediment is undesirable and should be avoided as far as possible. Slightly volatile chemicals should be tested in a biometer-type system with gentle stirring of the water surface. Closed vessels with a headspace of either atmospheric air or nitrogen and internal vials for the trapping of volatile products can also be used (16). Regular exchange of the headspace gas is required in the aerobic test in order to compensate for the oxygen consumption by the biomass. | |
| Suitable traps for collecting volatile transformation products include but are not restricted to 1 moldm-3 solutions of potassium hydroxide or sodium hydroxide for carbon dioxide (14) and ethylene glycol, ethanolamine or 2% paraffin in xylene for organic compounds. Volatiles formed under anaerobic conditions, such as methane, can be collected, for example, by molecular sieves. Such volatiles can be combusted, for example, to CO2 by passing the gas through a quartz tube filled with CuO at a temperature of 900 oC and trapping the CO2 formed in an absorber with alkali (17). | |
| Laboratory instrumentation for chemical analysis of test substance and transformation products is required (e.g. gas liquid chromatography (GLC), high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), thin-layer chromatography (TLC), mass spectroscopy (MS), gas chromatography-mass spectroscopy (GC-MS), liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry (LC-MS), nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR), etc.), including detection systems for radiolabelled or non-labelled chemicals as appropriate. When radiolabelled material is used a liquid scintillation counter and combustion oxidiser (for the combustion of sediment samples prior to analysis of radioactivity) will also be required. | |
| Other standard laboratory equipment for physical-chemical and biological determinations (see section Table 1, section 1.8.2.2), glassware, chemicals and reagents are required as appropriate. | |
| 1.8.2 Selection and number of aquatic sediments | |
| The sampling sites should be selected in accordance with the purpose of the test in any given situation. In selecting sampling sites, the history of possible agricultural, industrial or domestic inputs to the catchment and the waters upstream must be considered. Sediments should not be used if they have been contaminated with the test substance or its structural analogues within the previous 4 years. | |
| 1.8.2.1 | Sediment selection | Two sediments are normally used for the aerobic studies (7). The two sediments selected should differ with respect to organic carbon content and texture. One sediment should have a high organic carbon content (2.5-7.5%) and a fine texture, the other sediment should have a low organic carbon content (0.5-2.5%) and a coarse texture. The difference between the organic carbon contents should normally be at least 2%. "Fine texture" is defined as a [clay + siltj (15) content of >50% and "coarse texture" is defined as a [clay + silt] content of <50%. The difference in [clay + silt] content for the two sediments should normally be at least 20%. In cases, where a chemical may also reach marine waters, at least one of the water-sediment systems should be of marine origin. | For the strictly anaerobic study, two sediments (including their associated waters) should be sampled from the anaerobic zones of surface water bodies (7). Both the sediment and the water phases should be handled and transported carefully under exclusion of oxygen. | Other parameters may be important in the selection of sediments and should be considered on a case-by-case basis. For example, the pH range of sediments would be important for testing chemicals for which transformation and/or sorption may be pH-dependent. pH-dependency of sorption might be reflected by the pKa of the test substance. | |
| 1.8.2.2 | Characterisation of water-sediment samples | Key parameters that must be measured and reported (with reference to the method used) for both water and sediment, and the stage of the test at which those parameters are to be determined are summarised in the Table hereafter. For information, methods for determination of these parameters are given in references (18)(19)(20)(21). | In addition, other parameters may need to be measured and reported on a case by case basis (e.g. for freshwater: particles, alkalinity, hardness, conductivity, NO3/PO4 (ratio and individual values); for sediments: cation exchange capacity, water holding capacity, carbonate, total nitrogen and phosphorus; and for marine systems: salinity). Analysis of sediments and water for nitrate, sulfate, bioavailable iron, and possibly other electron acceptors may be also useful in assessing redox conditions, especially in relation to anaerobic transformation. | |
| Measurement of parameters for characterisation of water-sediment samples (7)(22)(23) | |
| Parameter | Stage of test procedure | |
| field sampling | post-handling | start of acclimation | start of test | during test | end of test | |
| Water | |
| Origin/source | X | | | | | | |
| Temperature | X | | | | | | |
| PH | X | | X | X | X | X | |
| TOC | | | X | X | | X | |
| O2 concentration (16) | X | | X | X | X | X | |
| Redox Potential (16) | | | X | X | X | X | |
| Sediment | |
| Origin/source | X | | | | | | |
| Depth of layer | X | | | | | | |
| PH | | X | X | X | X | X | |
| Particle size distribution | | X | | | | | |
| TOC | | X | X | X | | X | |
| Microbial biomass (17) | | X | | X | | X | |
| Redox potential (16) | Observation (colour/smell) | | X | X | X | X | |
| 1.8.3 Collection, Handling and Storage | |
| 1.8.3.1 | Collection | The draft ISO guidance on sampling of bottom sediment (8) should be used for sampling of sediment. Sediment samples should be taken from the entire 5 to 10 cm upper layer of the sediment. Associated water should be collected from the same site or location and at the same time as the sediment. For the anaerobic study, sediment and associated water should be sampled and transported under exclusion of oxygen (28)(see section 1.8.2.1). Some sampling devices are described in the literature (8)(23). | |
| 1.8.3.2 | Handling | The sediment is separated from the water by filtration and the sediment wet-sieved to a 2 mm-sieve using excess location water that is then discarded. Then known amounts of sediments and water are mixed at the desired ratio (see section 1.9.1) in incubation flasks and prepared for the acclimation period (see section 1.8.4). For the anaerobic study, all handling steps have to be done under exclusion of oxygen (29)(30)(31)(32)(33). | |
| 1.8.3.3 | Storage | Use of freshly sampled sediment and water is strongly recommended, but if storage is necessary, sediment and water should be sieved as described above and stored together, water-logged (6-10 cm water layer), in the dark, at 4 ± 2oC (18) for a maximum of 4 weeks (7)(8)(23). Samples to be used for aerobic studies should be stored with free access of air (e.g. in open containers), whereas those for anaerobic studies under exclusion of oxygen. Freezing of sediment and water and drying-out of the sediment must not occur during transportation and storage. | |
| 1.8.4 Preparation of the sediment/water samples for the test | |
| A period of acclimation should take place prior to adding the test substance, with each sediment/water sample being placed in the incubation vessel to be used in the main test, and the acclimation to be carried out under exactly the same conditions as the test incubation (see section 1.9.1). The acclimation period is the time needed to reach reasonable stability of the system, as reflected by pH, oxygen concentration in water, redox potential of the sediment and water, and macroscopic separation of phases. The period of acclimation should normally last between one week and two weeks and should not exceed four weeks. Results of determinations performed during this period should be reported. | |
| 1.9 PERFORMANCE OF THE TEST | |
| 1.9.1 Test conditions | |
| The test-should be performed in the incubation apparatus (see section 1.8.1) with a water sediment volume ratio between 3:1 and 4:1, and a sediment layer of 2.5 cm (± 0.5 cm).1 A minimum amount of 50 g of sediment (dry weight basis) per incubation vessel is recommended. | |
| The test should be performed in the dark at a constant temperature in the range of 10 to 30 oC. A temperature of (20 ± 2)oC is appropriate. Where appropriate, an additional lower temperature (e.g. 10oC) may be considered on a case-by-case basis, depending on the information required from the test. Incubation temperature should be monitored and reported. | |
| 1.9.2 Treatment and application of test substance | |
| One test concentration of chemical is used (19). For crop protection chemicals applied directly to water bodies, the maximum dosage on the label should be taken as, the maximum application rate calculated on the basis of the surface area of the water in the test vessel. In all other cases, the concentration to be used should be based on predictions from environmental emissions. Care must be taken to ensure that an adequate concentration of test substance is applied in order to characterise the route of transformation and the formation and decline of transformation products. It may be necessary to apply higher doses (e.g. 10 times) in situations where test substance concentrations are close to limits of detection at the start of the study and/or where major transformation products could not readily be detected when present at 10% of the test substance application rate. However, if higher test concentrations are used they should not have a significant adverse effect on the microbial activity of the water-sediment system. In order to achieve a constant concentration of test substance in vessels of differing dimensions an adjustment to the quantity of the material applied may be considered appropriate, based on the depth of the water column in the vessel in relation to the depth of water in the field (which is assumed to be 100 cm, but other depths can be used). See Annex 4 for an example calculation. | |
| Ideally the test substance should be applied as an aqueous solution into the water phase of the test system. If unavoidable, the use of low amounts of water miscible solvents (such as acetone, ethanol) is permitted for application and distribution of the test substance, but this should not exceed 1% v/v and should not have adverse effects on microbial activity of the test system. Care should be exercised in generating the aqueous solution of the test substance - use of generator columns and pre-mixing may be appropriate to ensure complete homogeneity. Following addition of the aqueous solution to the test system, gentle mixing of the water phase is recommended, disturbing the sediment as little as possible. | |
| The use of formulated products is not routinely recommended as the formulation ingredients may affect the distribution of the test substance and/or transformation products between water and sediment phases. However, for poorly water-soluble test substances, the use of formulated material may be an appropriate alternative. | |
| The number of incubation vessels depends on the number of sampling times (see section 1.9.3). A sufficient number of test systems should be included so that two systems may be sacrificed at each sampling time. Where control units of each aquatic sediment system are employed, they should not be treated with the test substance. The control units can be used to determine the microbial biomass of the sediment and the total organic carbon of the water and sediment at the termination of the study. Two of the control units (i.e. one control unit of each aquatic sediment) can be used to monitor the required parameters in the sediment and water during the acclimation period (see Table in section 1.8.2.2). Two additional control units have to be included in case the test substance is applied by means of a solvent to measure adverse effects on the microbial activity of the test system. | |
| 1.9.3 Test duration and sampling | |
| The duration of the experiment should normally not exceed 100 days (6), and should continue until the degradation pathway and water/sediment distribution pattern are established or when 90 % of the test substance has dissipated by transformation and/or volatilisation. The number of sampling times should be at least six (including zero time), with an optional preliminary study (see section 1.9.4) being used to establish an appropriate sampling regime and the duration of the test, unless sufficient data is available on the test substance from previous studies. For hydrophobic test substances, additional sampling points during the initial period of the study may be necessary in order to determine the rate of distribution between water and sediment phases. | |
| At appropriate sampling times, whole incubation vessels (in replicate) are removed for analysis. Sediment and overlying water are analysed separately (20). The surface water should be carefully removed with minimum disturbance of the sediment. The extraction and characterisation of the test substance and transformation products should follow appropriate analytical procedures. Care should be taken to remove material that may have adsorbed to the incubation vessel or to interconnecting tubing used to trap volatiles. | |
| 1.9.4 Optional preliminary test | |
| If duration and sampling regime cannot be estimated from other relevant studies on the test substance, an optional preliminary test may be considered appropriate, which should be performed using the same test conditions proposed for the definitive study. Relevant experimental conditions and results from the preliminary test, if performed, should be briefly reported. | |
| 1.9.5 Measurements and analysis | |
| Concentration of the test substance and the transformation products at every sampling time in water and sediment should be measured and reported (as a concentration and as percentage of applied). In general, transformation products detected at >10% of the applied radioactivity in the total water-sediment system at any sampling time should be identified unless reasonably justified otherwise. Transformation products for which concentrations are continuously increasing during the study should also be considered for identification, even if their concentrations do not exceed the limits given above, as this may indicate persistence. The latter should be considered on a case by case basis, with justifications being provided in the report. | |
| Results from gases/volatiles trapping systems (CO2 and others, i.e. volatile organic compounds) should be reported at each sampling time. Mineralisation rates should be reported. Non-extractable (bound) residues in sediment are to be reported at each sampling point. | |
| 2 DATA | |
| 2.1 TREATMENT OF RESULTS | |
| Total mass balance or recovery (see section 1.7.1) of added radioactivity is to be calculated at every sampling time. Results should be reported as a percentage of added radioactivity. Distribution of radioactivity between water and sediment should be reported as concentrations and percentages, at every sampling time. | |
| Half-life, DT50 and, if appropriate, DT75 and DT90 of the test substance should be calculated along with their confidence limits (see section 1.7.3). Information on the rate of dissipation of the test substance in the water and sediment can be obtained through the use of appropriate evaluation tools. These can range from application of pseudo-first order kinetics, empirical curve-fitting techniques which apply graphical or numerical solutions and more complex assessments Using, for example, single- or multi-compartment models. Further details can be obtained from the relevant published literature (35)(36)(37). | |
| All approaches have their strengths and weaknesses and vary considerably in complexity. An assumption of first-order kinetics may be an oversimplification of the degradation and distribution processes, but when possible gives a term (the rate constant or half-life) which is easily understood and of value in simulation modelling and calculations of predicted environmental concentrations. Empirical approaches or linear transformations can result in better fits of curves to data and therefore allow better estimation of half-lives, DT50 and, if appropriate, DT75 and DT90 values., The use of the derived constants, however, is limited. Compartment models can generate a number of useful constants of value in risk assessment that describe the rate of degradation in different compartments and the distribution of the chemical. They should also be used for estimation of rate constants for the formation and degradation of major transformation products. In all cases, the method chosen must be justified and the experimenter should demonstrate graphically and/or statistically the goodness of fit. | |
| 3 REPORTING | |
| 3.1 TEST REPORT | |
| The report must include the following information: | |
| Test substance: | |
| — | common name, chemical name, CAS number, structural formula (indicating position of the label(s) when radiolabelled material is used) and relevant physical-chemical properties; | |
| — | purity (impurities) of test substance; | |
| — | radiochemical purity of labelled chemical and molar activity (where appropriate). | |
| Reference substances: | |
| — | chemical name and structure of reference substances used for the characterisation and/or identification of transformation products | |
| Test sediments and waters: | |
| — | location and description of aquatic sediment sampling site(s) including, if possible, contamination history; | |
| — | all information relating to the collection, storage (if any) and acclimation of water-sediment systems; | |
| — | characteristics of the water-sediment samples as listed in Table in section 1.8.2.2. | |
| Test conditions: | |
| — | test system used (e.g. flow-through, biometer, way of ventilation, method of stirring, water volume, mass of sediment, thickness of both water and sediment layer, dimension of test vessels, etc.) | |
| — | application of test substance to test system: test concentration used, number of replicates and controls mode of application of test substance (e.g. use of solvent if any), etc. | |
| — | incubation temperature; | |
| — | sampling times; | |
| — | extraction methods and efficiencies as well as analytical methods and detection limits; | |
| — | methods for characterisation/identification of transformation products; | |
| — | deviations from the test protocol or test conditions during the study. | |
| Results: | |
| — | raw data figures of representative analyses (all raw data have to be stored in the GLP-archive); | |
| — | repeatability and sensitivity of the analytical methods used; | |
| — | rates of recovery (% values for a valid study are given in section 1.7.1); | |
| — | tables of results expressed as % of the applied dose and in mgkg-1 in water, sediment and total system (% only) for the test substance and, if appropriate, for transformation products and non-extractable radioactivity; | |
| — | mass balance during and at the end of the studies; | |
| — | a graphical representation of the transformation in the water and sediment fractions and in total system (including mineralisation); | |
| — | mineralisation rates; | |
| — | half-life, DT50 and, if appropriate, DT75 and DT90 values for the test substance and, where appropriate, for major transformation products including confidence limits in water, sediment and in total system; | |
| — | an assessment of the transformation kinetics of the test substance and, where appropriate, the major transformation products; | |
| — | a proposed pathway of transformation, where appropriate; | |
| — | discussion of results. | |
| 4 REFERENCES | |
| (1) | BBA-Guidelines for the examination of plant protectors in the registration process. (1990). Part IV, Section 5-1: Degradability and fate of plant protectors in the water/sediment system. Germany. | |
| (2) | Commission for registration of pesticides: Application for registration of a pesticide. (1991). Part G. Behaviour of the product and its metabolites in soil, water and air, Section G.2.1 (a). The Netherlands. | |
| (3) | MAFF Pesticides Safety Directorate. (1992). Preliminary guideline for the conduct of biodegradability tests on pesticides in natural sediment/water systems. Ref No SC 9046. United-Kingdom. | |
| (4) | Agriculture Canada: Environmental chemistry and fate. (1987). Guidelines for registration of pesticides in Canada. Aquatic (Laboratory) - Anaerobic and aerobic. Canada, pp 35-37. | |
| (5) | US-EPA: Pesticide assessment guidelines, Subdivision N. Chemistry: Environmental fate (1982). Section 162-3, Anaerobic aquatic metabolism. | |
| (6) | SETAC-Europe publication. (1995). Procedures for assessing the environmental fate and ecotoxicity of pesticides. Ed. Dr Mark R. Lynch. SETAC-Europe, Brussels. | |
| (7) | OECD Test Guidelines Programme. (1995). Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Selection of Soils/sediments, Belgirate, Italy, 18-20 January 1995. | |
| (8) | ISO/DIS 5667-12. (1994). Water quality - Sampling - Part 12: Guidance on sampling of bottom sediments. | |
| (9) | US-EPA (1998a). Sediment/water microcosm biodegradarion test. Harmonised Test Guidelines (OPPTS 835.3180). EPA 712-C-98-080. | |
| (10) | DFG: Pesticide Bound Residues in Soil. Wiley-VCH (1998). | |
| (11) | T.R. Roberts: Non-extractable pesticide residues in soils and plants. Pure Appl. Chem. 56, 945-956 (IUPAC 1984). | |
| (12) | OECD Test Guideline 304A: Inherent Biodegradability in Soil (adopted 12 May 1981). | |
| (13) | OECD (1993): Guidelines for Testing of Chemicals. Paris. OECD (1994-2000): Addenda 6-11 to Guidelines for the Testing of Chemicals. | |
| (14) | Scholz, K., Fritz R., Anderson C. and Spiteller M. (1988) Degradation of pesticides in an aquatic model ecosystem. BCPC - Pests and Diseases, 3B-4, 149-158. | |
| (15) | Guth, J.A. (1981). Experimental approaches to studying the fate of pesticides in soil. In Progress in Pesticide Biochemistry (D.H. Hutson, T.R. Roberts, Eds.), Vol. 1, 85-114. J. Wiley & Sons. | |
| (16) | Madsen, T., Kristensen, P. (1997). Effects of bacterial inoculation and non-ionic surfactants on degradation of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons in. soil. Environ. Toxicol. Chem. 16, 631-637. | |
| (17) | Steber, J., Wierich, P. (1987). The anaerobic degradation of detergent range fatty alcohol ethoxylates. Studies with 14C-labelled model surfactants. Water Research 21, 661-667. | |
| (18) | Black, C.A. (1965). Methods of Soil Analysis. Agronomy Monograph No. 9. American Society of Agronomy, Madison. | |
| (19) | APHA (1989). Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater (17th edition). American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association and Water Pollution Control Federation, Washington D.C. | |
| (20) | Rowell, D.L. (1994). Soil Science Methods and Applications. Longman. | |
| (21) | Light, T.S. (1972). Standard solution for redox potential measurements. Anal. Chemistry 44, 1038-1039. | |
| (22) | SETAC-Europe publication (1991). Guidance document on testing procedures for pesticides in freshwater mesocosms. From the Workshop “A Meeting of Experts on Guidelines for Static Field Mesocosms Tests”, 3-4 July 1991. | |
| (23) | SETAC-Europe publication. (1993). Guidance document on sediment toxicity tests and bioassays for freshwater and marine environments. From the Workshop On Sediment Toxicity Assessment (WOSTA), 8-10 November 1993; Eds.: I.R. Hill, P. Matthiessen and F. Heimbach. | |
| (24) | Vink, J.P.M., van der Zee, S.E.A.T.M. (1997). Pesticide biotransformation in surface waters: multivariate analyses of environmental factors at field sites. Water Research 31, 2858-2868. | |
| (25) | Vink, J.P.M., Schraa, G., van der Zee, S.E.A.T.M. (1999). Nutrient effects on microbial transformation of pesticides in nitrifying waters. Environ. Toxicol, 329-338. | |
| (26) | Anderson, T.H., Domsch, K.H. (1985). Maintenance carbon requirements of actively-metabolising microbial populations under in-situ conditions. Soil Biol. Biochem. 17, 197-203. | |
| (27) | ISO-14240-2. (1997). Soil quality - Determination of soil microbial biomass - Part 2: Fumigation-extraction method. | |
| (28) | Beelen, P. Van and F. Van Keulen. (1990), The Kinetics of the Degradation of Chloroform and Benzene in Anaerobic Sediment from the River Rhine. Hydrobiol. Bull. 24 (1), 13-21. | |
| (29) | Shelton, D.R. and Tiedje, J.M. (1984). General method for determining anaerobic biodegradation potential. App. Environ. Microbiol. 47, 850-857. | |
| (30) | Birch, R.R., Biver, C, Campagna, R., Gledhill, W.E., Pagga, U., Steber, J., Reust, H. and Bontinck, W.J. (1989). Screening of chemicals for anaerobic biodegradation. Chemosphere 19, 1527-1550. | |
| (31) | Pagga, U. and Beimborn, D.B. (1993). Anaerobic biodegradation tests for organic compounds. Chemoshpere 27, 1499-1509. | |
| (32) | Nuck, B.A. and Federle, T.W. (1986). A batch test for assessing the mineralisation of 14C-radiolabelled compounds under realistic anaerobic conditions. Environ. Sci. Technol. 30, 3597-3603. | |
| (33) | US-EPA (1998b). Anaerobic biodegradability of organic chemicals. Harmonised Test Guidelines (OPPTS 835.3400). EPA 712-C-98-090. | |
| (34) | Sijm, Haller and Schrap (1997). Influence of storage on sediment characteristics and drying sediment on sorption coefficients of organic contaminants. Bulletin Environ. Contam. Toxicol. 58, 961-968. | |
| (35) | Timme, G., Frehse H. and Laska V. (1986) Statistical interpretation and graphic representation of the degradational behaviour of pesticide residues II. Pflanzenschutz - Nachrichten Bayer, 39, 187 - 203. | |
| (36) | Timme, G., Frehse, H. (1980) Statistical interpretation and graphic representation of the degradational behaviour of pesticide residues I. Pflanzenschutz - Nachrichten Bayer, 33, 47 - 60. | |
| (37) | Carlton, R.R. and Allen, R. (1994). The use of a compartment model for evaluating the fate of pesticides in sediment/water systems. Brighton Crop Protection Conference - Pest and Diseases, pp 1349-1354. | |
| ANNEX 1 | |
| GUIDANCE ON THE AEROBIC AND THE ANAEROBIC TEST SYSTEMS | |
| Aerobic test system | |
| The aerobic test system described in this test method consists of an aerobic water layer (typical oxygen concentrations range from 7 to 10 mgl-1 ) and a sediment layer, aerobic at the surface and anaerobic below the surface (typical average redox potentials (Eh) in the anaerobic zone of the sediment range from -80 to -190 mV). Moistened air is passed over the surface of the water in each incubation unit to maintain sufficient oxigen in the head space. | |
| Anaerobic test system | |
| For the anaerobic test system, the test procedure is essentially the same as that outlined for the aerobic system with the exception that moistened nitrogen is passed above the surface of the water in each incubation unit to maintain a head space of nitrogen. The sediment and water are regarded as anaerobic once the redox potential (Eh) is lower than -100 mV. | |
| In the anaerobic test, assessment of mineralisation includes measurement of evolved carbon dioxide and methane. | |
| ANNEX 2 | |
| EXAMPLE OF A GAS FLOW-THROUGH APPARATUS | |
| ANNEX 3 | |
| EXAMPLE OF A BIOMETER APPARATUS | |
| ANNEX 4 | |
| EXAMPLE CALCULATION FOR APPLICATION DOSE TO TEST VESSELS | |
| Cylinder internal diameter: | = 8 cm | |
| Water column depth not including sediment: | = 12 cm | |
| Surface area: 3. 142 x 42 | = 50.3 cm2 | |
| Application rate: 500 g test substance/ha corresponds to 5 µg/cm2 | | |
| Total µg: 5 x 50.3 | = 251.5 µg | |
| Adjust quantity in relation to a depth of 100 cm: 12 x 251.5 ÷ 100 | = 30.18 µg | |
| Volume of water column: 50.3 x 12 | = 603 ml | |
| Concentration in water: 30.18 ÷ 603 | = 0.050 µg/ml or 50 µg/l | |
| (1) For example, if the test substance contains one ring, labelling on this ring is required; if the test substance contains two or more rings, separate studies may be needed to evaluate the fate of each labelled ring and to obtain suitable information on formation of transformation products. | |
| (2) Water retention characteristic of a soil can be measured as field capacity, as water holding capacity or as water suction tension (pF). For explanations see Annex 1. It should be reported in the test report whether water retention characteristics and bulk density of soils were determined in undisturbed field samples or in disturbed (processed) samples. | |
| (3) Recent research results indicate that soils from temperate zones can also be stored at -20oC for more than three months (28)(29) without significant losses of microbial activity. | |
| (4) The soil should neither be too wet nor too dry to maintain adequate aeration and nutrition of soil microflora. Moisture contents recommended for optimal microbial growth range from 40-60% water holding capacity (WHC) and from 0.1-0.33 bar (6). The latter range is equivalent to a pF-range of 2.0 - 2.5. Typical moisture contents of various soil types are given in Annex 2. | |
| (5) Aerobic conditions are dominant in surface soils and even in sub-surface soils as shown in an EU sponsored research project [K. Takagi et al. (1992). Microbial diversity and activity in subsoils: Methods, field site, seasonal variation in subsoil temperatures and oxygen contents. Proc. Internat. Symp. Environm. Aspects Pesticides Microbiol., 270-277, 17-21 August 1992, Sigtuna, Sweden]. Anaerobic conditions may only occur occasionally during flooding of soils after heavy rainfalls or when paddy conditions are established in rice fields. | |
| (6) Aerobic studies might be terminated much before 120 days provided that ultimate transformation pathway and ultimate mineralisation are clearly reached at that time. Termination of the test is possible after 120 days, or when at least 90% of the test substance is transformed, but only if at least 5% CO2 is formed. | |
| (7) Calculation of the initial concentration on an area basis using the following equation: | |
| Csoil= Initial concentration in soil [mg·kg-1] | |
| A = Application rate [kg·ha-1]; l = thickness of field soil layer [m]; d = dry bulk density of soil [kg·m-3]. | |
| As a rule of thumb, an application rate of 1 kg·ha-1 results in a soil concentration of approximately 1 mg·kg-1 in a 10 cm layer (assuming a bulk density of 1 g · cm-3). | |
| (8) pF = log of cm water column. | |
| (9) 1 bar = 105Pa. | |
| (10) Corresponds to an approximate water content of 10% in sand, 35% in loam and 45% in clay. | |
| (11) Field capacity is not constant but varies with soil type between pF 1.5 and 2.5. | |
| (12) Water Holding Capacity | |
| (13) For example, if the substance contains one ring, labelling on this ring is required; if the test substance contains two or more rings, separate studies may be needed to evaluate the fate of each labelled ring and to obtain suitable information on formation of transformation products. | |
| (14) As these alkaline absorption solutions also absorb the carbon dioxide from the ventilation air and that formed by respiration in aerobic experiments, they have to be exchanged in regular intervals to avoid their saturation and thus loss of their absorption capacity. | |
| (15) [Clay + silt] is the mineral fraction of the sediment with particle size of < 50 µm | |
| (16) Recent research results have shown that measurements of water oxygen concentrations and of redox potentials have neither a mechanistic nor a predictive value as far as growth and development of microbial populations in surface waters are concerned (24)(25). Determination of the biochemical oxygen demand (BOD, at field sampling, start and end of test) and of concentrations of micro/macro nutrients Ca, Mg and Mn (at start and end of test) in water and the measurement of total N and total P in sediments (at field sampling and end of test) may be better tools to interpret and evaluate aerobic biotransformation rates and routes. | |
| (17) Microbial respiration rate method (26), fumigation method (27) or plate count measurements (e.g. bacteria, actinomycetes, fungi and total colonies) for aerobic studies; methanogenesis rate for anaerobic studies. | |
| (18) Recent studies have shown that storage at 4 oC can lead to a decrease of the organic carbon content of the sediment which may possibly result in a decrease of microbial activity (34). | |
| (19) Test with a second concentration can be useful for chemicals that reach surface waters by different entry routes resulting in significantly different concentrations, as long as the lower concentration can be analysed with sufficient accuracy. | |
| (20) In cases where rapid re-oxidation of anaerobic transformation products may readily occur, anaerobic conditions should be maintained during sampling and analyses. | |
| | |
| | | |
| | 32004L0073 |
| | Direktiva Komisije 2004/73/ES z dne 29. aprila 2004 o devetindvajsetem prilagajanju Direktive Sveta 67/548/EGS o približevanju zakonov in drugih predpisov v zvezi z razvrščanjem, pakiranjem in označevanjem nevarnih snovi tehničnemu napredkuBesedilo velja za EGP. |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | CS.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | ET.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | HU.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | LT.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | LV.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | MT.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | PL.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | SK.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | SL.ES poglavje 13 zvezek 34 str. 448 - 757 |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | Direktiva Komisije 2004/73/ES |
| | z dne 29. aprila 2004 |
| | o devetindvajsetem prilagajanju Direktive Sveta 67/548/EGS o približevanju zakonov in drugih predpisov v zvezi z razvrščanjem, pakiranjem in označevanjem nevarnih snovi tehničnemu napredku |
| | (Besedilo velja za EGP) |
| | KOMISIJA EVROPSKIH SKUPNOSTI JE – |
| | ob upoštevanju Pogodbe o ustanovitvi Evropske skupnosti, |
| | ob upoštevanju Direktive Sveta 67/548/EGS z dne 27. junija 1967 o približevanju zakonov in drugih predpisov v zvezi z razvrščanjem, pakiranjem in označevanjem nevarnih snovi [1], in zlasti člena 28 Direktive, |
| | ob upoštevanju naslednjega: |
| | (1) Priloga I k Direktivi 67/548/EGS vsebuje seznam nevarnih snovi, skupaj s podatki o razvrščanju in označevanju vsake snovi. Ta seznam je treba posodobiti, da bo vključeval prijavljene nove snovi in dodatne obstoječe snovi, in obstoječe vpise prilagoditi tehničnemu napredku, na primer določitvi okoljskih mejnih koncentracij za nekatere snovi. V skladu s tem je treba tudi izbrisati vpise nekaterih snovi, druge pa razbiti, ker razvrstitev ne velja več za vse snovi pod temi vpisi. Označitev snovi, ki vključuje 1,3-butadien, je treba spremeniti tako, da bo razvidno, da bo snov po tej direktivi razvrščena kot mutagen. |
| | (2) Priloga V k Direktivi 67/548/EGS predpisuje metode za določanje fizikalno-kemijskih lastnosti, toksičnosti in ekotoksičnosti snovi in pripravkov. Navedeno prilogo je treba spremeniti tako, da se število živali, uporabljenih v poskusne namene, zmanjša na minimum v skladu z Direktivo Sveta 86/609/EGS z dne 24. novembra 1986 o približevanju zakonov in drugih predpisov držav članic o varstvu živali, ki se uporabljajo za poskusne in druge znanstvene namene [2]. Metode za subkronično oralno toksičnost iz poglavij B.1, B.4, B.5, B.31 in B.35 je treba ustrezno spremeniti. Poleg tega je treba Prilogi V dodati poglavje B.42, da bo na voljo prečiščena metoda za subkronično oralno toksičnost. Nazadnje je treba dodati še poglavje A.21 o fizikalno-kemijskih lastnostih, poglavje B.43 o subkronični oralni toksičnosti in poglavja C.21 do C.24 o ekotoksičnosti, da bo mogoče določiti lastnosti, ki še niso zadostno zajete z metodami iz Priloge V. |
| | (3) Ukrepi, predvideni s to direktivo, so v skladu z mnenjem Odbora za prilagajanje tehničnemu napredku direktiv o odpravi tehničnih ovir pri trgovanju z nevarnimi snovmi in pripravki – |
| | SPREJELA NASLEDNJO DIREKTIVO: |
| | Člen 1 |
| | Direktiva 67/548/EGS se spremeni, kot sledi: |
| | 1. Priloga I se spremeni, kot sledi: |
| | (a) opomba K iz predgovora se nadomesti z besedilom iz Priloge 1A; |
| | (b) vpisi, ki ustrezajo vpisom iz Priloge 1B k tej direktivi, se nadomestijo z besedilom iz navedene priloge; |
| | (c) vpisi iz Priloge 1C k tej direktivi se vstavijo v skladu z vrstnim redom vpisov iz Priloge I k Direktivi 67/548/EGS; |
| | (d) vpisi z indeksnimi številkami 604-050-00-X, 607-050-00-8, 607-171-00-6 in 613-130-00-3 se črtajo; |
| | (e) vpis z indeksno številko 048-002-00-0 se nadomesti z vpisoma z indeksnima številkama 048-002-00-0 in 048-011-00-X iz Priloge 1D k tej direktivi; |
| | (f) vpis z indeksno številko 609-006-00-3 se nadomesti z vpisoma z indeksnima številkama 609-006-00-3 in 609-065-00-5 iz Priloge 1D k tej direktivi; |
| | (g) vpis z indeksno številko 612-039-00-6 se nadomesti z vpisoma z indeksnima številkama 612-039-00-6 in 612-207-00-9 iz Priloge 1D. |
| | 2. Priloga V se spremeni, kot sledi: |
| | (a) besedilo iz Priloge 2A k tej direktivi se doda kot poglavje A.21; |
| | (b) poglavje B.1 bis se nadomesti z besedilom iz Priloge 2B k tej direktivi; |
| | (c) poglavje B.1 tris se nadomesti z besedilom iz Priloge 2C k tej direktivi; |
| | (d) poglavje B.4 se nadomesti z besedilom iz Priloge 2D k tej direktivi; |
| | (e) poglavje B.5 se nadomesti z besedilom iz Priloge 2E k tej direktivi; |
| | (f) poglavje B.31 se nadomesti z besedilom iz Priloge 2F k tej direktivi; |
| | (g) poglavje B.35 se nadomesti z besedilom iz Priloge 2G k tej direktivi; |
| | (h) besedilo iz Priloge 2H k tej direktivi se doda kot poglavji B.42 in B.43; |
| | (i) besedilo iz Priloge 2I k tej direktivi se doda kot poglavja C.21 do C.24. |
| | Člen 2 |
| | 1. Države članice sprejmejo zakone in druge predpise, potrebne za uskladitev s to direktivo, najpozneje do 31. oktobra 2005. Komisiji takoj sporočijo besedila teh predpisov in korelacijsko tabelo med navedenimi predpisi in to direktivo. Države članice se v sprejetih predpisih sklicujejo na to direktivo ali pa sklic nanjo navedejo ob njihovi uradni objavi. Način sklicevanja določijo države članice. |
| | 2. Države članice sporočijo Komisiji besedila temeljnih predpisov nacionalne zakonodaje, sprejetih na področju, ki ga ureja ta direktiva. |
| | Člen 3 |
| | Ta direktiva začne veljati dvajseti dan po objavi v Uradnem listu Evropske unije. |
| | Člen 4 |
| | Ta direktiva je naslovljena na države članice. |
| | V Bruslju, 29. aprila 2004 |
| | Za Komisijo |
| | Margot Wallström |
| | Članica Komisije |
| | [1] UL 196, 16.8.1967, str. 1. Direktiva, kakor je bila nazadnje spremenjena z Uredbo (ES) št. 807/2003 (UL L 122, 16.5.2003, str. 36). |
| | [2] UL L 358, 18.12.1986, str. 1. Direktiva, kakor je bila nazadnje spremenjena z Direktivo 2003/65/ES Evropskega parlamenta in Sveta (UL L 230, 16.9.2003, str. 32). |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 1A |
| | "Opomba K: |
| | Snovi ni treba razvrstiti med rakotvorne ali mutagene, če je mogoče dokazati, da je masni delež 1,3-butadiena (št. Einecs 203-450-8) v snovi manjši od 0,1 %. Če snov ni razvrščena kot rakotvorna ali mutagena, je treba uporabiti vsaj stavke S(2-)9-16. Ta opomba se uporablja samo za nekatere kompleksne snovi v Prilogi I, pridobljene iz nafte." |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2A |
| | A.21 OKSIDATIVNE LASTNOSTI (TEKOČE SNOVI) |
| | 1. METODA |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Ta metoda preskušanja je namenjena merjenju potenciala tekoče snovi za povečanje stopnje gorenja ali intenzivnosti gorenja vnetljive snovi ali za tvorbo mešanice z vnetljivo snovjo, ki se sama vname, ko se obe temeljito premešata. Njena podlaga je preskus ZN za oksidativne tekoče snovi (1) in mu je enakovredna. Ker je metoda A.21 v prvi vrsti namenjena izpolnjevanju zahtev Direktive 67/548, je potrebna primerjava le z eno referenčno snovjo. Če je pričakovati, da se bodo rezultati preskusov uporabljali za druge namene [1], bo morda potrebno preskušanje in primerjava z dodatnimi referenčnimi snovmi. |
| | Ta preskus je treba opraviti, kadar preverjanje strukturne formule nedvomno pokaže, da snov ne more reagirati eksotermično z vnetljivim materialom. |
| | Pred opravljanjem tega preskusa je koristno imeti predhodne informacije o možnih eksplozivnih lastnostih snovi. |
| | Ta preskus se ne uporablja za trdne snovi, pline, eksplozivne ali zelo lahko vnetljive snovi,ali organske perokside. |
| | Tega preskusa ni treba narediti, kadar so rezultati za preskusno snov iz preskusa ZN za oksidativne tekoče snovi (1) že na voljo. |
| | 1.2 DEFINICIJE IN ENOTE |
| | Povprečni čas dvigovanja tlaka je povprečje izmerjenega časa za mešanico v preskusu, da bi se zagotovil dvig tlak s 695 kPa na 2070 kPa nad zračnim tlakom. |
| | 1.3 REFERENČNA SNOV |
| | Potrebna je 65 % (m/m) vodna dušikova kislina (analitske stopnje) kot referenčna snov [2]. |
| | Če izvajalec preskusa predvideva, da bi se rezultati tega preskusa lahko uporabili za druge namene [3], je lahko ustrezno tudi preskušanje z dodatnimi referenčnimi snovmi [4]. |
| | 1.4 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Tekoča snov, ki jo je treba preskusiti, se zmeša v razmerju 1 proti 1 glede na maso, z vlaknato celulozo in vlije v tlačno posodo. Če med mešanjem ali polnjenjem pride do samovžiga, nadaljnje preskušanje ni potrebno. |
| | Če samovžig ne nastane, se opravi preskus v celoti. Mešanica se segreje v tlačni posodi, določi se povprečni čas, potreben za dvig tlaka s 690 kPa na 2070 kPa nad zračnim tlakom. To se primerja s povprečnim časom dviga tlaka za mešanico 1: 1 referenčne snovi/referenčnih snovi in celuloze. |
| | 1.5 KRITERIJI KAKOVOSTI |
| | V seriji petih poskusov na eni snovi se rezultati ne smejo razlikovati za več kakor 30 % od aritmetične sredine. Rezultate, ki se razlikujejo za več kakor 30 % od aritmetične sredine, je treba zavreči, izboljšati postopek mešanja in polnjenja in ponoviti preskušanje. |
| | 1.6 OPIS METODE |
| | 1.6.1 Priprava |
| | 1.6.1.1 Vnetljiva snov |
| | Posušena vlaknata celuloza z dolžino vlaken med 50 in 250 µm in povprečni premerom 25 μm [5] se uporablja kot vnetljivi material. Suši se 4 ure do konstantne teže v plasti, ki je debela največ 25 mm, pri 105 °C in se hrani v eksikatorju, s snovjo za sušenje, dokler se ne ohladi in dokler ni potrebna za uporabo. Vsebnost vode v posušeni celulozi mora biti manjša kakor 0,5 % na suho maso [6]. Če je potrebno, se mora čas sušenja podaljšati, da bi se to doseglo [7]. Med preskusom je treba ves čas uporabljati isto šaržo celuloze. |
| | 1.6.1.2 Naprava |
| | 1.6.1.2.1 Tlačna posoda |
| | Potrebna je tlačna posoda. Posoda je sestavljena iz cilindrične jeklene tlačne posode, dolžine 89 mm z zunanjim premerom 60 mm (glej sliko 1). Dve ravni držali se strojno pritrdita na nasprotnih straneh (zmanjšujeta prerez posode na 50 mm), da jo je lažje držati pri namestitvi sprožilnega mehanizma in oddušnega ventila. Posoda, ki ima izvrtino premera 20 mm, ima na obeh straneh do globine 19 mm vrezane navoje, ki ustrezajo 1 "britanske standardne cevi (BSP) ali metrično enakovredni cevi. Zračni ventil v obliki stranske ročice se privije v ukrivljeni sprednji del tlačne posode 35 mm od enega konca in pod kotom 90 o glede na strojno obdelani ravnini. Za to je izvrtana 12 mm globoka izvrtina z navoji za privijanje 1/2" BSP (ali metrično enakovrednega) navoja na koncu stranske ročice. Če je potrebno, pritrdimo za zatesnitev proti uhajanju plina inertno tesnilo. Stranska ročica sega 55 mm za ohišje tlačne posode in ima izvrtino 6 mm. Konec stranske ročice ima izrezane navoje za pritrditev naprave za spreminjanje pritiska z opno. Uporabimo lahko katero koli napravo za merjenje tlaka, pod pogojem, da nanjo ne vplivajo vroči plini ali razpadli produkti in da se lahko odziva na stopnje dviga tlaka 690–2070 kPa v manj kakor 5 ms. |
| | Konec tlačne posode, ki je najbolj oddaljen od stranske ročice, se zapre s sprožilnim mehanizmom, ki je opremljen z dvema elektrodama, od katerih je ena izolirana od ohišja mehanizma, druga pa ne. Drugi konec tlačne posode je zaprt z okroglo razpočno ploščo (tlak preboja približno 2200 kPa), ki jo drži na mestu vijak z 20 mm izvrtino. Če je potrebno, pritrdimo za zatesnitev proti uhajanju plina inertno tesnilo. Podporno podnožje (slika 2) drži sklop v pravilnem položaju med uporabo. Ponavadi se sestoji iz osnovne plošče iz mehkega jekla velikosti 235 mm × 184 mm × 6 mm, na katero je pritrjen po dolžini 185 mm profil dimenzij kvadrata 70 mm × 70 mm × 4 mm. |
| | Iz kvadratnega profila se izrežeta po dolžini dve nasprotni stranici, tako da nastane nad njima 86 mm dolg podest, ki ima dve nogi z ravnima stranicama. Konca teh ravnih stranic sta odrezana pod kotom 60 o na horizontalno ravnino in privarjena na osnovno ploščo. Utor, ki je 22 mm širok in 46 mm globok, je strojno vrezan v eno stran gornjega konca podlage, da se vanj uleže stranska ročica, kadar potisnemo sklop s tlačno posodo navzdol, najprej konec s sprožilnim mehanizmom, v podpornik podesta. Na spodnjo zunanjo prednjo stran kvadratnega profila je privarjen kos jekla, širine 30 mm in debeline 6 mm, ki deluje kakor distančnik. Dva 7 mm palčna vijaka, privita na nasprotni strani, pomagata držati tlačno posodo trdno na mestu. 12 mm široki trakovi iz 6 mm debelega jekla, privarjeni na stranske dele, ob robu podlage kvadratnega profila, podpirata tlačno posodo s spodnje strani. |
| | 1.6.1.2.2 Sistem vžiga |
| | Sistem vžiga je sestavljen iz 25 cm dolge žice iz niklja in kroma s premerom 0,6 mm in uporom 3,85 ohm/m. Žica se zvije s palico premera 5 mm v obliko tuljave in se pritrdi na elektrodo sprožilnega mehanizma. Tuljava mora imeti eno od oblik, prikazanih na sliki 3. Razdalja med dnom posode in spodnjim delom tuljave vžiga mora znašati 20 mm. Če elektrodi nista nastavljivi, je treba izolirati konca žice za vžig med tuljavo in dnom posode s keramičnim obročem. Žico segreva neprekinjeno tokovno napajanje, ki lahko zagotovi moč najmanj 10 amperov. |
| | 1.6.2 Potek preskušanja [8] |
| | Naprava, ki se sestoji iz zračnega ventila in sistema segrevanja, vendar brez nameščene okrogle razpočne plošče, je podprta s koncem s koncem, kjer je sprožilni mehanizem, obrnjenim navzdol. 2,5 g tekočine, ki jo je treba preskusiti, se zmeša z 2,5 g posušene celuloze v stekleni čaši in uporabimo stekleno paličico za mešanje [9]. Zaradi varnosti je treba mešanje opraviti z varnostnim ščitom med izvajalcem preskusa in mešanico. Če se mešanica vname med mešanjem ali polnjenjem, nadaljnje preskušanje ni potrebno. Mešanica se dodaja v majhnih odmerkih po kapljicah v tlačno posodo, prepričati se je treba, da se mešanica nabira okoli tuljave vžiga in je z njo v dobrem stiku. Pomembno je, da se tuljava ne deformira med postopkom pakiranja, ker lahko to povzroči zmotne rezultate [10]. Namesti se razpočna plošča in tesno privije vijak, ki jo drži na njenem mestu. Napolnjeno posodo prenesemo na sprožilno podporno podnožje, z okroglo razpočno ploščo obrnjeno navzgor, nameščena mora biti v ustrezni oklepni dimni omarici ali sprožilni celici. Tokovno napajanje se priključi na zunanje priključne letve sprožilnega mehanizma in uporabi moč 10 A. Čas med začetkom mešanje in vključitvijo močnostnega napajanja ne sme presegati 10 minut. |
| | Signal, ki ga oddaja zračni ventil za tlak, se zabeleži z ustreznim sistemom, ki omogoča hkrati vrednotenje in oblikovanje stalnega zapisa dobljenega časovnega tlačnega profila (npr. začasen zapisovalnik skupaj z zapisovalnikom grafa). Mešanica se segreva, dokler se okrogla razpočna plošča ne razpoči ali dokler ne mine vsaj 60 s. Če razpočna plošča poči, je treba pustiti mešanico, da se ohladi, preden se naprava skrbno razstavi in pri tem upoštevati varnostne ukrepe zaradi podtlaka, ki lahko nastane. Izvede se 5 poskusov s preskusno snovjo in z referenčno snovjo/snovmi. Čas, potreben za dvig tlaka s 690 kPa na 2070 kPa nad zračni tlak, se zabeleži. Izračuna se povprečni čas dviga tlaka. |
| | V nekaterih primerih lahko snovi sprožijo dvig tlaka (previsok ali prenizek tlak) zaradi kemijskih reakcij, ki niso značilne za oksidativne lastnosti snovi. V takšnih primerih bo morda potrebno preskus ponoviti z inertno snovjo, npr. z diatomejsko zemljo (kieselguhr) namesto celuloze za pojasnitev vrste reakcije. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | Časi dviga tlaka za preskusno snov in referenčno snov/snovi. |
| | Časi dviga tlaka za preskuse z inertno snovjo, če se opravljajo. |
| | 2.1 OBRAVNAVANJE REZULTATOV |
| | Izračunajo se povprečni časi dviga tlaka za preskusno snov in referenčno snov/snovi. |
| | Izračuna se povprečni čas dviga tlaka za preskuse z inertno snovjo (če se opravljajo). |
| | Nekateri primeri rezultatov so prikazani v Tabeli 1. |
| | Tabela 1 |
| | Primer rezultatov [14] |
| | Snov [13] | Povprečni čas dviga tlaka za mešanico s celulozo 1: 1 (ms) | |
| | Amonijev dikromat, nasičena vodna raztopina | 20800 | |
| | Kalcijev nitrat, nasičena vodna raztopina | 6700 | |
| | Železov nitrat, nasičena vodna raztopina | 4133 | |
| | Litijev perklorat, nasičena vodna raztopina | 1686 | |
| | Magnezijev perklorat, nasičena vodna raztopina | 777 | |
| | Nikljev nitrat, nasičena vodna raztopina | 6250 | |
| | Dušikova kislina, 65 % | 4767 [11] | |
| | Perklorova kislina, 50 % | 121 [11] | |
| | Perklorova kislina, 55 % | 59 | |
| | Kalijev nitrat, 30 % vodna raztopina | 26690 | |
| | Srebrov nitrat, nasičena vodna raztopina | – [12] | |
| | Natrijev klorat, 40 % vodna raztopina | 2555 [11] | |
| | Natrijev nitrat, 45 % vodna raztopina | 4133 | |
| | Inertna snov | | |
| | Vodna celuloza | – [12] | |
| | 3. POROČILO |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije: |
| | - vrsto, sestavo, čistost, itd. preskušane snovi, |
| | - koncentracijo preskusne snovi, |
| | - postopek sušenja uporabljene celuloze, |
| | - vsebnost vode uporabljene celuloze, |
| | - rezultate meritev, |
| | - rezultate preskusov z inertno snovjo, če so bili izvedeni, |
| | - izračunane povprečne čase dviga tlaka, |
| | - vsa odstopanja od te metode in razloge zanje, |
| | - vse dodatne informacije ali pripombe, ki so pomembne za razlago rezultatov. |
| | 3.2 RAZLAGA REZULTATOV [15] |
| | Rezultati preskusa se ocenijo na podlagi tega; |
| | (a) ali se mešanica preskušane snovi in celuloze spontano vname; in |
| | (b) primerjave povprečnega časa, ki je potreben, da tlak naraste s 690 kPa na 2070 kPa s povprečnim časom za referenčno snov/snovi. |
| | Tekočo snov je treba obravnavati, kot da je oksidant, kadar: |
| | (a) se mešanica 1: 1, glede na maso, snovi in celuloze spontano vname; ali |
| | (b) ima mešanica 1: 1, glede na maso, snovi in celuloze, manjši ali enak povprečni čas dviga tlaka, kot je povprečni čas dviga tlaka mešanice 1: 1, glede na maso, 65 % (m/m) vodne dušikove kisline in celuloze. |
| | Da bi se izognili napačnim pozitivnim rezultatom, je treba po potrebi pri razlagi rezultatov upoštevati tudi rezultate, dobljene pri preskušanju snovi z inertnim materialom. |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) Recommendations on the Transport of dangerous Goods, manual of Tests and Criteria, 3rd revised edition, UN Publication No: ST/SG/AC, 10/11/Rev. 3, 1999, page 342. Test 0.2: Test for oxidizing liquids. |
| | +++++ TIFF +++++ |
| | Tlačna posoda |
| | (A) Ohišje tlačne posode |
| | (B) Vijak za utrditev okrogle razpočne plošče |
| | (C) Sprožilni mehanizem |
| | (D) Tesnilo iz mehkega svinca |
| | (E) Okrogla razpočna plošča |
| | (F) Stranska ročica |
| | (G) Glava zračnega ventila |
| | (H) Podložka |
| | (J) Izolirana elektroda |
| | (K) Neizolirana elektroda |
| | (L) Izolacija |
| | (M) Jekleni stožec |
| | (N) Utor za prilagajanje podložke |
| | +++++ TIFF +++++ |
| | +++++ TIFF +++++ |
| | (A) Tuljava vžiga |
| | (B) Izolacija |
| | (C) Elektrodi |
| | (D) Sprožilni mehanizem |
| | Opomba: |
| | Uporabi se lahko kateri koli od obeh načrtov. |
| | [1] Kot na primer v uredbah ZN o prevozu. |
| | [2] Kislino je treba titrirati pred preskušanjem za potrditev njene koncentracije. |
| | [3] Kot na primer v uredbah ZN o prevozu. |
| | [4] Npr.: 50 % (m/v) perklorne kisline in 40 % (m/m) natrijevega klorata se uporabi kot referenca 1. |
| | [5] Npr.: Whatmanov stolpec za kromatografski celulozni prah CF 11, kataložna številka 4021 050. |
| | [6] Potrjeno (npr.) s Karl-Fisherjevo titracijo. |
| | [7] Druga možnost je, da se doseže ta vsebnost vode lahko tudi z (npr.) 24-urnim segrevanjem pri 105 °C v brezzračnem prostoru. |
| | [8] Mešanice oksidantov s celulozo je treba obravnavati kot potencialno eksplozivne in z njimi ustrezno pravilno ravnati. |
| | [9] V praksi se to lahko to doseže tako, da se pripravi mešanica 1: 1 tekoče snovi, ki jo je treba preskusiti, in celuloze v večji količini, kot je potrebno za poskus, in prenesti 5 ± 0,1 g v tlačno posodo. Mešanico je treba za vsak poskus sveže pripraviti. |
| | [10] Zlasti se je treba izogibati stiku med sosednjimi zavoji tuljave. |
| | [11] Srednja vrednost pri poskusih iz primerjave med laboratoriji. |
| | [12] Maksimalni tlak 2070 kPa ni dosežen. |
| | [13] Nasičeno raztopino je treba pripraviti pri 20 °C. |
| | [14] Glej sklic (1) za razvrstitev v shemo prevoza ZN. |
| | [15] Glej sklic 1 za razlago rezultatov v skladu z zakonodajo ZN o prevozu z uporabo različnih referenčnih snovi. |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2B |
| | B.1bis AKUTNA ORALNA TOKSIČNOST – POSTOPEK S TOČNO DOLOČENIM ODMERKOM |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta preskusna metoda ustreza OECD TV 420 (2001) |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Tradicionalne metode za ocenjevanje akutne toksičnosti upoštevajo pogin živali kot končno točko. Leta 1984 je Britansko društvo za toksikologijo predlagalo nov pristop k preskušanju akutne toksičnosti na podlagi dajanja serije točno določenih odmerkov (1). Ta pristop se je izognil uporabi pogina živali kot končne točke in se namesto tega oprl na opazovanje jasnih znakov toksičnosti na eni seriji velikosti točno določenih odmerkov. Po študijah v Združenem kraljestvu (2) in mednarodnih (3) validacijskih študijah in vivo se je sprejel postopek kot metoda za preskušanje v letu 1992. Kasneje so se statistične lastnosti Postopka s točno odmerkom ovrednotile z uporabo matematičnim modelov v seriji študij (4)(5)(6). Študije in vivo in študije na modelih so oboje pokazale, da je postopek ponovljiv, da se zanj uporablja manj živali in da povzroča manj trpljenja kakor tradicionalne metode ter je z njim mogoče razvrstiti snovi na podoben način kot z drugimi metodami preskušanja akutne toksičnosti. |
| | Navodila za izbiro najustreznejše metode preskušanja za dani namen se lahko poiščejo v Dokument s smernicani u z navodili za preskušanje akutne oralne toksičnosti (7). Ta dokument z navodili vsebuje tudi dodatne informacije o izvajanju in razlagi metode preskušanja B.1 bis. |
| | Princip metode je v tem, da se v glavni študiji uporabljajo le zmerno toksični odmerki in se je treba izogibati dajanju odmerkov, za katere se pričakuje, da so smrtni. Prav tako se ne sme dajati odmerkov, za katere je znano, da povzročajo vidno bolečino in trpljenje živali zaradi jedkega ali močno dražečega delovanja. Umirajoče živali ali živali, ki očitno trpijo ali kažejo znake hudega in dolgotrajnega trpljenja, se usmrtijo na human način in se upoštevajo pri razlagi rezultatov preskusa na enak način kot živali, ki so poginile med preskusom. Kriterije za sprejem odločitve o usmrtitvi umirajočih živali ali živali, ki zelo trpijo, ter napotke za prepoznavanje napovedljive ali neizbežne smrti obravnava poseben Dokument s smernicani (8). |
| | Metoda nam da informacije o nevarnih lastnostih in omogoča uvrstitev in razvrstitev snovi v skladu z Globalno usklajenim sistemom (GHS) za razvrščanje kemikalij, ki povzročajo akutno toksičnost (9). |
| | Laboratorij za preskušanje mora upoštevati vse razpoložljive informacije o preskusni snovi pred opravljanjem študije. Takšne informacije bodo vključevale vrsto in kemijsko sestavo snovi; njene fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti; rezultate katerih koli drugih preskusov toksičnosti na snovi, in vitro ali in vivo; toksikološke podatke o strukturno sorodnih snoveh ter pričakovano uporabo/uporabe snovi. Te informacije so potrebne, da vsem, ki jih ti zadeva, zagotovijo, da je preskus pomemben za zaščito zdravja ljudi in da bo v pomoč pri izbiri ustreznega začetnega odmerka. |
| | 1.2 DEFINICIJE |
| | Akutna oralna toksičnost: nanaša se na tiste škodljive učinke, ki sledijo dajanju enega odmerka snovi ali dajanju več odmerkov v 24 urah. |
| | Kasnejša smrt: pomeni, da žival ne pogine ali da ne kaže znakov, da bo poginila, v 48 urah, vendar pogine kasneje med 14-dnevnim obdobjem opazovanja. |
| | Odmerek: je količina dane preskusne snovi. Odmerek je izražen kot masa preskusne snovi na enoto teže preskusne živali (npr. mg/kg). |
| | Očitna toksičnost: je splošen izraz, ki opisuje jasne znake toksičnosti po dajanju preskusne snovi (glej (3) na primer), takšne, da se pojavijo pri naslednjem najvišjem točno določenem odmerku hude bolečine in trajne znake hude stiske, stanje umiranja (kriteriji so navedeni v Dokumentu s smernicami za humane končne točke (8), ali pa če je mogoče pričakovati smrtnost pri večini živali. |
| | GHS: Globalno usklajeni sistem razvrščanja kemijskih snovi in mešanic. Skupna aktivnost OECD (zdravje ljudi in okolje), Odbora ZN strokovnjakov za prevoz nevarnega blaga (fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti) in ILO (poročanje o nevarnih snovem) in koordinirana med organizacijami s Programom za pravilno ravnanje s kemikalijami (IOMC). |
| | Neizbežna smrt: ko se pričakuje umirajoče stanje ali smrt pred naslednjim planiranim časom opazovanja. Značilni znaki tega stanja pri glodalcih lahko vključujejo krče, bočni položaj, poležavanje in tremor. (Glej Dokument s smernicani z navodili za humane končne točke (8) za podrobne podatke). |
| | LD50 (srednji smrtni odmerek): je statistično ugotovljen enkraten odmerek snovi, za katerega se lahko pričakuje, da bo povzročil smrt pri 50 odstotkih živali, kadar se jim da po oralni poti. Vrednost LD50 se izrazi z maso preskusne snovi na enoto teže preskusne živali (mg/kg). |
| | Mejni odmerek: nanaša se na odmerek na zgornji omejitvi preskušanja (2000 ali 5000 mg/kg). |
| | Umirajoče stanje: stanje umiranja ali nezmožnosti preživeti, kljub tretiranju. (Glej Dokument s smernicami humane končne točke (8) za več podrobnih podatkov). |
| | Pričakovana smrt: prisotnost kliničnih znakov, ki kažejo na smrt ob znanem času v prihodnosti pred načrtovanim zaključkom eksperimenta, na primer: živali niso sposobne doseči vode ali hrane. (Glej Dokument s smernicani z navodili za humane končne točke (8) za več podrobnih podatkov). |
| | 1.3 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Skupini živali istega spola se dajejo odmerki postopoma z uporabo točno določenih odmerkov 5, 50, 300 in 2000 mg/kg (izjemoma se lahko uporabi dodaten točno določen odmerek 5000 mg/kg, glej oddelek 1.6.2 ). Začetna velikost odmerka se izbere na podlagi opazovalne študije kot odmerek, pri katerem se pričakuje, da se bodo pokazali nekateri znaki toksičnosti, ne da bi povzročil resne toksične posledice ali smrtnost. Klinični znaki in stanja, povezana z bolečino, trpljenjem in neizbežno smrtjo so natančno napisana v posebnem OECD Dokument s smernicani u (8). Nadaljnje skupine živali lahko dobivajo višje ali nižje točno določene odmerke, odvisno od prisotnosti ali odsotnosti znakov toksičnosti ali smrtnosti. Ta postopek se nadaljuje, dokler se ne ugotovi odmerek, ki povzroči očitno toksičnost ali več kot eno smrt, ali pa kadar pri najvišjem odmerku ni videti nobenih učinkov ali kadar nastopijo smrti pri najnižjem odmerku. |
| | 1.4 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.4.1 Izbira živalskih vrst |
| | Najbolj cenjena vrsta glodalca je podgana, čeprav se lahko uporabijo tudi druge vrste glodalcev. Običajno se uporabljajo samice (7). To je zato, ker v literaturi poročila o običajnih LD50 preskusih kažejo, da je le malo razlik v občutljivosti med spoloma, vendar so v tistih primerih, kjer se opažajo razlike, samice na splošno neznatno bolj občutljive (10). Če pa iz poznavanja toksikoloških in toksikokinetičnih lastnosti strukturno sorodnih kemikalij izhaja, da je verjetno, da so samci bolj občutljivi, tedaj je treba uporabiti ta spol. Kadar se preskus opravlja na samcih, je treba imeti za to ustrezno obrazložitev. |
| | Uporabiti je treba zdrave mlade odrasle živali običajno uporabljanih laboratorijskih sevov. Samice morajo biti nuliparne in ne smejo biti breje. Živali morajo biti na začetku odmerjanja stare od 8 do 12 tednov, njihova teža pa se mora gibati v intervalu ± 20 % povprečne teže katerih koli živali, ki so predhodno prejemale odmerek. |
| | 1.4.2 Pogoji bivanja in hranjenja |
| | Temperatura eksperimentalnega prostora za živali mora znašati 22 °C (± 3 °C). Čeprav mora biti relativna vlažnost najmanj 30 % in po možnosti ne sme presegati 70 %, mora biti ciljna vlažnost, razen med čiščenjem prostora, 50 do 60 %. Osvetlitev mora biti umetna, v zaporedju 12 ur svetlobe in 12 ur teme. Za hranjenje se lahko uporabijo običajna predpisane laboratorijske vrste hranjenja z neomejeno količino pitne vode. Živali se lahko razporedijo v kletke po skupinah glede na odmerek, vendar število živali v vsaki kletki ne sme vplivati na neovirano opazovanje vsake živali. |
| | 1.4.3 Priprava živali |
| | Živali se izberejo naključno, označijo se zato, da je možna individualna identifikacija in se zaprejo v kletke najmanj 5 dni pred začetkom odmerjanja, da se lahko prilagodijo laboratorijskim razmeram. |
| | 1.4.4 Priprava odmerkov |
| | Na splošno je treba preskusne snovi dajati v konstantnem volumnu v območju odmerkov, ki jih je treba preskusiti s spreminjanjem koncentracije odmerjenega pripravka. Kadar je treba preskusiti tekoč končni produkt ali mešanico, pa je uporaba nerazredčene preskusne snovi, npr. pri konstantni koncentraciji, morda ustreznejša za naknadno oceno tveganja navedene snovi, in jo nekateri regulatorni organi zahtevajo. Maksimalni volumen odmerka se v nobenem primeru ne sme preseči. Maksimalni volumen tekočine, ki se jo lahko da naenkrat, je odvisen od velikosti preskusne živali. Pri glodalcih volumen običajno ne bi smel presegati 1 ml/100g telesne teže, pri vodnih raztopinah pa se lahko upošteva 2 ml/100 g telesne teže. Glede na formulacijo pripravka za odmerjanje, je priporočena, kadar koli je to mogoče, uporaba vodne raztopine/suspenzije/emulzije v olju (npr. v koruznem olju), sledi po preferenčnem vrstnem redu raztopina/suspenzija/emulzija v olju (npr. koruznem olju) in nato po možnosti raztopina v drugih nosilcih. Za nosilce, ki niso voda, je treba poznati toksikološke lastnosti nosilca. Odmerke je treba pripraviti tik pred dajanjem, razen kadar je znana stabilnost pripravka za obdobje, v katerem bo uporabljen, in je znano, da je sprejemljiva. |
| | 1.5 POSTOPEK |
| | 1.5.1 Dajanje odmerkov |
| | Preskusna snov se daje v enem odmerku z gavažo z uporabo želodčne sonde ali primerne intubacijske kanile. V neobičajnih razmerah, ko enkraten odmerek ni mogoč, lahko odmerek dajemo v manjših frakcijah v obdobju, ki ne presega 24 ur. |
| | Živali se morajo pred odmerjanjem postiti (npr. podgani je treba odtegniti hrano čez noč, vode pa ne; miš ne sme dobiti hrane 3 do 4 ure prej, vodo pa lahko). Po obdobju postenja je treba živali stehtati in jim dati preskusno snov. Po dajanju preskusne snovi se lahko odtegne hrana podganam za nadaljnje 3–4 ure ali mišim za 1–2 uri. Kadar se odmerek daje v frakcijah ves čas, je možno, da bo potrebno oskrbovati živali s hrano in vodo, odvisno od trajanja časovnega obdobja. |
| | 1.5.2 Opazovalna študija |
| | Namen opazovalne študije je omogočanje izbire ustreznega začetnega odmerka za glavno študijo. Preskusna snov se daje posameznim živalim v zaporedju v skladu s tabelo poteka v Prilogi 1. Opazovalna študija se zaključi, ko se lahko sprejme odločitev o začetnem odmerku za glavno študijo (ali če se opazi smrt pri najnižjem točno določenem odmerku). |
| | Začetni odmerek za opazovalno študijo se izbere izmed velikosti točno določenega odmerka 5, 50, 300 in 2000 mg/kg kot odmerek, za katerega se pričakuje, da bo povzročil očitno toksičnost na podlagi, kadar je to mogoče, dokazov iz podatkov in vivo in in vitro za isto kemikalijo in za strukturno sorodne kemikalije. Če takšnih informacij ni, bo začetni odmerek 300 mg/kg. |
| | Med odmerjanjem za vsako žival bo dovoljeno obdobje najmanj 24 ur. Vse živali je treba opazovati najmanj 14 dni. |
| | Izjemoma in le tedaj, kadar je to upravičeno zaradi posebnih regulatornih potreb, se lahko upošteva dodatna večja velikost točno določenega odmerka 5000 mg/kg (glej Prilogo 3). Zaradi skrbi za zaščito živali je preskušanje živali v območjih kategorije GHS 5 (2000–5000 mg/kg) nezaželeno in ga je treba upoštevati le, kadar obstaja velika verjetnost, da imajo rezultati takšnega preskušanja neposreden pomen za zaščito zdravja ljudi ali živali ali za okolje. |
| | Kadar žival, preskušana v opazovalni študiji z najnižjo velikostjo točno določenega odmerka (5 mg/kg) pogine, je običajen postopek tak, da se študija zaključi in snov razvrsti v kategorijo GHS 1 (kot je prikazano v Prilogi 1). Če pa je potrebna nadaljnja potrditev razvrščanja, se lahko izvede neobvezen nadomestni postopek na naslednji način. Drugi živali se odmeri 5 mg/kg. Če ta druga žival pogine, tedaj se bo kategorija GHS 1 potrdila in študija se bo nemudoma zaključila. Če druga žival preživi, se bo dajal odmerek 5 mg/kg največ trem dodatnim živalim. Ker bo nevarnost smrtnosti velika, je treba tem živalim dajati odmerek na zaporeden način, da se zaščiti zdravje živali. Časovni interval med odmerjanjem vsaki živali bi moral biti dovolj dolg, da se ugotovi verjetnost, da bo predhodna žival preživela. Če se zgodi druga smrt, se bo zaporedje odmerjanja nemudoma končalo in odmerjanja za nadaljnje živali ne bo. Zaradi druge smrti (ne glede na število živali, preskušanih v času zaključka) se uvrsti v izid A (2 smrti ali več), upošteva se pravilo o razvrstitvi iz Priloge 2 za 5 mg/kg točno določenega odmerka (kategorija 1, če sta smrti 2 ali če jih je več, ali kategorija 2, če je več kot 1 smrt). Priloga 4 poleg tega daje napotke o razvrstitvi v sistem EU, dokler se ne začne izvajati novi GHS sistem. |
| | 1.5.3 Glavna študija |
| | 1.5.3.1 Število živali in velikosti odmerkov |
| | Ukrepe, ki jih je treba izvesti po preskušanju z začetno velikostjo odmerka, prikazujejo tabele poteka v Prilogi 2. Potreben bo eden od treh ukrepov; ustavitev preskušanja in uvrstitev v ustrezen razred razvrstitve nevarnih snovi, preskus z večjim točno določenim odmerkom ali preskus z manjšim točno določenim odmerkom. Za zaščito živali pa se velikost odmerka, ki je povzročil smrt v opazovalni študiji, ne bo ponovila v glavni študiji (glej Prilogo 2). Izkušnje kažejo, da je najverjetnejši izid z začetno velikostjo odmerka tak, da se snov lahko razvrsti in nadaljnje preskušanje ne bo potrebno. |
| | Običajno se uporabi skupina petih živali istega spola za vsako preiskovano velikost odmerka. Med petimi živali je ena žival iz opazovalne študije, ki prejema odmerke izbrane velikosti skupaj s štirimi dodatnimi živalmi (razen, kar ni običajno, če velikost odmerka, uporabljenega v glavni študiji, ni bila vključena v opazovalni študiji). |
| | Časovni interval med odmerjanjem vsake velikosti je točno opredeljen z nastopom, trajanjem in resnostjo toksičnih znakov. Tretiranje živali z naslednjim odmerkom je treba prestaviti na kasneje, dokler ni gotovo, da so živali, ki so predhodno dobile odmerek, preživele. Priporočeno je po potrebi obdobje 3 do 4 dni med odmerjanjem vsake velikosti odmerka za upoštevanje opazovanja zapoznele toksičnosti. Časovni interval se lahko ustrezno prilagodi, npr. v primeru brezuspešnega odziva. |
| | Kadar se upošteva zgornji točno določeni odmerek 5000 mg/kg, je treba izpeljati postopek, opisan v Prilogi 3 (glej tudi oddelek 1.6.2). |
| | 1.5.3.2 Mejni preskus |
| | Mejni preskus se uporablja predvsem v primerih, kadar ima izvajalec preskusa informacije, ki kažejo, da bo preskusni material verjetno netoksičen oziroma bo njegova toksičnost le nad regulatornimi mejnimi odmerki. Informacije o toksičnosti preskusnega materiala se lahko pridobi na podlagi znanja o podobnih preskusnih spojinah ali podobnih preskusnih mešanicah ali produktih, ob upoštevanju vrste in odstotka sestavin, za katere je znano, da so toksikološko pomembne. V tistih primerih, kjer je le malo ali nič informacij o njegovi toksičnosti, ali kadar se pričakuje, da bo preskusni material toksičen, je treba opraviti glavni preskus. |
| | Uporaba običajnega postopka, začetni odmerek opazovalne študije 2000 mg/kg (ali izjemoma 5000 mg/kg), čemur sledi odmerjanje za naslednje 4 živali s to velikostjo odmerka, se upošteva kot mejni preskus za to navodilo. |
| | 1.6 OPAZOVANJA |
| | Živali se opazujejo posamezno po odmerjanju najmanj enkrat v prvih 30 minutah, periodično v prvih 24 urah, s posebno pozornostjo v prvih 4 urah in nato 14 dni vsak dan, razen kadar jih je treba odstraniti iz študije in humano usmrtiti, če je njihovo zdravje ogroženo ali ko so najdene poginule. Trajanja opazovanja ni treba strogo določiti. Opredeliti ga je treba na podlagi toksičnih reakcij, časa nastopa in trajanja obdobja okrevanja ter ga je zato mogoče podaljšati, kadar je to potrebno. Obdobja, ko se pojavijo znaki toksičnosti in ko izginejo, so pomembna, zlasti če obstaja možnost, da bodo toksični znaki zapozneli (11). Vsa opazovanja se sistematsko zabeležijo, za vsako žival se vodijo posamezne kartoteke. |
| | Dodatna opazovanja bodo potrebna, če živali še vedno kažejo znake toksičnosti. Opazovanja morajo vključevati spremembe na koži in kožuhu, očeh in sluznicah, in tudi na dihalih, v obtoku, na avtonomnih in centralnih živčnih sistemih ter pri somatomotoričnih aktivnostih in vzorcu vedenja. Pozornost je treba posvetiti opazovanjem trezorjev, krčem, slinjenju, driski, otrplosti, spanju in komi. Treba je upoštevati principe in kriterije, povzete v Dokumentu s smernicami za humane končne točke (8). Živali, najdene v umirajočem stanju, in živali, ki kažejo hudo bolečino in trajne znake resne stiske, je treba humano usmrtiti. Kadar se živali usmrtijo iz humanih razlogov ali so najdene poginule, je treba čas smrti zabeležiti kar se da natančno. |
| | 1.6.1 Telesna teža |
| | Posamezne teže živali je treba ugotoviti tik pred dajanjem preskusne snovi in najmanj enkrat na teden po tem. Treba je izračunati in zabeležiti spremembe teže. Na koncu preskusa se preživele živali stehtajo in nato humano usmrtijo. |
| | 1.6.2 Patologija |
| | Za vse preskusne živali (vključno s tistimi, ki poginejo med preskušanjem ali se odstranijo iz študije zaradi ogroženega zdravja živali) je treba opraviti popolno obdukcijo. Vse natančne patološke spremembe je treba zabeležiti za vsako žival. Mikroskopski pregled organov živali, ki so preživele 24 ali več ur po začetnem odmerjanju, se prav tako lahko upošteva, ker lahko da koristne informacije. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | Zagotoviti je treba podatke za vsako posamezno žival. Nadalje je treba vse podatke prikazati v obliki preglednice, kjer je za vsako preskusno skupino prikazano število uporabljenih živali, število živali, ki kažejo znake toksičnosti, število živali, najdenih poginulih med preskusom ali usmrčenih iz humanih razlogov, čas smrti posameznih živali, opis in časovni potek toksičnih učinkov in reverzibilnost ter ugotovitve obdukcije. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije, kot je primerno: |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - fizikalno stanje, čistost in, kjer je pomembno, fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti (vključno z izomernostjo), |
| | - identifikacijske podatke, vključno s številko CAS. |
| | Nosilec (če je primerno): |
| | - utemeljitev izbire nosilca, če to ni voda. |
| | Preskusne živali: |
| | - uporabljena vrsta/sev, |
| | - mikrobiološko stanje živali, kadar je znano, |
| | - število, starost in spol živali (vključno, kjer je primerno, utemeljitev uporabe samcev namesto samic), |
| | - vir, pogoji vzdrževanja, vrsta hrane, itd. |
| | Pogoji preskusa: |
| | - podatki o formulaciji preskusne snovi, vključno s podatki o fizikalni obliki snovi, ki jo dajemo, |
| | - podatki o formulaciji preskusne snovi, vključno z volumni odmerjanja in časom odmerjanja, |
| | - podatki o kakovosti hrane in vode (vključno z vrsto hrane/vir, vir vode), |
| | - utemeljitev za izbiro začetnega odmerka. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - preglednica odzivnih podatkov in velikost odmerka za vsako žival (npr. živali, ki kažejo znake toksičnosti, vključno s smrtnostjo, vrsto, resnostjo in trajanjem učinkov), |
| | - preglednica telesne teže in sprememb telesne teže, |
| | - teže posameznih živali na dan odmerjanja in v tedenskih intervalih po tem ter čas smrti ali usmrtitve; datum in čas smrti, če nastopi pred načrtovano usmrtitvijo, |
| | - časovni potek nastopa znakov toksičnosti in ali so bili reverzibilni za vsako žival, |
| | - ugotovitve obdukcije in histopatološke ugotovitve za vsako žival, če so na voljo. |
| | Razprava in razlaga rezultatov. |
| | Zaključki. |
| | 4. LITERATURA: |
| | (1) British Toxicology Society Working Party on Toxicity (1984). Special report: a new approach to the classification of substances and preparations on the basis of their acute toxicity. Human Toxicol., 3, 85–92. |
| | (2) Van den Heuvel, M.J., Dayan, A.D. and Shillaker, R.O. (1987). Evalution of the BTS approach to the testing of substances and preparations for their acute toxicity. Human Toxicol., 6, 279–291. |
| | (3) Van den Heuvel, M.J., Clark, D.G., Fielder, R.J., Koundakjian, P.P., Oliver, G.J.A., Pelling, D., Tomlinson, N.J and Walker, A.P.(1990). The international validation of a fixed-dose procedure as an alternative to the classical LD50 test. Fd. Chem. Toxicol., 28, 469–482. |
| | (4) Whitehead, A. and Curnow, R.N. (1992). Statistical evaluation of the fixed-dose procedure. Fd. Chem. Toxicol., 30, 313–324. |
| | (5) Stallard, N. and Whitehead, A.(1995). Reducing numbers in the fixed-dose procedure. Human Exptl. Toxicol. 14, 315–323. Human Exptl. Toxicol. |
| | (6) Stallard, N., Whitehead, A. and Rigeway, P.(2002). Statistical evaluation of the reserved fixed-dose procedure. – Hum. Exp. Toxicol., 21, 183–196. |
| | (7) OECD (2001). Guidance Document on Acute Oral Toxicity Testing. Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assessment N. 24. Paris. |
| | (8) OECD (2000). Guidance Document on the Recognition, Assessment and Use of Clinical Signs as Humane Endpoints for Experimental Animals Used in Safety Evaluation. Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assessment N. 19. |
| | (9) OECD (1998). Harmonised Integrated Hazard Classification for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals in November 1998, Part 2, p.11 [http://webnet1.oecd.org/oecd/pages/home/displaygeneral/0,3380,EN-documents-521-14-no-24-no-0,FF.html]. |
| | (10) Lipnick, P.L., Cotruvo, J.A., Hill, R.N., Bruce, R.D., Stitzel, K.A., Walker, A.P., Chu, 1., Goddart, M., Segal, L., Springer, J.A. and Myers, R.C.(1995). Comparison of the Up-and-Down, Convential LD50, and Fixed-Dose Acute Toxicity Procedures, Fd. Chem. Toxicol. 33, 223–231. |
| | (11) Chan P.K. and A.W. Hayes (1994) Chapter 16 Acute Toxicity and Eye Irritation. In: Principles and Methods of Toxicology. 3rd Edition, A.W. Hayes, Editor, Raven Press, Ltd. New York, USA. |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2C |
| | "B.1 tris AKUTNA ORALNA TOKSIČNOST – METODA RAZREDOV AKUTNE TOKSIČNOSTI |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta preskusna metoda ustreza OECD TG 423 (2001) |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Metoda razredov akutne toksičnosti (1), prikazana v tem preskusu, je postopen postopek z uporabo treh živali enega spola za vsak korak. Odvisno od smrtnosti in/ali umirajočega stanja živali so lahko potrebni 2–4 koraki za omogočanje presoje o akutni toksičnosti preskusne snovi. Ta postopek je ponovljiv, zanj se uporablja zelo malo živali in omogoča razvrstitev snovi na podoben način kot z drugimi metodami preskušanja akutne toksičnosti. Metoda razredov akutne toksičnosti temelji na biometričnih vrednotenjih (2)(3)(4)(5) s točno določenimi odmerki, primerno ločenimi med seboj, da se omogoči uvrščanje snovi za razvrstitev in za ugotavljanje nevarnosti. Metoda, kakor je bila prejeta leta 1996, je bila obširno validirana in vivo v primerjavi s podatki za LD50, dobljenimi iz literature, tako nacionalne (6) kakor tudi mednarodne (7). |
| | Navodila za izbiro najustreznejše preskusne metode za dani namen se lahko poiščejo v Dokumentu s smernicami za preskušanje akutne oralne toksičnosti (8). Ta dokument s smernicami vsebuje tudi dodatne informacije o postopku in razlagi metode preskušanja B.1 tris. |
| | Preskusnih snovi, v odmerkih, za katere je znano, da povzročajo vidno bolečino in hude motnje pri živalih zaradi jedkega ali izrazito dražilnega delovanja, ni treba dajati. Umirajoče živali ali živali, ki očitno trpijo ali kažejo znake hudih in trajnih okvar, se usmrti na human način in se jih upošteva pri razlagi rezultatov preskusa na enak način, kot živali, ki so poginile med preskusom. Kriterije za sprejem odločitve o usmrtitvi umirajočih živali ali živali, ki zelo trpijo, ter napotke za prepoznavanje napovedljive ali neizbežne smrti obravnava poseben Dokument s smernicami (9). |
| | Metoda uporablja predhodno določene odmerke, rezultati pa omogočajo razvrstitev snovi in uvrstitev v skladu z Globalno usklajenim sistemom za razvrščanje kemikalij, ki povzročajo akutno toksičnost (10). |
| | V principu metoda ni namenjena omogočanju izračuna točnega LD50, vendar upošteva določitev opredeljenih razponov izpostavitve, kjer se pričakuje smrtnost, ker je smrt dela živali še vedno glavna končna točka tega preskusa. Ta metoda upošteva določitev vrednosti LD50 le, kadar iz najmanj 2 odmerkov sledi smrtnost, višja kakor 0 % in nižja kakor 100 %. Uporaba izbire predhodno določenih odmerkov, ne glede na preskusno snov, z razvrstitvijo, ki je izrecno povezana s številom živali, opazovanih v različnih stanjih, izboljšuje možnost za doslednost in ponovljivost poročanja med laboratoriji. |
| | Laboratorij preskušanja mora upoštevati vse razpoložljive informacije o preskusni snovi pred začetkom opravljanja študije. Takšne informacije bodo vključevale vrsto in kemijsko sestavo snovi; njene fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti; rezultat katerih koli drugih preskusov toksičnosti na snovi, in vitro ali in vivo; toksikološke podatke o strukturno sorodnih ter pričakovano uporabo/uporabe snovi. Te informacije so potrebne, da vse, ki jih to zadeva, zagotovijo, da je preskus pomemben za zaščito zdravja ljudi in da bo v pomoč pri izbiri najustreznejšega začetnega odmerka. |
| | 1.2 DEFINICIJE |
| | Akutna oralna toksičnost: nanaša se na tiste škodljive učinke, ki se pokažejo po dajanju enega odmerka snovi ali več odmerkov, danih v 24 urah. |
| | Kasnejša smrt: pomeni, da žival ne pogine ali da ne kaže znakov, da bo poginila, v 48 urah, vendar pogine kasneje med 14 dnevnim obdobjem opazovanja. |
| | Odmerek: je količina dane preskusne snovi. Odmerek je izražen kot masa preskusne snovi na enoto teže preskusne živali (npr. mg/kg). |
| | GHS: Sistem globalno usklajene razvrstitve za kemijske snovi in mešanice. Skupna aktivnost OECD (zdravje ljudi in okolje), Odbor ZN strokovnjakov za prevoz nevarnega blaga (fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti) in ILO (sporočanje o nevarnosti) ter koordinirana med organizacijami s programom za pravilno ravnanje s kemikalijami (IOMC). |
| | Neizbežna smrt: ko se pričakuje umirajoče stanje ali smrt pred naslednjim planiranim časom opazovanja. Značilni znaki tega stanja pri glodalcih lahko vključujejo krče, bočni položaj, poležavanje in tremor. (Glej Dokument s smernicami z napotki za humane mejne cilje (9) za več podrobnih podatkov). |
| | LD50(srednji smrtni odmerek): je statistično ugotovljen enkraten odmerek snovi, za katerega se lahko pričakuje, da bo povzročil smrt pri 50 odstotkih živali, kadar se jim da oralno. Vrednost LD50 je izražena z maso preskusne snovi na enoto teže preskusne živali (mg/kg). |
| | Mejni odmerek: nanaša se na odmerek na zgornji omejitvi pri preskušanju (2000 ali 5000 mg/kg). |
| | Umirajoče stanje: stanje umiranja ali nezmožnosti preživeti kljub tretiranju. (Glej Dokument s smernicami humane končne točke (9) za več podrobnih podatkov). |
| | Pričakovana smrt: prisotnost kliničnih znakov, ki kažejo na smrt ob znanem času v prihodnosti pred načrtovanim zaključkom eksperimenta, na primer: nezmožnost živali, da bi dosegle vodo ali hrano. (Glej Priročnik napotki za humane končne točke (9) za več podrobnih podatkov). |
| | 1.3 PRINCIP PRESKUSA |
| | Princip preskusa je tak, da temelji na postopnosti z uporabo minimalnega števila živali za vsak korak, za omogočanje uvrstitve se pridobi dovolj informacij o akutni toksičnosti preskusne snovi. Snov se daje oralno skupini eksperimentalnih v enem od predhosno opredeljenih odmerkov. Snov se testira z uporabo postopka po korakih, za vsak korak se uporabi tri živali istega spola, običajno ženskega.Prisotnost ali odsotnost smrtnosti živali, povezane s spojino, ki so prejemale odmerek na enem koraku, bo določila naslednji korak, npr.: |
| | - nadaljnje preskušanje ni potrebno, |
| | - odmerjanje za tri dodatne živali, z enakim odmerkom, |
| | - odmerjanje za tri dodatne živali, z naslednjo večjo ali naslednjo manjšo velikostjo odmerka. |
| | Podrobnosti preskusnega postopka so opisane v Prilogi 1. Metoda bo omogočila presojo glede uvrstitve preskusne snovi v enega v seriji razredov toksičnosti, opredeljenih s točno določenimi smrtnimi vrednostmi LD50. |
| | 1.4 OPIS METODE |
| | 1.4.1 Izbira živalskih vrst |
| | Najbolj cenjena vrsta glodalca je podgana, čeprav se lahko uporabijo tudi druge vrste glodalcev. Običajno se uporabljajo samice (9), to pa zato, ker pregledi običajnih LD50 preskusov v literaturi kažejo, da je le malo razlik v občutljivosti med spoloma, vendar so v tistih primerih, kjer se opažajo razlike, samice v splošnem neznatno bolj občutljive (11). Če pa iz poznavanja toksikoloških in toksikokinetičnih lastnosti strukturno sorodnih kemikalij izhaja, da je verjetno, da bodo samci bolj občutljivi, tedaj je treba uporabiti ta spol. Kadar poteka preskušanje na samcih, je treba imeti za to ustrezno obrazložitev. |
| | Uporabiti je treba zdrave mlade odrasle živali običajno uporabljanih laboratorijskih sevov. Samice morajo biti nuliparne in ne smejo biti breje. Živali morajo biti na začetku odmerjanja stare 8 do 12 tednov, njihova teža pa se mora gibati v intervalu ± 20 % povprečne teže katerih koli živali, ki so predhodno prejemale odmerek. |
| | 1.4.2 Pogoji bivanja in hranjenja |
| | Temperatura prostora za preskuse z živalmi mora znašati 22 °C (± 3 °C). Čeprav mora biti relativna vlažnost najmanj 30 % in po možnosti ne sme presegati 70 %, mora biti ciljna vlažnost, razen med čiščenjem prostora, 50 do 60 %. Osvetlitev mora biti umetna v zaporedju 12 ur svetlobe in 12 ur teme. Za hranjenje se lahko uporabijo običajne predpisane laboratorijska vrste hranjenja z neomejeno količino pitne vode. Živali se lahko razporedijo v kletke po skupinah glede na odmerek, vendar število živali v vsaki kletki ne sme vplivati na neovirano opazovanje vsake živali. |
| | 1.4.3 Priprava živali |
| | Živali se izberejo naključno, označijo se zato, da je možna individualna identifikacija in se zaprejo v kletke najmanj 5 dni pred začetkom odmerjanja, da se lahko prilagodijo laboratorijskim razmeram. |
| | 1.4.4 Priprava odmerkov |
| | Na splošno je treba preskusne snovi dajati v konstantnem volumnu v razponu odmerkov, ki jih je treba preskusiti s spreminjanjem koncentracije pripravka odmerjanja. Kadar se namerava preskusiti tekoč končni produkt ali mešanico, je uporaba nerazredčene preskusne snovi, npr. pri konstantni koncentraciji, morda ustreznejša za naknadno oceno tveganja navedene snovi, in jo nekateri regulatorni organi zahtevajo. Maksimalni volumen odmerka se v nobenem primeru ne sme prekoračiti. Maksimalni volumen tekočine, ki se jo lahko da živali naenkrat, je odvisen od velikosti preskusne živali. Pri glodalcih volumen običajno ne sme presegati 1 ml/100g telesne teže, pri vodnih raztopinah pa lahko upoštevamo 2 ml/100 g telesne teže. Glede na formulacijo preparata odmerjanja je priporočena uporaba vodne raztopine/suspenzije/emulzije, kjer koli je to možno, sledi po preferenčnem vrstnem redu raztopina/suspenzija/emulzija v olju (npr. koruzno olje) in nato po možnosti raztopina v drugih nosilcih. Za nosilce, ki niso voda, je treba poznati toksikološke lastnosti nosilca. Odmerke je treba pripraviti tik pred dajanjem, razen kadar je znana stabilnost pripravka za obdobje, v katerem bo uporabljen, in je znano, da je sprejemljiva. |
| | 1.5 POSTOPEK |
| | 1.5.1 Dajanje odmerkov |
| | Preskusna snov se daje v enem odmerku z gavažo z uporabo želodčne sonde ali primerne intubacijske kanile. V neobičajnih razmerah, ko enojni odmerek ni mogoč, lahko odmerek dajemo v manjših frakcijah v obdobju, ki ne presega 24 ur. |
| | Živali se morajo pred odmerjanjem postiti (npr. podgani je treba odtegniti hrano čez noč, vode pa ne; miš ne sme dobiti hrane 3 do 4 ure prej, vodo pa lahko). Po obdobju postenja je treba živali stehtati in jim dati preskusno snov. Po dajanju preskusne snovi se lahko odtegne hrano podganam za nadaljnje 3–4 ure ali mišim za 1–2 uri. Kadar se odmerek daje v frakcijah ves čas, je možno, da bo potrebno oskrbovati živali s hrano in vodo, odvisno od trajanja časovnega obdobja. |
| | 1.5.2 Število živali in velikost odmerkov |
| | Za vsak korak so potrebne 3 živali. Velikost odmerka, ki ga bo treba uporabiti kot začetni odmerek, se izbere izmed štirih stalnih velikosti, 5, 50, 300 in 2000 mg/kg telesne teže. Začetna velikost odmerka bi morala biti tista, ki bo najverjetneje povzročila smrtnost nekaterih živali odmerjanja. Tabele poteka v Prilogi 1 opisujejo postopek, ki ga je treba izvesti za vsakega od začetnih odmerkov. Priloga 4 daje poleg tega navodila za uvrstitev v sistem EU, dokler se ne bo izvajal novi GHS sistem. |
| | Kadar je iz razpoložljivih informacije razvidno, da smrtnost pri največji velikosti (2000 mg/kg telesne teže) ni verjetna, je treba opraviti mejni preskus. Kadar o snovi, ki jo je treba preskusiti, ni nobenih informacij, je priporočeno zaradi zdravja živali uporabiti začetni odmerek 30 mg/kg telesne teže. |
| | Časovni interval med skupinami tretiranja je točno določen z nastopom, trajanjem in resnostjo toksičnih znakov. Tretiranje živali z naslednjim odmerkom je treba prestaviti na kasnejši čas, dokler ni gotovo, da bodo živali, ki so prej prejemale odmerek, preživele. |
| | Izjemoma, in le kadar to opravičujejo posebne regulatorne zahteve, se lahko upošteva uporaba dodatne večje velikosti odmerka 5000 mg/kg telesne teže (glej Prilogo 2). Zaradi skrbi za zaščito zdravja živali je preskušanje živali v območjih kategorije GHS 5 (2000–5000 mg/kg) nezaželeno in ga je treba upoštevati le, kadar obstaja velika verjetnost, da bi rezultati takšnega preskusa imeli neposreden pomen za zaščito zdravja ljudi ali živali ali za okolje. |
| | 1.5.3 Mejni preskus |
| | Mejni preskus se uporablja predvsem v primerih, kadar ima izvajalec preskusa informacije, ki kažejo, da bo preskusni material verjetno netoksičen oziroma bo njegova toksičnost le nad regulatornimi mejnimi odmerki. Informacije o toksičnosti preskusnega materiala se lahko pridobijo na podlagi znanja o podobnih preskusnih spojinah ali podobnih preskusnih mešanicah ali produktih, ob upoštevanju vrste in odstotka sestavin, za katere je znano, da so toksikološko pomembne. V tistih primerih, kjer je le malo ali nič informacij o njegovi toksičnosti, ali kadar se pričakuje, da bo preskusni material toksičen, je treba opraviti glavni preskus. |
| | Mejni preskus z eno velikostjo odmerka 2000 mg/kg telesne teže se lahko opravi s šestimi živalmi (tri živali na en korak). Izjemoma se lahko opravi mejni preskus z eno velikostjo odmerka 5000 mg/kg s tremi živalmi (glej Prilogo 2). Če nastane smrtnost, povezana s preskusno snovjo, bo morda potrebno izvesti nadaljnje preskušanje z naslednjo nižjo velikostjo. |
| | 1.6 OPAZOVANJA |
| | Živali se opazujejo posamezno po odmerjanju najmanj enkrat v prvih 30 minutah, periodično v prvih 24 urah, s posebno pozornostjo v prvih 4 urah in nato 14 dni vsak dan, razen kadar jih je treba odstraniti iz študije in humano usmrtiti zaradi ogroženega zdravja ali ko so najdene poginule. Trajanja opazovanja ni treba strogo določiti. Opredeliti ga je treba na podlagi toksičnih reakcij, časa nastopa in trajanja okrevanja ter ga je zato mogoče podaljšati, kadar je to potrebno. Obdobja, ko se pojavijo znaki toksičnosti in ko izginejo, so pomembna, zlasti če obstaja težnja, da bodo toksični znaki zapozneli (12). Vsa opazovanja se sistematsko zabeležijo, za vsako žival se vodijo posamezne kartoteke. |
| | Dodatna opazovanja bodo potrebna, če živali še vedno kažejo znake toksičnosti. Opazovanja morajo vključevati spremembe na koži in kožuhu, očeh in sluznicah, in tudi na dihalih, v obtoku, na avtonomnih in centralnih živčnih sistemih ter somatomotorični aktivnosti in vedenjskem vzorcu. Pozornost je treba posvetiti opazovanjem tremorjev, krčem, slinjenju, driski, otrplosti, spanju in komi. Treba je upoštevati principe in kriterije, povzete v Dokumentu s smernicami z napotki za humane končne točke (9). Živali, najdene v umirajočem stanju, in živali, ki kažejo hudo bolečino in trajne znake hudih okvar, je treba humano usmrtiti. Kadar živali usmrtimo zaradi humanih razlogov ali so najdene poginule, je treba čas smrti zabeležiti kar se da natančno. |
| | 1.6.1 Telesna teža |
| | Posamezne teže živali je treba določiti tik pred dajanjem preskusne snovi in najmanj enkrat na teden po tem. Treba je izračunati in zabeležiti spremembe teže. Na koncu preskusa se preživele živali stehtajo in humano usmrtijo. |
| | 1.6.2 Patologija |
| | Za vse preskusne živali (vključno s tistimi, ki poginejo med preskusom ali se odstranijo iz študije zaradi zaščite zdravja živali) je treba opraviti popolno obdukcijo. Vse natančne patološke spremembe je treba zabeležiti za vsako žival. Mikroskopski pregled organov, ki kažejo resne patološke znake, pri živalih, ki so preživele 24 ali več ur po začetnem odmerjanju se prav tako lahko upošteva, ker lahko da koristne informacije. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | Zagotoviti je treba podatke za vsako posamezno žival. Nadalje je treba vse podatke prikazati v obliki preglednice, kjer je za vsako preskusno skupino prikazano število uporabljenih živali, število živali, ki kažejo znake toksičnosti, število živali, najdenih poginulih med preskusom ali usmrčenih iz humanih razlogov, čas smrti posameznih živali, opis in časovni potek toksičnih učinkov in reverzibilnosti ter ugotovitve obdukcije. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 Poročilo o preskusu |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije, kot je primerno: |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - fizikalno stanje, čistost in kjer je pomembno fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti (vključno z izomerizacijo), |
| | - identifikacijski podatki, vključno s številko CAS. |
| | Nosilec (če je primerno): |
| | - utemeljitev izbire nosilca, če to ni voda. |
| | Preskusne živali: |
| | - uporabljena vrsta/sev, |
| | - mikrobiološko stanje živali, kadar je znano, |
| | - število, starost in spol živali (vključno, kjer je primerno, utemeljitev za uporabo samcev namesto samic), |
| | - vir, pogoji vzdrževanja, vrsta hrane, itd. |
| | Pogoji preskusa: |
| | - podatki o formulaciji preskusne snovi, vključno s podatki o fizikalni obliki snovi, ki se daje, |
| | - podatki o dajanju preskusne snovi, vključno z volumni odmerjanja in časom odmerjanja, |
| | - podatki o kakovosti hrane in vode (vključno z vrsto prehranjevanja/vir, vir vode), |
| | - utemeljitev za izbiro začetnega odmerka. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - tabelarni prikaz odzivnih podatkov in velikost odmerka za vsako žival (npr. živali, ki kažejo znake toksičnosti, vključno s smrtnostjo; vrsto, resnost in trajanje učinkov), |
| | - tabelarni prikaz telesne teže in sprememb telesne teže, |
| | - teže posameznih živali na dan odmerjanja in v tedenskih intervalih po tem ter čas smrti ali usmrtitve, |
| | - datum in čas smrti, če nastopi pred načrtovano usmrtitvijo, |
| | - časovni potek nastopa znakov toksičnosti in ali so bili le–ti reverzibilni za vsako žival, |
| | - ugotovitve obdukcije in histopatološke ugotovitve za vsako žival, če so na voljo. |
| | Razprava in razlaga rezultatov. |
| | Zaključki. |
| | 4. LITERATURA: |
| | (1) Roll R., Höfer-Bosse Th. And Kayser D. (1986). New Perspectives in Acute Toxicity Testing of Chemicals. Toxicol. Lett., Suppl. 31, 86. |
| | (2) Roll R., Riebschläger M., Mischke U. and Kayser D. (1989). Neue Wege zur Bestimmung der akuten Toxizität von Chemikalien. Bundesgeundheitsblatt 32, 336–341. |
| | (3) Diener W., Sichha L., Mischke U., Kayser D. and Schlede E. (1994). The Biometric Evalution of the Acute Toxic-Class Method (Oral.) Arch. Toxicol. 68, 559–610. |
| | (4) Diener W., Mischke U., Kayser D. and Schlede E. (1995). The Biometric Evalution of the OECD Modified Version of the Acute Toxic-Class Method (Oral.) Arch. Toxicol. 69, 729–734. |
| | (5) Diener W. and Schlede E. (1999). Acute Toxicity Class Methods: Alterations to LD/LC50 Tests. ALTEX 16, 129–134. |
| | (6) Schlede E., Mischke U., Roll R. and Kayser D. (1992). A National Validation Study of the Acute-Toxic-Class Method – An Alternativa to the LC50 Test. Arch. Toxicol. 66, 455–470. |
| | (7) Schlede E., Mischke U., Diener W. and Kayser D. (1994). The International Validation Study of the Acute Toxic-Class Method (Oral). Arch. Toxicol. 69, 659–670. |
| | (8) OECD (2001). Guidance Document on Acute Oral Toxicity Testing. Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assessment N. 24. Paris. |
| | (9) OECD (2000). Guidance Document on the Recognition, Assessment and Use of Clinical Signs as Humane Endpoints for Experimental Animals Used in Safety Evaluation. Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assessment N. 19. |
| | (10) OECD (1998). Harmonised Integrated Hazard Classification for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals in November 1998, Part 2, p.11 [http://webnet1.oecd.org/oecd/pages/home/displaygeneral/0,3380,EN-documents-521-14-no-24-no-0,FF.html ]. |
| | (11) Lipnick, P.L., Cotruvo, J.A., Hill, R.N., Bruce, R.D., Stitzel, K.A., Walker, A.P., Chu, 1., Goddart, M., Segal, L., Springer, J.A. and Myers, R.C.(1995). Comparison of the Up-and-Down, Convential LD50 , and Fixed Dose Acute Toxicity Procedures, Fd. Chem. Toxicol. 33, 223–131. |
| | (12) Chan P.K. and A.W. Hayes (1994). Chap. 16 Acute Toxicity and Eye Irritation. Principles and Methods of Toxicology. Third Edition, A.W. Hayes, Editor, Raven Press, Ltd. Nex York, USA." |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2D |
| | B.4 AKUTNA TOKSIČNOST: DERMALNA DRAŽILNOST/JEDKOST |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta metoda ustreza OECD TG 404 (2002). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Pri pripravi te dopolnjene metode je veljala posebna pozornost možnim izboljšavam v zvezi s skrbjo za zdravje živali in vrednotenje vseh obstoječih informacij o preskusni snovi, da bi se izognili nepotrebnemu preskušanju na laboratorijskih živalih. Ta metoda vključuje priporočilo, da je treba pred začetkom opravljanja preskusa za dražilnost/jedkost snovi in vivo opraviti analizo tehtnosti dokazov na podlagi pomembnih obstoječih podatkov. Kadar ni na voljo dovolj podatkov, se lahko pridobijo z uporabo zaporednega preskušanja (1). Strategija preskušanja vključuje opravljanje validiranih in sprejetih in vitro preskusov in je podana kot priloga k tej metodi. Kjer je to ustrezno, je poleg tega priporočena zaporedna aplikacija treh preskusnih obližev na živali v začetnem preskusu in vivo namesto sočasne. |
| | Za znanstveno zanesljivost in zdravje živali je koristno, da se preskušanje in vivo ne začne opravljati, dokler se niso ocenili vsi razpoložljivi podatki, pomembni za možno dermalno dražilnost/jedkost snovi z analizo tehtnosti dokazov. Takšni podatki bodo vključevali dokaze obstoječih študij na ljudeh in/ali laboratorijskih živalih, dokaze o dražilnosti/jedkosti ene ali več strukturno sorodnih snovi ali mešanic takšnih snovi, podatke, ki bodo dokazovali močno kislost ali alkalnost snovi (2)(3), in rezultate iz validiranih in sprejetih in vitro ali ex vivo preskusov (4)(5)(5a). Ta analiza bi morala zmanjšati potrebo po in vivo preskušanju dermalne jedkosti/dražilnosti snovi, za katere obstaja že dovolj dokazov iz drugih študij glede navedenih dveh končnih točk. |
| | Bolj upoštevana strategija zaporednega preskušanja, ki vključuje opravljanje validiranih in sprejetih in vitro ali ex vivo preskusov za jedkost/ dražilnost, je vključena kot priloga k tej metodi. To strategijo so razvili in soglasno priporočili udeleženci OECD delavnice (6) in se je sprejela kot priporočena strategija preskušanja v Globalno usklajenem sistemu za razvrstitev kemijskih snovi (GHS) (7). Priporočeno se je ravnati po tej strategiji preskušanja pred opravljanjem preskušanja in vivo. Za nove snovi je priporočen postopen način preskušanja za pridobivanje znanstveno zanesljivih podatkov o jedkosti/dražilnosti snovi. Za obstoječe snovi, za katere ni dovolj podatkov, je treba uporabiti to strategijo za zapolnitev vrzeli manjkajočih podatkov. Uporabo drugačne strategije preskušanja ali postopka ali odločitev, da se ne bo uporabil način preskušanja po korakih, je treba upravičiti. |
| | Če določitev jedkosti ali dražilnosti ni mogoča na podlagi analize tehtnosti dokazov, skladne s strategijo zaporednega preskušanja, je treba upoštevati preskus in vivo (glej prilogo). |
| | 1.2 DEFINICIJE |
| | Dermalna dražilnost: je nastanek reverzibilne poškodbe kože, ki sledi uporabi preskusne snovi, trajajoči do 4 ure. |
| | Dermalna jedkost: je nastanek ireverzibilne poškodbe kože, in sicer vidne nekroze skozi epidermisa in v dermis , ki sledi uporabi preskusne snovi, trajajoči do 4 ure. Za jedke reakcije so značilni čiri, krvavitve, krvave kraste in na koncu štirinajstdnevnih opazovanj sprememba barve zaradi pobledele kože, celi predeli plešavosti in brazgotine. Treba je upoštevati histopatologijo za vrednotenje sumljivih lezij. |
| | 1.3 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Snov, ki jo je treba preskusiti, se nanese na kožo preskusne živali v enkratnem odmerku; netretirane površine kože preskusne živali služijo za kontrolo. Stopnja dražilosti/jedkosti se odčita in zabeleži v določenih intervalih in nadalje opiše, da se zagotovi celovito vrednotenje reverzibilnosti ali ireverzibilnosti opaženih učinkov. |
| | Živali, ki kažejo trajne znake hudega trpljenja in/ali bolečine v kateri koli fazi preskusa je treba humano usmrtiti in snov skladno s tem oceniti. Kriterije za sprejem odločitve o humani usmrtitvi umirajočih in hudo trpečih živali je mogoče najti v sklicu (8). |
| | 1.4 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.4.1 Priprava za preskus in vivo |
| | 1.4.1.1 Priprava živalske vrste |
| | Kunec beličnik je najbolj zaželena laboratorijska žival in uporabljajo se zdravi mladi odrasli kunci. Za uporabo drugih vrst je potrebna obrazložitev. |
| | 1.4.1.2 Priprava živali |
| | Približno 24 ur pred preskusom je treba odstraniti kožuh s skrbnim striženjem na hrbtnem delu trupa živali. Paziti je treba, da se ne odrgne koža in uporabiti le živali z zdravo, nepoškodovano kožo. |
| | Nekateri kunčji sevi imajo goste zaplate dlak, ki so bolj izrazite v nekaterih obdobjih med letom. Takšni predeli goste rasti dlak se ne smejo uporabiti kot preskusni predeli. |
| | 1.4.1.3 Pogoji bivanja in hranjenja |
| | Živali morajo imeti vsaka svoj prostor. Temperatura prostora za preskuse z živalmi mora znašati za kunce 20 °C (± 3 °C). Čeprav mora biti relativna vlažnost najmanj 30 % in po možnosti ne sme presegati 70 %, mora biti ciljna vlažnost, razen med čiščenjem prostora, 50 do 60 %. Osvetlitev mora biti umetna v zaporedju 12 ur svetlobe in 12 ur teme. Za hranjenje se lahko uporabijo običajne predpisane laboratorijske vrste hrane z neomejeno količino pitne vode. |
| | 1.4.2 Preskusni postopek |
| | 1.4.2.1 Aplikacija preskusne snovi |
| | Preskusno snov je treba nanesti na del površine kože (približno 6 cm2) in pokriti z obližem iz gaze, ki se pritrdi z nedražilim trakom. Kadar neposredna aplikacija ni mogoče (npr. tekoče snovi ali nekatere kašnate zmesi), je treba preskusno snov najprej nanesti na obliž iz gaze, ki se nato uporabi na koži. Obliž mora biti v ohlapnem stiku s kožo, pritrjen z ustrezno napol zapiralno obvezo med trajanjem izpostavitve. Če se preskusna snov nanese na obliž, jo je treba pritrditi na kožo na takšen način, da je stik dober in snov enakomerno razporejena po koži. Treba je preprečiti živali dostop do obliža in zaužitje ali vdihavanje preskusne snovi. |
| | Tekoče preskusne snovi se navadno uporabljajo nerazredčene. Kadar se preskušajo trdne snovi (ki se jih lahko zdrobi, če je to po presoji potrebno), je treba preskusno snov navlažiti z zelo majhno količino vode (ali, kadar je potrebno, z drugim ustreznim nosilcem), ki zadostuje za zagotavljanje dobrega stika s kožo. Kadar se uporabljajo drugi nosilci in ne voda, mora biti možen vpliv nosilca na dražilnost kože zaradi preskusne snovi minimalen, če sploh kateri. |
| | Na koncu obdobja izpostavljenosti, ki traja običajno 4 ure, je treba odstraniti preostalo preskusno snov, kjer je to izvedljivo, z uporabo vode ali ustreznega topila, ne da bi se spremenil obstoječi odziv ali integriteta epidermisa. |
| | 1.4.2.2 Velikost odmerka |
| | Odmerek 0,5 ml tekoče snovi ali 0,5 g trdne snovi ali kašnate zmesi se nanese na preskusni predel. |
| | 1.4.2.3 Začetni preskus (dermalni preskus dražilnosti/jedkosti in vivo z uporabo ene živali) |
| | Močno je priporočeno, da se preskus in vivo na začetku izvede z uporabo ene živali, zlasti kadar se za snov domneva, da je potencialno jedka. To je v skladu s strategijo zaporednega preskušanja (glej Prilogo 1). |
| | Kadar se za snov na podlagi analize tehtnosti dokazov presodi, da je jedka, ni potrebno nadaljnje preskušanje na živalih. Za večino snovi, za katere se domneva, da so jedke, nadaljnje preskušanje in vivo običajno ni potrebno. Kadar se kljub temu zdi potrebno zagotoviti dodatne podatke zaradi pomanjkljivih dokazov, se lahko izvede preskušanje na živalih z uporabo naslednjega pristopa: Na žival se zaporedoma nanesejo do trije preskusni obliži. Prvi obliž se odstrani po treh minutah. Če ni opazna nobena resna reakcija kože, se nanese drugi obliž in se odstrani po eni uri. Če kažejo opazovanja v tej fazi, da se na human način lahko dopusti podaljšanje izpostavljenosti na štiri ure, se nanese tretji obliž in se odstrani po štirih urah, odziv pa se razvrsti po stopnjah. |
| | Če se opazi jedek učinek po kateri koli izmed teh treh zaporednih izpostavitev, se preskus nemudoma zaključi. Če se jedek učinek ne opazi po tem, ko se odstrani zadnji obliž, se žival opazuje 14 dni, razen kadar se jedkost razvije v zgodnejši časovni točki. |
| | Kadar se ne pričakuje, da bo preskusna snov povzročila jedkost, a bi lahko bila dražilna, je treba nanesti le en obliž na eno žival za štiri ure. |
| | 1.4.2.4 Potrditveni preskus (dermalni preskus dražilnosti in vivo z dodatnimi živalmi) |
| | Če se jedek učinek ne opazi v začetnem preskusu, je treba dražilni ali negativni odziv potrditi z uporabo do dveh dodatnih živali, s po enim obližem za vsako, v obdobju izpostavitve štirih ur. Če se v začetnem preskusu opazi dražilen učinek, se potrditveni preskus lahko naredi na zaporeden način ali s sočasno izpostavitvijo dveh dodatnih živali. Izjemoma, ko se začetni preskus ne izvaja, se lahko dve ali tri živali tretira le z enim obližem, ki se odstrani po štirih urah. Kadar se uporabljata dve živali, ni potrebno nadaljnje preskušanje, če obe kažeta enak odziv. V nasprotnem primeru se preskusi tudi tretja žival. Možno je, da bo treba oceniti dvomljive odzive z uporabo dodatnih živali. |
| | 1.4.2.5 Obdobje opazovanja |
| | Obdobje opazovanja mora trajati dovolj dolgo, da se lahko v celoti ovrednoti reverzibilnost opaženih učinkov. Preskus je treba zaključiti ob katerem koli času, kadar kaže žival trajajoče znake hude bolečine ali okvar. Za določitev reverzibilnosti učinkov je treba živali opazovati 14 dni po odstranitvi obližev. Če se opazi reverzibilnost pred potekom 14 dni, je treba v tistem času preskus zaključiti. |
| | 1.4.2.6 Klinična opazovanja in razvrstitev reakcij kože v stopnje |
| | Vse živali je treba pregledati, ali imajo znake rdečine in edemov, ter odzive zabeležiti po 60 minutah in nato po 24, 48 in 72 urah po odstranitvi obliža. Za začetne preskuse na eni živali se pregleda tudi preskusni predel takoj za tem, ko se obliž odstrani. Dermalne reakcije se razvrstijo v stopnje in zabeležijo v skladu s stopnjami iz tabele spodaj. Če nastane poškodba kože, ki je ni mogoče opredeliti kot dražilnost ali jedkost po 72 urah, bodo morda potrebna opazovanja do štirinajstega dne za opredelitev reverzibilnosti učinkov. Poleg opazovanja dražilnosti je treba v celoti zapisati in zabeležiti vse lokalne toksične učinke, kakor npr. tanjšanje kože in vse sistemske nasprotne učinke (npr. učinke na klinične znake toksičnosti in telesno težo). Za razjasnitev dvomljivih odzivov je treba opraviti histopatološki pregled. |
| | Razvrščanje kožnih odzivov je nujno subjektivno. Da bi pospešili usklajevanje pri razvrščanju kožnih odzivov in nudili pomoč preskuševalnim laboratorijem ter vsem sodelujočim pri oblikovanju in razlagi rezultatov opazovanj, mora biti osebje, ki izvaja ta opazovanja, ustrezno usposobljeno, da obvlada uporabljeni sistem določanja stopnje (glej tabelo spodaj). Pri tem bi lahko bil v pomoč ilustriran priročnik za določanje stopnje dermalne dražilnosti in drugih poškodb (9). |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.1 OBDELAVA REZULTATOV |
| | Rezultati študije se morajo povzeti v obliki preglednice v končnem poročilu o preskusu in morajo zajemati vse postavke s seznama v oddelku 3.1. |
| | 2.2 VREDNOTENJE REZULTATOV |
| | Rezultate dermalne dražilnosti je treba vrednotiti v povezavi z vrsto in resnostjo lezij ter njihovo reverzibilnostjo ali pomanjkanjem reverzibilnosti. Posamezni rezultati ne predstavljajo absolutnega standarda za dražilne lastnosti materiala, ker se vrednotijo tudi drugi učinki preskusnega materiala. Namesto tega je treba razumeti posamezne rezultate kot referenčne vrednosti, ki jih je treba ovrednotiti v zvezi z vsemi drugimi opazovanji iz študije. |
| | Reverzibilnost dermalnih lezij je treba upoštevati pri oceni dražilnih odzivov. Kadar so odzivi, kakor npr. plešavost, hiperkeratoza, hiperplazija in luščenje vidni do konca 14-dnevnega obdobja opazovanja, se preskusna snov obravnava kot dražilna. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije, kot je primerno: |
| | Obrazložitev za preskušanje in vivo: analiza tehtnosti dokazov iz prej obstoječih preskusnih podatkov, vključno z rezultati strategije zaporednega preskušanja: |
| | - opis pomembnih podatkov, ki so na voljo pred preskušanjem, |
| | - podatki, pridobljeni v vsaki fazi strategije preskušanja, |
| | - opis opravljenih in vitro preskusov, vključno s podrobnimi podatki o postopkih, rezultati, dobljeni s preskusnimi/referenčnimi snovmi, |
| | - analiza tehtnosti dokazov za opravljanje študije in vivo. |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - identifikacijski podatki (npr. številka CAS; vir, čistost, znane nečistoče, številka skupine), |
| | - fizikalno stanje in fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti (npr.: pH hlapnost, topnost, stabilnost), |
| | - če gre za mešanico, sestava in relativni odstotek sestavin. |
| | Nosilec: |
| | - identifikacija, koncentracija (kjer je ustrezno), uporabljeni volumen, |
| | - obrazložitev upravičenosti izbire nosilca. |
| | Preskusne živali: |
| | - uporabljena vrsta/sev, obrazložitev uporabe živali, če to ni kunec beličnik, |
| | - število živali istega spola, |
| | - teže posameznih živali na začetku in na zaključku preskusa, |
| | - starost na začetku študije, |
| | - vir živali, pogoji bivanja, vrsta hranjenja, itd. |
| | Pogoji preskusa: |
| | - tehnika priprave predela za obliž, |
| | - podrobni podatki o uporabljenih materialih za obliže in tehnika dela z obliži, |
| | - podrobni podatki o pripravi preskusne snovi, aplikaciji in odstranitvi. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - preglednica doseženih rezultatov odziva na dražilnost/jedkost za vsako žival na vseh izmerjenih časovnih točkah, |
| | - opis vseh opaženih lezij, |
| | - pripovedni opis vrste in stopnje opažene dražilnosti ali jedkosti in katere koli histopatološke ugotovitve, |
| | - opis drugih nasprotnih, lokalnih (npr. tanjšanje kože) in sistemskih učinkov poleg derrmalne dražilnosti in jedkosti. |
| | Razprava o rezultatih. |
| | 4. LITERATURA: |
| | (1) Barratt, M.D., Castell, J.V., Chamberlain, M., Combes, R.D., Dearden, J.C., Fentem, J.H., Gerner, 1., Giuliani, A., Gray, T.J.B, Livingston, D.J., Provan, W.M., Rutten, F.A.J.J.L., Verhaar, H.J.M., Zbinden, P. (1995) The integrated Use of Alternative Approaches for Predicing Toxic Hazard. ECVAM Workshop Report 8. ATLA 23, 410–429. |
| | (2) Young, J.R., How, M.J., Walker, A.P., Worth W.M.H. (1988) Classification as Corrosive or Irritant to Skin of Preparations Containing Acidic or Alkaline Substance Without Testing on Animals. Toxicol. In Vitro, 2, 19–26. |
| | (3) Worth, A.P., Fentem, J.II., Balls, M., Bortham, P.A., Curren, R.D., Earl, L.K., Esdaile, D.J., Liebsch, M. (1998) Evaluation of the proposed OECD Testing Strategy for skin corrosion. ATLA 26, 709–720. |
| | (4) ECETOC (1990) Monograph No. 15, "Skin Irritation", European Chemical Industy, Ecology and Toxicology Centre, Brussels. |
| | (5) Fentem, J.H., Archer, G.E.B., Balls, M., Botham, P.A., Curren, R.D., Earl, L.K., Edsail, D.J., Holzhutter, H.G. and Liebsch, M. (1998) The ECVAM international validation study on in vitro tests for skin corrosivity.2. Results and evalution by the Management Team. Toxicology in Vitro 12, pp. 483–524. |
| | (5a) Testing Method B.40 Skin Corrosion. |
| | (6) OECD (1996). OECD Test Guidelines Programme: Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Harmonization of Validation and Acceptance Criteria for Alternativa Toxicology Test Methods. Held in Solna, Sweden, 22–24 January 1996 (http://www.oecd1.org/ehs/test/background.htm). |
| | (7) OECD (1998). Harmonised Integrated Hazard Classification for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committe and the Working Party on Chemicals, November 1998, (http://www.oecd1.org/ehs/Class/HICL6.htm). |
| | (8) OECD (2000). Guidance Document on the Recognition, Assessment and Use of Clinical Signs as Humane Endpoints for Experimental Animals Used in Safety Evaluation. OECD Environmental Health and Safety Publications. Series on Testing and Assessment N. 19 (http://www.oecd1.org/ehs/test/monos.htm). |
| | (9) EPA (1990). Atlas of Dermal Lesions, (20T-2004). United States Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances, Washington, DC, August 1990. [Available from OECD Secretariat upon request]. |
| | TABELA I: UVRŠČANJE KOŽNIH REAKCIJ V STOPNJE |
| | Nastanek rdečine in krast |
| | Rdečine ni … | 0 | |
| | Neznatna rdečina (komajda opazna) … | 1 | |
| | Zelo razločna rdečina … | 2 | |
| | Rdečina od zmerne do resne … | 3 | |
| | Resna rdečina (goveja rdečina) in nastanek krast ovirata razvrstitev rdečine … | 4 | |
| | Največ možnih: 4 | |
| | Tvorba kožnih oteklin |
| | Kožnih oteklin ni … | 0 | |
| | Neznatna kožna oteklina (komajda opazna) … | 1 | |
| | Rahla oteklina (robovi predela dobro vidni, ker so izbočeni) … | 2 | |
| | Zmerna kožna oteklina (izbočena približno 1 mm) … | 3 | |
| | Resna kožna oteklina (izbočena več kakor 1 mm in razširjena izven predela izpostavitve) … | 4 | |
| | Največ možnih: 4 | |
| | Za razjasnitev dvomljivih odzivov se lahko opravi histopatološki pregled. |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2E |
| | B.5 AKUTNA TOKSIČNOST: OČESNA DRAŽILNOST/JEDKOST |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta metoda ustreza OECD TG 405 (2002). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Pri pripravi te dopolnjene metode je veljala posebna pozornost možnim izboljšavam z vrednotenjem vseh obstoječih informacij o preskusni snovi, da bi se izognili nepotrebnemu preskušanju na laboratorijskih živalih zaradi skrbi za zdravje živali. Ta metoda vključuje priporočilo, da je treba pred začetkom opravljanja opisanega preskusa in vivo za akutno očesno dražilnost/jedkost opraviti analizo tehtnosti dokazov (1) na podlagi ustreznih obstoječih podatkov. Kadar ni na voljo dovolj podatkov, je priporočeno, da se pridobijo z uporabo zaporednega preskušanja (2)(3). Strategija preskušanja vključuje opravljanje validiranih in sprejetih in vitro preskusov in je dana kot priloga k tej metodi preskušanja. Poleg tega je priporočena uporaba in vivo preskusa dermalne dražilnosti/jedkosti, da se predvidi očesna jedkost pred upoštevanjem očesnega preskusa in vivo. |
| | Za znanstveno zanesljivost in zdravje živali je koristno, da se preskušanje in vivo ne začne opravljati, dokler se niso ocenili vsi razpoložljivi podatki, pomembni za možno očesno dražilnost/jedkost snovi z analizo tehtnosti dokazov. Takšni podatki bodo vključevali dokaze iz obstoječih študij na ljudeh in/ali laboratorijskih živalih o dražilnosti/jedkosti ene ali več strukturno sorodnih snovi ali mešanic takšnih snovi, podatke, ki bodo dokazovali močno kislost ali alkalnost snovi (4)(5), in rezultate validiranih in sprejetih in vitro ali ex vivo preskusov za kožno jedkost in dražilnost (6)(6a). Mogoče je, da so se te študije opravile na podlagi analize tehtnosti dokazov ali pa iz nje sledile. |
| | Za nekatere snovi lahko takšna analiza nakaže potrebo po in vivo študijah potenciala očesne jedkosti/dražilnosti snovi. V takšnih primerih bi bilo bolje pred upoštevanjem uporabe očesnega preskusa in vivo najprej opraviti in vivo študijo kožnih učinkih snovi in jih oceniti v skladu z metodo preskušanja B.4 (7). Uporaba analize tehtnostnih dokazov in strategija zaporednega preskušanja bi morali zmanjšati potrebo po in vivo preskušanju za očesno jedkost/dražilnost snovi, za katere obstaja že dovolj dokazov iz drugih študij. Če z uporabo strategije zaporednega preskušanja ni mogoče določiti potenciala očesne jedkosti ali dražilnosti niti po opravljeni in vivo študiji dermalne jedkosti in dražilnosti, se lahko opravi in vivo preskus očesne jedkosti/dražilnosti. |
| | Bolj upoštevana strategija zaporednega preskušanja, ki vključuje opravljanje validiranih in vitro ali ex vivo preskusov za jedkost/dražilnost, je vključena v prilogi k tej metodi preskušanja. To strategijo so razvili in soglasno priporočili udeleženci OECD delavnice (8) in se je sprejela kot priporočena strategija preskušanja v Globalno usklajenem sistemu za razvrstitev kemijskih snovi (GHS) (9). Priporočeno se je ravnati po tej strategiji preskušanja pred opravljanjem preskušanja in vivo. Za nove snovi je priporočen postopen način preskušanja za pridobivanje znanstveno zanesljivih podatkov o jedkosti/dražilnosti snovi. Za obstoječe snovi, za katere ni dovolj podatkov o kožni in očesni jedkosti/dražilnosti, je treba uporabiti to strategijo za zapolnitev vrzeli manjkajočih podatkov. Uporabo drugačne strategije preskušanja ali postopka ali odločitev, da se ne bo uporabil način postopni preskušanja , je treba obrazložiti. |
| | 1.2 DEFINICIJE |
| | Očesna dražilnost: je nastanek sprememb na očesu, ki sledijo aplikaciji preskusne snovi na sprednjo površino očesa in ki so v celoti reverzibilne v 21 dneh aplikacije. |
| | Očesna jedkost: je nastanek poškodbe tkiva v očesu ali resnega fizičnega poslabšanja vida, ki sledi aplikaciji preskusne snovi na sprednjo površino očesa in ki ni v celoti reverzibilna v 21 dneh aplikacije. |
| | 1.3 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Snov, ki jo je treba preskusiti, se nanese v enkratnem odmerku na eno od očes eksperimentalne živali; netretirano oko služi za kontrolo. Stopnja očesne dražilnosti/jedkosti se oceni s seštevanjem lezij na očesni veznici, roženici in šarenici, v točno določenih intervalih. Drugi učinki na oko in nasprotni sistemski učinki se prav tako opišejo, da se zagotovi celovito vrednotenje učinkov. Študija mora trajati dovolj dolgo, da se oceni reverzibilnost ali ireverzibilnost učinkov. |
| | Živali, ki kažejo trajne znake hudega trpljenja in/ali bolečine v kateri koli fazi preskusa, je treba humano usmrtiti in snov skladno s tem oceniti. Kriterije za sprejem odločitve o humani usmrtitvi umirajočih in hudo trpečih živali je mogoče najti v sklicu (10). |
| | 1.4 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.4.1 Priprava za preskus in vivo |
| | 1.4.1.1 Izbira živalske vrste |
| | Kunec beličnik je najbolj zaželena laboratorijska žival in uporabljajo se zdrave mlade odrasle živali. Za uporabo drugih sevov ali vrst je potrebna obrazložitev. |
| | 1.4.1.2 Priprava živali |
| | Obe očesi vsake eksperimentalne živali, do nadaljnjega izbrane za preskušanje, je treba pregledati v 24 urah, preden se preskušanje začne. Živali, ki kažejo očesno dražilnost, očesne napake ali že prej nastalo poškodbo roženice, se ne smejo uporabiti. |
| | 1.4.1.3 Pogoji bivanja in hranjenja |
| | Živali morajo imeti vsaka svoj prostor. Temperatura prostora za preskuse z živalmi mora znašati za kunce 20 °C (± 3 °C). Čeprav mora biti relativna vlažnost najmanj 30 % in po možnosti ne sme presegati 70 %, mora biti ciljna vlažnost, razen med čiščenjem prostora, 50 do 60 %. Osvetlitev mora biti umetna v zaporedju 12 ur svetlobe in 12 ur teme. Za hranjenje se lahko uporabijo običajne predpisane laboratorijske vrste hrane z neomejeno količino pitne vode. |
| | 1.4.2 Preskusni postopek |
| | 1.4.2.1 Aplikacija preskusne snovi |
| | Preskusno snov je treba dati v mešiček veznice enega očesa vsake živali, potem ko se nežno potegne spodnja veka stran od zrkla. Veke se nato nežno držijo skupaj približno 1 sekundo, da se prepreči izguba materiala. Drugo oko, ki ostane netretirano, služi za kontrolo. |
| | 1.4.2.2 Izpiranje |
| | Oči preskusnih živali se ne smejo umivati najmanj 24 ur po vkapanju preskusne snovi, z izjemo trdnih snovi (glej oddelek 1.4.2.3.2) in v primeru takojšnjih jedkih ali dražilnih učinkov. Po 24 urah se lahko uporabi izpiranje, če se meni, da je to ustrezno. |
| | Uporaba satelitske skupine živali za raziskovanje vpliva izpiranja ni priporočena, razen če je znanstveno upravičena. Če je satelitska skupina potrebna, je treba uporabiti dva kunca. Pogoje izpiranja je treba skrbno dokumentirati, npr. čas izpiranja; sestavo in temperaturo raztopine za izpiranje; trajanje, volumen in hitrost aplikacije. |
| | 1.4.2.3 Velikost odmerka |
| | 1.4.2.3.1 Preskušanje tekočih snovi |
| | Za preskušanje tekočih snovi se uporablja odmerek 0,1 ml. Razpršila pod pritiskom se ne smejo uporabljati za vkapanje snovi neposredno v oko. Tekoče razpršilo je treba iztisniti in zbrati v posodo pred vkapanjem 0,1 ml v oko. |
| | 1.4.2.3.2 Preskušanje trdnih snovi |
| | Pri preskušanju trdnih snovi, kašnatih zmesi in zdrobljenih snovi, mora imeti uporabljena količina volumen 0,1 ml ali težo, ki ni večja kakor 100 mg. Preskusni material je treba zdrobiti v fin prah. Volumen trdnega materiala je treba izmeriti po rahlem zgoščevanju, npr. z rahlim potrkavanjem na merilno posodo. Če fiziološki mehanizmi niso odstranili iz očesa preskusne živali trdno preskusno snov na prvi časovni točki opazovanja eno uro po tretiranju, se lahko oko izplakne z raztopino vode in soli ali destilirano vodo. |
| | 1.4.2.3.3 Preskušanje razpršil |
| | Priporočeno je, da se vsa utekočinjena razpršila in razpršila pod pritiskom zberejo v posodo pred vkapanjem v oko. Izjema so snovi v posodah za razpršila pod pritiskom, ki jih ni mogoče zbrati zaradi izhlapevanja. V takšnih primerih je treba držati oko odprto in nanesti preskusno snov v oko enostavnim z vbrizgom, ki traja približno eno sekundo, z razdalje 10 cm neposredno pred očesom. Ta razdalja se lahko spreminja v odvisnosti od pritiska razpršila in njegove vsebine. Paziti je treba, da se oko ne poškoduje zaradi pritiska razpršila. V ustreznih primerih bo mogoče potrebno oceniti potencial za nastanek "mehanske" poškodbe očesa zaradi moči razpršila. |
| | Oceno odmerka iz razpršila je mogoče dobiti z naslednjim preskusom: snov se razprši na tehtalni papir skozi odprtino velikosti kunčjega očesa, ki je nameščena neposredno pred papir. Porast teže papirja se uporabi za približno določitev količine, razpršene v oko. Za hlapljive snovi je mogoče odmerek oceniti s tehtanjem v zbirni posodi pred in po odstranitvi preskusnega material. |
| | 1.4.2.4 Začetni preskus (In vivo preskus očesne dražilnosti/jedkosti z uporabo ene živali) |
| | Kot je opredeljeno v strategiji zaporednega preskušanja (glej Prilogo 1), je zelo priporočeno, da se preskus in vivo na začetku izvede z uporabo ene živali. |
| | Če rezultati tega preskusa kažejo, da je snov jedka ali resno dražilna za oči z uporabo opisanega postopka, se nadaljnje preskušanje za očesno dražilnost ne opravi. |
| | 1.4.2.5 Lokalni anestetiki |
| | Lokalni anestetiki se uporabljajo v odvisnosti od primera. Če analiza tehtnosti dokazov kaže, da snov lahko povzroči bolečino, ali če začetno preskušanje pokaže, da bo nastala boleča reakcija, se lokalni anestetik lahko uporabi pred vkapanjem preskusne snovi. Vrsto, koncentracijo in odmerek lokalnega anestetika je treba skrbno izbrati, da se zagotovi, da razlike pri reagiranju na preskusno snov ne bodo posledica njegove uporabe. Na podoben način je treba anestezirati kontrolno oko. |
| | 1.4.2.6 Potrditveni preskus (In vivo preskus dražilnosti z dodatnimi živalmi) |
| | Če se jedek učinek ne opazi v začetnem preskusu, je treba dražilni ali negativni odziv potrditi z uporabo do dveh dodatnih živali. Če se v začetnem preskusu opazi resen dražilen učinek, ki kaže, da je možen močan (ireverzibilen) učinek pri potrditvenem preskušanju, je priporočeno, da se potrditveni preskus izvede na zaporeden način na eni živali namesto s sočasno izpostavitvijo dveh dodatnih živali. Če druga žival razkrije jedke ali resne dražilne učinke, se preskus ne nadaljuje. Mogoče bodo potrebne dodatne živali za potrditev šibkih ali zmernih dražilnih odzivov. |
| | 1.4.2.7 Obdobje opazovanja |
| | Trajanje obdobja opazovanja mora biti dovolj dolgo, da se lahko v celoti ovrednoti obseg in reverzibilnost opaženih učinkov. Preskus je treba zaključiti ob katerem koli času, kadar kaže žival trajajoče znake hude bolečine ali trpljenja (9). Za določitev reverzibilnosti učinkov je običajno treba živali opazovati 21 dni po nanašanju preskusne snovi. Če se opazi reverzibilnost pred 21 dnem, je treba takrat preskus zaključiti. |
| | 1.4.2.7.1 Klinična opazovanja in uvrstitev očesnh reakcij v stopnje |
| | Oči je treba pregledati po 1, 24, 48 in 72 urah po aplikaciji preskusne snovi. Živali se lahko preskušajo le toliko časa, kolikor je potrebno za pridobitev dokončnih informacij. Živali, ki trajno kažejo hude bolečine in trpljenje, je treba nemudoma humano usmrtiti in v skladu s tem oceniti snov. Usmrtiti je treba živali z naslednjimi očesnimi lezijami po vkapanju: perforacija roženice ali značilno gnojenje roženice vključno s stafilomom; kri v sprednjem delu očesa; stopnja 4 motnosti roženice, ki ne popusti 48 ur; odsotnost svetlobnega refleksa (odziv šarenice stopnje 2), ki traja 72 ur; gnojenje veznične vrečke; nekroza veznične membrane ali žmurke; ali odstopanje. To pa zaradi tega, ker te lezije na splošno niso reverzibilne. |
| | Živali, pri katerih se ne razvijejo očesne lezije, se lahko usmrti ne prej kot 3 dni po instilaciji. |
| | Živali z blagimi do zmernimi lezijami je treba opazovati dokler lezije ne izginejo ali 21 dni, ko se raziskava zaključi. Opazovanja se izvajajo po 7, 14 in 21 dneh, da se določi stanje lezij ter njihova reverzibilnost ali ireverzibilnost. |
| | Pri vsaki preiskavi je treba zabeležiti stopnjo očesne reakcije (veznice, roženice in šarenice) (tabela 1). Navesti je treba tudi katere koli druge poškodbe očesa (npr. površinski keratitis/panus, obarvanost) ali neželene sistemske učinke. |
| | Za lažji pregled reakcij se lahko uporablja binokularna lupa, ročni oftalmoskop, biomikroskop ali drug ustrezen pripomoček. Po evidentiranju rezultatov opazovanja po 24 urah se lahko pregled oči nadaljuje s pomočjo fluoresceina. |
| | Določanje stopnje očesnih odzivov/reakcij je nujno subjektivno. Da bi pospešili usklajevanje pri določanju stopnje očesnih odzivov in nudili pomoč preskuševalnim laboratorijem ter vsem sodelujočim pri oblikovanju in razlagi rezultatov opazovanj, mora biti osebje, ki izvaja ta opazovanja, ustrezno usposobljeno, da obvlada uporabljeni sistem določanja stopnje. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.2 VREDNOTENJE REZULTATOV |
| | Rezultate očesne dražilnosti je treba oceniti v zvezi z vrsto in resnostjo lezij ter njihovo reverzibilnostjo ali pomanjkljivostjo reverzibilnosti. Posamezni rezultati ne predstavljajo absolutnega standarda za dražilne lastnosti materiala, ker se ocenjujejo tudi drugi učinki preskusnega materiala. Namesto tega je treba obravnavati posamezne rezultate kot referenčne vrednosti in so pomembni le, če jih potrjuje popoln opis in vrednotenje vseh opazovanj. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije: |
| | Obrazložitev za preskušanje ion vivo: analiza tehtnosti dokazov prej obstoječih podatkov, vključno z rezultati strategije zaporednega preskušanja: |
| | - opis pomembnih podatkov, ki so na voljo pred preskušanjem, |
| | - podatki, pridobljeni v vsaki fazi strategije preskušanja, |
| | - opis opravljenih in vitro preskusov, vključno s podrobnimi podatki o postopkih, rezultati, dobljenimi s preskusnimi/referenčnimi snovmi, |
| | - opis dražilnih kožnih reakcij in vivo / opravljena korozijska raziskava vključno z dobljenimi rezultati, |
| | - analiza tehtnosti dokazov za opravljanje študije in vivo. |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - identifikacijski podatki (npr. številka CAS; vir, čistost, znane nečistoče, številka skupine), |
| | - fizikalno stanje in fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti (npr.: pH hlapnost, topnost, stabilnost), |
| | - če gre za mešanico, sestava in relativni odstotek sestavin, |
| | - če se uporabi lokalni anestetik, identifikacija, čistost, vrsta, odmerek in možen medsebojni vpliv s preskusno snovjo. |
| | Nosilec: |
| | - identifikacija, koncentracija (kjer je ustrezno), uporabljeni volumen, |
| | - obrazložitev upravičenosti izbire nosilca. |
| | Preskusne živali: |
| | - uporabljena vrsta/sev, obrazložitev za uporabo živali, če to ni kunec beličnik, |
| | - starost vsake živali na začetku študije, |
| | - število živali istega spola v preskusni in kontrolni skupini (če je potrebno), |
| | - teže posameznih živali na začetku in na zaključku preskusa, |
| | - vir, pogoji bivanja, vrsta hrana, itd. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - opis metode, uporabljene za merjenje rezultatov dražilnosti na vsaki časovni točki opazovanja (npr. poševna ročna svetilka, biomikroskop, fluorescin); |
| | - preglednica s podatki o dražilnem/jedkem odzivu za vsako žival na vsaki časovni točki opazovanja do odstranitve vsake živali iz preskusa, |
| | - narativni opis stopnje in narave opisane dražilnosti ali korozije, |
| | - pripovedni opis stopnje in vrste opaženih lezij v očesu (npr. vaskularizacije, tvorbe krp, zlepkov, madežev), |
| | - opis neočesnih lokalnih in sistemskih nasprotnih učinkov in histopatoloških ugotovitev, če so. |
| | Razprava o rezultatih. |
| | 3.2 RAZLAGA REZULTATOV |
| | Sklepanje o veljavnosti rezultatov študij očesne dražilnosti na laboratorijskih živalih za ljudi je veljavno le v omejeni meri. V mnogih primerih je kunec beličnik bolj občutljiv na očesne dražilne snovi ali jedke snovi kakor ljudje. |
| | Pri razlagi podatkov je treba paziti, da se izključi dražilnost, ki je posledica sekundarne infekcije. |
| | 4. LITERATURA: |
| | (1) Barratt, M.D., Castell, J.V., Chamberlain, M., Combes, R.D., Dearden, J.C., Fentem, J.H., Gerner, 1., Giuliani, A., Gray, T.J.B, Livingston, D.J., Provan, W.M., Rutten, F.A.J.J.L., Verhaar, H.J.M., Zbinden, P. (1995) The integrated Use of Alternative Approaches for Pedicing Toxic Hazard. ECVAM Workshop Report 8. ATLA 23, 410–429. |
| | (2) de Silva, O., Cottin, M., Dami, N., Roguet, R., Catroux, P., Toufie, A., Sicard, C., Dossou, K.G., Gerner, I., Schlede, E., Spielmann, H., Gupta, K.C., Hill, R.N. (1997). Evalution of Eye Irritation Potential: Statistical Analysis and Tier Testing Strategies. Food Chem. Toxicol. 35, 159–164. |
| | (3) Worth, A.P. and Fentem, J.H. (1999). A general approach for evaluting stepwise testing strategies ATLA 27, 161–177. |
| | (4) Young, J.R., How, M.J., Walker, A.P., Worth W.M.H. (1988) Classification as Corrosive or Irritant to Skin of Preparations Containing Acidic or Alkaline Substance Without Testing on Animals. Toxicol. In Vitro, 2, 19–26. |
| | (5) Neun, D.J. (1993) Effects of Alkalinity on the Eye Irritation Potential of Solutions Prepared at a Single pH. J. T. Cut. Ocular Toxicol. 12, 227–231. |
| | (6) Fentem, J.H., Archer, G.E.B., Balls, M., Botham, P.A., Curren, R.D., Earl, L.K., Edsaile, D.J., Holzhutter, H.G. and Liebsch, M. (1998) The ECVAM international validation study on in vitro tests for skin corrosivity.2. Results and evaluation by the Management Team. Toxicology in Vitro 12, pp. 483524. |
| | (6a) Testing Method B.40 Skin Corrosion. |
| | (7) Testing Method B.4. Acute toxicity: dermal irritation/corrosion. |
| | (8) OECD (1996) OECD Test Guidelines Programme: Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Harmonization of Validation and Acceptance Criteria for Alternative Toxicological Test Methods. Held in Solna, Sweden, 22–24 January 1996 (http://www.oecd1.org/ehs/test/background.htm). |
| | (9) OECD (1998) Harmonized Integrated Hazard Classification for Human Health and Environmental Effects of Chemical Substances as endorsed by the 28th Joint Meeting of the Chemicals Committee and the Working Party on Chemicals, November 1998 (http://www.oecd1.org/ehs/Class/HCL6.htm). |
| | (10) Guidance Document on the Recognition, Assessment and Use of Clinical Signs as Humane Endpoints for Experimental Animals Used in Safety Evaluation. OECD Environmental Health and Safety Monograph Series on Testing and Assessment N. 19. (http://www.oecd.org/ehs/test/monos.htm). |
| | TABELA I: RAZVRŠČANJE OČESNIH LEZIJ V STOPNJE |
| | Roženica |
| | Motnost: stopnja gostote (odčitati jo je treba na najbolj gostem gostejšem predelu) [1] | |
| | Ni gnojenja ali motnosti … | 0 | |
| | Razpršene ali obširne površine motnosti ( ki niso rahla motnost običajnega leska, delci šarenice jasno vidni) … | 1 | |
| | Prosojna površina razločna brez težav; delci šarenice rahlo zatemnjeni … | 2 | |
| | Spodnja površina: delci šarenica se ne razločijo; velikost zenice se komajda razloči … | 3 | |
| | Motna roženica: šarenica se ne razloči zaradi motnosti … | 4 | |
| | Največ možnih: 4 | |
| | Šarenica |
| | Normalna … | 0 | |
| | Opazno poglobljene gube, naval krvi, otekanje, zmerna hiperemija okoli roženice; ali injekcija; šarenica reagira na svetlobo (počasna reakcija se upošteva kot učinek) … | 1 | |
| | Krvavitev, resno propadanje ali odsotnost reakcije na svetlobo … | 2 | |
| | Največ možnih: 2 | |
| | Očesne veznice |
| | Rdečina (nanaša se na veznice vek in nabrekle veznice, z izjemo roženice in šarenice) | |
| | Normalna … | 0 | |
| | Nekaj krvnih žil je hiperemičnih (injicirano) … | 1 | |
| | Razpršena, škrlatna barva; posamezne žile niso zlahka razločne … | 2 | |
| | Razširjena goveja rdečina … | 3 | |
| | Največ možnih: 3 | |
| | Kemoterapija |
| | Otekanje (nanaša se na veke in/ali žmurke) | |
| | Normalno … | 0 | |
| | Nekoliko otečeno nad normalnim … | 1 | |
| | Očitno otečeno, z delnim zavihanjem vek navzven … | 2 | |
| | Otečeno, z napol zaprtimi vekami … | 3 | |
| | Otečeno, z več kakor napol zaprtimi vekami … | 4 | |
| | Največ možnih: 4 | |
| | [1] Predel motnosti roženice je treba navesti. |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2F |
| | B.31 ŠTUDIJA STRUPENOSTI ZA PREDROJSTVENI RAZVOJ |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta metoda ustreza metodi OECD TG 414 (2001). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Metoda za preskušanje strupenosti za razvoj je namenjena zagotavljanju splošnih informacij o učinkih predrojstvene izpostavljenosti breje preskusne živali in razvijajočih se organizmov v maternici; to lahko vključuje oceno vplivov matere, pa tudi smrti, strukturnih anomalij ali spremenjene rasti zarodka. Funkcionalne pomanjkljivosti, čeprav pomemben del razvoja, niso sestavni del te preskusne metode. Lahko se preizkusijo v posebni študiji ali kot dodatek k tej študiji z uporabo preskusne metode za razvojno nevrotoksičnost. Za informacije o preskušanju funkcionalnih pomanjkljivosti in drugih poporodnih učinkov preskusne metode se lahko na primeren način uporabi študija dvogeneracijske reproduktivne strupenosti ali študija razvojne nevrotoksičnosti. |
| | Pri tej preskusni metodi je lahko v posameznih primerih potrebna posebna prilagoditev na podlagi posebnega poznavanja npr. fizikalno-kemijskih ali toksikoloških lastnosti preskusne snovi. Taka prilagoditev je sprejemljiva, kadar prepričljivi znanstveni podatki kažejo, da bo prilagoditev omogočila bolj informativen preskus. V takem primeru je treba znanstvene podatke natančno dokumentirati v poročilu o študiji. |
| | 1.2 OPREDELITVE POJMOV |
| | Razvojna toksikologija: preučevanje škodljivih učinkov na razvoj organizma, ki so lahko posledica izpostavljenosti pred spočetjem, med razvojem pred rojstvom ali po rojstvu do spolne zrelosti. Glavne pojavne oblike strupenosti za razvoj vključujejo 1) smrt organizma, 2) strukturno anomalijo, 3) spremenjeno rast in 4) funkcionalno pomanjkljivost. Razvojno toksikologijo so v preteklosti pogosto imenovali teratologija. |
| | Škodljivi učinek: vsako odstopanje od normalnega, povezano s tretiranjem, ki zmanjšuje sposobnost organizma za preživetje, razmnoževanje ali prilagoditev okolju. V razvojni toksikologiji v njenem najširšem pomenu vključuje vsak učinek, ki moti normalen razvoj zarodka pred rojstvom in po njem. |
| | Spremenjena rast: sprememba mase ali velikosti organa ali telesa potomca. |
| | Spremembe (nepravilnosti): strukturne spremembe v razvoju, ki vključujejo deformnosti in odstopanja (28). |
| | Deformnost / večja anomalija: strukturna sprememba, ki naj bi bila za žival škodljiva (lahko tudi smrtna) in je navadno redka. |
| | Odstopanje / manjša anomalija: strukturna sprememba, ki naj bi imela malo ali nič škodljivega učinka na žival; lahko je prehodna in lahko se razmeroma pogosto pojavlja v kontrolni populaciji. |
| | Zarodek: vsota izpeljank oplojenega jajčeca v kateri koli stopnji razvoja od oploditve do rojstva, vključno z embrionalnimi membranami ter embriom ali fetusom. |
| | Vgnezditev (nidacija): pritrditev blastociste v epitelno maternično sluznico, vključno s prediranjem skozi maternični epitelij in vsaditvijo v endometrij. |
| | Embrio: zgodnja ali razvojna stopnja katerega koli organizma, zlasti razvojni produkt oplojenega jajčeca od takrat, ko se pojavi vzdolžna os, do takrat, ko nastanejo vse glavne strukture. |
| | Embriotoksičnost: škodljivo za normalno strukturo, razvoj, rast in/ali sposobnost za preživetje embria. |
| | Fetus: nerojeni potomec v postembrionalnem obdobju. |
| | Fetalna toksičnost: škodljivo za normalno strukturo, razvoj, rast in/ali preživetje fetusa. |
| | Splav: predčasna izločitev produktov spočetja iz maternice: embria ali fetusa, nezmožnega preživetja. |
| | Resorpcija: zarodek, ki naknadno po vgnezditvi v maternici odmre in se resorbira. |
| | Zgodnja resorpcija: dokaz o vgnezditvi brez prepoznavnega embria/fetusa. |
| | Pozna resorpcija: mrtvi embrio ali fetus z zunanjimi degenerativnimi spremembami. |
| | NOAEL: kratica za vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov (No Observed Adverse Effect Level) in je največji odmerek ali stopnja izpostavljenosti, pri kateri ne opazimo nobenega škodljivega učinka, povezanega s tretiranjem. |
| | 1.3 REFERENČNE SNOVI |
| | Jih ni. |
| | 1.4 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Navadno se preskusna snov daje brejim živalim najmanj od vgnezditve do enega dne pred dnevom predvidene usmrtitve, ki naj bo čim bliže normalnemu dnevu kotitve brez tveganja izgube podatkov, ki izhajajo iz predčasne kotitve. Preskusna metoda ni namenjena samo preučevanju obdobja organogeneze (npr. od 5 do 15 dne pri glodalcu in od 6 do 18 dne pri kuncu), temveč tudi učinkov pred vgnezditvijo, kadar je primerno, v vsem obdobju brejosti do dneva pred carskim rezom. Malo pred carskim rezom se samice usmrtijo, preuči se maternična vsebina, fetusi pa se ocenijo glede na zunanje vidne nepravilnosti in spremembe mehkega tkiva in okostja. |
| | 1.5 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.5.1 Izbira vrste živali |
| | Priporoča se, da se preskušanje izvaja na najustreznejših vrstah in da se uporabijo laboratorijske vrste in sevi, ki se navadno uporabljajo pri preskušanju strupenosti za predrojstveni razvoj. Priporočena glodalska vrsta je podgana in priporočena neglodalska vrsta je kunec. Če se uporabi druga vrsta, je treba to utemeljiti. |
| | 1.5.2 Nastanitvene in prehranjevalne razmere |
| | Temperatura v prostoru s poskusnimi živalmi naj bo 22 °C (± 3o) za glodalce in 18 °C (± 3o) za kunce. Čeprav naj bi bila relativna vlažnost najmanj 30 % in je zaželeno, da ne presega 70 %, razen v času čiščenja prostora, je cilj 50–60 %. Osvetlitev naj bo umetna, zaporedje 12 ur svetlobe, 12 ur teme. Za hranjenje se lahko uporablja konvencionalna laboratorijska prehrana z neomejeno oskrbo s pitno vodo. |
| | Parjenje naj se izvaja v kletkah, ki so primerne za ta namen. Čeprav je priporočljiva individualna namestitev živali, ki se parijo, je sprejemljiva tudi skupinska namestitev v manjšem številu. |
| | 1.5.3 Priprava živali |
| | Uporabiti je treba zdrave živali, ki so se najmanj pet dni prilagajale na laboratorijske razmere in predhodno niso bile uporabljene za poskuse. Poznati je treba vrsto, sev, vir, spol, maso in/ali starost poskusnih živali. Živali v vseh preskusnih skupinah naj bodo čim enotnejše po masi in starosti. Za vsako velikost odmerka je treba uporabiti mlade odrasle samice, ki še niso kotile. Samice naj se parijo s samci iste vrste in seva, izogibati se je treba parjenju sorojencev. Pri glodalcih je dan brejosti 0 tisti dan, ko se opazi vaginalni čep in/ali seme; pri kuncih je dan 0 navadno dan koitusa ali umetne osemenitve, če se uporabi ta tehnika. Sparjene samice se na nepristranski način dodelijo v kontrolno in tretirano skupino. Kletke je treba razporediti tako, da so možni učinki zaradi pozicije kletk čim manjši. Vsaki živali se dodeli enotna identifikacijska številka. Sparjene samice se na nepristranski način dodelijo v kontrolno in tretirano skupino in če se samice parijo v serijah, se živali iz vsake serije enakomerno porazdelijo v skupini. Podobno se samice, ki jih osemeni isti samec, enakomerno porazdelijo v obe skupini. |
| | 1.6 POSTOPEK |
| | 1.6.1 Število in spol živali |
| | Vsaka preskusna in kontrolna skupina naj vključuje zadostno število samic, tako da bo za obdukcijo približno 20 ženskih živali z vgnezditvijo. Skupine z manj kakor 16 živali z vgnezditvijo so lahko neustrezne. Ni nujno, da smrtnost mater ogrozi študijo, pod pogojem, da ni večja od približno 10 %. |
| | 1.6.2 Priprava odmerkov |
| | Če se za olajšanje odmerjanja uporablja nosilec ali drug aditiv, je treba upoštevati naslednje lastnosti: učinke na absorpcijo, distribucijo, presnovo in retencijo ali ekskrecijo preskusne snovi; učinke na kemijske lastnosti preskusne snovi, ki lahko spremenijo njene toksične lastnosti; ter učinke na porabo hrane ali vode ali na prehranjenost živali. Nosilec ne sme biti toksičen za razvoj in ne sme učinkovati na reprodukcijo. |
| | 1.6.3 Odmerjanje |
| | Normalno se preskusna snov daje vsak dan od vgnezditve (npr. od 5. dne po parjenju) do dneva pred predvidenim carskim rezom. Če predhodne študije, ki so na voljo, ne navajajo visoke možnosti za izgubo pred vgnezditvijo, se lahko tretiranje podaljša, tako da vključuje celotno obdobje brejosti, od parjenja do dneva pred predvideno usmrtitvijo. Dobro je znano, da se lahko neprimerno ravnanje ali stres med nosečnostjo končata s predrojstveno izgubo. Da bi zavarovali predrojstveno izgubo pred dejavniki, ki niso povezani s tretiranjem, se je treba izogibati nepotrebnemu pretovarjanju brejih živali, pa tudi stresu zaradi zunanjih dejavnikov, na primer hrupa. |
| | Uporabiti je treba najmanj tri velikosti odmerkov in hkratno kontrolo. Zdrave živali se na nepristranski način dodelijo v kontrolno in tretirano skupino. Velikost odmerkov se razporedi tako, da se toksični učinki stopnjujejo. Razen kadar to zaradi fizikalno-kemijske narave ali bioloških lastnosti preskusne snovi ni mogoče, je treba najvišjo vrednost odmerka izbrati tako, da povzroči nekaj toksičnosti za razvoj in/ali pri materi (klinični znaki ali zmanjšanje telesne mase), vendar ne smrt ali hudo trpljenje. Najmanj ena vmesna velikost odmerka mora povzročiti minimalno opazne toksične učinke. Najmanjša velikost odmerka ne sme povzročiti nobenega dokaza toksičnosti niti za razvoj niti pri materi. Padajoče zaporedje velikosti odmerkov je treba izbrati tako, da se pokažejo vse reakcije, ki so odvisne od odmerka, in vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov (NOAEL). Za padajoče zaporedje velikosti odmerkov so pogosto optimalni dvakratni do štirikratni intervali, pogosto pa je bolje dodati še dodatno četrto preskusno skupino, kakor uporabiti zelo velike intervale med odmerki (npr. več kakor faktor 10). Čeprav je cilj ugotoviti vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov pri materi, so lahko sprejemljive tudi študije, ki ne dokažejo take vrednosti (1). |
| | Vrednosti odmerkov je treba izbirati ob upoštevanju vseh obstoječih podatkov o strupenosti, pa tudi dodatnih informacij o presnovi in toksikokinetiki preskusne snovi ali sorodnih materialov. Te informacije pomagajo tudi pri dokazovanju ustreznosti režima odmerjanja. |
| | Uporabiti je treba hkratno kontrolno skupino. Ta skupina je kontrolna skupina, tretirana z nepravim nadomestkom ali kontrolna skupina, tretirana le z nosilcem, če je ta uporabljen pri dajanju preskusne snovi. Vsem skupinam se daje enaka količina bodisi preskusne snovi ali nosilca. Živali v kontrolni(h) skupini(ah) se obravnavajo na enak način kakor živali v preskusni skupini. Kontrolne skupine, tretirane z nosilcem, morajo prejeti količino nosilca, enako največji uporabljeni količini (kakor v najnižji tretirani skupini). |
| | 1.6.4 Mejni preskus |
| | Če preskus pri eni velikosti odmerka najmanj 1000 mg/kg telesne mase/dan z oralnim dajanjem, pri katerem se uporabijo postopki, opisani za to študijo, ne povzroči opazne toksičnosti pri nobeni breji živali ali njenih potomcih in če se glede na obstoječe podatke (npr. o strukturno in/ali presnovno sorodnih zmeseh) ne pričakuje učinka, potem se šteje, da ni potrebna popolna študija z uporabo treh velikosti odmerkov. Pričakovana človekova izpostavljenost lahko narekuje potrebo, da se v mejnem preskusu uporabi večji oralni odmerek. Pri drugih vrstah dajanja, na primer pri vdihavanju ali dermalni aplikaciji, lahko fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti preskusne snovi pogosto določajo in omejujejo največjo dosegljivo raven izpostavljenosti (na primer dermalna aplikacija ne bi smela povzročati hude lokalne toksičnosti). |
| | 1.6.5 Dajanje odmerkov |
| | Preskusna snov ali nosilec se navadno daje oralno z intubacijo. Če se uporabi drug način dajanja odmerkov, mora izvajalec preskusa zagotoviti utemeljitev in razlog za svojo izbiro, lahko pa so potrebne ustrezne spremembe (2)(3)(4). Preskusno snov je treba dati vsak dan približno ob istem času. |
| | Odmerek za posamezno žival navadno temelji na zadnji posamični določitvi telesne mase. Vendar je potrebna previdnost pri prilagajanju odmerka v zadnjem trimestru brejosti. Pri izbiri odmerka je treba uporabiti obstoječe podatke, da bi preprečili čezmerno toksičnost pri materi. Če se pri tretiranih materah opazi čezmerna toksičnost, je treba te živali humano usmrtiti. Če več živali kaže znake čezmerne toksičnosti, je treba razmisliti o prekinitvi te skupine odmerka. Če se snov daje z gavažo, jo je treba dati živali po možnosti v enkratnem odmerku z uporabo želodčne sonde ali primerne intubacijske kanile. Maksimalna količina tekočine, ki jo je mogoče dati naenkrat, je odvisna od velikosti poskusne živali. Količina ne sme presegati 1 ml/100 g telesne mase, razen v primeru vodnih raztopin, kjer je dovoljeno uporabiti 2 ml/100 g telesne mase. Če se kot nosilec uporablja koruzno olje, količina ne sme presegati 0,4 ml/100 g telesne mase. Variabilnost preskusne količine je treba s prilagajanjem koncentracije obdržati na kar najnižji ravni, da se zagotovi konstantna količina pri vseh odmerkih. |
| | 1.6.6 Opazovanje mater |
| | Klinična opazovanja je treba opraviti in dokumentirati najmanj enkrat na dan, najbolje vsak dan ob istem času, pri čemer se upošteva vrhunec pričakovanih učinkov po odmerjanju. Stanje živali je treba dokumentirati, vključno s smrtnostjo, odmiranjem, pomembnimi vedenjskimi spremembami in vsemi znaki očitne toksičnosti. |
| | 1.6.7 Telesna masa in poraba hrane |
| | Živali je treba stehtati na dan brejosti 0 ali najpozneje tretji dan brejosti, če je živali, ki so se parile, dostavil zunanji rejec, nato na prvi dan odmerjanja, najmanj vsake 3 dni v obdobju odmerjanja in na dan predvidene usmrtitve. |
| | Porabo hrane je treba zabeležiti vsake tri dni, na isti dan kot se določa telesna masa. |
| | 1.6.8 Postmortalni pregled |
| | Samice je treba usmrtiti en dan pred pričakovano kotitvijo. Samice, ki kažejo znake splava ali predčasne kotitve pred predvideno usmrtitvijo, je treba usmrtiti in opraviti temeljit makroskopski pregled. |
| | Ob koncu študije ali ob smrti med študijo se makroskopsko pregledajo kakršne koli strukturne anomalije ali patološke spremembe pri materi. Ocenitev matere med carskim rezom in poznejše analize fetusa naj se izvajajo po možnosti brez poznavanja tretirane skupine, da je pristranskost čim manjša. |
| | 1.6.9 Pregled maternične vsebine |
| | Takoj po koncu študije ali čim prej po smrti se maternice odstranijo in ugotovi status nosečnosti živali. Maternice, ki niso videti gravidne, se še dodatno pregledajo (npr. z barvanjem z amonijevim sulfidom pri glodalcih in barvanjem po Salewskem ali ustrezno alternativno metodo pri kuncih), da se potrdi nenoseči status (5). |
| | Gravidne maternice z materničnim vratom je treba stehtati. Masa gravidnih maternic se ne sme pridobiti od živali, za katere je ugotovljeno, da so med študijo poginile. |
| | Pri brejih živalih se določi število rumenih telesc. |
| | Maternično vsebino je treba pregledati glede na število embrionalnih ali fetalnih smrti in fetusov, ki so sposobni preživetja. Opisati je treba stopnjo resorpcije, da bi ocenili relativni čas smrti zarodka (glej oddelek 1.2). |
| | 1.6.10 Pregled fetusov |
| | Za vsak fetus je treba določiti spol in telesno maso. |
| | Pri vsakem fetusu je treba pregledati zunanje spremembe (6). |
| | Pregledajo se spremembe skeleta in mehkega tkiva pri fetusih (npr. odstopanja in deformnosti ali nepravilnosti) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12 ) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24). Kategorizacija fetalnih sprememb je zaželena, vendar ne nujna. Kadar se opravi kategorizacija, je treba jasno navesti merila za določitev vsake kategorije. Posebno pozornost je treba posvetiti reproduktivnemu traktu, ki ga je treba pregledati, če ima znake spremenjenega razvoja. |
| | Pri glodalcih je treba pripraviti približno polovico vsakega zaroda in pregledati skeletne spremembe. Druga polovica se pripravi in pregleda glede sprememb mehkega tkiva s sprejetimi ali ustreznimi metodami serijskega razreza ali s tehnikami natančne osnovne raztelesbe. |
| | Pri neglodalcih, npr. kuncih, se pri vseh fetusih pregledajo spremembe mehkega tkiva in skeleta. Pri telesih teh fetusov se spremembe mehkega tkiva ocenijo z natančno raztelesbo, ki lahko vključuje postopke za dodatno oceno notranje strukture srca (25). Glave polovice fetusov, ki so pregledani na ta način, se odstranijo in obdelajo za oceno sprememb mehkega tkiva (tudi oči, možganov, nosnih prehodov in jezika) z uporabo standardnih metod serijskega razreza (26) ali enako občutljivih metod. Telesa teh fetusov in preostalih nedotaknjenih fetusov se obdelajo in pregledajo glede skeletnih sprememb z enakimi metodami, kakor so opisane za glodalce. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.1 OBDELAVA REZULTATOV |
| | Podatki se sporočajo posamično za matere in njihove potomce in se povzamejo v obliki tabele, ki prikazuje za vsako preskusno skupino in vsako generacijo število živali na začetku preskusa, število živali, najdenih mrtvih ali usmrčenih iz humanih razlogov med preskusom, čas katere koli smrti ali humane usmrtitve, število brejih samic, število živali, ki kažejo znake toksičnosti, opis znakov zaznane toksičnosti, vključno s časom začetka, trajanja in resnosti katerih koli toksičnih učinkov, vrsto embrionalnih/fetalnih opažanj o vseh ustreznih podatkih o zarodu. |
| | Numerični rezultati se ocenijo z ustrezno statistično metodo z uporabo zaroda kot enote za podatkovno analizo. Uporabi se splošno sprejeta statistična metoda, statistične metode je treba določiti pri načrtovanju študije in jih utemeljiti. Sporočajo se tudi podatki o živalih, ki ne preživijo do predvidene usmrtitve. Ti podatki se lahko po potrebi vključijo v skupinske podatke. Ustreznost podatkov, dobljenih o teh živalih in vključitev ali izključitev iz katerih koli skupinskih podatkov, je treba utemeljiti ali presoditi na individualni podlagi. |
| | 2.2 VREDNOTENJE REZULTATOV |
| | Ugotovitve študije strupenosti za predrojstveni razvoj je treba ovrednotiti glede na opažene učinke. Vrednotenje vsebuje naslednje informacije: |
| | - rezultate preskusa pri materi in embriu/fetusu, vključno z ovrednotenjem razmerja ali njegove odsotnosti med izpostavljenostjo živali preskusni snovi in pojavom ter resnostjo vseh ugotovitev, |
| | - merila, uporabljena za kategorizacijo zunanjih sprememb fetusa ter sprememb mehkega tkiva in skeleta, če je bila kategorizacija opravljena, |
| | - kadar je primerno, pretekle kontrolne podatke za izboljšanje razlage rezultatov študije, |
| | - številke, uporabljene pri izračunu vseh odstotkov ali kazalnikov, |
| | - ustrezne statistične analize ugotovitev študije, če je to primerno, ki naj vključujejo dovolj informacij o metodi analize, tako da lahko neodvisni ocenjevalec/statistik ponovno ovrednoti in obnovi analizo. |
| | Pri kateri koli študiji, ki dokaže odsotnost katerega koli toksičnega učinka, je treba razmisliti o nadaljnjih raziskavah za določitev absorpcije in biološke razpoložljivosti preskusne snovi. |
| | 2.3 RAZLAGA REZULTATOV |
| | Študija strupenosti za predrojstveni razvoj zagotovi informacije o učinkih ponovne izpostavljenosti tej snovi med brejostjo na matere in razvoj njihovih potomcev v maternici. Rezultate študije je treba razlagati skupaj z ugotovitvami subkroničnih, reprodukcijskih, toksikokinetičnih in drugih študij. Ker je poudarek tako na splošni toksičnosti v smislu toksičnosti pri materi kot na ciljnih učinkih strupenosti za razvoj, rezultati študije do določene mere omogočajo razlikovanje med razvojnimi učinki, ki se pojavijo v odsotnosti splošne toksičnosti in učinki, ki so doseženi samo na stopnjah, ki so strupene tudi za mater (27). |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje posebne informacije: |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - fizikalno stanje in, kjer je to ustrezno, fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti, |
| | - identifikacijo, vključno s številko po CAS, če je znana/določena, |
| | - čistost. |
| | Nosilec (po potrebi): |
| | - utemeljitev izbire nosilca, če to ni voda. |
| | Preskusne živali: |
| | - uporabljeno vrsto in sev, |
| | - število in starost živali, |
| | - izvor, nastanitvene razmere, hrano ipd., |
| | - maso posameznih živali na začetku preskusa. |
| | Preskusni pogoji: |
| | - utemeljitev izbire velikosti odmerka, |
| | - podatke o sestavi preskusne snovi/pripravi hrane, doseženi koncentraciji, stabilnosti in homogenosti pripravka, |
| | - podatke o dajanju preskusne snovi, |
| | - preračunavanje koncentracije preskusne snovi v hrani/pitni vodi (ppm) v dejanski odmerek (mg/kg telesne mase/dan), če je primerno, |
| | - okoljske razmere, |
| | - podatke o kakovosti hrane in vode. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | Podatki o toksičnem učinkovanju pri materi po odmerku, ki vključujejo, vendar niso omejeni na: |
| | - število živali na začetku preskusa, število preživelih živalih, število brejih in število živali, ki splavijo ali kotijo predčasno, |
| | - dan smrti med študijo ali če živali preživijo do konca, |
| | - podatki o živalih, ki ne preživijo do predvidene usmrtitve, se sporočijo, vendar se ne vključijo v medskupinske statistične primerjave, |
| | - dan opazovanja vsakega nenormalnega kliničnega znaka in poznejšega poteka, |
| | - telesno maso, spremembo telesne mase in maso gravidne maternice, vključno, po izbiri, s spremembo telesne mase popravljeno za maso gravidne maternice, |
| | - porabo hrane in porabo vode, če je izmerjena, |
| | - ugotovitve obdukcije, vključno z maso maternice, |
| | - treba je poročati o vrednostih brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov pri materi in o razvojnih učinkih. |
| | Ciljni učinki za razvoj po odmerku na zarod z vsadki, ki vključujejo: |
| | - število rumenih telesc, |
| | - število vgnezditev, število in odstotek živih in mrtvih fetusov in resorpcij, |
| | - število in odstotek izgub pred vgnezditvijo in po njej. |
| | Ciljni učinki za razvoj po odmerku na zarod z živimi fetusi, ki vključujejo: |
| | - število in odstotek živih potomcev, |
| | - razmerje spolov, |
| | - fetalna telesna masa, če je mogoče po spolu in skupno, |
| | - zunanje deformnosti in deformnosti mehkega tkiva in skeleta ter druge ustrezne spremembe, |
| | - merila za kategorizacijo, če je primerno, |
| | - skupno število in odstotek fetusov in zaroda z zunanjo spremembo, spremembo mehkega tkiva ali skeleta, pa tudi vrste in pojavnost posameznih nepravilnosti in druge ustrezne spremembe. |
| | Razprava o rezultatih. |
| | Zaključki. |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) Kavlock R.J. et al. (1996) A Simulation Study of the Influence of Study Design on the Estimation of Benchmark Doses for Developmental Toxicity. Risk Analysis 16; 399–410. |
| | (2) Kimmel, C.A. and Francis, E.Z. (1990) Proceedings of the Workshop on the Acceptability and Interpretation of Dermal Developmental Toxicity Studies. Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 14; 386–398. |
| | (3) Wong, B.A., et al. (1997) Developing Specialized Inhalation Exposure Systems to Address Toxicological Problems. CIIT Activities 17; 1–8. |
| | (4) US Environmental Protection Agency (1985) Subpart E-Specific Organ/Tissue Toxicity, 40 CFR 798.4350: Inhalation Developmental Toxicity Study. |
| | (5) Salewski, E. (1964) Faerbermethode zum Makroskopischen Nachweis von Implantations Stellen am Uterusder Ratte. Naunyn-Schmeidebergs Archiv fur Pharmakologie und Experimentelle Pathologie 247:367. |
| | (6) Edwards, J.A. (1968) The external Development of the Rabbit and Rat Embryo. In Advances in Teratology. D.H.M. Woolam (ed.) Vol. 3. Academic Press, NY. |
| | (7) Inouye, M. (1976) Differential Staining of Cartilage and Bone in Fetal Mouse Skeleton by Alcian Blue and Alizarin Red S. Congenital Anomalies 16; 171–173. |
| | (8) Igarashi, E. et al. (1992) Frequency Of Spontaneous Axial Skeletal Variations Detected by the Double Staining Techniquefor Ossified and Cartilaginous Skeleton in Rat Foetuses. Congenital Anomalies 32; 381–391. |
| | (9) Kimmel, C.A. et al. (1993) Skeletal Development Following Heat Exposure in the Rat. Teratology 47:229–242. |
| | (10) Marr, M.C. et al. (1988) Comparison of Single and Double Staining for Evaluation of Skeletal Development: The Effects of Ethylene Glycol (EG) in CD Rats. Teratology 37; 476. |
| | (11) Barrow, M.V. and Taylor, W.J. (1969) A Rapid Method for Detecting Deformnosti in Rat Foetuses. Journal of Morphology 127:291–306. |
| | (12) Fritz, H. (1974) Prenatal Ossification in Rabbits ss Indicative of Foetal Maturity. Teratology 11; 313–320. |
| | (13) Gibson, J.P. et al. (1966) Use of the Rabbit in Teratogenicity Studies. Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology 9; 398–408. |
| | (14) Kimmel, C.A. and Wilson, J.G. (1973) Skeletal Deviation in Rats: Malformations or Variations? Teratology 8; 309–316. |
| | (15) Marr, M.C. et al. (1992) Developmental Stages of the CD (Sprague-Dawley) Rat Skeleton after Maternal Exposure to Ethylene Glycol. Teratology 46; 169–181. |
| | (16) Monie, I.W. et al. (1965) Dissection Procedures for Rat Foetuses Permitting Alizarin Red Staining of Skeleton and Histological Study of Viscera. Supplement to Teratology Workshop Manual, pp. 163–173. |
| | (17) Spark, C. and Dawson, A.B. (1928) The Order and Time of appearance of Centers of Ossification in the Fore and Hind Limbs of the Albino Rat, with Special Reference to the Possible Influence of the Sex Factor. American Journal of Anatomy 41; 411–445. |
| | (18) Staples, R.E. and Schnell, V.L. (1964) Refinements in Rapid Clearing Technique in the KOH-Alizarin Red S Method for Fetal Bone. Stain Technology 39; 61–63. |
| | (19) Strong, R.M. (1928) The Order Time and Rate of Ossification of the Albino Rat (Mus Norvegicus Albinus) Skeleton. American Journal of Anatomy 36; 313–355. |
| | (20) Stuckhardt, J.L. and Poppe, S.M. (1984) Fresh Visceral Examination of Rat and Rabbit Foetuses Used in Teratogenicity Testing. Teratogenesis, Carcinogenesis, and Mutagenesis 4; 181–188. |
| | (21) Walker, D.G. and Wirtschafter, Z.T. (1957) The Genesis of the Rat Skeleton. Thomas, Springfield, IL. |
| | (22) Wilson, J.G. (1965) Embryological Considerations in Teratology. In Teratology: Principles and Techniques, Wilson J.G. and Warkany J. (eds). University of Chicago, Chicago, IL, pp 251–277. |
| | (23) Wilson, J.G. and Fraser, F.C. (eds). (1977) Handbook of Teratology, Vol. 4. Plenum, NY. |
| | (24) Varnagy, L. (1980) Use of Recent Fetal Bone Staining Techniques in the Evaluation of Pesticide Teratogenicity. Acta Vet. Acad. Sci. Hung. 28; 233–239. |
| | (25) Staples, R.E. (1974) Detection of visceral Alterations in Mammalian Foetuses. Teratology 9; 37–38. |
| | (26) Van Julsingha, E.B. and C.G. Bennett (1977) A Dissecting Procedure for the Detection of Anomalies in the Rabbit Foetal Head. V: Methods in Prenatal Toxicology Neubert, D., Merker, H.J. and Kwasigroch, T.E. (eds.). University of Chicago, Chicago, IL, pp. 126–144. |
| | (27) US Environmental Protection Agency (1991) Guidelines for Developmental Toxicity Risk Assessment. Federal Register 56; 63798–63826. |
| | (28) Wise, D.L. et al. (1997) Terminology of Developmental Anomalije in Common Laboratory Mammals (Version 1) Teratology 55; 249–292. |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2G |
| | B.35 ŠTUDIJA DVOGENERACIJSKE REPRODUKTIVNE STRUPENOSTI |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta metoda ustreza metodi OECD TG 416 (2001). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Ta metoda za preskušanje dvogeneracijske reprodukcije je namenjena zagotavljanju splošnih informacij o učinkih preskusne snovi na celovitost in zmogljivost moških in ženskih reproduktivnih sistemov, vključno s funkcijo spolnih žlez, ciklom estrusa, obnašanjem pri parjenju, spočetjem, brejostjo, kotitvijo, laktacijo in odstavljanjem, ter na rast in razvoj potomcev. Študija lahko zagotovi tudi informacije o učinkih preskusne snovi na neonatalno obolevnost, smrtnost in predhodne podatke o strupenosti za razvoj pred rojstvom in po njem ter služi kot vodnik za nadaljnje preskuse. Poleg preučevanja rasti in razvoja generacije F1 je ta preskusna metoda namenjena tudi ocenjevanju celovitosti in zmogljivosti moških in ženskih reproduktivnih sistemov ter rasti in razvoja generacije F2. Za nadaljnje informacije o strupenosti za razvoj in funkcionalnih pomanjkljivostih se lahko bodisi vključi dodatne študijske segmente v ta protokol s primerno uporabo metod za strupenost za razvoj in/ali razvojno nevrotoksičnost bodisi se te ciljne učinke preuči v posebnih študijah z uporabo ustreznih preskusnih metod. |
| | 1.2 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Preskusna snov se daje v stopnjevanih odmerkih več skupinam samcev in samic. Samci generacije P morajo dobivati odmerek med rastjo in še najmanj en celotni spermatogenetski cikel (približno 56 dni pri miši in 70 dni pri podgani), da bi se pokazali kakršni koli škodljivi učinki na spermatogenezo. Učinki na seme se določijo s številnimi parametri semena (npr. morfologijo in gibljivostjo semena) in s pripravo tkiva in podrobno histopatologijo. Če so na voljo podatki o spermatogenezi iz prejšnjih študij s ponavljajočimi odmerki z dovolj dolgim trajanjem, npr. iz 90-dnevne študije, ni nujno, da se v vrednotenje vključijo samci generacije P. Vsekakor pa je priporočljivo, da se shranijo vzorci ali digitalni posnetki semena generacije P, da se omogoči poznejše vrednotenje. Samice generacije P morajo dobivati odmerek med rastjo in še nekaj celotnih ciklov estrusa, da bi odkrili kakršne koli škodljive učinke preskusne snovi na normalen cikel estrusa. Preskusna snov se daje staršem (P) med njihovim parjenjem, med posledično brejostjo in med odstavljanjem njihovih potomcev F1. Med odstavljanjem se nadaljuje z dajanjem snovi potomcem F1 med njihovo rastjo do odraslosti, parjenja in ustvarjenja generacije F2, dokler se ne odstavi generacija F2. |
| | Na vseh živalih se izvajajo klinična opazovanja in patološki pregledi glede znakov strupenosti s posebnim poudarkom na učinke na celovitost in zmogljivost moških in ženskih reproduktivnih sistemov in na rast in razvoj potomcev. |
| | 1.3 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.3.1 Izbira vrste živali |
| | Priporočena vrsta za preskušanje je podgana. Če se uporabijo druge vrste, je treba to utemeljiti in potrebne so ustrezne spremembe. Sevi z nizko plodnostjo ali dobro znano visoko pojavnostjo razvojnih napak se ne smejo uporabljati. Na začetku študije morajo biti razlike v masi posameznih živali čim manjše in ne smejo presegati ± 20 % povprečne mase za vsak spol. |
| | 1.3.2 Nastanitvene in prehranjevalne razmere |
| | Temperatura v prostoru s poskusnimi živalmi naj bo 22 °C (± 3o C). Čeprav naj bi bila relativna vlažnost najmanj 30 % in je zaželeno, da ne presega 70 %, razen v času čiščenja prostora, je cilj 50–60 %. Osvetlitev naj bo umetna, zaporedje 12 ur svetlobe, 12 ur teme. Za hranjenje se lahko uporablja konvencionalna laboratorijska prehrana z neomejeno oskrbo s pitno vodo. Na izbiro prehrane lahko vpliva potreba po zagotovitvi ustrezne primesi preskusne snovi, kadar se daje po tej metodi. |
| | Živali se lahko namestijo posamično ali dajo v kletke v manjših skupinah istega spola. Parjenje naj se izvaja v kletkah, ki so primerne za ta namen. Po dokazu o kopulaciji se sparjene samice posamično naselijo v kletke za kotitev ali kletke za matere. Sparjene podgane so lahko tudi v manjših skupinah in se ločijo en dan ali dva pred kotitvijo. Ko je kotitev blizu, se sparjenim živalim zagotovi ustrezen in določen material za izdelavo gnezda. |
| | 1.3.3 Priprava živali |
| | Uporabiti je treba zdrave mlade živali, ki so se najmanj pet dni prilagajale na laboratorijske razmere in predhodno niso bile uporabljene za poskuse. Poznati je treba vrsto, sev, vir, spol, maso in/ali starost poskusnih živali. Znana morajo biti sorodstvena razmerja med živalmi, tako da se je mogoče izogniti parjenju med sorojenci. Živali se naključno dodelijo v kontrolno in tretirano skupino (priporočljiva je plastitev po telesni masi). Kletke je treba razporediti tako, da so možni učinki zaradi pozicije kletk čim manjši. Vsaki živali se dodeli enotna identifikacijska številka. Pri generaciji P je to treba narediti, preden se začne odmerjanje. Pri generaciji F1 se to naredi ob odstavljanju živali, izbranih za parjenje. Za vse izbrane živali F1 je treba voditi evidenco z navedbo o poreklu zaroda. Poleg tega je priporočljiva posamična identifikacija mladičev čim prej po rojstvu, če se načrtuje posamično tehtanje mladičev ali kakršne koli funkcionalne preskuse. |
| | Starši (P) so na začetku odmerjanja stari približno 5 do 9 tednov. Živali v vseh preskusnih skupinah naj bodo čim enotnejše po masi in starosti. |
| | 1.4 POSTOPEK |
| | 1.4.1 Število in spol živali |
| | Vsaka preskusna in kontrolna skupina mora vsebovati zadostno število živali, da nastane po možnosti najmanj 20 brejih samic, ki kotijo ali so blizu kotitve. Pri snoveh, ki povzročajo nezaželene učinke, povezane s tretiranjem (npr. sterilnost, čezmerna toksičnost pri velikem odmerku), to ni mogoče. Cilj je dobiti dovolj brejih samic, da je zagotovljeno smiselno ovrednotenje potenciala snovi za vplivanje na plodnost, brejost in materinsko obnašanje ter sesanje, rast in razvoj potomcev F1 od spočetja do zrelosti in razvoj njihovih potomcev (F2) do odstavitve. Če zaželeno število brejih živali (to je 20) ni doseženo, študija s tem torej ni nujno ovržena in je potrebno vrednotenje vsakega primera posebej. |
| | 1.4.2 Priprava odmerkov |
| | Priporoča se, da se preskusna snov daje oralno (s hrano, pitno vodo ali gavažo), razen če se šteje drug način dajanja (npr. dermalno ali z vdihavanjem) za primernejšega. |
| | Po potrebi se preskusna snov raztopi ali suspendira v primernem nosilcu. Priporočljivo je, da se, kadar koli je mogoče, najprej razmisli o uporabi vodne raztopine/suspenzije, potem o raztopini/emulziji v olju (npr. koruzno olje), šele nato o možni raztopini v drugih nosilcih. V primeru nosilcev, ki niso voda, je treba poznati toksične lastnosti takega nosilca. Določiti je treba stabilnost preskusne snovi v nosilcu. |
| | 1.4.3 Odmerjanje |
| | Uporabijo se najmanj tri velikosti odmerkov in hkratna kontrola. Razen kadar zaradi fizikalno-kemijskih lastnosti ali bioloških učinkov preskusne snovi to ni mogoče, je treba najvišjo velikost odmerka izbrati z namenom, da se povzroči toksičnost, vendar ne smrt ali hudo trpljenje. V primeru nepričakovane smrtnosti, so študije s stopnjo smrtnosti, manjšo od približno 10 odstotkov pri starših (P), navadno še vedno sprejemljive. Padajoče zaporedje velikosti odmerkov je treba izbrati tako, da se pokažejo vse reakcije, ki so odvisne od odmerka, in vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov (NOAEL). Za padajoče zaporedje velikosti odmerkov so pogosto optimalni dvakratni do štirikratni intervali, pogosto pa je bolje dodati še dodatno četrto preskusno skupino, kakor uporabiti zelo velike intervale med odmerki (npr. več kot faktor 10). Pri študijah odmerjanja s hrano interval odmerka ne bi smel biti večji od trikratnega. Vrednosti odmerkov je treba izbirati ob upoštevanju vseh obstoječih podatkov o strupenosti, zlasti rezultate iz študij s ponavljajočimi odmerki. Upoštevajo se tudi vse razpoložljive informacije o presnovi in kinetiki preskusne zmesi ali sorodnih materialov. Te informacije poleg tega pomagajo tudi pri dokazovanju ustreznosti režima odmerjanja. |
| | Kontrolna skupina je netretirana skupina ali kontrolna skupina, tretirana samo z nosilcem, če je ta uporabljen pri dajanju preskusne snovi. Razen pri tretiranju s preskusno snovjo, morajo biti živali v kontrolni skupini obravnavane enako kakor živali v preskusni skupini. Če je uporabljen nosilec, mora kontrolna skupina prejeti količino nosilca, enako največji uporabljeni količini. Če se preskusna snov daje s hrano in povzroča zmanjšan vnos ali izkoristek hrane, potem je morda potrebna uporaba po parih hranjene kontrolne skupine. Namesto hkratne po parih hranjene kontrolne skupine se lahko uporabijo podatki iz nadzorovanih študij, namenjenih ovrednotenju učinkov zmanjšane porabe hrane na reproduktivne parametre. |
| | Upoštevati je treba naslednje lastnosti nosilca in drugih aditivov: učinke na absorpcijo, distribucijo, presnovo ali retencijo preskusne snovi; učinke na kemijske lastnosti preskusne snovi, ki lahko spremenijo njene toksične lastnosti; ter učinke na porabo hrane ali vode ali status prehranjenosti živali. |
| | 1.4.4 Mejni preskus |
| | Če oralna študija pri eni velikosti odmerka najmanj 1000 mg/kg telesne mase/dan ali enakovreden odstotek hrane ali pitne vode pri dajanju hrane ali pitne vode, pri kateri se uporabijo postopki, opisani za to študijo, ne povzroči opaznih toksičnih učinkov ne pri starših ne pri njihovih potomcih in se glede na podatke o strukturno in/ali presnovno sorodnih zmeseh ne pričakuje učinka, potem se šteje, da ni potrebna popolna študija z uporabo več velikosti odmerkov. Mejni preskus se lahko uporabi za vse primere, razen kadar človekova izpostavljenost kaže na potrebo po uporabi večje velikosti odmerka. Pri drugih vrstah dajanja, na primer pri vdihavanju ali dermalni aplikaciji, lahko fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti preskusne snovi, na primer topnost, pogosto določajo in omejujejo največjo dosegljivo raven izpostavljenosti. |
| | 1.4.5 Dajanje odmerkov |
| | Živali naj dobivajo preskusno snov 7 dni na teden. Zaželena je oralna pot dajanja (prehrana, pitna voda ali gavaža). Če se uporabi drug način dajanja, je treba to utemeljiti in lahko so potrebne ustrezne spremembe. V ustreznem preskusnem obdobju vse živali dobivajo odmerke po enaki metodi. Kadar se preskusna snov daje z gavažo, je treba to storiti z uporabo želodčne sonde. Količina tekočine, ki se da naenkrat, ne sme presegati 1 ml/100 g telesne mase (pri koruznem olju največ 0,4 ml/100 g telesne mase), razen v primeru vodnih raztopin, kjer se sme uporabiti 2 ml/100 g telesne mase. Razen pri dražečih ali jedkih snoveh, ki pri višjih koncentracijah navadno povzročajo močnejše učinke, je treba variabilnost preskusne količine s prilagajanjem koncentracije obdržati na kar najnižji ravni, zato da bi zagotovili konstantno količino pri vseh odmerkih. Pri študijah z gavažo mladiči navadno dobivajo preskusno snov samo posredno skozi mleko, dokler se zanje po odstavitvi ne začne neposredno dajanje odmerkov. Pri študijah s prehrano ali pitno vodo dobijo mladiči dodatno preskusno snov neposredno, ko začnejo v zadnjem tednu laktacijskega obdobja sami jesti. |
| | Pri snoveh, ki se dajejo s hrano ali pitno vodo, je treba zagotoviti, da količine uporabljene preskusne snovi ne vplivajo na običajno raven vnosa hrane ali porabe vode. Kadar se preskusna snov daje s hrano, se lahko uporabi bodisi konstantna koncentracija v hrani (ppm) bodisi konstantna velikost odmerka glede na telesno maso živali; treba je navesti uporabljeni način. Če dajemo snov z gavažo, je treba odmerke dati vsak dan približno ob istem času in jih najmanj enkrat tedensko prilagoditi, da se vzdržuje konstantna velikost odmerka glede na telesno maso živali. Pri prilagajanju odmerka gavaže, ki temelji na masi, je treba upoštevati informacije o porazdelitvi posteljice. |
| | 1.4.6 Načrti za poskuse |
| | Dnevno dajanje odmerkov starševskim (P) samcem in samicam se začne, ko so stari 5 do 9 tednov. Dnevno dajanje odmerkov samcem in samicam F1 se začne ob odstavitvi; treba pa je upoštevati, da se lahko v primeru dajanja preskusne snovi s hrano ali pitno vodo začne neposredna izpostavljenost mladičev F1 preskusni snovi že v laktacijskem obdobju. Pri obeh spolih (P in F1) se odmerjanje nadaljuje najmanj 10 tednov pred obdobjem parjenja. Odmerjanje se nadaljuje pri obeh spolih še 2 tedna v obdobju parjenja. Samce je treba humano usmrtiti in preučiti, ko niso več potrebni za ocenjevanje reproduktivnih učinkov. Pri starševskih (P) samicah se mora odmerjanje nadaljevati skozi ves čas brejosti in do odstavljanja potomcev F1. Upoštevati je treba spremembe načrta odmerjanja, ki temeljijo na razpoložljivih informacijah o preskusni snovi, vključno z obstoječimi podatki o toksičnosti, nastajanju presnove ali bioakumulaciji. Odmerek za vsako žival navadno temelji na zadnji posamični določitvi telesne mase. Vendar je potrebna previdnost pri prilagajanju odmerka v zadnjem trimestru brejosti. |
| | Tretiranje samcev in samic P in F1 se nadaljuje do konca. Vse odrasle samce in samice P in F1 je treba humano usmrtiti, ko niso več potrebni za ocenjevanje reproduktivnih učinkov. Potomci F1, ki niso izbrani za parjenje, in vsi potomci F2 se humano usmrtijo po odstavitvi. |
| | 1.4.7 Postopek parjenja |
| | 1.4.7.1 Parjenje staršev (P) |
| | Pri vsakem parjenju se vsaka samica da skupaj z enim samcem z enako velikostjo odmerka (parjenje 1: 1), dokler ne pride do kopulacije ali dokler ne mineta 2 tedna. Samice se vsak dan pregledajo glede navzočnosti semena ali vaginalnega čepa. Dan brejosti 0 je opredeljen kot dan, ko je najden vaginalni čep ali seme. V primeru, da parjenje ni uspešno, se lahko razmisli o ponovnem parjenju samic z dokazanimi samci iste skupine. Sparjeni pari morajo biti jasno navedeni v podatkih. Parjenju sorojencev se je treba izogibati. |
| | 1.4.7.2 Parjenje F1 |
| | Pri parjenju potomcev F1, je treba iz vsakega zaroda po odstavitvi izbrati najmanj enega samca in eno samico za parjenje z drugimi mladiči z enako velikostjo odmerka, vendar iz drugega zaroda, za ustvarjenje generacije F2. Izbira mladičev iz vsakega zaroda mora biti naključna, brez značilnih opaznih razlik v telesni masi ali videzu med vrstniki iz zaroda. V primeru, da so opažene te razlike, je treba izbrati najboljše predstavnike iz vsakega zaroda. Praktično je to najbolje storiti glede na telesno maso, lahko pa je primernejše na podlagi videza. Potomci F1 se ne bi smeli pariti, dokler ne dosežejo polne spolne zrelosti. |
| | Pari brez potomcev se morajo ovrednotiti, da se določi pravi vzrok neplodnosti. To lahko vključuje postopke, kot so dodatne možnosti za parjenje z drugimi dokazanimi očeti ali materami, mikroskopski pregled reproduktivnih organov in pregled ciklov estrusa ali spermatogeneze. |
| | 1.4.7.3 Drugo parjenje |
| | V nekaterih primerih, na primer pri spremembah velikosti zaroda, povezanih s tretiranjem, ali pri opaženem dvoumnem učinku pri prvem parjenju, je priporočljivo, da se odrasli P ali F1 ponovno parijo, da bi ustvarili drugi zarod. Priporočeno je, da se ponovno parijo samice ali samci, ki niso ustvarili zaroda z dokazanimi plemenskimi živalmi nasprotnega spola. Če se zdi, da je pri kateri koli generaciji potrebno ustvariti drugi zarod, je treba živali ponovno pariti približno en teden po odstavitvi zadnjega zaroda. |
| | 1.4.7.4 Velikost zaroda |
| | Živalim se dovoli, da normalno skotijo in redijo svoje potomce do odstavitve. Standardizacija velikosti zaroda ni obvezna. Kadar se standardizacija opravi, se metoda podrobno opiše. |
| | 1.5 OPAZOVANJA |
| | 1.5.1 Klinična opazovanja |
| | Splošno klinično opazovanje je treba opraviti vsak dan in v primeru dajanja odmerkov z gavažo je treba upoštevati vrhunec pričakovanih učinkov po odmerjanju. Zabeležiti je treba vedenjske spremembe, znake težke ali podaljšane kotitve in vse znake toksičnosti. Dodatni, podrobnejši pregled vsake živali se izvede najmanj enkrat tedensko in se lahko primerno opravi takrat, ko se žival tehta. Dvakrat dnevno, ob koncu tedna pa enkrat dnevno, je treba vse živali opazovati glede obolevnosti in smrtnosti. |
| | 1.5.2 Telesna masa in poraba hrane/vode pri starših |
| | Starši (P in F1) se stehtajo prvi dan dajanja odmerkov in potem najmanj enkrat tedensko. Starševske samice (P in F1) se med brejostjo stehtajo najmanj na 0., 7., 14. in 20. ali 21. dan ter med laktacijo na iste dneve, kot je tehtanje zaroda, in na dan, ko so živali usmrčene. O teh opazovanjih je treba poročati posamično za vsako odraslo žival. Med obdobjem pred parjenjem in med brejostjo se poraba hrane meri najmanj tedensko. Poraba vode se meri najmanj tedensko, če se preskusna snov daje z vodo. |
| | 1.5.3 Cikel estrusa |
| | Dolžina in normalnost cikla estrusa se pri samicah P in F1 ovrednotita z vaginalnim brisom pred parjenjem in po izbiri med parjenjem, dokler ni najden dokaz o parjenju. Med jemanjem vaginalnih/vratnih celic je treba paziti, da ne pride do poškodb sluznice in pozneje do nastanka psevdogravidnosti (1). |
| | 1.5.4 Parametri semena |
| | Pri vseh samcih P in F1 se na koncu zabeleži teža moda in obmodka in po en organ od vsakega shrani za histopatološki pregled (glej oddelek 1.5.7, 1.5.8.1). Za podskupino najmanj desetih samcev iz vsake skupine samcev P in F1 je treba preostala moda in obmodke uporabiti za štetje semenčic, odpornih na homogenizacijo, ali zalog semena v repu obmodka. Pri tej isti podskupini samcev je treba zbrati seme iz repov obmodkov ali semenovodov za ovrednotenje gibljivosti in morfologije semena. Če se opazujejo učinki, povezani s tretiranjem, ali kadar je v drugih študijah dokaz za možne učinke na spermatogenezo, se ovrednotenje semena izvede pri vseh samcih v vsaki skupini odmerka; drugače se lahko štetje omeji na kontrolne samce in samce P in F1 z velikim odmerkom. |
| | Prešteti je treba tudi celotno število semenčic iz moda, ki so odporne na homogenizacijo, in seme iz repa obmodka (2)(3). Na zaloge semena v repu se lahko sklepa po koncentraciji in količini semena v suspenziji, ki se uporabi za dokončanje kakovostnih vrednotenj, in števila semena, dobljenega z naknadnim mletjem in/ali homogeniziranjem preostalega tkiva repa obmodka. Štetje je treba izvesti na izbrani podskupini samcev iz vseh skupin odmerkov takoj po usmrtitvi živali, razen če so narejeni video ali digitalni posnetki ali če se primerki zamrznejo in analizirajo pozneje. V teh primerih se lahko najprej analizirajo kontrole in skupina z velikim odmerkom. Če niso vidni nobeni učinki, povezani s tretiranjem (npr. učinki na število semenčic, gibljivost ali morfologijo), drugih skupin odmerkov ni treba analizirati. Kadar se učinki, povezani s tretiranjem, opazijo v skupini z velikim odmerkom, je treba ovrednotiti tudi skupine z manjšim odmerkom. |
| | Gibljivost semena v obmodku (ali semenovodu) je treba ovrednotiti ali posneti na video takoj po usmrtitvi. Seme je treba ohraniti s čim manjšimi poškodbami in razredčiti za analizo gibljivosti s sprejemljivimi metodami (4). Odstotek progresivno gibljivega semena je treba določiti bodisi subjektivno ali objektivno. Kadar se opravi analiza gibanja s pomočjo računalnika (5)(6)(7)(8)(9)(10), izpeljava progresivne gibljivosti temelji na uporabniško določenih pragovih za povprečno hitrost ali na linearnem indeksu. Če se v času obdukcije vzorci posnamejo na videotrak (11) ali se drugače zabeležijo slike, se lahko pozneje analizirajo le samci P in F1 iz kontrolne skupine in skupine z velikim odmerkom, razen če so opazni učinki, povezani s tretiranjem, v tem primeru je treba ovrednotiti tudi skupine z manjšim odmerkom. Če ni video ali digitalne slike, se morajo ob obdukciji analizirati vsi vzorci iz vseh tretiranih skupin. |
| | Treba je opraviti morfološko ovrednotenje semena iz obmodka (ali semenovoda). Seme (najmanj 200 na vzorec) je treba preučiti kot fiksirane, mokre preparate (12) in ga razvrstiti bodisi v normalno ali nenormalno. Primeri morfoloških anomalij semena vključujejo spojitev, ločene glavice ter glavice in/ali repke nepravilnih oblik. Ovrednotenje je treba izvesti na izbrani podskupini samcev v vseh skupinah odmerkov bodisi takoj po usmrtitvi živali ali pozneje na podlagi video ali digitalnih posnetkov. Tudi brisi se, potem ko so fiksirani, lahko preučujejo pozneje. V teh primerih se lahko najprej analizirajo kontrole in skupina z velikim odmerkom. Če niso vidni nobeni učinki (npr. učinki na morfologijo semena), drugih skupin odmerkov ni treba analizirati. Kadar se učinki, povezani s tretiranjem, opazijo v skupini z velikim odmerkom, je treba ovrednotiti tudi skupine z manjšim odmerkom. |
| | Če so bili zgornji parametri za ovrednotenje semena že preučeni v študiji sistemske toksičnosti, ki je trajala vsaj 90 dni, jih ni treba ponoviti v dvogeneracijski študiji. Vsekakor pa je priporočljivo, da se shranijo vzorci ali digitalni posnetki semena generacije P, da se omogoči poznejše vrednotenje, če bi bilo potrebno. |
| | 1.5.5 Potomci |
| | Vsak zarod je treba preučiti čim prej po skotitvi (laktacijski dan 0) in ugotoviti število in spol mladičev, mrtvorojenih, živorojenih, in navzočnost večjih nepravilnosti. Mladiče, ki so mrtvi na dan 0, je najbolje, če se ne macerirajo, preučiti glede možnih napak in vzroka smrti in konzervirati. Žive mladiče je treba prešteti in posamično stehtati ob skotitvi (laktacijski dan 0) ali na dan 1 in pozneje na dneve rednega tehtanja, npr. na 4., 7., 14. in 21. dan laktacije. Treba je evidentirati telesne ali vedenjske anomalije, ki se opazijo pri materah ali njihovih potomcih. |
| | Telesni razvoj potomcev je treba zabeležiti v glavnem po prirastu telesne mase. Drugi telesni parametri (npr. očesne in ušesne odprtine, izbijanje zob, rast las) lahko dajo dodatne informacije, a ti podatki se raje ovrednotijo v kontekstu podatkov o spolni zrelosti (npr. starost in telesna masa ob vaginalni odprtini ali ločitvi prepucija na glavici penisa) (13). Funkcionalne preiskave (npr. motorične dejavnosti, senzorne funkcije, refleksna ontogenija) potomcev F1 pred in/ali po odstavitvi, zlasti tiste, ki se nanašajo na spolno zrelost, so priporočljive, če take preiskave niso vključene v posebne študije. Starost vaginalne odprtine in ločitve prepucija je treba določiti pri odstavljenih mladičih F1, izbranih za parjenje. Zadnjično-genitalno razdaljo pri mladičih F2 je treba izmeriti na poporodni dan 0, če jo sprožijo spremembe v razmerju spolov pri F1 ali časovna uskladitev spolne zrelosti. |
| | Funkcionalna opazovanja se lahko opustijo pri skupinah, ki sicer jasno kažejo znake škodljivih učinkov (npr. znatno zmanjšanje pridobivanja telesne mase itd.). Če se opravljajo funkcionalne preiskave, naj se ne delajo na mladičih, ki so izbrani za parjenje. |
| | 1.5.6 Obdukcija |
| | Na koncu študije ali ob smrti med študijo se makroskopsko pregledajo vsi starši (P in F1), vsi mladiči z zunanjimi anomalijami ali kliničnimi znaki, pa tudi po en naključno izbran mladič vsakega spola in zaroda iz obeh generacij F1 in F2 glede kakršnih koli strukturnih anomalij ali patoloških sprememb. Posebno pozornost je treba posvetiti organom reproduktivnega sistema. Mladiče, ki so humano usmrčeni v razmerah poginjanja, in mrtve mladiče je treba, če se ne macerirajo, preučiti glede možnih napak in/ali vzroka smrti in konzervirati. |
| | Maternice vseh samic, ki so prvič kotile, se pregledajo na način, ki ne škoduje histopatološkemu ovrednotenju, glede navzočnosti in števila vgnezditev. |
| | 1.5.7 Masa organov |
| | Na koncu se določi telesna masa in masa naslednjih organov vseh staršev P in F1 (parni organi se stehtajo posamično): |
| | - maternice, jajčnikov, |
| | - mod, obmodkov (v celoti in repa), |
| | - prostate, |
| | - semenskih mešičkov s koagulacijskimi žlezami in njihovimi tekočinami ter prostato (kot ena enota), |
| | - možganov, jeter, ledvic, vranice, hipofize, ščitnice in nadledvičnih žlez ter znanih ciljnih organov. |
| | Končno telesno maso je treba določiti za mladiče F1 in F2, ki so izbrani za obdukcijo. Stehtajo se naslednji organi po enega naključno izbranega mladiča vsakega spola in zaroda (glej oddelek 1.5.6): možgani, vranica in priželjc. |
| | Rezultate obdukcije in tehtanja organov je treba oceniti v smislu ugotovitev iz drugih študij s ponavljajočimi odmerki, kadar je to izvedljivo. |
| | 1.5.8 Histopatologija |
| | 1.5.8.1 Starši |
| | Naslednji organi in tkiva staršev (P in F1) ali njihovi reprezentativni vzorci se fiksirajo in shranijo v primernem mediju za histopatološki pregled: |
| | - nožnica, maternica z vratom in jajčniki (shranjeni v ustreznem fiksativu), |
| | - eno modo (konzervirano v Bouinovem ali primerljivem fiksativu), en obmodek, semenski mešički, prostata in koagulacijska žleza, |
| | - predhodno določen(i) ciljni organ(i) vseh staršev P in F1, izbranih za parjenje. |
| | Celotna histopatologija zgoraj naštetih konzerviranih organov in tkiv se izvede za vse živali z velikim odmerkom in za vse kontrolne živali P in F1, izbrane za parjenje. Pregled jajčnikov živali P ni obvezen. Organi, pri katerih je opaziti spremembe, povezane s tretiranjen, je treba pregledati tudi v skupinah z majhnim in srednjim odmerkom, da se lažje pojasni vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov. Poleg tega se histopatološko ovrednotijo reproduktivni organi živali z majhnim in srednjim odmerkom, za katere se domneva zmanjšana plodnost, npr. pri tistih, ki se niso mogli spariti, spočeti, zaploditi ali skotiti zdravih potomcev, ali pri katerih so prizadeti cikličnost estrusa ali število, gibljivost ali morfologija semena. Pregledajo se vse makroskopske lezije, na primer atrofija ali tumorji. |
| | Treba je izvesti podroben histopatološki pregled mod (npr. z uporabo Bouinovega fiksativa, vstavljanja v parafin in prečnih prerezov debeline 4–5 μm), da bi ugotovili učinke, povezane s tretiranjem, kot so zastale semenčice, manjkajoče plasti ali vrste kličnih celic, celice velikanke z več jedri ali uhajanje spermatogenih celic v svetlino (14). Pregled nepoškodovanega obmodka mora vključevati glavo, telo in rep, ki se lahko opravi z ocenjevanjem podolžnega prereza. Obmodek je treba oceniti glede prenikanja belih krvničk, spremembe prevladujoče vrste celic, vrst okvarjenih celic in fagocitoze semena. Za preučitev moških reproduktivnih organov se lahko uporabita PAS in barvanje s hematoksilinom. |
| | Postlaktacijski jajčnik bi moral vsebovati začetne in rastoče folikle, pa tudi veliko rumenih telesc iz laktacije. Histopatološki pregled bi moral odkriti kakovostno izgubljanje populacije začetnih foliklov. Količinsko vrednotenje začetnih foliklov je treba izvesti za samice F1; število živali, izbira prereza jajčnika in velikost vzorca prereza morajo biti statistično ustrezni za uporabljeni postopek ocenjevanja. Pregled mora vključevati štetje števila začetnih foliklov, ki se lahko kombinirajo z majhnimi rastočimi folikli, za primerjavo tretiranih in kontrolnih jajčnikov (15) (16) (17) (18) (19). |
| | 1.5.8.2 Odstavljeni mladiči |
| | Pretežno nenormalno tkivo in ciljni organi vseh mladičev z zunanjimi anomalijami ali kliničnimi znaki, pa tudi po en naključno izbran mladič vsakega spola in zaroda iz obeh generacij F1 in F2, ki niso bili izbrani za parjenje, se fiksirajo in shranijo v primernem mediju za histopatološki pregled. Izvede se celotni histopatološki opis značilnosti konzerviranih tkiv s posebnim poudarkom na organih reproduktivnega sistema. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.1 OBDELAVA REZULTATOV |
| | Podatki se sporočajo posamično in se povzamejo v obliki tabele, ki prikazuje za vsako preskusno skupino in vsako generacijo število živali na začetku preskusa, število živali, najdenih mrtvih ali usmrčenih iz humanih razlogov med preskusom, čas katere koli smrti ali humane usmrtitve, število plodnih živali, število brejih samic, število živali, ki kažejo znake toksičnosti, opis znakov zaznane toksičnosti, vključno s časom začetka, trajanja in resnosti katerih koli toksičnih učinkov, vrsto opažanj o starših in potomcih, vrstah histopatoloških sprememb in vseh ustreznih podatkov o zarodu. |
| | Številčni rezultati se morajo oceniti z ustrezno splošno sprejeto statistično metodo; statistične metode je treba določiti pri načrtovanju študije in jih utemeljiti. Za analiziranje podatkov so lahko koristni statistični modeli odziva v odvisnosti od odmerka. Poročilo mora vključevati dovolj informacij o metodi analize in uporabljenem računalniškem programu, tako da lahko neodvisni ocenjevalec/statistik ponovno ovrednoti in obnovi analizo. |
| | 2.2 VREDNOTENJE REZULTATOV |
| | Ugotovitve te študije dvogeneracijske reproduktivne strupenosti je treba ovrednotiti glede na opažene učinke, vključno z obdukcijo in mikroskopskimi ugotovitvami. Vrednotenje vključuje razmerje ali njegovo odsotnost med odmerkom preskusne snovi in navzočnostjo ali odsotnostjo pojava in resnosti anomalij, vključno z makroskopskimi lezijami, ugotovljenimi ciljnimi organi, prizadeto plodnostjo, kliničnimi anomalijami, prizadeto zmogljivost reproduktivnosti in zaroda, spremembe telesne mase, učinke na smrtnost in druge strupene učinke. Pri vrednotenju rezultatov preskusa je treba upoštevati fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti preskusne snovi in toksikokinetične podatke, če so na voljo. |
| | Pravilno izveden preskus reproduktivne strupenosti mora dati zadovoljivo oceno vrednosti brez učinka in razumevanje škodljivih učinkov na reprodukcijo, kotitev, laktacijo, poporodni razvoj vključno z rastjo in spolnim razvojem. |
| | 2.3 RAZLAGA REZULTATOV |
| | Študija dvogeneracijske reproduktivne strupenosti zagotovi informacije o učinkih ponovne izpostavljenosti snovi v vseh fazah reproduktivnega cikla. Študija zagotovi zlasti informacije o reproduktivnih parametrih in o razvoju, rasti, dozorevanju in preživetju potomcev. Rezultate študije je treba razlagati skupaj z ugotovitvami subkronične študije, študije predrojstvenega razvoja, toksikokinetične ter drugih razpoložljivih študij. Rezultati te študije se lahko uporabijo pri ocenjevanju potrebe po nadaljnjem preskušanju kemikalije. Ekstrapolacija rezultatov študije na človeka je veljavna le do omejene stopnje. Rezultati so najuporabnejši za zagotovitev informacij o vrednostih brez učinka in dovoljeni človekovi izpostavljenosti (20) (21) (22) (23). |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije: |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - fizikalno stanje in ustrezne fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti, |
| | - identifikacijske podatke, |
| | - čistost. |
| | Nosilec (po potrebi): |
| | - utemeljitev izbire nosilca, če to ni voda. |
| | Preskusne živali: |
| | - uporabljeno vrsto/sev, |
| | - število, starost in spol živali, |
| | - izvor, nastanitvene razmere, hrano, material za izdelavo gnezda itd., |
| | - maso posameznih živali na začetku preskusa. |
| | Preskusni pogoji: |
| | - utemeljitev izbire velikosti odmerka, |
| | - podatke o sestavi preskusne snovi/pripravi hrane, doseženi koncentraciji, |
| | - stabilnost in homogenost pripravka, |
| | - podatke o dajanju preskusne snovi, |
| | - preračunavanje koncentracije preskusne snovi v hrani/pitni vodi (ppm) v dejanski odmerek (mg/kg telesne mase/dan), če je primerno, |
| | - podatke o kakovosti hrane in vode. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - porabo hrane in porabo vode, če je na voljo, izkoristek hrane (prirast telesne mase na gram porabljene hrane) in porabo preskusnega materiala za živali P in F1, razen za obdobje sobivanja in najmanj za zadnjo tretjino laktacije, |
| | - podatke o absorpciji (če so na voljo), |
| | - podatke o telesni masi za živali P in F1, ki so izbrane za parjenje, |
| | - podatke o masi zaroda in mladičev, |
| | - telesno maso ob usmrtitvi in podatke o absolutni in relativni telesni masi organov za starše; |
| | - vrsto, resnost in trajanje kliničnih opažanj (ali so reverzibilna ali ne), |
| | - čas smrti med študijo in, če živali preživijo, do konca, |
| | - podatke o toksičnem učinkovanju glede na spol in odmerek, vključno z znaki parjenja, plodnostjo, brejostjo, skotitvijo, sposobnostjo za preživetje in laktacijo; poročilo mora navajati številke, uporabljene pri izračunu teh kazalnikov, |
| | - toksične ali druge učinke na reprodukcijo, potomce, poporodno rast itd., |
| | - ugotovitve obdukcije, |
| | - natančen opis vseh histopatoloških ugotovitev, |
| | - število samic P in F1 z normalnim ciklom in dolžino cikla, |
| | - skupno število semena v repu obmodka, odstotek progresivno gibljivega semena, odstotek morfološko normalnega semena in odstotek semena z vsako ugotovljeno anomalijo, |
| | - čas za parjenje, vključno s številom dni pred parjenjem, |
| | - dolžino brejosti, |
| | - število vgnezditev, rumenih telesc, velikost zaroda, |
| | - število živorojenih in izgub po vgnezditvi, |
| | - število mladičev z večjimi vidnimi anomalijami, če je treba poročati o številu spačkov, |
| | - podatke o telesnih znakih pri mladičih in drugih poporodnih razvojnih podatkih; ovrednotene telesne znake je treba utemeljiti, |
| | - podatke o opazovanju funkcij pri mladičih in odraslih, kot je primerno, |
| | - statistično obdelavo rezultatov, po potrebi. |
| | Razprava o rezultatih. |
| | Zaključki, tudi vrednosti brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov pri materah in potomcih. |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) Sadleir, R.M.F.S. (1979). Cycles and Seasons, V: Reproduction in Mammals: I. Germ Cells and Fertilization, C.R. Auston and R.V. Short (eds.), Cambridge, New York. |
| | (2) Gray, L.E. et al., (1989). A Dose-Response Analysis of Methoxychlor-Induced Alterations of Reproductive Development and Function in the Rat. Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 12:92–108. |
| | (3) Robb, G.W. et al., (1978). Dnevno Sperm Production and Epididymal Sperm Reserves of Pubertal and Adult Rats. Journal of Reproduction and Fertility 54:103–107. |
| | (4) Klinefelter, G.R. et al., (1991). The Method of Sperm Collection Significantly Influences Sperm Motion Parameters Following Ethane Dimethanesulfonate Administration in the Rat. Reproductive Toxicology 5:39 44. |
| | (5) Seed, J. et al. (1996). Methods for Assessing Sperm Motility, Morphology, and Counts in the Rat, Rabbit, and Dog: a Consensus Report. Reproductive Toxicology 10(3):237–244. |
| | (6) Chapin, R.E. et al., (1992). Methods for Assessing Rat Sperm Motility. Reproductive Toxicology 6:267–273. |
| | (7) Klinefelter, G.R. et al., (1992). Direct Effects of Ethane Dimethanesulphonate on Epididymal Function in Adult Rats: an In Vitro Demonstration. Journal of Andrology 13:409–421. |
| | (8) Slott, V.L. et al., (1991). Rat Sperm Motility Analysis: Methodologic Considerations. Reproductive Toxicology 5:449–458. |
| | (9) Slott, V.L. and Perreault, S.D., (1993). Computer-Assisted Sperm Analysis of Rodent Epididymal Sperm Motility Using the Hamilton-Thorn Motility Analyzer. V: Methods in Toxicology, Part A., Academic, Orlando, Florida. pp. 319–333. |
| | (10) Toth, G.P. et al. (1989). The Automated Analysis of Rat Sperm Motility Following Subchronic Epichlorhydrin Administration: Methodologic and Statistical Considerations. Journal of Andrology 10: 401–415. |
| | (11) Working, P.K. and M. Hurtt, (1987). Computerized Videomicrographic Analysis of Rat Sperm Motility. Journal of Andrology 8:330–337. |
| | (12) Linder, R.E. et al., (1992). Endpoints of Spermatoxicity in the Rat After Short Duration Exposures to Fourteen Reproductive Toxicants. Reproductive Toxicology 6:491–505. |
| | (13) Korenbrot, C.C. et al., (1977). Preputial Separation as an External Sign of Pubertal Development in the Male Rat. Biological Reproduction 17:298–303. |
| | (14) Russell, L.D. et al., (1990). Histological and Histopathological Evaluation of the Testis, Cache River Press, Clearwater, Florida. |
| | (15) Heindel, J.J. and R.E. Chapin, (eds.) (1993). Part B. Female Reproductive Systems, Methods in Toxicology, Academic, Orlando, Florida. |
| | (16) Heindel, J.J. et al., (1989) Histological Assessment of Ovarian Follicle Number in Mice As a Screen of Ovarian Toxicity. V: Growth Factors and the Ovary, A.N. Hirshfield (ed.), Plenum, New York, pp. 421–426. |
| | (17) Manson, J.M. and Y.J. Kang, (1989). Test Methods for Assessing Female Reproductive and Developmental Toxicology. V: Principles and Methods of Toxicology, A.W. Hayes (ed.), Raven, New York. |
| | (18) Smith, B.J. et al,. (1991). Comparison of Random and Serial Sections in Assessment of Ovarian Toxicity. Reproductive Toxicology 5:379–383. |
| | (19) Heindel, J.J. (1999). Oocyte Quantitation and Ovarian Histology. V: An Evaluation and Interpretation of Reproductive Endpoints for Human Health Risk Assessment, G. Daston,. and C.A. Kimmel, (eds.), ILSI Press, Washington, DC. |
| | (20) Thomas, J. A. (1991). Toxic Responses of the Reproductive System. V: Casarett and Doull's Toxicology, M.O. Amdur, J. Doull, and C.D. Klaassen (eds.), Pergamon, New York. |
| | (21) Zenick, H. and E.D. Clegg, (1989). Assessment of Male Reproductive Toxicity: A Risk Assessment Approach. V: Principles and Methods of Toxicology, A.W. Hayes (ed.), Raven Press, New York. |
| | (22) Palmer, A.K. (1981). V: Developmental Toxicology, Kimmel, C.A. and J. Buelke-Sam (eds.), Raven Press, New York. |
| | (23) Palmer, A.K. (1978). In Handbook of Teratology, Vol. 4, J.G. Wilson and F.C. Fraser (eds.), Plenum Press, New York. |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2H |
| | B.42 SENZIBILIZACIJA KOŽE: LOKALNA ANALIZA BEZGAVK |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta preskusna metoda ustreza metodi OECD TG 429 (2002). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Lokalna analiza bezgavk (LLNA) je bila uspešno validirana in sprejeta, tako da je utemeljeno sprejeta kot nova metoda (1)(2)(3). To je druga metoda za ocenjevanje potencialne senzibilizacije kože s kemikalijami pri živalih. Metoda B.6 pa izkorišča preskuse na morskih prašičkih, predvsem maksimizacijski in Buehlerjev preskus na morskih prašičkih (4). |
| | Lokalna analiza bezgavk je nadomestna metoda za ugotavljanje senzibilizacije kože s kemikalijami in za potrditev, da kemikalije nimajo pomembnega potenciala za povzročitev senzibilizacije kože. Ni nujno, da to pomeni, da je treba v vseh primerih namesto preskusa na morskih prašičkih uporabiti lokalno analizo bezgavk, temveč raje, da je ta analiza enako dobra in se lahko uporabi kot druga možnost, pri kateri navadno niso več potrebne dodatne potrditve pozitivnih in negativnih rezultatov. |
| | Lokalna analiza bezgavk zagotavlja nekatere prednosti glede znanstvenega napredka in dobrega počutja živali. Preučuje indukcijsko fazo preobčutljivosti kože in zagotavlja količinske podatke, ki so primerni za oceno odziva na odmerek. Objavljene so podrobnosti o validaciji lokalne analize bezgavk in pregled pripadajočega dela (5)(6)(7)(8). Poleg tega je treba omeniti, da so blagi/zmerni senzibilizatorji, ki se priporočajo kot ustrezne pozitivne kontrolne snovi za preskusne metode z morskimi prašički, primerni tudi za uporabo z lokalno analizo bezgavk (6)(8)(9). |
| | Lokalna analiza bezgavk je metoda in vivo in posledično ne odpravlja uporabe živali pri ocenjevanju dejavnosti, ki povzročajo preobčutljivost ob stiku. Vendar ima možnost, da zmanjša število živali, potrebnih v ta namen. Še več, lokalna analiza bezgavk ponuja znatno izboljšanje načina, kako se živali uporabljajo za preskušanje senzibilizacije ob stiku. Lokalna analiza bezgavk temelji na upoštevanju imunoloških primerov, ki jih spodbudijo kemikalije med indukcijsko fazo senzibilizacije. V nasprotju s preskusi na morskih prašičkih lokalna analiza bezgavk ne zahteva, da se povzročijo izzvane reakcije kožne hipersenzibilizacije. Poleg tega lokalna analiza bezgavk ne zahteva, tako kakor maksimizacijski preskus na morskih prašičkih, da se uporabi pomožni preskus. S tem lokalna analiza bezgavk zmanjšuje trpljenje živali. Kljub prednostim lokalne analize bezgavk v primerjavi s tradicionalnimi preskusi na morskih prašičkih je treba upoštevati, da obstajajo nekatere omejitve, zaradi katerih je lahko nujna uporaba tradicionalnih preskusov na morskih prašičkih (npr. lažni negativni izidi z lokalno analizo bezgavk pri nekaterih kovinah, lažni pozitivni izidi pri nekaterih dražilnih snoveh za kožo)(10). |
| | Glej tudi uvod, del B. |
| | 1.2 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Osnovni princip na katerem temelji lokalna analiza bezgavk, je, da senzibilizatorji povzročijo primarno množenje limfocitov v bezgavki, ki drenira območje nanosa kemikalije. To množenje je premosorazmerno z uporabljenim odmerkom (in močjo alergena) in je preprosto sredstvo za doseganje cilja, količinske izmere senzibilizacije. Lokalna analiza bezgavk ocenjuje to množenje kot odnos med odmerkom in odzivom, pri katerem se množenje v preskusni skupini primerja z množenjem v kontrolnih skupinah, tretiranih z nosilcem. Določi se razmerje med množenjem v tretiranih skupinah z množenjem v kontrolnih skupinah z nosilcem, ki se imenuje stimulacijski indeks, in mora biti najmanj tri, preden se lahko preskusna snov nadalje vrednoti kot možni senzibilizator kože. Tukaj opisane metode temeljijo na uporabi radioaktivnih oznak za merjenje množenja celic. Seveda pa se lahko za ocenjevanje množenja uporabijo drugi ciljni učinki, pod pogojem da obstaja utemeljitev in ustrezna znanstvena podpora, vključno s celotno navedbo in opisom metodologije. |
| | 1.3 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.3.1 Priprave |
| | 1.3.1.1 Nastanitvene in prehranjevalne razmere |
| | Živali je treba namestiti posamično. Temperatura v prostoru s poskusnimi živalmi naj bo 22 °C (± 3 °C). Čeprav naj bi bila relativna vlažnost najmanj 30 % in je zaželeno, da ne presega 70 %, razen v času čiščenja prostora, je cilj 50–60 %. Osvetlitev naj bo umetna, zaporedje 12 ur svetlobe, 12 ur teme. Za hranjenje se lahko uporablja konvencionalna laboratorijska prehrana z neomejeno oskrbo s pitno vodo. |
| | 1.3.1.2 Priprava živali |
| | Živali se naključno izberejo, označijo tako, da je omogočeno posamično prepoznavanje (vendar ne s kako obliko ušesnih oznak), in zadržijo v kletkah najmanj 5 dni pred začetkom dajanja odmerka, da se prilagodijo na laboratorijske razmere. Pred začetkom tretiranja se vse živali pregledajo, da se zagotovi, da nimajo opaznih kožnih lezij. |
| | 1.3.2 Preskusni pogoji |
| | 1.3.2.1 Poskusne živali |
| | Izbrana vrsta za ta preskus je miš. Uporabijo se mlade odrasle mišje samice seva CBA/Ca ali CBA/J, ki še niso kotile in niso breje. Na začetku študije morajo biti živali stare 8–12 tednov, odstopanje mase živali pa mora biti čim manjše in ne sme presegati 20 % povprečne mase. Drugi sevi in samci se lahko uporabljajo, ko je dobljenih dovolj podatkov za prikaz, da ne obstajajo značilne razlike v odzivu pri lokalni analizi bezgavk glede na sev in/ali spol. |
| | 1.3.2.2 Preverjanje zanesljivosti |
| | Za dokazovanje ustreznega izvajanja analize in usposobljenosti laboratorija za uspešno izvedbo analize se uporabljajo pozitivne kontrole. Pozitivna kontrola mora povzročiti pozitiven odziv lokalne analize bezgavk na raven izpostavljenosti, za katero se pričakuje, da bo dala večji stimulacijski indeks (SI) >3 kakor negativna kontrolna skupina. Odmerek pozitivne kontrole je treba izbrati tako, da je indukcija jasna, vendar ne čezmerna. Priporočeni snovi sta heksil cimetov aldehid (št. CAS 101-86-0, EINECS št. 202-983-3) in merkaptobenzotiazol (št. CAS 149-30-4, št. EINECS 205-736-8). V nekaterih okoliščinah se lahko ob ustrezni utemeljitvi uporabijo druge kontrolne snovi, ki izpolnjujejo zgornja merila. Navadno se v vsaki analizi zahteva pozitivna kontrolna skupina, lahko pa obstajajo okoliščine, ko imajo preskuševalni laboratoriji na voljo pretekle pozitivne kontrolne podatke, ki kažejo dosledno zadovoljivost odziva v šestmesečnem ali daljšem obdobju. V takih okoliščinah je primerno manj pogosto preskušanje s pozitivnimi kontrolami v presledkih, ki niso daljši od 6 mesecev. Čeprav je treba pozitivno kontrolno snov preskusiti v nosilcu, za katerega je znano, da povzroča dosleden odziv (npr. aceton: oljčno olje), lahko obstajajo nekatere zakonske okoliščine, ko je potrebno tudi preskušanje v nestandardnem nosilcu (klinično/ kemično ustrezne sestave). V takih okoliščinah je treba preskusiti morebitno medsebojno vplivanje pozitivne kontrole s tem nestandardnim nosilcem. |
| | 1.3.2.3 Število živali, velikost odmerkov in izbira nosilca. |
| | Na skupino odmerka se uporabijo najmanj štiri živali z najmanj tremi koncentracijami preskusne snovi, poleg tega pa še negativna kontrolna skupina, tretirana zgolj z nosilcem za preskusno snov, in, če je primerno, še pozitivna kontrola. V primerih, ko je treba zbrati podatke o posamezni živali, se uporabi najmanj pet živali na skupino odmerka. Živali v kontrolnih skupinah je treba, razen če se ne tretirajo s preskusno snovjo, obravnavati in tretirati na enak način kakor živali v tretiranih skupinah. |
| | Izbira odmerka in nosilca mora temeljiti na priporočilih iz sklica (1). Odmerki se izberejo izmed serij koncentracij 100 %, 50 %, 25 %, 10 %, 5 %, 2,5 %, 1 %, 0,5 % itd. Podatke o obstoječi akutni toksičnosti in draženju kože je treba, kadar so na voljo, upoštevati pri izbiri treh zaporednih koncentracij, tako da je pri največji koncentraciji izpostavljenost največja, hkrati pa ni sistemske toksičnosti in čezmernega draženja kože (2)(11). |
| | Nosilec se izbere na podlagi maksimiranja preskusnih koncentracij in topnosti med pripravljanjem raztopine/suspenzije, ki je primerna za uporabo preskusne snovi. Priporočljivi nosilci po prednostnem vrstnem redu so aceton/olivno olje (4: 1 v/v), dimetilformamid, metil etil keton, propilen glikol in dimetil sulfoksid (2)(10), vendar se lahko uporabljajo tudi drugi, če je zagotovljena ustrezna znanstvena utemeljitev. V nekaterih okoliščinah je morda treba kot dodatno kontrolo uporabiti klinično ustrezno topilo ali trgovsko sestavo, v kateri se trži preskusna snov. Posebej je treba paziti, da se zagotovi, da so v nosilni sistem vključeni hidrofilni materiali, ki vlažijo kožo in se ne izsušijo takoj. Zato se je treba izogibati povsem vodenim nosilcem. |
| | 1.3.3 Preskusni postopek |
| | 1.3.3.1 Načrt za poskus |
| | Načrt za poskus analize je naslednji: |
| | 1. dan |
| | Posamično ugotovljena in zabeležena masa vsake živali. Odprta aplikacija 25µl ustrezno razredčene preskusne snovi, samega nosilca ali pozitivne kontrole (kakor je primerno) v vsak uhelj. |
| | 2. in 3. dan |
| | Ponovi se postopek aplikacije, ki je bila izvedena 1. dan. |
| | 4. in 5. dan |
| | Brez tretiranja. |
| | 6. dan |
| | Zabeleži se masa vsake živali. Vsem poskusnim in kontrolnim mišim se v repno žilo vbrizga 250µl fosfatnega pufra s soljo (PBS), ki vsebuje 20 µCi (7.4e + 8 Bq) 3H-metil timidina. Lahko pa se vsem mišim v repno veno vbrizga 250 µL PBS, ki vsebuje 2 µCi (7.4e + 7 Bq) 125I-jododeoksiuridina in 10-5 M fluorodeoksiuridina. |
| | Pet ur pozneje so živali usmrčene. Ušesne bezgavke ob vsakem ušesu se izrežejo in shranijo v PBS za vsako poskusno skupino (zbirni pristop za tretirane skupine); lahko pa se izreže en par bezgavk iz vsake posamezne živali in shrani v PBS za vsako žival (pristop po posamezni živali). Podatki in diagrami o identifikaciji in razrezu bezgavk so v Prilogi I sklica 10. |
| | 1.3.3.2 Priprava celičnih suspenzij |
| | Enotna celična suspenzija iz celic bezgavk bodisi zbirno iz tretiranih skupin bodisi bilateralno iz posameznih živali se pripravi z blago mehanično disagregacijo skozi 200 µm žično mrežo iz nerjavnega jekla. Celice iz bezgavk se dvakrat izperejo s presežkom fosfatnega pufra s soljo in 18 ur obarjajo s 5 % triklorocetno kislino pri 4 °C (2). Peleti se bodisi ponovno suspendirajo v 1 ml triklorocetne kisline in prenesejo v scintilacijske stekleničke, ki vsebujejo 10 ml scintilacijske tekočine, za štetje 3H bodisi prenesejo neposredno v epruvete za gama štetje za 125I. |
| | 1.3.3.3 Določitev množenja celic (vključena radioaktivnost) |
| | Vključitev 3H-metil timidina se izmeri z β-scintilacijskim štetjem razgradenj na minuto (DPM). Vključitev 125I-jododeoksiuridina se izmeri s štetjem 125I in se prav tako izrazi kot DPM. Odvisno od uporabljenega pristopa se vključitev izrazi kot DPM/tretirano skupino (zbirni pristop) ali DPM/žival (posamični pristop). |
| | 1.3.3.4 Opazovanja |
| | 1.3.3.4.1 Klinična opazovanja |
| | Živali je treba enkrat dnevno natančno opazovati glede kliničnih znakov, lokalnega draženja na mestu nanosa ali sistemske toksičnosti. Vsa opazovanja se sistematično zabeležijo v posamezne evidence, ki se vodijo za vsako žival. |
| | 1.3.3.4.2 Telesna masa |
| | Kakor je navedeno v oddelku 1.3.3.1, se telesna masa posameznih živali izmeri na začetku preskusa in ob predvideni usmrtitvi živali. |
| | 1.3.4 Izračun rezultatov |
| | Rezultati so izraženi kot stimulacijski indeks (SI). Kadar se uporabi zbirni pristop, se SI dobi tako, da se deli zbirna radioaktivna vključitev za vsako tretirano skupino z vključitvijo v zbirno kontrolno skupino z nosilcem; kar da povprečni SI. Kadar se uporabi posamični pristop, se SI dobi tako, da se deli povprečno število razgradenj na minuto/žival v vsaki skupini preskusne snovi in v pozitivni kontrolni skupini s povprečnim številom razgradenj na minuto/žival za kontrolno skupino s topilom/nosilcem. Povprečni SI za kontrole, tretirane z nosilcem, je potem 1. |
| | Uporaba posamičnega pristopa za izračun SI omogoča izvedbo statistične analize podatkov. Pri izbiri ustrezne metode statistične analize se mora raziskovalec zavedati možnih neenakosti varianc in drugih sorodnih problemov, zaradi katerih je lahko nujna pretvorba podatkov ali neparametrska statistična analiza. Ustrezen pristop k razlagi podatkov je vrednotenje vseh posameznih podatkov tretiranih kontrol in kontrol z nosilcem, iz njih pa izpeljava krivulje najustreznejšega odziva na odmerek ob upoštevanju intervala zaupanja (8)(12)(13). Vendar pa mora biti raziskovalec pozoren na morebitne "izstopajoče" odzive pri posameznih živalih v skupini, zaradi katerih je lahko potrebna uporaba drugega merila odziva (npr. srednjega namesto povprečnega) ali izločitev izstopajočega. |
| | Odločanje glede na pozitiven odziv vključuje stimulacijski indeks ≥3 skupaj z upoštevanjem odziva na odmerek in, kadar je primerno, statističnega pomena (3)(6)(8)(12)(14). |
| | Če je treba razjasniti dobljene rezultate, je treba upoštevati različne lastnosti preskusne snovi, tudi strukturno podobnost z znanimi senzibilizatorji, če povzroča čezmerno draženje kože, in naravo opaženega odziva na odmerek. Ti in drugi razlogi so podrobno obdelani drugje (7). |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | Podatki se povzamejo v obliki tabele, ki prikazuje povprečno vrednost in posamezne vrednosti razgradenj na minuto in stimulacijske indekse za vsako skupino odmerka (vključno s kontrolnim nosilcem). |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije: |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - identifikacijske podatke (npr. številko po CAS, če je na voljo; vir; čistost; znane nečistoče, številko serije), |
| | - fizikalno stanje in fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti (npr. hlapnost, stabilnost, topnost), |
| | - če je mešanica, sestavo in relativne odstotke sestavin. |
| | Nosilec: |
| | - identifikacijske podatke [čistost; koncentracijo (kjer je primerno); uporabljeno količino] |
| | - utemeljitev izbire nosilca. |
| | Preskusne živali: |
| | - sev uporabljenih miši, |
| | - mikrobiološko stanje živali, če je znano, |
| | - izvor živali, nastanitvene razmere, hrano ipd., |
| | - število, starost in spol živali. |
| | Preskusni pogoji: |
| | - podatke o pripravi in uporabi preskusne snovi, |
| | - utemeljitev izbire odmerka, vključno z rezultati študij za ugotavljanje območja odmerka, če so izvedene; uporabljene koncentracije nosilca in preskusne snovi in skupna količina uporabljene snovi, |
| | - podatke o kakovosti hrane in vode (tudi vrsto/vir hrane, vodni vir). |
| | Preverjanje zanesljivosti: |
| | - povzetek rezultatov zadnjega preverjanja zanesljivosti, vključno z informacijami o uporabljeni snovi, koncentraciji in nosilcu, |
| | - tekoče in/ali pretekle pozitivne in negativne kontrolne podatke za preskuševalni laboratorij. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - posamezne mase živali na začetku odmerjanja in ob predvideni usmrtitvi, |
| | - tabelo povprečnih (zbirni pristop) in posameznih (posamični pristop) vrednosti razgradenj na minuto, pa tudi razpon vrednosti pri obeh pristopih in stimulacijske indekse za vsako skupino odmerka (vključno s kontrolnim nosilcem), |
| | - statistično analizo, kjer je primerno, |
| | - časovni potek začetka toksičnosti in njenih znakov, vključno z morebitnim draženjem kože na mestu dajanja za vsako žival. |
| | Razprava o rezultatih: |
| | - kratke pripombe o rezultatih, analizo odziva na odmerek in statistične analize, kjer je primerno, z zaključkom, ali naj se preskusna snov šteje za senzibilizator kože. |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) Kimber, I. and Basketter, D.A. (1992). The murine local lymph node assay; collaborative studies and new directions: A commentary. Food and Chemical Toxicology 30, 165–169. |
| | (2) Kimber, I, Derman, R.J., Scholes E.W, and Basketter, D.A. (1994). The local lymph node assay: developments and applications. Toxicology, 93, 13–31. |
| | (3) Kimber, I., Hilton, J., Dearman, R.J., Gerberick, G.F., Ryan, C.A., Basketter, D.A., Lea, L., House, R.V., Ladies, G.S., Loveless, S.E., Hastings, K.L. (1998). Assessment of the skin sensitisation potential of topical medicaments using the local lymph node assay: An interlaboratory exercise. Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, 53, 563–79. |
| | (4) Testing Method B.6. |
| | (5) Chamberlain, M. and Basketter, D.A. (1996). The local lymph node assay: status of validation. Food and Chemical Toxicology, 34, 999–1002. |
| | (6) Basketter, D.A., Gerberick, G.F., Kimber, I. and Loveless, S.E (1996). The local lymph node assay – A viable alternative to currently accepted skin sensitisation tests. Food and Chemical Toxicology, 34, 985–997. |
| | (7) Basketter, D.A., Gerberick, G.F. and Kimber, I. (1998). Strategies for identifying false positive responses in predictive sensitisation tests. Food and Chemical Toxicology. 36, 327–33. |
| | (8) Van Och, F.M.M, Slob, W., De Jong, W.H., Vandebriel, R.J., Van Loveren, H. (2000). A quantitative method for assessing the sensitising potency of low molecular weight chemicals using a local lymph node assay: employement of a regression method that includes determination of uncertainty margins. Toxicology, 146, 49–59. |
| | (9) Dearman, R.J., Hilton, J., Evans, P., Harvey, P., Basketter, D.A. and Kimber, I. (1998). Temporal stability of local lymph node assay responses to hexyl cinnamic aldehyde. Journal of Applied Toxicology, 18, 281–4. |
| | (10) National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences (1999). The Murine Local Lymph Node Assay: A Test Method for Assessing the Allergic Contact Dermatitis Potential of Chemicals/Compounds: The Results of an Independent Peer Review Evaluation Coordinated by the Interagency Coordinating Committee on the Validation of Alternative Methods (ICCVAM) and the National Toxicology Program Center for the Evaluation of Alternative Toxicological Methods (NICETAM). NIH Publication No: 99–4494, Research Triangle Park, N.C. (http://iccvam.niehs.nih.gov). |
| | (11) Testing method B.4. |
| | (12) Basketter, D.A., Selbie, E., Scholes, E.W. Lees, D. Kimber, I. and Botham, P.A. (1993) Results with OECD recommended positive control senzibilizators in the maximisation, Buehler and local lymph node assays. Food and Chemical Toxicology, 31, 63–67. |
| | (13) Basketter D.A., Lea L.J., Dickens A., Briggs D., Pate I., Dearman R.J., Kimber I. (1999). A comparison of statistical approaches to the derivation of EC3 values from local lymph node assay dose responses. J. Appl. Toxicology, 19, 261–266. |
| | (14) Basketter DA, Blaikie L, Derman RJ, Kimber I, Ryan CA, Gerberick GF, Harvey P, Evans P, White IR and Rycroft RTG (2000). Use of local lymph node assay for the estimation of relative contact allergenic potency. Contact Dermatitis 42, 344–48. |
| | B.43 ŠTUDIJA NEVROTOKSIČNOSTI NA GLODALCIH |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta metoda ustreza metodi OECD TG 424 (1997). |
| | Ta preskusna metoda je namenjena pridobivanju informacij, ki so potrebne za potrditev ali nadaljnjo opredelitev potencialne nevrotoksičnosti kemikalij na odraslih živalih. Lahko se jo kombinira z obstoječimi preskusnimi metodami za študije strupenosti s ponavljajočimi odmerki ali pa se jo izvaja kot posebno študijo. Priporočljivo je, da se v pomoč pri načrtovanju študij, ki temeljijo na tej preskusni metodi, uporabijo napotki OECD o strategijah in metodah preskušanja nevrotoksičnosti (1). To je še posebej pomembno, kadar se razmišlja o spremembah postopkov opazovanja in preskušanja, ki se priporočajo za rutinsko uporabo te metode. Napotki so bili pripravljeni za olajšanje izbire drugih preskusnih postopkov za uporabo v posebnih okoliščinah. Vrednotenje razvojne nevrotoksičnosti ni predmet te metode. |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Pri ocenjevanju in vrednotenju strupenih lastnosti kemikalij je pomembno, da se upošteva potencial za nevrotoksične učinke. Že preskusna metoda za sistemsko toksičnost s ponavljajočimi odmerki vključuje opazovanja, ki iščejo potencialno nevrotoksičnost. Ta preskusna metoda se lahko uporabi za načrtovanje študije za pridobitev nadaljnjih informacij ali potrditev informacij o nevrotoksičnih učinkih, ki jih pokažejo študije sistemske toksičnosti s ponavljajočimi odmerki. Vendar lahko upoštevanje potencialne nevrotoksičnosti nekaterih razredov kemikalij pokaže, da bi jih lahko primerneje ocenili z uporabo te metode brez predhodnih navedb o potencialni nevrotoksičnosti iz študij sistemske toksičnosti s ponavljajočimi odmerki. Taki razlogi vključujejo na primer: |
| | opazovanje nevroloških znakov ali nevropatoloških lezij v študijah toksičnosti, ki niso študije sistemske toksičnosti s ponavljajočimi odmerki, ali |
| | strukturno podobnost ali druge informacije o povezavah z znanimi nevrotoksikanti. |
| | Poleg tega lahko obstajajo še drugi primeri, ko je primerna uporaba te preskusne metode; za nadaljnje podrobnosti glej (1). |
| | Ta metoda je oblikovana tako, da se lahko prilagodi in v primeru posebnih potreb potrdi posebna histopatološka in vedenjska nevrotoksičnost kemikalij, pa tudi da se zagotovi označitev in količinska opredelitev nevrotoksičnih odzivov. |
| | V preteklosti je bila nevrotoksičnost izenačena z nevropatijo, ki vključuje nevropatološke lezije ali nevrološke motnje, kot so božjast, paraliza ali tremor. Čeprav je nevropatija pomembna pojavna oblika nevrotoksičnosti, je danes jasno, da obstajajo številni drugi znaki toksičnosti živčnega sistema (npr. izguba motorične koordinacije, senzorične pomanjkljivosti, učne in spominske motnje), ki se ne odražajo v nevropatiji ali drugih vrstah študij. |
| | Ta preskusna metoda za nevrotoksičnost je namenjena odkrivanju glavnih nevrovedenjskih in nevropatoloških učinkov na odraslih glodalcih. Čeprav lahko vedenjski učinki tudi v odsotnosti morfoloških sprememb odražajo škodljiv vpliv na organizem, niso vse vedenjske spremembe značilne za živčni sistem. Zato je treba vse opažene spremembe ovrednotiti skupaj s soodvisnimi histopatološkimi, hematološkimi ali biokemičnimi podatki, pa tudi s podatki o drugih vrstah sistemske toksičnosti. Preskušanje, ki se v tej metodi zahteva za zagotavljanje označitve in količinske opredelitve nevrotoksičnih odzivov, vključuje posebne histopatološke in vedenjske postopke, ki se lahko nadalje podprejo z elektrofiziološkimi in/ali biokemičnimi raziskavami (1)(2)(3)(4). |
| | Nevrotoksikanti lahko delujejo na številne cilje v živčnem sistemu in z različnimi mehanizmi. Ker ni ene same vrste preskusov, s katerimi bi se lahko temeljito ovrednotilo nevrotoksičen potencial vseh snovi, je lahko potrebno izkoristiti druge in vivo ali in vitro preskuse, značilne za vrsto opazovane ali pričakovane nevrotoksičnosti. |
| | Ta preskusna metoda se lahko uporablja tudi skupaj z navodili v napotkih OECD o strategijah in metodah preskušanja nevrotoksičnosti (1) za načrtovanje študij, ki so namenjene nadaljnji označitvi ali povečanju občutljivosti količinske opredelitve odziva na odmerek po vrstnem redu ali boljši oceni vrednosti brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov ali utemeljitvi znanih ali domnevnih nevarnosti kemikalije. Na primer, študije se lahko namenijo ugotavljanju in vrednotenju nevrotoksičnega(ih) mehanizma(ov) ali dopolnitvi podatkov, ki so že na voljo iz uporabe osnovnih nevrovedenjskih in nevropatoloških postopkov opazovanja. Takim študijam ni treba ponoviti podatkov, ki bi jih dobili z uporabo standardnih postopkov, ki jih priporoča ta metoda, če so taki podatki že na voljo in ne štejejo za potrebne pri razlagi rezultatov študije. |
| | Ta študija nevrotoksičnosti, če se uporablja samostojno ali v kombinaciji, zagotavlja informacije, s katerimi se lahko: |
| | ugotovi, ali je živčni sistem trajno ali reverzibilno prizadet zaradi preskušane kemikalije; |
| | prispeva k označitvi sprememb živčnega sistema, povezanih z izpostavljenostjo kemikaliji, in razumevanjem osnovnega mehanizma; |
| | določi odnose med odzivom na odmerek in časovnim odzivom, da bi ocenili vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov (ki se lahko uporablja za ugotavljanje varnostnih meril za kemikalijo). |
| | Ta preskusna metoda uporablja oralno dajanje preskusne snovi. Drugi načini dajanja (npr. dermalno ali z vdihavanjem) so lahko primernejši in lahko zahtevajo spremembo priporočenih postopkov. Razlogi za izbiro načina dajanja so odvisni od profila človekove izpostavljenosti in razpoložljivih toksikoloških ali kinetičnih informacij. |
| | 1.2 OPREDELITVE POJMOV |
| | Škodljivi učinek: je odstopanje od normalnega, povezano s tretiranjem, ki zmanjšuje sposobnost organizma za preživetje, razmnoževanje ali prilagoditev okolju. |
| | Odmerek: je količina dane preskusne snovi. Odmerek je izražen kot masa (g, mg), kot masa preskusne snovi na enoto mase preskusne živali (npr. mg/kg) ali kot konstanta koncentracije v hrani (ppm). |
| | Odmerjanje: je splošen izraz, ki vključuje odmerek ter pogostost in trajanje dajanja odmerka. |
| | Nevrotoksičnost: je škodljiva sprememba strukture ali funkcije živčnega sistema, ki je posledica izpostavljenosti kemičnemu, biološkemu ali fizičnemu sredstvu. |
| | Nevrotoksikant: je vsako kemično, biološko ali fizično sredstvo, ki ima potencial, da povzroča nevrotoksičnost. |
| | NOAEL: je kratica za vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov (No Observed Adverse Effect Level) in je največji odmerek, pri katerem ne opazimo nobenega škodljivega učinka, povezanega s tretiranjem. |
| | 1.3 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Preskusna kemikalija se daje oralno v vrsti odmerkov več skupinam laboratorijskih glodalcev. Navadno se zahtevajo ponavljajoči odmerki in režim odmerjanja je lahko 28 dni, subkroničen (90 dni) ali kroničen (1 leto ali dlje). Postopki, navedeni v tej preskusni metodi, se lahko uporabljajo tudi za študijo akutne nevrotoksičnosti. Živali se preskušajo, da bi omogočili odkrivanje ali označitev vedenjskih in/ali nevroloških anomalij. V vsakem obdobju opazovanja se ocenjuje vrsta vedenjskih oblik, ki jih lahko prizadenejo nevrotoksikanti. Na koncu preskusa se podskupina živali vsakega spola iz vsake skupine perfundira in situ in pripravijo ter preučijo se prerezi možganov, hrbtenjače in perifernih živcev. |
| | Kadar se študija opravi kot samostojna študija za ugotavljanje nevrotoksičnosti ali za označitev nevrotoksičnih učinkov, se lahko živali iz vsake skupine, ki niso uporabljene za perfuzijo in naknadno histopatologijo (glej Tabelo 1), uporabijo za posebne nevrovedenjske, nevropatološke, nevrokemične ali elektrofiziološke postopke, ki lahko dopolnijo podatke, dobljene s standardnimi preiskavami, ki se zahtevajo po tej metodi (1). Ti dopolnilni postopki so lahko še posebno koristni, kadar empirična opazovanja ali pričakovani učinki kažejo posebno vrsto ali cilj nevrotoksičnosti kemikalije. Preostale živali pa se lahko uporabijo za vrednotenja, kakor so tista, ki se zahtevajo v preskusnih metodah za študije toksičnosti s ponavljajočimi odmerki na glodalcih. |
| | Kadar se postopki te preskusne metode kombinirajo s postopki drugih preskusnih metod, je potrebno zadostno število živali, da se izpolnijo zahteve obeh študij glede opazovanja. |
| | 1.4 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.4.1 Izbira vrste živali |
| | Priporočena glodalska vrsta je podgana, čeprav se lahko ob utemeljitvi uporabi druga glodalska vrsta. Uporabijo se laboratorijski sevi mladih odraslih živali, ki se splošno uporabljajo. Samice morajo biti nuliparne in ne smejo biti breje. Dajanje odmerkov se mora normalno začeti čimprej po odstavitvi, po možnosti najpozneje takrat, ko so živali stare šest tednov in v vsakem primeru preden so živali stare devet tednov. Kadar pa se ta študija kombinira z drugimi študijami, je morda treba to starost prilagoditi. Razlike v masi posameznih živali na začetku študije ne smejo presegati ± 20 % povprečne mase za vsak spol. Če se kratkotrajna študija s ponavljajočimi odmerki izvaja kot predhodna študija za dolgotrajno študijo, je treba v obeh študijah uporabiti živali istega seva in vira. |
| | 1.4.2 Nastanitvene in prehranjevalne razmere |
| | Temperatura v prostoru s poskusnimi živalmi naj bo 22 °C (± 3 °C). Čeprav naj bi bila relativna vlažnost najmanj 30 % in je zaželeno, da ne presega 70 %, razen v času čiščenja prostora, je cilj 50–60 %. Osvetlitev naj bo umetna, zaporedje 12 ur svetlobe, 12 ur teme. Glasnega ponavljajočega hrupa naj bo čim manj. Za hranjenje se lahko uporablja konvencionalna laboratorijska prehrana z neomejeno oskrbo s pitno vodo. Na izbiro prehrane lahko vpliva potreba po zagotovitvi ustrezne primesi preskusne snovi, kadar se daje po tej metodi. Živali se lahko namestijo posamično ali dajo v kletke v manjših skupinah istega spola. |
| | 1.4.3 Priprava živali |
| | Zdrave mlade živali se naključno dodelijo v tretirano in kontrolno skupino. Kletke je treba razporediti tako, da so možni učinki zaradi pozicije kletk čim manjši. Živali se na enoten način identificirajo in zadržijo v kletkah (5) dni pred začetkom študije, da se prilagodijo na laboratorijske razmere. |
| | 1.4.4 Način dajanja in priprava odmerkov |
| | Ta preskusna metoda se posebej ukvarja z oralnim dajanjem preskusne snovi. Oralno dajanje je lahko z gavažo, hrano, pitno vodo ali kapsulami. Drugi načini dajanja (npr. dermalno ali z vdihavanjem) so lahko primernejši in lahko zahtevajo spremembo priporočenih postopkov. Razlogi za izbiro načina dajanja so odvisni od profila človekove izpostavljenosti in razpoložljivih toksikoloških ali kinetičnih informacij. Treba je navesti utemeljitev za izbiro načina dajanja, pa tudi posledične spremembe postopkov te preskusne metode. |
| | Po potrebi se lahko preskusna snov raztopi ali suspendira v primernem nosilcu. Priporočljivo je, da se najprej razmisli o uporabi vodne raztopine/suspenzije, potem o raztopini/suspenziji v olju (npr. koruznem olju) in šele nato o možni raztopini/suspenziji v drugih nosilcih. Strupene lastnosti nosilca morajo biti znane. Poleg tega je treba upoštevati naslednje lastnosti nosilca: učinke nosilca na absorpcijo, distribucijo, presnovo ali retencijo preskusne snovi, ki lahko spremenijo njene toksične lastnosti; ter učinke na porabo hrane ali vode ali status prehranjenosti živali. |
| | 1.5 POSTOPKI |
| | 1.5.1 Število in spol živali |
| | Kadar se študija opravi kot posebna študija, je treba uporabiti najmanj 20 živali (10 samic in 10 samcev) v vsaki skupini odmerka in v kontrolni skupini za vrednotenje podrobnih kliničnih in funkcionalnih opazovanj. Najmanj pet samcev in pet samic, izbranih izmed teh 10 samcev in 10 samic, je treba perfundirati in situ in uporabiti za podrobno nevrohistopatologijo na koncu študije. V primerih, ko se glede nevrotoksičnih učinkov opazuje le omejeno število živali v dani skupini odmerka, je treba upoštevati vključitev teh živali med živali, izbrane za perfuzijo. Kadar se študija izvede v kombinaciji s študijo toksičnosti s ponavljajočimi odmerki, je treba uporabiti zadostno število živali, da so izpolnjeni cilji obeh študij. Najmanjše število živali na skupino za različne kombinacije študij je podano v Tabeli 1. Če se načrtujejo vmesne usmrtitve ali obnovitvene skupine za opazovanje reverzibilnosti, obstojnosti ali zapoznelega nastopa toksičnih učinkov po tretiranju ali če se razmišlja o dopolnilnih opazovanjih, je treba število živali povečati, da se zagotovi, da je na voljo število živali, ki je potrebno za opazovanje in histopatologijo. |
| | 1.5.2 Tretirane in kontrolne skupine |
| | Na splošno se uporabijo najmanj tri skupine odmerkov in kontrolna skupina, a če se po oceni drugih podatkov ne pričakuje nobenih učinkov pri ponavljajočem odmerku 1000 mg/kg telesne mase/dan, se lahko izvede mejni preskus. Če ni na voljo primernih podatkov, se lahko izvede študija za ugotavljanje območja odmerkov, da pomaga določiti odmerke, ki se naj uporabijo. Razen pri tretiranju s preskusno snovjo, morajo biti živali v kontrolni skupini obravnavane enako kakor živali v preskusni skupini. Če je pri dajanju preskusne snovi uporabljen nosilec, mora kontrolna skupina prejeti količino nosilca, enako največji uporabljeni količini. |
| | 1.5.3 Preverjanje zanesljivosti |
| | Laboratorij, ki izvaja študijo, mora predložiti podatke, ki dokazujejo njegovo sposobnost za izvedbo študije in občutljivost uporabljenih postopkov. Ti podatki morajo zagotoviti dokaz o sposobnosti odkrivanja in po potrebi količinske opredelitve sprememb različnih ciljnih učinkov, ki se priporočajo za opazovanje, na primer avtonomnih znakov, senzoričnih reakcij, moči nožnega oprijema in motorične aktivnosti. Informacije o kemikalijah, ki povzročajo različne vrste nevrotoksičnih odzivov in bi se lahko uporabljaje kot snovi pozitivne kontrole, so v sklicih od 2 do 9. Pretekli podatki se lahko uporabijo, če ostanejo bistveni vidiki poskusnih postopkov enaki. Priporoča se občasno posodabljanje preteklih podatkov. Kadar izvajalski laboratorij spremeni kak bistven element pri izvajanju preskusa ali postopkov, je treba razviti nove podatke, ki izkazujejo nadaljnjo občutljivost postopkov. |
| | 1.5.4 Izbira odmerkov |
| | Velikosti odmerkov se izberejo ob upoštevanju vsake predhodno opažene toksičnosti in kinetičnih podatkov, ki so na voljo za preskusne zmesi ali sorodne materiale. Največjo velikost odmerka je treba izbrati s ciljem povzročitve nevrotoksičnih učinkov ali jasnih sistemskih toksičnih učinkov. Padajoče zaporedje velikosti odmerkov je treba potem izbrati tako, da se pokažejo vse reakcije, ki so odvisne od odmerka, in vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov (NOAEL) pri najnižji velikosti odmerka. Načeloma je treba velikosti odmerkov določiti tako, da se lahko primarni toksični učinki na živčni sistem ločijo od učinkov, ki so povezani s sistemsko toksičnostjo. Dvakratni do trikratni intervali so pogosto najprimernejši, večinoma pa je bolje dodati dodatno, četrto preskusno skupino, kakor uporabiti zelo velike intervale med odmerki (npr. več kakor faktor 10). Kadar obstaja primerna ocena človekove izpostavljenosti, je treba upoštevati tudi to. |
| | 1.5.5 Mejni preskus |
| | Če študija pri eni velikosti odmerka najmanj 1000 mg/kg telesne mase/dan, pri katerem so uporabljeni postopki, opisani za to študijo, ne da opaznih nevrotoksičnih učinkov, in če toksičnost ni pričakovana glede na podatke o strukturno sorodnih zmeseh, potem popolna študija z uporabo treh velikosti odmerkov morda ne bo potrebna. Pričakovana človekova izpostavljenost lahko narekuje potrebo, da se v mejnem preskusu uporabi večji oralni odmerek. Pri drugih vrstah dajanja, na primer pri vdihavanju ali dermalni aplikaciji, lahko fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti preskusne snovi pogosto določajo največjo dosegljivo raven izpostavljenosti. Za izvedbo akutne oralne študije mora biti odmerek za mejni preskus najmanj 2000 mg/kg. |
| | 1.5.6 Dajanje odmerkov |
| | Živali dobivajo odmerek preskusne snovi dnevno, sedem dni v tednu, najmanj 28 dni; uporabo petdnevnega režima odmerjanja ali krajše obdobje izpostavljenosti je treba utemeljiti. Če se preskusna snov daje z gavažo, jo je treba dati v enkratnem odmerku z uporabo želodčne sonde ali primerne intubacijske kanile. Maksimalna količina tekočine, ki jo je mogoče dati naenkrat, je odvisna od velikosti poskusnih živali. Količina ne sme presegati 1 ml/100 g telesne mase. Vendar se lahko v primeru vodnih raztopin upošteva uporaba do 2 ml/100 g telesne mase. Razen pri dražečih ali jedkih snoveh, ki pri višjih koncentracijah navadno povzročajo močnejše učinke, je treba variabilnost preskusnega volumna s prilagajanjem koncentracije obdržati na kar najnižji ravni, zato da bi zagotovili konstantno količino pri vseh odmerkih. |
| | Pri snoveh, ki se dajejo s hrano ali pitno vodo, je treba zagotoviti, da količine uporabljene preskusne snovi ne vplivajo na običajno raven vnosa hrane ali porabe vode. Kadar se preskusna snov daje s hrano, se lahko uporabi bodisi konstantna koncentracija v hrani (ppm) bodisi konstantna velikost odmerka glede na telesno maso živali; treba je navesti uporabljeni način. Če snov dajemo z gavažo, je treba odmerke dati vsak dan približno ob istem času in jih ustrezno prilagoditi, da se vzdržuje konstantna velikost odmerka glede na telesno maso živali. Če se študija s ponavljajočimi odmerki izvaja kot predhodna študija za dolgotrajno študijo, je treba v obeh študijah uporabiti podobno hrano. Pri akutnih študijah se lahko odmerek, če posamezni odmerek ni mogoč, daje v manjših delih v obdobju, ki ne presega 24 ur. |
| | 1.6 OPAZOVANJE |
| | 1.6.1 Pogostost opazovanj in preskusov |
| | Pri študijah s ponavljajočimi odmerki se obdobje opazovanja prekriva z obdobjem dajanja odmerka. Pri akutnih študijah je treba opazovati 14-dnevno obdobje po tretiranju. Pri živalih v satelitskih skupinah, ki ostanejo v obdobju po tretiranju neizpostavljene, opazovanja zajemajo tudi to obdobje. |
| | Opazovanja se opravijo dovolj pogosto, da je čim večja možnost za odkritje vedenjskih in/ali nevroloških anomalij. Opazovanja je najbolje opraviti vsak dan ob istem času, pri čemer se upošteva vrhunec pričakovanih učinkov po odmerjanju. Pogostost kliničnih opazovanj in funkcionalnih preskusov je povzeta v Tabeli 2. Če kinetični ali drugi podatki, ki so dobljeni iz prejšnjih študij, kažejo na potrebo po uporabi drugih časov za opazovanja, preskuse ali obdobja po opazovanju, je treba sprejeti drugačen razpored, da bi dobili čim več informacij. Spremembe programa je treba utemeljiti. |
| | 1.6.1.1 Opazovanja splošnega zdravstvenega stanja in smrtnosti/obolevnosti |
| | Vse živali je treba najmanj enkrat dnevno natančno opazovati glede zdravstvenega stanja, najmanj dvakrat dnevno pa tudi glede obolevnosti in smrtnosti. |
| | 1.6.1.2 Podrobna klinična opazovanja |
| | Podrobna klinična opazovanja se na vseh živalih, ki so izbrane v ta namen (glej Tabelo 1), opravijo enkrat pred prvo izpostavljenostjo (zaradi primerjav na istem osebku) in potem v različnih presledkih, odvisno od trajanja študije (glej Tabelo 2). Podrobna klinična opazovanja satelitskih obnovitvenih skupin je treba opraviti na koncu obnovitvenega obdobja. Podrobna klinična opazovanja je treba opraviti zunaj domače kletke na standardnem mestu. Opažanja je treba skrbno dokumentirati s pomočjo meril in točkovanj za vsako meritev pri opazovanju. Laboratorij, ki opravlja preskus, mora jasno opredeliti merila ali lestvice. Prizadevati si je treba, da so odstopanja od pogojev preskušanja čim manjša (ne sistematično povezana s tretiranjem) in da opazovanja izvajajo usposobljeni opazovalci, ki ne poznajo dejanskega tretiranja. |
| | Priporočljivo je, da se opazovanja izvajajo na strukturiran način, kjer se dobro opredeljena merila (vključno z opredelitvijo normalnega "območja") uporabljajo sistematično za vsako žival v vsakem opazovalnem času. "Normalno območje" mora biti ustrezno dokumentirano. Vse opažene znake je treba zabeležiti. Vedno kadar je to izvedljivo, se zabeleži tudi velikost opaženih znakov. Klinična opazovanja morajo obsegati tudi, vendar ne samo, spremembe na koži, kožuhu, očeh, sluznicah, pojav sekrecije in ekskrecije ter delovanje avtonomnega živčevja (npr. lakrimacija, piloerekcija, velikost zenic, nenormalen vzorec dihanja in/ali dihanje skozi usta, vsi nenavadni znaki uriniranja in izločanja blata ali razbarvan urin). |
| | Zapisati je treba tudi vse nenavadne odzive v zvezi s položajem telesa, stopnjo aktivnosti (npr. zmanjšanje ali povečanje raziskovanja standardnega mesta) in koordinacijo gibov. Zabeležiti je treba spremembe v hoji (npr. zibanje, ataksija), drži (npr. grbast hrbet) in reagiranju na ravnanje, nameščanje ali druge okoljske dražljaje, pa tudi navzočnost kloničnih ali toničnih gibov, krčev ali tremorja, stereotipe (npr. prekomernega čiščenja, nenavadnih gibov z glavo, ponavljajočega se krožnega premikanja) ali nenormalno vedenje (npr. grizenje ali čezmerno lizanje, samomaličenje, zadenjsko hojo, oddajanje zvokov) ali agresivnost. |
| | 1.6.1.3 Funkcionalni preskusi |
| | Podobno kakor podrobna klinična opazovanja je treba tudi funkcionalne preskuse izvesti enkrat pred izpostavljenostjo in potem pogosto pri vseh živalih, izbranih v ta namen (glej Tabelo 1). Tudi pogostost funkcionalnega preskušanja je odvisna od trajanje študije (glej Tabelo 2). Poleg obdobij opazovanja iz Tabele 2 je treba tudi funkcionalna opazovanja o satelitskih obnovitvenih skupinah opraviti čim bliže končni usmrtitvi. Funkcionalni preskusi vključujejo senzorične reakcije na različne dražljaje [npr. akustične, vizualne in proprioceptivne dražljaje (5)(6)(7)], oceno moči nožnega oprijema (8) in oceno motorične aktivnosti (9). Motorično aktivnost je treba izmeriti z avtomatiziranim sredstvom, ki lahko odkrije oboje, zmanjšanje in povečanje aktivnosti. Če se uporabi drug opredeljen sistem, mora biti količinski in z dokazano občutljivostjo in zanesljivostjo. Vsako sredstvo mora biti preskušeno, da je zagotovljena zanesljivost v času in skladnost med sredstvi. Nadaljnje podrobnosti glede možnih postopkov so podane v navedeni literaturi. Če ni podatkov (npr. o strukturni aktivnosti, epidemioloških podatkov, drugih toksikoloških študij) za navedbo potencialnih nevrotoksičnih učinkov, je treba razmisliti o vključitvi bolj specializiranih preskusov za podrobnejšo preučitev možnih učinkov senzorične in motorične funkcije ali učenja in spominjanja. Več informacij o bolj specializiranih preskusih in njihovi uporabi je navedenih v (1). |
| | Izjemoma se lahko živali, ki kažejo znake toksičnosti v takem obsegu, da bi znatno vplivali na funkcionalni preskus, izpustijo pri tem preskusu. Izločitev živali iz funkcionalnega preskusa je treba utemeljiti. |
| | 1.6.2 Telesna masa in poraba hrane/vode |
| | Pri študijah, ki trajajo do 90 dni, je treba vse živali stehtati najmanj enkrat na teden in meriti porabo hrane (porabo vode, kadar se preskusna snov daje v tem mediju) najmanj tedensko. Pri dolgotrajnih študijah je treba prvih 13 tednov vse živali stehtati najmanj enkrat na teden in potem najmanj enkrat na 4 tedne. Meritve porabe hrane (porabe vode, kadar se preskusna snov daje v tem mediju) je treba v prvih 13 tednih opravljati najmanj tedensko in potem v približno trimesečnih presledkih, razen če zdravstveno stanje ali spremembe telesne mase narekujejo drugače. |
| | 1.6.3 Oftalmologija |
| | Pri študijah, ki trajajo dlje kakor 28 dni, je treba oftalmološko preiskavo z uporabo oftalmoskopa ali ustreznega enakovrednega instrumenta izvesti pred dajanjem preskusne snovi in na koncu študije, najbolje na vseh živalih, vendar vsaj v skupini živali z velikim odmerkom in v kontrolni skupini. Če se odkrijejo spremembe na očeh ali če klinični znaki narekujejo tako potrebo, je treba preiskati vse živali. Pri dolgotrajnih študijah je treba oftalmološko preiskavo izvesti tudi po 13 tednih. Oftalmoloških preiskav ni treba izvajati, če so ti podatki že na voljo iz drugih študij s podobnim trajanjem in podobno velikostjo odmerkov. |
| | 1.6.4 Hematologija in klinična biokemija |
| | Kadar se študija nevrotoksičnosti izvaja v kombinaciji s študijo sistemske toksičnosti s ponavljajočimi odmerki, je treba opraviti hematološke preiskave in klinične biokemične določitve, kakor je določeno v metodi za študije sistemske toksičnosti. Zbiranje vzorcev je treba izvajati na tak način, da so potencialni učinki na nevrovedenje čim manjši. |
| | 1.6.5 Histopatologija |
| | Nevropatološke preglede je treba načrtovati tako, da dopolnjujejo in razširijo opazovanja, opravljena med fazo študije in vivo. Tkiva najmanj 5 živali na spol in skupino (glej Tabelo 1 in naslednji odstavek) se fiksirajo in situ z uporabo splošno priznanih tehnik perfuzije in fiksacije (glej sklic 3, poglavje 5 in sklic 4, poglavje 50). Zabeležijo se vse večje opazne spremembe. Kadar se študija opravlja kot samostojna študija presejanja nevrotoksičnosti ali za označitev nevrotoksičnih učinkov, se lahko preostale živali uporabijo za posebne nevrovedenjske (10) (11), nevropatološke (10) (11) (12) (13), nevrokemične (10) (11) (14) (15) ali elektrofiziološke (10) (11) (16) (17) postopke, ki lahko dopolnijo tukaj opisane postopke in preiskave ali povečajo število histopatološko preučevanih osebkov. Ti dopolnilni postopki so lahko še posebno koristni, kadar empirična opazovanja ali pričakovani učinki kažejo posebno vrsto ali cilj nevrotoksičnosti (2) (3). Preostale živali pa se lahko uporabijo tudi za rutinska patološka vrednotenja, opisana v metodi za študije s ponavljajočimi odmerki. |
| | Vse vzorce tkiva, vstavljene v parafin, je treba barvati po splošnem postopku, na primer s hematoksilinom in eozinom (H&E), in izvesti mikroskopski pregled. Če se opazijo ali domnevajo znaki periferne nevropatije, je treba preiskati v plastiko vstavljene vzorce perifernega živčnega tkiva. Klinični znaki lahko nakazujejo tudi dodatna mesta za preiskavo ali uporabo posebnih postopkov barvanja. Napotki o dodatnih mestih za preiskavo so v (3) (4). V pomoč pri dokazovanju posebnih vrst patoloških sprememb so lahko tudi ustrezne posebne barve (18). |
| | Reprezentativne prereze osrednjega in perifernega živčnega sistema je treba histološko pregledati (glej sklic 3, poglavje 5 in sklic 4, poglavje 50). Pregledana območja navadno vključujejo: velike možgane, osrednji del možganov (limbični sistem), skupaj s prerezom hipokampusa, medmožgane, male možgane, pons, medulo oblongato, oko z vidnim živcem in mrežnico, hrbtenjačo ob vratnem in ledvenem delu, spinalne ganglije, dorzalna in ventralna vlakna, proksimalni bedrni živec, proksimalni golenični živec (pri kolenu) in veje goleničnega živca v mečni mišici. Rezine hrbtenjače in perifernih živcev vključujejo prečne ali diagonalne in vzdolžne prereze. Pozornost je treba posvetiti ožilju živčnega sistema. Pregledati je treba tudi vzorec skeletne mišice, zlasti mečne mišice. Posebno pozornost je treba posvetiti mestom s celično in vlaknasto strukturo in vzorcu v osrednjem in perifernem živčnem sistemu, za katere je znano, da jih nevrotoksikanti posebno prizadenejo. |
| | Napotki o nevropatoloških spremembah, ki so tipična posledica izpostavljenosti toksičnim snovem, so v sklicih (3)(4). Priporoča se postopna preučitev vzorcev, pri kateri se s kontrolno skupino najprej primerjajo prerezi iz skupine z velikim odmerkom. Če se v vzorcih iz teh skupin ne opazi nobene nevropatološke spremembe, nadaljnja analiza ni potrebna. Če se v skupini z velikim odmerkom opazijo nevropatološke spremembe, je treba potem zaporedno preučiti in označiti vzorce iz vseh potencialno prizadetih tkiv iz skupin s srednjim in majhnim odmerkom. |
| | Če se pri pregledu kakovosti najde kakršen koli dokaz o nevropatoloških spremembah, potem je treba drugi pregled opraviti na vseh območjih živčnega sistema, ki kaže te spremembe. Prereze iz vseh skupin odmerkov iz vsakega potencialno prizadetega območja je treba označiti in preučiti naključno, brez poznavanja oznake. Pogostost in resnost vsake lezije je treba zabeležiti. Ko so ocenjena vsa območja iz vseh skupin odmerkov, se lahko oznaka razčleni in opravi statistična analiza za ovrednotenje odnosov med odmerkom in odzivom. Opisati je treba primere različnih stopenj resnosti za vsako lezijo. |
| | Nevropatološke ugotovitve je treba ovrednotiti v smislu vedenjskih opazovanj in meritev, pa tudi drugih podatkov iz prejšnjih in sočasnih študij sistemske toksičnosti preskusne snovi. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.1 OBDELAVA REZULTATOV |
| | Predložiti je treba podatke za vsako posamezno žival. Nadalje je treba vse podatke prikazati v obliki tabele, iz katere so za vsako preskusno ali kontrolno skupino razvidni naslednji podatki: število živali na začetku preskusa in število živali, med preskusom najdenih mrtvih ali usmrčenih iz humanih razlogov, nato čas smrti oziroma humane usmrtitve, število živali, ki kažejo znake toksičnosti, opis opaženih znakov toksičnosti, vključno s časom, ko so toksični učinki prvikrat nastopili, njihovim trajanjem, vrsto in jakostjo, število živali s poškodbami, vključno z vrsto in resnostjo poškodb. |
| | 2.2 VREDNOTENJE IN RAZLAGA REZULTATOV |
| | Ugotovitve študije je treba ovrednotiti glede na pojavnost, resnost in soodvisnost nevrovedenjskih in nevropatoloških učinkov (vključeni so nevrokemijski ali elektrofiziološki učinki, pa tudi dopolnilne preiskave) ter drugih opaženih škodljivih učinkov. Če je mogoče, je treba numerične podatke ovrednotiti s primerno splošno sprejeto statistično metodo. Statistične metode se izberejo med načrtovanjem študije. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije: |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - fizikalno stanje (vključno z izomerizmom, čistostjo in fizikalno-kemijskimi lastnostmi), |
| | - identifikacijske podatke, |
| | Nosilec (po potrebi): |
| | - utemeljitev izbire nosilca. |
| | Preskusne živali: |
| | - uporabljeno vrsto/sev, |
| | - število, starost in spol živali, |
| | - izvor, nastanitvene razmere, prilagoditev, hrano ipd., |
| | - maso posameznih živali na začetku preskusa. |
| | Preskusni pogoji: |
| | - podatke o sestavi preskusne snovi/pripravi hrane, doseženi koncentraciji, stabilnosti in homogenosti pripravka, |
| | - specifikacijo uporabljenih odmerkov, vključno s podatki o nosilcu, količini in fizični obliki danega materiala, |
| | - podatke o dajanju preskusne snovi, |
| | - utemeljitev izbire velikosti odmerkov, |
| | - utemeljitev načina in trajanja izpostavljenosti, |
| | - preračunavanje koncentracije preskusne snovi v hrani/pitni vodi (ppm) v dejanski odmerek (mg/kg telesne mase/dan), če je primerno, |
| | - podatke o kakovosti hrane in vode. |
| | Opazovanje in preskusni postopki: |
| | - podatke o dodelitvi živali iz vsake skupine v perfuzijske podskupine, |
| | - podatke o sistemih točkovanja, vključno z merili in točkovalnimi lestvicami za vsako meritev v podrobnih kliničnih opazovanjih, |
| | - podatke o funkcionalnih preskusih za sensorične reakcije na različne dražljaje (npr. akustične, vizualne in proprioceptivne ); za ocenjevanje moči nožnega oprijema; za ocenjevanje motorične aktivnosti (vključno s podatki o avtomatiziranih sredstvih za odkrivanje aktivnosti); in drugih uporabljenih postopkih, |
| | - podatke o oftalmoloških preiskavah in, če je primerno, hematoloških preiskavah in kliničnih biokemijskih preskusih z ustreznimi normalnimi vrednostmi, |
| | - podatke za posebne nevrovedenjske, nevropatološke, nevrokemične ali elektrofiziološke postopke. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - telesno maso/spremembe telesne mase, vključno s telesno maso ob usmrtitvi, |
| | - porabo hrane in porabo vode, kar je primerno, |
| | - podatke o toksičnem učinkovanju glede na spol in velikost odmerka, vključno z znaki toksičnosti, |
| | - vrsto, resnost in trajanje (čas začetka in poznejši potek) podrobnih kliničnih opazovanj (ali so reverzibilna ali ne), |
| | - natančen opis vseh rezultatov funkcionalnega preskusa, |
| | - ugotovitve obdukcije, |
| | - podroben opis vseh nevrovedenjskih, nevropatoloških in nevrokemijskih ali elektrofizioloških ugotovitev, če so na voljo, |
| | - podatke o absorpciji in presnovi, če so na voljo, |
| | - statistično obdelavo rezultatov, po potrebi. |
| | Razprava o rezultatih: |
| | - informacije o odzivu na odmerek, |
| | - odnos katerih koli drugih toksičnih učinkov do zaključka o nevrotoksičnem potencialu preskusne kemikalije, |
| | - vrednost brez opaznih škodljivih učinkov. |
| | Zaključki: |
| | - zaželena je posebna izjava o celotni nevrotoksičnosti preskusne kemikalije. |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) OECD Giudance Document on Neurotoxicity Testing Strategies and Test Methods. OECD, Paris, V pripravi. |
| | (2) Test Guideline for a Developmental Neurotoxicity Study, OECD Guidelines for the Testing of Chemicals. V pripravi. |
| | (3) World Health Organization (WHO) (1986). Environmental Health Criteria document 60: Principles and Methods for the Assessment of Neurotoxicity associated with Exposure to Chemicals. |
| | (4) Spencer, P.S. and Schaumburg, H.H. (1980). Experimental and Clinical Nevrotoxicology. Eds. Spencer, P.S. and Schaumburg, H.H. eds. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore/ London. |
| | (5) Tupper, D.E. and Wallace, R.B. (1980). Utility of the Nevrological Examination in Rats. Acta Nevrobiol. Exp., 40, 999–1003. |
| | (6) Gad, S.C. (1982). A Nevromuscular Screen for Use in Industrial Toxicology. J. Toxicol. Environ. Health, 9, 691–704. |
| | (7) Moser, V.C., McDaniel, K.M. and Phillips, P.M. (1991). Rat Strain and Stock Comparisons Using a Functional Observational Battery: Baseline Values and Effects of amitraz. Toxic. Appl. Pharmacol., 108, 267–283. |
| | (8) Meyer, O.A., Tilson, H.A., Byrd, W.C. and Riley, M.T. (1979). A Method for the Routine Assessment of Fore- and Hind- limb Grip Strength of Rats and Mice. Nevrobehav. Toxicol., 1, 233–236. |
| | (9) Crofton, K.M., Haward, J.L., Moser, V.C., Gill, M.W., Reirer, L.W., Tilson, H.A. and MacPhail, R.C. (1991) Interlaboratory Comparison of Motor Activity Experiments: Implication for Nevrotoxicological Assessments. Nevrotoxicol. Teratol., 13, 599–609. |
| | (10) Tilson, H.A., and Mitchell, C.L. eds. (1992). Nevrotoxicology Target Organ Toxicology Series. Raven Press, New York. |
| | (11) Chang, L.W., ed. (1995). Principles of Nevrotoxicology. Marcel Dekker, New York. |
| | (12) Broxup, B. (1991). Neuopathology as a screen for Neurotoxicity Assessment. J. Amer. Coll. Toxicol., 10, 689–695. |
| | (13) Moser, V.C., Anthony, D.C., Sette, W.F. and MacPhail, R.C. (1992). Comparison of Subchronic Neurotoxicity of 2-Hydroxyethyl Acrylate and Acrylamide in Rats. Fund. Appl.Toxicol., 18, 343–352. |
| | (14) O'Callaghan, J.P. (1988). Neurotypic and Gliotypic Proteins as Biochemical Markers of Neurotoxicity. Eurotoxicol. Teratol., 10, 445–452. |
| | (15) O'Callaghan J.P. and Miller, D.B. (1988). Acute Exposure of the Neonatal Rat to Triethyltin Results in Persistent Changes in Nevrotypic and Gliotypic Proteins. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 244, 368–378. |
| | (16) Fox. D.A., Lowndes, H.E. and Birkamper, G.G. (1982). Electrophysiological Techniques in Nevrotoxicology. V: Nervous System Toxicology. Mitchell, C.L. ed. Raven Press, New York, pp 299–335. |
| | (17) Johnson, B.L. (1980). Electrophysiological Methods in neurotoxicity Testing. V: Experimental and Clinical Nevrotoxicology. Spencer, P.S. and Schaumburg, H.H. eds., Williams and Wilkins Co., Baltimore/London, pp. 726–742. |
| | (18) Bancroft, J.D. and Steven A. (1990). Theory and Pratice of Histological Techniques. Chapter 17, Nevropathological Techniques. Lowe, James and Cox, Gordon eds. Churchill Livingstone. |
| | Tabela 1 |
| | Najmanjše število živali, ki so potrebne na skupino, kadar se študija nevrotoksičnosti izvaja posebej ali v kombinaciji s študijami |
| | | ŠTUDIJA NEVROTOKSIČNOSTI, IZVEDENA KOT: | |
| | Posebna študija | Kombinirana študija z 28-dnevno študijo | Kombinirana študija z 90-dnevno študijo | Kombinirana študija s študijo kronične toksičnosti | |
| | Skupno število živali na skupino | 10 samcev in 10 samic | 10 samcev in 10 samic | 15 samcev in 15 samic | 25 samcev in 25 samic | |
| | Število živali, izbranih za funkcionalno preskušanje, vključno s podrobnimi kliničnimi opazovanji | 10 samcev in 10 samic | 10 samcev in 10 samic | 10 samcev in 10 samic | 10 samcev in 10 samic | |
| | Število živali, izbranih za perfuzijo in situ in nevrohistopatologijo | 5 samcev in 5 samic | 5 samcev in 5 samic | 5 samcev in 5 samic | 5 samcev in 5 samic | |
| | Število živali, izbranih za opazovanja toksičnosti s ponavljajočimi odmerki/subkronično/kronično, hematologijo, klinično biokemijo, histopatologijo itd., kakor je navedeno v zadevnih Smernicah | | 5 samcev in 5 samic | 10 samcev [1] in 10 samic [1] | 20 samcev [1] in 20 samic [1] | |
| | Po potrebi dopolnilna opazovanja | 5 samcev in 5 samic | | | | |
| | Tabela 2 |
| | Pogostost kliničnih opazovanj in funkcionalnih preskusov |
| | Vrsta opazovanja | | Trajanje študije | |
| | Akutno | 28 dni | 90 dni | Kronično | |
| | Pri vseh živalih | Splošno zdravstveno stanje | dnevno | dnevno | dnevno | dnevno | |
| | Smrtnost/ obolevnost | dvakrat dnevno | dvakrat dnevno | dvakrat dnevno | dvakrat dnevno | |
| | Pri živalih, izbranih za funkcionalna opazovanja | Podrobna klinična opazovanja | pred prvo izpostavljenostjov 8 urah po odmerjanju v pričakovanem času vrhunca učinka7. in 14. dan po odmerjanju | pred prvo izpostavljenostjopotem enkrat tedensko | pred prvo izpostavljenostjoenkrat v prvem ali drugem tednu izpostavljenostipotem mesečno | pred prvo izpostavljenostjoenkrat na koncu prvega meseca izpostavljenostipotem vsake tri mesece | |
| | Funkcionalni preskusi | pred prvo izpostavljenostjov 8 urah po odmerjanju v pričakovanem času vrhunca učinka7. in 14. dan po odmerjanju | pred prvo izpostavljenostjov četrtem tednu tretiranja čim bliže koncu obdobja izpostavljenosti | pred prvo izpostavljenostjoenkrat v prvem ali drugem tednu izpostavljenostipotem mesečno | pred prvo izpostavljenostjoenkrat na koncu prvega meseca izpostavljenostipotem vsake tri mesece | |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
| | PRILOGA 2I |
| | C.21 TALNI MIKROORGANIZMI: PRESKUS TRANSFORMACIJE DUŠIKA |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta preskusna metoda ustreza metodi OECD TG 216 (2000). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Ta preskusna metoda opisuje laboratorijsko metodo, namenjeno raziskovanju dolgoročnih učinkov kemikalij po enkratni izpostavljenosti na dejavnost talnih mikroorganizmov pri transformaciji dušika. Preskus načeloma temelji na priporočilih Evropske in sredozemske organizacije za varstvo rastlin (1). Vendar so bile upoštevane tudi druge smernice, na primer smernice Nemškega zveznega zavoda za biologijo (2), Ameriške agencije za varstvo okolja (3) SETAC (4) in Mednarodne organizacije za standardizacijo (5). Na delavnici OECD o izbiri tal/usedline, ki je bila leta 1995 v Belgiratu v Italiji (6), je bil dosežen dogovor o številu in vrstah tal za uporabo v tem preskusu. Priporočila za odvzemanje, obravnavanje in shranjevanje vzorcev tal temeljijo na napotkih ISO (7) in priporočilih delavnice iz Belgirata. Pri ocenjevanju in vrednotenju toksičnih lastnosti preskusnih snovi, je lahko potrebno določanje učinkov na mikrobno dejavnost v tleh, npr. kadar so potrebni podatki o potencialnih stranskih učinkih izdelkov za zaščito pridelka na talno mikrofloro ali kadar se pričakuje izpostavljenost mikroorganizmov kemikalijam, ki niso izdelki za zaščito pridelka. Preskus transformacije dušika se izvaja za določitev učinkov teh kemikalij na talno mikrofloro. Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije (npr. izdelki za zaščito pridelka, gnojila, gozdarske kemikalije), se izvedejo preskusi transformacije dušika in transformacije ogljika. Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, zadošča preskus transformacije dušika. Če pa spadajo vrednosti preskusa transformacije dušika E50 za take kemikalije v izbor nitrifikacijskih inhibitorjev, ki so na voljo na tržišču (npr. nitrapirin), se lahko za pridobitev dodatnih informacij izvede preskus transformacije ogljika. |
| | Tla so sestavljena iz živih in neživih sestavin, ki obstajajo v sestavljenih in heterogenih zmeseh. Mikroorganizmi imajo pomembno vlogo pri razgradnji in transformaciji organskih snovi v rodovitnih tleh in številne vrste prispevajo k različnim vidikom rodovitnosti tal. Vsaka dolgoročna motnja teh biokemičnih procesov lahko potencialno vpliva na kroženje hranilnih snovi, to pa lahko spremeni rodovitnost tal. Transformacija ogljika in dušika se pojavlja v vseh rodovitnih vrstah tal. Čeprav se mikrobne združbe, ki so odgovorne za te procese, razlikujejo od ene do druge vrste tal, so poti transformacije v bistvu enake. |
| | Ta opisana preskusna metoda je namenjena odkrivanju dolgoročnih škodljivih učinkov snovi na proces transformacije dušika v aerobnih površinskih vrstah tal. Preskusna metoda omogoča tudi oceno učinkov snovi na transformacijo ogljika s talno mikrofloro. Nastajanje nitrata sledi razgradnji vezi med ogljikom in dušikom. Zato je, če so v tretiranih in kontrolnih tleh ugotovljene enake stopnje nastajanja nitrata, velika verjetnost, da so glavne poti razgradnje ogljika nedotaknjene in delujejo. Substrat, izbran za preskušanje (zdrob iz lucerne v prahu), ima ugodno razmerje ogljik–dušik (navadno med 12/1 in 16/1). Zato se pomanjkanje ogljika med preskusom zmanjša in če so mikrobne združbe zaradi kemikalije poškodovane, se lahko obnovijo v 100 dneh. |
| | Preskusi, na katerih je bila razvita ta preskusna metoda, so bili prvenstveno namenjeni za snovi, pri katerih je mogoče predvideti količino, ki bo prišla v tla. Tak primer so izdelki za zaščito pridelka, pri katerih je stopnja uporabe na področju znana. Pri agrokemikalijah zadošča preskušanje dveh odmerkov, ki ustrezata pričakovani ali napovedani stopnji uporabe. Agrokemikalije se lahko preskušajo kot aktivne sestavine (a.i.) ali kot formulirani pripravki. Vendar preskus ni omejen na agrokemikalije. S spreminjanjem obojega, količine preskusne snovi, ki se uporabi v tleh, in načina vrednotenja podatkov, se lahko preskus uporabi tudi za kemikalije, pri katerih ni znana količina, ki naj bi prišla v tla. Tako se s kemikalijami, ki niso agrokemikalije, določijo učinki serije koncentracij pri transformaciji dušika. Podatki iz teh preskusov se uporabijo za pripravo krivulje odziva na odmerek in izračun vrednosti ECx, kjer je x opredeljen % učinka. |
| | 1.2 OPREDELITVE POJMOV |
| | Transformacija dušika: je dokončna razgradnja organske snovi, ki vsebuje dušik, z mikroorganizmi preko procesa amonifikacije in nitrifikacije do anorganskega končnega produkta nitrata. |
| | ECx (efektivna koncentracija): je koncentracija preskusne snovi v tleh, ki daje x-odstotno inhibicijo transformacije dušika v nitrat. |
| | EC50 (srednja efektivna koncentracija): je koncentracija preskusne snovi v tleh, ki daje 50-odstotno (50 %) inhibicijo transformacije dušika v nitrat. |
| | 1.3 REFERENČNE SNOVI |
| | Jih ni. |
| | 1.4 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Presejana tla se dopolnijo z rastlinskim zdrobom v prahu in bodisi tretirajo s preskusno snovjo ali pustijo netretirana (kontrolna). Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, se priporoča najmanj dve preskusni koncentraciji, izbereta pa se glede na največjo pričakovano koncentracijo na področju. Po 0, 7, 14 dnevih in 28 dnevih inkubacije se z ustreznim topilom ekstrahira vzorce tretiranih in kontrolnih tal in določi količina nitrata v ekstraktih. Stopnja nastajanja nitrata v tretiranih vzorcih se primerja s stopnjo v kontrolnih vzorcih in izračuna odstotek odklona tretiranih od kontrolnih. Vsi preskusi trajajo najmanj 28 dni. Če so 28. dan razlike med tretiranimi in netretiranimi tlemi enake ali večje od 25 %, se merjenje nadaljuje do največ 100 dni. Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se v vzorce tal doda serija koncentracij preskusne snovi in po 28 dnevih inkubacije se izmerijo količine nitrata, ki nastane v tretiranih in kontrolnih vzorcih. Z regresijskim modelom se analizirajo rezultati preskusov z več koncentracijami in izračunajo vrednosti ECx (to je EC50, EC25 in/ali EC10). Glej opredelitve pojmov. |
| | 1.5 VELJAVNOST PRESKUSA |
| | Vrednotenje rezultatov preskusa z agrokemikalijami temelji na razmeroma majhnih razlikah (povprečna vrednost ± 25 %) med koncentracijami nitrata v kontrolnih in tretiranih vzorcih tal, tako da lahko velike razlike v kontrolah vodijo v napačne rezultate. Zato morajo biti razlike med ponovljenimi kontrolnimi vzorci manjše od ± 15 %. |
| | 1.6 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.6.1 Naprave |
| | Za preskuse se uporabljajo posode iz kemijsko inertnega materiala. Imeti morajo ustrezno prostornino v skladu s postopkom, ki se uporablja za inkubacijo tal, se pravi za inkubacijo v razsutem stanju ali kot serija posameznih vzorcev tal (glej oddelek 1.7.1.2). Paziti je treba, da je med preskusom izguba vode čim manjša in da se omogoči izmenjava plinov (npr. posode za preskus so lahko pokrite s perforirano polietilensko folijo). Kadar se preskušajo hlapne snovi, je treba uporabiti zatesnjene, nepredušno zaprte posode. Te naj bodo take velikosti, da je približno ena četrtina prostornine napolnjena z vzorcem tal. |
| | Uporablja se standardna laboratorijska oprema, ki vključuje: |
| | - napravo za stresanje: mehanski mešalnik ali enakovredno opremo, |
| | - centrifugo (3000 g) ali napravo za filtriranje (z uporabo filtrirnega papirja, ki ne vsebuje nitrata), |
| | - instrument za analizo nitrata z ustrezno občutljivostjo in ponovljivostjo. |
| | 1.6.2 Izbira in število tal |
| | Uporabljajo se samo ena tla. Priporočene lastnosti tal so: |
| | - vsebnost peska: ne manj kakor 50 % in ne več kakor 75 %, |
| | - pH: 5,5–7,5, |
| | - vsebnost organskega ogljika: 0,5–1,5 %, |
| | - mikrobno biomaso je treba izmeriti (8) (9) in njena vsebnost ogljika naj bo vsaj 1 % skupnega organskega ogljika tal. |
| | V večini primerov predstavljajo tla s temi lastnostmi najslabše možno stanje, ker je adsorpcija preskusne kemikalije najmanjša in razpoložljivost za mikrofloro največja. Zato navadno niso potrebni preskusi z drugimi vrstami tal. Kljub temu je lahko v nekaterih primerih, npr. kadar je glavni del pričakovane uporabe preskusne snovi v posebnih tleh, na primer kislih gozdnih, ali pri elektrostatično nabitih kemikalijah, potrebna uporaba dodatnih tal. |
| | 1.6.3 Odvzemanje in shranjevanje vzorcev tal |
| | 1.6.3.1 Odvzemanje |
| | Na voljo morajo biti podrobne informacije o preteklosti mesta vzorčenja, kjer se odvzemajo tla za preskus. Podrobnosti vključujejo točno lokacijo, pokritost z vegetacijo, datume uporabe izdelkov za zaščito pridelka, uporabo organskih in anorganskih gnojil, dodatke bioloških materialov ali naključno kontaminacijo. Mesto, izbrano za odvzemanje tal, naj omogoča dolgotrajno uporabo. Primerni so trajni pašniki, polja z letnimi posevki žit (razen koruze) ali gosto posejanim zelenim gnojilom. Izbrano mesto vzorčenja najmanj eno leto pred jemanjem vzorcev ne sme biti tretirano z izdelki za zaščito pridelka. Tudi organska gnojila se ne smejo uporabljati najmanj šest mesecev. Sprejemljiva je samo uporaba mineralnega gnojila, kadar je v skladu z zahtevami posevka, vzorcev tal pa se ne sme vzeti še najmanj tri mesece po uporabi gnojila. Uporabi tal, tretiranih z gnojili, ki imajo znane biocidne učinke (npr. kalcijev cianamid), se je treba izogibati. |
| | Vzorčenju se je treba izogibati med dolgimi obdobji (daljšimi od 30 dni) suše ali poplave in takoj po njih. Pri zoranih tleh se vzorci jemljejo iz globine od 0 do 20 cm globine. Pri traviščih (pašnikih) ali drugih tleh, ki dolgo niso preorana (najmanj eno sezono), je največja globina vzorčenja lahko malo več kakor 20 cm (npr. do 25 cm). |
| | Vzorce tal je treba prenašati v posodah in v temperaturnih razmerah, ki zagotavljajo, da se prvotne lastnosti tal bistveno ne spremenijo. |
| | 1.6.3.2 Shranjevanje |
| | Najbolje je uporabiti tla, na sveže odvzeta na terenu. Če se shranjevanju v laboratoriju ne da izogniti, se lahko vzorci tal shranjujejo največ tri mesece v temi pri 4 ± 2 °C. Med shranjevanjem tal morajo biti zagotovljeni aerobni pogoji. Če se tla odvzemajo na območjih, ki so zamrznjena najmanj tri mesece na leto, je treba razmisliti o shranitvi za šest mesecev pri −18 °C do −22 °C. Mikrobna biomasa shranjenih tal se izmeri pred vsakim poskusom in ogljika v biomasi mora biti najmanj 1 % skupne vsebnosti organskega ogljika v tleh (glej oddelek 1.6.2). |
| | 1.6.4 Ravnanje s tlemi in priprava na preskus |
| | 1.6.4.1 Predhodna inkubacija |
| | Če so bila tla shranjena (glej oddelek 1.6.3.2), se priporoča predhodna inkubacija za čas od 2 do 28 dni. Temperatura in vsebnost vlage tal med predhodno inkubacijo naj bosta podobni kakor med preskusom (glej oddelka 1.6.4.2 in 1.7.1.3). |
| | 1.6.4.2 Fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti |
| | Iz tal se ročno odstranijo večji objekti (npr. kamni, deli rastlin itd.), nato se vlažno presejejo brez odvečnega sušenja na velikost delcev, ki so manjši ali enaki 2 mm. Vsebnost vlage v vzorcu tal je treba prilagoditi z destilirano ali deionizirano vodo na vrednost med 40 % in 60 % največje zmogljivosti zadrževanja vode. |
| | 1.6.4.3 Dopolnitev z organskim substratom |
| | Tla je treba dopolniti z ustreznim organskim substratom, npr. zdrobom iz travnato zelene lucerne v prahu (glavna sestavina: Medicago sativa) v razmerju C/N med 12/1 in 16/1. Priporočeno razmerje lucerna/tla je 5 g lucerne na kilogram tal (suha teža). |
| | 1.6.5 Priprava preskusne snovi za aplikacijo na tla |
| | Preskusna snov se normalno uporablja z nosilcem. Nosilec je lahko voda (za snovi, topne v vodi) ali inertna trdna snov, kot je droben kremenov pesek (velikost delcev: 0,1–0,5 mm). Tekočih nosilcev, ki niso voda (npr. organska topila, kot sta aceton, kloroform), se je treba izogibati, ker lahko škodijo mikroflori. Če se kot nosilec uporablja pesek, se lahko prelije s preskusno snovjo, raztopljeno ali suspendirano v ustreznem topilu. V takih primerih je treba topilo pred mešanjem s tlemi odstraniti z izhlapevanjem. Za optimalno razporeditev preskusne snovi v tleh, se priporoča razmerje 10 g peska na kilogram tal (suhe teže). Kontrolni vzorci se tretirajo z enakovredno količino vode in/ali samo s kremenovim peskom. |
| | Pri preskušanju hlapnih kemikalij se je treba, kolikor je mogoče, izogniti izgubam in poskusiti zagotoviti homogeno porazdelitev v tleh (npr. preskusno snov je treba vbrizgati v tla na več mestih). |
| | 1.6.6 Preskusne koncentracije |
| | Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, je treba uporabiti najmanj dve koncentraciji. Nižja koncentracija mora odražati najmanj največjo količino, za katero se pričakuje, da bi jo tla dosegla v praktičnih razmerah, višja koncentracija pa naj bo mnogokratnik nižje. Koncentracije preskusne snovi, dodane v tla, se izračunajo ob predpostavki enotne vključitve v globino 5 cm in gostote tal v razsutem stanju 1,5. Za agrokemikalije, ki se aplicirajo neposredno na tla ali za kemikalije, pri katerih je mogoče napovedati količino, ki pride v tla, so priporočene preskusne koncentracije največje predvidene koncentracije v okolju (PKO) in petkratniki te koncentracije. Snovi, za katere se pričakuje, da bodo v eni sezoni večkrat aplicirane na tla, je treba preskusiti pri koncentracijah, dobljenih z množenjem PKO z največjim pričakovanim številom aplikacij. Vendar zgornja preskušena koncentracija ne sme presegati desetkratnika največje posamične stopnje aplikacije. Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se uporabi geometrična serija najmanj petih koncentracij. Preskušene koncentracije naj zajemajo razpon, ki je potreben za določitev vrednosti ECx. |
| | 1.7 IZVEDBA PRESKUSA |
| | 1.7.1 Pogoji izpostavljenosti |
| | 1.7.1.1 Tretiranje in kontrola |
| | Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, se tla razdelijo v tri dele enake teže. Dva dela se zmešata z nosilcem, ki vsebuje proizvod, tretji pa se zmeša z nosilcem brez proizvoda (kontrola). Priporočajo se najmanj tri ponovitve s tretiranimi in netretiranimi tlemi. Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se tla razdelijo v šest delov enake teže. Pet vzorcev se zmeša z nosilcem, ki vsebuje preskusno snov, in šesti vzorec se zmeša z nosilcem brez kemikalije. Priporočajo se po tri ponovitve za tretirane vzorce in kontrolo. Paziti je treba, da se zagotovi homogeno razporeditev preskusne snovi v tretiranih vzorcih tal. Med mešanjem se je treba izogibati stiskanju tal in nastajanju kep. |
| | 1.7.1.2 Inkubacija vzorcev tal |
| | Inkubacija vzorcev tal se lahko izvede na dva načina: kot vzorci tretiranih in netretiranih tal v razsutem stanju ali kot serija posameznih podvzorcev vsakih tretiranih in netretiranih tal enake velikosti. Vendar pa se lahko, kadar se preskušajo hlapne snovi, preskus izvede samo s serijo posameznih podvzorcev tal. Kadar se tla inkubirajo v razsutem stanju, se pripravijo velike količine tretiranih in netretiranih tal, podvzorci za analizo pa se jemljejo po potrebi med preskusom. Količina, ki se na začetku pripravi za vsako tretiranje in kontrolo, je odvisna od velikosti podvzorcev, števila za analizo uporabljenih ponovitev in pričakovanega največjega števila ponovitev vzorčenja. Tla, inkubirana v razsutem stanju, je treba pred podvzorčenjem temeljito premešati. Kadar se tla inkubirajo kot serija posameznih vzorcev tal, se vsak vzorec tretiranih in netretiranih tal v razsutem stanju razdeli na zahtevano število podvzorcev in ti se uporabljajo po potrebi. Pri preskusih, kjer se lahko pričakuje več kakor dve vzorčenji, je treba pripraviti dovolj vzorcev, ob upoštevanju vseh ponovitev in vseh vzorčenj. Najmanj tri ponovitve vzorcev tal za preskus je treba inkubirati v aerobnih pogojih (glej oddelek 1.7.1.1). Pri vseh preskusih je treba uporabljati ustrezne posode z dovolj velikim volumnom nad vzorcem, da se prepreči razvoj anaerobnih pogojev. Vendar pa se lahko, kadar se preskušajo hlapne snovi, preskus izvede samo s serijo posameznih podvzorcev tal. |
| | 1.7.1.3 Preskusni pogoji in trajanje |
| | Preskus se izvaja v temi pri sobni temperaturi 20 ± 2 °C. Vsebnost vlage v vzorcih tal se med preskusom vzdržuje med 40 % in 60 % največje zmogljivosti zadrževanja vode v tleh (glej oddelek 1.6.4.2) v razponu ± 5 %. Po potrebi se lahko doda destilirana, deionizirana voda. |
| | Najkrajše trajanje preskusov je 28 dni. Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, se primerjajo stopnje nastajanja nitrata v tretiranih in kontrolnih vzorcih. Če se te na 28. dan razlikujejo za več kakor 25 %, se preskus nadaljuje, dokler ni dosežena razlika, ki je enaka ali manjša od 25 % ali do največ 100 dni, kar je prej. Pri kemikalijah, ki niso agrokemikalije, se preskus prekine po 28 dneh. Na 28. dan se določijo količine nitrata v vzorcih tretiranih in kontrolnih tal in izračunajo vrednosti ECx. |
| | 1.7.2 Vzorčenje in analiza tal |
| | 1.7.2.1 Načrt za vzorčenje tal |
| | Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, se vzorci tal 0., 7., 14. in 28. dan analizirajo na nitrat. Če se zahteva podaljšan preskus, je treba nadaljnje meritve opraviti v 14-dnevnih presledkih po 28. dnevu. |
| | Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se uporabi najmanj pet preskusnih koncentracij, vzorci tal pa se analizirajo na nitrat na začetku (dan 0) in na koncu obdobja izpostavljenosti (28 dni). Če se zdi potrebno, se lahko doda še vmesno merjenje, npr. 7. dan. Podatki, dobljeni na 28. dan, se uporabljajo za določitev vrednosti ECx za kemikalijo. Po želji se lahko podatki o kontrolnih vzorcih iz dneva 0 uporabijo za poročanje o začetni količini nitrata v tleh. |
| | 1.7.2.2 Analiza vzorcev tal |
| | Količina nitrata, ki nastane v vsaki tretirani in kontrolni ponovitvi, se določi ob vsakem vzorčenju. Nitrat se ekstrahira iz tal s stresanjem vzorcev z ustreznim ekstrakcijskim topilom, npr. z 0,1 M raztopino kalijevega klorida. Priporoča se razmerje 5 ml raztopine KCl na gram suhe teže tal. Da bi optimizirali ekstrakcijo, posode, v katerih so vzorci tal in ekstrakcijska raztopina, ne smejo biti več kakor do polovice polne. Mešanice se 60 minut stresajo s 150 obrati na minuto. Zmesi se centrifugirajo ali filtrirajo in tekoče faze se analizirajo na nitrat. Tekoči ekstrakti brez delcev se lahko pred analizo shranijo pri minus 20 ± 5 °C za čas do šest mesecev. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.1 OBDELAVA REZULTATOV |
| | Če so preskusi izvedeni z agrokemikalijami, je treba zabeležiti količino nitrata, nastalega v vsaki ponovitvi vzorca tal, in podati povprečne vrednosti vseh ponovitev v tabelarični obliki. Stopnje transformacije dušika se ovrednotijo z ustreznimi in splošno sprejetimi statističnimi metodami (npr. F-preskus, 5 % raven pomembnosti). Količine nastalega nitrata so izražene v mg nitrata/kg suhe teže tal/dan. Stopnja nastajanja nitrata pri vsakem tretiranju se primerja s kontrolo in izračuna odstotek odstopanja od kontrole. |
| | Če so preskusi izvedeni s kemikalijami, ki niso agrokemikalije, se določi količina nitrata, ki nastane v vsaki ponovitvi in pripravi krivulja odziva na odmerek za oceno vrednosti ECx. Količine nitrata (to je mg nitrata/kg suhe teže tal), ugotovljene v tretiranih vzorcih po 28 dneh se primerjajo s količinami, ugotovljenimi v kontroli. Iz teh podatkov se izračuna % vrednosti inhibicije za vsak preskus koncentracije. Ti odstotki se potem glede na koncentracijo in statistične postopke uporabijo za izračun vrednosti ECx. Intervali zaupanja (p = 0,95) za izračunane ECx so določeni tudi z uporabo standardnih postopkov (10) (11) (12). |
| | Preskusne snovi, ki vsebujejo velike količine dušika, lahko prispevajo h količinam nitrata, ki nastanejo med preskusom. Če se te snovi preskusijo pri visoki koncentraciji (npr. kemikalije, za katere se pričakuje, da bodo uporabljene v ponovljenih aplikacijah), je v preskus treba vključiti ustrezne kontrole (to je tla plus preskusno snov, vendar brez rastlinskega zdroba). Podatki iz teh kontrol se morajo upoštevati pri izračunih ECx. |
| | 2.2 RAZLAGA REZULTATOV |
| | Kadar se ocenjujejo rezultati iz preskusov z agrokemikalijami in je razlika med stopnjami nastalih nitratov med nižjim tretiranjem (to je največjo predvideno koncentracijo) in kontrolo pri katerem koli vzorčenju po 28. dnevu enaka ali manjša od 25 %, se lahko oceni, da proizvod nima dolgoročnega vpliva na transformacijo dušika v tleh. Kadar se vrednotijo rezultati iz preskusov s kemikalijami, ki niso agrokemikalije, se uporabijo vrednosti EC50, EC25 in/ali EC10. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije: |
| | Popolna identifikacija uporabljenih tal, vključno z: |
| | - geografsko oznako mesta (zemljepisno širino, zemljepisno dolžino), |
| | - informacijami o preteklosti mesta preskusa (pokritost z vegetacijo, uporaba izdelkov za zaščito pridelkov, uporaba gnojil, naključna kontaminacija itd.), |
| | - vrsto rabe (npr. kmetijsko zemljišče, gozd itd.), |
| | - globino vzorčenja (cm), |
| | - vsebnostjo peska/mulja/gline (% suhe teže), |
| | - pH (v vodi), |
| | - organsko vsebnostjo ogljika (% suhe teže), |
| | - vsebnostjo dušika (% suhe teže), |
| | - začetno koncentracijo nitrata (mg nitrata/kg suhe teže), |
| | - kationsko izmenjalno kapaciteto (mmol/kg), |
| | - mikrobno biomaso glede na odstotke skupnega organskega ogljika, |
| | - sklici na metode, uporabljene za določanje posameznih parametrov, |
| | - vsemi informacijami v zvezi z odvzemanjem in shranjevanjem vzorcev tal, |
| | - podrobnostmi o predhodni inkubaciji tal, če je bila. |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - fizikalno stanje in ustrezne fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti, |
| | - kemijske identifikacijske podatke, kadar je ustrezno, vključno s strukturno formulo, čistostjo (odstotek aktivne sestavine v izdelkih za zaščito pridelka), vsebnostjo dušika. |
| | Substrat: |
| | - vir substrata, |
| | - sestavo (zdrob iz lucerne, zdrob iz travnato zelene lucerne), |
| | - vsebnost ogljika, dušika (% suhe teže), |
| | - velikost presejanih delcev (mm). |
| | Preskusni pogoji: |
| | - podatke o dopolnitvi tal z organskim substratom, |
| | - število koncentracij uporabljene preskusne kemikalije in, kadar je primerno, utemeljitev izbranih koncentracij, |
| | - podatke o aplikaciji preskusne snovi na tla, |
| | - inkubacijsko temperaturo, |
| | - vsebnost vlage v tleh na začetku preskusa in med njim, |
| | - uporabljeno metodo inkubacije tal (v razsutem stanju ali kot serija posameznih podvzorcev), |
| | - število ponovitev, |
| | - število vzorčenj, |
| | - uporabljeno metodo za ekstrakcijo nitrata iz tal. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - analitični postopek in opremo, uporabljeno za analizo nitrata, |
| | - tabelarične podatke, vključno s posameznimi in srednjimi vrednostmi meritev nitrata, |
| | - razliko med ponovitvami s tretiranimi in kontrolnimi vzorci, |
| | - razlage popravkov izračunov, če je ustrezno, |
| | - odstotek razlik v stopnjah nastajanja nitrata pri vsakem vzorčenju ali, če je primerno, vrednost EC50 s 95-odstotno mejo zaupanja, drugo ECx (EC25 ali EC10) z intervalom zaupanja in graf krivulje odziva na odmerek, |
| | - statistično obdelavo rezultatov, |
| | - vse informacije in opažanja, koristne za razlago rezultatov preskusa. |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) EPPO (1994). Decision-Making Scheme for the Environmental Risk Assessment of Plant Protection Chemicals. Poglavje 7: Soil Microflora. EPPO Bulletin 24: 1–16, 1994. |
| | (2) BBA (1990). Effects on the Activity of the Soil Microflora. BBA Guidelines for the Official Testing of Plant Protection Products, VI, 1–1 (2nd eds., 1990). |
| | (3) EPA (1987). Soil Microbial Community Toxicity Test. EPA 40 CFR Part 797.3700. Toxic Substances Control Act Test Guidelines; Proposed rule. September 28, 1987. |
| | (4) SETAC-Europe (1995). Procedures for assessing the environmental fate and ecotoxicity of pesticides, Ed. M.R. Lynch, Pub. SETAC-Europe, Bruxelles. |
| | (5) ISO/DIS 14238 (1995). Soil Quality – Determination of Nitrogen Mineralisation and Nitrification in Soils and the Influence of Chemicals on these Processes. Technical Committee ISO/TC 190/SC 4: Soil Quality – Biological Methods. |
| | (6) OECD (1995). Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Selection of Soils/Sediments, Belgirate, Italy, 18–20 January 1995. |
| | (7) ISO 10381-6 (1993). Soil quality – Sampling. Guidance on the collection, handling and storage of soil for the assessment of aerobic microbial processes in the laboratory. |
| | (8) ISO 14240-1 (1997). Soil quality – Determination of soil microbial biomass – Part 1: Substrateinduced respiration method. |
| | (9) ISO 14240-2 (1997). Soil quality – Determination of soil microbial biomass – Part 2: Fumigationextraction method. |
| | (10) Litchfield, J.T. and Wilcoxon F. (1949). A simplified method of evaluating dose-effect experiments. Jour. Pharmacol. and Exper. Ther., 96, 99–113. |
| | (11) Finney, D.J. (1971). Probit Analysis. 3rd ed., Cambridge, London and New-York. |
| | (12) Finney, D.J. (1978). Statistical Methods in biological Assay. Griffin, Weycombe, UK. |
| | C.22 TALNI MIKROORGANIZMI: PRESKUS TRANSFORMACIJE OGLJIKA |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta metoda ustreza metodi OECD TG 217 (2000). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Ta preskusna metoda opisuje laboratorijsko metodo, namenjeno raziskovanju potencialnih dolgoročnih učinkov enkratne izpostavljenosti izdelkov za zaščito pridelka in morebitnih drugih kemikalij na dejavnost talnih mikroorganizmov pri transformaciji ogljika. Preskus načeloma temelji na priporočilih Evropske in sredozemske organizacije za varstvo rastlin (1). Vendar so bile upoštevane tudi druge smernice, na primer smernice Nemškega zveznega zavoda za biologijo (2), Ameriške agencije za varstvo okolja (3) in SETAC (4). Na delavnici OECD o izbiri tal/usedline, ki je bila leta 1995 v Belgiratu v Italiji (5), je bil dosežen dogovor o številu in vrstah tal za uporabo v tem preskusu. Priporočila za odvzemanje, obravnavanje in shranjevanje vzorcev tal temeljijo na napotkih ISO (6) in priporočilih delavnice iz Belgirata. |
| | Pri ocenjevanju in vrednotenju toksičnih lastnosti preskusnih snovi, je lahko potrebno določanje učinkov na mikrobno dejavnost v tleh, npr. kadar so potrebni podatki o potencialnih stranskih učinkih izdelkov za zaščito pridelka na talno mikrofloro ali kadar se pričakuje izpostavljenost mikroorganizmov kemikalijam, ki niso izdelki za zaščito pridelka. Preskus transformacije ogljika se izvaja za določitev učinkov teh kemikalij na talno mikrofloro. Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije (npr. izdelki za zaščito pridelka, gnojila, gozdarske kemikalije), se izvedejo preskusi transformacije ogljika in transformacije dušika. Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, zadošča preskus transformacije dušika. Če pa spadajo vrednosti preskusa transformacije dušika E50 za take kemikalije v izbor nitrifikacijskih inhibitorjev, ki so na voljo na tržišču (npr. nitrapirin), se lahko preskus transformacije ogljika izvede za pridobitev dodatnih informacij. |
| | Tla so sestavljena iz živih in neživih sestavin, ki obstajajo v sestavljenih in heterogenih zmeseh. Mikroorganizmi imajo pomembno vlogo pri razgradnji in transformaciji organskih snovi v rodovitnih tleh in številne vrste prispevajo k različnim vidikom rodovitnosti tal. Vsaka dolgoročna motnja teh biokemičnih procesov lahko potencialno vpliva na kroženje hranilnih snovi, to pa lahko spremeni rodovitnost tal. Transformacija ogljika in dušika se pojavlja v vseh rodovitnih vrstah tal. Čeprav se mikrobne združbe, ki so odgovorne za te procese, razlikujejo od ene do druge vrste tal, so poti transformacije v bistvu enake. |
| | Ta preskusna metoda je namenjena odkrivanju dolgoročnih škodljivih učinkov snovi na proces transformacije ogljika v aerobnih površinskih vrstah tal. Preskus je občutljiv na spremembe velikosti in dejavnosti mikrobnih združb, ki so odgovorne za transformacijo ogljika, ker so te združbe odvisne od poudarjene kemikalije in pomanjkanja ogljika. Uporabijo se peščena tla z malo organskih snovi. Ta tla se tretirajo s preskusno snovjo in inkubirajo v pogojih, ki omogočajo hitro mikrobiološko presnovo. V teh pogojih se viri razpoložljivega ogljika v tleh hitro praznijo. To povzroča pomanjkanje ogljika, ki ubija mikrobne celice in povzroča mrtvilo in/ali sporulacijo. Če teče preskus več kakor 28 dni, se lahko vsota teh reakcij izmeri v kontrolah (netretiranih tleh) kot progresivna izguba presnovno aktivne mikrobne biomase (7). Če je biomasa v tleh s poudarjenim ogljikom v teh pogojih preskusa prizadeta zaradi navzočnosti kemikalije, se morda ne vrne na enako raven kot kontrola. Zato motnje, ki jih povzroči preskusna snov kadar koli med preskusom, pogosto trajajo do konca preskusa. |
| | Preskusi, na katerih je bila razvita ta preskusna metoda, so bili prvenstveno namenjeni za snovi, pri katerih je mogoče predvideti količino, ki bo prišla v tla. Tak primer so izdelki za zaščito pridelka, pri katerih je stopnja uporabe na področju znana. Pri agrokemikalijah zadošča preskušanje dveh odmerkov, ki ustrezata pričakovani ali napovedani stopnji uporabe. Agrokemikalije se lahko preskušajo kot aktivne sestavine (a.i.) ali kot formulirani pripravki. Vendar preskus ni omejen na kemikalije s predvidenimi koncentracijami v okolju. S spreminjanjem obojega, količine preskusne snovi, ki se uporabi v tleh, in načina vrednotenja podatkov, se lahko preskus uporabi tudi za kemikalije, pri katerih ni znana količina, ki naj bi prišla v tla. Tako se s kemikalijami, ki niso agrokemikalije, določijo učinki serije koncentracij pri transformaciji ogljika. Podatki iz teh preskusov se uporabijo za pripravo krivulje odziva na odmerek in izračun vrednosti ECx, kjer je x opredeljen % učinka. |
| | 1.2 OPREDELITVE POJMOV |
| | Transformacija ogljika: je razgradnja organske snovi z mikroorganizmi, pri kateri nastane anorganski končni produkt ogljikov dioksid. |
| | ECx (efektivna koncentracija): je koncentracija preskusne snovi v tleh, ki daje x-odstotno inhibicijo transformacije ogljika v ogljikov dioksid. |
| | EC50 (srednja efektivna koncentracija): je koncentracija preskusne snovi v tleh, ki daje 50-odstotno inhibicijo transformacije ogljika v ogljikov dioksid. |
| | 1.3 REFERENČNE SNOVI |
| | Jih ni. |
| | 1.4 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Presejana tla se bodisi tretirajo s preskusno snovjo ali pustijo netretirana (kontrolna). Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, se priporoča najmanj dve preskusni koncentraciji, izbereta pa se glede na največjo pričakovano koncentracijo na področju. Po 0, 7, 14 dnevih in 28 dnevih inkubacije se tretirane in kontrolne vzorce tal pomeša z glukozo, stopnje respiracije, ki jo povzroči glukoza, pa se merijo 12 zaporednih ur. Stopnje respiracije so izražene kot sproščeni ogljikov dioksid (mg ogljikovega dioksida/kg suhih tal/uro) ali kot porabljeni kisik (mg kisika/kg tal/uro). Povprečna stopnja respiracije v vzorcih tretiranih tal se primerja s stopnjo v kontrolni in se izračuna odstotek odstopanja tretiranih tal od kontrolnih. Vsi preskusi trajajo najmanj 28 dni. Če so 28. dan razlike med tretiranimi in netretiranimi tlemi enake ali večje od 25 %, se merjenje v 14-dnevnih presledkih nadaljuje do največ 100 dni. Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se v vzorce tal doda serija koncentracij preskusne snovi in po 28 dnevih se izmerijo stopnje respiracije, ki jih povzroči glukoza (to je povprečna količina nastalega ogljikovega dioksida ali porabljenega kisika). Z regresijskim modelom se analizirajo rezultati preskusov s serijo koncentracij in izračunajo vrednosti ECx (to je EC50, EC25 in/ali EC10). Glej opredelitve pojmov. |
| | 1.5 VELJAVNOST PRESKUSA |
| | Vrednotenje rezultatov preskusa z agrokemikalijami temelji na razmeroma majhnih razlikah (povprečna vrednost ± 25 %) med sproščenim ogljikovim dioksidom in porabljenim kisikom v kontrolnih in tretiranih vzorcih tal, tako da lahko velike razlike v kontrolah vodijo v napačne rezultate. Zato morajo biti razlike med ponovljenimi kontrolnimi vzorci manjše od ± 15 %. |
| | 1.6 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.6.1 Naprave |
| | Za preskuse se uporabljajo posode iz kemijsko inertnega materiala. Imeti morajo ustrezno prostornino v skladu s postopkom, ki se uporablja za inkubacijo tal, se pravi za inkubacijo v razsutem stanju ali kot serija posameznih vzorcev tal (glej oddelek 1.7.1.2). Paziti je treba, da je med preskusom izguba vode čim manjša in da se omogoči izmenjava plinov (npr. posode za preskus so lahko pokrite s perforirano polietilensko folijo). Kadar se preskušajo hlapne snovi, je treba uporabiti zatesnjene, nepredušno zaprte posode. Te naj bodo take velikosti, da je približno ena četrtina prostornine napolnjena z vzorcem tal. |
| | Za določitev respiracije, ki jo povzroči glukoza, so potrebni inkubacijski sistemi in instrumenti za merjenje produkcije ogljikovega dioksida ali porabe kisika. Primeri takih sistemov in instrumentov so v literaturu (8) (9) (10) (11). |
| | 1.6.2 Izbira in število tal |
| | Uporabljajo se samo ena tla. Priporočene lastnosti tal so: |
| | - vsebnost peska: ne manj kakor 50 % in ne več kakor 75 %, |
| | - pH: 5,5–7,5, |
| | - vsebnost organskega ogljika: 0,5–1,5 %, |
| | - mikrobno biomaso je treba izmeriti (12) (13) in njena vsebnost ogljika naj bo vsaj 1 % skupnega organskega ogljika tal. |
| | V večini primerov predstavljajo tla s temi lastnostmi najslabše možno stanje, ker je adsorpcija preskusne kemikalije najmanjša in razpoložljivost za mikrofloro največja. Zato navadno niso potrebni preskusi z drugimi vrstami tal. Kljub temu je lahko v nekaterih primerih, npr. kadar je glavni del pričakovane uporabe preskusne snovi v posebnih tleh, na primer kislih gozdnih tleh, ali pri elektrostatično nabitih kemikalijah, treba nadomestiti dodatna tla. |
| | 1.6.3 Odvzemanje in shranjevanje vzorcev tal |
| | 1.6.3.1 Odvzemanje |
| | Na voljo morajo biti podrobne informacije o preteklosti mesta vzorčenja, kjer se odvzemajo tla za preskus. Podrobnosti vključujejo točno lokacijo, pokritost z vegetacijo, datume uporabe izdelkov za zaščito pridelka, uporabo organskih in anorganskih gnojil, dodatke bioloških materialov ali naključno kontaminacijo. Mesto, izbrano za odvzemanje tal, naj omogoča dolgotrajno uporabo. Primerni so trajni pašniki, polja z letnimi posevki žit (razen koruze) ali gosto posejanim zelenim gnojilom. Izbrano mesto vzorčenja ne sme biti tretirano z izdelki za zaščito pridelka najmanj eno leto pred jemanjem vzorcev. Tudi organska gnojila se ne smejo uporabljati najmanj šest mesecev. Sprejemljiva je samo uporaba mineralnega gnojila, kadar je v skladu z zahtevami posevka, vzorcev tal pa se ne sme vzeti še najmanj tri mesece po uporabi gnojila. Uporabi tal, tretiranih z gnojili, ki imajo znane biocidne učinke (npr. kalcijev cianamid), se je treba izogibati. |
| | Vzorčenju se je treba izogibati med dolgimi obdobji (daljšimi od 30 dni) suše ali poplave in takoj po njih. Pri zoranih tleh se vzorci jemljejo iz globine od 0 do 20 cm globine. Pri traviščih (pašnikih) ali drugih tleh, ki dolgo niso preorana (najmanj eno sezono), je največja globina vzorčenja lahko malo več kakor 20 cm (npr. do 25 cm). Vzorce tal je treba prenašati v posodah in v temperaturnih razmerah, ki zagotavljajo, da se prvotne lastnosti tal bistveno ne spremenijo. |
| | 1.6.3.2 Shranjevanje |
| | Najbolje je uporabiti tla, na sveže odvzeta na terenu. Če se shranjevanju v laboratoriju ne da izogniti, se lahko vzorec tal shranjuje največ tri mesece v temi pri 4 ± 2 °C. Med shranjevanjem tal morajo biti zagotovljeni aerobni pogoji. Če se tla odvzamejo na območjih, ki so zamrznjena najmanj tri mesece na leto, je treba razmisliti o shranitvi za šest mesecev pri −18 °C do −22 °C. Mikrobna biomasa shranjenih tal se izmeri pred vsakim poskusom in ogljika v biomasi mora biti najmanj 1 % skupne vsebnosti organskega ogljika v tleh (glej oddelek 1.6.2). |
| | 1.6.4 Ravnanje s tlemi in priprava na preskus |
| | 1.6.4.1 Predhodna inkubacija |
| | Če so bila tla shranjena (glej oddelka 1.6.4.2 in 1.7.1.3), se priporoča predhodna inkubacija za čas od 2 do 28 dni. Temperatura in vsebnost vlage tal med predhodno inkubacijo naj bosta podobni kakor med preskusom (glej oddelka 1.6.4.2 and 1.7.1.3). |
| | 1.6.4.2 Fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti |
| | Iz tal se ročno odstranijo večji objekti (npr. kamni, deli rastlin itd.), nato se vlažno presejejo brez odvečnega sušenja na velikost delcev, ki so manjši ali enaki 2 mm. Vsebnost vlage v vzorcu tal je treba prilagoditi z destilirano ali deionizirano vodo na vrednost med 40 % in 60 % največje zmogljivosti zadrževanja vode. |
| | 1.6.5 Priprava preskusne snovi za aplikacijo na tla |
| | Preskusna snov se normalno uporablja z nosilcem. Nosilec je lahko voda (za snovi, topne v vodi) ali inertna trdna snov, kot je droben kremenov pesek (velikost delcev: 0,1–0,5 mm). Tekočih nosilcev, ki niso voda (npr. organska topila, kot sta aceton, kloroform), se je treba izogibati, ker lahko škodijo mikroflori. Če se kot nosilec uporablja pesek, se lahko prelije s preskusno snovjo, raztopljeno ali suspendirano v ustreznem topilu. V takih primerih je treba topilo pred mešanjem s tlemi odstraniti z izhlapevanjem. Za optimalno razporeditev preskusne snovi v tleh, se priporoča razmerje 10 g peska na kilogram tal (suhe teže). Kontrolni vzorci se tretirajo z enakovredno količino vode in/ali samo s kremenovim peskom. |
| | Pri preskušanju hlapnih kemikalij se je treba izogibati izgubam in poskusiti zagotoviti homogeno porazdelitev v tleh (npr. preskusno snov je treba vbrizgati v tla na več mestih). |
| | 1.6.6 Preskusne koncentracije |
| | Če se preskušajo izdelki za zaščito pridelka ali druge kemikalije s predvidenimi koncentracijami v okolju, je treba uporabiti najmanj dve koncentraciji. Nižja koncentracija mora odražati najmanj največjo količino, za katero se pričakuje, da bi jo tla dosegla v praktičnih razmerah, višja koncentracija pa naj bo mnogokratnik nižje. Koncentracije preskusne snovi, dodane v tla, se izračunajo ob predpostavki enotne vključitve v globino 5 cm in gostote tal v razsutem stanju 1,5. Za agrokemikalije, ki se aplicirajo neposredno na tla ali za kemikalije, pri katerih je mogoče napovedati količino, ki pride v tla, so priporočene najvišje preskusne koncentracije predvidenih koncentracij v okolju (PKO) in petkratniki te koncentracije. Snovi, za katere se pričakuje, da bodo v eni sezoni večkrat aplicirane na tla, je treba preskusiti pri koncentracijah, dobljenih z množenjem PKO z največjim pričakovanim številom aplikacij. Vendar zgornja preskušena koncentracija ne sme presegati desetkratnika največje posamične stopnje aplikacije. |
| | Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se uporabi geometrična serija najmanj petih koncentracij. Preskušene koncentracije naj zajemajo razpon, ki je potreben za določitev vrednosti ECx. |
| | 1.7 IZVEDBA PRESKUSA |
| | 1.7.1 Pogoji izpostavljenosti |
| | 1.7.1.1 Tretiranje in kontrola |
| | Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, se tla razdelijo v tri dele enake teže. Dva dela se zmešata z nosilcem, ki vsebuje proizvod, tretji pa se zmeša z nosilcem brez proizvoda (kontrola). Priporočajo se najmanj tri ponovitve s tretiranimi in netretiranimi tlemi. Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se tla razdelijo v šest delov enake teže. Pet vzorcev se zmeša z nosilcem, ki vsebuje preskusno snov, in šesti vzorec se zmeša z nosilcem brez kemikalije. Priporočajo se po tri ponovitve za tretirane vzorce in kontrolo. Paziti je treba, da se zagotovi homogeno razporeditev preskusne snovi v tretiranih vzorcih tal. Med mešanjem se je treba izogibati stiskanju tal in nastajanju kep. |
| | 1.7.1.2 Inkubacija vzorcev tal |
| | Inkubacija vzorcev tal se lahko izvede na dva načina: kot vzorci tretiranih in netretiranih tal v razsutem stanju ali kot serija posameznih podvzorcev vsakih tretiranih in netretiranih tal enake velikosti. Vendar pa se lahko, kadar se preskušajo hlapne snovi, preskus izvede samo s serijo posameznih podvzorcev tal. Kadar se tla inkubirajo v razsutem stanju, se pripravijo velike količine tretiranih in netretiranih tal, podvzorci za analizo pa se jemljejo po potrebi med preskusom. Količina, ki se na začetku pripravi za vsako tretiranje in kontrolo, je odvisna od velikosti podvzorcev, števila za analizo uporabljenih ponovitev in pričakovanega največjega števila ponovitev vzorčenja. Tla, inkubirana v razsutem stanju, je treba pred podvzorčenjem temeljito premešati. Kadar se tla inkubirajo kot serija posameznih vzorcev tal, se vsak vzorec tretiranih in netretiranih tal v razsutem stanju razdeli na zahtevano število podvzorcev in ti se izkoriščajo po potrebi. Pri preskusih, kjer se lahko pričakuje več kakor dve vzorčenji, je treba pripraviti dovolj vzorcev, ob upoštevanju vseh ponovitev in vseh vzorčenj. Najmanj tri ponovitve vzorcev tal za preskus je treba inkubirati v aerobnih pogojih (glej oddelek 1.7.1.1). Pri vseh preskusih je treba uporabljati ustrezne posode z dovolj velikim volumnom nad vzorcem, da se prepreči razvoj anaerobnih pogojev. Vendar pa se lahko, kadar se preskušajo hlapne snovi, preskus izvede samo s serijo posameznih podvzorcev tal. |
| | 1.7.1.3 Preskusni pogoji in trajanje |
| | Preskus se izvaja v temi pri sobni temperaturi 20 ± 2 °C. Vsebnost vlage v vzorcih tal se med preskusom vzdržuje med 40 % in 60 % največje zmogljivosti zadrževanja vode v tleh (glej oddelek 1.6.4.2) v razponu ± 5 %. Po potrebi se lahko doda destilirana, deionizirana voda. |
| | Najkrajše trajanje preskusov je 28 dni. Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, se primerjajo količine sproščenega ogljikovega dioksida ali porabljenega kisika v tretiranih in kontrolnih vzorcih. Če se te na 28. dan razlikujejo za več kakor 25 %, se preskus nadaljuje, dokler ni dosežena razlika, ki je enaka ali manjša od 25 % ali do največ 100 dni, kar je prej. Če se preskušajo kemikalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se preskus prekine po 28 dneh. Na 28. dan se določijo količine sproščenega ogljikovega dioksida ali porabljenega kisika v vzorcih tretiranih in kontrolnih tal in izračunajo vrednosti ECx. |
| | 1.7.2 Vzorčenje in analiza tal |
| | 1.7.2.1 Načrt za vzorčenje tal |
| | Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, se vzorci tal na 0., 7., 14. in 28. dan analizirajo glede stopnje respiracije, ki jo povzroča glukoza. Če je potreben podaljšan preskus, se nadaljnje meritve opravijo v 14-dnevnih presledkih po 28. dnevu. |
| | Če se preskušajo kemijalije, ki niso agrokemikalije, se uporabi in analizira vsaj pet preskusnih koncentracij in vzorcev tal glede respiracije, ki jo povzroči glukoza, na začetku (dan 0) in na koncu obdobja izpostavljenosti (28 dni). Če se zdi potrebno, se lahko doda še vmesno merjenje, npr. 7. dan. Podatki, dobljeni na 28. dan, se uporabljajo za določitev vrednosti ECx za kemikalijo. Po potrebi se lahko podatki o kontrolnih vzorcih iz dneva 0 uporabijo za oceno začetnih količin presnovno dejavne mikrobne biomase v tleh (12). |
| | 1.7.2.2 Merjenje stopenj respiracije, ki jo povzroči glukoza |
| | Stopnja respiracije, ki jo povzroči glukoza v vsaki tretirani in kontrolni ponovitvi, se določi ob vsakem vzorčenju. Vzorci tal se pomešajo z zadostno količino glukoze, da izzove takojšnji največji odziv respiracije. Količina glukoze, ki je potrebna za sprožanje največjega respiratornega odziva iz danih tal, se lahko določi s predhodnim preskusom s serijo koncentracij glukoze (14). Vendar za peščena tla z 0,5–1,5 % organskega ogljika navadno zadošča 2000 mg do 4000 mg glukoze na kg suhe teže tal. Glukoza se lahko zmelje v prah s čistim kremenovim peskom (10 g peska/ kg suhe teže tal) in homogeno pomeša s tlemi. |
| | Vzorci tal, dopolnjeni z glukozo, se inkubirajo v primerni napravi za merjenje stopenj respiracije, bodisi neprekinjeno, vsako uro ali vsaki dve uri (glej oddelek 1.6.1) pri 20 ± 2 °C. Sproščeni ogljikov dioksid ali porabljeni kisik se meri 12 zaporednih ur in meritve se morajo začeti čim prej, to je 1 ali 2 uri po dopolnitvi z glukozo. Izmeri se skupna količina sproščenega ogljikovega dioksida ali porabljenega kisika v 12 urah in določi srednja stopnja respiracije. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.1 OBDELAVA REZULTATOV |
| | Če se preskušajo agrokemikalije, je treba zabeležiti sproščeni ogljikov dioksid ali porabljeni kisik v vsakem ponovljenem vzorcu tal in v tabelarični obliki podati povprečne vrednosti vseh ponovitev. Rezultati se ovrednotijo z ustreznimi in splošno sprejetimi statističnimi metodami (npr. F-preskus, 5 % raven pomembnosti). Stopnje respiracije, ki jo povzroči glukoza, so izražene v mg ogljikovega dioksida/kg suhe teže tal/uro ali mg kisika/suho težo tal/uro. Povprečna stopnja nastajanja ogljikovega dioksida ali povprečna stopnja porabe kisika v vsakem tretiranem vzorcu se primerja s stopnjo porabe v kontroli in izračuna odstotek odstopanja od kontrole. |
| | Če so preskusi izvedeni s kemikalijami, ki niso agrokemikalije, se določi količina sproščenega ogljikovega dioksida ali porabljenega kisika v vsaki ponovitvi in pripravi krivulja odziva na odmerek za oceno vrednosti ECx. Stopnje respiracije, ki jih povzroči glukoza (to je mg ogljikovega dioksida/kg suhe teže tal/uro ali mg kisika/suho težo tal/uro), ugotovljene v tretiranih vzorcih po 28 dnevih, se primerjajo s tistimi, ki so ugotovljene v kontroli. Iz teh podatkov se izračuna % vrednosti inhibicije za vsak preskus koncentracije. Ti odstotki se glede na koncentracijo in statistične postopke uporabijo za izračun vrednosti ECx. Intervali zaupanja (p = 0,95) za izračunane ECx so določeni tudi z uporabo standardnih postopkov (15) (16) (17). |
| | 2.2 RAZLAGA REZULTATOV |
| | Kadar se ocenjujejo rezultati iz preskusov z agrokemikalijami in je razlika med stopnjami respiracije med nižjim tretiranjem (to je največjo predvideno koncentracijo) in kontrolo pri katerem koli vzorčenju po 28. dnevu enaka ali manjša od 25 %, se lahko oceni, da proizvod nima dolgoročnega vpliva na transformacijo ogljika v tleh. Kadar se vrednotijo rezultati iz preskusov s kemikalijami, ki niso agrokemikalije, se uporabijo vrednosti EC50, EC25 in/ali EC10. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vsebovati naslednje informacije: |
| | Popolna identifikacija uporabljenih tal, vključno z: |
| | - geografsko oznako mesta (zemljepisno širino, zemljepisno dolžino), |
| | - informacijami o preteklosti mesta preskusa (pokritost z vegetacijo, uporaba izdelkov za zaščito pridelkov, uporaba gnojil, naključna kontaminacija itd.), |
| | - vrsto rabe (npr. kmetijsko zemljišče, gozd itd.), |
| | - globino vzorčenja (cm), |
| | - vsebnostjo peska/mulja/gline (% suhe teže), |
| | - pH (v vodi), |
| | - organsko vsebnostjo ogljika (% suhe teže), |
| | - vsebnostjo dušika (% suhe teže), |
| | - kationsko izmenjalno kapaciteto (mmol/kg), |
| | - začetno mikrobno biomaso glede na odstotke skupnega organskega ogljika, |
| | - sklici na metode, uporabljene za določanje posameznih parametrov, |
| | - vsemi informacijami v zvezi z odvzemanjem in shranjevanjem vzorcev tal, |
| | - podrobnostmi o predhodni inkubaciji tal, če je bila. |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - fizikalno stanje in ustrezne fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti, |
| | - kemijske identifikacijske podatke, kadar je ustrezno, vključno s strukturno formulo, čistostjo (odstotek aktivne sestavine v izdelkih za zaščito pridelka), vsebnostjo dušika. |
| | Preskusni pogoji: |
| | - podatke o dopolnitvi tal z organskim substratom, |
| | - število koncentracij uporabljene preskusne kemikalije in, kadar je primerno, utemeljitev izbranih koncentracij, |
| | - podatke o aplikaciji preskusne snovi na tla, |
| | - inkubacijsko temperaturo, |
| | - vsebnost vlage v tleh na začetku preskusa in med njim, |
| | - uporabljeno metodo inkubacije tal (v razsutem stanju ali kot serija posameznih podvzorcev), |
| | - število ponovitev, |
| | - število vzorčenj. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - metodo in opremo, uporabljeno za merjenje stopenj respiracije, |
| | - tabelarične podatke, vključno s posameznimi in srednjimi vrednostmi količin ogljikovega dioksida ali kisika, |
| | - razliko med ponovitvami s tretiranimi in kontrolnimi vzorci, |
| | - razlage popravkov izračunov, če je ustrezno, |
| | - odstotek razlik v stopnjah respiracije, povzročene z glukozo, pri vsakem vzorčenju ali, če je primerno, vrednost EC50 s 95 odstotno mejo zaupanja, drugo ECx (EC25 ali EC10) z intervalom zaupanja in graf krivulje odziva na odmerek, |
| | - statistično obdelavo rezultatov, po potrebi, |
| | - vse informacije in opažanja, koristne za razlago rezultatov preskusa. |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) EPPO (1994). Decision-Making Scheme for the Environmental Risk Assessment of Plant Protection Chemicals. Chapter 7: Soil Microflora. EPPO Bulletin 24: 1–16, 1994. |
| | (2) BBA (1990). Effects on the Activity of the Soil Microflora. BBA Guidelines for the Official Testing of Plant Protection Products, VI, 1-1 (2nd eds., 1990). |
| | (3) EPA (1987). Soil Microbial Community Toxicity Test. EPA 40 CFR Part 797.3700. Toxic Substances Control Act Test Guidelines; Proposed rule. September 28, 1987. |
| | (4) SETAC-Europe (1995). Procedures for assessing the environmental fate and ecotoxicity of pesticides, Ed. M.R. Lynch, Pub. SETAC-Europe, Brussels. |
| | (5) OECD (1995). Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Selection of Soils/Sediments, Belgirate, Italy, 18–20 January 1995. |
| | (6) ISO 10381-6 (1993). Soil quality – Sampling. Guidance on the collection, handling and storage of soil for the assessment of aerobic microbial processes in the laboratory. |
| | (7) Anderson, J.P.E. (1987). Handling and Storage of Soils for Pesticide Experiments, in "Pesticide Effects on Soil Microflora". Eds. L. Somerville and M.P. Greaves, Chap. 3: 45–60. |
| | (8) Anderson, J.P.E. (1982). Soil Respiration, in "Methods of Soil Analysis – Part 2: Chemical and Microbiological Properties". Agronomy Monograph No 9. Eds. A.L. Page, R.H. Miller and D.R. Keeney. 41: 831–871. |
| | (9) ISO 11266-1. (1993). Soil Quality – Guidance on Laboratory Tests for Biodegradation in Soil: Part 1. Aerobic Conditions. |
| | (10) ISO 14239 (1997E). Soil Quality – Laboratory incubation systems for measuring the mineralization of organic chemicals in soil under aerobic conditions. |
| | (11) Heinemeye,r O., Insam, H., Kaiser, E.A, and Walenzik, G. (1989). Soil microbial biomass and respiration measurements; an automated technique based on infrared gas analyses. Plant and Soil, 116: 77–81. |
| | (12) ISO 14240-1 (1997). Soil quality – Determination of soil microbial biomass – Part 1: Substrateinduced respiration method. |
| | (13) ISO 14240-2 (1997). Soil quality – Determination of soil microbial biomass – Part 2: Fumigation extraction method. |
| | (14) Malkomes, H.-P. (1986). Einfluß von Glukosemenge auf die Reaktion der Kurzzeit-Atmung im Boden Gegenüber Pflanzenschutzmitteln, Dargestellt am Beispiel eines Herbizide. (Influence of the Amount of Glucose Added to the Soil on the Effect of Pesticides in Short-Term Respiration, using a Herbicide as an Example). Nachrichtenbl. Deut. Pflanzenschutzd., Braunschweig, 38: 113–120. |
| | (15) Litchfield, J.T. and Wilcoxon, F. (1949). A simplified method of evaluating dose-effect experiments. Jour. Pharmacol. and Exper. Ther., 96, 99–113. |
| | (16) Finney, D.J. (1971). Probit Analysis. 3rd ed., Cambridge, London and New-York. |
| | (17) Finney D.J. (1978). Statistical Methods in biological Assay. Griffin, Weycombe, UK. |
| | C.23 AEROBNA IN ANAEROBNA TRANSFORMACIJA V TLEH |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta preskusna metoda ustreza metodi OECD TG 307 (2002). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Ta preskusna metoda temelji na obstoječih smernicah (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9). Metoda, opisana v tej preskusni metodi, je namenjena ovrednotenju aerobne in anaerobne transformacije kemikalij v tleh. Izvajajo se poskusi za določitev (i) stopnje transformacije preskusne snovi in (ii) narave in stopenj nastajanja in zmanjševanja produktov transformacije, ki so jim lahko izpostavljene rastline in talni organizmi. Take študije so potrebne za kemikalije, ki se nanašajo neposredno na tla ali za katere je verjetno, da bodo prišle v talno okolje. Rezultati teh laboratorijskih študij se lahko uporabijo tudi za razvoj protokolov vzorčenja in analiz za študije na sorodnih področjih. |
| | Aerobne in anaerobne študije z eno vrsto tal navadno zadoščajo za ovrednotenje poti transformacije (8) (10) (11). Stopnje transformacije je treba določiti še v najmanj treh dodatnih vzorcih tal (8) (10). |
| | Na delavnici OECD o izbiri tal/usedline, ki je bila leta 1995 v Belgiratu v Italiji (10), je bil dosežen dogovor predvsem o številu in vrstah tal za uporabo v tem preskusu. Vrste preskušanih tal morajo biti reprezentativne za okoljske razmere, kjer se bo pojavila uporaba ali sproščanje. Na primer kemikalije, ki se lahko sproščajo v subtropskih do tropskih podnebjih, se morajo preskušati na ferasolih ali nitosolih (sistem FAO). Na delavnici so bila dana tudi priporočila v zvezi z odvzemanjem, obravnavanjem in shranjevanjem vzorcev tal, ki temeljijo na napotkih ISO (15). Ta metoda obravnava tudi uporabo riževih (namakalnih, poplavljenih) tal. |
| | 1.2 OPREDELITVE POJMOV |
| | Preskusna snov: katera koli snov, bodisi osnovna zmes ali ustrezni produkti transformacije. |
| | Produkti transformacije: vse snovi, ki so posledica biotskih ali abiotskih transformacijskih reakcij preskusne snovi, vključno s CO>2 in produkti, ki so v vezanih ostankih. |
| | Vezani ostanki:"vezani ostanki" predstavljajo spojine v tleh, rastlinske ali živalske, ki vztrajajo v matrici v obliki osnovne snovi ali njenega(ih) metabolita(ov)/produktov transformacije po ekstrakciji. Ekstrakcijska metoda ne sme bistveno spremeniti samih spojin ali strukture matrice. Narava vezi se lahko delno pojasni z ekstrakcijskimi metodami, ki spreminjajo matrico, in z visoko razvitimi analitskimi tehnikami. Do sedaj so bile, na primer, na ta način odkrite kovalentne ionske in sorptivne vezi. Na splošno nastajanje vezanih ostankov znatno zmanjša biološko dostopnost in biološko razpoložljivost (12) [prikrojeno po IUPAC-u 1984 (13)]. |
| | Aerobna transformacija: reakcije, ki se pojavljajo v navzočnosti molekularnega kisika (14). |
| | Anaerobna transformacija: reakcije, ki se pojavljajo v odsotnosti molekularnega kisika (14). |
| | Tla: so mešanica mineralnih in organskih kemičnih sestavin, slednje vsebujejo spojine z visoko vsebnostjo ogljika in dušika in z veliko molsko maso, ki jih poživljajo majhni (večinoma mikro-) organizmi. Tla se lahko obdelujejo v dveh stanjih: |
| | (a) v neoviranem, kakor so se razvila s časom, z značilnimi plastmi različnih vrst tal; |
| | (b) oviranem, kakor jih navadno najdemo na ornih zemljiščih ali kakor se pojavljajo, kadar se vzorci jemljejo s kopanjem in se uporablja ta preskusna metoda (14). |
| | Mineralizacija: je popolna razgradnja organske spojine v CO2 in H2O v aerobnih razmerah in CH4, CO2 in H2O v anaerobnih razmerah. V smislu te preskusne metode, kjer se uporablja spojina z oznako 14C, mineralizacija pomeni obsežno razgradnjo, v kateri se označen ogljikov atom oksidira s sproščanjem ustrezne količine 14CO2 (14). |
| | Razpolovna doba: t0,5 je čas, potreben za 50 %-no transformacijo preskusne snovi, kadar lahko transformacijo opišemo kot kinetiko prvega reda; razpolovna doba ni odvisna od koncentracije. |
| | Čas razgradnje DT50: je čas, v katerem se koncentracija preskusne snovi zmanjša za 50 %; je drugačen od razpolovne dobe t0,5, ko transformacija ne sledi kinetiki prvega reda. |
| | Čas razgradnje DT75: je čas, v katerem se koncentracija preskusne snovi zmanjša za 75 %. |
| | Čas razgradnje DT90: je čas, v katerem se koncentracija preskusne snovi zmanjša za 90 %. |
| | 1.3 REFERENČNE SNOVI |
| | Referenčne snovi se uporabljajo za opis in/ali določitev produktov transformacije s spektroskopsko in kromatografsko metodo. |
| | 1.4 UPORABNOST PRESKUSA |
| | Metoda se uporablja za vse kemijske snovi (brez oznake ali z radioaktivno oznako), za katere je na voljo dovolj natančna in občutljiva analitska metoda. Uporablja se za rahlo hlapne, nehlapne, vodotopne ali v vodi netopne spojine. Preskus naj se ne uporablja za kemikalije v tleh, ki so lahko hlapne (npr. fumiganti, organska topila) in se tako ne morejo zadrževati v tleh za poskusne pogoje tega preskusa. |
| | 1.5 PODATKI O PRESKUSNI SNOVI |
| | Za merjenje stopnje transformacije se lahko uporabi neoznačena ali označena preskusna snov. Označeni material je potreben za preučevanje poti transformacije in za vzpostavitev masne bilance. Priporoča se oznaka 14C, vendar je lahko koristna tudi uporaba drugih izotopov, na primer 13C, 15N, 3H, 32P. Če je to mogoče, naj se oznaka namesti na najstabilnejši del(e) molekule [1]. Čistost preskusne snovi naj bo vsaj 95 %. |
| | Pred izvajanjem preskusa o aerobni in anaerobni transformaciji v tleh, naj bodo na voljo naslednje informacije o preskusni snovi: |
| | (a) topnost v vodi (metoda A.6); |
| | (b) topnost v organskih topilih; |
| | (c) tlak pare (metoda A.4) in Henryjeva konstanta; |
| | (d) porazdelitveni koeficient n-oktanol/voda (metoda A.8); |
| | (e) kemijska stabilnost v temi (hidroliza) (metoda C.7); |
| | (f) pKa, če je molekula nagnjena k dodajanju ali odvzemanju protonov [Smernica OECD 112 ] (16). |
| | Druge uporabne informacije lahko vključujejo podatke o toksičnosti preskusne snovi na talne mikroorganizme [metodi preskušanja C.21 in C.22] (16). |
| | Na voljo morajo biti analitske metode (vključno z metodami ekstrakcije in očiščenja) za količinsko opredelitev in določitev preskusne snovi in njenih produktov transformacije. |
| | 1.6 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Vzorci tal se tretirajo s preskusno snovjo in inkubirajo v temi v bučkah biometričnega tipa ali v pretočnih sistemih v nadzorovanih laboratorijskih razmerah (pri stalni temperaturi in vlažnosti tal). Po ustreznih časovnih presledkih se vzorci tal ekstrahirajo in analizirajo se osnovna snov in produkti transformacije. Tudi hlapni produkti se zberejo za analizo z ustreznimi absorpcijskimi pripomočki. Z uporabo materiala z oznako 14C se lahko izmerijo različne stopnje mineralizacije preskusne snovi z zajemanjem sproščenega 14CO2 in ugotovi se masna bilanca, vključno z nastajanjem talnih vezanih ostankov. |
| | 1.7 MERILA KAKOVOSTI |
| | 1.7.1 Izkoristek |
| | Ekstrakcija in analiza najmanj dvojnih vzorcev tal takoj po dodajanju preskusne snovi da prvi prikaz ponovljivosti analitske metode in izenačenosti postopka uporabe za preskusno snov. Izkoristki poznejših stopenj poskusov so podani z ustreznimi masnimi bilancami. Izkoristki so v razponu od 90 % do 110 % pri označenih kemikalijah (8) in od 70 % do 110 % pri neoznačenih kemikalijah (3). |
| | 1.7.2 Ponovljivost in občutljivost analitske metode |
| | Ponovljivost analitske metode (brez začetne učinkovitosti ekstrakcije) za količinsko določitev preskusne snovi in proizvodov transformacije se lahko preveri z dvojno analizo istega ekstrakta tal, ki je inkubiran dovolj dolgo, da nastajajo proizvodi transformacije. |
| | Meja detekcije analitske metode za preskusno snov in za proizvode transformacije mora biti najmanj 0,01 mg·kg−1 tal (kot preskusne snovi) ali 1 % uporabljenega odmerka, kar je manj. Opredeliti je treba tudi mejo količinske opredelitve. |
| | 1.7.3 Točnost podatkov transformacije |
| | Regresijska analiza koncentracij preskusne snovi v funkciji časa daje ustrezne informacije o zanesljivosti krivulje transformacije in omogoča izračun intervala zaupanja za razpolovne dobe (v primeru psevdo kinetike prvega reda) ali vrednosti DT50 in, če je primerno, vrednosti DT75 in DT90. |
| | 1.8 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.8.1 Oprema in kemijski reagenti |
| | Inkubacijski sistemi so sestavljeni iz statičnih zaprtih sistemov ali ustreznih pretočnih sistemov (7) (17). Primera ustrezne pretočne naprave za inkubacijo tal in bučke biometričnega tipa sta prikazana na slikah 1 in 2. Obe vrsti inkubacijskih sistemov imata prednosti in omejitve (7) (17). |
| | Potrebna je standardna laboratorijska oprema in zlasti naslednje: |
| | - instrumenti za analizo, na primer oprema GLC, HPLC, TLC, vključno z ustreznimi sistemi detekcije za analiziranje radioaktivno označenih ali neoznačenih snovi ali inverzno metodo izotopskega redčenja, |
| | - instrumenti za prepoznavanje (npr. MS, GC-MS, HPLC-MS, NMR itd.), |
| | - tekočinski scintilacijski števec, |
| | - oksidacijsko sredstvo za izgorevanje radioaktivnega materiala, |
| | - centrifuga, |
| | - naprave za ekstrakcijo (na primer centrifugirne epruvete za hladno ekstrakcijo in naprava Soxhlet za kontinuirano ekstrakcijo pod refluksom), |
| | - instrumenti za koncentriranje raztopin in ekstraktov (npr. rotacijski evaporator), |
| | - vodna kopel, |
| | - mehanska naprava za mešanje (npr. stroj za gnetenje, rotacijski mešalnik). |
| | Uporabljeni kemični reagenti vključujejo na primer: |
| | - NaOH, analitsko čist, 2 mol · dm3 ali drugo ustrezno bazo (npr. KOH, etanolamin), |
| | - H2SO4, analitsko čisto, 0,05 mol · dm3, |
| | - etilen glikol, analitsko čist, |
| | - trdne absorpcijske materiale, na primer natrijevo sol in poliuretanske čepe, |
| | - organska topila, analitsko čista, na primer aceton, metanol itd., |
| | - scintilacijsko tekočino. |
| | 1.8.2 Aplikacija preskusne snovi |
| | Za dodajanje in porazdelitev v tla se lahko preskusna snov raztopi v vodi (deionizirani ali destilirani) ali po potrebi v manjši količini acetona ali drugega organskega topila (6), v katerem je preskusna snov dovolj topna in stabilna. Vendar količina izbranega topila ne sme znatno vlivati na mikrobno dejavnost v tleh (glej oddelke 1.5 in 1.9.2–1.9.3.) Uporabi topil, ki zavirajo mikrobno dejavnost, na primer kloroformu, diklorometanu in drugim halogeniranim topilom, se je treba izogibati. |
| | Preskusna snov se lahko doda tudi kot trdna, npr. pomešana v kremenov pesek (6) ali v majhen podvzorec preskusnih tal, ki je bil posušen na zraku in steriliziran. Če se preskusna snov doda z uporabo topila, je treba topilu omogočiti, da izhlapi, preden se v originalni nesterilni vzorec tal doda primešan podvzorec. |
| | Pri splošnih kemikalijah, katerih glavna pot vstopa v tla je preko odpadnega blata/kmetijskega nanosa, je treba preskusno snov najprej dodati v blato, ki se potem uvede v vzorec tal (glej oddelka 1.9.2 in 1.9.3). |
| | Ne priporoča se rutinska uporaba formuliranih pripravkov. Vendar je uporaba formuliranega materiala lahko ustrezna rešitev npr. pri slabo topnih preskusnih snoveh. |
| | 1.8.3 Tla |
| | 1.8.3.1 Izbira tal |
| | Za določitev poti transformacije se lahko uporabijo reprezentativna tla; priporoča se peščena ilovica ali muljasta ilovica ali ilovica ali ilovnati pesek [v skladu s klasifikacijo FAO in USDA (18)] s pH 5,5–8,0, vsebnostjo organskega ogljika 0,5–2,5 % in mikrobno biomaso najmanj 1 % skupnega organskega ogljika (10). |
| | Za preučevanje stopnje transformacije je treba uporabiti najmanj tri dodatne vzorce tal, ki predstavljajo izbor ustreznih tal. Tla se morajo razlikovati po vsebnosti organskega ogljika, pH, vsebnosti gline in mikrobne biomase (10). |
| | Vse vrste tal je treba opredeliti vsaj glede teksture (% peska, % mulja, % gline) [v skladu s klasifikacijo FAO in USDA (18)], pH, kationske izmenjalne kapacitete, organskega ogljika, gostote v razsutem stanju, značilnosti zadrževanja vode [2] in mikrobne biomase (le za aerobne študije). Dodatne informacije o lastnostih tal so lahko koristne pri razlagi rezultatov. Za določitev lastnosti tal se lahko uporabijo metode, priporočene v sklicih (19) (20) (21) (22) (23). Mikrobno biomaso je treba določiti z uporabo metode respiracije, ki jo povzroči substrat (25) (26), ali z alternativnimi metodami (20). |
| | 1.8.3.2 Odvzemanje, obravnavanje in shranjevanje tal |
| | Na voljo morajo biti podrobne informacije o preteklosti mesta vzorčenja, kjer se odvzemajo tla za preskus. Podrobnosti vključujejo točno lokacijo, pokritost z vegetacijo, uporabo kemikalij, uporabo organskih in anorganskih gnojil, dodatke bioloških materialov ali drugo kontaminacijo. Če so bila tla tretirana s preskusno snovjo ali analognimi strukturami, se ne uporabljajo v študijah transformacije (10) (15). |
| | Tla je treba na sveže odvzeti na terenu (iz horizonta A ali zgornjega 20 cm sloja) z vsebnostjo vode, ki omogoča presejanje. Pri tleh, ki niso iz riževih polj, se je treba izogibati vzorčenju med ali takoj po dolgih obdobjih (> 30 dni) suše, zmrzali ali poplave (14). Vzorce je treba prepeljati na način, ki čim bolj zmanjša spremembe v vsebnosti vode v tleh in jih čim bolj zadrževati v temi, brez dostopa do zraka. V ta namen je na splošno primerna ohlapno zavezana polietilenska vreča. |
| | Tla se obdelajo čimprej po vzorčenju. Vegetacijo, večje živalske vrste in kamne v tleh je treba odstraniti, preden se tla presujejo skozi 2 mm sito, ki odstrani manjše kamne, živalske vrste in rastlinske odpadke. Obsežnemu sušenju in drobljenju tal pred sejanjem se je treba izogibati (15). |
| | Kadar je pozimi jemanje vzorcev na terenu težko (tla zamrznjena ali prekrita s plastmi snega), se smejo vzeti iz serije tal, shranjenih v topli gredi pod rastlinsko prevleko (npr. travo ali mešanico trave in detelje). Močno se priporočajo študije s tlemi, ki so na sveže odvzeta na terenu, če pa je treba odvzeta in obdelana tla pred začetkom študije shraniti, je potrebno skladiščenje v ustreznih razmerah in samo za omejen čas (4 ± 2 °C za največ tri mesece), da se ohrani mikrobna dejavnost [3]. Podrobna navodila o odvzemanju, obravnavanju in shranjevanju tal, ki se uporabljajo za biotransformacijske poskuse, so v (8) (10) (15) (26) (27). |
| | Preden se obdelana tla uporabijo za ta preskus, jih je treba predhodno inkubirati, da se omogoči kaljenje in odstranitev semen in ponovna vzpostavitev ravnovesja mikrobne presnove po spremembi razmer med vzorčenjem ali shranjevanjem na inkubacijske razmere. Na splošno zadošča obdobje predhodne inkubacije od 2 do 28 dni, ki približa pogoje temperature in vlage dejanskemu preskusu (15). Skupen čas shranjevanja in predhodne inkubacije ne sme presegati treh mesecev. |
| | 1.9 IZVEDBA PRESKUSA |
| | 1.9.1 Preskusni pogoji |
| | 1.9.1.1 Preskusna temperatura |
| | V celotnem obdobju preskusa morajo biti tla inkubirana v temi pri stalni temperaturi, ki je reprezentativna za podnebne razmere, kjer bo potekala uporaba ali sproščanje. Temperatura 20 ± 2 °C se priporoča za vse preskusne snovi, ki lahko pridejo v tla v zmernih podnebjih. Temperaturo je treba spremljati. |
| | Za kemikalije, ki se uporabljajo ali sproščajo v hladnejših podjebjih (npr. v severnih državah v jesenskih/zimskih obdobjih), je treba inkubirati dodatne vzorce tal, vendar pri nižji temperaturi (npr. 10 ± 2 °C). |
| | 1.9.1.2 Vsebnost vlage |
| | Za preskuse transformacije v aerobnih razmerah je treba prilagoditi vsebnost vlage [4] in jo vzdrževati pri pF med 2,0 in 2,5 (3). Vsebnost vlage v tleh je izražena kot masa vode na maso suhih tal in se mora redno nadzorovati (npr. v 2-tedenskih razmikih) s tehtanjem inkubacijskih bučk in izgubo vode nadomestiti z dodajanjem vode (najbolje s sterilno filtrirano vodo iz pipe). Paziti je treba, da se preprečijo ali čim bolj zmanjšajo izgube preskusne snovi in/ali produktov transformacije z izhlapevanjem in/ali fotorazgradnjo (če obstaja) med dodajanjem vlage. |
| | Za preskuse transformacije v razmerah anaerobnih in riževih tal se tla prepojijo z vodo s poplavljanjem. |
| | 1.9.1.3 Aerobne inkubacijske razmere |
| | V pretočnih sistemih se aerobne razmere ohranjajo s prekinjenim splakovanjem ali z neprekinjenim prezračevanjem z navlaženim zrakom. V biometričnih bučkah se izmenjava zraka ohranja z difuzijo. |
| | 1.9.1.4 Sterilne aerobne razmere |
| | Da bi dobili informacije o ustreznosti abiotske transformacije preskusne snovi, se lahko vzorci tal sterilizirajo (glede sterilizacijskih metod glej sklica 16 in 29), tretirajo s sterilno preskusno snovjo (npr. dodatek raztopine skozi sterilni filter) in prezračijo z navlaženim sterilnim zrakom, kot je opisano v oddelku 1.9.1.3. Pri riževih tleh je treba tla in vodo sterilizirati in izvesti inkubacijo, kot je opisano v oddelku 1.9.1.6. |
| | 1.9.1.5 Anaerobne inkubacijske razmere |
| | Za vzpostavitev in ohranjanje anaerobnih razmer se tla, ki so tretirana s preskusno snovjo in inkubirana v aerobnih razmerah za 30 dni ali eno razpolovno dobo ali DT50 (kar je krajše), potem namočijo z vodo (1–3 cm plast vode), inkubacijski sistem pa se spere z inertnim plinom (npr. dušikom ali argonom) [5]. Preskusni sistem mora omogočati meritve, kot na primer pH, koncentracijo kisika in redoks potenciala, ter vključevati naprave za zajemanje hlapnih produktov. Biometrični tip sistema mora biti zaprt, da se izogne vstopu zraka z difuzijo. |
| | 1.9.1.6 Razmere inkubacije na riževih poljih |
| | Za preučevanje transformacije na riževih tleh se tla poplavijo s približno 1–5 centimetrsko plastjo vode, preskusna snov pa se nanese na vodno fazo (9). Priporočena globina tal je najmanj 5 cm. Sistem se prezračuje z zrakom, kakor v aerobnih razmerah, spremljati in poročati pa je treba o pH, koncentraciji kisika in redoks potencialu vodne plasti. Pred začetkom študij transformacije je potrebno najmanj dvotedensko obdobje predhodne inkubacije (glej oddelek 1.8.3.2). |
| | 1.9.1.7 Trajanje preskusa |
| | Stopnja in pot študije normalno ne sme presegati 120 dni [6] (3) (6) (8), ker se po tem pričakuje postopno upadanje mikrobne dejavnosti v tleh v umetnem laboratorijskem sistemu, izoliranem od naravnega dopolnjevanja. Kadar je treba opredeliti zmanjševanje preskusne snovi in nastajanje ali zmanjševanje glavnih produktov transformacije, se lahko študije nadaljujejo v daljših obdobjih (npr. 6 ali 12 mesecev) (8). Daljša inkubacijska obdobja je treba utemeljiti v poročilu o preskusu in priložiti meritve biomase na koncu teh obdobij in med njimi. |
| | 1.9.2 Izvajanje preskusa |
| | V vsako inkubacijsko bučko (glej sliki 1 in 2 v Prilogi 3) se vloži približno 50 do 200 g tal (na osnovi suhe teže) in tla, tretirana s preskusno snovjo po eni od metod, opisanih v oddelku 1.8.2. Če se za aplikacijo preskusne snovi uporabijo organska topila, jih je treba odstraniti iz tal z izhlapevanjem. Potem se tla temeljito premešajo z lopatico in/ali stresanjem bučk. Če se študija izvaja v razmerah riževega polja, je treba tla in vodo po aplikaciji preskusne snovi temeljito premešati. Majhne alikvote (npr. 1 g) tretiranih tal je treba analizirati glede preskusne snovi, da se preveri enotna porazdelitev. Za alternativne metode glej spodaj. |
| | Stopnja tretiranja naj ustreza največji stopnji aplikacije izdelka za zaščito pridelka, priporočeni v navodilih za uporabo in enotni vključitvi v ustrezno globino polja (npr. 10 cm vrhnje plasti tal [7] ). Na primer za kemikalije, uporabljene na listju ali tleh brez vključitve, je ustrezna globina za izračun, koliko kemikalije bi bilo treba dodati v vsako bučko, 2,5 cm. Za kemikalije, vključene v tla, je ustrezna globina vključitve opredeljena v navodilih za uporabo. Za splošne kemikalije se stopnja uporabe oceni na podlagi najustreznejše poti vstopa, na primer, če je glavna pot vstopa v tla preko odpadnega blata, se kemikalija dozira v blato s koncentracijo, ki odraža pričakovano koncentracijo blata in mora količina blata, dodanega v tla, odražati normalno nalaganje blata na kmetijska tla. Če ta koncentracija ni dovolj visoka za ugotavljanje produktov transformacije, lahko pomagajo ločeni vzorci tal, ki vsebujejo višje stopnje, vendar se je treba izogibati pretiranim stopnjam, ki vplivajo na mikrobne funkcije tal (glej oddelka 1.5 in 1.8.2). |
| | Namesto tega se večja serija (npr. 1 do 2 kg) tal lahko tretira s preskusno snovjo, pazljivo primešano v ustreznem mešalnem stroju in potem v manjših 50 do 200 gramskih delih prenešeno v inkubacijske bučke (na primer z uporabo razdeljenih vzorcev). Manjše alikvote (npr. 1 g) tretirane serije tal je treba analizirati glede preskusne snovi, da se preveri enotna porazdelitev. Tak postopek se priporoča, ker omogoča enotnejšo porazdelitev preskusne snovi v tla. |
| | Tudi netretirani vzorci tal se inkubirajo v enakih razmerah (aerobnih) kot vzorci, tretirani s preskusno snovjo. Ti vzorci se uporabijo za meritve biomase na koncu študij in med njimi. |
| | Kadar se preskusna snov uporabi na tleh, raztopljenih z organskim topilom ali topili, se vzorci tal, tretirani z enako količino topil(a), inkubirajo v enakih razmerah (aerobnih) kakor vzorci, tretirani s preskusno snovjo. Ti vzorci se uporabljajo za začetne meritve biomase na koncu študij in med njimi za preverjanje učinkov topil(a) na mikrobno biomaso. |
| | Bučke, ki vsebujejo tretirana tla, so bodisi priložene pretočnemu sistemu, opisanemu v sliki 1, ali zaprte z absorpcijsko kolono, prikazano v sliki 2 (glej Prilogo 3). |
| | 1.9.3 Vzorčenje in meritve |
| | Dvojne inkubacijske bučke se odstranijo v ustreznih časovnih razmikih in vzorci tal se ekstrahirajo z ustreznimi topili različne polarnosti in analizirajo glede preskusne snovi in/ali produktov transformacije. Dobro načrtovana študija vključuje dovolj bučk, tako da se pri vsakem vzorčenju žrtvujeta dve bučki. Tudi absorpijske raztopine ali trdni absorpcijski materiali se odstranijo v različnih časovnih razmikih (v prvem mesecu v 7-dnevnih razmikih in po prvem mesecu 17-dnevnih razmikih) med in na koncu inkubacije vsakega vzorca tal in analizirajo glede hlapnih produktov. Poleg vzorca tal, vzetega neposredno po uporabi (vzorec dneva 0), se vključi najmanj 5 dodatnih vzorčnih točk. Časovne razmike je treba izbrati na tak način, da je mogoče vzpostaviti vzorec zmanjševanja preskusne snovi in vzorce nastajanja in zmanjševanja produktov transformacije (npr. 0, 1, 3, 7 dni; 2, 3 tedne; 1, 2, 3 mesece itd.). |
| | Pri uporabi preskusne snovi z oznako 14C, se količinsko določi neizločljiva radioaktivnost z izgorevanjem in izračuna masna bilanca za vsak vzorčni interval. |
| | V primeru anaerobne in riževe inkubacije se talna in vodna faza skupaj analizirata glede preskusne snovi in produktov transformacije ali ločeno s filtracijo ali centrifugitanjem pred ekstrakcijo in analizo. |
| | 1.9.4 Neobvezni preskusi |
| | Aerobne, nesterilne študije pri dodatnih temperaturah in vlagi tal so lahko koristne pri oceni vpliva temperature in vlage tal na stopnje transformacije preskusne snovi in/ali produktov njene transformacije v tleh. |
| | Nadaljnja opredelitev neizločljive radioaktivnosti se lahko poskuša recimo z uporabo izjemno kritične ekstrakcije tekočin. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.1 OBDELAVA REZULTATOV |
| | Količine preskusne snovi, produktov transformacije, hlapnih (samo v %) in neizločljivih snovi se podajo kot % uporabljenih začetnih koncentracij in, kadar je primerno, kot mg·kg−1 tal (na podlagi suhe teže tal) za vsak interval vzorčenja. Masno bilanco je treba podati v odstotku uporabljene začetne koncentracije za vsak interval vzorčenja. Grafična predstavitev koncentracij preskusne snovi glede na čas omogoča oceno njene razpolovne dobe transformacije ali DT50. Treba je prepoznati glavne produkte transformacije in zarisati tudi njihove koncentracije glede na čas, da se prikažejo stopnje njihovega nastajanja in zmanjševanja. Glavni produkt transformacije je vsak produkt, ki predstavlja ≥ 10 % uporabljenega odmerka v katerem koli času med študijo. |
| | Zajeti hlapni produkti dajejo neko navedbo hlapnega potenciala preskusne snovi in njenih produktov transformacije iz tal. |
| | Natančnejše določitve razpolovnih dob ali vrednosti DT50 in po potrebi DT75 in vrednosti DT90 je treba pridobiti z uporabo ustreznih izračunov kinetičnih modelov. Razpolovna doba in vrednosti DT50 se sporočajo skupaj z opisom uporabljenega modela, vrstnega reda kinetike in določitve koeficienta (r2). Kinetika prvega reda ima prednost, razen če je r2 < 0,7. Po potrebi se izračuni uporabijo tudi za glavne produkte transformacije. Primeri ustreznih modelov so opisani v sklicih od 31 do 35. |
| | V primeru stopenjske študije, izvedene pri različnih temperaturah, so transformacijske stopnje opisane kot funkcija temperature v temperaturnem razponu pri poskusu z uporabo Arrheniusovega zakona v formuli: |
| | k = |
| | ali |
| | lnk = |
| | B |
| | T |
| | , |
| | kjer sta ln A in B regresijski konstanti iz preseka in nagiba najboljše linije, nastale iz linearno padajoče ln k do 1/T, kjer je k konstantna stopnja pri temperaturi T in je T temperatura v Kelvinu. Paziti je treba na omejeni razpon temperature, v katerem je Arreheniusov zakon veljaven v primeru, če transformacijo ureja mikrobna dejavnost. |
| | 2.2 VREDNOTENJE IN RAZLAGA REZULTATOV |
| | Čeprav se študije izvajajo v umetnem laboratorijskem sistemu, rezulati omogočajo ocene stopnje transformacije preskusne snovi in tudi stopnje nastajanja in zmanjševanja produktov transformacije v terenskih razmerah (36) (37). |
| | Študija poti transformacije preskusne snovi zagotavlja informacije o poteh, po katerih se uporabljena snov strukturno spremeni v tleh s kemičnimi in mikrobnimi reakcijami. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo o preskusu mora vključevati: |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - splošno ime, kemijsko ime, številko po CAS, strukturno formulo (z navedbo položaja oznak(e), kadar se uporabi radioaktivno označeni material) in ustrezne fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti (glej oddelek 1.5), |
| | - čistost (nečistoče) preskusne snovi, |
| | - radiokemijsko čistost označene kemikalije in specifično dejavnost (kjer je primerno). |
| | Referenčne snovi: |
| | - kemijsko ime in strukturo referenčnih snovi, uporabljenih za opredelitev in/ali določitev produktov transformacije. |
| | Preskusna tla: |
| | - podrobnosti o mestu odvzema, |
| | - datum in postopek vzorčenja tal, |
| | - lastnosti tal, kot so pH, vsebnost organskega ogljika, teksturo (% peska, % mulja, % gline), kationsko izmenjalno kapaciteto, gostoto v razsutem stanju, značilnost zadrževanja vode in mikrobno biomaso, |
| | - dolžino shranjevanja tal in razmere shranjevanja (če se shranjuje). |
| | Preskusni pogoji: |
| | - datume izvajanja študij, |
| | - količino uporabljene preskusne snovi, |
| | - uporabljena topila in metodo aplikacije preskusne snovi, |
| | - začetno težo tretiranih tal in vzorcev, odvzetih za analizo v vsakem časovnem obdobju, |
| | - opis uporabljenega sistema inkubacije, |
| | - stopnje pretoka zraka (le za pretočne sisteme), |
| | - temperaturo poskusnega okolja, |
| | - vsebnost vlage v tleh med inkubacijo, |
| | - mikrobno biomaso na začetku, med potekom in na koncu aerobnih študij, |
| | - pH, koncentracijo kisika in redoks potenciala na začetku, med potekom in na koncu študij anaerobnih in riževih tal, |
| | - metodo(e) ekstrakcije, |
| | - metode za količinsko opredelitev in določitev preskusne snovi in glavnih produktov transformacije v tleh in absorpcijskih materialih, |
| | - število ponovitev in število kontrol. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - rezultat določitve mikrobne dejavnosti, |
| | - ponovljivost in občutljivost uporabljenih analitskih metod, |
| | - stopnje izkoristka (vrednosti v % za veljavno študijo so podane v oddelku 1.7.1); |
| | - tabele rezultatov, izraženih kot % apliciranega začetnega odmerka in, kadar je primerno, kot mg·kg−1 tal (na osnovi suhe teže), |
| | - masno bilanco med potekom in na koncu študij, |
| | - opredelitev neizločljive (vezane) radioaktivnosti ali ostankov v tleh, |
| | - količinsko opredelitev sproščenega CO2 in drugih hlapnih spojin, |
| | - prikaze koncentracij tal glede na čas za preskusno snov in, kadar je primerno, za glavne produkte transformacije, |
| | - razpolovno dobo ali DT50, DT75 in DT90 za preskusno snov in, kadar je primerno, za glavne produkte transformacije vključno z intervalom zaupanja, |
| | - oceno stopnje abiotske razgradnje v sterilnih razmerah, |
| | - oceno kinetike transformacije za preskusno snov in, kadar je primerno, za glavne produkte transformacije, |
| | - predlagane poti transformacije, kadar je primerno, |
| | - razpravo in razlago rezultatov, |
| | - surove podatke (to je vzorčne kromatograme, vzorčne izračune stopenj transformacije in sredstev, uporabljenih za določitev produktov transformacije). |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) US-Environmental Protection Agency (1982). Pesticide Assessment Guidelines, Subdivision N. Chemistry: Environmental Fate. |
| | (2) Agriculture Canada (1987). Environmental Chemistry and Fate. Guidelines for registration of pesticides in Canada. |
| | (3) Evropska Unija (EU) (1995). Direktiva Komisije 95/36/ES z dne 14. julija 1995 o spremembi Direktive Sveta 91/414/EGS o dajanju fitofarmacevtskih sredstev v promet. Priloga II, Del A in Priloga III, Del A: Vpliv in porazdelitev v okolju. |
| | (4) Dutch Commission for Registration of Pesticides (1995). Application for registration of a pesticide. Section G: Behaviour of the product and its metabolites in soil, water and air. |
| | (5) BBA (1986). Richtlinie für die amtliche Prüfung von Pflanzenschutzmitteln, Teil IV, 4-1. Verbleib von Pflanzenschutzmitteln im Boden – Abbau, Umwandlung und Metabolismus. |
| | (6) ISO/DIS 11266-1 (1994). Soil Quality – Guidance on laboratory tests for biodegradation of organic chemicals in soil – Part 1: Aerobic conditions. |
| | (7) ISO 14239 (1997). Soil Quality – Laboratory incubation systems for measuring the mineralization of organic chemicals in soil under aerobic conditions. |
| | (8) SETAC (1995). Procedures for Assessing the Environmental Fate and Ecotoxicity of Pesticides. Mark R. Lynch, Ed. |
| | (9) MAFF – Japan 2000 – Draft Guidelines for transformation studies of pesticides in soil – Aerobic metabolism study in soil under paddy field conditions (flooded). |
| | (10) OECD (1995). Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Selection of Soils/Sediments. Belgirate, Italy, 18–20 January 1995. |
| | (11) Guth, J.A. (1980). The study of transformations. In Interactions between Herbicides and the Soil (R.J. Hance, Ed.), Academic Press, 123–157. |
| | (12) DFG: Pesticide Bound Residues in Soil. Wiley – VCH (1998). |
| | (13) T.R. Roberts: Non-extractable pesticide residue in soils and plants. Pure Appl. Chem. 56, 945–956 (IUPAC 1984). |
| | (14) OECD Test Guideline 304 A: Inherent Biodegradability in Soil (adopted 12 May 1981). |
| | (15) ISO 10381-6 (1993). Soil Quality – Sampling – Part 6: Guidance on the collection, handling and storage of soil for the assessment of aerobic microbial processes in the laboratory. |
| | (16) Priloga V k Dir. 67/548/EGS. |
| | (17) Guth, J.A. (1981). Experimental approaches to studying the fate of pesticides in soil. In Progress in Pesticide Biochemistry. D.H. Hutson, T.R. Roberts, Eds. J. Wiley & Sons. Vol 1, 85–114. |
| | (18) Soil Texture Classification (US and FAO systems): Weed Science, 33, Suppl. 1 (1985) and Soil Sci. Soc. Amer. Proc. 26:305 (1962). |
| | (19) Methods of Soil Analysis (1986). Part 1, Physical and Mineralogical Methods. A. Klute, Ed.) Agronomy Series No 9, 2nd Edition. |
| | (20) Methods of Soil Analysis (1982). Part 2, Chemical and Microbiological Properties. A.L. Page, R.H. Miller and D.R. Kelney, Eds. Agronomy Series No 9, 2nd Edition. |
| | (21) ISO Standard Compendium Environment (1994). Soil Quality – General aspects; chemical and physical methods of analysis; biological methods of analysis. First Edition. |
| | (22) Mückenhausen, E. (1975). Die Bodenkunde und ihre geologischen, geomorphologischen, mineralogischen und petrologischen Grundlagen. DLG-Verlag, Frankfurt, Main. |
| | (23) Scheffer, F., Schachtschabel, P. (1975). Lehrbuch der Bodenkunde. F. Enke Verlag, Stuttgart. |
| | (24) Anderson, J.P.E., Domsch, K.H. (1978) A physiological method for the quantitative measurement of microbial biomass in soils. Soil Biol. Biochem. 10, 215–221. |
| | (25) ISO 14240-1 and 2 (1997). Soil Quality – Determination of soil microbial biomass – Part 1: Substrate-induced respiration method. Del 2 fumigation-extraction method. |
| | (26) Anderson, J.P.E. (1987). Handling and storage of soils for pesticide experiments. In Pesticide Effects on Soil Microflora. L. Somerville, M.P. Greaves, Eds. Taylor & Francis, 45–60. |
| | (27) Kato, Yasuhiro. (1998). Mechanism of pesticide transformation in the environment: Aerobic and biotransformation of pesticides in aqueous environment. Proceedings of the 16th Symposium on Environmental Science of Pesticide, 105–120. |
| | (28) Keuken O., Anderson J.P.E. (1996). Influence of storage on biochemical processes in soil. In Pesticides, Soil Microbiology and Soil Quality, 59–63 (SETAC-Europe). |
| | (29) Stenberg B., Johansson M., Pell M., Sjödahl-Svensson K., Stenström J., Torstensson L. (1996). Effect of freeze and cold storage of soil on microbial activities and biomass. In Pesticides, Soil Microbiology and Soil Quality, 68–69 (SETAC-Europe). |
| | (30) Gennari, M., Negre, M., Ambrosoli, R. (1987). Effects of ethylene oxide on soil microbial content and some chemical characteristics. Plant and Soil 102, 197–200. |
| | (31) Anderson, J.P.E. (1975). Einfluss von Temperatur und Feuchte auf Verdampfung, Abbau und Festlegung von Diallat im Boden. Z. PflKrankh Pflschutz, Sonderheft VII, 141–146. |
| | (32) Hamaker, J.W. (1976). The application of mathematical modelling to the soil persistence and accumulation of pesticides. Proc. BCPC Symposium: Persistence of Insecticides and Herbicides, 181–199. |
| | (33) Goring, C.A.I., Laskowski, D.A., Hamaker, J.W., Meikle, R.W. (1975). Principles of pesticide razgradnja in soil. In "Environmental Dynamics of Pesticides". R. Haque and V.H. Freed, Eds., 135–172. |
| | (34) Timme, G., Frehse, H., Laska, V. (1986). Statistical interpretation and graphic representation of the razgradnjaal behaviour of pesticide residues. II. Pflanzenschutz – Nachrichten Bayer 39, 188–204. |
| | (35) Timme, G., Frehse, H. (1980). Statistical interpretation and graphic representation of the razgradnjaal behaviour of pesticide residues. I. Pflanzenschutz – Nachrichten Bayer 33, 47–60. |
| | (36) Gustafson D.I., Holden L.R. (1990). Non-linear pesticide dissipation in soil; a new model based on spatial variability. Environm. Sci. Technol. 24, 1032–1041. |
| | (37) Hurle K., Walker A. (1980). Persistence and its prediction. In Interactions between Herbicides and the Soil (R.J. Hance, Ed.), Academic Press, 83–122. |
| | PRILOGA I |
| | PRITISK VODE, POLJSKA KAPACITETA TAL ZA VODO (FC) IN ZMOGLJIVOST ZADRŽEVANJA VODE (WHC) [1] |
| | Višina vodne kolone [cm] | pF [2] | bar [3] | Pripombe | |
| | 107 | 7 | 104 | suha tla | |
| | 1,6·104 | 4,2 | 16 | točka izsušenosti | |
| | 104 | 4 | 10 | |
| | 103 | 3 | 1 | |
| | 6·102 | 2,8 | 0,6 | |
| | 3,3·102 | 2,5 | 0,33 [4] | razpon poljske kapacitete tal za vodo [5] WHC (približek) tla nasičena z vodo | |
| | 102 | 2 | 0,1 | |
| | 60 | 1,8 | 0,06 | |
| | 33 | 1,5 | 0,033 | |
| | 10 | 1 | 0,01 | |
| | 1 | 0 | 0,001 | |
| | Pritisk vode se meri v cm vodne kolone ali v barih. Zaradi velikega razpona vleka je pritisk izražen preprosto kot vrednost pF, ki je enaka logaritmu cm vodne kolone. |
| | Poljska kapaciteta tal za vodo je opredeljena kot količina vode glede na maso, ki jo lahko naravna tla shranijo 2 dni po dolgem deževnem obdobju ali po zadostnem namakanju. Določi se v neoviranih tleh in situ na terenu. Merjenje se zato ne uporablja na oviranih laboratorijskih vzorcih tal. Vrednosti poljske kapacitete tal za vodo, določene v oviranih tleh lahko kažejo velika sistematična odstopanja. |
| | Zmogljivost zadrževanja vode (WHC) je opredeljena v laboratoriju z neoviranimi in oviranimi tlemi z nasičenjem talne kolone z vodo s kapilarnim prenosom. Posebno uporabna je pri oviranih tleh in je lahko do 30 % večja kakor poljska kapaciteta tal za vodo (1). Eksperimentalno jo je tudi lažje določiti kakor zanesljive vrednosti poljske kapacitete. |
| | PRILOGA 2 |
| | VSEBNOST VLAGE V TLEH (g vode na 100 g suhih tal) V RAZLIČNIH VRSTAH TAL V RAZLIČNIH DRŽAVAH |
| | Vrsta tal | Država | Vsebnost vlage v tleh pri | |
| | | | WHC [1] | pF = 1,8 | pF = 2,5 | |
| | Pesek | Nemčija | 28,7 | 8,8 | 3,9 | |
| | Ilovnati pesek | Nemčija | 50,4 | 17,9 | 12,1 | |
| | Ilovnati pesek | Švica | 44,0 | 35,3 | 9,2 | |
| | Muljasta ilovica | Švica | 72,8 | 56,6 | 28,4 | |
| | Glinasta ilovica | Brazilija | 69,7 | 38,4 | 27,3 | |
| | Glinasta ilovica | Japonska | 74,4 | 57,8 | 31,4 | |
| | Peščena ilovica | Japonska | 82,4 | 59,2 | 36,0 | |
| | Muljasta ilovica | ZDA | 47,2 | 33,2 | 18,8 | |
| | Peščena ilovica | ZDA | 40,4 | 25,2 | 13,3 | |
| | PRILOGA 3 |
| | 1: | igelni ventil | |
| | 2: | plinska jeklenka, ki vsebuje vodo | |
| | 3: | ultramembrana (le za sterilne razmere), velikost por 0,2 µm | |
| | 4: | bučka za presnovo tal (prelita z vodo le pri anaerobnih in namakalnih razmerah) | |
| | 5: | lovilnik z etilen glikolom za organske hlapne spojine | |
| | 6: | lovilnik z žveplovo kislino za alkalne hlapne spojine | |
| | 7, 8: | lovilnik z natrijevim hidroksidom za CO2 in druge kisle hlapne snovi | |
| | 9: | merilnik pretoka | |
| | +++++ TIFF +++++ |
| | +++++ TIFF +++++ |
| | (1) Guth, J.A. (1980). The study of transformations. In Interactions between Herbicides and the Soil (R.J. Hance, Ed.), Academic Press, 123–157. |
| | (2) Guth, J.A. (1981). Experimental approaches to studying the fate of pesticides in soil. In Progress in Pesticide Biochemistry. D.H. Hutson, T.R. Roberts, Eds. J. Wiley & Sons. Vol 1, 85–114. |
| | (3) Anderson, J.P.E. (1975). Einfluss von Temperatur und Feuchte auf Verdampfung, Abbau und Festlegung von Diallat im Boden. Z. PflKrankh Pflschutz, Sonderheft VII, 141–146. |
| | C.24 AEROBNA IN ANAEROBNA TRANSFORMACIJA V SISTEMIH VODNIH USEDLIN |
| | 1. METODA |
| | Ta preskusna metoda ustreza metodi OECD TG 308 (2002). |
| | 1.1 UVOD |
| | Kemikalije lahko vstopijo v plitve ali globoke površinske vode po poteh, kot so neposredni vnos, pronicanje pršenja, površinsko odtekanje, drenaža, odlaganje odpadkov, industrijske, domače ali kmetijske odplake in usedline iz zraka. Ta preskusna metoda opisuje laboratorijsko metodo za ocenjevanje aerobne in anaerobne transformacije organskih kemikalij v sistemih vodnih usedlin. Temelji na obstoječih smernicah (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6). Na delavnici OECD o izbiri tal/usedline, ki je bila leta 1995 v Belgiratu v Italiji (7), je bil dosežen dogovor predvsem o številu in vrstah tal za uporabo v tem preskusu. Dana so bila tudi priporočila v zvezi z odvzemanjem, obravnavanjem in shranjevanjem vzorcev usedlin, ki temeljijo na napotkih ISO (8). Take študije so potrebne za kemikalije, ki se vnašajo neposredno v vodo ali za katere je verjetno, da bodo prišle v vodno okolje po zgoraj opisanih poteh. |
| | Razmere v naravnih sistemih vodnih usedlin so v zgornji vodni fazi pogosto aerobne. Površinska plast usedline je lahko bodisi aerobna ali anaerobna, globlje usedline pa so navadno anaerobne. Da bi zajeli vse te možnosti, so v tem dokumentu opisani tako aerobni kot anaerobni preskusi. Aerobni preskus simulira aerobno vodno kolono nad plastjo aerobne usedline, pod katero je anaerobno pobočje. Anaerobni preskus simulira povsem anaerobni sistem vode in usedline. Če okoliščine kažejo, da je treba znatno odstopati od teh priporočil, na primer z uporabo nedotaknjenih jeder usedlin ali usedlin, ki so bile morda izpostavljene preskusni snovi, so v ta namen na volji druge metode (9). |
| | 1.2 OPREDELITVE POJMOV |
| | V vsakem primeru se uporabljajo standardne mednarodne enote (SI). |
| | Preskusna snov: katera koli snov, bodisi osnovna ali ustrezni produkti transformacije. |
| | Produkti transformacije: vse snovi, ki so posledica biotskih in abiotskih transformacijskih reakcij preskusne snovi, vključno s CO2 in vezanimi ostanki. |
| | Vezani ostanki:"vezani ostanki" predstavljajo spojine v tleh, rastlinske ali živalske, ki vztrajajo v matrici v obliki osnovne snovi ali njenega metabolita ali njenih metabolitov/produktov po ekstrakciji. Ekstrakcijska metoda ne sme bistveno spremeniti samih spojin ali strukture matrice. Narava vezi se lahko delno pojasni z ekstrakcijskimi metodami, ki spreminjajo matrico, in z visoko razvitimi analitskimi tehnikami. Do sedaj so bile, na primer, na ta način odkrite kovalentne ionske in sorptivne vezi. Na splošno nastajanje vezanih ostankov znatno zmanjša biološko dostopnost in biološko razpoložljivost (10) [prikrojeno po IUPAC-u (11)]. |
| | Aerobna transformacija (oksidacija): reakcije, ki se pojavljajo v navzočnosti molekularnega kisika (12). |
| | Anaerobna transformacija (redukcija): reakcije, ki se pojavljajo v odsotnosti molekularnega kisika (12). |
| | Naravne vode: so površinske vode, dobljene iz ribnikov, rek, potokov itd. |
| | Usedlina: je mešanica mineralnih in organskih kemičnih sestavin, slednje vsebujejo spojine z visoko vsebnostjo ogljika in dušika in z veliko molsko maso. Odlaga jo naravna voda in tvori povezavo z vodo. |
| | Mineralizacija: je popolna razgradnja organske spojine v CO2, H2O v aerobnih razmerah in CH4, CO2 in H2O v anaerobnih razmerah. V smislu te preskusne metode, kjer se uporablja spojina z radioaktivno oznako, mineralizacija pomeni obsežno razgradnjo molekule, v kateri se označeni ogljikov atom oksidira ali količinsko reducira s sproščanjem ustrezne količine 14CO2 oziroma 14CH4. |
| | Razpolovna doba t0,5 je čas, potreben za 50 %-no transformacijo preskusne snovi, kadar lahko transformacijo opišemo kot kinetiko prvega reda; razpolovna doba ni odvisna od začetne koncentracije. |
| | Čas razgradnje DT50: je čas, v katerem se začetna koncentracija preskusne snovi zmanjša za 50 %. |
| | Čas razgradnje DT75: je čas, v katerem se začetna koncentracija preskusne snovi zmanjša za 75 %. |
| | Čas razgradnje DT90: je čas, v katerem se začetna koncentracija preskusne snovi zmanjša za 90 %. |
| | 1.3 REFERENČNE SNOVI |
| | Referenčne snovi se uporabljajo za določitev in količinsko opredelitev produktov transformacije s spektroskopsko in kromatografsko metodo. |
| | 1.4 PODATKI O PRESKUSNI SNOVI |
| | Za merjenje stopnje transformacije se lahko uporabi neoznačena ali izotopno označena preskusna snov, čeprav se priporoča označeni material. Označeni material je potreben za preučevanje poti transformacije in za vzpostavitev masne bilance. Priporoča se oznaka 14C, vendar je lahko koristna tudi uporaba drugih izotopov, na primer 13C, 15N, 3H, 32P. Če je to mogoče, naj se oznaka namesti na najstabilnejši del(e) molekule [8]. Kemijska in/ali radiokemijska čistost preskusne snovi naj bo vsaj 95 %. |
| | Pred izvajanjem preskusa morajo biti na voljo naslednje informacije o preskusni snovi: |
| | (a) topnost v vodi (metoda A.6); |
| | (b) topnost v organskih topilih; |
| | (c) tlak pare (metoda A.4) in Henryjeva konstanta; |
| | (d) porazdelitveni koeficient n-oktanol/voda (metoda A.8); |
| | (e) adsorpcijski koeficient (Kd, Kf ali Koc, kjer je primerno) (metoda C.18); |
| | (f) hidroliza (metoda C.7); |
| | (g) disociacijska konstanta (pKa) [Smernica OECD 112] (13); |
| | (h) kemijska struktura preskusne snovi in po potrebi položaj oznak(e) izotopa. |
| | Opomba: |
| | Poročati je treba o temperaturi, pri kateri so bile opravljene te meritve. |
| | Druge uporabne informacije lahko vključujejo podatke o toksičnosti preskusne snovi za talne mikroorganizme, podatke o lahki in/ali inherentni biorazgradljivosti in podatke o aerobni in anaerobni transformaciji v tleh. |
| | Na voljo morajo biti analitske metode (vključno z metodami ekstrakcije in očiščenja) za določitev in količinsko opredelitev preskusne snovi in njenih produktov transformacije v vodi in usedlini (glej oddelek 1.7.2). |
| | 1.5 PRINCIP PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | Metoda, opisana v tem preskusu, uporablja sistem aerobnih in anaerobnih vodnih usedlin (glej Prilogo 1), ki omogoča: |
| | (i) merjenje stopnje transformacije preskusne snovi v sistemu vode in usedline; |
| | (ii) merjenje stopnje transformacije preskusne snovi v usedlini; |
| | (iii) merjenje stopnje mineralizacije preskusne snovi in/ali njenih produktov transformacije (če se uporablja preskusna snov z oznako 14C); |
| | (iv) določitev in količinsko opredelitev produktov transformacije v vodni fazi in fazi usedline, vključno z masno bilanco (če se uporablja označena preskusna snov); |
| | (v) merjenje porazdelitve preskusne snovi in njenih produktov transformacije med dve fazi v času inkubacije v temi (na primer, da bi se izognili cvetenju alg) pri stalni temperaturi. Razpolovne dobe in vrednosti DT50, DT75 in DT90 se določijo, kadar so podatki zanesljivi, vendar se ne smejo ekstrapolirati še dolgo po koncu poskusnega obdobja (glej oddelek 1.2). |
| | Tako za aerobne kot za anaerobne študije sta potrebni najmanj dve usedlini in z njimi povezana voda (7). Seveda pa lahko obstajajo primeri, ko je treba uporabiti več kakor dve vodni usedlini, na primer, pri kemikaliji, ki je lahko navzoča v sveži vodi in/ali morskem okolju. |
| | 1.6 UPORABNOST PRESKUSA |
| | Metoda se navadno uporablja za kemične snovi (brez oznake ali z radioaktivno oznako), za katere je na voljo dovolj natančna in občutljiva analitska metoda. Uporablja se za rahlo hlapne, nehlapne, vodotopne ali v vodi slabo topne spojine. Preskus naj se ne uporablja za kemikalije v vodi, ki so lahko hlapne (npr. fumiganti, organska topila) in se tako ne morejo zadrževati v vodi in/ali usedlini za poskusne pogoje tega preskusa. |
| | Metoda se je do zdaj uporabljala za študije transformacije kemikalij v sveži vodi in usedlinah, vendar bi se načeloma lahko uporabljala tudi za morske rokave in priobalne sisteme. Ni pa primerna za simuliranje razmer v tekoči vodi (npr. rekah) ali na odprtem morju. |
| | 1.7 MERILA KAKOVOSTI |
| | 1.7.1 Izkoristek |
| | Ekstrakcija in analiza najmanj dvojnih vzorcev vode in usedline takoj po dodajanju preskusne snovi da prvi prikaz ponovljivosti analitske metode in izenačenosti postopka uporabe za preskusno snov. Izkoristki poznejših stopenj poskusov so podani z ustreznimi masnimi bilancami (kadar se uporabi označeni material). Izkoristki so v razponu od 90 % do 110 % pri označenih kemikalijah (6) in od 70 % do 110 % pri neoznačenih kemikalijah. |
| | 1.7.2 Ponovljivost in občutljivost analitske metode |
| | Ponovljivost analitske metode (brez začetne učinkovitosti ekstrakcije) za količinsko določitev preskusne snovi in proizvodov transformacije se lahko preveri z dvojno analizo istega ekstrakta vode ali vzorcev usedline, ki so bili inkubirani dovolj dolgo, da nastajajo proizvodi transformacije. |
| | Meja detekcije analitske metode za preskusno snov in za proizvode transformacije mora biti najmanj 0,01 mg·kg−1 vode ali usedline (kot preskusne snovi) ali 1 % začetne količine, uporabljene v preskusnem sistemu, kar je manj. Opredeliti je treba tudi mejo količinske opredelitve. |
| | 1.7.3 Točnost podatkov transformacije |
| | Regresijska analiza koncentracij preskusne snovi v funkciji časa daje ustrezne informacije o točnosti krivulje transformacije in omogoča izračun intervala zaupanja za razpolovne dobe (če se uporablja psevdo kinetika prvega reda) ali vrednosti DT50 in, če je primerno, vrednosti DT75 in DT90. |
| | 1.8 OPIS PRESKUSNE METODE |
| | 1.8.1 Preskusni sistem in naprave |
| | Študijo je treba opraviti v steklenih posodah (npr. steklenicah, epruvetah za centrifugiranje), razen če predhodne informacije (na primer porazdelitveni koeficient n-oktanol/voda, sorpcijski podatki itd.) kažejo, da se lahko preskusna snov lepi na steklo in je treba v tem primeru razmisliti o drugem materialu (na primer o teflonu). Če je znano, da se preskusna snov oprijema stekla, je ta problem mogoče odpraviti z eno ali več od naslednjih metod: |
| | - določimo maso preskusne snovi in produktov transformacije, ki so se oprijeli stekla, |
| | - zagotovimo, da se na koncu preskusa vsa steklena oprema izpere z raztopino, |
| | - uporabimo formulirane produkte (glej tudi oddelek 1.9.2); |
| | - uporabimo povečano količino pomožnega topila za dodajanje preskusne snovi v sistem; če se uporablja pomožno topilo, naj bo to pomožno topilo, ki ne raztaplja preskusne snovi. |
| | Primera tipičnih preskusnih naprav, to je plinske pretočne naprave in sistema biometričnega tipa, sta prikazana v prilogah 2 in 3 (14). Drugi uporabni inkubacijski sistemi so opisani v sklicu 15. Načrt poskusne naprave mora omogočati izmenjavo zraka ali dušika in zajemanje hlapnih produktov. Mere naprave morajo izpolnjevati zahteve preskusa (glej oddelek 1.9.1). Prezračevanje se lahko zagotovi bodisi z blagim vpihavanjem mehurčkov ali spuščanjem zraka ali dušika preko vodne površine. V slednjem primeru je priporočljivo rahlo mešanje vode od zgoraj zaradi boljše porazdelitve kisika ali dušika v vodi. Zrak brez CO>2 se ne sme uporabljati, ker lahko povzroči povečanje pH vode. V obeh primerih je nezaželeno motenje usedline in se je treba temu čim bolj izogibati. Rahlo hlapne kemikalije je treba preskusiti v sistemu biometričnega tipa z blagim mešanjem vodne površine. Lahko se uporabljajo tudi zaprte posode z volumnom nad vzorcem bodisi z atmosferskim zrakom ali dušikom in notranjimi stekleničkami za zajemanje hlapnih produktov (16). Pri aerobnem preskusu je potrebna redna izmenjava plina v volumnu nad vzorcem, da se nadomesti kisik, ki ga porabi biomasa. |
| | Primerni lovilniki za zbiranje hlapnih produktov transformacije med drugim zajemajo 1 mol·dm−3 raztopine kalijevega hidroksida ali natrijevega hidroksida za ogljikov dioksid [9] in etilen glikol, etanolamin ali 2 % parafin v ksilenu za organske spojine. Hlapne snovi, ki nastanejo v anaerobnih razmerah, kot na primer metan, se lahko zberejo recimo z molekulskimi siti. Take hlapne snovi se lahko sežgejo, na primer v CO>2, tako da se plin spusti skozi kremenovo epruveto, napolnjeno s CuO, pri temperaturi 900 °C in se nastali CO>2 zajame v absorpcijsko posodo z alkalijskimi snovmi (17). |
| | Potrebni so laboratorijski instrumenti za kemijsko analizo preskusne snovi in produktov transformacije (npr. plinsko tekočinsko kromatografijo (GLC), tekočinsko kromatografijo visoke ločljivosti (HPLC), tankoplastno kromatografijo (TLC), masno spektroskopijo (MS), plinsko kromatografijo-masno spektroskopijo (GC-MS), tekočinsko kromatografijo-masno spektroskopijo (LC-MS), jedrsko magnetno resonanco (NMR) itd.), vključno s sistemi detekcije radioaktivno označenih ali neoznačenih kemikalij, kot je primerno. Kadar se uporablja radioaktivno označeni material, sta potrebna tudi tekočinski scintilacijski števec in oksidacijsko sredstvo za izgorevanje (za sežig vzorcev usedline pred analizo radioaktivnosti). |
| | Po potrebi se zahteva še druga standardna laboratorijska oprema za fizikalno-kemijske in biološke določitve (glej oddelek tabele 1, oddelek 1.8.2.2), steklena posoda, kemikalije in reagenti. |
| | 1.8.2 Izbira in število vodnih usedlin |
| | Mesta vzorčenja je treba izbrati v skladu z namenom preskusa v dani situaciji. Pri izbiranju mesta vzorčenja je treba upoštevati preteklost morebitnih kmetijskih, industrijskih ali domačih vnosov v zajetje in vode v zgornjem toku. Usedline se ne smejo uporabiti, če so bile v predhodnih 4 letih kontaminirane s preskusno snovjo ali analognimi strukturami. |
| | 1.8.2.1 Izbira usedine |
| | Za aerobne študije se navadno uporabita dve usedlini (7). Izbrani usedlini se morata razlikovati glede vsebnosti organskega ogljika in teksture. Ena usedlina naj ima visoko vsebnost organskega ogljika (2,5–7,5 %) in fino teksturo, druga usedlina naj ima nizko vsebnost organskega ogljika (0,5–2,5 %) in grobo teksturo. Razlika med vsebnostjo organskega ogljika naj bo normalno vsaj 2 %. "Fina tekstura" je opredeljena kot vsebnost [gline + mulja] [10] > 50 % in "groba tekstura" je opredeljena kot vsebnost [gline + mulja] < 50 %. Razlika v vsebnosti [gline + mulja] obeh usedlin naj bo normalno vsaj 20 %. V primerih, ko lahko pride kemikalija tudi v morsko vodo, naj bo vsaj en sistem vode in usedline morskega izvora. |
| | Pri povsem anaerobnih študijah, je treba vzorce za dve usedlini (vključno z njunimi povezanimi vodami) vzeti iz anaerobnih con teles površinskih vod (7). Z obema fazama, fazo usedline in vodno fazo, je treba ravnati previdno in ju prenesti brez navzočnosti kisika. |
| | Pri izbiri usedlin so lahko pomembni še drugi parametri in jih je treba upoštevati za vsak primer posebej. Na primer razpon pH usedlin bi bil pomemben za preskušanje kemikalij, pri katerih je transformacija in/ali sorpcija lahko odvisna od pH. Odvisnost sorpcije od pH se lahko odraža v pKa preskusne snovi. |
| | 1.8.2.2 Opis značilnosti vzorcev vode in usedline |
| | Ključni parametri, ki se morajo izmeriti in je treba o njih poročati (s sklicevanjem na uporabljeno metodo) tako za vodo kot usedlino, in stopnja preskusa, pri kateri je treba te parametre določiti, so povzeti v tukajšnji tabeli. Metode za določanje teh parametrov so v vednost podane v sklicih (18) (19) (20) (21). |
| | Poleg tega utegne biti glede na posamezen primer potrebno izmeriti in poročati o drugih parametrih (npr. za svežo vodo: o delcih, alkalnosti, trdoti, prevodnosti, NO3/PO4 (razmerje in posamezne vrednosti); za usedline: o kationski izmenjalni kapaciteti, zmogljivosti zadrževanja vode, karbonatu, skupnem dušiku in fosforju in za morske sisteme: o slanosti). Analiza nitrata, sulfata, biološko razpoložljivega železa in drugih možnih sprejemnikov elektronov v usedlinah in vodah je lahko koristna tudi pri ocenjevanju redoks pogojev, zlasti v zvezi z anaerobno transformacijo. |
| | Meritve parametrov za opredelitev vzorcev vode in usedline (7) (22) (23) |
| | Parameter | Stopnja preskusnega postopka | |
| | Terensko vzorčenje | Poznejše ravnanje | Začetek prilagoditve | Začetek preskusa | Med preskusom | Konec preskusa | |
| | Voda |
| | Izvor/vir | × | | | | | | |
| | Temperatura | × | | | | | | |
| | PH | × | | × | × | × | × | |
| | Skupni organski ogljik | | | × | × | | × | |
| | Koncentracija O2 [11] | × | | × | × | × | × | |
| | Redoks potencial [11] | | | × | × | × | × | |
| | Usedlina |
| | Izvor/vir | × | | | | | | |
| | Globina plasti | × | | | | | | |
| | PH | | × | × | × | × | × | |
| | Porazdelitev velikosti delcev | | × | | | | | |
| | Skupni organski ogljik | | × | × | × | | × | |
| | Mikrobna biomasa [12] | | × | | × | | × | |
| | Redoks potencial [11] | Opazovanje (barva/vonj) | | × | × | × | × | |
| | 1.8.3 Odvzemanje, obravnavanje in shranjevanje |
| | 1.8.3.1 Odvzemanje |
| | Pri vzorčenju usedlin je treba upoštevati osnutek smernice ISO o vzorčenju usedlin z dna (8). Vzorce usedlin je treba jemati s celotnih 5 do 10 cm zgornje plasti usedline. Z usedlino povezano vodo je treba odvzeti z istega mesta ali lokacije in v istem času kakor usedlino. Pri anaerobnih študijah je treba usedline in z njimi povezano vodo vzorčiti in prevažati brez navzočnosti kisika (28) (glej oddelek 1.8.2.1). Nekaj pripomočkov za vzorčenje je opisanih v literaturi (8) (23). |
| | 1.8.3.2 Ravnanje |
| | Usedlina se loči od vode s filtriranjem in se mokro preseje skozi 2 mm sito z uporabo odvečne vode z lokacije, ki se nato zavrže. Nato se znane količine usedlin in vode zmešajo v želenem razmerju (glej oddelek 1.9.1) v inkubacijskih bučkah in pripravijo za prilagoditveno obdobje (glej oddelek 1.8.4). Pri anaerobnih študijah je treba vse stopnje ravnanja opraviti brez navzočnosti kisika (29) (30) (31) (32) (33). |
| | 1.8.3.3 Shranjevanje |
| | Močno se priporoča uporaba sveže odvzetih vzorcev usedlin in vode, če pa je nujno shranjevanje, je treba usedlino in vodo presejati, kakor je opisano zgoraj, in shraniti skupaj, namočeno v vodi (6–10 cm plast vode) v temi pri 4 ± 2 °C [13] za največ 4 tedne (7) (8) (23). Vzorce, ki se uporabijo za aerobne študije, je treba shraniti s prostim dostopom do zraka (npr. v odprtih posodah), tiste za anaerobne študije pa brez navzočnosti kisika. Med prevozom in shranjevanjem ne sme priti do zamrznitve usedlin in vode in izsuševanja usedline. |
| | 1.8.4 Priprava vzorcev usedline/vode za preskus |
| | Obdobje prilagoditve naj poteka pred dodajanjem preskusne snovi, vsak vzorec usedline/vode se položi v inkubacijsko posodo za uporabo pri glavnem preskusu, prilagoditev pa naj se izvaja v povsem enakih razmerah kakor preskusna inkubacija (glej oddelek 1.9.1). Prilagoditveno obdobje je čas, potreben, da se doseže razumna stabilnost sistema, kot jo odražajo pH, koncentracija kisika v vodi, redoks potencial usedline in vode in makroskopska ločitev faz. Obdobje prilagoditve naj normalno traja od enega tedna do dveh tednov in ne sme presegati štirih tednov. Poročati je treba o rezultatih določitev, ki se izvedejo v tem obdobju. |
| | 1.9 IZVEDBA PRESKUSA |
| | 1.9.1 Preskusni pogoji |
| | Preskus je treba izvesti v inkubacijski napravi (glej oddelek 1.8.1) z vodno usedlino v volumenskem razmerju med 3: 1 in 4: 1 in plastjo usedline 2,5 cm (± 0,5 cm) (4). Priporočena najmanjša količina na inkubacijsko posodo je 50 g usedline (na osnovi suhe teže). |
| | Preskus je treba opraviti v temi pri stalni temperaturi v razponu od 10 do 30 °C. Primerna je temperatura (20 ± 2) °C. Po potrebi se lahko v posameznih primerih, odvisno od informacij, ki se zahtevajo od preskusa, razmisli o dodatni nižji temperaturi (npr. 10 °C). Inkubacijsko temperaturo je treba spremljati in o njej poročati. |
| | 1.9.2 Ravnanje s preskusno snovjo in njena uporaba |
| | Uporabi se ena preskusna koncentracija kemikalije [14]. Pri kemikalijah za zaščito pridelka, ki se vnašajo neposredno v vodna telesa, se največji odmerek na nalepki jemlje kot največja stopnja aplikacije, računano na osnovi površinskega območja vode v preskusni posodi. V vseh drugih primerih naj se uporabijo koncentracije, ki temeljijo na napovedih iz emisij v okolje. Treba je paziti, da se zagotovi vnos zadostne koncentracije preskusne snovi za opredelitev poti transformacije ter nastajanje in zmanjševanje produktov transformacije. V primerih, ko so koncentracije preskusne snovi blizu mejam detekcije na začetku študije in/ali kadar glavni produkti transformacije niso zlahka zaznavni ob navzočnosti 10 % stopnje aplikacije preskusne snovi, je morda treba uporabiti večje odmerke (npr. 10-krat). A če se uporabijo višje preskusne koncentracije, ne smejo imeti opaznega škodljivega učinka na mikrobno dejavnost sistema vode in usedline. Da bi dosegli stalno koncentracijo preskusne snovi v posodah različnih velikosti, je morda primerno razmisliti o prilagoditvi količine uporabljenega materiala na podlagi globine vodne kolone v posodi glede na globino vode na terenu (za katero se predvideva, da je 100 cm, vendar se lahko uporabijo druge globine). Glej Prilogo 4 za primer izračuna. |
| | V idealnem primeru se preskusna snov uporabi kot vodna raztopina v vodni fazi preskusnega sistema. Če se temu ne da izogniti, je dovoljena uporaba manjših količin topil, ki se mešajo z vodo (npr. aceton, etanol), za nanos in porazdelitev preskusne snovi, vendar ne sme presegati 1 % v/v in ne sme imeti škodljivih učinkov na mikrobno dejavnost preskusnega sistema. Pri izdelavi vodne raztopine preskusne snovi je potrebna pazljivost, za zagotavljanje popolne homogenosti je morda primerna uporaba generatorskih kolon in predhodno mešanje. Po dodajanju vodne raztopine v preskusni sistem se priporoča nežno mešanje vodne faze, tako da se čim manj moti usedlina. |
| | Ne priporoča se rutinska uporaba formuliranih pripravkov, ker lahko formulirane sestavine škodujejo porazdelitvi preskusne snovi in/ali produktov transformacije med vodno fazo in fazo usedline. Vendar je lahko uporaba formuliranega materiala ustrezna rešitev pri slabo topnih preskusnih snoveh. |
| | Število inkubacijskih posod je odvisno od števila vzorčenj (glej oddelek 1.9.3). Treba je vključiti zadostno število preskusnih sistemov, tako da se lahko pri vsakem vzorčenju žrtvujeta dva sistema. Če se pri vsaki vodni usedlini uporabijo kontrolne enote, se ne smejo tretirati s preskusno snovjo. Kontrolne enote se lahko uporabljajo za določanje mikrobne biomase usedline in skupnega organskega ogljika v vodi in usedlini na koncu študije. Dve kontrolni enoti (to je po ena kontrolna enota iz vsake vodne usedline) se lahko uporabi za spremljanje potrebnih parametrov v usedlini in vodi med prilagoditvenim obdobjem (glej tabelo v oddelku 1.8.2.2). Dve dodatni kontrolni enoti je treba vključiti v primeru, če se preskusna snov nanese s pomočjo topila, da se izmeri škodljive učinke na mikrobno dejavnost preskusnega sistema. |
| | 1.9.3 Trajanje preskusa in vzorčenje |
| | Trajanje poskusa normalno ne presega 100 dni (6) in naj se nadaljuje, dokler se ne vzpostavijo pot razgradnje in vzorec razporeditve vode/usedline ali dokler se 90 % preskusne snovi ne porabi s transformacijo in/ali izhlapevanjem. Število vzorčenj naj bo vsaj šest (vključno z ničelnim), z neobvezno predhodno študijo (glej oddelek 1.9.4), ki se uporabi za vzpostavitev ustreznega režima vzorčenja in trajanja preskusa, razen če je iz prejšnjih študij na voljo dovolj podatkov o preskusni snovi. Za hidrofobne preskusne snovi so lahko v začetnem obdobju študije potrebne dodatne točke vzorčenja zaradi določitve stopnje razporeditve med vodno fazo in fazo usedline. |
| | Po ustreznem številu vzorčenj se vse inkubacijske posode (v ponovitvah) odstranijo za analizo. Usedlina in nad njo ležeča voda se analizirata posebej [15]. Površinska voda se previdno odstrani s čim manjšim motenjem usedline. Pri ekstrakciji in opredelitvi preskusne snovi in produktov transformacije je treba upoštevati ustrezne analitske postopke. Paziti je treba, da se odstrani material, ki se je morda adsorbiral na inkubacijsko posodo ali na povezovalne cevi, ki se uporabljajo za zajemanje hlapnih snovi. |
| | 1.9.4 Neobvezni predhodni preskus |
| | Če se trajanje in režim vzorčenja ne moreta oceniti po drugih ustreznih študijah preskusne snovi, je lahko primeren neobvezni predhodni preskus, ki ga je treba izvesti z uporabo enakih preskusnih razmer, kakor so predlagane za dejansko študijo. O ustreznih poskusnih razmerah in rezultatih predhodnega preskusa, če se izvede, je treba na kratko poročati. |
| | 1.9.5 Meritve in analiza |
| | Koncentracijo preskusne snovi in produktov transformacije je treba pri vsaki ponovitvi vzorčenja izmeriti in o njej poročati (o koncentraciji in o uporabljenem odstotku). Na splošno je treba ugotoviti produkte transformacije, ki se pri katerem koli vzorčenju zaznajo pri ≥ 10 % uporabljene radioaktivnosti v skupnem sistemu voda-usedlina, razen če ni upravičeno utemeljeno drugače. Tudi produkte transformacije, pri katerih se koncentracije med študijo nenehno povečujejo, je treba upoštevati pri ugotavljanju, tudi če njihove koncentracije ne presegajo zgornjih omejitev, ker lahko označujejo obstojnost. Slednje je treba upoštevati glede na vsak primer posebej in v poročilu podati utemeljitev. |
| | O rezultatih iz sistemov zajemanja plinov/hlapnih snovi (CO2 in drugih, to je hlapnih organskih spojin) je treba poročati za vsako ponovitev vzorčenja. Poročati je treba o stopnjah mineralizacije. O neizločljivih (vezanih) ostankih v usedlini je treba poročati za vsako točko vzorčenja. |
| | 2. PODATKI |
| | 2.1 OBDELAVA REZULTATOV |
| | Skupno masno bilanco ali izkoristek (glej oddelek 1.7.1) dodane radioaktivnosti je treba izračunati za vsako ponovitev vzorčenja. O rezultatih se poroča v obliki odstotka dodane radioaktivnosti. O porazdelitvi radioaktivnosti med vodo in usedlino se poroča v obliki koncentracij in odstotkov za vsako ponovitev vzorčenja. |
| | Razpolovna doba, DT50 in po potrebi DT75 in DT90 preskusne snovi se izračunajo skupaj z njihovim intervalom zaupanja (glej oddelek 1.7.3). Informacije o stopnji razpršitve preskusne snovi v vodi in usedlini se lahko dobijo z uporabo ustreznih ocenjevalnih orodij. Te so lahko vse od uporabe psevdo kinetike prvega reda, empiričnih tehnik prilagajanja krivulje, pri katerih se uporabljajo grafične ali številčne rešitve do bolj zapletenega ocenjevanja, na primer z uporabo eno- ali večprekatnih modelov. Nadaljnji podatki so na voljo v ustrezni objavljeni literaturi (35) (36) (37). |
| | Vsi pristopi imajo svoje prednosti in slabosti in se znatno razlikujejo po sestavljenosti. Predpostavka kinetike prvega reda je lahko prevelika poenostavitev procesov razgradnje in porazdelitve, a kadar je mogoče, daje pojem (stopnjo konstante ali razpolovno dobo), ki je lahko razumljiv in ima vrednost pri simulacijskem modeliranju in izračunavanju predvidenih okoljskih koncentracij. Empirčni pristopi ali linearne transformacije se lahko bolje ujemajo s krivuljami podatkov in zato omogočajo boljše ocene razpolovnih dob, vrednosti DT50 in po potrebi DT75 in DT90. Uporaba izpeljanih konstant pa je omejena. Modeli s prekati lahko dajo številne uporabne konstante vrednosti pri ocenjevanju tveganja, ki opisujejo stopnjo razgradnje v različnih prekatih in porazdelitev kemikalije. Uporabljajo se lahko tudi za ocenjevanje stopnje konstant pri oblikovanju in razgradnji glavnih produktov transformacije. V vseh primerih mora biti izbrana metoda utemeljena in mora izvajalec poskusa grafično in/ali statistično prikazati, zakaj je izbira dobra. |
| | 3. POROČANJE |
| | 3.1 POROČILO O PRESKUSU |
| | Poročilo mora vsebovati naslednje informacije: |
| | Preskusna snov: |
| | - splošno ime, kemijsko ime, številko po CAS, strukturno formulo (z navedbo položaja oznak(e), kadar se uporabi radioaktivno označeni material) in ustrezne fizikalno-kemijske lastnosti, |
| | - čistost (nečistoče) preskusne snovi, |
| | - radiokemijsko čistost označene kemikalije in molarno dejavnost (kjer je primerno). |
| | Referenčne snovi: |
| | - kemijsko ime in strukturo referenčnih snovi, uporabljenih za opredelitev in/ali določitev produktov transformacije. |
| | Preskusne usedline in vode: |
| | - lokacijo in opis mest(a) vzorčenja vodnih usedlin, vključno, če je mogoče, s preteklo kontaminacijo; |
| | - vse informacije v zvezi z odvzemanjem, shranjevanjem (če se izvaja) in prilagoditvijo sistemov vode in usedlin; |
| | - značilnosti vzorcev vode in usedlin, ki so naštete v tabeli v oddelku 1.8.2.2. |
| | Preskusni pogoji: |
| | - uporabljeni preskusni sistem (npr. pretočni, biometrični, način prezračevanja, metodo mešanja, količino vode, maso usedline, gostoto obeh plasti, vode in usedline, mere preskusnih posod itd.), |
| | - uporabo preskusne snovi v preskusnem sistemu: uporabljeno preskusno koncentracijo, število ponovitev in način uporabe kontrol preskusne snovi (npr. morebitno uporabo topila) itd., |
| | - inkubacijsko temperaturo, |
| | - število vzorčenj, |
| | - metode ekstrakcije in učinkovitost, pa tudi analitske metode in meje detekcije, |
| | - metode opredelitve/določitve produktov transformacije, |
| | - odstopanja od preskusnega protokola ali preskusnih razmer med študijo. |
| | Rezultati: |
| | - vrednosti surovih podatkov reprezentativnih analiz (vsi surovi podatki se morajo shraniti v GLP arhivu), |
| | - ponovljivost in občutljivost uporabljenih analitskih metod, |
| | - stopnje izkoristka (vrednosti v % za veljavno študijo so podane v oddelku 1.7.1), |
| | - tabele rezultatov, izražene v % uporabljenega odmerka in v·kg−1 v vodi, usedlini in skupnem sistemu (samo %) za preskusno snov in, če je primerno, za produkte transformacije in neizločljivo radioaktivnost, |
| | - masno bilanco med potekom in na koncu študij, |
| | - grafično predstavitev transformacije v vodi in frakcijah usedlin ter v skupnem sistemu (vključno z mineralizacijo), |
| | - stopnje mineralizacije, |
| | - razpolovno dobo, vrednosti DT50 in po potrebi DT75 in DT90 za preskusno snov in, kadar je primerno, za glavne produkte transformacije, vključno z intervalom zaupanja v vodi, usedlini in skupnem sistemu, |
| | - oceno kinetike transformacije za preskusno snov in, kadar je primerno, za glavne produkte transformacije, |
| | - predlagane poti transformacije, kadar je primerno, |
| | - razpravo o rezultatih. |
| | 4. LITERATURA |
| | (1) BBA-Guidelines for the examination of plant protectors in the registration process. (1990). Part IV, Section 5–1: Degradability and fate of plant protectors in the water/sediment system. Nemčija |
| | (2) Commission for registration of pesticides: Application for registration of a pesticide. (1991). Part G. Behaviour of the product and its metabolites in soil, water and air, Section G.2.1 (a). Nizozemska |
| | (3) MAFF Pesticides Safety Directorate. (1992). Preliminary guideline for the conduct of biodegradability tests on pesticides in natural sediment/water systems. Ref No SC 9046. Združeno kraljestvo. |
| | (4) Agriculture Canada: Environmental chemistry and fate. (1987). Guidelines for registration of pesticides in Canada. Aquatic (Laboratory) – Anaerobic and aerobic. Kanada. pp 35–37. |
| | (5) US-EPA: Pesticide assessment guidelines, Subdivision N. Chemistry: Environmental fate (1982). Section 162-3, Anaerobic aquatic metabolism. |
| | (6) SETAC-Europe publication. (1995). Procedures for assessing the environmental fate and ecotoxicity of pesticides. Ed. Dr Mark R. Lynch. SETAC-Europe, Brussels. |
| | (7) OECD Test Guidelines Programme. (1995). Final Report of the OECD Workshop on Selection of Soils/sediments, Belgirate, Italy, 18–20 January 1995. |
| | (8) ISO/DIS 5667-12. (1994). Water quality – Sampling – Part 12: Guidance on sampling of bottom sediments. |
| | (9) US-EPA (1998a). Sediment/water microcosm biorazgradnja test. Harmonised Test Guidelines (OPPTS 835.3180). EPA 712-C-98-080. |
| | (10) DFG: Pesticide Bound Residues in Soil. Wiley-VCH (1998). |
| | (11) T.R. Roberts: Non-extractable pesticide residues in soils and plants. Pure Appl. Chem. 56, 945–956 (IUPAC 1984). |
| | (12) OECD Test Guideline 304A: Inherent Biodegradability in Soil (adopted 12 May 1981). |
| | (13) OECD (1993): Guidelines for Testing of Chemicals. Paris. OECD (1994–2000): Addenda 6–11 to Guidelines for the Testing of Chemicals. |
| | (14) Scholz, K., Fritz R., Anderson C. and Spiteller M. (1988) Degradation of pesticides in an aquatic model ecosystem. BCPC – Pests and Diseases, 3B–4, 149–158. |
| | (15) Guth, J.A. (1981). Experimental approaches to studying the fate of pesticides in soil. In Progress in Pesticide Biochemistry (D.H. Hutson, T.R. Roberts, Eds.), Vol. 1, 85–114. J. Wiley & Sons. |
| | (16) Madsen, T., Kristensen, P. (1997). Effects of bacterial inoculation and non-ionic surfactants on degradation of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons in soil. Environ. Toxicol. Chem. 16, 631–637. |
| | (17) Steber, J., Wierich, P. (1987). The anaerobic degradation of detergent range fatty alcohol ethoxylates. Studies with 14C-labelled model surfactants. Water Research 21, 661–667. |
| | (18) Black, C.A. (1965). Methods of Soil Analysis. Agronomy Monograph No. 9. American Society of Agronomy, Madison. |
| | (19) APHA (1989). Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater (17th edition). American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association and Water Pollution Control Federation, Washington D.C. |
| | (20) Rowell, D.L. (1994). Soil Science Methods and Applications. Longman. |
| | (21) Light, T.S. (1972). Standard solution for redox potential measurements. Anal. Chemistry 44, 1038–1039. |
| | (22) SETAC-Europe publication (1991). Guidance document on testing procedures for pesticides in freshwater mesocosms. From the Workshop "A Meeting of Experts on Guidelines for Static Field Mesocosms Tests", 3–4 July 1991. |
| | (23) SETAC-Europe publication. (1993). Guidance document on sediment toxicity preskusi and bioassays for freshwater and marine environments. From the Workshop On Sediment Toxicity Assessment (WOSTA), 8–10 November 1993. Eds.: I.R. Hill, P. Matthiessen and F. Heimbach. |
| | (24) Vink, J.P.M., van der Zee, S.E.A.T.M. (1997). Pesticide biotransformation in surface waters: multivariate analyses of environmental factors at field sites. Water Research 31, 2858–2868. |
| | (25) Vink, J.P.M., Schraa, G., van der Zee, S.E.A.T.M. (1999). Nutrient effects on microbial transformation of pesticides in nitrifying waters. Environ. Toxicol, 329–338. |
| | (26) Anderson, T.H., Domsch, K.H. (1985). Maintenance carbon requirements of actively-metabolising microbial populations under in-situ conditions. Soil Biol. Biochem. 17, 197–203. |
| | (27) ISO-14240-2. (1997). Soil quality – Determination of soil microbial biomass – Part 2: Fumigationextraction method. |
| | (28) Beelen, P. Van and F. Van Keulen. (1990), The Kinetics of the Degradation of Chloroform and Benzene in Anaerobic Sediment from the River Rhine. Hydrobiol. Bull. 24 (1), 13–21. |
| | (29) Shelton, D.R. and Tiedje, J.M. (1984). General method for determining anaerobic biodegradation potential. App. Environ. Microbiol. 47, 850–857. |
| | (30) Birch, R.R., Biver, C., Campagna, R., Gledhill, W.E., Pagga, U., Steber, J., Reust, H. and Bontinck, W.J. (1989). Screening of chemicals for anaerobic biodegradation. Chemosphere 19, 1527–1550. |
| | (31) Pagga, U. and Beimborn, D.B. (1993). Anaerobic biodegradation tests for organic compounds. Chemoshpere 27, 1499–1509. |
| | (32) Nuck, B.A. and Federle, T.W. (1986). A batch test for assessing the mineralisation of 14C-radiolabelled compounds under realistic anaerobic conditions. Environ. Sci. Technol. 30, 3597–3603. |
| | (33) US-EPA (1998b). Anaerobic biodegradability of organic chemicals. Harmonised Test Guidelines (OPPTS 835.3400). EPA 712-C-98-090. |
| | (34) Sijm, Haller and Schrap (1997). Influence of storage on sediment characteristics and drying sediment on sorption coefficients of organic contaminants. Bulletin Environ. Contam. Toxicol. 58, 961–968. |
| | (35) Timme, G., Frehse H. and Laska V. (1986) Statistical interpretation and graphic representation of the degradational behaviour of pesticide residues II. Pflanzenschutz – Nachrichten Bayer, 39, 187–203. |
| | (36) Timme, G., Frehse, H. (1980) Statistical interpretation and graphic representation of the degradational behaviour of pesticide residues I. Pflanzenschutz – Nachrichten Bayer, 33, 47–60. |
| | (37) Carlton, R.R. and Allen, R. (1994). The use of a compartment model for evaluating the fate of pesticides in sediment/water systems. Brighton Crop Protection Conference – Pest and Diseases, pp 1349–1354. |
| | [1] Na primer, če preskusna snov vsebuje en obroč, je potrebna oznaka tega obroča; če preskusna snov vsebuje dva ali več obročev, so lahko potrebne študije za ovrednotenje usode vsakega označenega obroča in pridobitev ustreznih informacij o oblikovanju produktov transformacije. |
| | [2] Sposobnost tal glede zadrževanja vode se lahko izmeri kot poljska kapaciteta tal za vodo, kot zmogljivost zadrževanja vode ali kot pritisk črpanja vode (pF). Za razlago glej Prilogo 1. V poročilu o preskusu je treba navesti, ali sta bili sposobnost zadrževanja vode in gostota v razsutem stanju določeni v neoviranih vzorcih zemljišča ali v oviranih (predelanih) vzorcih. |
| | [3] Rezultati novejših raziskav kažejo, da se lahko tudi tla iz zmernih pasov shranijo pri −20 °C za več kakor tri mesece (28) (29) brez večjih izgub mikrobne dejavnosti. |
| | [4] Tla ne smejo biti ne premokra ne presuha, da se ohranja ustrezna prezračenost in prehrana talne mikroflore. Priporočena vsebnost vlage za optimalno mikrobno rast je od 40 do 60 % zmogljivosti zadrževanja vode in od 0,1 do 0,33 barov (6). Slednji razpon je enak razponu pF od 2,0 do 2,5. Tipične vsebnosti vlage različnih vrst tal so podane v Prilogi 2. |
| | [5] Aerobne razmere prevladujejo v površinskih tleh in celo v podpovršinskih tleh, kot je prikazano v raziskovalnem projektu, ki ga je sponzorirala EU [K. Takagi et al. (1992). Microbial diversity and activity in subsoils: Methods, field site, seasonal variation in subsoil temperatures and oxygen contents. Proc. Internat. Symp. Environm. Aspects Pesticides Microbiol., 270–277, 17.–21. avgust 1992, Sigtuna, Švedska]. Anaerobne razmere se lahko samo občasno pojavijo med poplavami tal po hudem deževju ali kadar so vzpostavljene namakalne razmere na riževih poljih. |
| | [6] Aerobne študije se lahko prekinejo precej pred 120 dnevi, pod pogojem, da je do takrat jasno dosežena pot transformacije in dokončna mineralizacija. Prekinitev preskusa je mogoča po 120 dneh ali ko je transformiranih najmanj 90 % preskusne snovi, vendar le, če je oblikovanih najmanj 5 % CO>2. |
| | [7] Izračun začetne koncentracije na področni osnovi z uporabo naslednje enačbe:Ctlamg/kgtla = Akg/ha·106mg/kg1m·104m2/ha·dkgtla/m3Ctla = začetna koncentracija v tleh [mg·kg−1]A = stopnja aplikacije [kg·ha−1]; 1 = gostota plasti tal na polju [m]; d = gostota suhih tal v razsutem stanju [kg·m−3].Praviloma daje stopnja uporabe 1 kg·ha−1 v tleh koncentracijo približno 1 mg·kg−1 v 10-centimetrski plasti (ob predpostavki gostote v razsutem stanju 1 g·cm−3). |
| | [1] Mückenhausen, E. (1975). Die Bodenkunde und ihre geologischen, geomorphologischen, mineralogischen und petrologischen Grundlagen. DLG-Verlag, Frankfurt, Main. |
| | [2] pF = logaritem cm vodne kolone. |
| | [3] 1 bar = 105 Pa. |
| | [4] približno ustreza vsebnosti vode 10 % v pesku, 35 % v ilovici in 45 % v glini. |
| | [5] poljska kapaciteta tal za vodo ni stalna, ampak se spreminja z vrsto tal med pF 1,5 in 2,5. |
| | [1] Zmogljivost zadrževanja vode. |
| | [8] Na primer, če snov vsebuje en obroč, je potrebna oznaka tega obroča; če preskusna snov vsebuje dva ali več obročev, so lahko potrebne študije za ovrednotenje usode vsakega označenega obroča in pridobitev ustreznih informacij o oblikovanju produktov transformacije. |
| | [9] Ker te alkalne absorpcijske raztopine vpijajo tudi ogljikov dioksid iz prezračevalnega zraka in tistega, ki nastaja pri respiraciji v aerobnih poskusih, jih je treba v rednih presledkih zamenjati, da bi se izognili njihovi zasičenosti in s tem izgubi njihove absorpcijske sposobnosti. |
| | [10] [Glina + mulj] je mineralna frakcija usedline z velikostjo delcev < 50 μm. |
| | [11] Rezultati novejših raziskav kažejo, da meritve koncentracij kisika v vodi in redoks potencialov nimajo niti mehanistične niti napovedovalne vrednosti glede rasti in razvoja mikrobnih populacij na površini teh vod (24) (25). Boljša orodja za razlago in vrednotenje stopenj in poti aerobne biotransformacije so lahko določitev potrebe po biokemijskem kisiku (BOD pri terenskem vzorčenju, na začetku in na koncu preskusa) in koncentracij mikro/makro hranilnih snovi Ca, Mg in Mn (na začetku in na koncu preskusa) v vodi in meritve skupnega N in skupnega P v usedlinah (pri terenskem vzorčenju in na koncu preskusa). |
| | [12] Metoda stopnje mikrobne respiracije (26), metoda zaplinjanja (27) ali meritve s štetjem (npr. bakterij, aktinomicet, gliv in skupnih kolonij) pri aerobnih študijah; stopnja metanogeneze pri anaerobnih študijah. |
| | [13] Novejše študije so pokazale, da lahko shranjevanje pri 4 °C vodi v zmanjšanje vsebnosti organskega ogljika v usedlini, kar lahko povzroči tudi zmanjšanje mikrobne dejavnosti (34). |
| | [14] Preskus z drugo koncentracijo je lahko koristen pri kemikalijah, ki pridejo v površinske vode po drugih vstopnih poteh in povzročijo znatno drugačne koncentracije, če se lahko manjša koncentracija dovolj natančno analizira. |
| | [15] V primerih, ko se lahko zlahka pojavi hitra ponovna oksidacija produktov anaerobne transformacije, je treba med vzorčenjem in analizo vzdrževati anaerobne razmere. |
| | -------------------------------------------------- |
